* Copyright (c) 2008-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/auto_explain/auto_explain.c,v 1.13 2010/02/16 22:19:59 adunstan Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/auto_explain/auto_explain.c,v 1.14 2010/02/26 02:00:31 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static bool auto_explain_log_nested_statements = false;
static const struct config_enum_entry format_options[] = {
- {"text", EXPLAIN_FORMAT_TEXT, false},
- {"xml", EXPLAIN_FORMAT_XML, false},
- {"json", EXPLAIN_FORMAT_JSON, false},
- {"yaml", EXPLAIN_FORMAT_YAML, false},
- {NULL, 0, false}
+ {"text", EXPLAIN_FORMAT_TEXT, false},
+ {"xml", EXPLAIN_FORMAT_XML, false},
+ {"json", EXPLAIN_FORMAT_JSON, false},
+ {"yaml", EXPLAIN_FORMAT_YAML, false},
+ {NULL, 0, false}
};
/* Current nesting depth of ExecutorRun calls */
msec = queryDesc->totaltime->total * 1000.0;
if (msec >= auto_explain_log_min_duration)
{
- ExplainState es;
+ ExplainState es;
ExplainInitState(&es);
es.analyze = (queryDesc->instrument_options && auto_explain_log_analyze);
ereport(LOG,
(errmsg("duration: %.3f ms plan:\n%s",
msec, es.str->data),
- errhidestmt(true)));
+ errhidestmt(true)));
pfree(es.str->data);
}
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_cash.c,v 1.10 2009/12/02 13:13:24 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_cash.c,v 1.11 2010/02/26 02:00:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "btree_gist.h"
#include "btree_utils_num.h"
static int
gbt_cashkey_cmp(const void *a, const void *b)
{
- cashKEY *ia = (cashKEY*)(((Nsrt *) a)->t);
- cashKEY *ib = (cashKEY*)(((Nsrt *) b)->t);
+ cashKEY *ia = (cashKEY *) (((Nsrt *) a)->t);
+ cashKEY *ib = (cashKEY *) (((Nsrt *) b)->t);
if (ia->lower == ib->lower)
{
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_date.c,v 1.8 2009/12/02 13:13:24 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_date.c,v 1.9 2010/02/26 02:00:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "btree_gist.h"
#include "btree_utils_num.h"
static int
gbt_datekey_cmp(const void *a, const void *b)
{
- dateKEY *ia = (dateKEY*)(((Nsrt *) a)->t);
- dateKEY *ib = (dateKEY*)(((Nsrt *) b)->t);
- int res;
+ dateKEY *ia = (dateKEY *) (((Nsrt *) a)->t);
+ dateKEY *ib = (dateKEY *) (((Nsrt *) b)->t);
+ int res;
res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(date_cmp, DateADTGetDatum(ia->lower), DateADTGetDatum(ib->lower)));
if (res == 0)
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_float4.c,v 1.9 2009/12/02 13:13:24 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_float4.c,v 1.10 2010/02/26 02:00:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "btree_gist.h"
#include "btree_utils_num.h"
static int
gbt_float4key_cmp(const void *a, const void *b)
{
- float4KEY *ia = (float4KEY*)(((Nsrt *) a)->t);
- float4KEY *ib = (float4KEY*)(((Nsrt *) b)->t);
+ float4KEY *ia = (float4KEY *) (((Nsrt *) a)->t);
+ float4KEY *ib = (float4KEY *) (((Nsrt *) b)->t);
if (ia->lower == ib->lower)
{
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_float8.c,v 1.9 2009/12/02 13:13:24 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_float8.c,v 1.10 2010/02/26 02:00:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "btree_gist.h"
#include "btree_utils_num.h"
static int
gbt_float8key_cmp(const void *a, const void *b)
{
- float8KEY *ia = (float8KEY*)(((Nsrt *) a)->t);
- float8KEY *ib = (float8KEY*)(((Nsrt *) b)->t);
+ float8KEY *ia = (float8KEY *) (((Nsrt *) a)->t);
+ float8KEY *ib = (float8KEY *) (((Nsrt *) b)->t);
if (ia->lower == ib->lower)
{
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_inet.c,v 1.11 2009/12/02 13:13:24 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_inet.c,v 1.12 2010/02/26 02:00:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "btree_gist.h"
#include "btree_utils_num.h"
static int
gbt_inetkey_cmp(const void *a, const void *b)
{
- inetKEY *ia = (inetKEY*)(((Nsrt *) a)->t);
- inetKEY *ib = (inetKEY*)(((Nsrt *) b)->t);
+ inetKEY *ia = (inetKEY *) (((Nsrt *) a)->t);
+ inetKEY *ib = (inetKEY *) (((Nsrt *) b)->t);
if (ia->lower == ib->lower)
{
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int2.c,v 1.9 2009/12/02 13:13:24 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int2.c,v 1.10 2010/02/26 02:00:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "btree_gist.h"
#include "btree_utils_num.h"
static int
gbt_int2key_cmp(const void *a, const void *b)
{
- int16KEY *ia = (int16KEY*)(((Nsrt *) a)->t);
- int16KEY *ib = (int16KEY*)(((Nsrt *) b)->t);
+ int16KEY *ia = (int16KEY *) (((Nsrt *) a)->t);
+ int16KEY *ib = (int16KEY *) (((Nsrt *) b)->t);
if (ia->lower == ib->lower)
{
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int4.c,v 1.9 2009/12/02 13:13:24 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int4.c,v 1.10 2010/02/26 02:00:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "btree_gist.h"
#include "btree_utils_num.h"
static int
gbt_int4key_cmp(const void *a, const void *b)
{
- int32KEY *ia = (int32KEY*)(((Nsrt *) a)->t);
- int32KEY *ib = (int32KEY*)(((Nsrt *) b)->t);
+ int32KEY *ia = (int32KEY *) (((Nsrt *) a)->t);
+ int32KEY *ib = (int32KEY *) (((Nsrt *) b)->t);
if (ia->lower == ib->lower)
{
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int8.c,v 1.9 2009/12/02 13:13:24 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_int8.c,v 1.10 2010/02/26 02:00:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "btree_gist.h"
#include "btree_utils_num.h"
static int
gbt_int8key_cmp(const void *a, const void *b)
{
- int64KEY *ia = (int64KEY*)(((Nsrt *) a)->t);
- int64KEY *ib = (int64KEY*)(((Nsrt *) b)->t);
+ int64KEY *ia = (int64KEY *) (((Nsrt *) a)->t);
+ int64KEY *ib = (int64KEY *) (((Nsrt *) b)->t);
if (ia->lower == ib->lower)
{
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_interval.c,v 1.13 2009/12/02 13:13:24 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_interval.c,v 1.14 2010/02/26 02:00:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "btree_gist.h"
#include "btree_utils_num.h"
static int
gbt_intvkey_cmp(const void *a, const void *b)
{
- intvKEY *ia = (intvKEY*)(((Nsrt *) a)->t);
- intvKEY *ib = (intvKEY*)(((Nsrt *) b)->t);
- int res;
+ intvKEY *ia = (intvKEY *) (((Nsrt *) a)->t);
+ intvKEY *ib = (intvKEY *) (((Nsrt *) b)->t);
+ int res;
res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(interval_cmp, IntervalPGetDatum(&ia->lower), IntervalPGetDatum(&ib->lower)));
if (res == 0)
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_macaddr.c,v 1.9 2009/12/02 13:13:24 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_macaddr.c,v 1.10 2010/02/26 02:00:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "btree_gist.h"
#include "btree_utils_num.h"
static int
gbt_macadkey_cmp(const void *a, const void *b)
{
- macKEY *ia = (macKEY*)(((Nsrt *) a)->t);
- macKEY *ib = (macKEY*)(((Nsrt *) b)->t);
- int res;
+ macKEY *ia = (macKEY *) (((Nsrt *) a)->t);
+ macKEY *ib = (macKEY *) (((Nsrt *) b)->t);
+ int res;
res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(macaddr_cmp, MacaddrPGetDatum(&ia->lower), MacaddrPGetDatum(&ib->lower)));
if (res == 0)
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_oid.c,v 1.9 2009/12/02 13:13:24 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_oid.c,v 1.10 2010/02/26 02:00:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "btree_gist.h"
#include "btree_utils_num.h"
static int
gbt_oidkey_cmp(const void *a, const void *b)
{
- oidKEY *ia = (oidKEY*)(((Nsrt *) a)->t);
- oidKEY *ib = (oidKEY*)(((Nsrt *) b)->t);
+ oidKEY *ia = (oidKEY *) (((Nsrt *) a)->t);
+ oidKEY *ib = (oidKEY *) (((Nsrt *) b)->t);
if (ia->lower == ib->lower)
{
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_time.c,v 1.17 2009/12/02 13:13:24 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_time.c,v 1.18 2010/02/26 02:00:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "btree_gist.h"
#include "btree_utils_num.h"
static int
gbt_timekey_cmp(const void *a, const void *b)
{
- timeKEY *ia = (timeKEY*)(((Nsrt *) a)->t);
- timeKEY *ib = (timeKEY*)(((Nsrt *) b)->t);
- int res;
+ timeKEY *ia = (timeKEY *) (((Nsrt *) a)->t);
+ timeKEY *ib = (timeKEY *) (((Nsrt *) b)->t);
+ int res;
res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(time_cmp, TimeADTGetDatumFast(ia->lower), TimeADTGetDatumFast(ib->lower)));
if (res == 0)
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_ts.c,v 1.18 2009/12/02 13:13:24 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_ts.c,v 1.19 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "btree_gist.h"
#include "btree_utils_num.h"
static int
gbt_tskey_cmp(const void *a, const void *b)
{
- tsKEY *ia = (tsKEY*)(((Nsrt *) a)->t);
- tsKEY *ib = (tsKEY*)(((Nsrt *) b)->t);
- int res;
+ tsKEY *ia = (tsKEY *) (((Nsrt *) a)->t);
+ tsKEY *ib = (tsKEY *) (((Nsrt *) b)->t);
+ int res;
res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(timestamp_cmp, TimestampGetDatumFast(ia->lower), TimestampGetDatumFast(ib->lower)));
if (res == 0)
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_utils_var.c,v 1.22 2009/12/02 13:13:24 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/btree_gist/btree_utils_var.c,v 1.23 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "btree_gist.h"
GBT_VARKEY_R ar = gbt_var_key_readable(((const Vsrt *) a)->t);
GBT_VARKEY_R br = gbt_var_key_readable(((const Vsrt *) b)->t);
const gbtree_vinfo *tinfo = (const gbtree_vinfo *) arg;
- int res;
+ int res;
res = (*tinfo->f_cmp) (ar.lower, br.lower);
if (res == 0)
* Darko Prenosil <Darko.Prenosil@finteh.hr>
* Shridhar Daithankar <shridhar_daithankar@persistent.co.in>
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dblink/dblink.c,v 1.90 2010/02/24 05:20:49 itagaki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dblink/dblink.c,v 1.91 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
* Copyright (c) 2001-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* ALL RIGHTS RESERVED;
*
static void dblink_res_error(const char *conname, PGresult *res, const char *dblink_context_msg, bool fail);
static char *get_connect_string(const char *servername);
static char *escape_param_str(const char *from);
-static int get_nondropped_natts(Oid relid);
+static int get_nondropped_natts(Oid relid);
/* Global */
static remoteConn *pconn = NULL;
Datum
dblink_fetch(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo;
- PGresult *res = NULL;
- char *conname = NULL;
- remoteConn *rconn = NULL;
- PGconn *conn = NULL;
- StringInfoData buf;
- char *curname = NULL;
- int howmany = 0;
- bool fail = true; /* default to backward compatible */
+ ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo;
+ PGresult *res = NULL;
+ char *conname = NULL;
+ remoteConn *rconn = NULL;
+ PGconn *conn = NULL;
+ StringInfoData buf;
+ char *curname = NULL;
+ int howmany = 0;
+ bool fail = true; /* default to backward compatible */
DBLINK_INIT;
/*
* Try to execute the query. Note that since libpq uses malloc, the
- * PGresult will be long-lived even though we are still in a
- * short-lived memory context.
+ * PGresult will be long-lived even though we are still in a short-lived
+ * memory context.
*/
res = PQexec(conn, buf.data);
if (!res ||
static Datum
dblink_record_internal(FunctionCallInfo fcinfo, bool is_async)
{
- ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo;
- char *msg;
- PGresult *res = NULL;
- PGconn *conn = NULL;
- char *connstr = NULL;
- char *sql = NULL;
- char *conname = NULL;
- remoteConn *rconn = NULL;
- bool fail = true; /* default to backward compatible */
- bool freeconn = false;
+ ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo;
+ char *msg;
+ PGresult *res = NULL;
+ PGconn *conn = NULL;
+ char *connstr = NULL;
+ char *sql = NULL;
+ char *conname = NULL;
+ remoteConn *rconn = NULL;
+ bool fail = true; /* default to backward compatible */
+ bool freeconn = false;
/* check to see if caller supports us returning a tuplestore */
if (rsinfo == NULL || !IsA(rsinfo, ReturnSetInfo))
static void
materializeResult(FunctionCallInfo fcinfo, PGresult *res)
{
- ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo;
+ ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo;
Assert(rsinfo->returnMode == SFRM_Materialize);
is_sql_cmd = true;
/*
- * need a tuple descriptor representing one TEXT column to
- * return the command status string as our result tuple
+ * need a tuple descriptor representing one TEXT column to return
+ * the command status string as our result tuple
*/
tupdesc = CreateTemplateTupleDesc(1, false);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 1, "status",
if (ntuples > 0)
{
- AttInMetadata *attinmeta;
- Tuplestorestate *tupstore;
- MemoryContext oldcontext;
- int row;
- char **values;
+ AttInMetadata *attinmeta;
+ Tuplestorestate *tupstore;
+ MemoryContext oldcontext;
+ int row;
+ char **values;
attinmeta = TupleDescGetAttInMetadata(tupdesc);
oldcontext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(
- rsinfo->econtext->ecxt_per_query_memory);
+ rsinfo->econtext->ecxt_per_query_memory);
tupstore = tuplestore_begin_heap(true, false, work_mem);
rsinfo->setResult = tupstore;
rsinfo->setDesc = tupdesc;
"attributes too large")));
/*
- * ensure we don't ask for more pk attributes than we have
- * non-dropped columns
+ * ensure we don't ask for more pk attributes than we have non-dropped
+ * columns
*/
nondropped_natts = get_nondropped_natts(relid);
if (pknumatts > nondropped_natts)
ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("number of primary key fields exceeds number of specified relation attributes")));
+ errmsg("number of primary key fields exceeds number of specified relation attributes")));
/*
* Source array is made up of key values that will be used to locate the
"attributes too large")));
/*
- * ensure we don't ask for more pk attributes than we have
- * non-dropped columns
+ * ensure we don't ask for more pk attributes than we have non-dropped
+ * columns
*/
nondropped_natts = get_nondropped_natts(relid);
if (pknumatts > nondropped_natts)
ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("number of primary key fields exceeds number of specified relation attributes")));
+ errmsg("number of primary key fields exceeds number of specified relation attributes")));
/*
* Target array is made up of key values that will be used to build the
"attributes too large")));
/*
- * ensure we don't ask for more pk attributes than we have
- * non-dropped columns
+ * ensure we don't ask for more pk attributes than we have non-dropped
+ * columns
*/
nondropped_natts = get_nondropped_natts(relid);
if (pknumatts > nondropped_natts)
ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("number of primary key fields exceeds number of specified relation attributes")));
+ errmsg("number of primary key fields exceeds number of specified relation attributes")));
/*
* Source array is made up of key values that will be used to locate the
}
/*
- * Retrieve async notifications for a connection.
+ * Retrieve async notifications for a connection.
*
* Returns an setof record of notifications, or an empty set if none recieved.
* Can optionally take a named connection as parameter, but uses the unnamed connection per default.
Datum
dblink_get_notify(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- PGconn *conn = NULL;
- remoteConn *rconn = NULL;
- PGnotify *notify;
- ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo;
- TupleDesc tupdesc;
- Tuplestorestate *tupstore;
- MemoryContext per_query_ctx;
- MemoryContext oldcontext;
+ PGconn *conn = NULL;
+ remoteConn *rconn = NULL;
+ PGnotify *notify;
+ ReturnSetInfo *rsinfo = (ReturnSetInfo *) fcinfo->resultinfo;
+ TupleDesc tupdesc;
+ Tuplestorestate *tupstore;
+ MemoryContext per_query_ctx;
+ MemoryContext oldcontext;
DBLINK_INIT;
if (PG_NARGS() == 1)
relation_close(rel, AccessShareLock);
return nondropped_natts;
}
-
* Copyright (c) 2007-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dict_xsyn/dict_xsyn.c,v 1.8 2010/01/02 16:57:32 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dict_xsyn/dict_xsyn.c,v 1.9 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
List *dictoptions = (List *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0);
DictSyn *d;
ListCell *l;
- char *filename = NULL;
+ char *filename = NULL;
d = (DictSyn *) palloc0(sizeof(DictSyn));
d->len = 0;
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/hstore/hstore.h,v 1.9 2009/09/30 19:50:22 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/hstore/hstore.h,v 1.10 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*/
#ifndef __HSTORE_H__
#define __HSTORE_H__
* HEntry: there is one of these for each key _and_ value in an hstore
*
* the position offset points to the _end_ so that we can get the length
- * by subtraction from the previous entry. the ISFIRST flag lets us tell
+ * by subtraction from the previous entry. the ISFIRST flag lets us tell
* whether there is a previous entry.
*/
typedef struct
/*
* it's not possible to get more than 2^28 items into an hstore,
* so we reserve the top few bits of the size field. See hstore_compat.c
- * for one reason why. Some bits are left for future use here.
+ * for one reason why. Some bits are left for future use here.
*/
#define HS_FLAG_NEWVERSION 0x80000000
* evaluation here.
*/
#define HS_COPYITEM(dent_,dbuf_,dptr_,sptr_,klen_,vlen_,vnull_) \
- do { \
+ do { \
memcpy((dptr_), (sptr_), (klen_)+(vlen_)); \
(dptr_) += (klen_)+(vlen_); \
(dent_)++->entry = ((dptr_) - (dbuf_) - (vlen_)) & HENTRY_POSMASK; \
/* finalize a newly-constructed hstore */
#define HS_FINALIZE(hsp_,count_,buf_,ptr_) \
do { \
- int buflen = (ptr_) - (buf_); \
+ int buflen = (ptr_) - (buf_); \
if ((count_)) \
ARRPTR(hsp_)[0].entry |= HENTRY_ISFIRST; \
if ((count_) != HS_COUNT((hsp_))) \
/* ensure the varlena size of an existing hstore is correct */
#define HS_FIXSIZE(hsp_,count_) \
do { \
- int bl = (count_) ? HSE_ENDPOS(ARRPTR(hsp_)[2*(count_)-1]) : 0; \
+ int bl = (count_) ? HSE_ENDPOS(ARRPTR(hsp_)[2*(count_)-1]) : 0; \
SET_VARSIZE((hsp_), CALCDATASIZE((count_),bl)); \
} while (0)
#define HStoreExistsStrategyNumber 9
#define HStoreExistsAnyStrategyNumber 10
#define HStoreExistsAllStrategyNumber 11
-#define HStoreOldContainsStrategyNumber 13 /* backwards compatibility */
+#define HStoreOldContainsStrategyNumber 13 /* backwards compatibility */
/*
* defining HSTORE_POLLUTE_NAMESPACE=0 will prevent use of old function names;
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/hstore/hstore_compat.c,v 1.1 2009/09/30 19:50:22 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/hstore/hstore_compat.c,v 1.2 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*
* Notes on old/new hstore format disambiguation.
*
pos:31;
} HOldEntry;
-static int hstoreValidNewFormat(HStore *hs);
-static int hstoreValidOldFormat(HStore *hs);
+static int hstoreValidNewFormat(HStore *hs);
+static int hstoreValidOldFormat(HStore *hs);
/*
* Validity test for a new-format hstore.
- * 0 = not valid
- * 1 = valid but with "slop" in the length
- * 2 = exactly valid
+ * 0 = not valid
+ * 1 = valid but with "slop" in the length
+ * 2 = exactly valid
*/
static int
hstoreValidNewFormat(HStore *hs)
{
- int count = HS_COUNT(hs);
- HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(hs);
- int buflen = (count) ? HSE_ENDPOS(entries[2*(count)-1]) : 0;
- int vsize = CALCDATASIZE(count,buflen);
- int i;
+ int count = HS_COUNT(hs);
+ HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(hs);
+ int buflen = (count) ? HSE_ENDPOS(entries[2 * (count) - 1]) : 0;
+ int vsize = CALCDATASIZE(count, buflen);
+ int i;
if (hs->size_ & HS_FLAG_NEWVERSION)
return 2;
/* entry position must be nondecreasing */
- for (i = 1; i < 2*count; ++i)
+ for (i = 1; i < 2 * count; ++i)
{
if (HSE_ISFIRST(entries[i])
- || (HSE_ENDPOS(entries[i]) < HSE_ENDPOS(entries[i-1])))
+ || (HSE_ENDPOS(entries[i]) < HSE_ENDPOS(entries[i - 1])))
return 0;
}
for (i = 1; i < count; ++i)
{
- if (HS_KEYLEN(entries,i) < HS_KEYLEN(entries,i-1))
+ if (HS_KEYLEN(entries, i) < HS_KEYLEN(entries, i - 1))
return 0;
- if (HSE_ISNULL(entries[2*i]))
+ if (HSE_ISNULL(entries[2 * i]))
return 0;
}
/*
* Validity test for an old-format hstore.
- * 0 = not valid
- * 1 = valid but with "slop" in the length
- * 2 = exactly valid
+ * 0 = not valid
+ * 1 = valid but with "slop" in the length
+ * 2 = exactly valid
*/
static int
hstoreValidOldFormat(HStore *hs)
{
- int count = hs->size_;
- HOldEntry *entries = (HOldEntry *) ARRPTR(hs);
- int vsize;
- int lastpos = 0;
- int i;
+ int count = hs->size_;
+ HOldEntry *entries = (HOldEntry *) ARRPTR(hs);
+ int vsize;
+ int lastpos = 0;
+ int i;
if (hs->size_ & HS_FLAG_NEWVERSION)
return 0;
if (count > 0xFFFFFFF)
return 0;
- if (CALCDATASIZE(count,0) > VARSIZE(hs))
+ if (CALCDATASIZE(count, 0) > VARSIZE(hs))
return 0;
if (entries[0].pos != 0)
for (i = 1; i < count; ++i)
{
- if (entries[i].keylen < entries[i-1].keylen)
+ if (entries[i].keylen < entries[i - 1].keylen)
return 0;
}
/*
- * entry position must be strictly increasing, except for the
- * first entry (which can be ""=>"" and thus zero-length); and
- * all entries must be properly contiguous
+ * entry position must be strictly increasing, except for the first entry
+ * (which can be ""=>"" and thus zero-length); and all entries must be
+ * properly contiguous
*/
for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
+ ((entries[i].valisnull) ? 0 : entries[i].vallen));
}
- vsize = CALCDATASIZE(count,lastpos);
+ vsize = CALCDATASIZE(count, lastpos);
if (vsize > VARSIZE(hs))
return 0;
if (valid_new)
{
/*
- * force the "new version" flag and the correct varlena
- * length, but only if we have a writable copy already
- * (which we almost always will, since short new-format
- * values won't come through here)
+ * force the "new version" flag and the correct varlena length,
+ * but only if we have a writable copy already (which we almost
+ * always will, since short new-format values won't come through
+ * here)
*/
if (writable)
{
- HS_SETCOUNT(hs,HS_COUNT(hs));
- HS_FIXSIZE(hs,HS_COUNT(hs));
+ HS_SETCOUNT(hs, HS_COUNT(hs));
+ HS_FIXSIZE(hs, HS_COUNT(hs));
}
return hs;
}
else
{
- elog(ERROR,"invalid hstore value found");
+ elog(ERROR, "invalid hstore value found");
}
}
/*
- * this is the tricky edge case. It is only possible in some
- * quite extreme cases (the hstore must have had a lot
- * of wasted padding space at the end).
- * But the only way a "new" hstore value could get here is if
- * we're upgrading in place from a pre-release version of
- * hstore-new (NOT contrib/hstore), so we work off the following
- * assumptions:
- * 1. If you're moving from old contrib/hstore to hstore-new,
- * you're required to fix up any potential conflicts first,
- * e.g. by running ALTER TABLE ... USING col::text::hstore;
- * on all hstore columns before upgrading.
- * 2. If you're moving from old contrib/hstore to new
- * contrib/hstore, then "new" values are impossible here
- * 3. If you're moving from pre-release hstore-new to hstore-new,
- * then "old" values are impossible here
- * 4. If you're moving from pre-release hstore-new to new
- * contrib/hstore, you're not doing so as an in-place upgrade,
- * so there is no issue
- * So the upshot of all this is that we can treat all the edge
- * cases as "new" if we're being built as hstore-new, and "old"
- * if we're being built as contrib/hstore.
+ * this is the tricky edge case. It is only possible in some quite extreme
+ * cases (the hstore must have had a lot of wasted padding space at the
+ * end). But the only way a "new" hstore value could get here is if we're
+ * upgrading in place from a pre-release version of hstore-new (NOT
+ * contrib/hstore), so we work off the following assumptions: 1. If you're
+ * moving from old contrib/hstore to hstore-new, you're required to fix up
+ * any potential conflicts first, e.g. by running ALTER TABLE ... USING
+ * col::text::hstore; on all hstore columns before upgrading. 2. If you're
+ * moving from old contrib/hstore to new contrib/hstore, then "new" values
+ * are impossible here 3. If you're moving from pre-release hstore-new to
+ * hstore-new, then "old" values are impossible here 4. If you're moving
+ * from pre-release hstore-new to new contrib/hstore, you're not doing so
+ * as an in-place upgrade, so there is no issue So the upshot of all this
+ * is that we can treat all the edge cases as "new" if we're being built
+ * as hstore-new, and "old" if we're being built as contrib/hstore.
*
- * XXX the WARNING can probably be downgraded to DEBUG1 once this
- * has been beta-tested. But for now, it would be very useful to
- * know if anyone can actually reach this case in a non-contrived
- * setting.
+ * XXX the WARNING can probably be downgraded to DEBUG1 once this has been
+ * beta-tested. But for now, it would be very useful to know if anyone can
+ * actually reach this case in a non-contrived setting.
*/
if (valid_new)
{
#if HSTORE_IS_HSTORE_NEW
- elog(WARNING,"ambiguous hstore value resolved as hstore-new");
+ elog(WARNING, "ambiguous hstore value resolved as hstore-new");
/*
- * force the "new version" flag and the correct varlena
- * length, but only if we have a writable copy already
- * (which we almost always will, since short new-format
- * values won't come through here)
+ * force the "new version" flag and the correct varlena length, but
+ * only if we have a writable copy already (which we almost always
+ * will, since short new-format values won't come through here)
*/
if (writable)
{
- HS_SETCOUNT(hs,HS_COUNT(hs));
- HS_FIXSIZE(hs,HS_COUNT(hs));
+ HS_SETCOUNT(hs, HS_COUNT(hs));
+ HS_FIXSIZE(hs, HS_COUNT(hs));
}
return hs;
#else
- elog(WARNING,"ambiguous hstore value resolved as hstore-old");
+ elog(WARNING, "ambiguous hstore value resolved as hstore-old");
#endif
}
/*
- * must have an old-style value. Overwrite it in place as a new-style
- * one, making sure we have a writable copy first.
+ * must have an old-style value. Overwrite it in place as a new-style one,
+ * making sure we have a writable copy first.
*/
if (!writable)
hs = (HStore *) PG_DETOAST_DATUM_COPY(orig);
{
- int count = hs->size_;
- HEntry *new_entries = ARRPTR(hs);
- HOldEntry *old_entries = (HOldEntry *) ARRPTR(hs);
- int i;
-
+ int count = hs->size_;
+ HEntry *new_entries = ARRPTR(hs);
+ HOldEntry *old_entries = (HOldEntry *) ARRPTR(hs);
+ int i;
+
for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
{
- uint32 pos = old_entries[i].pos;
- uint32 keylen = old_entries[i].keylen;
- uint32 vallen = old_entries[i].vallen;
- bool isnull = old_entries[i].valisnull;
+ uint32 pos = old_entries[i].pos;
+ uint32 keylen = old_entries[i].keylen;
+ uint32 vallen = old_entries[i].vallen;
+ bool isnull = old_entries[i].valisnull;
if (isnull)
vallen = 0;
- new_entries[2*i].entry = (pos + keylen) & HENTRY_POSMASK;
- new_entries[2*i+1].entry = (((pos + keylen + vallen) & HENTRY_POSMASK)
- | ((isnull) ? HENTRY_ISNULL : 0));
+ new_entries[2 * i].entry = (pos + keylen) & HENTRY_POSMASK;
+ new_entries[2 * i + 1].entry = (((pos + keylen + vallen) & HENTRY_POSMASK)
+ | ((isnull) ? HENTRY_ISNULL : 0));
}
if (count)
new_entries[0].entry |= HENTRY_ISFIRST;
- HS_SETCOUNT(hs,count);
- HS_FIXSIZE(hs,count);
+ HS_SETCOUNT(hs, count);
+ HS_FIXSIZE(hs, count);
}
return hs;
Datum
hstore_version_diag(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- HStore *hs = (HStore *) PG_DETOAST_DATUM(PG_GETARG_DATUM(0));
- int valid_new = hstoreValidNewFormat(hs);
- int valid_old = hstoreValidOldFormat(hs);
+ HStore *hs = (HStore *) PG_DETOAST_DATUM(PG_GETARG_DATUM(0));
+ int valid_new = hstoreValidNewFormat(hs);
+ int valid_old = hstoreValidOldFormat(hs);
- PG_RETURN_INT32(valid_old*10 + valid_new);
+ PG_RETURN_INT32(valid_old * 10 + valid_new);
}
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/hstore/hstore_gin.c,v 1.7 2009/09/30 19:50:22 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/hstore/hstore_gin.c,v 1.8 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "postgres.h"
HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1);
Datum *entries = NULL;
- HEntry *hsent = ARRPTR(hs);
- char *ptr = STRPTR(hs);
- int count = HS_COUNT(hs);
- int i;
+ HEntry *hsent = ARRPTR(hs);
+ char *ptr = STRPTR(hs);
+ int count = HS_COUNT(hs);
+ int i;
*nentries = 2 * count;
if (count)
{
text *item;
- item = makeitem(HS_KEY(hsent,ptr,i), HS_KEYLEN(hsent,i));
+ item = makeitem(HS_KEY(hsent, ptr, i), HS_KEYLEN(hsent, i));
*VARDATA(item) = KEYFLAG;
- entries[2*i] = PointerGetDatum(item);
+ entries[2 * i] = PointerGetDatum(item);
- if (HS_VALISNULL(hsent,i))
+ if (HS_VALISNULL(hsent, i))
{
item = makeitem(NULL, 0);
*VARDATA(item) = NULLFLAG;
}
else
{
- item = makeitem(HS_VAL(hsent,ptr,i), HS_VALLEN(hsent,i));
+ item = makeitem(HS_VAL(hsent, ptr, i), HS_VALLEN(hsent, i));
*VARDATA(item) = VALFLAG;
}
- entries[2*i+1] = PointerGetDatum(item);
+ entries[2 * i + 1] = PointerGetDatum(item);
}
PG_RETURN_POINTER(entries);
else if (strategy == HStoreExistsAnyStrategyNumber ||
strategy == HStoreExistsAllStrategyNumber)
{
- ArrayType *query = PG_GETARG_ARRAYTYPE_P(0);
- Datum *key_datums;
- bool *key_nulls;
- int key_count;
- int i,j;
+ ArrayType *query = PG_GETARG_ARRAYTYPE_P(0);
+ Datum *key_datums;
+ bool *key_nulls;
+ int key_count;
+ int i,
+ j;
int32 *nentries = (int32 *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1);
Datum *entries = NULL;
- text *item;
+ text *item;
deconstruct_array(query,
TEXTOID, -1, false, 'i',
{
bool *check = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0);
StrategyNumber strategy = PG_GETARG_UINT16(1);
+
/* HStore *query = PG_GETARG_HS(2); */
int32 nkeys = PG_GETARG_INT32(3);
+
/* Pointer *extra_data = (Pointer *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(4); */
bool *recheck = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(5);
bool res = true;
}
else if (strategy == HStoreExistsAllStrategyNumber)
{
- int i;
+ int i;
for (i = 0; res && i < nkeys; ++i)
if (!check[i])
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/hstore/hstore_gist.c,v 1.11 2009/09/30 19:50:22 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/hstore/hstore_gist.c,v 1.12 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "postgres.h"
HStore *val = DatumGetHStoreP(entry->key);
HEntry *hsent = ARRPTR(val);
char *ptr = STRPTR(val);
- int count = HS_COUNT(val);
- int i;
+ int count = HS_COUNT(val);
+ int i;
SET_VARSIZE(res, CALCGTSIZE(0));
for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
{
- int h;
+ int h;
- h = crc32_sz((char *) HS_KEY(hsent,ptr,i), HS_KEYLEN(hsent,i));
+ h = crc32_sz((char *) HS_KEY(hsent, ptr, i), HS_KEYLEN(hsent, i));
HASH(GETSIGN(res), h);
- if (!HS_VALISNULL(hsent,i))
+ if (!HS_VALISNULL(hsent, i))
{
- h = crc32_sz((char *) HS_VAL(hsent,ptr,i), HS_VALLEN(hsent,i));
+ h = crc32_sz((char *) HS_VAL(hsent, ptr, i), HS_VALLEN(hsent, i));
HASH(GETSIGN(res), h);
}
}
{
GISTTYPE *entry = (GISTTYPE *) DatumGetPointer(((GISTENTRY *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0))->key);
StrategyNumber strategy = (StrategyNumber) PG_GETARG_UINT16(2);
+
/* Oid subtype = PG_GETARG_OID(3); */
bool *recheck = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(4);
bool res = true;
HStore *query = PG_GETARG_HS(1);
HEntry *qe = ARRPTR(query);
char *qv = STRPTR(query);
- int count = HS_COUNT(query);
- int i;
+ int count = HS_COUNT(query);
+ int i;
for (i = 0; res && i < count; ++i)
{
- int crc = crc32_sz((char *) HS_KEY(qe,qv,i), HS_KEYLEN(qe,i));
+ int crc = crc32_sz((char *) HS_KEY(qe, qv, i), HS_KEYLEN(qe, i));
if (GETBIT(sign, HASHVAL(crc)))
{
- if (!HS_VALISNULL(qe,i))
+ if (!HS_VALISNULL(qe, i))
{
- crc = crc32_sz((char *) HS_VAL(qe,qv,i), HS_VALLEN(qe,i));
+ crc = crc32_sz((char *) HS_VAL(qe, qv, i), HS_VALLEN(qe, i));
if (!GETBIT(sign, HASHVAL(crc)))
res = false;
}
}
else if (strategy == HStoreExistsAllStrategyNumber)
{
- ArrayType *query = PG_GETARG_ARRAYTYPE_P(1);
- Datum *key_datums;
- bool *key_nulls;
- int key_count;
- int i;
+ ArrayType *query = PG_GETARG_ARRAYTYPE_P(1);
+ Datum *key_datums;
+ bool *key_nulls;
+ int key_count;
+ int i;
deconstruct_array(query,
TEXTOID, -1, false, 'i',
for (i = 0; res && i < key_count; ++i)
{
- int crc;
+ int crc;
+
if (key_nulls[i])
continue;
crc = crc32_sz(VARDATA(key_datums[i]), VARSIZE(key_datums[i]) - VARHDRSZ);
}
else if (strategy == HStoreExistsAnyStrategyNumber)
{
- ArrayType *query = PG_GETARG_ARRAYTYPE_P(1);
- Datum *key_datums;
- bool *key_nulls;
- int key_count;
- int i;
+ ArrayType *query = PG_GETARG_ARRAYTYPE_P(1);
+ Datum *key_datums;
+ bool *key_nulls;
+ int key_count;
+ int i;
deconstruct_array(query,
TEXTOID, -1, false, 'i',
for (i = 0; !res && i < key_count; ++i)
{
- int crc;
+ int crc;
+
if (key_nulls[i])
continue;
crc = crc32_sz(VARDATA(key_datums[i]), VARSIZE(key_datums[i]) - VARHDRSZ);
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/hstore/hstore_io.c,v 1.12 2009/09/30 19:50:22 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/hstore/hstore_io.c,v 1.13 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "postgres.h"
PG_MODULE_MAGIC;
/* old names for C functions */
-HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_from_text,tconvert);
+HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_from_text, tconvert);
typedef struct
HStore *
hstorePairs(Pairs *pairs, int4 pcount, int4 buflen)
{
- HStore *out;
+ HStore *out;
HEntry *entry;
char *ptr;
char *buf;
- int4 len;
- int4 i;
+ int4 len;
+ int4 i;
len = CALCDATASIZE(pcount, buflen);
out = palloc(len);
buf = ptr = STRPTR(out);
for (i = 0; i < pcount; i++)
- HS_ADDITEM(entry,buf,ptr,pairs[i]);
+ HS_ADDITEM(entry, buf, ptr, pairs[i]);
- HS_FINALIZE(out,pcount,buf,ptr);
+ HS_FINALIZE(out, pcount, buf, ptr);
return out;
}
int4 buflen;
HStore *out;
Pairs *pairs;
- int4 i;
- int4 pcount;
- StringInfo buf = (StringInfo) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0);
+ int4 i;
+ int4 pcount;
+ StringInfo buf = (StringInfo) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0);
pcount = pq_getmsgint(buf, 4);
for (i = 0; i < pcount; ++i)
{
- int rawlen = pq_getmsgint(buf, 4);
- int len;
+ int rawlen = pq_getmsgint(buf, 4);
+ int len;
if (rawlen < 0)
ereport(ERROR,
Datum
hstore_from_text(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- text *key;
- text *val = NULL;
- Pairs p;
+ text *key;
+ text *val = NULL;
+ Pairs p;
HStore *out;
if (PG_ARGISNULL(0))
Pairs *pairs;
Datum *key_datums;
bool *key_nulls;
- int key_count;
+ int key_count;
Datum *value_datums;
bool *value_nulls;
- int value_count;
+ int value_count;
ArrayType *key_array;
ArrayType *value_array;
- int i;
+ int i;
if (PG_ARGISNULL(0))
PG_RETURN_NULL();
Assert(ARR_ELEMTYPE(key_array) == TEXTOID);
/*
- * must check >1 rather than != 1 because empty arrays have
- * 0 dimensions, not 1
+ * must check >1 rather than != 1 because empty arrays have 0 dimensions,
+ * not 1
*/
if (ARR_NDIM(key_array) > 1)
hstore_from_array(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
ArrayType *in_array = PG_GETARG_ARRAYTYPE_P(0);
- int ndims = ARR_NDIM(in_array);
- int count;
+ int ndims = ARR_NDIM(in_array);
+ int count;
int4 buflen;
HStore *out;
Pairs *pairs;
Datum *in_datums;
bool *in_nulls;
- int in_count;
- int i;
+ int in_count;
+ int i;
Assert(ARR_ELEMTYPE(in_array) == TEXTOID);
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_ARRAY_SUBSCRIPT_ERROR),
errmsg("wrong number of array subscripts")));
- }
+ }
deconstruct_array(in_array,
TEXTOID, -1, false, 'i',
for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
{
- if (in_nulls[i*2])
+ if (in_nulls[i * 2])
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_NULL_VALUE_NOT_ALLOWED),
errmsg("null value not allowed for hstore key")));
- if (in_nulls[i*2+1])
+ if (in_nulls[i * 2 + 1])
{
- pairs[i].key = VARDATA_ANY(in_datums[i*2]);
+ pairs[i].key = VARDATA_ANY(in_datums[i * 2]);
pairs[i].val = NULL;
- pairs[i].keylen = hstoreCheckKeyLen(VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(in_datums[i*2]));
+ pairs[i].keylen = hstoreCheckKeyLen(VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(in_datums[i * 2]));
pairs[i].vallen = 4;
pairs[i].isnull = true;
pairs[i].needfree = false;
}
else
{
- pairs[i].key = VARDATA_ANY(in_datums[i*2]);
- pairs[i].val = VARDATA_ANY(in_datums[i*2+1]);
- pairs[i].keylen = hstoreCheckKeyLen(VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(in_datums[i*2]));
- pairs[i].vallen = hstoreCheckValLen(VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(in_datums[i*2+1]));
+ pairs[i].key = VARDATA_ANY(in_datums[i * 2]);
+ pairs[i].val = VARDATA_ANY(in_datums[i * 2 + 1]);
+ pairs[i].keylen = hstoreCheckKeyLen(VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(in_datums[i * 2]));
+ pairs[i].vallen = hstoreCheckValLen(VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(in_datums[i * 2 + 1]));
pairs[i].isnull = false;
pairs[i].needfree = false;
}
HeapTupleHeader rec;
int4 buflen;
HStore *out;
- Pairs *pairs;
+ Pairs *pairs;
Oid tupType;
int32 tupTypmod;
TupleDesc tupdesc;
HeapTupleData tuple;
RecordIOData *my_extra;
int ncolumns;
- int i,j;
+ int i,
+ j;
Datum *values;
bool *nulls;
if (PG_ARGISNULL(0))
{
- Oid argtype = get_fn_expr_argtype(fcinfo->flinfo,0);
+ Oid argtype = get_fn_expr_argtype(fcinfo->flinfo, 0);
/*
- * have no tuple to look at, so the only source of type info
- * is the argtype. The lookup_rowtype_tupdesc call below will
- * error out if we don't have a known composite type oid here.
+ * have no tuple to look at, so the only source of type info is the
+ * argtype. The lookup_rowtype_tupdesc call below will error out if we
+ * don't have a known composite type oid here.
*/
tupType = argtype;
tupTypmod = -1;
*/
if (column_info->column_type != column_type)
{
- bool typIsVarlena;
+ bool typIsVarlena;
getTypeOutputInfo(column_type,
&column_info->typiofunc,
Datum
hstore_populate_record(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- Oid argtype = get_fn_expr_argtype(fcinfo->flinfo,0);
- HStore *hs;
- HEntry *entries;
- char *ptr;
+ Oid argtype = get_fn_expr_argtype(fcinfo->flinfo, 0);
+ HStore *hs;
+ HEntry *entries;
+ char *ptr;
HeapTupleHeader rec;
Oid tupType;
int32 tupTypmod;
TupleDesc tupdesc;
HeapTupleData tuple;
- HeapTuple rettuple;
+ HeapTuple rettuple;
RecordIOData *my_extra;
- int ncolumns;
+ int ncolumns;
int i;
Datum *values;
bool *nulls;
rec = NULL;
/*
- * have no tuple to look at, so the only source of type info
- * is the argtype. The lookup_rowtype_tupdesc call below will
- * error out if we don't have a known composite type oid here.
+ * have no tuple to look at, so the only source of type info is the
+ * argtype. The lookup_rowtype_tupdesc call below will error out if we
+ * don't have a known composite type oid here.
*/
tupType = argtype;
tupTypmod = -1;
ptr = STRPTR(hs);
/*
- * if the input hstore is empty, we can only skip the rest if
- * we were passed in a non-null record, since otherwise there
- * may be issues with domain nulls.
+ * if the input hstore is empty, we can only skip the rest if we were
+ * passed in a non-null record, since otherwise there may be issues with
+ * domain nulls.
*/
if (HS_COUNT(hs) == 0 && rec)
ColumnIOData *column_info = &my_extra->columns[i];
Oid column_type = tupdesc->attrs[i]->atttypid;
char *value;
- int idx;
- int vallen;
+ int idx;
+ int vallen;
/* Ignore dropped columns in datatype */
if (tupdesc->attrs[i]->attisdropped)
idx = hstoreFindKey(hs, 0,
NameStr(tupdesc->attrs[i]->attname),
strlen(NameStr(tupdesc->attrs[i]->attname)));
+
/*
- * we can't just skip here if the key wasn't found since we
- * might have a domain to deal with. If we were passed in a
- * non-null record datum, we assume that the existing values
- * are valid (if they're not, then it's not our fault), but if
- * we were passed in a null, then every field which we don't
- * populate needs to be run through the input function just in
- * case it's a domain type.
+ * we can't just skip here if the key wasn't found since we might have
+ * a domain to deal with. If we were passed in a non-null record
+ * datum, we assume that the existing values are valid (if they're
+ * not, then it's not our fault), but if we were passed in a null,
+ * then every field which we don't populate needs to be run through
+ * the input function just in case it's a domain type.
*/
if (idx < 0 && rec)
continue;
column_info->column_type = column_type;
}
- if (idx < 0 || HS_VALISNULL(entries,idx))
+ if (idx < 0 || HS_VALISNULL(entries, idx))
{
/*
- * need InputFunctionCall to happen even for nulls, so
- * that domain checks are done
+ * need InputFunctionCall to happen even for nulls, so that domain
+ * checks are done
*/
values[i] = InputFunctionCall(&column_info->proc, NULL,
column_info->typioparam,
}
else
{
- vallen = HS_VALLEN(entries,idx);
+ vallen = HS_VALLEN(entries, idx);
value = palloc(1 + vallen);
- memcpy(value, HS_VAL(entries,ptr,idx), vallen);
+ memcpy(value, HS_VAL(entries, ptr, idx), vallen);
value[vallen] = 0;
values[i] = InputFunctionCall(&column_info->proc, value,
HStore *in = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
int buflen,
i;
- int count = HS_COUNT(in);
+ int count = HS_COUNT(in);
char *out,
*ptr;
char *base = STRPTR(in);
buflen = 0;
/*
- * this loop overestimates due to pessimistic assumptions about
- * escaping, so very large hstore values can't be output. this
- * could be fixed, but many other data types probably have the
- * same issue. This replaced code that used the original varlena
- * size for calculations, which was wrong in some subtle ways.
+ * this loop overestimates due to pessimistic assumptions about escaping,
+ * so very large hstore values can't be output. this could be fixed, but
+ * many other data types probably have the same issue. This replaced code
+ * that used the original varlena size for calculations, which was wrong
+ * in some subtle ways.
*/
for (i = 0; i < count; i++)
{
/* include "" and => and comma-space */
- buflen += 6 + 2 * HS_KEYLEN(entries,i);
+ buflen += 6 + 2 * HS_KEYLEN(entries, i);
/* include "" only if nonnull */
- buflen += 2 + (HS_VALISNULL(entries,i)
+ buflen += 2 + (HS_VALISNULL(entries, i)
? 2
- : 2 * HS_VALLEN(entries,i));
+ : 2 * HS_VALLEN(entries, i));
}
out = ptr = palloc(buflen);
for (i = 0; i < count; i++)
{
*ptr++ = '"';
- ptr = cpw(ptr, HS_KEY(entries,base,i), HS_KEYLEN(entries,i));
+ ptr = cpw(ptr, HS_KEY(entries, base, i), HS_KEYLEN(entries, i));
*ptr++ = '"';
*ptr++ = '=';
*ptr++ = '>';
- if (HS_VALISNULL(entries,i))
+ if (HS_VALISNULL(entries, i))
{
*ptr++ = 'N';
*ptr++ = 'U';
else
{
*ptr++ = '"';
- ptr = cpw(ptr, HS_VAL(entries,base,i), HS_VALLEN(entries,i));
+ ptr = cpw(ptr, HS_VAL(entries, base, i), HS_VALLEN(entries, i));
*ptr++ = '"';
}
hstore_send(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
HStore *in = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
- int i;
- int count = HS_COUNT(in);
+ int i;
+ int count = HS_COUNT(in);
char *base = STRPTR(in);
HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(in);
StringInfoData buf;
for (i = 0; i < count; i++)
{
- int32 keylen = HS_KEYLEN(entries,i);
+ int32 keylen = HS_KEYLEN(entries, i);
+
pq_sendint(&buf, keylen, 4);
- pq_sendtext(&buf, HS_KEY(entries,base,i), keylen);
- if (HS_VALISNULL(entries,i))
+ pq_sendtext(&buf, HS_KEY(entries, base, i), keylen);
+ if (HS_VALISNULL(entries, i))
{
pq_sendint(&buf, -1, 4);
}
else
{
- int32 vallen = HS_VALLEN(entries,i);
+ int32 vallen = HS_VALLEN(entries, i);
+
pq_sendint(&buf, vallen, 4);
- pq_sendtext(&buf, HS_VAL(entries,base,i), vallen);
+ pq_sendtext(&buf, HS_VAL(entries, base, i), vallen);
}
}
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/hstore/hstore_op.c,v 1.15 2009/09/30 21:26:17 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/hstore/hstore_op.c,v 1.16 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "postgres.h"
#include "hstore.h"
/* old names for C functions */
-HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_fetchval,fetchval);
-HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_exists,exists);
-HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_defined,defined);
-HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_delete,delete);
-HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_concat,hs_concat);
-HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_contains,hs_contains);
-HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_contained,hs_contained);
-HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_akeys,akeys);
-HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_avals,avals);
-HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_skeys,skeys);
-HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_svals,svals);
-HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_each,each);
+HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_fetchval, fetchval);
+HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_exists, exists);
+HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_defined, defined);
+HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_delete, delete);
+HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_concat, hs_concat);
+HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_contains, hs_contains);
+HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_contained, hs_contained);
+HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_akeys, akeys);
+HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_avals, avals);
+HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_skeys, skeys);
+HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_svals, svals);
+HSTORE_POLLUTE(hstore_each, each);
/*
* one-off or unordered searches.
*/
int
-hstoreFindKey(HStore * hs, int *lowbound, char *key, int keylen)
+hstoreFindKey(HStore *hs, int *lowbound, char *key, int keylen)
{
HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(hs);
- int stopLow = lowbound ? *lowbound : 0;
- int stopHigh = HS_COUNT(hs);
- int stopMiddle;
+ int stopLow = lowbound ? *lowbound : 0;
+ int stopHigh = HS_COUNT(hs);
+ int stopMiddle;
char *base = STRPTR(hs);
while (stopLow < stopHigh)
{
- int difference;
+ int difference;
stopMiddle = stopLow + (stopHigh - stopLow) / 2;
- if (HS_KEYLEN(entries,stopMiddle) == keylen)
- difference = strncmp(HS_KEY(entries,base,stopMiddle), key, keylen);
+ if (HS_KEYLEN(entries, stopMiddle) == keylen)
+ difference = strncmp(HS_KEY(entries, base, stopMiddle), key, keylen);
else
- difference = (HS_KEYLEN(entries,stopMiddle) > keylen) ? 1 : -1;
+ difference = (HS_KEYLEN(entries, stopMiddle) > keylen) ? 1 : -1;
if (difference == 0)
{
Pairs *
hstoreArrayToPairs(ArrayType *a, int *npairs)
{
- Datum *key_datums;
- bool *key_nulls;
- int key_count;
- Pairs *key_pairs;
- int bufsiz;
- int i,j;
+ Datum *key_datums;
+ bool *key_nulls;
+ int key_count;
+ Pairs *key_pairs;
+ int bufsiz;
+ int i,
+ j;
deconstruct_array(a,
TEXTOID, -1, false, 'i',
text *key = PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(1);
HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(hs);
text *out;
- int idx = hstoreFindKey(hs, NULL,
+ int idx = hstoreFindKey(hs, NULL,
VARDATA_ANY(key), VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(key));
- if (idx < 0 || HS_VALISNULL(entries,idx))
+ if (idx < 0 || HS_VALISNULL(entries, idx))
PG_RETURN_NULL();
- out = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_VAL(entries,STRPTR(hs),idx),
- HS_VALLEN(entries,idx));
+ out = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_VAL(entries, STRPTR(hs), idx),
+ HS_VALLEN(entries, idx));
PG_RETURN_TEXT_P(out);
}
{
HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
text *key = PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(1);
- int idx = hstoreFindKey(hs, NULL,
+ int idx = hstoreFindKey(hs, NULL,
VARDATA_ANY(key), VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(key));
PG_RETURN_BOOL(idx >= 0);
{
HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
ArrayType *keys = PG_GETARG_ARRAYTYPE_P(1);
- int nkeys;
- Pairs *key_pairs = hstoreArrayToPairs(keys, &nkeys);
- int i;
- int lowbound = 0;
- bool res = false;
+ int nkeys;
+ Pairs *key_pairs = hstoreArrayToPairs(keys, &nkeys);
+ int i;
+ int lowbound = 0;
+ bool res = false;
/*
- * we exploit the fact that the pairs list is already sorted into
- * strictly increasing order to narrow the hstoreFindKey search;
- * each search can start one entry past the previous "found"
- * entry, or at the lower bound of the last search.
+ * we exploit the fact that the pairs list is already sorted into strictly
+ * increasing order to narrow the hstoreFindKey search; each search can
+ * start one entry past the previous "found" entry, or at the lower bound
+ * of the last search.
*/
for (i = 0; !res && i < nkeys; ++i)
{
- int idx = hstoreFindKey(hs, &lowbound,
- key_pairs[i].key, key_pairs[i].keylen);
+ int idx = hstoreFindKey(hs, &lowbound,
+ key_pairs[i].key, key_pairs[i].keylen);
if (idx >= 0)
res = true;
{
HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
ArrayType *keys = PG_GETARG_ARRAYTYPE_P(1);
- int nkeys;
- Pairs *key_pairs = hstoreArrayToPairs(keys, &nkeys);
- int i;
- int lowbound = 0;
- bool res = nkeys ? true : false;
+ int nkeys;
+ Pairs *key_pairs = hstoreArrayToPairs(keys, &nkeys);
+ int i;
+ int lowbound = 0;
+ bool res = nkeys ? true : false;
/*
- * we exploit the fact that the pairs list is already sorted into
- * strictly increasing order to narrow the hstoreFindKey search;
- * each search can start one entry past the previous "found"
- * entry, or at the lower bound of the last search.
+ * we exploit the fact that the pairs list is already sorted into strictly
+ * increasing order to narrow the hstoreFindKey search; each search can
+ * start one entry past the previous "found" entry, or at the lower bound
+ * of the last search.
*/
for (i = 0; res && i < nkeys; ++i)
{
- int idx = hstoreFindKey(hs, &lowbound,
- key_pairs[i].key, key_pairs[i].keylen);
+ int idx = hstoreFindKey(hs, &lowbound,
+ key_pairs[i].key, key_pairs[i].keylen);
if (idx < 0)
res = false;
HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
text *key = PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(1);
HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(hs);
- int idx = hstoreFindKey(hs, NULL,
+ int idx = hstoreFindKey(hs, NULL,
VARDATA_ANY(key), VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(key));
- bool res = (idx >= 0 && !HS_VALISNULL(entries,idx));
+ bool res = (idx >= 0 && !HS_VALISNULL(entries, idx));
PG_RETURN_BOOL(res);
}
{
HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
text *key = PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(1);
- char *keyptr = VARDATA_ANY(key);
- int keylen = VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(key);
+ char *keyptr = VARDATA_ANY(key);
+ int keylen = VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(key);
HStore *out = palloc(VARSIZE(hs));
char *bufs,
- *bufd,
+ *bufd,
*ptrd;
HEntry *es,
*ed;
- int i;
- int count = HS_COUNT(hs);
- int outcount = 0;
+ int i;
+ int count = HS_COUNT(hs);
+ int outcount = 0;
SET_VARSIZE(out, VARSIZE(hs));
- HS_SETCOUNT(out, count); /* temporary! */
+ HS_SETCOUNT(out, count); /* temporary! */
bufs = STRPTR(hs);
es = ARRPTR(hs);
for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
{
- int len = HS_KEYLEN(es,i);
- char *ptrs = HS_KEY(es,bufs,i);
+ int len = HS_KEYLEN(es, i);
+ char *ptrs = HS_KEY(es, bufs, i);
if (!(len == keylen && strncmp(ptrs, keyptr, keylen) == 0))
{
- int vallen = HS_VALLEN(es,i);
- HS_COPYITEM(ed, bufd, ptrd, ptrs, len, vallen, HS_VALISNULL(es,i));
+ int vallen = HS_VALLEN(es, i);
+
+ HS_COPYITEM(ed, bufd, ptrd, ptrs, len, vallen, HS_VALISNULL(es, i));
++outcount;
}
}
- HS_FINALIZE(out,outcount,bufd,ptrd);
+ HS_FINALIZE(out, outcount, bufd, ptrd);
PG_RETURN_POINTER(out);
}
{
HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
HStore *out = palloc(VARSIZE(hs));
- int hs_count = HS_COUNT(hs);
+ int hs_count = HS_COUNT(hs);
char *ps,
- *bufd,
+ *bufd,
*pd;
HEntry *es,
*ed;
- int i,j;
- int outcount = 0;
+ int i,
+ j;
+ int outcount = 0;
ArrayType *key_array = PG_GETARG_ARRAYTYPE_P(1);
- int nkeys;
- Pairs *key_pairs = hstoreArrayToPairs(key_array, &nkeys);
+ int nkeys;
+ Pairs *key_pairs = hstoreArrayToPairs(key_array, &nkeys);
SET_VARSIZE(out, VARSIZE(hs));
- HS_SETCOUNT(out, hs_count); /* temporary! */
+ HS_SETCOUNT(out, hs_count); /* temporary! */
ps = STRPTR(hs);
es = ARRPTR(hs);
}
/*
- * this is in effect a merge between hs and key_pairs, both of
- * which are already sorted by (keylen,key); we take keys from
- * hs only
+ * this is in effect a merge between hs and key_pairs, both of which are
+ * already sorted by (keylen,key); we take keys from hs only
*/
- for (i = j = 0; i < hs_count; )
+ for (i = j = 0; i < hs_count;)
{
- int difference;
-
+ int difference;
+
if (j >= nkeys)
difference = -1;
else
{
- int skeylen = HS_KEYLEN(es,i);
+ int skeylen = HS_KEYLEN(es, i);
+
if (skeylen == key_pairs[j].keylen)
- difference = strncmp(HS_KEY(es,ps,i),
+ difference = strncmp(HS_KEY(es, ps, i),
key_pairs[j].key,
key_pairs[j].keylen);
else
else
{
HS_COPYITEM(ed, bufd, pd,
- HS_KEY(es,ps,i), HS_KEYLEN(es,i),
- HS_VALLEN(es,i), HS_VALISNULL(es,i));
+ HS_KEY(es, ps, i), HS_KEYLEN(es, i),
+ HS_VALLEN(es, i), HS_VALISNULL(es, i));
++outcount;
++i;
}
}
- HS_FINALIZE(out,outcount,bufd,pd);
+ HS_FINALIZE(out, outcount, bufd, pd);
PG_RETURN_POINTER(out);
}
HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
HStore *hs2 = PG_GETARG_HS(1);
HStore *out = palloc(VARSIZE(hs));
- int hs_count = HS_COUNT(hs);
- int hs2_count = HS_COUNT(hs2);
+ int hs_count = HS_COUNT(hs);
+ int hs2_count = HS_COUNT(hs2);
char *ps,
- *ps2,
- *bufd,
+ *ps2,
+ *bufd,
*pd;
HEntry *es,
- *es2,
+ *es2,
*ed;
- int i,j;
- int outcount = 0;
+ int i,
+ j;
+ int outcount = 0;
SET_VARSIZE(out, VARSIZE(hs));
- HS_SETCOUNT(out, hs_count); /* temporary! */
+ HS_SETCOUNT(out, hs_count); /* temporary! */
ps = STRPTR(hs);
es = ARRPTR(hs);
}
/*
- * this is in effect a merge between hs and hs2, both of
- * which are already sorted by (keylen,key); we take keys from
- * hs only; for equal keys, we take the value from hs unless the
- * values are equal
+ * this is in effect a merge between hs and hs2, both of which are already
+ * sorted by (keylen,key); we take keys from hs only; for equal keys, we
+ * take the value from hs unless the values are equal
*/
- for (i = j = 0; i < hs_count; )
+ for (i = j = 0; i < hs_count;)
{
- int difference;
-
+ int difference;
+
if (j >= hs2_count)
difference = -1;
else
{
- int skeylen = HS_KEYLEN(es,i);
- int s2keylen = HS_KEYLEN(es2,j);
+ int skeylen = HS_KEYLEN(es, i);
+ int s2keylen = HS_KEYLEN(es2, j);
+
if (skeylen == s2keylen)
- difference = strncmp(HS_KEY(es,ps,i),
- HS_KEY(es2,ps2,j),
+ difference = strncmp(HS_KEY(es, ps, i),
+ HS_KEY(es2, ps2, j),
skeylen);
else
difference = (skeylen > s2keylen) ? 1 : -1;
++j;
else if (difference == 0)
{
- int svallen = HS_VALLEN(es,i);
- int snullval = HS_VALISNULL(es,i);
- if (snullval != HS_VALISNULL(es2,j)
+ int svallen = HS_VALLEN(es, i);
+ int snullval = HS_VALISNULL(es, i);
+
+ if (snullval != HS_VALISNULL(es2, j)
|| (!snullval
- && (svallen != HS_VALLEN(es2,j)
- || strncmp(HS_VAL(es,ps,i), HS_VAL(es2,ps2,j), svallen) != 0)))
+ && (svallen != HS_VALLEN(es2, j)
+ || strncmp(HS_VAL(es, ps, i), HS_VAL(es2, ps2, j), svallen) != 0)))
{
HS_COPYITEM(ed, bufd, pd,
- HS_KEY(es,ps,i), HS_KEYLEN(es,i),
+ HS_KEY(es, ps, i), HS_KEYLEN(es, i),
svallen, snullval);
++outcount;
}
else
{
HS_COPYITEM(ed, bufd, pd,
- HS_KEY(es,ps,i), HS_KEYLEN(es,i),
- HS_VALLEN(es,i), HS_VALISNULL(es,i));
+ HS_KEY(es, ps, i), HS_KEYLEN(es, i),
+ HS_VALLEN(es, i), HS_VALISNULL(es, i));
++outcount;
++i;
}
}
- HS_FINALIZE(out,outcount,bufd,pd);
+ HS_FINALIZE(out, outcount, bufd, pd);
PG_RETURN_POINTER(out);
}
HStore *out = palloc(VARSIZE(s1) + VARSIZE(s2));
char *ps1,
*ps2,
- *bufd,
+ *bufd,
*pd;
HEntry *es1,
*es2,
*ed;
- int s1idx;
- int s2idx;
- int s1count = HS_COUNT(s1);
- int s2count = HS_COUNT(s2);
- int outcount = 0;
+ int s1idx;
+ int s2idx;
+ int s1count = HS_COUNT(s1);
+ int s2count = HS_COUNT(s2);
+ int outcount = 0;
SET_VARSIZE(out, VARSIZE(s1) + VARSIZE(s2) - HSHRDSIZE);
HS_SETCOUNT(out, s1count + s2count);
ed = ARRPTR(out);
/*
- * this is in effect a merge between s1 and s2, both of which
- * are already sorted by (keylen,key); we take s2 for equal keys
+ * this is in effect a merge between s1 and s2, both of which are already
+ * sorted by (keylen,key); we take s2 for equal keys
*/
for (s1idx = s2idx = 0; s1idx < s1count || s2idx < s2count; ++outcount)
{
- int difference;
-
+ int difference;
+
if (s1idx >= s1count)
difference = 1;
else if (s2idx >= s2count)
difference = -1;
else
{
- int s1keylen = HS_KEYLEN(es1,s1idx);
- int s2keylen = HS_KEYLEN(es2,s2idx);
+ int s1keylen = HS_KEYLEN(es1, s1idx);
+ int s2keylen = HS_KEYLEN(es2, s2idx);
+
if (s1keylen == s2keylen)
- difference = strncmp(HS_KEY(es1,ps1,s1idx),
- HS_KEY(es2,ps2,s2idx),
+ difference = strncmp(HS_KEY(es1, ps1, s1idx),
+ HS_KEY(es2, ps2, s2idx),
s1keylen);
else
difference = (s1keylen > s2keylen) ? 1 : -1;
if (difference >= 0)
{
HS_COPYITEM(ed, bufd, pd,
- HS_KEY(es2,ps2,s2idx), HS_KEYLEN(es2,s2idx),
- HS_VALLEN(es2,s2idx), HS_VALISNULL(es2,s2idx));
+ HS_KEY(es2, ps2, s2idx), HS_KEYLEN(es2, s2idx),
+ HS_VALLEN(es2, s2idx), HS_VALISNULL(es2, s2idx));
++s2idx;
if (difference == 0)
++s1idx;
else
{
HS_COPYITEM(ed, bufd, pd,
- HS_KEY(es1,ps1,s1idx), HS_KEYLEN(es1,s1idx),
- HS_VALLEN(es1,s1idx), HS_VALISNULL(es1,s1idx));
+ HS_KEY(es1, ps1, s1idx), HS_KEYLEN(es1, s1idx),
+ HS_VALLEN(es1, s1idx), HS_VALISNULL(es1, s1idx));
++s1idx;
}
}
- HS_FINALIZE(out,outcount,bufd,pd);
+ HS_FINALIZE(out, outcount, bufd, pd);
PG_RETURN_POINTER(out);
}
{
HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(hs);
- char *ptr = STRPTR(hs);
+ char *ptr = STRPTR(hs);
ArrayType *key_array = PG_GETARG_ARRAYTYPE_P(1);
ArrayType *aout;
- Datum *key_datums;
- bool *key_nulls;
- Datum *out_datums;
- bool *out_nulls;
- int key_count;
- int i;
+ Datum *key_datums;
+ bool *key_nulls;
+ Datum *out_datums;
+ bool *out_nulls;
+ int key_count;
+ int i;
deconstruct_array(key_array,
TEXTOID, -1, false, 'i',
for (i = 0; i < key_count; ++i)
{
- text *key = (text*) DatumGetPointer(key_datums[i]);
- int idx;
+ text *key = (text *) DatumGetPointer(key_datums[i]);
+ int idx;
if (key_nulls[i])
idx = -1;
else
idx = hstoreFindKey(hs, NULL, VARDATA(key), VARSIZE(key) - VARHDRSZ);
- if (idx < 0 || HS_VALISNULL(entries,idx))
+ if (idx < 0 || HS_VALISNULL(entries, idx))
{
out_nulls[i] = true;
out_datums[i] = (Datum) 0;
else
{
out_datums[i] = PointerGetDatum(
- cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_VAL(entries,ptr,idx),
- HS_VALLEN(entries,idx)));
+ cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_VAL(entries, ptr, idx),
+ HS_VALLEN(entries, idx)));
out_nulls[i] = false;
}
}
ARR_NDIM(key_array),
ARR_DIMS(key_array),
ARR_LBOUND(key_array),
- TEXTOID, -1, false, 'i');
+ TEXTOID, -1, false, 'i');
PG_RETURN_POINTER(aout);
}
{
HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(hs);
- char *ptr = STRPTR(hs);
+ char *ptr = STRPTR(hs);
ArrayType *key_array = PG_GETARG_ARRAYTYPE_P(1);
- HStore *out;
- int nkeys;
- Pairs *key_pairs = hstoreArrayToPairs(key_array, &nkeys);
- Pairs *out_pairs;
- int bufsiz;
- int lastidx = 0;
- int i;
- int out_count = 0;
+ HStore *out;
+ int nkeys;
+ Pairs *key_pairs = hstoreArrayToPairs(key_array, &nkeys);
+ Pairs *out_pairs;
+ int bufsiz;
+ int lastidx = 0;
+ int i;
+ int out_count = 0;
if (nkeys == 0)
{
bufsiz = 0;
/*
- * we exploit the fact that the pairs list is already sorted into
- * strictly increasing order to narrow the hstoreFindKey search;
- * each search can start one entry past the previous "found"
- * entry, or at the lower bound of the last search.
+ * we exploit the fact that the pairs list is already sorted into strictly
+ * increasing order to narrow the hstoreFindKey search; each search can
+ * start one entry past the previous "found" entry, or at the lower bound
+ * of the last search.
*/
for (i = 0; i < nkeys; ++i)
{
- int idx = hstoreFindKey(hs, &lastidx,
- key_pairs[i].key, key_pairs[i].keylen);
+ int idx = hstoreFindKey(hs, &lastidx,
+ key_pairs[i].key, key_pairs[i].keylen);
if (idx >= 0)
{
out_pairs[out_count].key = key_pairs[i].key;
bufsiz += (out_pairs[out_count].keylen = key_pairs[i].keylen);
- out_pairs[out_count].val = HS_VAL(entries,ptr,idx);
- bufsiz += (out_pairs[out_count].vallen = HS_VALLEN(entries,idx));
- out_pairs[out_count].isnull = HS_VALISNULL(entries,idx);
+ out_pairs[out_count].val = HS_VAL(entries, ptr, idx);
+ bufsiz += (out_pairs[out_count].vallen = HS_VALLEN(entries, idx));
+ out_pairs[out_count].isnull = HS_VALISNULL(entries, idx);
out_pairs[out_count].needfree = false;
++out_count;
}
}
/*
- * we don't use uniquePairs here because we know that the
- * pairs list is already sorted and uniq'ed.
+ * we don't use uniquePairs here because we know that the pairs list is
+ * already sorted and uniq'ed.
*/
out = hstorePairs(out_pairs, out_count, bufsiz);
ArrayType *a;
HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(hs);
char *base = STRPTR(hs);
- int count = HS_COUNT(hs);
- int i;
+ int count = HS_COUNT(hs);
+ int i;
if (count == 0)
{
for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
{
- text *item = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_KEY(entries,base,i),
- HS_KEYLEN(entries,i));
+ text *item = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_KEY(entries, base, i),
+ HS_KEYLEN(entries, i));
+
d[i] = PointerGetDatum(item);
}
a = construct_array(d, count,
- TEXTOID, -1, false, 'i');
+ TEXTOID, -1, false, 'i');
PG_RETURN_POINTER(a);
}
{
HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
Datum *d;
- bool *nulls;
+ bool *nulls;
ArrayType *a;
HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(hs);
char *base = STRPTR(hs);
- int count = HS_COUNT(hs);
- int lb = 1;
- int i;
+ int count = HS_COUNT(hs);
+ int lb = 1;
+ int i;
if (count == 0)
{
for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
{
- if (HS_VALISNULL(entries,i))
+ if (HS_VALISNULL(entries, i))
{
d[i] = (Datum) 0;
nulls[i] = true;
}
else
{
- text *item = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_VAL(entries,base,i),
- HS_VALLEN(entries,i));
+ text *item = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_VAL(entries, base, i),
+ HS_VALLEN(entries, i));
+
d[i] = PointerGetDatum(item);
nulls[i] = false;
}
}
a = construct_md_array(d, nulls, 1, &count, &lb,
- TEXTOID, -1, false, 'i');
+ TEXTOID, -1, false, 'i');
PG_RETURN_POINTER(a);
}
{
HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(hs);
char *base = STRPTR(hs);
- int count = HS_COUNT(hs);
- int out_size[2] = { 0, 2 };
- int lb[2] = { 1, 1 };
+ int count = HS_COUNT(hs);
+ int out_size[2] = {0, 2};
+ int lb[2] = {1, 1};
Datum *out_datums;
bool *out_nulls;
- int i;
+ int i;
Assert(ndims < 3);
for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
{
- text *key = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_KEY(entries,base,i),
- HS_KEYLEN(entries,i));
- out_datums[i*2] = PointerGetDatum(key);
- out_nulls[i*2] = false;
+ text *key = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_KEY(entries, base, i),
+ HS_KEYLEN(entries, i));
+
+ out_datums[i * 2] = PointerGetDatum(key);
+ out_nulls[i * 2] = false;
- if (HS_VALISNULL(entries,i))
+ if (HS_VALISNULL(entries, i))
{
- out_datums[i*2+1] = (Datum) 0;
- out_nulls[i*2+1] = true;
+ out_datums[i * 2 + 1] = (Datum) 0;
+ out_nulls[i * 2 + 1] = true;
}
else
{
- text *item = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_VAL(entries,base,i),
- HS_VALLEN(entries,i));
- out_datums[i*2+1] = PointerGetDatum(item);
- out_nulls[i*2+1] = false;
+ text *item = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_VAL(entries, base, i),
+ HS_VALLEN(entries, i));
+
+ out_datums[i * 2 + 1] = PointerGetDatum(item);
+ out_nulls[i * 2 + 1] = false;
}
}
Datum
hstore_to_array(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
+ HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
ArrayType *out = hstore_to_array_internal(hs, 1);
PG_RETURN_POINTER(out);
Datum
hstore_to_matrix(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
+ HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
ArrayType *out = hstore_to_array_internal(hs, 2);
PG_RETURN_POINTER(out);
*/
static void
-setup_firstcall(FuncCallContext *funcctx, HStore * hs,
+setup_firstcall(FuncCallContext *funcctx, HStore *hs,
FunctionCallInfoData *fcinfo)
{
MemoryContext oldcontext;
- HStore *st;
+ HStore *st;
oldcontext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(funcctx->multi_call_memory_ctx);
/* Build a tuple descriptor for our result type */
if (get_call_result_type(fcinfo, NULL, &tupdesc) != TYPEFUNC_COMPOSITE)
elog(ERROR, "return type must be a row type");
-
+
funcctx->tuple_desc = BlessTupleDesc(tupdesc);
}
hstore_skeys(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
FuncCallContext *funcctx;
- HStore *hs;
- int i;
+ HStore *hs;
+ int i;
if (SRF_IS_FIRSTCALL())
{
if (i < HS_COUNT(hs))
{
- HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(hs);
+ HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(hs);
text *item;
- item = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_KEY(entries,STRPTR(hs),i),
- HS_KEYLEN(entries,i));
+ item = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_KEY(entries, STRPTR(hs), i),
+ HS_KEYLEN(entries, i));
SRF_RETURN_NEXT(funcctx, PointerGetDatum(item));
}
hstore_svals(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
FuncCallContext *funcctx;
- HStore *hs;
- int i;
+ HStore *hs;
+ int i;
if (SRF_IS_FIRSTCALL())
{
if (i < HS_COUNT(hs))
{
- HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(hs);
+ HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(hs);
- if (HS_VALISNULL(entries,i))
+ if (HS_VALISNULL(entries, i))
{
ReturnSetInfo *rsi;
{
text *item;
- item = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_VAL(entries,STRPTR(hs),i),
- HS_VALLEN(entries,i));
+ item = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_VAL(entries, STRPTR(hs), i),
+ HS_VALLEN(entries, i));
SRF_RETURN_NEXT(funcctx, PointerGetDatum(item));
}
char *tstr = STRPTR(tmpl);
HEntry *ve = ARRPTR(val);
char *vstr = STRPTR(val);
- int tcount = HS_COUNT(tmpl);
- int lastidx = 0;
- int i;
+ int tcount = HS_COUNT(tmpl);
+ int lastidx = 0;
+ int i;
/*
- * we exploit the fact that keys in "tmpl" are in strictly
- * increasing order to narrow the hstoreFindKey search; each search
- * can start one entry past the previous "found" entry, or at the
- * lower bound of the search
+ * we exploit the fact that keys in "tmpl" are in strictly increasing
+ * order to narrow the hstoreFindKey search; each search can start one
+ * entry past the previous "found" entry, or at the lower bound of the
+ * search
*/
for (i = 0; res && i < tcount; ++i)
{
- int idx = hstoreFindKey(val, &lastidx,
- HS_KEY(te,tstr,i), HS_KEYLEN(te,i));
+ int idx = hstoreFindKey(val, &lastidx,
+ HS_KEY(te, tstr, i), HS_KEYLEN(te, i));
if (idx >= 0)
{
- bool nullval = HS_VALISNULL(te,i);
- int vallen = HS_VALLEN(te,i);
+ bool nullval = HS_VALISNULL(te, i);
+ int vallen = HS_VALLEN(te, i);
- if (nullval != HS_VALISNULL(ve,idx)
+ if (nullval != HS_VALISNULL(ve, idx)
|| (!nullval
- && (vallen != HS_VALLEN(ve,idx)
- || strncmp(HS_VAL(te,tstr,i), HS_VAL(ve,vstr,idx), vallen))))
+ && (vallen != HS_VALLEN(ve, idx)
+ || strncmp(HS_VAL(te, tstr, i), HS_VAL(ve, vstr, idx), vallen))))
res = false;
}
else
hstore_each(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
FuncCallContext *funcctx;
- HStore *hs;
- int i;
+ HStore *hs;
+ int i;
if (SRF_IS_FIRSTCALL())
{
if (i < HS_COUNT(hs))
{
HEntry *entries = ARRPTR(hs);
- char *ptr = STRPTR(hs);
+ char *ptr = STRPTR(hs);
Datum res,
dvalues[2];
bool nulls[2] = {false, false};
text *item;
HeapTuple tuple;
- item = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_KEY(entries,ptr,i),
- HS_KEYLEN(entries,i));
+ item = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_KEY(entries, ptr, i),
+ HS_KEYLEN(entries, i));
dvalues[0] = PointerGetDatum(item);
- if (HS_VALISNULL(entries,i))
+ if (HS_VALISNULL(entries, i))
{
dvalues[1] = (Datum) 0;
nulls[1] = true;
}
else
{
- item = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_VAL(entries,ptr,i),
- HS_VALLEN(entries,i));
+ item = cstring_to_text_with_len(HS_VAL(entries, ptr, i),
+ HS_VALLEN(entries, i));
dvalues[1] = PointerGetDatum(item);
}
{
HStore *hs1 = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
HStore *hs2 = PG_GETARG_HS(1);
- int hcount1 = HS_COUNT(hs1);
- int hcount2 = HS_COUNT(hs2);
- int res = 0;
+ int hcount1 = HS_COUNT(hs1);
+ int hcount2 = HS_COUNT(hs2);
+ int res = 0;
if (hcount1 == 0 || hcount2 == 0)
{
/*
- * if either operand is empty, and the other is nonempty, the
- * nonempty one is larger. If both are empty they are equal.
+ * if either operand is empty, and the other is nonempty, the nonempty
+ * one is larger. If both are empty they are equal.
*/
if (hcount1 > 0)
res = 1;
else
{
/* here we know both operands are nonempty */
- char *str1 = STRPTR(hs1);
- char *str2 = STRPTR(hs2);
- HEntry *ent1 = ARRPTR(hs1);
- HEntry *ent2 = ARRPTR(hs2);
- size_t len1 = HSE_ENDPOS(ent1[2*hcount1 - 1]);
- size_t len2 = HSE_ENDPOS(ent2[2*hcount2 - 1]);
+ char *str1 = STRPTR(hs1);
+ char *str2 = STRPTR(hs2);
+ HEntry *ent1 = ARRPTR(hs1);
+ HEntry *ent2 = ARRPTR(hs2);
+ size_t len1 = HSE_ENDPOS(ent1[2 * hcount1 - 1]);
+ size_t len2 = HSE_ENDPOS(ent2[2 * hcount2 - 1]);
- res = memcmp(str1, str2, Min(len1,len2));
+ res = memcmp(str1, str2, Min(len1, len2));
if (res == 0)
{
res = -1;
else
{
- int count = hcount1 * 2;
- int i;
+ int count = hcount1 * 2;
+ int i;
for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
if (HSE_ENDPOS(ent1[i]) != HSE_ENDPOS(ent2[i]) ||
}
/*
- * this is a btree support function; this is one of the few
- * places where memory needs to be explicitly freed.
+ * this is a btree support function; this is one of the few places where
+ * memory needs to be explicitly freed.
*/
- PG_FREE_IF_COPY(hs1,0);
- PG_FREE_IF_COPY(hs2,1);
+ PG_FREE_IF_COPY(hs1, 0);
+ PG_FREE_IF_COPY(hs2, 1);
PG_RETURN_INT32(res);
}
Datum
hstore_eq(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- int res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(hstore_cmp,
- PG_GETARG_DATUM(0),
- PG_GETARG_DATUM(1)));
+ int res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(hstore_cmp,
+ PG_GETARG_DATUM(0),
+ PG_GETARG_DATUM(1)));
+
PG_RETURN_BOOL(res == 0);
}
Datum
hstore_ne(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- int res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(hstore_cmp,
- PG_GETARG_DATUM(0),
- PG_GETARG_DATUM(1)));
+ int res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(hstore_cmp,
+ PG_GETARG_DATUM(0),
+ PG_GETARG_DATUM(1)));
+
PG_RETURN_BOOL(res != 0);
}
Datum
hstore_gt(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- int res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(hstore_cmp,
- PG_GETARG_DATUM(0),
- PG_GETARG_DATUM(1)));
+ int res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(hstore_cmp,
+ PG_GETARG_DATUM(0),
+ PG_GETARG_DATUM(1)));
+
PG_RETURN_BOOL(res > 0);
}
Datum
hstore_ge(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- int res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(hstore_cmp,
- PG_GETARG_DATUM(0),
- PG_GETARG_DATUM(1)));
+ int res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(hstore_cmp,
+ PG_GETARG_DATUM(0),
+ PG_GETARG_DATUM(1)));
+
PG_RETURN_BOOL(res >= 0);
}
Datum
hstore_lt(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- int res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(hstore_cmp,
- PG_GETARG_DATUM(0),
- PG_GETARG_DATUM(1)));
+ int res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(hstore_cmp,
+ PG_GETARG_DATUM(0),
+ PG_GETARG_DATUM(1)));
+
PG_RETURN_BOOL(res < 0);
}
Datum
hstore_le(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- int res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(hstore_cmp,
- PG_GETARG_DATUM(0),
- PG_GETARG_DATUM(1)));
+ int res = DatumGetInt32(DirectFunctionCall2(hstore_cmp,
+ PG_GETARG_DATUM(0),
+ PG_GETARG_DATUM(1)));
+
PG_RETURN_BOOL(res <= 0);
}
hstore_hash(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
HStore *hs = PG_GETARG_HS(0);
- Datum hval = hash_any((unsigned char *)VARDATA(hs),
+ Datum hval = hash_any((unsigned char *) VARDATA(hs),
VARSIZE(hs) - VARHDRSZ);
/*
- * this is the only place in the code that cares whether the
- * overall varlena size exactly matches the true data size;
- * this assertion should be maintained by all the other code,
- * but we make it explicit here.
+ * this is the only place in the code that cares whether the overall
+ * varlena size exactly matches the true data size; this assertion should
+ * be maintained by all the other code, but we make it explicit here.
*/
Assert(VARSIZE(hs) ==
(HS_COUNT(hs) != 0 ?
CALCDATASIZE(HS_COUNT(hs),
- HSE_ENDPOS(ARRPTR(hs)[2*HS_COUNT(hs) - 1])) :
+ HSE_ENDPOS(ARRPTR(hs)[2 * HS_COUNT(hs) - 1])) :
HSHRDSIZE));
- PG_FREE_IF_COPY(hs,0);
+ PG_FREE_IF_COPY(hs, 0);
PG_RETURN_DATUM(hval);
}
* isn.c
* PostgreSQL type definitions for ISNs (ISBN, ISMN, ISSN, EAN13, UPC)
*
- * Author: German Mendez Bravo (Kronuz)
+ * Author: German Mendez Bravo (Kronuz)
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/isn/isn.c,v 1.13 2010/02/05 04:34:51 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/isn/isn.c,v 1.14 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* isn.h
* PostgreSQL type definitions for ISNs (ISBN, ISMN, ISSN, EAN13, UPC)
*
- * Author: German Mendez Bravo (Kronuz)
+ * Author: German Mendez Bravo (Kronuz)
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/isn/isn.h,v 1.9 2010/02/05 04:34:51 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/isn/isn.h,v 1.10 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* Originally by
* B. Palmer, bpalmer@crimelabs.net 1-17-2001
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/oid2name/oid2name.c,v 1.37 2010/02/07 20:48:08 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/oid2name/oid2name.c,v 1.38 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "postgres_fe.h"
/* get the oid and database name from the system pg_database table */
snprintf(todo, sizeof(todo),
"SELECT d.oid AS \"Oid\", datname AS \"Database Name\", "
- "spcname AS \"Tablespace\" FROM pg_catalog.pg_database d JOIN pg_catalog.pg_tablespace t ON "
+ "spcname AS \"Tablespace\" FROM pg_catalog.pg_database d JOIN pg_catalog.pg_tablespace t ON "
"(dattablespace = t.oid) ORDER BY 2");
sql_exec(conn, todo, opts->quiet);
char *addfields = ",c.oid AS \"Oid\", nspname AS \"Schema\", spcname as \"Tablespace\" ";
snprintf(todo, sizeof(todo),
- "SELECT pg_catalog.pg_relation_filenode(c.oid) as \"Filenode\", relname as \"Table Name\" %s "
+ "SELECT pg_catalog.pg_relation_filenode(c.oid) as \"Filenode\", relname as \"Table Name\" %s "
"FROM pg_class c "
" LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_namespace n ON n.oid = c.relnamespace "
- " LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_database d ON d.datname = pg_catalog.current_database(),"
+ " LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_database d ON d.datname = pg_catalog.current_database(),"
" pg_catalog.pg_tablespace t "
"WHERE relkind IN ('r'%s%s) AND "
" %s"
/* now build the query */
todo = (char *) myalloc(650 + strlen(qualifiers));
snprintf(todo, 650 + strlen(qualifiers),
- "SELECT pg_catalog.pg_relation_filenode(c.oid) as \"Filenode\", relname as \"Table Name\" %s\n"
+ "SELECT pg_catalog.pg_relation_filenode(c.oid) as \"Filenode\", relname as \"Table Name\" %s\n"
"FROM pg_catalog.pg_class c \n"
" LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_namespace n ON n.oid = c.relnamespace \n"
" LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_database d ON d.datname = pg_catalog.current_database(),\n"
* Author: Laurenz Albe <laurenz.albe@wien.gv.at>
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/passwordcheck/passwordcheck.c,v 1.2 2010/01/02 16:57:32 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/passwordcheck/passwordcheck.c,v 1.3 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
switch (password_type)
{
case PASSWORD_TYPE_MD5:
+
/*
- * Unfortunately we cannot perform exhaustive checks on
- * encrypted passwords - we are restricted to guessing.
- * (Alternatively, we could insist on the password being
- * presented non-encrypted, but that has its own security
- * disadvantages.)
+ * Unfortunately we cannot perform exhaustive checks on encrypted
+ * passwords - we are restricted to guessing. (Alternatively, we
+ * could insist on the password being presented non-encrypted, but
+ * that has its own security disadvantages.)
*
* We only check for username = password.
*/
break;
case PASSWORD_TYPE_PLAINTEXT:
+
/*
* For unencrypted passwords we can perform better checks
*/
for (i = 0; i < pwdlen; i++)
{
/*
- * isalpha() does not work for multibyte encodings
- * but let's consider non-ASCII characters non-letters
+ * isalpha() does not work for multibyte encodings but let's
+ * consider non-ASCII characters non-letters
*/
if (isalpha((unsigned char) password[i]))
pwd_has_letter = true;
if (!pwd_has_letter || !pwd_has_nonletter)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
- errmsg("password must contain both letters and nonletters")));
+ errmsg("password must contain both letters and nonletters")));
#ifdef USE_CRACKLIB
/* call cracklib to check password */
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c,v 1.27 2009/11/04 12:51:30 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_standby/pg_standby.c,v 1.28 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*
*
* pg_standby.c
}
#ifndef WIN32
+
/*
* You can send SIGUSR1 to trigger failover.
*
}
break;
case 'l': /* Use link */
+
/*
- * Link feature disabled, possibly permanently. Linking
- * causes a problem after recovery ends that is not currently
+ * Link feature disabled, possibly permanently. Linking causes
+ * a problem after recovery ends that is not currently
* resolved by PostgreSQL. 25 Jun 2009
*/
#ifdef NOT_USED
* Copyright (c) 2008-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_stat_statements/pg_stat_statements.c,v 1.12 2010/01/08 00:38:19 itagaki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_stat_statements/pg_stat_statements.c,v 1.13 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
*/
typedef struct Counters
{
- int64 calls; /* # of times executed */
- double total_time; /* total execution time in seconds */
- int64 rows; /* total # of retrieved or affected rows */
+ int64 calls; /* # of times executed */
+ double total_time; /* total execution time in seconds */
+ int64 rows; /* total # of retrieved or affected rows */
int64 shared_blks_hit; /* # of shared buffer hits */
- int64 shared_blks_read; /* # of shared disk blocks read */
- int64 shared_blks_written;/* # of shared disk blocks written */
- int64 local_blks_hit; /* # of local buffer hits */
+ int64 shared_blks_read; /* # of shared disk blocks read */
+ int64 shared_blks_written; /* # of shared disk blocks written */
+ int64 local_blks_hit; /* # of local buffer hits */
int64 local_blks_read; /* # of local disk blocks read */
- int64 local_blks_written; /* # of local disk blocks written */
- int64 temp_blks_read; /* # of temp blocks read */
- int64 temp_blks_written; /* # of temp blocks written */
- double usage; /* usage factor */
+ int64 local_blks_written; /* # of local disk blocks written */
+ int64 temp_blks_read; /* # of temp blocks read */
+ int64 temp_blks_written; /* # of temp blocks written */
+ double usage; /* usage factor */
} Counters;
/*
static int pgss_max; /* max # statements to track */
static int pgss_track; /* tracking level */
-static bool pgss_track_utility; /* whether to track utility commands */
+static bool pgss_track_utility; /* whether to track utility commands */
static bool pgss_save; /* whether to save stats across shutdown */
long count);
static void pgss_ExecutorEnd(QueryDesc *queryDesc);
static void pgss_ProcessUtility(Node *parsetree,
- const char *queryString, ParamListInfo params, bool isTopLevel,
- DestReceiver *dest, char *completionTag);
+ const char *queryString, ParamListInfo params, bool isTopLevel,
+ DestReceiver *dest, char *completionTag);
static uint32 pgss_hash_fn(const void *key, Size keysize);
static int pgss_match_fn(const void *key1, const void *key2, Size keysize);
static void pgss_store(const char *query, double total_time, uint64 rows,
- const BufferUsage *bufusage);
+ const BufferUsage *bufusage);
static Size pgss_memsize(void);
static pgssEntry *entry_alloc(pgssHashKey *key);
static void entry_dealloc(void);
NULL);
DefineCustomBoolVariable("pg_stat_statements.track_utility",
- "Selects whether utility commands are tracked by pg_stat_statements.",
+ "Selects whether utility commands are tracked by pg_stat_statements.",
NULL,
&pgss_track_utility,
true,
on_shmem_exit(pgss_shmem_shutdown, (Datum) 0);
/*
- * Attempt to load old statistics from the dump file, if this is the
- * first time through and we weren't told not to.
+ * Attempt to load old statistics from the dump file, if this is the first
+ * time through and we weren't told not to.
*/
if (found || !pgss_save)
return;
instr_time start;
instr_time duration;
uint64 rows = 0;
- BufferUsage bufusage;
+ BufferUsage bufusage;
bufusage = pgBufferUsage;
INSTR_TIME_SET_CURRENT(start);
* A simple benchmark program for PostgreSQL
* Originally written by Tatsuo Ishii and enhanced by many contributors.
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c,v 1.96 2010/01/06 01:30:03 itagaki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c,v 1.97 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
* Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* ALL RIGHTS RESERVED;
*
*/
#ifdef WIN32
-#define FD_SETSIZE 1024 /* set before winsock2.h is included */
+#define FD_SETSIZE 1024 /* set before winsock2.h is included */
#endif /* ! WIN32 */
#include "postgres_fe.h"
#ifdef WIN32
/* Use native win32 threads on Windows */
-typedef struct win32_pthread *pthread_t;
-typedef int pthread_attr_t;
-
-static int pthread_create(pthread_t *thread, pthread_attr_t *attr, void * (*start_routine)(void *), void *arg);
-static int pthread_join(pthread_t th, void **thread_return);
+typedef struct win32_pthread *pthread_t;
+typedef int pthread_attr_t;
+static int pthread_create(pthread_t *thread, pthread_attr_t *attr, void *(*start_routine) (void *), void *arg);
+static int pthread_join(pthread_t th, void **thread_return);
#elif defined(ENABLE_THREAD_SAFETY)
/* Use platform-dependent pthread capability */
#include <pthread.h>
-
#else
/* Use emulation with fork. Rename pthread identifiers to avoid conflicts */
#define pthread_create pg_pthread_create
#define pthread_join pg_pthread_join
-typedef struct fork_pthread *pthread_t;
-typedef int pthread_attr_t;
-
-static int pthread_create(pthread_t *thread, pthread_attr_t *attr, void * (*start_routine)(void *), void *arg);
-static int pthread_join(pthread_t th, void **thread_return);
+typedef struct fork_pthread *pthread_t;
+typedef int pthread_attr_t;
+static int pthread_create(pthread_t *thread, pthread_attr_t *attr, void *(*start_routine) (void *), void *arg);
+static int pthread_join(pthread_t th, void **thread_return);
#endif
extern char *optarg;
* end of configurable parameters
*********************************************************************/
-#define nbranches 1 /* Makes little sense to change this. Change -s instead */
+#define nbranches 1 /* Makes little sense to change this. Change
+ * -s instead */
#define ntellers 10
#define naccounts 100000
} Variable;
#define MAX_FILES 128 /* max number of SQL script files allowed */
-#define SHELL_COMMAND_SIZE 256 /* maximum size allowed for shell command */
+#define SHELL_COMMAND_SIZE 256 /* maximum size allowed for shell command */
/*
* structures used in custom query mode
*/
typedef struct
{
- pthread_t thread; /* thread handle */
- CState *state; /* array of CState */
- int nstate; /* length of state[] */
- instr_time start_time; /* thread start time */
+ pthread_t thread; /* thread handle */
+ CState *state; /* array of CState */
+ int nstate; /* length of state[] */
+ instr_time start_time; /* thread start time */
} TState;
#define INVALID_THREAD ((pthread_t) 0)
typedef struct
{
- instr_time conn_time;
- int xacts;
+ instr_time conn_time;
+ int xacts;
} TResult;
/*
char *argv[MAX_ARGS]; /* command list */
} Command;
-static Command **sql_files[MAX_FILES]; /* SQL script files */
-static int num_files; /* number of script files */
-static int debug = 0; /* debug flag */
+static Command **sql_files[MAX_FILES]; /* SQL script files */
+static int num_files; /* number of script files */
+static int debug = 0; /* debug flag */
/* default scenario */
static char *tpc_b = {
/* Function prototypes */
static void setalarm(int seconds);
-static void* threadRun(void *arg);
+static void *threadRun(void *arg);
static void
usage(const char *progname)
static bool
isLegalVariableName(const char *name)
{
- int i;
+ int i;
for (i = 0; name[i] != '\0'; i++)
{
static bool
runShellCommand(CState *st, char *variable, char **argv, int argc)
{
- char command[SHELL_COMMAND_SIZE];
- int i,
- len = 0;
- FILE *fp;
- char res[64];
- char *endptr;
- int retval;
+ char command[SHELL_COMMAND_SIZE];
+ int i,
+ len = 0;
+ FILE *fp;
+ char res[64];
+ char *endptr;
+ int retval;
/*
* Join arguments with whilespace separaters. Arguments starting with
- * exactly one colon are treated as variables:
- * name - append a string "name"
- * :var - append a variable named 'var'.
- * ::name - append a string ":name"
+ * exactly one colon are treated as variables: name - append a string
+ * "name" :var - append a variable named 'var'. ::name - append a string
+ * ":name"
*/
for (i = 0; i < argc; i++)
{
- char *arg;
- int arglen;
+ char *arg;
+ int arglen;
if (argv[i][0] != ':')
{
- arg = argv[i]; /* a string literal */
+ arg = argv[i]; /* a string literal */
}
else if (argv[i][1] == ':')
{
static bool
clientDone(CState *st, bool ok)
{
- (void) ok; /* unused */
+ (void) ok; /* unused */
if (st->con != NULL)
{
PQfinish(st->con);
st->con = NULL;
}
- return false; /* always false */
+ return false; /* always false */
}
/* return false iff client should be disconnected */
{
case PGRES_COMMAND_OK:
case PGRES_TUPLES_OK:
- break; /* OK */
+ break; /* OK */
default:
fprintf(stderr, "Client %d aborted in state %d: %s",
- st->id, st->state, PQerrorMessage(st->con));
+ st->id, st->state, PQerrorMessage(st->con));
PQclear(res);
return clientDone(st, false);
}
if (st->con == NULL)
{
- instr_time start, end;
+ instr_time start,
+ end;
INSTR_TIME_SET_CURRENT(start);
if ((st->con = doConnect()) == NULL)
{
char *var;
int usec;
- instr_time now;
+ instr_time now;
if (*argv[1] == ':')
{
}
else if (pg_strcasecmp(argv[0], "setshell") == 0)
{
- bool ret = runShellCommand(st, argv[1], argv + 2, argc - 2);
+ bool ret = runShellCommand(st, argv[1], argv + 2, argc - 2);
- if (timer_exceeded) /* timeout */
+ if (timer_exceeded) /* timeout */
return clientDone(st, true);
else if (!ret) /* on error */
{
}
else if (pg_strcasecmp(argv[0], "shell") == 0)
{
- bool ret = runShellCommand(st, NULL, argv + 1, argc - 1);
+ bool ret = runShellCommand(st, NULL, argv + 1, argc - 1);
- if (timer_exceeded) /* timeout */
+ if (timer_exceeded) /* timeout */
return clientDone(st, true);
else if (!ret) /* on error */
{
*/
if (my_commands->argv[1][0] != ':')
{
- char *c = my_commands->argv[1];
+ char *c = my_commands->argv[1];
while (isdigit((unsigned char) *c))
c++;
time_include = INSTR_TIME_GET_DOUBLE(total_time);
tps_include = normal_xacts / time_include;
tps_exclude = normal_xacts / (time_include -
- (INSTR_TIME_GET_DOUBLE(conn_total_time) / nthreads));
+ (INSTR_TIME_GET_DOUBLE(conn_total_time) / nthreads));
if (ttype == 0)
s = "TPC-B (sort of)";
main(int argc, char **argv)
{
int c;
- int nclients = 1; /* default number of simulated clients */
- int nthreads = 1; /* default number of threads */
+ int nclients = 1; /* default number of simulated clients */
+ int nthreads = 1; /* default number of threads */
int is_init_mode = 0; /* initialize mode? */
int is_no_vacuum = 0; /* no vacuum at all before testing? */
int do_vacuum_accounts = 0; /* do vacuum accounts before testing? */
}
#endif /* HAVE_GETRLIMIT */
break;
- case 'j': /* jobs */
+ case 'j': /* jobs */
nthreads = atoi(optarg);
if (nthreads <= 0)
{
/* the first thread (i = 0) is executed by main thread */
if (i > 0)
{
- int err = pthread_create(&threads[i].thread, NULL, threadRun, &threads[i]);
+ int err = pthread_create(&threads[i].thread, NULL, threadRun, &threads[i]);
+
if (err != 0 || threads[i].thread == INVALID_THREAD)
{
fprintf(stderr, "cannot create thread: %s\n", strerror(err));
INSTR_TIME_SET_ZERO(conn_total_time);
for (i = 0; i < nthreads; i++)
{
- void *ret = NULL;
+ void *ret = NULL;
if (threads[i].thread == INVALID_THREAD)
ret = threadRun(&threads[i]);
if (ret != NULL)
{
- TResult *r = (TResult *) ret;
+ TResult *r = (TResult *) ret;
+
total_xacts += r->xacts;
INSTR_TIME_ADD(conn_total_time, r->conn_time);
free(ret);
{
TState *thread = (TState *) arg;
CState *state = thread->state;
- TResult *result;
- instr_time start, end;
+ TResult *result;
+ instr_time start,
+ end;
int nstate = thread->nstate;
- int remains = nstate; /* number of remaining clients */
+ int remains = nstate; /* number of remaining clients */
int i;
result = malloc(sizeof(TResult));
st->use_file = getrand(0, num_files - 1);
if (!doCustom(st, &result->conn_time))
- remains--; /* I've aborted */
+ remains--; /* I've aborted */
if (st->ecnt > prev_ecnt && commands[st->state]->type == META_COMMAND)
{
while (remains > 0)
{
- fd_set input_mask;
- int maxsock; /* max socket number to be waited */
- int64 now_usec = 0;
- int64 min_usec;
+ fd_set input_mask;
+ int maxsock; /* max socket number to be waited */
+ int64 now_usec = 0;
+ int64 min_usec;
FD_ZERO(&input_mask);
if (min_usec == INT64_MAX)
{
instr_time now;
+
INSTR_TIME_SET_CURRENT(now);
now_usec = INSTR_TIME_GET_MICROSEC(now);
}
goto done;
}
- FD_SET(sock, &input_mask);
+ FD_SET (sock, &input_mask);
+
if (maxsock < sock)
maxsock = sock;
}
if (min_usec > 0 && maxsock != -1)
{
- int nsocks; /* return from select(2) */
+ int nsocks; /* return from select(2) */
if (min_usec != INT64_MAX)
{
- struct timeval timeout;
+ struct timeval timeout;
+
timeout.tv_sec = min_usec / 1000000;
timeout.tv_usec = min_usec % 1000000;
nsocks = select(maxsock + 1, &input_mask, NULL, NULL, &timeout);
int prev_ecnt = st->ecnt;
if (st->con && (FD_ISSET(PQsocket(st->con), &input_mask)
- || commands[st->state]->type == META_COMMAND))
+ || commands[st->state]->type == META_COMMAND))
{
if (!doCustom(st, &result->conn_time))
- remains--; /* I've aborted */
+ remains--; /* I've aborted */
}
if (st->ecnt > prev_ecnt && commands[st->state]->type == META_COMMAND)
typedef struct fork_pthread
{
- pid_t pid;
- int pipes[2];
-} fork_pthread;
+ pid_t pid;
+ int pipes[2];
+} fork_pthread;
static int
pthread_create(pthread_t *thread,
pthread_attr_t *attr,
- void * (*start_routine)(void *),
+ void *(*start_routine) (void *),
void *arg)
{
- fork_pthread *th;
- void *ret;
- instr_time start_time;
+ fork_pthread *th;
+ void *ret;
+ instr_time start_time;
th = (fork_pthread *) malloc(sizeof(fork_pthread));
pipe(th->pipes);
th->pid = fork();
- if (th->pid == -1) /* error */
+ if (th->pid == -1) /* error */
{
free(th);
return errno;
}
- if (th->pid != 0) /* in parent process */
+ if (th->pid != 0) /* in parent process */
{
close(th->pipes[1]);
*thread = th;
setalarm(duration);
/*
- * Set a different random seed in each child process. Otherwise they
- * all inherit the parent's state and generate the same "random"
- * sequence. (In the threaded case, the different threads will obtain
- * subsets of the output of a single random() sequence, which should be
- * okay for our purposes.)
+ * Set a different random seed in each child process. Otherwise they all
+ * inherit the parent's state and generate the same "random" sequence.
+ * (In the threaded case, the different threads will obtain subsets of the
+ * output of a single random() sequence, which should be okay for our
+ * purposes.)
*/
INSTR_TIME_SET_CURRENT(start_time);
srandom(((unsigned int) INSTR_TIME_GET_MICROSEC(start_time)) +
static int
pthread_join(pthread_t th, void **thread_return)
{
- int status;
+ int status;
while (waitpid(th->pid, &status, 0) != th->pid)
{
free(th);
return 0;
}
-
#endif
-
#else /* WIN32 */
static VOID CALLBACK
typedef struct win32_pthread
{
HANDLE handle;
- void *(*routine)(void *);
+ void *(*routine) (void *);
void *arg;
void *result;
} win32_pthread;
static int
pthread_create(pthread_t *thread,
pthread_attr_t *attr,
- void * (*start_routine)(void *),
+ void *(*start_routine) (void *),
void *arg)
{
- int save_errno;
- win32_pthread *th;
+ int save_errno;
+ win32_pthread *th;
th = (win32_pthread *) malloc(sizeof(win32_pthread));
th->routine = start_routine;
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* unaccent.c
- * Text search unaccent dictionary
+ * Text search unaccent dictionary
*
* Copyright (c) 2009-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/unaccent/unaccent.c,v 1.4 2010/01/02 16:57:33 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/unaccent/unaccent.c,v 1.5 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
PG_MODULE_MAGIC;
/*
- * Unaccent dictionary uses uncompressed suffix tree to find a
- * character to replace. Each node of tree is an array of
+ * Unaccent dictionary uses uncompressed suffix tree to find a
+ * character to replace. Each node of tree is an array of
* SuffixChar struct with length = 256 (n-th element of array
* corresponds to byte)
*/
-typedef struct SuffixChar {
- struct SuffixChar *nextChar;
- char *replaceTo;
- int replacelen;
+typedef struct SuffixChar
+{
+ struct SuffixChar *nextChar;
+ char *replaceTo;
+ int replacelen;
} SuffixChar;
/*
* placeChar - put str into tree's structure, byte by byte.
*/
-static SuffixChar*
+static SuffixChar *
placeChar(SuffixChar *node, unsigned char *str, int lenstr, char *replaceTo, int replacelen)
{
- SuffixChar *curnode;
+ SuffixChar *curnode;
- if ( !node )
+ if (!node)
{
node = palloc(sizeof(SuffixChar) * 256);
memset(node, 0, sizeof(SuffixChar) * 256);
curnode = node + *str;
- if ( lenstr == 1 )
+ if (lenstr == 1)
{
- if ( curnode->replaceTo )
+ if (curnode->replaceTo)
elog(WARNING, "duplicate TO argument, use first one");
else
{
curnode->replacelen = replacelen;
- curnode->replaceTo = palloc( replacelen );
+ curnode->replaceTo = palloc(replacelen);
memcpy(curnode->replaceTo, replaceTo, replacelen);
}
}
else
{
- curnode->nextChar = placeChar( curnode->nextChar, str+1, lenstr-1, replaceTo, replacelen);
+ curnode->nextChar = placeChar(curnode->nextChar, str + 1, lenstr - 1, replaceTo, replacelen);
}
return node;
* initSuffixTree - create suffix tree from file. Function converts
* UTF8-encoded file into current encoding.
*/
-static SuffixChar*
-initSuffixTree(char *filename)
+static SuffixChar *
+initSuffixTree(char *filename)
{
- SuffixChar * volatile rootSuffixTree = NULL;
+ SuffixChar *volatile rootSuffixTree = NULL;
MemoryContext ccxt = CurrentMemoryContext;
- tsearch_readline_state trst;
- volatile bool skip;
+ tsearch_readline_state trst;
+ volatile bool skip;
filename = get_tsearch_config_filename(filename, "rules");
if (!tsearch_readline_begin(&trst, filename))
errmsg("could not open unaccent file \"%s\": %m",
filename)));
- do
+ do
{
- char src[4096];
- char trg[4096];
- int srclen;
- int trglen;
- char *line = NULL;
+ char src[4096];
+ char trg[4096];
+ int srclen;
+ int trglen;
+ char *line = NULL;
skip = true;
PG_TRY();
{
/*
- * pg_do_encoding_conversion() (called by tsearch_readline())
- * will emit exception if it finds untranslatable characters in current locale.
- * We just skip such characters.
+ * pg_do_encoding_conversion() (called by tsearch_readline()) will
+ * emit exception if it finds untranslatable characters in current
+ * locale. We just skip such characters.
*/
while ((line = tsearch_readline(&trst)) != NULL)
{
- if ( sscanf(line, "%s\t%s\n", src, trg)!=2 )
+ if (sscanf(line, "%s\t%s\n", src, trg) != 2)
continue;
srclen = strlen(src);
trglen = strlen(trg);
- rootSuffixTree = placeChar(rootSuffixTree,
- (unsigned char*)src, srclen,
- trg, trglen);
+ rootSuffixTree = placeChar(rootSuffixTree,
+ (unsigned char *) src, srclen,
+ trg, trglen);
skip = false;
pfree(line);
}
}
PG_END_TRY();
}
- while(skip);
+ while (skip);
tsearch_readline_end(&trst);
/*
* findReplaceTo - find multibyte character in tree
*/
-static SuffixChar *
-findReplaceTo( SuffixChar *node, unsigned char *src, int srclen )
+static SuffixChar *
+findReplaceTo(SuffixChar *node, unsigned char *src, int srclen)
{
- while( node )
+ while (node)
{
node = node + *src;
- if ( srclen == 1 )
+ if (srclen == 1)
return node;
src++;
}
PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(unaccent_init);
-Datum unaccent_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS);
+Datum unaccent_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS);
Datum
unaccent_init(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- List *dictoptions = (List *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0);
+ List *dictoptions = (List *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0);
SuffixChar *rootSuffixTree = NULL;
- bool fileloaded = false;
+ bool fileloaded = false;
ListCell *l;
foreach(l, dictoptions)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
errmsg("multiple Rules parameters")));
- rootSuffixTree = initSuffixTree(defGetString(defel));
- fileloaded = true;
+ rootSuffixTree = initSuffixTree(defGetString(defel));
+ fileloaded = true;
}
else
{
}
PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(unaccent_lexize);
-Datum unaccent_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS);
+Datum unaccent_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS);
Datum
unaccent_lexize(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- SuffixChar *rootSuffixTree = (SuffixChar*)PG_GETARG_POINTER(0);
- char *srcchar = (char *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1);
+ SuffixChar *rootSuffixTree = (SuffixChar *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0);
+ char *srcchar = (char *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(1);
int32 len = PG_GETARG_INT32(2);
- char *srcstart, *trgchar = NULL;
+ char *srcstart,
+ *trgchar = NULL;
int charlen;
TSLexeme *res = NULL;
SuffixChar *node;
srcstart = srcchar;
- while( srcchar - srcstart < len )
+ while (srcchar - srcstart < len)
{
charlen = pg_mblen(srcchar);
- node = findReplaceTo( rootSuffixTree, (unsigned char *) srcchar, charlen );
- if ( node && node->replaceTo )
+ node = findReplaceTo(rootSuffixTree, (unsigned char *) srcchar, charlen);
+ if (node && node->replaceTo)
{
- if ( !res )
+ if (!res)
{
/* allocate res only it it's needed */
res = palloc0(sizeof(TSLexeme) * 2);
- res->lexeme = trgchar = palloc( len * pg_database_encoding_max_length() + 1 /* \0 */ );
+ res->lexeme = trgchar = palloc(len * pg_database_encoding_max_length() + 1 /* \0 */ );
res->flags = TSL_FILTER;
- if ( srcchar != srcstart )
+ if (srcchar != srcstart)
{
memcpy(trgchar, srcstart, srcchar - srcstart);
trgchar += (srcchar - srcstart);
}
}
- memcpy( trgchar, node->replaceTo, node->replacelen );
- trgchar += node->replacelen;
+ memcpy(trgchar, node->replaceTo, node->replacelen);
+ trgchar += node->replacelen;
}
- else if ( res )
+ else if (res)
{
- memcpy( trgchar, srcchar, charlen );
+ memcpy(trgchar, srcchar, charlen);
trgchar += charlen;
}
srcchar += charlen;
}
- if ( res )
+ if (res)
*trgchar = '\0';
PG_RETURN_POINTER(res);
* Function-like wrapper for dictionary
*/
PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(unaccent_dict);
-Datum unaccent_dict(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS);
+Datum unaccent_dict(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS);
Datum
unaccent_dict(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- text *str;
- int strArg;
- Oid dictOid;
- TSDictionaryCacheEntry *dict;
- TSLexeme *res;
+ text *str;
+ int strArg;
+ Oid dictOid;
+ TSDictionaryCacheEntry *dict;
+ TSLexeme *res;
if (PG_NARGS() == 1)
{
dict = lookup_ts_dictionary_cache(dictOid);
res = (TSLexeme *) DatumGetPointer(FunctionCall4(&(dict->lexize),
- PointerGetDatum(dict->dictData),
- PointerGetDatum(VARDATA(str)),
- Int32GetDatum(VARSIZE(str) - VARHDRSZ),
+ PointerGetDatum(dict->dictData),
+ PointerGetDatum(VARDATA(str)),
+ Int32GetDatum(VARSIZE(str) - VARHDRSZ),
PointerGetDatum(NULL)));
PG_FREE_IF_COPY(str, strArg);
- if ( res == NULL )
+ if (res == NULL)
{
PG_RETURN_TEXT_P(PG_GETARG_TEXT_P_COPY(strArg));
}
- else if ( res->lexeme == NULL )
+ else if (res->lexeme == NULL)
{
pfree(res);
PG_RETURN_TEXT_P(PG_GETARG_TEXT_P_COPY(strArg));
}
else
{
- text *txt = cstring_to_text(res->lexeme);
+ text *txt = cstring_to_text(res->lexeme);
pfree(res->lexeme);
pfree(res);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/reloptions.c,v 1.32 2010/01/22 16:40:18 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/reloptions.c,v 1.33 2010/02/26 02:00:32 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
attribute_reloptions(Datum reloptions, bool validate)
{
relopt_value *options;
- AttributeOpts *aopts;
+ AttributeOpts *aopts;
int numoptions;
static const relopt_parse_elt tab[] = {
{"n_distinct", RELOPT_TYPE_REAL, offsetof(AttributeOpts, n_distinct)},
tablespace_reloptions(Datum reloptions, bool validate)
{
relopt_value *options;
- TableSpaceOpts *tsopts;
+ TableSpaceOpts *tsopts;
int numoptions;
static const relopt_parse_elt tab[] = {
{"random_page_cost", RELOPT_TYPE_REAL, offsetof(TableSpaceOpts, random_page_cost)},
*
* These functions provide conversion between rowtypes that are logically
* equivalent but might have columns in a different order or different sets
- * of dropped columns. There is some overlap of functionality with the
+ * of dropped columns. There is some overlap of functionality with the
* executor's "junkfilter" routines, but these functions work on bare
* HeapTuples rather than TupleTableSlots.
*
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/tupconvert.c,v 1.3 2010/01/02 16:57:33 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/common/tupconvert.c,v 1.4 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int32 atttypmod;
if (att->attisdropped)
- continue; /* attrMap[i] is already 0 */
+ continue; /* attrMap[i] is already 0 */
noutcols++;
atttypid = att->atttypid;
atttypmod = att->atttypmod;
nincols, noutcols)));
/*
- * Check to see if the map is one-to-one and the tuple types are the
- * same. (We check the latter because if they're not, we want to do
- * conversion to inject the right OID into the tuple datum.)
+ * Check to see if the map is one-to-one and the tuple types are the same.
+ * (We check the latter because if they're not, we want to do conversion
+ * to inject the right OID into the tuple datum.)
*/
if (indesc->natts == outdesc->natts &&
indesc->tdtypeid == outdesc->tdtypeid)
{
for (i = 0; i < n; i++)
{
- if (attrMap[i] == (i+1))
+ if (attrMap[i] == (i + 1))
continue;
/*
- * If it's a dropped column and the corresponding input
- * column is also dropped, we needn't convert. However,
- * attlen and attalign must agree.
+ * If it's a dropped column and the corresponding input column is
+ * also dropped, we needn't convert. However, attlen and attalign
+ * must agree.
*/
if (attrMap[i] == 0 &&
indesc->attrs[i]->attisdropped &&
/* preallocate workspace for Datum arrays */
map->outvalues = (Datum *) palloc(n * sizeof(Datum));
map->outisnull = (bool *) palloc(n * sizeof(bool));
- n = indesc->natts + 1; /* +1 for NULL */
+ n = indesc->natts + 1; /* +1 for NULL */
map->invalues = (Datum *) palloc(n * sizeof(Datum));
map->inisnull = (bool *) palloc(n * sizeof(bool));
- map->invalues[0] = (Datum) 0; /* set up the NULL entry */
+ map->invalues[0] = (Datum) 0; /* set up the NULL entry */
map->inisnull[0] = true;
return map;
/*
* Set up for tuple conversion, matching input and output columns by name.
- * (Dropped columns are ignored in both input and output.) This is intended
+ * (Dropped columns are ignored in both input and output.) This is intended
* for use when the rowtypes are related by inheritance, so we expect an exact
* match of both type and typmod. The error messages will be a bit unhelpful
* unless both rowtypes are named composite types.
int j;
if (att->attisdropped)
- continue; /* attrMap[i] is already 0 */
+ continue; /* attrMap[i] is already 0 */
attname = NameStr(att->attname);
atttypid = att->atttypid;
atttypmod = att->atttypmod;
}
/*
- * Check to see if the map is one-to-one and the tuple types are the
- * same. (We check the latter because if they're not, we want to do
- * conversion to inject the right OID into the tuple datum.)
+ * Check to see if the map is one-to-one and the tuple types are the same.
+ * (We check the latter because if they're not, we want to do conversion
+ * to inject the right OID into the tuple datum.)
*/
if (indesc->natts == outdesc->natts &&
indesc->tdtypeid == outdesc->tdtypeid)
same = true;
for (i = 0; i < n; i++)
{
- if (attrMap[i] == (i+1))
+ if (attrMap[i] == (i + 1))
continue;
/*
- * If it's a dropped column and the corresponding input
- * column is also dropped, we needn't convert. However,
- * attlen and attalign must agree.
+ * If it's a dropped column and the corresponding input column is
+ * also dropped, we needn't convert. However, attlen and attalign
+ * must agree.
*/
if (attrMap[i] == 0 &&
indesc->attrs[i]->attisdropped &&
/* preallocate workspace for Datum arrays */
map->outvalues = (Datum *) palloc(n * sizeof(Datum));
map->outisnull = (bool *) palloc(n * sizeof(bool));
- n = indesc->natts + 1; /* +1 for NULL */
+ n = indesc->natts + 1; /* +1 for NULL */
map->invalues = (Datum *) palloc(n * sizeof(Datum));
map->inisnull = (bool *) palloc(n * sizeof(bool));
- map->invalues[0] = (Datum) 0; /* set up the NULL entry */
+ map->invalues[0] = (Datum) 0; /* set up the NULL entry */
map->inisnull[0] = true;
return map;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginbulk.c,v 1.18 2010/02/11 14:29:50 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginbulk.c,v 1.19 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#define DEF_NENTRY 2048
#define DEF_NPTR 4
-static void*
+static void *
ginAppendData(void *old, void *new, void *arg)
{
- EntryAccumulator *eo = (EntryAccumulator*)old,
- *en = (EntryAccumulator*)new;
+ EntryAccumulator *eo = (EntryAccumulator *) old,
+ *en = (EntryAccumulator *) new;
- BuildAccumulator *accum = (BuildAccumulator*)arg;
+ BuildAccumulator *accum = (BuildAccumulator *) arg;
if (eo->number >= eo->length)
{
accum->allocatedMemory -= GetMemoryChunkSpace(eo->list);
eo->length *= 2;
eo->list = (ItemPointerData *) repalloc(eo->list,
- sizeof(ItemPointerData) * eo->length);
+ sizeof(ItemPointerData) * eo->length);
accum->allocatedMemory += GetMemoryChunkSpace(eo->list);
}
static int
cmpEntryAccumulator(const void *a, const void *b, void *arg)
{
- EntryAccumulator *ea = (EntryAccumulator*)a;
- EntryAccumulator *eb = (EntryAccumulator*)b;
- BuildAccumulator *accum = (BuildAccumulator*)arg;
+ EntryAccumulator *ea = (EntryAccumulator *) a;
+ EntryAccumulator *eb = (EntryAccumulator *) b;
+ BuildAccumulator *accum = (BuildAccumulator *) arg;
return compareAttEntries(accum->ginstate, ea->attnum, ea->value,
eb->attnum, eb->value);
static void
ginInsertEntry(BuildAccumulator *accum, ItemPointer heapptr, OffsetNumber attnum, Datum entry)
{
- EntryAccumulator *key,
- *ea;
+ EntryAccumulator *key,
+ *ea;
- /*
- * Allocate memory by rather big chunk to decrease overhead, we don't
- * keep pointer to previously allocated chunks because they will free
- * by MemoryContextReset() call.
+ /*
+ * Allocate memory by rather big chunk to decrease overhead, we don't keep
+ * pointer to previously allocated chunks because they will free by
+ * MemoryContextReset() call.
*/
if (accum->entryallocator == NULL || accum->length >= DEF_NENTRY)
{
key->attnum = attnum;
key->value = entry;
- /* To prevent multiple palloc/pfree cycles, we reuse array */
+ /* To prevent multiple palloc/pfree cycles, we reuse array */
if (accum->tmpList == NULL)
accum->tmpList =
(ItemPointerData *) palloc(sizeof(ItemPointerData) * DEF_NPTR);
else
{
/*
- * The key has been appended, so "free" allocated
- * key by decrementing chunk's counter.
+ * The key has been appended, so "free" allocated key by decrementing
+ * chunk's counter.
*/
accum->length--;
}
* Since the entries are being inserted into a balanced binary tree, you
* might think that the order of insertion wouldn't be critical, but it turns
* out that inserting the entries in sorted order results in a lot of
- * rebalancing operations and is slow. To prevent this, we attempt to insert
+ * rebalancing operations and is slow. To prevent this, we attempt to insert
* the nodes in an order that will produce a nearly-balanced tree if the input
* is in fact sorted.
*
* tree; then, we insert the middles of each half of out virtual array, then
* middles of quarters, etc.
*/
- void
+void
ginInsertRecordBA(BuildAccumulator *accum, ItemPointer heapptr, OffsetNumber attnum,
Datum *entries, int32 nentry)
{
- uint32 step = nentry;
+ uint32 step = nentry;
if (nentry <= 0)
return;
/*
* step will contain largest power of 2 and <= nentry
*/
- step |= (step >> 1);
- step |= (step >> 2);
- step |= (step >> 4);
- step |= (step >> 8);
+ step |= (step >> 1);
+ step |= (step >> 2);
+ step |= (step >> 4);
+ step |= (step >> 8);
step |= (step >> 16);
step >>= 1;
- step ++;
+ step++;
- while(step > 0) {
- int i;
+ while (step > 0)
+ {
+ int i;
- for (i = step - 1; i < nentry && i >= 0; i += step << 1 /* *2 */)
+ for (i = step - 1; i < nentry && i >= 0; i += step << 1 /* *2 */ )
ginInsertEntry(accum, heapptr, attnum, entries[i]);
- step >>= 1; /* /2 */
+ step >>= 1; /* /2 */
}
}
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c,v 1.23 2010/01/02 16:57:33 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginentrypage.c,v 1.24 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* Gin tuple without any ItemPointers should be large enough to keep
* one ItemPointer, to prevent inconsistency between
* ginHeapTupleFastCollect and ginEntryInsert called by
- * ginHeapTupleInsert. ginHeapTupleFastCollect forms tuple without
+ * ginHeapTupleInsert. ginHeapTupleFastCollect forms tuple without
* extra pointer to heap, but ginEntryInsert (called for pending list
* cleanup during vacuum) will form the same tuple with one
* ItemPointer.
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c,v 1.29 2010/01/02 16:57:33 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gin/ginget.c,v 1.30 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
typedef struct pendingPosition
{
- Buffer pendingBuffer;
- OffsetNumber firstOffset;
- OffsetNumber lastOffset;
- ItemPointerData item;
- bool *hasMatchKey;
+ Buffer pendingBuffer;
+ OffsetNumber firstOffset;
+ OffsetNumber lastOffset;
+ ItemPointerData item;
+ bool *hasMatchKey;
} pendingPosition;
static bool
hasAllMatchingKeys(GinScanOpaque so, pendingPosition *pos)
{
- int i;
+ int i;
for (i = 0; i < so->nkeys; i++)
if (pos->hasMatchKey[i] == false)
memset(key->entryRes, FALSE, key->nentries);
}
- memset(pos->hasMatchKey, FALSE, so->nkeys);
+ memset(pos->hasMatchKey, FALSE, so->nkeys);
for (;;)
{
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c,v 1.84 2010/01/02 16:57:34 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistget.c,v 1.85 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* On non-leaf page we can't conclude that child hasn't NULL
* values because of assumption in GiST: union (VAL, NULL) is VAL.
- * But if on non-leaf page key IS NULL, then all children are NULL.
+ * But if on non-leaf page key IS NULL, then all children are
+ * NULL.
*/
if (key->sk_flags & SK_SEARCHNULL)
{
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c,v 1.20 2010/01/14 16:31:09 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistproc.c,v 1.21 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
if (entry->leafkey) /* Point, actually */
{
- BOX *box = palloc(sizeof(BOX));
- Point *point = DatumGetPointP(entry->key);
+ BOX *box = palloc(sizeof(BOX));
+ Point *point = DatumGetPointP(entry->key);
GISTENTRY *retval = palloc(sizeof(GISTENTRY));
box->high = box->low = *point;
static bool
gist_point_consistent_internal(StrategyNumber strategy,
- bool isLeaf, BOX *key, Point *query)
+ bool isLeaf, BOX *key, Point *query)
{
- bool result = false;
+ bool result = false;
switch (strategy)
{
gist_point_consistent(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
GISTENTRY *entry = (GISTENTRY *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0);
- StrategyNumber strategy = (StrategyNumber) PG_GETARG_UINT16(2);
+ StrategyNumber strategy = (StrategyNumber) PG_GETARG_UINT16(2);
bool result;
bool *recheck = (bool *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(4);
- StrategyNumber strategyGroup = strategy / GeoStrategyNumberOffset;
+ StrategyNumber strategyGroup = strategy / GeoStrategyNumberOffset;
switch (strategyGroup)
{
break;
case BoxStrategyNumberGroup:
result = DatumGetBool(DirectFunctionCall5(
- gist_box_consistent,
- PointerGetDatum(entry),
- PG_GETARG_DATUM(1),
- Int16GetDatum(RTOverlapStrategyNumber),
- 0, PointerGetDatum(recheck)));
+ gist_box_consistent,
+ PointerGetDatum(entry),
+ PG_GETARG_DATUM(1),
+ Int16GetDatum(RTOverlapStrategyNumber),
+ 0, PointerGetDatum(recheck)));
break;
case PolygonStrategyNumberGroup:
{
POLYGON *query = PG_GETARG_POLYGON_P(1);
result = DatumGetBool(DirectFunctionCall5(
- gist_poly_consistent,
- PointerGetDatum(entry),
- PolygonPGetDatum(query),
- Int16GetDatum(RTOverlapStrategyNumber),
- 0, PointerGetDatum(recheck)));
+ gist_poly_consistent,
+ PointerGetDatum(entry),
+ PolygonPGetDatum(query),
+ Int16GetDatum(RTOverlapStrategyNumber),
+ 0, PointerGetDatum(recheck)));
if (GIST_LEAF(entry) && result)
{
* We are on leaf page and quick check shows overlapping
* of polygon's bounding box and point
*/
- BOX *box = DatumGetBoxP(entry->key);
+ BOX *box = DatumGetBoxP(entry->key);
Assert(box->high.x == box->low.x
- && box->high.y == box->low.y);
+ && box->high.y == box->low.y);
result = DatumGetBool(DirectFunctionCall2(
- poly_contain_pt,
- PolygonPGetDatum(query),
+ poly_contain_pt,
+ PolygonPGetDatum(query),
PointPGetDatum(&box->high)));
*recheck = false;
}
break;
case CircleStrategyNumberGroup:
{
- CIRCLE *query = PG_GETARG_CIRCLE_P(1);
+ CIRCLE *query = PG_GETARG_CIRCLE_P(1);
result = DatumGetBool(DirectFunctionCall5(
- gist_circle_consistent,
- PointerGetDatum(entry),
- CirclePGetDatum(query),
- Int16GetDatum(RTOverlapStrategyNumber),
- 0, PointerGetDatum(recheck)));
+ gist_circle_consistent,
+ PointerGetDatum(entry),
+ CirclePGetDatum(query),
+ Int16GetDatum(RTOverlapStrategyNumber),
+ 0, PointerGetDatum(recheck)));
if (GIST_LEAF(entry) && result)
{
* We are on leaf page and quick check shows overlapping
* of polygon's bounding box and point
*/
- BOX *box = DatumGetBoxP(entry->key);
+ BOX *box = DatumGetBoxP(entry->key);
Assert(box->high.x == box->low.x
- && box->high.y == box->low.y);
+ && box->high.y == box->low.y);
result = DatumGetBool(DirectFunctionCall2(
- circle_contain_pt,
- CirclePGetDatum(query),
+ circle_contain_pt,
+ CirclePGetDatum(query),
PointPGetDatum(&box->high)));
*recheck = false;
}
}
break;
default:
- result = false; /* silence compiler warning */
+ result = false; /* silence compiler warning */
elog(ERROR, "unknown strategy number: %d", strategy);
}
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistscan.c,v 1.78 2010/01/02 16:57:34 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/gist/gistscan.c,v 1.79 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* field.
*
* Next, if any of keys is a NULL and that key is not marked with
- * SK_SEARCHNULL/SK_SEARCHNOTNULL then nothing can be found (ie,
- * we assume all indexable operators are strict).
+ * SK_SEARCHNULL/SK_SEARCHNOTNULL then nothing can be found (ie, we
+ * assume all indexable operators are strict).
*/
for (i = 0; i < scan->numberOfKeys; i++)
{
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c,v 1.116 2010/01/02 16:57:34 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hash.c,v 1.117 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* This file contains only the public interface routines.
/*
* An insertion into the current index page could have happened while
* we didn't have read lock on it. Re-find our position by looking
- * for the TID we previously returned. (Because we hold share lock on
+ * for the TID we previously returned. (Because we hold share lock on
* the bucket, no deletions or splits could have occurred; therefore
* we can expect that the TID still exists in the current index page,
* at an offset >= where we were.)
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashovfl.c,v 1.68 2010/01/02 16:57:34 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashovfl.c,v 1.69 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* Overflow pages look like ordinary relation pages.
/*
* If we reach here, there are no live tuples on the "read" page ---
- * it was empty when we got to it, or we moved them all. So we
- * can just free the page without bothering with deleting tuples
+ * it was empty when we got to it, or we moved them all. So we can
+ * just free the page without bothering with deleting tuples
* individually. Then advance to the previous "read" page.
*
* Tricky point here: if our read and write pages are adjacent in the
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashpage.c,v 1.82 2010/01/02 16:57:34 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/hash/hashpage.c,v 1.83 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* Postgres hash pages look like ordinary relation pages. The opaque
/*
* Partition the tuples in the old bucket between the old bucket and the
* new bucket, advancing along the old bucket's overflow bucket chain and
- * adding overflow pages to the new bucket as needed. Outer loop
- * iterates once per page in old bucket.
+ * adding overflow pages to the new bucket as needed. Outer loop iterates
+ * once per page in old bucket.
*/
for (;;)
{
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c,v 1.287 2010/02/14 18:42:12 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c,v 1.288 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*
*
* INTERFACE ROUTINES
bool allow_strat, bool allow_sync,
bool is_bitmapscan);
static XLogRecPtr log_heap_update(Relation reln, Buffer oldbuf,
- ItemPointerData from, Buffer newbuf, HeapTuple newtup,
- bool all_visible_cleared, bool new_all_visible_cleared);
+ ItemPointerData from, Buffer newbuf, HeapTuple newtup,
+ bool all_visible_cleared, bool new_all_visible_cleared);
static bool HeapSatisfiesHOTUpdate(Relation relation, Bitmapset *hot_attrs,
HeapTuple oldtup, HeapTuple newtup);
/*
* If the all-visible flag indicates that all tuples on the page are
- * visible to everyone, we can skip the per-tuple visibility tests.
- * But not in hot standby mode. A tuple that's already visible to all
+ * visible to everyone, we can skip the per-tuple visibility tests. But
+ * not in hot standby mode. A tuple that's already visible to all
* transactions in the master might still be invisible to a read-only
* transaction in the standby.
*/
* someone setting xmax. Hence recheck after changing lock, same as for
* xmax itself.
*
- * Old-style VACUUM FULL is gone, but we have to keep this code as long
- * as we support having MOVED_OFF/MOVED_IN tuples in the database.
+ * Old-style VACUUM FULL is gone, but we have to keep this code as long as
+ * we support having MOVED_OFF/MOVED_IN tuples in the database.
*/
recheck_xvac:
if (tuple->t_infomask & HEAP_MOVED)
ResolveRecoveryConflictWithSnapshot(xlrec->latestRemovedXid, xlrec->node);
/*
- * Actual operation is a no-op. Record type exists to provide a means
- * for conflict processing to occur before we begin index vacuum actions.
- * see vacuumlazy.c and also comments in btvacuumpage()
+ * Actual operation is a no-op. Record type exists to provide a means for
+ * conflict processing to occur before we begin index vacuum actions. see
+ * vacuumlazy.c and also comments in btvacuumpage()
*/
}
uint8 info = record->xl_info & ~XLR_INFO_MASK;
/*
- * These operations don't overwrite MVCC data so no conflict
- * processing is required. The ones in heap2 rmgr do.
+ * These operations don't overwrite MVCC data so no conflict processing is
+ * required. The ones in heap2 rmgr do.
*/
RestoreBkpBlocks(lsn, record, false);
uint8 info = record->xl_info & ~XLR_INFO_MASK;
/*
- * Note that RestoreBkpBlocks() is called after conflict processing
- * within each record type handling function.
+ * Note that RestoreBkpBlocks() is called after conflict processing within
+ * each record type handling function.
*/
switch (info & XLOG_HEAP_OPMASK)
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c,v 1.21 2010/02/08 04:33:53 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c,v 1.22 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
typedef struct
{
TransactionId new_prune_xid; /* new prune hint value for page */
- TransactionId latestRemovedXid; /* latest xid to be removed by this prune */
- int nredirected; /* numbers of entries in arrays below */
+ TransactionId latestRemovedXid; /* latest xid to be removed by this
+ * prune */
+ int nredirected; /* numbers of entries in arrays below */
int ndead;
int nunused;
/* arrays that accumulate indexes of items to be changed */
/*
* We can't write WAL in recovery mode, so there's no point trying to
- * clean the page. The master will likely issue a cleaning WAL record
- * soon anyway, so this is no particular loss.
+ * clean the page. The master will likely issue a cleaning WAL record soon
+ * anyway, so this is no particular loss.
*/
if (RecoveryInProgress())
return;
*
* First, initialize the new pd_prune_xid value to zero (indicating no
* prunable tuples). If we find any tuples which may soon become
- * prunable, we will save the lowest relevant XID in new_prune_xid.
- * Also initialize the rest of our working state.
+ * prunable, we will save the lowest relevant XID in new_prune_xid. Also
+ * initialize the rest of our working state.
*/
prstate.new_prune_xid = InvalidTransactionId;
prstate.latestRemovedXid = InvalidTransactionId;
{
heap_prune_record_unused(prstate, rootoffnum);
HeapTupleHeaderAdvanceLatestRemovedXid(htup,
- &prstate->latestRemovedXid);
+ &prstate->latestRemovedXid);
ndeleted++;
}
{
latestdead = offnum;
HeapTupleHeaderAdvanceLatestRemovedXid(htup,
- &prstate->latestRemovedXid);
+ &prstate->latestRemovedXid);
}
else if (!recent_dead)
break;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994-5, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c,v 1.20 2010/02/03 10:01:29 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/rewriteheap.c,v 1.21 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* Write an XLOG UNLOGGED record if WAL-logging was skipped */
if (!state->rs_use_wal && !state->rs_new_rel->rd_istemp)
{
- char reason[NAMEDATALEN + 30];
+ char reason[NAMEDATALEN + 30];
+
snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason), "heap rewrite on \"%s\"",
RelationGetRelationName(state->rs_new_rel));
XLogReportUnloggedStatement(reason);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/tuptoaster.c,v 1.97 2010/02/04 00:09:13 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/tuptoaster.c,v 1.98 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*
*
* INTERFACE ROUTINES
}
/*
- * Finally we store attributes of type 'm' externally. At this point
- * we increase the target tuple size, so that 'm' attributes aren't
- * stored externally unless really necessary.
+ * Finally we store attributes of type 'm' externally. At this point we
+ * increase the target tuple size, so that 'm' attributes aren't stored
+ * externally unless really necessary.
*/
maxDataLen = TOAST_TUPLE_TARGET_MAIN - hoff;
*
* Normally this is the actual OID of the target toast table, but during
* table-rewriting operations such as CLUSTER, we have to insert the OID
- * of the table's real permanent toast table instead. rd_toastoid is
- * set if we have to substitute such an OID.
+ * of the table's real permanent toast table instead. rd_toastoid is set
+ * if we have to substitute such an OID.
*/
if (OidIsValid(rel->rd_toastoid))
toast_pointer.va_toastrelid = rel->rd_toastoid;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/visibilitymap.c,v 1.8 2010/02/09 21:43:29 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/visibilitymap.c,v 1.9 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*
* INTERFACE ROUTINES
* visibilitymap_clear - clear a bit in the visibility map
* NOTES
*
* The visibility map is a bitmap with one bit per heap page. A set bit means
- * that all tuples on the page are known visible to all transactions, and
+ * that all tuples on the page are known visible to all transactions, and
* therefore the page doesn't need to be vacuumed. The map is conservative in
* the sense that we make sure that whenever a bit is set, we know the
* condition is true, but if a bit is not set, it might or might not be true.
rel->rd_istemp);
/*
- * We might as well update the local smgr_vm_nblocks setting.
- * smgrtruncate sent an smgr cache inval message, which will cause
- * other backends to invalidate their copy of smgr_vm_nblocks, and
- * this one too at the next command boundary. But this ensures it
- * isn't outright wrong until then.
+ * We might as well update the local smgr_vm_nblocks setting. smgrtruncate
+ * sent an smgr cache inval message, which will cause other backends to
+ * invalidate their copy of smgr_vm_nblocks, and this one too at the next
+ * command boundary. But this ensures it isn't outright wrong until then.
*/
if (rel->rd_smgr)
rel->rd_smgr->smgr_vm_nblocks = newnblocks;
{
if (smgrexists(rel->rd_smgr, VISIBILITYMAP_FORKNUM))
rel->rd_smgr->smgr_vm_nblocks = smgrnblocks(rel->rd_smgr,
- VISIBILITYMAP_FORKNUM);
+ VISIBILITYMAP_FORKNUM);
else
rel->rd_smgr->smgr_vm_nblocks = 0;
}
RelationOpenSmgr(rel);
/*
- * Create the file first if it doesn't exist. If smgr_vm_nblocks
- * is positive then it must exist, no need for an smgrexists call.
+ * Create the file first if it doesn't exist. If smgr_vm_nblocks is
+ * positive then it must exist, no need for an smgrexists call.
*/
if ((rel->rd_smgr->smgr_vm_nblocks == 0 ||
rel->rd_smgr->smgr_vm_nblocks == InvalidBlockNumber) &&
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/index/genam.c,v 1.80 2010/02/07 20:48:09 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/index/genam.c,v 1.81 2010/02/26 02:00:33 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* many of the old access method routines have been turned into
/*
* During recovery we ignore killed tuples and don't bother to kill them
- * either. We do this because the xmin on the primary node could easily
- * be later than the xmin on the standby node, so that what the primary
+ * either. We do this because the xmin on the primary node could easily be
+ * later than the xmin on the standby node, so that what the primary
* thinks is killed is supposed to be visible on standby. So for correct
* MVCC for queries during recovery we must ignore these hints and check
- * all tuples. Do *not* set ignore_killed_tuples to true when running
- * in a transaction that was started during recovery.
- * xactStartedInRecovery should not be altered by index AMs.
+ * all tuples. Do *not* set ignore_killed_tuples to true when running in a
+ * transaction that was started during recovery. xactStartedInRecovery
+ * should not be altered by index AMs.
*/
scan->kill_prior_tuple = false;
scan->xactStartedInRecovery = TransactionStartedDuringRecovery();
for (i = 0; i < natts; i++)
{
- char *val;
+ char *val;
if (isnull[i])
val = "null";
else
{
- Oid foutoid;
- bool typisvarlena;
+ Oid foutoid;
+ bool typisvarlena;
/*
- * The provided data is not necessarily of the type stored in
- * the index; rather it is of the index opclass's input type.
- * So look at rd_opcintype not the index tupdesc.
+ * The provided data is not necessarily of the type stored in the
+ * index; rather it is of the index opclass's input type. So look
+ * at rd_opcintype not the index tupdesc.
*
* Note: this is a bit shaky for opclasses that have pseudotype
- * input types such as ANYARRAY or RECORD. Currently, the
- * typoutput functions associated with the pseudotypes will
- * work okay, but we might have to try harder in future.
+ * input types such as ANYARRAY or RECORD. Currently, the
+ * typoutput functions associated with the pseudotypes will work
+ * okay, but we might have to try harder in future.
*/
getTypeOutputInfo(indexRelation->rd_opcintype[i],
&foutoid, &typisvarlena);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c,v 1.117 2010/01/02 16:57:35 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/index/indexam.c,v 1.118 2010/02/26 02:00:34 momjian Exp $
*
* INTERFACE ROUTINES
* index_open - open an index relation by relation OID
/*
* If we scanned a whole HOT chain and found only dead tuples,
- * tell index AM to kill its entry for that TID. We do not do
- * this when in recovery because it may violate MVCC to do so.
- * see comments in RelationGetIndexScan().
+ * tell index AM to kill its entry for that TID. We do not do this
+ * when in recovery because it may violate MVCC to do so. see
+ * comments in RelationGetIndexScan().
*/
if (!scan->xactStartedInRecovery)
scan->kill_prior_tuple = scan->xs_hot_dead;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c,v 1.176 2010/01/02 16:57:35 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtinsert.c,v 1.177 2010/02/26 02:00:34 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* and btinsert. By here, itup is filled in, including the TID.
*
* If checkUnique is UNIQUE_CHECK_NO or UNIQUE_CHECK_PARTIAL, this
- * will allow duplicates. Otherwise (UNIQUE_CHECK_YES or
+ * will allow duplicates. Otherwise (UNIQUE_CHECK_YES or
* UNIQUE_CHECK_EXISTING) it will throw error for a duplicate.
* For UNIQUE_CHECK_EXISTING we merely run the duplicate check, and
* don't actually insert.
* If we must wait for another xact, we release the lock while waiting,
* and then must start over completely.
*
- * For a partial uniqueness check, we don't wait for the other xact.
- * Just let the tuple in and return false for possibly non-unique,
- * or true for definitely unique.
+ * For a partial uniqueness check, we don't wait for the other xact. Just
+ * let the tuple in and return false for possibly non-unique, or true for
+ * definitely unique.
*/
if (checkUnique != UNIQUE_CHECK_NO)
{
/*
* If we are doing a recheck, we expect to find the tuple we
- * are rechecking. It's not a duplicate, but we have to keep
+ * are rechecking. It's not a duplicate, but we have to keep
* scanning.
*/
if (checkUnique == UNIQUE_CHECK_EXISTING &&
/*
* It is a duplicate. If we are only doing a partial
- * check, then don't bother checking if the tuple is
- * being updated in another transaction. Just return
- * the fact that it is a potential conflict and leave
- * the full check till later.
+ * check, then don't bother checking if the tuple is being
+ * updated in another transaction. Just return the fact
+ * that it is a potential conflict and leave the full
+ * check till later.
*/
if (checkUnique == UNIQUE_CHECK_PARTIAL)
{
}
/*
- * This is a definite conflict. Break the tuple down
- * into datums and report the error. But first, make
- * sure we release the buffer locks we're holding ---
+ * This is a definite conflict. Break the tuple down into
+ * datums and report the error. But first, make sure we
+ * release the buffer locks we're holding ---
* BuildIndexValueDescription could make catalog accesses,
- * which in the worst case might touch this same index
- * and cause deadlocks.
+ * which in the worst case might touch this same index and
+ * cause deadlocks.
*/
if (nbuf != InvalidBuffer)
_bt_relbuf(rel, nbuf);
_bt_relbuf(rel, buf);
{
- Datum values[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
- bool isnull[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
+ Datum values[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
+ bool isnull[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
index_deform_tuple(itup, RelationGetDescr(rel),
values, isnull);
RelationGetRelationName(rel)),
errdetail("Key %s already exists.",
BuildIndexValueDescription(rel,
- values, isnull))));
+ values, isnull))));
}
}
else if (all_dead)
}
/*
- * If we are doing a recheck then we should have found the tuple we
- * are checking. Otherwise there's something very wrong --- probably,
- * the index is on a non-immutable expression.
+ * If we are doing a recheck then we should have found the tuple we are
+ * checking. Otherwise there's something very wrong --- probably, the
+ * index is on a non-immutable expression.
*/
if (checkUnique == UNIQUE_CHECK_EXISTING && !found)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INTERNAL_ERROR),
errmsg("failed to re-find tuple within index \"%s\"",
RelationGetRelationName(rel)),
- errhint("This may be because of a non-immutable index expression.")));
+ errhint("This may be because of a non-immutable index expression.")));
if (nbuf != InvalidBuffer)
_bt_relbuf(rel, nbuf);
if (itemsz > BTMaxItemSize(page))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_PROGRAM_LIMIT_EXCEEDED),
- errmsg("index row size %lu exceeds maximum %lu for index \"%s\"",
- (unsigned long) itemsz,
- (unsigned long) BTMaxItemSize(page),
- RelationGetRelationName(rel)),
+ errmsg("index row size %lu exceeds maximum %lu for index \"%s\"",
+ (unsigned long) itemsz,
+ (unsigned long) BTMaxItemSize(page),
+ RelationGetRelationName(rel)),
errhint("Values larger than 1/3 of a buffer page cannot be indexed.\n"
"Consider a function index of an MD5 hash of the value, "
"or use full text indexing.")));
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c,v 1.119 2010/02/13 00:59:58 sriggs Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c,v 1.120 2010/02/26 02:00:34 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* Postgres btree pages look like ordinary relation pages. The opaque
START_CRIT_SECTION();
/*
- * We don't do MarkBufferDirty here because we're about initialise
- * the page, and nobody else can see it yet.
+ * We don't do MarkBufferDirty here because we're about initialise the
+ * page, and nobody else can see it yet.
*/
/* XLOG stuff */
recptr = XLogInsert(RM_BTREE_ID, XLOG_BTREE_REUSE_PAGE, rdata);
/*
- * We don't do PageSetLSN or PageSetTLI here because
- * we're about initialise the page, so no need.
+ * We don't do PageSetLSN or PageSetTLI here because we're about
+ * initialise the page, so no need.
*/
}
{
page = BufferGetPage(buf);
if (_bt_page_recyclable(page))
- {
+ {
/*
- * If we are generating WAL for Hot Standby then create
- * a WAL record that will allow us to conflict with
- * queries running on standby.
+ * If we are generating WAL for Hot Standby then create a
+ * WAL record that will allow us to conflict with queries
+ * running on standby.
*/
if (XLogStandbyInfoActive())
{
if (isVacuum)
{
xl_btree_vacuum xlrec_vacuum;
+
xlrec_vacuum.node = rel->rd_node;
xlrec_vacuum.block = BufferGetBlockNumber(buf);
else
{
xl_btree_delete xlrec_delete;
+
xlrec_delete.node = rel->rd_node;
xlrec_delete.block = BufferGetBlockNumber(buf);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtree.c,v 1.175 2010/02/08 04:33:53 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtree.c,v 1.176 2010/02/26 02:00:34 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
IndexBulkDeleteCallback callback;
void *callback_state;
BTCycleId cycleid;
- BlockNumber lastBlockVacuumed; /* last blkno reached by Vacuum scan */
- BlockNumber lastUsedPage; /* blkno of last non-recyclable page */
+ BlockNumber lastBlockVacuumed; /* last blkno reached by Vacuum scan */
+ BlockNumber lastUsedPage; /* blkno of last non-recyclable page */
BlockNumber totFreePages; /* true total # of free pages */
MemoryContext pagedelcontext;
} BTVacState;
vstate.callback = callback;
vstate.callback_state = callback_state;
vstate.cycleid = cycleid;
- vstate.lastBlockVacuumed = BTREE_METAPAGE; /* Initialise at first block */
+ vstate.lastBlockVacuumed = BTREE_METAPAGE; /* Initialise at first block */
vstate.lastUsedPage = BTREE_METAPAGE;
vstate.totFreePages = 0;
/*
* We can't use _bt_getbuf() here because it always applies
* _bt_checkpage(), which will barf on an all-zero page. We want to
- * recycle all-zero pages, not fail. Also, we want to use a nondefault
- * buffer access strategy.
+ * recycle all-zero pages, not fail. Also, we want to use a
+ * nondefault buffer access strategy.
*/
buf = ReadBufferExtended(rel, MAIN_FORKNUM, num_pages - 1, RBM_NORMAL,
info->strategy);
htup = &(itup->t_tid);
/*
- * During Hot Standby we currently assume that XLOG_BTREE_VACUUM
- * records do not produce conflicts. That is only true as long
- * as the callback function depends only upon whether the index
- * tuple refers to heap tuples removed in the initial heap scan.
- * When vacuum starts it derives a value of OldestXmin. Backends
- * taking later snapshots could have a RecentGlobalXmin with a
- * later xid than the vacuum's OldestXmin, so it is possible that
- * row versions deleted after OldestXmin could be marked as killed
- * by other backends. The callback function *could* look at the
- * index tuple state in isolation and decide to delete the index
- * tuple, though currently it does not. If it ever did, we would
- * need to reconsider whether XLOG_BTREE_VACUUM records should
- * cause conflicts. If they did cause conflicts they would be
- * fairly harsh conflicts, since we haven't yet worked out a way
- * to pass a useful value for latestRemovedXid on the
- * XLOG_BTREE_VACUUM records. This applies to *any* type of index
- * that marks index tuples as killed.
+ * During Hot Standby we currently assume that
+ * XLOG_BTREE_VACUUM records do not produce conflicts. That is
+ * only true as long as the callback function depends only
+ * upon whether the index tuple refers to heap tuples removed
+ * in the initial heap scan. When vacuum starts it derives a
+ * value of OldestXmin. Backends taking later snapshots could
+ * have a RecentGlobalXmin with a later xid than the vacuum's
+ * OldestXmin, so it is possible that row versions deleted
+ * after OldestXmin could be marked as killed by other
+ * backends. The callback function *could* look at the index
+ * tuple state in isolation and decide to delete the index
+ * tuple, though currently it does not. If it ever did, we
+ * would need to reconsider whether XLOG_BTREE_VACUUM records
+ * should cause conflicts. If they did cause conflicts they
+ * would be fairly harsh conflicts, since we haven't yet
+ * worked out a way to pass a useful value for
+ * latestRemovedXid on the XLOG_BTREE_VACUUM records. This
+ * applies to *any* type of index that marks index tuples as
+ * killed.
*/
if (callback(htup, callback_state))
deletable[ndeletable++] = offnum;
*/
if (ndeletable > 0)
{
- BlockNumber lastBlockVacuumed = BufferGetBlockNumber(buf);
+ BlockNumber lastBlockVacuumed = BufferGetBlockNumber(buf);
_bt_delitems(rel, buf, deletable, ndeletable, true, vstate->lastBlockVacuumed);
/*
- * Keep track of the block number of the lastBlockVacuumed, so
- * we can scan those blocks as well during WAL replay. This then
+ * Keep track of the block number of the lastBlockVacuumed, so we
+ * can scan those blocks as well during WAL replay. This then
* provides concurrency protection and allows btrees to be used
* while in recovery.
*/
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsort.c,v 1.123 2010/01/20 19:43:40 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtsort.c,v 1.124 2010/02/26 02:00:34 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
wstate.btws_use_wal = XLogIsNeeded() && !wstate.index->rd_istemp;
/*
- * Write an XLOG UNLOGGED record if WAL-logging was skipped because
- * WAL archiving is not enabled.
+ * Write an XLOG UNLOGGED record if WAL-logging was skipped because WAL
+ * archiving is not enabled.
*/
if (!wstate.btws_use_wal && !wstate.index->rd_istemp)
{
- char reason[NAMEDATALEN + 20];
+ char reason[NAMEDATALEN + 20];
+
snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason), "b-tree build on \"%s\"",
RelationGetRelationName(wstate.index));
XLogReportUnloggedStatement(reason);
if (itupsz > BTMaxItemSize(npage))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_PROGRAM_LIMIT_EXCEEDED),
- errmsg("index row size %lu exceeds maximum %lu for index \"%s\"",
- (unsigned long) itupsz,
- (unsigned long) BTMaxItemSize(npage),
- RelationGetRelationName(wstate->index)),
+ errmsg("index row size %lu exceeds maximum %lu for index \"%s\"",
+ (unsigned long) itupsz,
+ (unsigned long) BTMaxItemSize(npage),
+ RelationGetRelationName(wstate->index)),
errhint("Values larger than 1/3 of a buffer page cannot be indexed.\n"
"Consider a function index of an MD5 hash of the value, "
"or use full text indexing.")));
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c,v 1.97 2010/01/03 05:39:08 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtutils.c,v 1.98 2010/02/26 02:00:34 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
StrategyNumber strat;
/*
- * First, deal with cases where one or both args are NULL. This should
+ * First, deal with cases where one or both args are NULL. This should
* only happen when the scankeys represent IS NULL/NOT NULL conditions.
*/
if ((leftarg->sk_flags | rightarg->sk_flags) & SK_ISNULL)
break;
default:
elog(ERROR, "unrecognized StrategyNumber: %d", (int) strat);
- *result = false; /* keep compiler quiet */
+ *result = false; /* keep compiler quiet */
break;
}
return true;
* indexscan initiated by syscache lookup will use cross-data-type
* operators.)
*
- * If the sk_strategy was flipped by _bt_fix_scankey_strategy, we
- * have to un-flip it to get the correct opfamily member.
+ * If the sk_strategy was flipped by _bt_fix_scankey_strategy, we have to
+ * un-flip it to get the correct opfamily member.
*/
strat = op->sk_strategy;
if (op->sk_flags & SK_BT_DESC)
*
* Lastly, for ordinary scankeys (not IS NULL/NOT NULL), we check for a
* NULL comparison value. Since all btree operators are assumed strict,
- * a NULL means that the qual cannot be satisfied. We return TRUE if the
+ * a NULL means that the qual cannot be satisfied. We return TRUE if the
* comparison value isn't NULL, or FALSE if the scan should be abandoned.
*
* This function is applied to the *input* scankey structure; therefore
* --- we can treat IS NULL as an equality operator for purposes of search
* strategy.
*
- * Likewise, "x IS NOT NULL" is supported. We treat that as either "less
+ * Likewise, "x IS NOT NULL" is supported. We treat that as either "less
* than NULL" in a NULLS LAST index, or "greater than NULL" in a NULLS
* FIRST index.
*/
if (key->sk_flags & SK_SEARCHNULL)
{
if (isNull)
- continue; /* tuple satisfies this qual */
+ continue; /* tuple satisfies this qual */
}
else
{
Assert(key->sk_flags & SK_SEARCHNOTNULL);
if (!isNull)
- continue; /* tuple satisfies this qual */
+ continue; /* tuple satisfies this qual */
}
/*
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c,v 1.61 2010/02/13 00:59:58 sriggs Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c,v 1.62 2010/02/26 02:00:34 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
xlrec = (xl_btree_vacuum *) XLogRecGetData(record);
/*
- * If queries might be active then we need to ensure every block is unpinned
- * between the lastBlockVacuumed and the current block, if there are any.
- * This ensures that every block in the index is touched during VACUUM as
- * required to ensure scans work correctly.
+ * If queries might be active then we need to ensure every block is
+ * unpinned between the lastBlockVacuumed and the current block, if there
+ * are any. This ensures that every block in the index is touched during
+ * VACUUM as required to ensure scans work correctly.
*/
if (standbyState == STANDBY_SNAPSHOT_READY &&
(xlrec->lastBlockVacuumed + 1) != xlrec->block)
for (; blkno < xlrec->block; blkno++)
{
/*
- * XXX we don't actually need to read the block, we
- * just need to confirm it is unpinned. If we had a special call
- * into the buffer manager we could optimise this so that
- * if the block is not in shared_buffers we confirm it as unpinned.
+ * XXX we don't actually need to read the block, we just need to
+ * confirm it is unpinned. If we had a special call into the
+ * buffer manager we could optimise this so that if the block is
+ * not in shared_buffers we confirm it as unpinned.
*
* Another simple optimization would be to check if there's any
* backends running; if not, we could just skip this.
/*
* If the block was restored from a full page image, nothing more to do.
- * The RestoreBkpBlocks() call already pinned and took cleanup lock on
- * it. XXX: Perhaps we should call RestoreBkpBlocks() *after* the loop
- * above, to make the disk access more sequential.
+ * The RestoreBkpBlocks() call already pinned and took cleanup lock on it.
+ * XXX: Perhaps we should call RestoreBkpBlocks() *after* the loop above,
+ * to make the disk access more sequential.
*/
if (record->xl_info & XLR_BKP_BLOCK_1)
return;
xlrec = (xl_btree_delete *) XLogRecGetData(record);
/*
- * We don't need to take a cleanup lock to apply these changes.
- * See nbtree/README for details.
+ * We don't need to take a cleanup lock to apply these changes. See
+ * nbtree/README for details.
*/
buffer = XLogReadBuffer(xlrec->node, xlrec->block, false);
if (!BufferIsValid(buffer))
switch (info)
{
case XLOG_BTREE_DELETE:
+
/*
- * Btree delete records can conflict with standby queries. You might
- * think that vacuum records would conflict as well, but we've handled
- * that already. XLOG_HEAP2_CLEANUP_INFO records provide the highest xid
- * cleaned by the vacuum of the heap and so we can resolve any conflicts
- * just once when that arrives. After that any we know that no conflicts
- * exist from individual btree vacuum records on that index.
+ * Btree delete records can conflict with standby queries. You
+ * might think that vacuum records would conflict as well, but
+ * we've handled that already. XLOG_HEAP2_CLEANUP_INFO records
+ * provide the highest xid cleaned by the vacuum of the heap
+ * and so we can resolve any conflicts just once when that
+ * arrives. After that any we know that no conflicts exist
+ * from individual btree vacuum records on that index.
*/
{
xl_btree_delete *xlrec = (xl_btree_delete *) XLogRecGetData(record);
break;
case XLOG_BTREE_REUSE_PAGE:
+
/*
- * Btree reuse page records exist to provide a conflict point when we
- * reuse pages in the index via the FSM. That's all it does though.
+ * Btree reuse page records exist to provide a conflict point
+ * when we reuse pages in the index via the FSM. That's all it
+ * does though.
*/
{
xl_btree_reuse_page *xlrec = (xl_btree_reuse_page *) XLogRecGetData(record);
}
/*
- * Vacuum needs to pin and take cleanup lock on every leaf page,
- * a regular exclusive lock is enough for all other purposes.
+ * Vacuum needs to pin and take cleanup lock on every leaf page, a regular
+ * exclusive lock is enough for all other purposes.
*/
RestoreBkpBlocks(lsn, record, (info == XLOG_BTREE_VACUUM));
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c,v 1.34 2010/01/02 16:57:35 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/multixact.c,v 1.35 2010/02/26 02:00:34 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
myOldestMember = OldestMemberMXactId[MyBackendId];
if (MultiXactIdIsValid(myOldestMember))
{
- BackendId dummyBackendId = TwoPhaseGetDummyBackendId(xid);
+ BackendId dummyBackendId = TwoPhaseGetDummyBackendId(xid);
/*
- * Even though storing MultiXactId is atomic, acquire lock to make sure
- * others see both changes, not just the reset of the slot of the
+ * Even though storing MultiXactId is atomic, acquire lock to make
+ * sure others see both changes, not just the reset of the slot of the
* current backend. Using a volatile pointer might suffice, but this
* isn't a hot spot.
*/
/*
* We don't need to transfer OldestVisibleMXactId value, because the
- * transaction is not going to be looking at any more multixacts once
- * it's prepared.
+ * transaction is not going to be looking at any more multixacts once it's
+ * prepared.
*
* We assume that storing a MultiXactId is atomic and so we need not take
* MultiXactGenLock to do this.
void *recdata, uint32 len)
{
BackendId dummyBackendId = TwoPhaseGetDummyBackendId(xid);
- MultiXactId oldestMember;
+ MultiXactId oldestMember;
/*
- * Get the oldest member XID from the state file record, and set it in
- * the OldestMemberMXactId slot reserved for this prepared transaction.
+ * Get the oldest member XID from the state file record, and set it in the
+ * OldestMemberMXactId slot reserved for this prepared transaction.
*/
Assert(len == sizeof(MultiXactId));
- oldestMember = *((MultiXactId *)recdata);
+ oldestMember = *((MultiXactId *) recdata);
OldestMemberMXactId[dummyBackendId] = oldestMember;
}
*/
void
multixact_twophase_postabort(TransactionId xid, uint16 info,
- void *recdata, uint32 len)
+ void *recdata, uint32 len)
{
multixact_twophase_postcommit(xid, info, recdata, len);
}
max_xid = xids[i];
}
- /* We don't expect anyone else to modify nextXid, hence startup process
- * doesn't need to hold a lock while checking this. We still acquire
- * the lock to modify it, though.
+ /*
+ * We don't expect anyone else to modify nextXid, hence startup
+ * process doesn't need to hold a lock while checking this. We still
+ * acquire the lock to modify it, though.
*/
if (TransactionIdFollowsOrEquals(max_xid,
ShmemVariableCache->nextXid))
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/subtrans.c,v 1.26 2010/01/02 16:57:35 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/subtrans.c,v 1.27 2010/02/26 02:00:34 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* Current state should be 0 */
Assert(*ptr == InvalidTransactionId ||
- (*ptr == parent && overwriteOK));
+ (*ptr == parent && overwriteOK));
*ptr = parent;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c,v 1.58 2010/01/02 16:57:35 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c,v 1.59 2010/02/26 02:00:34 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* Each global transaction is associated with a global transaction
typedef struct GlobalTransactionData
{
PGPROC proc; /* dummy proc */
- BackendId dummyBackendId; /* similar to backend id for backends */
+ BackendId dummyBackendId; /* similar to backend id for backends */
TimestampTz prepared_at; /* time of preparation */
XLogRecPtr prepare_lsn; /* XLOG offset of prepare record */
Oid owner; /* ID of user that executed the xact */
/*
* Assign a unique ID for each dummy proc, so that the range of
* dummy backend IDs immediately follows the range of normal
- * backend IDs. We don't dare to assign a real backend ID to
- * dummy procs, because prepared transactions don't take part in
- * cache invalidation like a real backend ID would imply, but
- * having a unique ID for them is nevertheless handy. This
- * arrangement allows you to allocate an array of size
- * (MaxBackends + max_prepared_xacts + 1), and have a slot for
- * every backend and prepared transaction. Currently multixact.c
- * uses that technique.
+ * backend IDs. We don't dare to assign a real backend ID to dummy
+ * procs, because prepared transactions don't take part in cache
+ * invalidation like a real backend ID would imply, but having a
+ * unique ID for them is nevertheless handy. This arrangement
+ * allows you to allocate an array of size (MaxBackends +
+ * max_prepared_xacts + 1), and have a slot for every backend and
+ * prepared transaction. Currently multixact.c uses that
+ * technique.
*/
gxacts[i].dummyBackendId = MaxBackends + 1 + i;
}
BackendId
TwoPhaseGetDummyBackendId(TransactionId xid)
{
- PGPROC *proc = TwoPhaseGetDummyProc(xid);
+ PGPROC *proc = TwoPhaseGetDummyProc(xid);
return ((GlobalTransaction) proc)->dummyBackendId;
}
save_state_data(&hdr, sizeof(TwoPhaseFileHeader));
/*
- * Add the additional info about subxacts, deletable files and
- * cache invalidation messages.
+ * Add the additional info about subxacts, deletable files and cache
+ * invalidation messages.
*/
if (hdr.nsubxacts > 0)
{
/*
* Handle cache invalidation messages.
*
- * Relcache init file invalidation requires processing both
- * before and after we send the SI messages. See AtEOXact_Inval()
+ * Relcache init file invalidation requires processing both before and
+ * after we send the SI messages. See AtEOXact_Inval()
*/
if (hdr->initfileinval)
RelationCacheInitFileInvalidate(true);
bufptr += MAXALIGN(hdr->ninvalmsgs * sizeof(SharedInvalidationMessage));
/*
- * It's possible that SubTransSetParent has been set before, if the
- * prepared transaction generated xid assignment records. Test
+ * It's possible that SubTransSetParent has been set before, if
+ * the prepared transaction generated xid assignment records. Test
* here must match one used in AssignTransactionId().
*/
if (InHotStandby && hdr->nsubxacts >= PGPROC_MAX_CACHED_SUBXIDS)
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/twophase_rmgr.c,v 1.13 2010/02/16 22:34:43 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/twophase_rmgr.c,v 1.14 2010/02/26 02:00:34 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
{
NULL, /* END ID */
lock_twophase_postcommit, /* Lock */
- pgstat_twophase_postcommit, /* pgstat */
- multixact_twophase_postcommit /* MultiXact */
+ pgstat_twophase_postcommit, /* pgstat */
+ multixact_twophase_postcommit /* MultiXact */
};
const TwoPhaseCallback twophase_postabort_callbacks[TWOPHASE_RM_MAX_ID + 1] =
NULL, /* END ID */
lock_twophase_postabort, /* Lock */
pgstat_twophase_postabort, /* pgstat */
- multixact_twophase_postabort /* MultiXact */
+ multixact_twophase_postabort /* MultiXact */
};
const TwoPhaseCallback twophase_standby_recover_callbacks[TWOPHASE_RM_MAX_ID + 1] =
* Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c,v 1.90 2010/02/20 21:24:01 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/varsup.c,v 1.91 2010/02/26 02:00:34 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
*
* Note: when this is called, we are actually already inside a valid
* transaction, since XIDs are now not allocated until the transaction
- * does something. So it is safe to do a database lookup if we want to
+ * does something. So it is safe to do a database lookup if we want to
* issue a warning about XID wrap.
*/
TransactionId
* For safety's sake, we release XidGenLock while sending signals,
* warnings, etc. This is not so much because we care about
* preserving concurrency in this situation, as to avoid any
- * possibility of deadlock while doing get_database_name().
- * First, copy all the shared values we'll need in this path.
+ * possibility of deadlock while doing get_database_name(). First,
+ * copy all the shared values we'll need in this path.
*/
TransactionId xidWarnLimit = ShmemVariableCache->xidWarnLimit;
TransactionId xidStopLimit = ShmemVariableCache->xidStopLimit;
TransactionId xidWrapLimit = ShmemVariableCache->xidWrapLimit;
- Oid oldest_datoid = ShmemVariableCache->oldestXidDB;
+ Oid oldest_datoid = ShmemVariableCache->oldestXidDB;
LWLockRelease(XidGenLock);
if (IsUnderPostmaster &&
TransactionIdFollowsOrEquals(xid, xidStopLimit))
{
- char *oldest_datname = get_database_name(oldest_datoid);
+ char *oldest_datname = get_database_name(oldest_datoid);
/* complain even if that DB has disappeared */
if (oldest_datname)
}
else if (TransactionIdFollowsOrEquals(xid, xidWarnLimit))
{
- char *oldest_datname = get_database_name(oldest_datoid);
+ char *oldest_datname = get_database_name(oldest_datoid);
/* complain even if that DB has disappeared */
if (oldest_datname)
/* Log the info */
ereport(DEBUG1,
- (errmsg("transaction ID wrap limit is %u, limited by database with OID %u",
- xidWrapLimit, oldest_datoid)));
+ (errmsg("transaction ID wrap limit is %u, limited by database with OID %u",
+ xidWrapLimit, oldest_datoid)));
/*
* If past the autovacuum force point, immediately signal an autovac
/* Give an immediate warning if past the wrap warn point */
if (TransactionIdFollowsOrEquals(curXid, xidWarnLimit) && !InRecovery)
{
- char *oldest_datname = get_database_name(oldest_datoid);
+ char *oldest_datname = get_database_name(oldest_datoid);
/*
* Note: it's possible that get_database_name fails and returns NULL,
*/
if (oldest_datname)
ereport(WARNING,
- (errmsg("database \"%s\" must be vacuumed within %u transactions",
- oldest_datname,
- xidWrapLimit - curXid),
- errhint("To avoid a database shutdown, execute a database-wide VACUUM in that database.\n"
- "You might also need to commit or roll back old prepared transactions.")));
+ (errmsg("database \"%s\" must be vacuumed within %u transactions",
+ oldest_datname,
+ xidWrapLimit - curXid),
+ errhint("To avoid a database shutdown, execute a database-wide VACUUM in that database.\n"
+ "You might also need to commit or roll back old prepared transactions.")));
else
ereport(WARNING,
(errmsg("database with OID %u must be vacuumed within %u transactions",
* We primarily check whether oldestXidDB is valid. The cases we have in
* mind are that that database was dropped, or the field was reset to zero
* by pg_resetxlog. In either case we should force recalculation of the
- * wrap limit. Also do it if oldestXid is old enough to be forcing
+ * wrap limit. Also do it if oldestXid is old enough to be forcing
* autovacuums or other actions; this ensures we update our state as soon
* as possible once extra overhead is being incurred.
*/
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c,v 1.288 2010/02/20 21:24:01 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c,v 1.289 2010/02/26 02:00:34 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int nChildXids; /* # of subcommitted child XIDs */
int maxChildXids; /* allocated size of childXids[] */
Oid prevUser; /* previous CurrentUserId setting */
- int prevSecContext; /* previous SecurityRestrictionContext */
+ int prevSecContext; /* previous SecurityRestrictionContext */
bool prevXactReadOnly; /* entry-time xact r/o state */
- bool startedInRecovery; /* did we start in recovery? */
+ bool startedInRecovery; /* did we start in recovery? */
struct TransactionStateData *parent; /* back link to parent */
} TransactionStateData;
* unreportedXids holds XIDs of all subtransactions that have not yet been
* reported in a XLOG_XACT_ASSIGNMENT record.
*/
-static int nUnreportedXids;
+static int nUnreportedXids;
static TransactionId unreportedXids[PGPROC_MAX_CACHED_SUBXIDS];
static TransactionState CurrentTransactionState = &TopTransactionStateData;
* include the top-level xid and all the subxids that have not yet been
* reported using XLOG_XACT_ASSIGNMENT records.
*
- * This is required to limit the amount of shared memory required in a
- * hot standby server to keep track of in-progress XIDs. See notes for
+ * This is required to limit the amount of shared memory required in a hot
+ * standby server to keep track of in-progress XIDs. See notes for
* RecordKnownAssignedTransactionIds().
*
- * We don't keep track of the immediate parent of each subxid,
- * only the top-level transaction that each subxact belongs to. This
- * is correct in recovery only because aborted subtransactions are
- * separately WAL logged.
+ * We don't keep track of the immediate parent of each subxid, only the
+ * top-level transaction that each subxact belongs to. This is correct in
+ * recovery only because aborted subtransactions are separately WAL
+ * logged.
*/
if (isSubXact && XLogStandbyInfoActive())
{
unreportedXids[nUnreportedXids] = s->transactionId;
nUnreportedXids++;
- /* ensure this test matches similar one in RecoverPreparedTransactions() */
+ /*
+ * ensure this test matches similar one in
+ * RecoverPreparedTransactions()
+ */
if (nUnreportedXids >= PGPROC_MAX_CACHED_SUBXIDS)
{
XLogRecData rdata[2];
- xl_xact_assignment xlrec;
+ xl_xact_assignment xlrec;
/*
* xtop is always set by now because we recurse up transaction
nchildren = xactGetCommittedChildren(&children);
nmsgs = xactGetCommittedInvalidationMessages(&invalMessages,
&RelcacheInitFileInval);
+
/*
* If we haven't been assigned an XID yet, we neither can, nor do we want
* to write a COMMIT record.
AtCCI_LocalCache(void)
{
/*
- * Make any pending relation map changes visible. We must do this
- * before processing local sinval messages, so that the map changes
- * will get reflected into the relcache when relcache invals are
- * processed.
+ * Make any pending relation map changes visible. We must do this before
+ * processing local sinval messages, so that the map changes will get
+ * reflected into the relcache when relcache invals are processed.
*/
AtCCI_RelationMap();
*
* Note: We rely on the fact that the XID of a child always follows that
* of its parent. By copying the XID of this subtransaction before the
- * XIDs of its children, we ensure that the array stays ordered.
- * Likewise, all XIDs already in the array belong to subtransactions
- * started and subcommitted before us, so their XIDs must precede ours.
+ * XIDs of its children, we ensure that the array stays ordered. Likewise,
+ * all XIDs already in the array belong to subtransactions started and
+ * subcommitted before us, so their XIDs must precede ours.
*/
s->parent->childXids[s->parent->nChildXids] = s->transactionId;
s->maxChildXids = 0;
/*
- * We could prune the unreportedXids array here. But we don't bother.
- * That would potentially reduce number of XLOG_XACT_ASSIGNMENT records
- * but it would likely introduce more CPU time into the more common
- * paths, so we choose not to do that.
+ * We could prune the unreportedXids array here. But we don't bother. That
+ * would potentially reduce number of XLOG_XACT_ASSIGNMENT records but it
+ * would likely introduce more CPU time into the more common paths, so we
+ * choose not to do that.
*/
}
/*
* do abort processing
*/
- AfterTriggerEndXact(false); /* 'false' means it's abort */
+ AfterTriggerEndXact(false); /* 'false' means it's abort */
AtAbort_Portals();
AtEOXact_LargeObject(false);
AtAbort_Notify();
/*
* Make sure nextXid is beyond any XID mentioned in the record.
*
- * We don't expect anyone else to modify nextXid, hence we
- * don't need to hold a lock while checking this. We still acquire
- * the lock to modify it, though.
+ * We don't expect anyone else to modify nextXid, hence we don't need to
+ * hold a lock while checking this. We still acquire the lock to modify
+ * it, though.
*/
if (TransactionIdFollowsOrEquals(max_xid,
ShmemVariableCache->nextXid))
* protocol during recovery to provide information on database
* consistency for when users try to set hint bits. It is important
* that we do not set hint bits until the minRecoveryPoint is past
- * this commit record. This ensures that if we crash we don't see
- * hint bits set on changes made by transactions that haven't yet
+ * this commit record. This ensures that if we crash we don't see hint
+ * bits set on changes made by transactions that haven't yet
* recovered. It's unlikely but it's good to be safe.
*/
TransactionIdAsyncCommitTree(xid, xlrec->nsubxacts, sub_xids, lsn);
/*
* Send any cache invalidations attached to the commit. We must
- * maintain the same order of invalidation then release locks
- * as occurs in .
+ * maintain the same order of invalidation then release locks as
+ * occurs in .
*/
ProcessCommittedInvalidationMessages(inval_msgs, xlrec->nmsgs,
- XactCompletionRelcacheInitFileInval(xlrec),
- xlrec->dbId, xlrec->tsId);
+ XactCompletionRelcacheInitFileInval(xlrec),
+ xlrec->dbId, xlrec->tsId);
/*
- * Release locks, if any. We do this for both two phase and normal
- * one phase transactions. In effect we are ignoring the prepare
- * phase and just going straight to lock release.
+ * Release locks, if any. We do this for both two phase and normal one
+ * phase transactions. In effect we are ignoring the prepare phase and
+ * just going straight to lock release.
*/
StandbyReleaseLockTree(xid, xlrec->nsubxacts, sub_xids);
}
}
/*
- * We issue an XLogFlush() for the same reason we emit ForceSyncCommit() in
- * normal operation. For example, in DROP DATABASE, we delete all the files
- * belonging to the database, and then commit the transaction. If we crash
- * after all the files have been deleted but before the commit, you have an
- * entry in pg_database without any files. To minimize the window for that,
- * we use ForceSyncCommit() to rush the commit record to disk as quick as
- * possible. We have the same window during recovery, and forcing an
- * XLogFlush() (which updates minRecoveryPoint during recovery) helps
- * to reduce that problem window, for any user that requested ForceSyncCommit().
+ * We issue an XLogFlush() for the same reason we emit ForceSyncCommit()
+ * in normal operation. For example, in DROP DATABASE, we delete all the
+ * files belonging to the database, and then commit the transaction. If we
+ * crash after all the files have been deleted but before the commit, you
+ * have an entry in pg_database without any files. To minimize the window
+ * for that, we use ForceSyncCommit() to rush the commit record to disk as
+ * quick as possible. We have the same window during recovery, and forcing
+ * an XLogFlush() (which updates minRecoveryPoint during recovery) helps
+ * to reduce that problem window, for any user that requested
+ * ForceSyncCommit().
*/
if (XactCompletionForceSyncCommit(xlrec))
XLogFlush(lsn);
max_xid = TransactionIdLatest(xid, xlrec->nsubxacts, sub_xids);
/* Make sure nextXid is beyond any XID mentioned in the record */
- /* We don't expect anyone else to modify nextXid, hence we
- * don't need to hold a lock while checking this. We still acquire
- * the lock to modify it, though.
+
+ /*
+ * We don't expect anyone else to modify nextXid, hence we don't need to
+ * hold a lock while checking this. We still acquire the lock to modify
+ * it, though.
*/
if (TransactionIdFollowsOrEquals(max_xid,
ShmemVariableCache->nextXid))
if (InHotStandby)
{
/*
- * If a transaction completion record arrives that has as-yet unobserved
- * subtransactions then this will not have been fully handled by the call
- * to RecordKnownAssignedTransactionIds() in the main recovery loop in
- * xlog.c. So we need to do bookkeeping again to cover that case. This is
- * confusing and it is easy to think this call is irrelevant, which has
- * happened three times in development already. Leave it in.
+ * If a transaction completion record arrives that has as-yet
+ * unobserved subtransactions then this will not have been fully
+ * handled by the call to RecordKnownAssignedTransactionIds() in the
+ * main recovery loop in xlog.c. So we need to do bookkeeping again to
+ * cover that case. This is confusing and it is easy to think this
+ * call is irrelevant, which has happened three times in development
+ * already. Leave it in.
*/
RecordKnownAssignedTransactionIds(max_xid);
}
msgs = (SharedInvalidationMessage *) &xacts[xlrec->nsubxacts];
if (XactCompletionRelcacheInitFileInval(xlrec))
- appendStringInfo(buf, "; relcache init file inval dbid %u tsid %u",
- xlrec->dbId, xlrec->tsId);
+ appendStringInfo(buf, "; relcache init file inval dbid %u tsid %u",
+ xlrec->dbId, xlrec->tsId);
appendStringInfo(buf, "; inval msgs:");
for (i = 0; i < xlrec->nmsgs; i++)
/*
* Note that we ignore the WAL record's xid, since we're more
- * interested in the top-level xid that issued the record
- * and which xids are being reported here.
+ * interested in the top-level xid that issued the record and which
+ * xids are being reported here.
*/
appendStringInfo(buf, "xid assignment xtop %u: ", xlrec->xtop);
xact_desc_assignment(buf, xlrec);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c,v 1.378 2010/02/25 02:17:50 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c,v 1.379 2010/02/26 02:00:35 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int XLogArchiveTimeout = 0;
bool XLogArchiveMode = false;
char *XLogArchiveCommand = NULL;
-bool XLogRequestRecoveryConnections = true;
+bool XLogRequestRecoveryConnections = true;
int MaxStandbyDelay = 30;
bool fullPageWrites = true;
bool log_checkpoints = false;
bool InRecovery = false;
/* Are we in Hot Standby mode? Only valid in startup process, see xlog.h */
-HotStandbyState standbyState = STANDBY_DISABLED;
+HotStandbyState standbyState = STANDBY_DISABLED;
-static XLogRecPtr LastRec;
+static XLogRecPtr LastRec;
/*
* Local copy of SharedRecoveryInProgress variable. True actually means "not
* 0: unconditionally not allowed to insert XLOG
* -1: must check RecoveryInProgress(); disallow until it is false
* Most processes start with -1 and transition to 1 after seeing that recovery
- * is not in progress. But we can also force the value for special cases.
+ * is not in progress. But we can also force the value for special cases.
* The coding in XLogInsertAllowed() depends on the first two of these states
* being numerically the same as bool true and false.
*/
/* options taken from recovery.conf for XLOG streaming */
static bool StandbyMode = false;
static char *PrimaryConnInfo = NULL;
-char *TriggerFile = NULL;
+char *TriggerFile = NULL;
/* if recoveryStopsHere returns true, it saves actual stop xid/time here */
static TransactionId recoveryStopXid;
/* end+1 of the last record replayed (or being replayed) */
XLogRecPtr replayEndRecPtr;
/* timestamp of last record replayed (or being replayed) */
- TimestampTz recoveryLastXTime;
+ TimestampTz recoveryLastXTime;
/* end+1 of the last record replayed */
XLogRecPtr recoveryLastRecPtr;
static uint32 readSeg = 0;
static uint32 readOff = 0;
static uint32 readLen = 0;
+
/* Is the currently open segment being streamed from primary? */
static bool readStreamed = false;
static bool InstallXLogFileSegment(uint32 *log, uint32 *seg, char *tmppath,
bool find_free, int *max_advance,
bool use_lock);
-static int XLogFileRead(uint32 log, uint32 seg, int emode, TimeLineID tli,
+static int XLogFileRead(uint32 log, uint32 seg, int emode, TimeLineID tli,
bool fromArchive, bool notexistOk);
-static int XLogFileReadAnyTLI(uint32 log, uint32 seg, int emode,
+static int XLogFileReadAnyTLI(uint32 log, uint32 seg, int emode,
bool fromArchive);
static bool XLogPageRead(XLogRecPtr *RecPtr, int emode, bool fetching_ckpt,
bool randAccess);
* to not need a valid 'lsn' value.
*
* Another important reason for doing it this way is that the passed
- * 'lsn' value could be bogus, i.e., past the end of available WAL,
- * if the caller got it from a corrupted heap page. Accepting such
- * a value as the min recovery point would prevent us from coming up
- * at all. Instead, we just log a warning and continue with recovery.
+ * 'lsn' value could be bogus, i.e., past the end of available WAL, if
+ * the caller got it from a corrupted heap page. Accepting such a
+ * value as the min recovery point would prevent us from coming up at
+ * all. Instead, we just log a warning and continue with recovery.
* (See also the comments about corrupt LSNs in XLogFlush.)
*/
SpinLockAcquire(&xlogctl->info_lck);
if (!force && XLByteLT(newMinRecoveryPoint, lsn))
elog(WARNING,
- "xlog min recovery request %X/%X is past current point %X/%X",
+ "xlog min recovery request %X/%X is past current point %X/%X",
lsn.xlogid, lsn.xrecoff,
newMinRecoveryPoint.xlogid, newMinRecoveryPoint.xrecoff);
/*
* During REDO, we are reading not writing WAL. Therefore, instead of
- * trying to flush the WAL, we should update minRecoveryPoint instead.
- * We test XLogInsertAllowed(), not InRecovery, because we need the
- * bgwriter to act this way too, and because when the bgwriter tries
- * to write the end-of-recovery checkpoint, it should indeed flush.
+ * trying to flush the WAL, we should update minRecoveryPoint instead. We
+ * test XLogInsertAllowed(), not InRecovery, because we need the bgwriter
+ * to act this way too, and because when the bgwriter tries to write the
+ * end-of-recovery checkpoint, it should indeed flush.
*/
if (!XLogInsertAllowed())
{
* the whole system due to corruption on one data page. In particular, if
* the bad page is encountered again during recovery then we would be
* unable to restart the database at all! (This scenario actually
- * happened in the field several times with 7.1 releases.) As of 8.4,
- * bad LSNs encountered during recovery are UpdateMinRecoveryPoint's
- * problem; the only time we can reach here during recovery is while
- * flushing the end-of-recovery checkpoint record, and we don't expect
- * that to have a bad LSN.
+ * happened in the field several times with 7.1 releases.) As of 8.4, bad
+ * LSNs encountered during recovery are UpdateMinRecoveryPoint's problem;
+ * the only time we can reach here during recovery is while flushing the
+ * end-of-recovery checkpoint record, and we don't expect that to have a
+ * bad LSN.
*
- * Note that for calls from xact.c, the ERROR will
- * be promoted to PANIC since xact.c calls this routine inside a critical
- * section. However, calls from bufmgr.c are not within critical sections
- * and so we will not force a restart for a bad LSN on a data page.
+ * Note that for calls from xact.c, the ERROR will be promoted to PANIC
+ * since xact.c calls this routine inside a critical section. However,
+ * calls from bufmgr.c are not within critical sections and so we will not
+ * force a restart for a bad LSN on a data page.
*/
if (XLByteLT(LogwrtResult.Flush, record))
elog(ERROR,
LWLockRelease(ControlFileLock);
/*
- * An invalid minRecoveryPoint means that we need to recover all the WAL,
- * i.e., we're doing crash recovery. We never modify the control file's
- * value in that case, so we can short-circuit future checks here too.
+ * An invalid minRecoveryPoint means that we need to recover all the
+ * WAL, i.e., we're doing crash recovery. We never modify the control
+ * file's value in that case, so we can short-circuit future checks
+ * here too.
*/
if (minRecoveryPoint.xlogid == 0 && minRecoveryPoint.xrecoff == 0)
updateMinRecoveryPoint = false;
char path[MAXPGPATH];
int fd;
- XLogFileName(xlogfname, tli, log, seg);
+ XLogFileName(xlogfname, tli, log, seg);
- if (fromArchive)
- {
- /* Report recovery progress in PS display */
- snprintf(activitymsg, sizeof(activitymsg), "waiting for %s",
- xlogfname);
- set_ps_display(activitymsg, false);
-
- restoredFromArchive = RestoreArchivedFile(path, xlogfname,
- "RECOVERYXLOG",
- XLogSegSize);
- if (!restoredFromArchive)
- return -1;
- }
- else
- {
- XLogFilePath(path, tli, log, seg);
- restoredFromArchive = false;
- }
+ if (fromArchive)
+ {
+ /* Report recovery progress in PS display */
+ snprintf(activitymsg, sizeof(activitymsg), "waiting for %s",
+ xlogfname);
+ set_ps_display(activitymsg, false);
- fd = BasicOpenFile(path, O_RDONLY | PG_BINARY, 0);
- if (fd >= 0)
- {
- /* Success! */
- curFileTLI = tli;
+ restoredFromArchive = RestoreArchivedFile(path, xlogfname,
+ "RECOVERYXLOG",
+ XLogSegSize);
+ if (!restoredFromArchive)
+ return -1;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ XLogFilePath(path, tli, log, seg);
+ restoredFromArchive = false;
+ }
- /* Report recovery progress in PS display */
- snprintf(activitymsg, sizeof(activitymsg), "recovering %s",
- xlogfname);
- set_ps_display(activitymsg, false);
+ fd = BasicOpenFile(path, O_RDONLY | PG_BINARY, 0);
+ if (fd >= 0)
+ {
+ /* Success! */
+ curFileTLI = tli;
- return fd;
- }
- if (errno != ENOENT || !notfoundOk) /* unexpected failure? */
- ereport(PANIC,
- (errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not open file \"%s\" (log file %u, segment %u): %m",
- path, log, seg)));
- return -1;
+ /* Report recovery progress in PS display */
+ snprintf(activitymsg, sizeof(activitymsg), "recovering %s",
+ xlogfname);
+ set_ps_display(activitymsg, false);
+
+ return fd;
+ }
+ if (errno != ENOENT || !notfoundOk) /* unexpected failure? */
+ ereport(PANIC,
+ (errcode_for_file_access(),
+ errmsg("could not open file \"%s\" (log file %u, segment %u): %m",
+ path, log, seg)));
+ return -1;
}
/*
* If not in StandbyMode, fall back to searching pg_xlog. In
* StandbyMode we're streaming segments from the primary to pg_xlog,
* and we mustn't confuse the (possibly partial) segments in pg_xlog
- * with complete segments ready to be applied. We rather wait for
- * the records to arrive through streaming.
+ * with complete segments ready to be applied. We rather wait for the
+ * records to arrive through streaming.
*/
if (!StandbyMode && fromArchive)
{
/*
* WAL segment files will not be re-read in normal operation, so we advise
* the OS to release any cached pages. But do not do so if WAL archiving
- * or streaming is active, because archiver and walsender process could use
- * the cache to read the WAL segment.
+ * or streaming is active, because archiver and walsender process could
+ * use the cache to read the WAL segment.
*/
#if defined(USE_POSIX_FADVISE) && defined(POSIX_FADV_DONTNEED)
if (!XLogIsNeeded())
{
if (expectedSize > 0 && stat_buf.st_size != expectedSize)
{
- int elevel;
+ int elevel;
/*
* If we find a partial file in standby mode, we assume it's
* trying.
*
* Otherwise treat a wrong-sized file as FATAL to ensure the
- * DBA would notice it, but is that too strong? We could try
+ * DBA would notice it, but is that too strong? We could try
* to plow ahead with a local copy of the file ... but the
* problem is that there probably isn't one, and we'd
- * incorrectly conclude we've reached the end of WAL and
- * we're done recovering ...
+ * incorrectly conclude we've reached the end of WAL and we're
+ * done recovering ...
*/
if (StandbyMode && stat_buf.st_size < expectedSize)
elevel = DEBUG1;
xlogfname, rc)));
not_available:
+
/*
* if an archived file is not available, there might still be a version of
* this file in XLOGDIR, so return that as the filename to open.
struct dirent *xlde;
char lastoff[MAXFNAMELEN];
char path[MAXPGPATH];
+
#ifdef WIN32
char newpath[MAXPGPATH];
#endif
else
{
/* No need for any more future segments... */
- int rc;
+ int rc;
ereport(DEBUG2,
(errmsg("removing transaction log file \"%s\"",
xlde->d_name)));
#ifdef WIN32
+
/*
* On Windows, if another process (e.g another backend)
* holds the file open in FILE_SHARE_DELETE mode, unlink
* will succeed, but the file will still show up in
- * directory listing until the last handle is closed.
- * To avoid confusing the lingering deleted file for a
- * live WAL file that needs to be archived, rename it
- * before deleting it.
+ * directory listing until the last handle is closed. To
+ * avoid confusing the lingering deleted file for a live
+ * WAL file that needs to be archived, rename it before
+ * deleting it.
*
* If another process holds the file open without
* FILE_SHARE_DELETE flag, rename will fail. We'll try
RecPtr = &tmpRecPtr;
/*
- * Align recptr to next page if no more records can fit on the
- * current page.
+ * Align recptr to next page if no more records can fit on the current
+ * page.
*/
if (XLOG_BLCKSZ - (RecPtr->xrecoff % XLOG_BLCKSZ) < SizeOfXLogRecord)
{
UpdateMinRecoveryPoint(InvalidXLogRecPtr, true);
/*
- * If the ending log segment is still open, close it (to avoid
- * problems on Windows with trying to rename or delete an open file).
+ * If the ending log segment is still open, close it (to avoid problems on
+ * Windows with trying to rename or delete an open file).
*/
if (readFile >= 0)
{
{
/* We ignore autovacuum_max_workers when we make this test. */
RecoveryRequiresIntParameter("max_connections",
- MaxConnections, checkPoint.MaxConnections);
+ MaxConnections, checkPoint.MaxConnections);
RecoveryRequiresIntParameter("max_prepared_xacts",
- max_prepared_xacts, checkPoint.max_prepared_xacts);
+ max_prepared_xacts, checkPoint.max_prepared_xacts);
RecoveryRequiresIntParameter("max_locks_per_xact",
- max_locks_per_xact, checkPoint.max_locks_per_xact);
+ max_locks_per_xact, checkPoint.max_locks_per_xact);
if (!checkPoint.XLogStandbyInfoMode)
ereport(ERROR,
- (errmsg("recovery connections cannot start because the recovery_connections "
- "parameter is disabled on the WAL source server")));
+ (errmsg("recovery connections cannot start because the recovery_connections "
+ "parameter is disabled on the WAL source server")));
}
/*
ValidateXLOGDirectoryStructure();
/*
- * Clear out any old relcache cache files. This is *necessary* if we
- * do any WAL replay, since that would probably result in the cache files
- * being out of sync with database reality. In theory we could leave
- * them in place if the database had been cleanly shut down, but it
- * seems safest to just remove them always and let them be rebuilt
- * during the first backend startup.
+ * Clear out any old relcache cache files. This is *necessary* if we do
+ * any WAL replay, since that would probably result in the cache files
+ * being out of sync with database reality. In theory we could leave them
+ * in place if the database had been cleanly shut down, but it seems
+ * safest to just remove them always and let them be rebuilt during the
+ * first backend startup.
*/
RelationCacheInitFileRemove();
{
if (recoveryTargetExact)
ereport(LOG,
- (errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to XID %u",
- recoveryTargetXid)));
+ (errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to XID %u",
+ recoveryTargetXid)));
else
ereport(LOG,
(errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to %s",
if (XLByteLT(ControlFile->minRecoveryPoint, checkPoint.redo))
ControlFile->minRecoveryPoint = checkPoint.redo;
}
+
/*
* set backupStartupPoint if we're starting archive recovery from a
* base backup
/*
* Initialize recovery connections, if enabled. We won't let backends
- * in yet, not until we've reached the min recovery point specified
- * in control file and we've established a recovery snapshot from a
+ * in yet, not until we've reached the min recovery point specified in
+ * control file and we've established a recovery snapshot from a
* running-xacts WAL record.
*/
if (InArchiveRecovery && XLogRequestRecoveryConnections)
{
TransactionId *xids;
- int nxids;
+ int nxids;
CheckRequiredParameterValues(checkPoint);
{
#ifdef WAL_DEBUG
if (XLOG_DEBUG ||
- (rmid == RM_XACT_ID && trace_recovery_messages <= DEBUG2) ||
+ (rmid == RM_XACT_ID && trace_recovery_messages <= DEBUG2) ||
(rmid != RM_XACT_ID && trace_recovery_messages <= DEBUG3))
{
StringInfoData buf;
{
reachedMinRecoveryPoint = true;
ereport(LOG,
- (errmsg("consistent recovery state reached at %X/%X",
- EndRecPtr.xlogid, EndRecPtr.xrecoff)));
+ (errmsg("consistent recovery state reached at %X/%X",
+ EndRecPtr.xlogid, EndRecPtr.xrecoff)));
}
/*
* Have we got a valid starting snapshot that will allow
- * queries to be run? If so, we can tell postmaster that
- * the database is consistent now, enabling connections.
+ * queries to be run? If so, we can tell postmaster that the
+ * database is consistent now, enabling connections.
*/
if (standbyState == STANDBY_SNAPSHOT_READY &&
!backendsAllowed &&
/*
* We are now done reading the xlog from stream. Turn off streaming
- * recovery to force fetching the files (which would be required
- * at end of recovery, e.g., timeline history file) from archive or
- * pg_xlog.
+ * recovery to force fetching the files (which would be required at end of
+ * recovery, e.g., timeline history file) from archive or pg_xlog.
*/
StandbyMode = false;
TransactionIdRetreat(ShmemVariableCache->latestCompletedXid);
/*
- * Start up the commit log and related stuff, too. In hot standby mode
- * we did this already before WAL replay.
+ * Start up the commit log and related stuff, too. In hot standby mode we
+ * did this already before WAL replay.
*/
if (standbyState == STANDBY_DISABLED)
{
}
/*
- * All done. Allow backends to write WAL. (Although the bool flag is
+ * All done. Allow backends to write WAL. (Although the bool flag is
* probably atomic in itself, we use the info_lck here to ensure that
* there are no race conditions concerning visibility of other recent
* updates to shared memory.)
RecoveryInProgress(void)
{
/*
- * We check shared state each time only until we leave recovery mode.
- * We can't re-enter recovery, so there's no need to keep checking after
- * the shared variable has once been seen false.
+ * We check shared state each time only until we leave recovery mode. We
+ * can't re-enter recovery, so there's no need to keep checking after the
+ * shared variable has once been seen false.
*/
if (!LocalRecoveryInProgress)
return false;
/*
* Initialize TimeLineID and RedoRecPtr when we discover that recovery
* is finished. InitPostgres() relies upon this behaviour to ensure
- * that InitXLOGAccess() is called at backend startup. (If you change
+ * that InitXLOGAccess() is called at backend startup. (If you change
* this, see also LocalSetXLogInsertAllowed.)
*/
if (!LocalRecoveryInProgress)
XLogInsertAllowed(void)
{
/*
- * If value is "unconditionally true" or "unconditionally false",
- * just return it. This provides the normal fast path once recovery
- * is known done.
+ * If value is "unconditionally true" or "unconditionally false", just
+ * return it. This provides the normal fast path once recovery is known
+ * done.
*/
if (LocalXLogInsertAllowed >= 0)
return (bool) LocalXLogInsertAllowed;
return false;
/*
- * On exit from recovery, reset to "unconditionally true", since there
- * is no need to keep checking.
+ * On exit from recovery, reset to "unconditionally true", since there is
+ * no need to keep checking.
*/
LocalXLogInsertAllowed = 1;
return true;
CheckPointGuts(checkPoint.redo, flags);
/*
- * Take a snapshot of running transactions and write this to WAL.
- * This allows us to reconstruct the state of running transactions
- * during archive recovery, if required. Skip, if this info disabled.
+ * Take a snapshot of running transactions and write this to WAL. This
+ * allows us to reconstruct the state of running transactions during
+ * archive recovery, if required. Skip, if this info disabled.
*
* If we are shutting down, or Startup process is completing crash
* recovery we don't need to write running xact data.
* Update checkPoint.nextXid since we have a later value
*/
if (!shutdown && XLogStandbyInfoActive())
- LogStandbySnapshot(&checkPoint.oldestActiveXid, &checkPoint.nextXid);
+ LogStandbySnapshot(&checkPoint.oldestActiveXid, &checkPoint.nextXid);
else
checkPoint.oldestActiveXid = InvalidTransactionId;
XLogFlush(recptr);
/*
- * We mustn't write any new WAL after a shutdown checkpoint, or it will
- * be overwritten at next startup. No-one should even try, this just
- * allows sanity-checking. In the case of an end-of-recovery checkpoint,
- * we want to just temporarily disable writing until the system has exited
+ * We mustn't write any new WAL after a shutdown checkpoint, or it will be
+ * overwritten at next startup. No-one should even try, this just allows
+ * sanity-checking. In the case of an end-of-recovery checkpoint, we want
+ * to just temporarily disable writing until the system has exited
* recovery.
*/
if (shutdown)
{
if (flags & CHECKPOINT_END_OF_RECOVERY)
- LocalXLogInsertAllowed = -1; /* return to "check" state */
+ LocalXLogInsertAllowed = -1; /* return to "check" state */
else
- LocalXLogInsertAllowed = 0; /* never again write WAL */
+ LocalXLogInsertAllowed = 0; /* never again write WAL */
}
/*
smgrpostckpt();
/*
- * If there's connected standby servers doing XLOG streaming, don't
- * delete XLOG files that have not been streamed to all of them yet.
- * This does nothing to prevent them from being deleted when the
- * standby is disconnected (e.g because of network problems), but at
- * least it avoids an open replication connection from failing because
- * of that.
+ * If there's connected standby servers doing XLOG streaming, don't delete
+ * XLOG files that have not been streamed to all of them yet. This does
+ * nothing to prevent them from being deleted when the standby is
+ * disconnected (e.g because of network problems), but at least it avoids
+ * an open replication connection from failing because of that.
*/
if ((_logId || _logSeg) && MaxWalSenders > 0)
{
- XLogRecPtr oldest;
- uint32 log;
- uint32 seg;
+ XLogRecPtr oldest;
+ uint32 log;
+ uint32 seg;
oldest = GetOldestWALSendPointer();
if (oldest.xlogid != 0 || oldest.xrecoff != 0)
XLByteToSeg(oldest, log, seg);
if (log < _logId || (log == _logId && seg < _logSeg))
{
- _logId = log;
- _logSeg = seg;
+ _logId = log;
+ _logSeg = seg;
}
}
}
/*
- * Delete old log files (those no longer needed even for
- * previous checkpoint or the standbys in XLOG streaming).
+ * Delete old log files (those no longer needed even for previous
+ * checkpoint or the standbys in XLOG streaming).
*/
if (_logId || _logSeg)
{
/*
* Update pg_control, using current time. Check that it still shows
* IN_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY state and an older checkpoint, else do nothing;
- * this is a quick hack to make sure nothing really bad happens if
- * somehow we get here after the end-of-recovery checkpoint.
+ * this is a quick hack to make sure nothing really bad happens if somehow
+ * we get here after the end-of-recovery checkpoint.
*/
LWLockAcquire(ControlFileLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE);
if (ControlFile->state == DB_IN_ARCHIVE_RECOVERY &&
LogCheckpointEnd(true);
ereport((log_checkpoints ? LOG : DEBUG2),
- (errmsg("recovery restart point at %X/%X with latest known log time %s",
- lastCheckPoint.redo.xlogid, lastCheckPoint.redo.xrecoff,
- timestamptz_to_str(GetLatestXLogTime()))));
+ (errmsg("recovery restart point at %X/%X with latest known log time %s",
+ lastCheckPoint.redo.xlogid, lastCheckPoint.redo.xrecoff,
+ timestamptz_to_str(GetLatestXLogTime()))));
LWLockRelease(CheckpointLock);
return true;
else if (info == XLOG_BACKUP_END)
{
XLogRecPtr startpoint;
+
memcpy(&startpoint, XLogRecGetData(record), sizeof(startpoint));
if (XLByteEQ(ControlFile->backupStartPoint, startpoint))
if (InArchiveRecovery)
{
/*
- * Note: We don't print the reason string from the record,
- * because that gets added as a line using xlog_desc()
+ * Note: We don't print the reason string from the record, because
+ * that gets added as a line using xlog_desc()
*/
ereport(WARNING,
- (errmsg("unlogged operation performed, data may be missing"),
- errhint("This can happen if you temporarily disable archive_mode without taking a new base backup.")));
+ (errmsg("unlogged operation performed, data may be missing"),
+ errhint("This can happen if you temporarily disable archive_mode without taking a new base backup.")));
}
}
}
}
else if (info == XLOG_BACKUP_END)
{
- XLogRecPtr startpoint;
+ XLogRecPtr startpoint;
memcpy(&startpoint, rec, sizeof(XLogRecPtr));
appendStringInfo(buf, "backup end: %X/%X",
}
else if (info == XLOG_UNLOGGED)
{
- char *reason = rec;
+ char *reason = rec;
appendStringInfo(buf, "unlogged operation: %s", reason);
}
static int
get_sync_bit(int method)
{
- int o_direct_flag = 0;
+ int o_direct_flag = 0;
/* If fsync is disabled, never open in sync mode */
if (!enableFsync)
/*
* Optimize writes by bypassing kernel cache with O_DIRECT when using
* O_SYNC, O_DSYNC or O_FSYNC. But only if archiving and streaming are
- * disabled, otherwise the archive command or walsender process will
- * read the WAL soon after writing it, which is guaranteed to cause a
- * physical read if we bypassed the kernel cache. We also skip the
- * posix_fadvise(POSIX_FADV_DONTNEED) call in XLogFileClose() for the
- * same reason.
+ * disabled, otherwise the archive command or walsender process will read
+ * the WAL soon after writing it, which is guaranteed to cause a physical
+ * read if we bypassed the kernel cache. We also skip the
+ * posix_fadvise(POSIX_FADV_DONTNEED) call in XLogFileClose() for the same
+ * reason.
*
* Never use O_DIRECT in walreceiver process for similar reasons; the WAL
* written by walreceiver is normally read by the startup process soon
{
XLogRecPtr startpoint;
XLogRecPtr stoppoint;
- XLogRecData rdata;
+ XLogRecData rdata;
pg_time_t stamp_time;
char strfbuf[128];
char histfilepath[MAXPGPATH];
*
* We wait forever, since archive_command is supposed to work and we
* assume the admin wanted his backup to work completely. If you don't
- * wish to wait, you can set statement_timeout. Also, some notices
- * are issued to clue in anyone who might be doing this interactively.
+ * wish to wait, you can set statement_timeout. Also, some notices are
+ * issued to clue in anyone who might be doing this interactively.
*/
XLByteToPrevSeg(stoppoint, _logId, _logSeg);
XLogFileName(lastxlogfilename, ThisTimeLineID, _logId, _logSeg);
ereport(WARNING,
(errmsg("pg_stop_backup still waiting for all required WAL segments to be archived (%d seconds elapsed)",
waits),
- errhint("Check that your archive_command is executing properly. "
- "pg_stop_backup can be cancelled safely, "
- "but the database backup will not be usable without all the WAL segments.")));
+ errhint("Check that your archive_command is executing properly. "
+ "pg_stop_backup can be cancelled safely, "
+ "but the database backup will not be usable without all the WAL segments.")));
}
}
got_SIGHUP = false;
ProcessConfigFile(PGC_SIGHUP);
}
+
/*
* Check if we were requested to exit without finishing recovery.
*/
*/
pqsignal(SIGHUP, StartupProcSigHupHandler); /* reload config file */
pqsignal(SIGINT, SIG_IGN); /* ignore query cancel */
- pqsignal(SIGTERM, StartupProcShutdownHandler); /* request shutdown */
- pqsignal(SIGQUIT, startupproc_quickdie); /* hard crash time */
+ pqsignal(SIGTERM, StartupProcShutdownHandler); /* request shutdown */
+ pqsignal(SIGQUIT, startupproc_quickdie); /* hard crash time */
if (XLogRequestRecoveryConnections)
- pqsignal(SIGALRM, handle_standby_sig_alarm); /* ignored unless InHotStandby */
+ pqsignal(SIGALRM, handle_standby_sig_alarm); /* ignored unless
+ * InHotStandby */
else
pqsignal(SIGALRM, SIG_IGN);
pqsignal(SIGPIPE, SIG_IGN);
{
if (StandbyMode)
{
- bool last_restore_failed = false;
+ bool last_restore_failed = false;
/*
* In standby mode, wait for the requested record to become
- * available, either via restore_command succeeding to restore
- * the segment, or via walreceiver having streamed the record.
+ * available, either via restore_command succeeding to restore the
+ * segment, or via walreceiver having streamed the record.
*/
for (;;)
{
if (WalRcvInProgress())
{
/*
- * While walreceiver is active, wait for new WAL to
- * arrive from primary.
+ * While walreceiver is active, wait for new WAL to arrive
+ * from primary.
*/
receivedUpto = GetWalRcvWriteRecPtr();
if (XLByteLT(*RecPtr, receivedUpto))
/*
* If we succeeded restoring some segments from archive
- * since the last connection attempt (or we haven't
- * tried streaming yet, retry immediately. But if we
- * haven't, assume the problem is persistent, so be
- * less aggressive.
+ * since the last connection attempt (or we haven't tried
+ * streaming yet, retry immediately. But if we haven't,
+ * assume the problem is persistent, so be less
+ * aggressive.
*/
if (last_restore_failed)
{
*/
if (CheckForStandbyTrigger())
goto next_record_is_invalid;
- pg_usleep(5000000L); /* 5 seconds */
+ pg_usleep(5000000L); /* 5 seconds */
}
last_restore_failed = true;
}
/*
- * This possibly-long loop needs to handle interrupts of startup
- * process.
+ * This possibly-long loop needs to handle interrupts of
+ * startup process.
*/
HandleStartupProcInterrupts();
}
}
/*
- * At this point, we have the right segment open and we know the
- * requested record is in it.
+ * At this point, we have the right segment open and we know the requested
+ * record is in it.
*/
Assert(readFile != -1);
/*
- * If the current segment is being streamed from master, calculate
- * how much of the current page we have received already. We know the
- * requested record has been received, but this is for the benefit
- * of future calls, to allow quick exit at the top of this function.
+ * If the current segment is being streamed from master, calculate how
+ * much of the current page we have received already. We know the
+ * requested record has been received, but this is for the benefit of
+ * future calls, to allow quick exit at the top of this function.
*/
if (readStreamed)
{
{
ereport(emode,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not seek in log file %u, segment %u to offset %u: %m",
- readId, readSeg, readOff)));
+ errmsg("could not seek in log file %u, segment %u to offset %u: %m",
+ readId, readSeg, readOff)));
goto next_record_is_invalid;
}
if (read(readFile, readBuf, XLOG_BLCKSZ) != XLOG_BLCKSZ)
{
ereport(emode,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not read from log file %u, segment %u, offset %u: %m",
- readId, readSeg, readOff)));
+ errmsg("could not read from log file %u, segment %u, offset %u: %m",
+ readId, readSeg, readOff)));
goto next_record_is_invalid;
}
if (!ValidXLOGHeader((XLogPageHeader) readBuf, emode))
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/bootstrap/bootstrap.c,v 1.259 2010/02/07 20:48:09 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/bootstrap/bootstrap.c,v 1.260 2010/02/26 02:00:35 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#endif
/*
- * Assign the ProcSignalSlot for an auxiliary process. Since it
+ * Assign the ProcSignalSlot for an auxiliary process. Since it
* doesn't have a BackendId, the slot is statically allocated based on
* the auxiliary process type (auxType). Backends use slots indexed
* in the range from 1 to MaxBackends (inclusive), so we use
boot_yyparse();
/*
- * We should now know about all mapped relations, so it's okay to
- * write out the initial relation mapping files.
+ * We should now know about all mapped relations, so it's okay to write
+ * out the initial relation mapping files.
*/
RelationMapFinishBootstrap();
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c,v 1.162 2010/02/14 18:42:12 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c,v 1.163 2010/02/26 02:00:35 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* See acl.h.
*/
typedef struct
{
- Oid roleid; /* owning role */
- Oid nspid; /* namespace, or InvalidOid if none */
+ Oid roleid; /* owning role */
+ Oid nspid; /* namespace, or InvalidOid if none */
/* remaining fields are same as in InternalGrant: */
bool is_grant;
GrantObjectType objtype;
case ACL_TARGET_ALL_IN_SCHEMA:
istmt.objects = objectsInSchemaToOids(stmt->objtype, stmt->objects);
break;
- /* ACL_TARGET_DEFAULTS should not be seen here */
+ /* ACL_TARGET_DEFAULTS should not be seen here */
default:
elog(ERROR, "unrecognized GrantStmt.targtype: %d",
(int) stmt->targtype);
case ACL_OBJECT_LARGEOBJECT:
foreach(cell, objnames)
{
- Oid lobjOid = intVal(lfirst(cell));
+ Oid lobjOid = intVal(lfirst(cell));
if (!LargeObjectExists(lobjOid))
ereport(ERROR,
}
/*
- * Convert action->privileges, a list of privilege strings,
- * into an AclMode bitmask.
+ * Convert action->privileges, a list of privilege strings, into an
+ * AclMode bitmask.
*/
switch (action->objtype)
{
if (privnode->cols)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_GRANT_OPERATION),
- errmsg("default privileges cannot be set for columns")));
+ errmsg("default privileges cannot be set for columns")));
if (privnode->priv_name == NULL) /* parser mistake? */
elog(ERROR, "AccessPriv node must specify privilege");
iacls.roleid = get_roleid_checked(rolename);
/*
- * We insist that calling user be a member of each target role.
- * If he has that, he could become that role anyway via SET ROLE,
- * so FOR ROLE is just a syntactic convenience and doesn't give
- * any special privileges.
+ * We insist that calling user be a member of each target role. If
+ * he has that, he could become that role anyway via SET ROLE, so
+ * FOR ROLE is just a syntactic convenience and doesn't give any
+ * special privileges.
*/
check_is_member_of_role(GetUserId(), iacls.roleid);
rel = heap_open(DefaultAclRelationId, RowExclusiveLock);
/*
- * Convert ACL object type to pg_default_acl object type
- * and handle all_privs option
+ * Convert ACL object type to pg_default_acl object type and handle
+ * all_privs option
*/
switch (iacls->objtype)
{
tuple = SearchSysCache3(DEFACLROLENSPOBJ,
ObjectIdGetDatum(iacls->roleid),
ObjectIdGetDatum(iacls->nspid),
- CharGetDatum(objtype));
+ CharGetDatum(objtype));
if (HeapTupleIsValid(tuple))
{
{
/*
* If we are creating a global entry, start with the hard-wired
- * defaults and modify as per command. Otherwise, start with an empty
- * ACL and modify that. This is needed because global entries
- * replace the hard-wired defaults, while others do not.
+ * defaults and modify as per command. Otherwise, start with an empty
+ * ACL and modify that. This is needed because global entries replace
+ * the hard-wired defaults, while others do not.
*/
if (!OidIsValid(iacls->nspid))
old_acl = acldefault(iacls->objtype, iacls->roleid);
noldmembers = aclmembers(old_acl, &oldmembers);
/*
- * Generate new ACL. Grantor of rights is always the same as the
- * target role.
+ * Generate new ACL. Grantor of rights is always the same as the target
+ * role.
*/
new_acl = merge_acl_with_grant(old_acl,
iacls->is_grant,
if (OidIsValid(iacls->nspid))
{
ObjectAddress myself,
- referenced;
+ referenced;
myself.classId = DefaultAclRelationId;
myself.objectId = HeapTupleGetOid(newtuple);
Oid *newmembers;
tuple = SearchSysCache1(FOREIGNDATAWRAPPEROID,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(fdwid));
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(fdwid));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tuple))
elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for foreign-data wrapper %u", fdwid);
foreach(cell, istmt->objects)
{
Oid loid = lfirst_oid(cell);
- Form_pg_largeobject_metadata form_lo_meta;
+ Form_pg_largeobject_metadata form_lo_meta;
char loname[NAMEDATALEN];
Datum aclDatum;
bool isNull;
int nnewmembers;
Oid *oldmembers;
Oid *newmembers;
- ScanKeyData entry[1];
- SysScanDesc scan;
+ ScanKeyData entry[1];
+ SysScanDesc scan;
HeapTuple tuple;
/* There's no syscache for pg_largeobject_metadata */
{
AclMode result;
Relation pg_lo_meta;
- ScanKeyData entry[1];
- SysScanDesc scan;
+ ScanKeyData entry[1];
+ SysScanDesc scan;
HeapTuple tuple;
Datum aclDatum;
bool isNull;
ownerId = ((Form_pg_tablespace) GETSTRUCT(tuple))->spcowner;
aclDatum = SysCacheGetAttr(TABLESPACEOID, tuple,
- Anum_pg_tablespace_spcacl,
- &isNull);
+ Anum_pg_tablespace_spcacl,
+ &isNull);
if (isNull)
{
pg_largeobject_ownercheck(Oid lobj_oid, Oid roleid)
{
Relation pg_lo_meta;
- ScanKeyData entry[1];
- SysScanDesc scan;
+ ScanKeyData entry[1];
+ SysScanDesc scan;
HeapTuple tuple;
Oid ownerId;
if (HeapTupleIsValid(tuple))
{
- Datum aclDatum;
- bool isNull;
+ Datum aclDatum;
+ bool isNull;
aclDatum = SysCacheGetAttr(DEFACLROLENSPOBJ, tuple,
Anum_pg_default_acl_defaclacl,
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/catalog.c,v 1.88 2010/02/07 20:48:09 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/catalog.c,v 1.89 2010/02/26 02:00:36 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
{
/* All other tablespaces are accessed via symlinks */
pathlen = 9 + 1 + OIDCHARS + 1 + strlen(TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY) +
- 1 + OIDCHARS + 1;
+ 1 + OIDCHARS + 1;
path = (char *) palloc(pathlen);
snprintf(path, pathlen, "pg_tblspc/%u/%s/%u",
spcNode, TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY, dbNode);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c,v 1.95 2010/02/14 18:42:12 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/dependency.c,v 1.96 2010/02/26 02:00:36 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
AuthIdRelationId, /* OCLASS_ROLE */
DatabaseRelationId, /* OCLASS_DATABASE */
TableSpaceRelationId, /* OCLASS_TBLSPACE */
- ForeignDataWrapperRelationId, /* OCLASS_FDW */
+ ForeignDataWrapperRelationId, /* OCLASS_FDW */
ForeignServerRelationId, /* OCLASS_FOREIGN_SERVER */
UserMappingRelationId, /* OCLASS_USER_MAPPING */
DefaultAclRelationId /* OCLASS_DEFACL */
break;
/*
- * OCLASS_ROLE, OCLASS_DATABASE, OCLASS_TBLSPACE intentionally
- * not handled here
+ * OCLASS_ROLE, OCLASS_DATABASE, OCLASS_TBLSPACE intentionally not
+ * handled here
*/
case OCLASS_FDW:
case DEFACLOBJ_RELATION:
appendStringInfo(&buffer,
_("default privileges on new relations belonging to role %s"),
- GetUserNameFromId(defacl->defaclrole));
+ GetUserNameFromId(defacl->defaclrole));
break;
case DEFACLOBJ_SEQUENCE:
appendStringInfo(&buffer,
_("default privileges on new sequences belonging to role %s"),
- GetUserNameFromId(defacl->defaclrole));
+ GetUserNameFromId(defacl->defaclrole));
break;
case DEFACLOBJ_FUNCTION:
appendStringInfo(&buffer,
_("default privileges on new functions belonging to role %s"),
- GetUserNameFromId(defacl->defaclrole));
+ GetUserNameFromId(defacl->defaclrole));
break;
default:
/* shouldn't get here */
appendStringInfo(&buffer,
- _("default privileges belonging to role %s"),
- GetUserNameFromId(defacl->defaclrole));
+ _("default privileges belonging to role %s"),
+ GetUserNameFromId(defacl->defaclrole));
break;
}
if (OidIsValid(defacl->defaclnamespace))
{
appendStringInfo(&buffer,
- _(" in schema %s"),
- get_namespace_name(defacl->defaclnamespace));
+ _(" in schema %s"),
+ get_namespace_name(defacl->defaclnamespace));
}
systable_endscan(rcscan);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/heap.c,v 1.371 2010/02/14 18:42:13 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/heap.c,v 1.372 2010/02/26 02:00:36 momjian Exp $
*
*
* INTERFACE ROUTINES
/* Kluge for upgrade-in-place support */
-Oid binary_upgrade_next_heap_relfilenode = InvalidOid;
-Oid binary_upgrade_next_toast_relfilenode = InvalidOid;
+Oid binary_upgrade_next_heap_relfilenode = InvalidOid;
+Oid binary_upgrade_next_toast_relfilenode = InvalidOid;
static void AddNewRelationTuple(Relation pg_class_desc,
Relation new_rel_desc,
{
/*
* Refuse any attempt to create a pseudo-type column, except for a
- * special hack for pg_statistic: allow ANYARRAY when modifying
- * system catalogs (this allows creating pg_statistic and cloning it
- * during VACUUM FULL)
+ * special hack for pg_statistic: allow ANYARRAY when modifying system
+ * catalogs (this allows creating pg_statistic and cloning it during
+ * VACUUM FULL)
*/
if (atttypid != ANYARRAYOID || !allow_system_table_mods)
ereport(ERROR,
* Tuple data is taken from new_rel_desc->rd_rel, except for the
* variable-width fields which are not present in a cached reldesc.
* relacl and reloptions are passed in Datum form (to avoid having
- * to reference the data types in heap.h). Pass (Datum) 0 to set them
+ * to reference the data types in heap.h). Pass (Datum) 0 to set them
* to NULL.
* --------------------------------
*/
Oid new_array_type)
{
return
- TypeCreate(new_row_type, /* optional predetermined OID */
+ TypeCreate(new_row_type, /* optional predetermined OID */
typeName, /* type name */
typeNamespace, /* type namespace */
new_rel_oid, /* relation oid */
/*
* Since defining a relation also defines a complex type, we add a new
- * system type corresponding to the new relation. The OID of the type
- * can be preselected by the caller, but if reltypeid is InvalidOid,
- * we'll generate a new OID for it.
+ * system type corresponding to the new relation. The OID of the type can
+ * be preselected by the caller, but if reltypeid is InvalidOid, we'll
+ * generate a new OID for it.
*
* NOTE: we could get a unique-index failure here, in case someone else is
* creating the same type name in parallel but hadn't committed yet when
/*
* Make a dependency link to force the relation to be deleted if its
- * namespace is. Also make a dependency link to its owner, as well
- * as dependencies for any roles mentioned in the default ACL.
+ * namespace is. Also make a dependency link to its owner, as well as
+ * dependencies for any roles mentioned in the default ACL.
*
* For composite types, these dependencies are tracked for the pg_type
* entry, so we needn't record them here. Likewise, TOAST tables don't
* need a namespace dependency (they live in a pinned namespace) nor an
- * owner dependency (they depend indirectly through the parent table),
- * nor should they have any ACL entries.
+ * owner dependency (they depend indirectly through the parent table), nor
+ * should they have any ACL entries.
*
* Also, skip this in bootstrap mode, since we don't make dependencies
* while bootstrapping.
' ',
' ',
' ',
- NULL, /* not an exclusion constraint */
+ NULL, /* not an exclusion constraint */
expr, /* Tree form of check constraint */
ccbin, /* Binary form of check constraint */
ccsrc, /* Source form of check constraint */
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/index.c,v 1.336 2010/02/14 18:42:13 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/index.c,v 1.337 2010/02/26 02:00:36 momjian Exp $
*
*
* INTERFACE ROUTINES
/* Kluge for upgrade-in-place support */
-Oid binary_upgrade_next_index_relfilenode = InvalidOid;
+Oid binary_upgrade_next_index_relfilenode = InvalidOid;
/* state info for validate_index bulkdelete callback */
typedef struct
/*
* Set the attribute name as specified by caller.
*/
- if (colnames_item == NULL) /* shouldn't happen */
+ if (colnames_item == NULL) /* shouldn't happen */
elog(ERROR, "too few entries in colnames list");
namestrcpy(&to->attname, (const char *) lfirst(colnames_item));
colnames_item = lnext(colnames_item);
/*
* The index will be in the same namespace as its parent table, and is
- * shared across databases if and only if the parent is. Likewise,
- * it will use the relfilenode map if and only if the parent does.
+ * shared across databases if and only if the parent is. Likewise, it
+ * will use the relfilenode map if and only if the parent does.
*/
namespaceId = RelationGetNamespace(heapRelation);
shared_relation = heapRelation->rd_rel->relisshared;
errmsg("concurrent index creation on system catalog tables is not supported")));
/*
- * This case is currently not supported, but there's no way to ask for
- * it in the grammar anyway, so it can't happen.
+ * This case is currently not supported, but there's no way to ask for it
+ * in the grammar anyway, so it can't happen.
*/
if (concurrent && is_exclusion)
ereport(ERROR,
indexInfo->ii_KeyAttrNumbers,
indexInfo->ii_NumIndexAttrs,
InvalidOid, /* no domain */
- indexRelationId, /* index OID */
+ indexRelationId, /* index OID */
InvalidOid, /* no foreign key */
NULL,
NULL,
CreateTrigStmt *trigger;
heapRel = makeRangeVar(get_namespace_name(namespaceId),
- pstrdup(RelationGetRelationName(heapRelation)),
+ pstrdup(RelationGetRelationName(heapRelation)),
-1);
trigger = makeNode(CreateTrigStmt);
Assert(PointerIsValid(stats));
/*
- * If it's for an exclusion constraint, make a second pass over the
- * heap to verify that the constraint is satisfied.
+ * If it's for an exclusion constraint, make a second pass over the heap
+ * to verify that the constraint is satisfied.
*/
if (indexInfo->ii_ExclusionOps != NULL)
IndexCheckExclusion(heapRelation, indexRelation, indexInfo);
/*
* Since caller should hold ShareLock or better, normally
* the only way to see this is if it was inserted earlier
- * in our own transaction. However, it can happen in
+ * in our own transaction. However, it can happen in
* system catalogs, since we tend to release write lock
* before commit there. Give a warning if neither case
* applies.
/*
* If we are performing uniqueness checks, assuming
- * the tuple is dead could lead to missing a uniqueness
- * violation. In that case we wait for the deleting
- * transaction to finish and check again.
+ * the tuple is dead could lead to missing a
+ * uniqueness violation. In that case we wait for the
+ * deleting transaction to finish and check again.
*/
if (checking_uniqueness)
{
/*
* If the index is marked invalid or not ready (ie, it's from a failed
- * CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY), and we didn't skip a uniqueness check,
- * we can now mark it valid. This allows REINDEX to be used to clean up
- * in such cases.
+ * CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY), and we didn't skip a uniqueness check, we
+ * can now mark it valid. This allows REINDEX to be used to clean up in
+ * such cases.
*
* We can also reset indcheckxmin, because we have now done a
* non-concurrent index build, *except* in the case where index_build
* It is okay to not insert entries into the indexes we have not processed
* yet because all of this is transaction-safe. If we fail partway
* through, the updated rows are dead and it doesn't matter whether they
- * have index entries. Also, a new pg_class index will be created with a
+ * have index entries. Also, a new pg_class index will be created with a
* correct entry for its own pg_class row because we do
* RelationSetNewRelfilenode() before we do index_build().
*
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c,v 1.124 2010/02/20 21:24:01 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/namespace.c,v 1.125 2010/02/26 02:00:36 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void RemoveTempRelationsCallback(int code, Datum arg);
static void NamespaceCallback(Datum arg, int cacheid, ItemPointer tuplePtr);
static bool MatchNamedCall(HeapTuple proctup, int nargs, List *argnames,
- int **argnumbers);
+ int **argnumbers);
/* These don't really need to appear in any header file */
Datum pg_table_is_visible(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS);
}
/* use exact schema given */
namespaceId = GetSysCacheOid1(NAMESPACENAME,
- CStringGetDatum(newRelation->schemaname));
+ CStringGetDatum(newRelation->schemaname));
if (!OidIsValid(namespaceId))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_SCHEMA),
/*
* Call uses named or mixed notation
*
- * Named or mixed notation can match a variadic function only
- * if expand_variadic is off; otherwise there is no way to match
- * the presumed-nameless parameters expanded from the variadic
- * array.
+ * Named or mixed notation can match a variadic function only if
+ * expand_variadic is off; otherwise there is no way to match the
+ * presumed-nameless parameters expanded from the variadic array.
*/
if (OidIsValid(procform->provariadic) && expand_variadic)
continue;
/*
* Check argument count.
*/
- Assert(nargs >= 0); /* -1 not supported with argnames */
+ Assert(nargs >= 0); /* -1 not supported with argnames */
if (pronargs > nargs && expand_defaults)
{
* Call uses positional notation
*
* Check if function is variadic, and get variadic element type if
- * so. If expand_variadic is false, we should just ignore
+ * so. If expand_variadic is false, we should just ignore
* variadic-ness.
*/
if (pronargs <= nargs && expand_variadic)
/* now examine the named args */
foreach(lc, argnames)
{
- char *argname = (char *) lfirst(lc);
- bool found;
- int i;
+ char *argname = (char *) lfirst(lc);
+ bool found;
+ int i;
pp = 0;
found = false;
/* Check for default arguments */
if (nargs < pronargs)
{
- int first_arg_with_default = pronargs - procform->pronargdefaults;
+ int first_arg_with_default = pronargs - procform->pronargdefaults;
for (pp = numposargs; pp < pronargs; pp++)
{
* Do not allow a Hot Standby slave session to make temp tables. Aside
* from problems with modifying the system catalogs, there is a naming
* conflict: pg_temp_N belongs to the session with BackendId N on the
- * master, not to a slave session with the same BackendId. We should
- * not be able to get here anyway due to XactReadOnly checks, but let's
- * just make real sure. Note that this also backstops various operations
- * that allow XactReadOnly transactions to modify temp tables; they'd need
+ * master, not to a slave session with the same BackendId. We should not
+ * be able to get here anyway due to XactReadOnly checks, but let's just
+ * make real sure. Note that this also backstops various operations that
+ * allow XactReadOnly transactions to modify temp tables; they'd need
* RecoveryInProgress checks if not for this.
*/
if (RecoveryInProgress())
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_aggregate.c,v 1.105 2010/02/14 18:42:13 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_aggregate.c,v 1.106 2010/02/26 02:00:37 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH),
errmsg("function %s requires run-time type coercion",
- func_signature_string(fnName, nargs,
- NIL, true_oid_array))));
+ func_signature_string(fnName, nargs,
+ NIL, true_oid_array))));
}
/* Check aggregate creator has permission to call the function */
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c,v 1.52 2010/02/14 18:42:13 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_constraint.c,v 1.53 2010/02/26 02:00:37 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
{
/*
* Register normal dependency on the unique index that supports a
- * foreign-key constraint. (Note: for indexes associated with
- * unique or primary-key constraints, the dependency runs the other
- * way, and is not made here.)
+ * foreign-key constraint. (Note: for indexes associated with unique
+ * or primary-key constraints, the dependency runs the other way, and
+ * is not made here.)
*/
ObjectAddress relobject;
}
/*
- * We don't bother to register dependencies on the exclusion operators
- * of an exclusion constraint. We assume they are members of the opclass
- * supporting the index, so there's an indirect dependency via that.
- * (This would be pretty dicey for cross-type operators, but exclusion
- * operators can never be cross-type.)
+ * We don't bother to register dependencies on the exclusion operators of
+ * an exclusion constraint. We assume they are members of the opclass
+ * supporting the index, so there's an indirect dependency via that. (This
+ * would be pretty dicey for cross-type operators, but exclusion operators
+ * can never be cross-type.)
*/
if (conExpr != NULL)
if (OidIsValid(conOid))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_OBJECT),
- errmsg("table \"%s\" has multiple constraints named \"%s\"",
- get_rel_name(relid), conname)));
+ errmsg("table \"%s\" has multiple constraints named \"%s\"",
+ get_rel_name(relid), conname)));
conOid = HeapTupleGetOid(tuple);
}
}
/*
* pg_db_role_setting.c
* Routines to support manipulation of the pg_db_role_setting relation
- *
+ *
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_db_role_setting.c,v 1.2 2010/01/02 16:57:36 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_db_role_setting.c,v 1.3 2010/02/26 02:00:37 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "postgres.h"
*
* - in RESET ALL, simply delete the pg_db_role_setting tuple (if any)
*
- * - in other commands, if there's a tuple in pg_db_role_setting, update it;
- * if it ends up empty, delete it
+ * - in other commands, if there's a tuple in pg_db_role_setting, update
+ * it; if it ends up empty, delete it
*
* - otherwise, insert a new pg_db_role_setting tuple, but only if the
- * command is not RESET
+ * command is not RESET
*/
if (setstmt->kind == VAR_RESET_ALL)
{
ArrayType *a;
memset(nulls, false, sizeof(nulls));
-
+
a = GUCArrayAdd(NULL, setstmt->name, valuestr);
values[Anum_pg_db_role_setting_setdatabase - 1] =
/*
* Drop some settings from the catalog. These can be for a particular
- * database, or for a particular role. (It is of course possible to do both
+ * database, or for a particular role. (It is of course possible to do both
* too, but it doesn't make sense for current uses.)
*/
void
DropSetting(Oid databaseid, Oid roleid)
{
- Relation relsetting;
- HeapScanDesc scan;
- ScanKeyData keys[2];
- HeapTuple tup;
- int numkeys = 0;
+ Relation relsetting;
+ HeapScanDesc scan;
+ ScanKeyData keys[2];
+ HeapTuple tup;
+ int numkeys = 0;
relsetting = heap_open(DbRoleSettingRelationId, RowExclusiveLock);
void
ApplySetting(Oid databaseid, Oid roleid, Relation relsetting, GucSource source)
{
- SysScanDesc scan;
- ScanKeyData keys[2];
- HeapTuple tup;
+ SysScanDesc scan;
+ ScanKeyData keys[2];
+ HeapTuple tup;
ScanKeyInit(&keys[0],
Anum_pg_db_role_setting_setdatabase,
SnapshotNow, 2, keys);
while (HeapTupleIsValid(tup = systable_getnext(scan)))
{
- bool isnull;
- Datum datum;
+ bool isnull;
+ Datum datum;
datum = heap_getattr(tup, Anum_pg_db_role_setting_setconfig,
RelationGetDescr(relsetting), &isnull);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c,v 1.13 2010/01/02 16:57:36 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_enum.c,v 1.14 2010/02/26 02:00:37 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
tupDesc = pg_enum->rd_att;
/*
- * Allocate oids
+ * Allocate oids
*/
oids = (Oid *) palloc(num_elems * sizeof(Oid));
if (OidIsValid(binary_upgrade_next_pg_enum_oid))
{
- if (num_elems != 1)
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
- errmsg("EnumValuesCreate() can only set a single OID")));
- oids[0] = binary_upgrade_next_pg_enum_oid;
- binary_upgrade_next_pg_enum_oid = InvalidOid;
- }
+ if (num_elems != 1)
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
+ errmsg("EnumValuesCreate() can only set a single OID")));
+ oids[0] = binary_upgrade_next_pg_enum_oid;
+ binary_upgrade_next_pg_enum_oid = InvalidOid;
+ }
else
{
/*
- * While this method does not absolutely guarantee that we generate
- * no duplicate oids (since we haven't entered each oid into the
- * table before allocating the next), trouble could only occur if
- * the oid counter wraps all the way around before we finish. Which
- * seems unlikely.
+ * While this method does not absolutely guarantee that we generate no
+ * duplicate oids (since we haven't entered each oid into the table
+ * before allocating the next), trouble could only occur if the oid
+ * counter wraps all the way around before we finish. Which seems
+ * unlikely.
*/
for (elemno = 0; elemno < num_elems; elemno++)
{
/*
- * The pg_enum.oid is stored in user tables. This oid must be
- * preserved by binary upgrades.
+ * The pg_enum.oid is stored in user tables. This oid must be
+ * preserved by binary upgrades.
*/
oids[elemno] = GetNewOid(pg_enum);
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_inherits.c,v 1.7 2010/02/14 18:42:13 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_inherits.c,v 1.8 2010/02/26 02:00:37 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
List *
find_all_inheritors(Oid parentrelId, LOCKMODE lockmode, List **numparents)
{
- List *rels_list, *rel_numparents;
+ List *rels_list,
+ *rel_numparents;
ListCell *l;
/*
*/
foreach(lc, currentchildren)
{
- Oid child_oid = lfirst_oid(lc);
- bool found = false;
+ Oid child_oid = lfirst_oid(lc);
+ bool found = false;
ListCell *lo;
ListCell *li;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_largeobject.c,v 1.38 2010/02/17 04:19:39 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_largeobject.c,v 1.39 2010/02/26 02:00:37 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
}
/*
- * Drop a large object having the given LO identifier. Both the data pages
+ * Drop a large object having the given LO identifier. Both the data pages
* and metadata must be dropped.
*/
void
ScanKeyInit(&skey[0],
ObjectIdAttributeNumber,
BTEqualStrategyNumber, F_OIDEQ,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(loid));
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(loid));
scan = systable_beginscan(pg_lo_meta,
LargeObjectMetadataOidIndexId, true,
void
LargeObjectAlterOwner(Oid loid, Oid newOwnerId)
{
- Form_pg_largeobject_metadata form_lo_meta;
+ Form_pg_largeobject_metadata form_lo_meta;
Relation pg_lo_meta;
- ScanKeyData skey[1];
- SysScanDesc scan;
+ ScanKeyData skey[1];
+ SysScanDesc scan;
HeapTuple oldtup;
HeapTuple newtup;
if (!superuser())
{
/*
- * lo_compat_privileges is not checked here, because ALTER
- * LARGE OBJECT ... OWNER did not exist at all prior to
- * PostgreSQL 9.0.
+ * lo_compat_privileges is not checked here, because ALTER LARGE
+ * OBJECT ... OWNER did not exist at all prior to PostgreSQL 9.0.
*
* We must be the owner of the existing object.
*/
replaces[Anum_pg_largeobject_metadata_lomowner - 1] = true;
/*
- * Determine the modified ACL for the new owner.
- * This is only necessary when the ACL is non-null.
+ * Determine the modified ACL for the new owner. This is only
+ * necessary when the ACL is non-null.
*/
aclDatum = heap_getattr(oldtup,
Anum_pg_largeobject_metadata_lomacl,
LargeObjectExists(Oid loid)
{
Relation pg_lo_meta;
- ScanKeyData skey[1];
- SysScanDesc sd;
+ ScanKeyData skey[1];
+ SysScanDesc sd;
HeapTuple tuple;
bool retval = false;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c,v 1.171 2010/02/14 18:42:13 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c,v 1.172 2010/02/26 02:00:37 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* If there were any named input parameters, check to make sure the
- * names have not been changed, as this could break existing calls.
- * We allow adding names to formerly unnamed parameters, though.
+ * names have not been changed, as this could break existing calls. We
+ * allow adding names to formerly unnamed parameters, though.
*/
proargnames = SysCacheGetAttr(PROCNAMEARGSNSP, oldtup,
Anum_pg_proc_proargnames,
strcmp(old_arg_names[j], new_arg_names[j]) != 0)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_FUNCTION_DEFINITION),
- errmsg("cannot change name of input parameter \"%s\"",
- old_arg_names[j]),
+ errmsg("cannot change name of input parameter \"%s\"",
+ old_arg_names[j]),
errhint("Use DROP FUNCTION first.")));
}
- }
+ }
/*
* If there are existing defaults, check compatibility: redefinition
/*
* Adjust a syntax error occurring inside the function body of a CREATE
- * FUNCTION or DO command. This can be used by any function validator or
+ * FUNCTION or DO command. This can be used by any function validator or
* anonymous-block handler, not only for SQL-language functions.
* It is assumed that the syntax error position is initially relative to the
* function body string (as passed in). If possible, we adjust the position
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c,v 1.39 2010/02/14 18:42:13 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c,v 1.40 2010/02/26 02:00:37 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
pfree(database);
break;
}
-
+
default:
elog(ERROR, "unrecognized shared classId: %u", classId);
break;
case DefaultAclRelationId:
+
/*
- * Ignore default ACLs; they should be handled by
- * DROP OWNED, not REASSIGN OWNED.
+ * Ignore default ACLs; they should be handled by DROP
+ * OWNED, not REASSIGN OWNED.
*/
break;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c,v 1.132 2010/02/14 18:42:13 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_type.c,v 1.133 2010/02/26 02:00:37 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "utils/rel.h"
#include "utils/syscache.h"
-Oid binary_upgrade_next_pg_type_oid = InvalidOid;
+Oid binary_upgrade_next_pg_type_oid = InvalidOid;
/* ----------------------------------------------------------------
* TypeShellMake
binary_upgrade_next_pg_type_oid = InvalidOid;
}
/* else allow system to assign oid */
-
+
typeObjectId = simple_heap_insert(pg_type_desc, tup);
}
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/toasting.c,v 1.31 2010/02/14 18:42:13 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/toasting.c,v 1.32 2010/02/26 02:00:37 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "utils/syscache.h"
/* Kluges for upgrade-in-place support */
-extern Oid binary_upgrade_next_toast_relfilenode;
+extern Oid binary_upgrade_next_toast_relfilenode;
-Oid binary_upgrade_next_pg_type_toast_oid = InvalidOid;
+Oid binary_upgrade_next_pg_type_toast_oid = InvalidOid;
static bool create_toast_table(Relation rel, Oid toastOid, Oid toastIndexOid,
Datum reloptions);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/alter.c,v 1.34 2010/02/01 19:28:56 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/alter.c,v 1.35 2010/02/26 02:00:37 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
stmt->subname, /* old att name */
stmt->newname, /* new att name */
interpretInhOption(stmt->relation->inhOpt), /* recursive? */
- 0); /* expected inhcount */
+ 0); /* expected inhcount */
break;
case OBJECT_TRIGGER:
renametrig(relid,
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/analyze.c,v 1.151 2010/02/14 18:42:13 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/analyze.c,v 1.152 2010/02/26 02:00:37 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static double init_selection_state(int n);
static double get_next_S(double t, int n, double *stateptr);
static int compare_rows(const void *a, const void *b);
-static int acquire_inherited_sample_rows(Relation onerel,
+static int acquire_inherited_sample_rows(Relation onerel,
HeapTuple *rows, int targrows,
double *totalrows, double *totaldeadrows);
static void update_attstats(Oid relid, bool inh,
- int natts, VacAttrStats **vacattrstats);
+ int natts, VacAttrStats **vacattrstats);
static Datum std_fetch_func(VacAttrStatsP stats, int rownum, bool *isNull);
static Datum ind_fetch_func(VacAttrStatsP stats, int rownum, bool *isNull);
RelationGetRelationName(onerel))));
/*
- * Set up a working context so that we can easily free whatever junk
- * gets created.
+ * Set up a working context so that we can easily free whatever junk gets
+ * created.
*/
anl_context = AllocSetContextCreate(CurrentMemoryContext,
"Analyze",
* Open all indexes of the relation, and see if there are any analyzable
* columns in the indexes. We do not analyze index columns if there was
* an explicit column list in the ANALYZE command, however. If we are
- * doing a recursive scan, we don't want to touch the parent's indexes
- * at all.
+ * doing a recursive scan, we don't want to touch the parent's indexes at
+ * all.
*/
if (!inh)
vac_open_indexes(onerel, AccessShareLock, &nindexes, &Irel);
{
VacAttrStats *stats = vacattrstats[i];
AttributeOpts *aopt =
- get_attribute_options(onerel->rd_id, stats->attr->attnum);
+ get_attribute_options(onerel->rd_id, stats->attr->attnum);
stats->rows = rows;
stats->tupDesc = onerel->rd_att;
*/
if (aopt != NULL)
{
- float8 n_distinct =
- inh ? aopt->n_distinct_inherited : aopt->n_distinct;
+ float8 n_distinct =
+ inh ? aopt->n_distinct_inherited : aopt->n_distinct;
+
if (n_distinct != 0.0)
stats->stadistinct = n_distinct;
}
}
/*
- * Update pages/tuples stats in pg_class, but not if we're inside a
- * VACUUM that got a more precise number.
+ * Update pages/tuples stats in pg_class, but not if we're inside a VACUUM
+ * that got a more precise number.
*/
if (update_reltuples)
vac_update_relstats(onerel,
}
/*
- * Report ANALYZE to the stats collector, too; likewise, tell it to
- * adopt these numbers only if we're not inside a VACUUM that got a
- * better number. However, a call with inh = true shouldn't reset
- * the stats.
+ * Report ANALYZE to the stats collector, too; likewise, tell it to adopt
+ * these numbers only if we're not inside a VACUUM that got a better
+ * number. However, a call with inh = true shouldn't reset the stats.
*/
if (!inh)
pgstat_report_analyze(onerel, update_reltuples,
{
VacAttrStats *stats = thisdata->vacattrstats[i];
AttributeOpts *aopt =
- get_attribute_options(stats->attr->attrelid,
- stats->attr->attnum);
+ get_attribute_options(stats->attr->attrelid,
+ stats->attr->attnum);
stats->exprvals = exprvals + i;
stats->exprnulls = exprnulls + i;
}
/*
- * Now sample rows from each relation, proportionally to its fraction
- * of the total block count. (This might be less than desirable if the
- * child rels have radically different free-space percentages, but it's
- * not clear that it's worth working harder.)
+ * Now sample rows from each relation, proportionally to its fraction of
+ * the total block count. (This might be less than desirable if the child
+ * rels have radically different free-space percentages, but it's not
+ * clear that it's worth working harder.)
*/
numrows = 0;
*totalrows = 0;
if (childblocks > 0)
{
- int childtargrows;
+ int childtargrows;
childtargrows = (int) rint(targrows * childblocks / totalblocks);
/* Make sure we don't overrun due to roundoff error */
map = convert_tuples_by_name(RelationGetDescr(childrel),
RelationGetDescr(onerel),
- gettext_noop("could not convert row type"));
+ gettext_noop("could not convert row type"));
if (map != NULL)
{
- int j;
+ int j;
for (j = 0; j < childrows; j++)
{
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/async.c,v 1.154 2010/02/20 21:24:02 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/async.c,v 1.155 2010/02/26 02:00:37 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
*
* This struct declaration has the maximal length, but in a real queue entry
* the data area is only big enough for the actual channel and payload strings
- * (each null-terminated). AsyncQueueEntryEmptySize is the minimum possible
+ * (each null-terminated). AsyncQueueEntryEmptySize is the minimum possible
* entry size, if both channel and payload strings are empty (but note it
* doesn't include alignment padding).
*
*/
typedef struct AsyncQueueEntry
{
- int length; /* total allocated length of entry */
- Oid dboid; /* sender's database OID */
- TransactionId xid; /* sender's XID */
- int32 srcPid; /* sender's PID */
- char data[NAMEDATALEN + NOTIFY_PAYLOAD_MAX_LENGTH];
+ int length; /* total allocated length of entry */
+ Oid dboid; /* sender's database OID */
+ TransactionId xid; /* sender's XID */
+ int32 srcPid; /* sender's PID */
+ char data[NAMEDATALEN + NOTIFY_PAYLOAD_MAX_LENGTH];
} AsyncQueueEntry;
/* Currently, no field of AsyncQueueEntry requires more than int alignment */
*/
typedef struct QueuePosition
{
- int page; /* SLRU page number */
- int offset; /* byte offset within page */
+ int page; /* SLRU page number */
+ int offset; /* byte offset within page */
} QueuePosition;
#define QUEUE_POS_PAGE(x) ((x).page)
*/
typedef struct QueueBackendStatus
{
- int32 pid; /* either a PID or InvalidPid */
- QueuePosition pos; /* backend has read queue up to here */
+ int32 pid; /* either a PID or InvalidPid */
+ QueuePosition pos; /* backend has read queue up to here */
} QueueBackendStatus;
-#define InvalidPid (-1)
+#define InvalidPid (-1)
/*
* Shared memory state for LISTEN/NOTIFY (excluding its SLRU stuff)
*/
typedef struct AsyncQueueControl
{
- QueuePosition head; /* head points to the next free location */
- QueuePosition tail; /* the global tail is equivalent to the
- tail of the "slowest" backend */
- TimestampTz lastQueueFillWarn; /* time of last queue-full msg */
- QueueBackendStatus backend[1]; /* actually of length MaxBackends+1 */
+ QueuePosition head; /* head points to the next free location */
+ QueuePosition tail; /* the global tail is equivalent to the tail
+ * of the "slowest" backend */
+ TimestampTz lastQueueFillWarn; /* time of last queue-full msg */
+ QueueBackendStatus backend[1]; /* actually of length MaxBackends+1 */
/* DO NOT ADD FURTHER STRUCT MEMBERS HERE */
} AsyncQueueControl;
-static AsyncQueueControl *asyncQueueControl;
+static AsyncQueueControl *asyncQueueControl;
#define QUEUE_HEAD (asyncQueueControl->head)
#define QUEUE_TAIL (asyncQueueControl->tail)
/*
* The SLRU buffer area through which we access the notification queue
*/
-static SlruCtlData AsyncCtlData;
+static SlruCtlData AsyncCtlData;
#define AsyncCtl (&AsyncCtlData)
#define QUEUE_PAGESIZE BLCKSZ
-#define QUEUE_FULL_WARN_INTERVAL 5000 /* warn at most once every 5s */
+#define QUEUE_FULL_WARN_INTERVAL 5000 /* warn at most once every 5s */
/*
* slru.c currently assumes that all filenames are four characters of hex
*
* The most data we can have in the queue at a time is QUEUE_MAX_PAGE/2
* pages, because more than that would confuse slru.c into thinking there
- * was a wraparound condition. With the default BLCKSZ this means there
+ * was a wraparound condition. With the default BLCKSZ this means there
* can be up to 8GB of queued-and-not-read data.
*
* Note: it's possible to redefine QUEUE_MAX_PAGE with a smaller multiple of
/*
* State for outbound notifies consists of a list of all channels+payloads
- * NOTIFYed in the current transaction. We do not actually perform a NOTIFY
+ * NOTIFYed in the current transaction. We do not actually perform a NOTIFY
* until and unless the transaction commits. pendingNotifies is NIL if no
* NOTIFYs have been done in the current transaction.
*
*/
typedef struct Notification
{
- char *channel; /* channel name */
- char *payload; /* payload string (can be empty) */
+ char *channel; /* channel name */
+ char *payload; /* payload string (can be empty) */
} Notification;
-static List *pendingNotifies = NIL; /* list of Notifications */
+static List *pendingNotifies = NIL; /* list of Notifications */
static List *upperPendingNotifies = NIL; /* list of upper-xact lists */
/* True if we've registered an on_shmem_exit cleanup */
static bool unlistenExitRegistered = false;
+
/* has this backend sent notifications in the current transaction? */
static bool backendHasSentNotifications = false;
+
/* has this backend executed its first LISTEN in the current transaction? */
static bool backendHasExecutedInitialListen = false;
static void asyncQueueAdvanceTail(void);
static void ProcessIncomingNotify(void);
static void NotifyMyFrontEnd(const char *channel,
- const char *payload,
- int32 srcPid);
+ const char *payload,
+ int32 srcPid);
static bool AsyncExistsPendingNotify(const char *channel, const char *payload);
static void ClearPendingActionsAndNotifies(void);
int diff;
/*
- * We have to compare modulo (QUEUE_MAX_PAGE+1)/2. Both inputs should
- * be in the range 0..QUEUE_MAX_PAGE.
+ * We have to compare modulo (QUEUE_MAX_PAGE+1)/2. Both inputs should be
+ * in the range 0..QUEUE_MAX_PAGE.
*/
Assert(p >= 0 && p <= QUEUE_MAX_PAGE);
Assert(q >= 0 && q <= QUEUE_MAX_PAGE);
diff = p - q;
- if (diff >= ((QUEUE_MAX_PAGE+1)/2))
- diff -= QUEUE_MAX_PAGE+1;
- else if (diff < -((QUEUE_MAX_PAGE+1)/2))
- diff += QUEUE_MAX_PAGE+1;
+ if (diff >= ((QUEUE_MAX_PAGE + 1) / 2))
+ diff -= QUEUE_MAX_PAGE + 1;
+ else if (diff < -((QUEUE_MAX_PAGE + 1) / 2))
+ diff += QUEUE_MAX_PAGE + 1;
return diff < 0;
}
Size
AsyncShmemSize(void)
{
- Size size;
+ Size size;
/* This had better match AsyncShmemInit */
size = mul_size(MaxBackends, sizeof(QueueBackendStatus));
void
AsyncShmemInit(void)
{
- bool found;
- int slotno;
- Size size;
+ bool found;
+ int slotno;
+ Size size;
/*
* Create or attach to the AsyncQueueControl structure.
if (!found)
{
/* First time through, so initialize it */
- int i;
+ int i;
SET_QUEUE_POS(QUEUE_HEAD, 0, 0);
SET_QUEUE_POS(QUEUE_TAIL, 0, 0);
n->payload = "";
/*
- * We want to preserve the order so we need to append every
- * notification. See comments at AsyncExistsPendingNotify().
+ * We want to preserve the order so we need to append every notification.
+ * See comments at AsyncExistsPendingNotify().
*/
pendingNotifies = lappend(pendingNotifies, n);
Datum
pg_listening_channels(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- FuncCallContext *funcctx;
- ListCell **lcp;
+ FuncCallContext *funcctx;
+ ListCell **lcp;
/* stuff done only on the first call of the function */
if (SRF_IS_FIRSTCALL())
{
- MemoryContext oldcontext;
+ MemoryContext oldcontext;
/* create a function context for cross-call persistence */
funcctx = SRF_FIRSTCALL_INIT();
while (*lcp != NULL)
{
- char *channel = (char *) lfirst(*lcp);
+ char *channel = (char *) lfirst(*lcp);
*lcp = lnext(*lcp);
SRF_RETURN_NEXT(funcctx, CStringGetTextDatum(channel));
/*
* Make sure that we have an XID assigned to the current transaction.
- * GetCurrentTransactionId is cheap if we already have an XID, but
- * not so cheap if we don't, and we'd prefer not to do that work
- * while holding AsyncQueueLock.
+ * GetCurrentTransactionId is cheap if we already have an XID, but not
+ * so cheap if we don't, and we'd prefer not to do that work while
+ * holding AsyncQueueLock.
*/
(void) GetCurrentTransactionId();
while (nextNotify != NULL)
{
/*
- * Add the pending notifications to the queue. We acquire and
+ * Add the pending notifications to the queue. We acquire and
* release AsyncQueueLock once per page, which might be overkill
* but it does allow readers to get in while we're doing this.
*
if (asyncQueueIsFull())
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_PROGRAM_LIMIT_EXCEEDED),
- errmsg("too many notifications in the NOTIFY queue")));
+ errmsg("too many notifications in the NOTIFY queue")));
nextNotify = asyncQueueAddEntries(nextNotify);
LWLockRelease(AsyncQueueLock);
}
}
/*
- * If we did an initial LISTEN, listenChannels now has the entry, so
- * we no longer need or want the flag to be set.
+ * If we did an initial LISTEN, listenChannels now has the entry, so we no
+ * longer need or want the flag to be set.
*/
backendHasExecutedInitialListen = false;
elog(DEBUG1, "Exec_ListenPreCommit(%d)", MyProcPid);
/*
- * We need this variable to detect an aborted initial LISTEN.
- * In that case we would set up our pointer but not listen on any channel.
- * This flag gets cleared in AtCommit_Notify or AtAbort_Notify().
+ * We need this variable to detect an aborted initial LISTEN. In that case
+ * we would set up our pointer but not listen on any channel. This flag
+ * gets cleared in AtCommit_Notify or AtAbort_Notify().
*/
backendHasExecutedInitialListen = true;
/*
- * Before registering, make sure we will unlisten before dying.
- * (Note: this action does not get undone if we abort later.)
+ * Before registering, make sure we will unlisten before dying. (Note:
+ * this action does not get undone if we abort later.)
*/
if (!unlistenExitRegistered)
{
* already-committed notifications. Still, we could get notifications that
* have already committed before we started to LISTEN.
*
- * Note that we are not yet listening on anything, so we won't deliver
- * any notification to the frontend.
+ * Note that we are not yet listening on anything, so we won't deliver any
+ * notification to the frontend.
*
* This will also advance the global tail pointer if possible.
*/
static void
Exec_UnlistenCommit(const char *channel)
{
- ListCell *q;
- ListCell *prev;
+ ListCell *q;
+ ListCell *prev;
if (Trace_notify)
elog(DEBUG1, "Exec_UnlistenCommit(%s,%d)", channel, MyProcPid);
prev = NULL;
foreach(q, listenChannels)
{
- char *lchan = (char *) lfirst(q);
+ char *lchan = (char *) lfirst(q);
if (strcmp(lchan, channel) == 0)
{
* The reason that this is not done in AtCommit_Notify is that there is
* a nonzero chance of errors here (for example, encoding conversion errors
* while trying to format messages to our frontend). An error during
- * AtCommit_Notify would be a PANIC condition. The timing is also arranged
+ * AtCommit_Notify would be a PANIC condition. The timing is also arranged
* to ensure that a transaction's self-notifies are delivered to the frontend
* before it gets the terminating ReadyForQuery message.
*
* Note that we send signals and process the queue even if the transaction
- * eventually aborted. This is because we need to clean out whatever got
+ * eventually aborted. This is because we need to clean out whatever got
* added to the queue.
*
* NOTE: we are outside of any transaction here.
return;
/*
- * We reset the flag immediately; otherwise, if any sort of error
- * occurs below, we'd be locked up in an infinite loop, because
- * control will come right back here after error cleanup.
+ * We reset the flag immediately; otherwise, if any sort of error occurs
+ * below, we'd be locked up in an infinite loop, because control will come
+ * right back here after error cleanup.
*/
backendHasSentNotifications = false;
elog(DEBUG1, "ProcessCompletedNotifies");
/*
- * We must run asyncQueueReadAllNotifications inside a transaction,
- * else bad things happen if it gets an error.
+ * We must run asyncQueueReadAllNotifications inside a transaction, else
+ * bad things happen if it gets an error.
*/
StartTransactionCommand();
{
/*
* If we found no other listening backends, and we aren't listening
- * ourselves, then we must execute asyncQueueAdvanceTail to flush
- * the queue, because ain't nobody else gonna do it. This prevents
- * queue overflow when we're sending useless notifies to nobody.
- * (A new listener could have joined since we looked, but if so this
- * is harmless.)
+ * ourselves, then we must execute asyncQueueAdvanceTail to flush the
+ * queue, because ain't nobody else gonna do it. This prevents queue
+ * overflow when we're sending useless notifies to nobody. (A new
+ * listener could have joined since we looked, but if so this is
+ * harmless.)
*/
asyncQueueAdvanceTail();
}
/*
* Remove our entry from the listeners array when we are no longer listening
- * on any channel. NB: must not fail if we're already not listening.
+ * on any channel. NB: must not fail if we're already not listening.
*/
static void
asyncQueueUnregister(void)
{
- bool advanceTail;
+ bool advanceTail;
- Assert(listenChannels == NIL); /* else caller error */
+ Assert(listenChannels == NIL); /* else caller error */
LWLockAcquire(AsyncQueueLock, LW_SHARED);
/* check if entry is valid and oldest ... */
/*
* The queue is full if creating a new head page would create a page that
* logically precedes the current global tail pointer, ie, the head
- * pointer would wrap around compared to the tail. We cannot create such
+ * pointer would wrap around compared to the tail. We cannot create such
* a head page for fear of confusing slru.c. For safety we round the tail
* pointer back to a segment boundary (compare the truncation logic in
* asyncQueueAdvanceTail).
/*
* Advance the QueuePosition to the next entry, assuming that the current
- * entry is of length entryLength. If we jump to a new page the function
+ * entry is of length entryLength. If we jump to a new page the function
* returns true, else false.
*/
static bool
asyncQueueAdvance(QueuePosition *position, int entryLength)
{
- int pageno = QUEUE_POS_PAGE(*position);
- int offset = QUEUE_POS_OFFSET(*position);
- bool pageJump = false;
+ int pageno = QUEUE_POS_PAGE(*position);
+ int offset = QUEUE_POS_OFFSET(*position);
+ bool pageJump = false;
/*
* Move to the next writing position: First jump over what we have just
{
pageno++;
if (pageno > QUEUE_MAX_PAGE)
- pageno = 0; /* wrap around */
+ pageno = 0; /* wrap around */
offset = 0;
pageJump = true;
}
static void
asyncQueueNotificationToEntry(Notification *n, AsyncQueueEntry *qe)
{
- size_t channellen = strlen(n->channel);
- size_t payloadlen = strlen(n->payload);
- int entryLength;
+ size_t channellen = strlen(n->channel);
+ size_t payloadlen = strlen(n->payload);
+ int entryLength;
Assert(channellen < NAMEDATALEN);
Assert(payloadlen < NOTIFY_PAYLOAD_MAX_LENGTH);
* the last byte which simplifies reading the page later.
*
* We are passed the list cell containing the next notification to write
- * and return the first still-unwritten cell back. Eventually we will return
+ * and return the first still-unwritten cell back. Eventually we will return
* NULL indicating all is done.
*
* We are holding AsyncQueueLock already from the caller and grab AsyncCtlLock
static ListCell *
asyncQueueAddEntries(ListCell *nextNotify)
{
- AsyncQueueEntry qe;
- int pageno;
- int offset;
- int slotno;
+ AsyncQueueEntry qe;
+ int pageno;
+ int offset;
+ int slotno;
/* We hold both AsyncQueueLock and AsyncCtlLock during this operation */
LWLockAcquire(AsyncCtlLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE);
while (nextNotify != NULL)
{
- Notification *n = (Notification *) lfirst(nextNotify);
+ Notification *n = (Notification *) lfirst(nextNotify);
/* Construct a valid queue entry in local variable qe */
asyncQueueNotificationToEntry(n, &qe);
*/
qe.length = QUEUE_PAGESIZE - offset;
qe.dboid = InvalidOid;
- qe.data[0] = '\0'; /* empty channel */
- qe.data[1] = '\0'; /* empty payload */
+ qe.data[0] = '\0'; /* empty channel */
+ qe.data[1] = '\0'; /* empty payload */
}
/* Now copy qe into the shared buffer page */
if (asyncQueueAdvance(&(QUEUE_HEAD), qe.length))
{
/*
- * Page is full, so we're done here, but first fill the next
- * page with zeroes. The reason to do this is to ensure that
- * slru.c's idea of the head page is always the same as ours,
- * which avoids boundary problems in SimpleLruTruncate. The
- * test in asyncQueueIsFull() ensured that there is room to
- * create this page without overrunning the queue.
+ * Page is full, so we're done here, but first fill the next page
+ * with zeroes. The reason to do this is to ensure that slru.c's
+ * idea of the head page is always the same as ours, which avoids
+ * boundary problems in SimpleLruTruncate. The test in
+ * asyncQueueIsFull() ensured that there is room to create this
+ * page without overrunning the queue.
*/
slotno = SimpleLruZeroPage(AsyncCtl, QUEUE_POS_PAGE(QUEUE_HEAD));
/* And exit the loop */
static void
asyncQueueFillWarning(void)
{
- int headPage = QUEUE_POS_PAGE(QUEUE_HEAD);
- int tailPage = QUEUE_POS_PAGE(QUEUE_TAIL);
- int occupied;
- double fillDegree;
- TimestampTz t;
+ int headPage = QUEUE_POS_PAGE(QUEUE_HEAD);
+ int tailPage = QUEUE_POS_PAGE(QUEUE_TAIL);
+ int occupied;
+ double fillDegree;
+ TimestampTz t;
occupied = headPage - tailPage;
if (occupied == 0)
return; /* fast exit for common case */
-
+
if (occupied < 0)
{
/* head has wrapped around, tail not yet */
- occupied += QUEUE_MAX_PAGE+1;
+ occupied += QUEUE_MAX_PAGE + 1;
}
- fillDegree = (double) occupied / (double) ((QUEUE_MAX_PAGE+1)/2);
+ fillDegree = (double) occupied / (double) ((QUEUE_MAX_PAGE + 1) / 2);
if (fillDegree < 0.5)
return;
if (TimestampDifferenceExceeds(asyncQueueControl->lastQueueFillWarn,
t, QUEUE_FULL_WARN_INTERVAL))
{
- QueuePosition min = QUEUE_HEAD;
- int32 minPid = InvalidPid;
- int i;
+ QueuePosition min = QUEUE_HEAD;
+ int32 minPid = InvalidPid;
+ int i;
for (i = 1; i <= MaxBackends; i++)
{
int32 pid;
/*
- * Identify all backends that are listening and not already up-to-date.
- * We don't want to send signals while holding the AsyncQueueLock, so
- * we just build a list of target PIDs.
+ * Identify all backends that are listening and not already up-to-date. We
+ * don't want to send signals while holding the AsyncQueueLock, so we just
+ * build a list of target PIDs.
*
- * XXX in principle these pallocs could fail, which would be bad.
- * Maybe preallocate the arrays? But in practice this is only run
- * in trivial transactions, so there should surely be space available.
+ * XXX in principle these pallocs could fail, which would be bad. Maybe
+ * preallocate the arrays? But in practice this is only run in trivial
+ * transactions, so there should surely be space available.
*/
pids = (int32 *) palloc(MaxBackends * sizeof(int32));
ids = (BackendId *) palloc(MaxBackends * sizeof(BackendId));
/*
* Note: assuming things aren't broken, a signal failure here could
* only occur if the target backend exited since we released
- * AsyncQueueLock; which is unlikely but certainly possible.
- * So we just log a low-level debug message if it happens.
+ * AsyncQueueLock; which is unlikely but certainly possible. So we
+ * just log a low-level debug message if it happens.
*/
if (SendProcSignal(pid, PROCSIG_NOTIFY_INTERRUPT, ids[i]) < 0)
elog(DEBUG3, "could not signal backend with PID %d: %m", pid);
{
/*
* If we LISTEN but then roll back the transaction we have set our pointer
- * but have not made any entry in listenChannels. In that case, remove
- * our pointer again.
+ * but have not made any entry in listenChannels. In that case, remove our
+ * pointer again.
*/
if (backendHasExecutedInitialListen)
{
* is disabled until the next EnableNotifyInterrupt call.
*
* The PROCSIG_CATCHUP_INTERRUPT signal handler also needs to call this,
- * so as to prevent conflicts if one signal interrupts the other. So we
+ * so as to prevent conflicts if one signal interrupts the other. So we
* must return the previous state of the flag.
*/
bool
static void
asyncQueueReadAllNotifications(void)
{
- QueuePosition pos;
- QueuePosition oldpos;
- QueuePosition head;
+ QueuePosition pos;
+ QueuePosition oldpos;
+ QueuePosition head;
bool advanceTail;
+
/* page_buffer must be adequately aligned, so use a union */
- union {
+ union
+ {
char buf[QUEUE_PAGESIZE];
AsyncQueueEntry align;
- } page_buffer;
+ } page_buffer;
/* Fetch current state */
LWLockAcquire(AsyncQueueLock, LW_SHARED);
* Especially we do not take into account different commit times.
* Consider the following example:
*
- * Backend 1: Backend 2:
+ * Backend 1: Backend 2:
*
* transaction starts
* NOTIFY foo;
* commit starts
- * transaction starts
- * LISTEN foo;
- * commit starts
+ * transaction starts
+ * LISTEN foo;
+ * commit starts
* commit to clog
- * commit to clog
+ * commit to clog
*
* It could happen that backend 2 sees the notification from backend 1 in
* the queue. Even though the notifying transaction committed before
{
bool reachedStop;
- do
+ do
{
int curpage = QUEUE_POS_PAGE(pos);
int curoffset = QUEUE_POS_OFFSET(pos);
/*
* We copy the data from SLRU into a local buffer, so as to avoid
* holding the AsyncCtlLock while we are examining the entries and
- * possibly transmitting them to our frontend. Copy only the part
+ * possibly transmitting them to our frontend. Copy only the part
* of the page we will actually inspect.
*/
slotno = SimpleLruReadPage_ReadOnly(AsyncCtl, curpage,
/* we only want to read as far as head */
copysize = QUEUE_POS_OFFSET(head) - curoffset;
if (copysize < 0)
- copysize = 0; /* just for safety */
+ copysize = 0; /* just for safety */
}
else
{
* uncommitted message.
*
* Our stop position is what we found to be the head's position
- * when we entered this function. It might have changed
- * already. But if it has, we will receive (or have already
- * received and queued) another signal and come here again.
+ * when we entered this function. It might have changed already.
+ * But if it has, we will receive (or have already received and
+ * queued) another signal and come here again.
*
* We are not holding AsyncQueueLock here! The queue can only
* extend beyond the head pointer (see above) and we leave our
* and deliver relevant ones to my frontend.
*
* The current page must have been fetched into page_buffer from shared
- * memory. (We could access the page right in shared memory, but that
+ * memory. (We could access the page right in shared memory, but that
* would imply holding the AsyncCtlLock throughout this routine.)
*
* We stop if we reach the "stop" position, or reach a notification from an
{
bool reachedStop = false;
bool reachedEndOfPage;
- AsyncQueueEntry *qe;
+ AsyncQueueEntry *qe;
do
{
- QueuePosition thisentry = *current;
+ QueuePosition thisentry = *current;
if (QUEUE_POS_EQUAL(thisentry, stop))
break;
qe = (AsyncQueueEntry *) (page_buffer + QUEUE_POS_OFFSET(thisentry));
/*
- * Advance *current over this message, possibly to the next page.
- * As noted in the comments for asyncQueueReadAllNotifications, we
- * must do this before possibly failing while processing the message.
+ * Advance *current over this message, possibly to the next page. As
+ * noted in the comments for asyncQueueReadAllNotifications, we must
+ * do this before possibly failing while processing the message.
*/
reachedEndOfPage = asyncQueueAdvance(current, qe->length);
if (TransactionIdDidCommit(qe->xid))
{
/* qe->data is the null-terminated channel name */
- char *channel = qe->data;
+ char *channel = qe->data;
if (IsListeningOn(channel))
{
/* payload follows channel name */
- char *payload = qe->data + strlen(channel) + 1;
+ char *payload = qe->data + strlen(channel) + 1;
NotifyMyFrontEnd(channel, payload, qe->srcPid);
}
{
/*
* The transaction has neither committed nor aborted so far,
- * so we can't process its message yet. Break out of the loop,
- * but first back up *current so we will reprocess the message
- * next time. (Note: it is unlikely but not impossible for
- * TransactionIdDidCommit to fail, so we can't really avoid
- * this advance-then-back-up behavior when dealing with an
- * uncommitted message.)
+ * so we can't process its message yet. Break out of the
+ * loop, but first back up *current so we will reprocess the
+ * message next time. (Note: it is unlikely but not
+ * impossible for TransactionIdDidCommit to fail, so we can't
+ * really avoid this advance-then-back-up behavior when
+ * dealing with an uncommitted message.)
*/
*current = thisentry;
reachedStop = true;
static void
asyncQueueAdvanceTail(void)
{
- QueuePosition min;
- int i;
- int oldtailpage;
- int newtailpage;
- int boundary;
+ QueuePosition min;
+ int i;
+ int oldtailpage;
+ int newtailpage;
+ int boundary;
LWLockAcquire(AsyncQueueLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE);
min = QUEUE_HEAD;
* We can truncate something if the global tail advanced across an SLRU
* segment boundary.
*
- * XXX it might be better to truncate only once every several segments,
- * to reduce the number of directory scans.
+ * XXX it might be better to truncate only once every several segments, to
+ * reduce the number of directory scans.
*/
newtailpage = QUEUE_POS_PAGE(min);
boundary = newtailpage - (newtailpage % SLRU_PAGES_PER_SEGMENT);
if (asyncQueuePagePrecedesLogically(oldtailpage, boundary))
{
/*
- * SimpleLruTruncate() will ask for AsyncCtlLock but will also
- * release the lock again.
+ * SimpleLruTruncate() will ask for AsyncCtlLock but will also release
+ * the lock again.
*/
SimpleLruTruncate(AsyncCtl, newtailpage);
}
notifyInterruptOccurred = 0;
/*
- * We must run asyncQueueReadAllNotifications inside a transaction,
- * else bad things happen if it gets an error.
+ * We must run asyncQueueReadAllNotifications inside a transaction, else
+ * bad things happen if it gets an error.
*/
StartTransactionCommand();
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* cluster.c
- * CLUSTER a table on an index. This is now also used for VACUUM FULL.
+ * CLUSTER a table on an index. This is now also used for VACUUM FULL.
*
* There is hardly anything left of Paul Brown's original implementation...
*
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/cluster.c,v 1.201 2010/02/14 18:42:14 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/cluster.c,v 1.202 2010/02/26 02:00:37 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void rebuild_relation(Relation OldHeap, Oid indexOid,
- int freeze_min_age, int freeze_table_age);
+ int freeze_min_age, int freeze_table_age);
static void copy_heap_data(Oid OIDNewHeap, Oid OIDOldHeap, Oid OIDOldIndex,
int freeze_min_age, int freeze_table_age,
bool *pSwapToastByContent, TransactionId *pFreezeXid);
* them incrementally while we load the table.
*
* If indexOid is InvalidOid, the table will be rewritten in physical order
- * instead of index order. This is the new implementation of VACUUM FULL,
+ * instead of index order. This is the new implementation of VACUUM FULL,
* and error messages should refer to the operation as VACUUM not CLUSTER.
*/
void
* check in the "recheck" case is appropriate (which currently means
* somebody is executing a database-wide CLUSTER), because there is
* another check in cluster() which will stop any attempt to cluster
- * remote temp tables by name. There is another check in
- * cluster_rel which is redundant, but we leave it for extra safety.
+ * remote temp tables by name. There is another check in cluster_rel
+ * which is redundant, but we leave it for extra safety.
*/
if (RELATION_IS_OTHER_TEMP(OldHeap))
{
* Check that the index is still the one with indisclustered set.
*/
tuple = SearchSysCache1(INDEXRELID, ObjectIdGetDatum(indexOid));
- if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tuple)) /* probably can't happen */
+ if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tuple)) /* probably can't happen */
{
relation_close(OldHeap, AccessExclusiveLock);
return;
errmsg("cannot cluster a shared catalog")));
/*
- * Don't process temp tables of other backends ... their local
- * buffer manager is not going to cope.
+ * Don't process temp tables of other backends ... their local buffer
+ * manager is not going to cope.
*/
if (RELATION_IS_OTHER_TEMP(OldHeap))
{
if (OidIsValid(indexOid))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED),
- errmsg("cannot cluster temporary tables of other sessions")));
+ errmsg("cannot cluster temporary tables of other sessions")));
else
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED),
- errmsg("cannot vacuum temporary tables of other sessions")));
+ errmsg("cannot vacuum temporary tables of other sessions")));
}
/*
* the old, or we will have problems with the TEMP status of temp tables.
*
* Note: the new heap is not a shared relation, even if we are rebuilding
- * a shared rel. However, we do make the new heap mapped if the source
- * is mapped. This simplifies swap_relation_files, and is absolutely
+ * a shared rel. However, we do make the new heap mapped if the source is
+ * mapped. This simplifies swap_relation_files, and is absolutely
* necessary for rebuilding pg_class, for reasons explained there.
*/
snprintf(NewHeapName, sizeof(NewHeapName), "pg_temp_%u", OIDOldHeap);
* If necessary, create a TOAST table for the new relation.
*
* If the relation doesn't have a TOAST table already, we can't need one
- * for the new relation. The other way around is possible though: if
- * some wide columns have been dropped, AlterTableCreateToastTable
- * can decide that no TOAST table is needed for the new table.
+ * for the new relation. The other way around is possible though: if some
+ * wide columns have been dropped, AlterTableCreateToastTable can decide
+ * that no TOAST table is needed for the new table.
*
* Note that AlterTableCreateToastTable ends with CommandCounterIncrement,
* so that the TOAST table will be visible for insertion.
isnull = (bool *) palloc(natts * sizeof(bool));
/*
- * We need to log the copied data in WAL iff WAL archiving/streaming
- * is enabled AND it's not a temp rel.
+ * We need to log the copied data in WAL iff WAL archiving/streaming is
+ * enabled AND it's not a temp rel.
*/
use_wal = XLogIsNeeded() && !NewHeap->rd_istemp;
/*
- * Write an XLOG UNLOGGED record if WAL-logging was skipped because
- * WAL archiving is not enabled.
+ * Write an XLOG UNLOGGED record if WAL-logging was skipped because WAL
+ * archiving is not enabled.
*/
if (!use_wal && !NewHeap->rd_istemp)
{
- char reason[NAMEDATALEN + 32];
+ char reason[NAMEDATALEN + 32];
if (OldIndex != NULL)
snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason), "CLUSTER on \"%s\"",
/*
* If both tables have TOAST tables, perform toast swap by content. It is
* possible that the old table has a toast table but the new one doesn't,
- * if toastable columns have been dropped. In that case we have to do
+ * if toastable columns have been dropped. In that case we have to do
* swap by links. This is okay because swap by content is only essential
* for system catalogs, and we don't support schema changes for them.
*/
* data will eventually be found. Set this up by setting rd_toastoid.
* Note that we must hold NewHeap open until we are done writing data,
* since the relcache will not guarantee to remember this setting once
- * the relation is closed. Also, this technique depends on the fact
+ * the relation is closed. Also, this technique depends on the fact
* that no one will try to read from the NewHeap until after we've
* finished writing it and swapping the rels --- otherwise they could
* follow the toast pointers to the wrong place.
rwstate = begin_heap_rewrite(NewHeap, OldestXmin, FreezeXid, use_wal);
/*
- * Scan through the OldHeap, either in OldIndex order or sequentially,
- * and copy each tuple into the NewHeap. To ensure we see recently-dead
+ * Scan through the OldHeap, either in OldIndex order or sequentially, and
+ * copy each tuple into the NewHeap. To ensure we see recently-dead
* tuples that still need to be copied, we scan with SnapshotAny and use
* HeapTupleSatisfiesVacuum for the visibility test.
*/
case HEAPTUPLE_INSERT_IN_PROGRESS:
/*
- * Since we hold exclusive lock on the relation, normally
- * the only way to see this is if it was inserted earlier
- * in our own transaction. However, it can happen in system
+ * Since we hold exclusive lock on the relation, normally the
+ * only way to see this is if it was inserted earlier in our
+ * own transaction. However, it can happen in system
* catalogs, since we tend to release write lock before commit
- * there. Give a warning if neither case applies; but in
- * any case we had better copy it.
+ * there. Give a warning if neither case applies; but in any
+ * case we had better copy it.
*/
if (!is_system_catalog &&
!TransactionIdIsCurrentTransactionId(HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(tuple->t_data)))
NameStr(relform2->relname), r2);
/*
- * Send replacement mappings to relmapper. Note these won't actually
+ * Send replacement mappings to relmapper. Note these won't actually
* take effect until CommandCounterIncrement.
*/
RelationMapUpdateMap(r1, relfilenode2, relform1->relisshared, false);
/*
* In the case of a shared catalog, these next few steps will only affect
- * our own database's pg_class row; but that's okay, because they are
- * all noncritical updates. That's also an important fact for the case
- * of a mapped catalog, because it's possible that we'll commit the map
- * change and then fail to commit the pg_class update.
+ * our own database's pg_class row; but that's okay, because they are all
+ * noncritical updates. That's also an important fact for the case of a
+ * mapped catalog, because it's possible that we'll commit the map change
+ * and then fail to commit the pg_class update.
*/
/* set rel1's frozen Xid */
/*
* Update the tuples in pg_class --- unless the target relation of the
* swap is pg_class itself. In that case, there is zero point in making
- * changes because we'd be updating the old data that we're about to
- * throw away. Because the real work being done here for a mapped relation
- * is just to change the relation map settings, it's all right to not
- * update the pg_class rows in this case.
+ * changes because we'd be updating the old data that we're about to throw
+ * away. Because the real work being done here for a mapped relation is
+ * just to change the relation map settings, it's all right to not update
+ * the pg_class rows in this case.
*/
if (!target_is_pg_class)
{
/*
* We disallow this case for system catalogs, to avoid the
* possibility that the catalog we're rebuilding is one of the
- * ones the dependency changes would change. It's too late
- * to be making any data changes to the target catalog.
+ * ones the dependency changes would change. It's too late to be
+ * making any data changes to the target catalog.
*/
if (IsSystemClass(relform1))
elog(ERROR, "cannot swap toast files by links for system catalogs");
*/
if (swap_toast_by_content &&
relform1->reltoastidxid && relform2->reltoastidxid)
- swap_relation_files(relform1->reltoastidxid,
- relform2->reltoastidxid,
- target_is_pg_class,
- swap_toast_by_content,
- InvalidTransactionId,
- mapped_tables);
+ swap_relation_files(relform1->reltoastidxid,
+ relform2->reltoastidxid,
+ target_is_pg_class,
+ swap_toast_by_content,
+ InvalidTransactionId,
+ mapped_tables);
/* Clean up. */
heap_freetuple(reltup1);
* non-transient relation.)
*
* Caution: the placement of this step interacts with the decision to
- * handle toast rels by recursion. When we are trying to rebuild pg_class
+ * handle toast rels by recursion. When we are trying to rebuild pg_class
* itself, the smgr close on pg_class must happen after all accesses in
* this function.
*/
/*
* Rebuild each index on the relation (but not the toast table, which is
- * all-new at this point). It is important to do this before the DROP
+ * all-new at this point). It is important to do this before the DROP
* step because if we are processing a system catalog that will be used
- * during DROP, we want to have its indexes available. There is no
+ * during DROP, we want to have its indexes available. There is no
* advantage to the other order anyway because this is all transactional,
- * so no chance to reclaim disk space before commit. We do not need
- * a final CommandCounterIncrement() because reindex_relation does it.
+ * so no chance to reclaim disk space before commit. We do not need a
+ * final CommandCounterIncrement() because reindex_relation does it.
*/
reindex_relation(OIDOldHeap, false, true);
/*
* Now we must remove any relation mapping entries that we set up for the
- * transient table, as well as its toast table and toast index if any.
- * If we fail to do this before commit, the relmapper will complain about
- * new permanent map entries being added post-bootstrap.
+ * transient table, as well as its toast table and toast index if any. If
+ * we fail to do this before commit, the relmapper will complain about new
+ * permanent map entries being added post-bootstrap.
*/
for (i = 0; OidIsValid(mapped_tables[i]); i++)
RelationMapRemoveMapping(mapped_tables[i]);
* Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/comment.c,v 1.113 2010/02/14 18:42:14 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/comment.c,v 1.114 2010/02/26 02:00:38 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
sd = systable_beginscan(description, DescriptionObjIndexId, true,
SnapshotNow, 3, skey);
- comment = NULL;
+ comment = NULL;
while ((tuple = systable_getnext(sd)) != NULL)
{
- Datum value;
- bool isnull;
+ Datum value;
+ bool isnull;
/* Found the tuple, get description field */
value = heap_getattr(tuple, Anum_pg_description_description, tupdesc, &isnull);
* Allow comments only on columns of tables, views, and composite types
* (which are the only relkinds for which pg_dump will dump per-column
* comments). In particular we wish to disallow comments on index
- * columns, because the naming of an index's columns may change across
- * PG versions, so dumping per-column comments could create reload
- * failures.
+ * columns, because the naming of an index's columns may change across PG
+ * versions, so dumping per-column comments could create reload failures.
*/
if (relation->rd_rel->relkind != RELKIND_RELATION &&
relation->rd_rel->relkind != RELKIND_VIEW &&
/* Find the rule's pg_rewrite tuple, get its OID */
tuple = SearchSysCache2(RULERELNAME,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(reloid),
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(reloid),
PointerGetDatum(rulename));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tuple))
ereport(ERROR,
namespaceId = LookupExplicitNamespace(schemaname);
tuple = SearchSysCache3(OPFAMILYAMNAMENSP,
ObjectIdGetDatum(amID),
- PointerGetDatum(opfname),
+ PointerGetDatum(opfname),
ObjectIdGetDatum(namespaceId));
}
else
/*
* Call CreateComments() to create/drop the comments
*
- * See the comment in the inv_create() which describes
- * the reason why LargeObjectRelationId is used instead
- * of LargeObjectMetadataRelationId.
+ * See the comment in the inv_create() which describes the reason why
+ * LargeObjectRelationId is used instead of LargeObjectMetadataRelationId.
*/
CreateComments(loid, LargeObjectRelationId, 0, comment);
}
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/constraint.c,v 1.3 2010/01/02 16:57:37 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/constraint.c,v 1.4 2010/02/26 02:00:38 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
bool isnull[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
/*
- * Make sure this is being called as an AFTER ROW trigger. Note:
- * translatable error strings are shared with ri_triggers.c, so
- * resist the temptation to fold the function name into them.
+ * Make sure this is being called as an AFTER ROW trigger. Note:
+ * translatable error strings are shared with ri_triggers.c, so resist the
+ * temptation to fold the function name into them.
*/
if (!CALLED_AS_TRIGGER(fcinfo))
ereport(ERROR,
* If the new_row is now dead (ie, inserted and then deleted within our
* transaction), we can skip the check. However, we have to be careful,
* because this trigger gets queued only in response to index insertions;
- * which means it does not get queued for HOT updates. The row we are
+ * which means it does not get queued for HOT updates. The row we are
* called for might now be dead, but have a live HOT child, in which case
* we still need to make the check. Therefore we have to use
* heap_hot_search, not just HeapTupleSatisfiesVisibility as is done in
}
/*
- * Open the index, acquiring a RowExclusiveLock, just as if we were
- * going to update it. (This protects against possible changes of the
- * index schema, not against concurrent updates.)
+ * Open the index, acquiring a RowExclusiveLock, just as if we were going
+ * to update it. (This protects against possible changes of the index
+ * schema, not against concurrent updates.)
*/
indexRel = index_open(trigdata->tg_trigger->tgconstrindid,
RowExclusiveLock);
ExecStoreTuple(new_row, slot, InvalidBuffer, false);
/*
- * Typically the index won't have expressions, but if it does we need
- * an EState to evaluate them. We need it for exclusion constraints
- * too, even if they are just on simple columns.
+ * Typically the index won't have expressions, but if it does we need an
+ * EState to evaluate them. We need it for exclusion constraints too,
+ * even if they are just on simple columns.
*/
if (indexInfo->ii_Expressions != NIL ||
indexInfo->ii_ExclusionOps != NULL)
estate = NULL;
/*
- * Form the index values and isnull flags for the index entry that
- * we need to check.
+ * Form the index values and isnull flags for the index entry that we need
+ * to check.
*
- * Note: if the index uses functions that are not as immutable as they
- * are supposed to be, this could produce an index tuple different from
- * the original. The index AM can catch such errors by verifying that
- * it finds a matching index entry with the tuple's TID. For exclusion
+ * Note: if the index uses functions that are not as immutable as they are
+ * supposed to be, this could produce an index tuple different from the
+ * original. The index AM can catch such errors by verifying that it
+ * finds a matching index entry with the tuple's TID. For exclusion
* constraints we check this in check_exclusion_constraint().
*/
FormIndexDatum(indexInfo, slot, estate, values, isnull);
else
{
/*
- * For exclusion constraints we just do the normal check, but now
- * it's okay to throw error.
+ * For exclusion constraints we just do the normal check, but now it's
+ * okay to throw error.
*/
check_exclusion_constraint(trigdata->tg_relation, indexRel, indexInfo,
&(new_row->t_self), values, isnull,
}
/*
- * If that worked, then this index entry is unique or non-excluded,
- * and we are done.
+ * If that worked, then this index entry is unique or non-excluded, and we
+ * are done.
*/
if (estate != NULL)
FreeExecutorState(estate);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/copy.c,v 1.325 2010/02/20 21:24:02 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/copy.c,v 1.326 2010/02/26 02:00:38 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
if (strcmp(defel->defname, "format") == 0)
{
- char *fmt = defGetString(defel);
+ char *fmt = defGetString(defel);
if (format_specified)
ereport(ERROR,
errmsg("conflicting or redundant options")));
format_specified = true;
if (strcmp(fmt, "text") == 0)
- /* default format */ ;
+ /* default format */ ;
else if (strcmp(fmt, "csv") == 0)
cstate->csv_mode = true;
else if (strcmp(fmt, "binary") == 0)
force_quote = (List *) defel->arg;
else
ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
- errmsg("argument to option \"%s\" must be a list of column names",
- defel->defname)));
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
+ errmsg("argument to option \"%s\" must be a list of column names",
+ defel->defname)));
}
else if (strcmp(defel->defname, "force_not_null") == 0)
{
force_notnull = (List *) defel->arg;
else
ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
- errmsg("argument to option \"%s\" must be a list of column names",
- defel->defname)));
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
+ errmsg("argument to option \"%s\" must be a list of column names",
+ defel->defname)));
}
else
ereport(ERROR,
cstate->force_quote_flags = (bool *) palloc0(num_phys_attrs * sizeof(bool));
if (force_quote_all)
{
- int i;
+ int i;
for (i = 0; i < num_phys_attrs; i++)
cstate->force_quote_flags[i] = true;
if (!skip_tuple)
{
- List *recheckIndexes = NIL;
+ List *recheckIndexes = NIL;
/* Place tuple in tuple slot */
ExecStoreTuple(tuple, slot, InvalidBuffer, false);
*/
if (hi_options & HEAP_INSERT_SKIP_WAL)
{
- char reason[NAMEDATALEN + 30];
+ char reason[NAMEDATALEN + 30];
+
snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason), "COPY FROM on \"%s\"",
RelationGetRelationName(cstate->rel));
XLogReportUnloggedStatement(reason);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c,v 1.234 2010/02/14 18:42:14 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/dbcommands.c,v 1.235 2010/02/26 02:00:38 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* fails when presented with data in an encoding it's not expecting. We
* allow mismatch in four cases:
*
- * 1. locale encoding = SQL_ASCII, which means that the locale is
- * C/POSIX which works with any encoding.
+ * 1. locale encoding = SQL_ASCII, which means that the locale is C/POSIX
+ * which works with any encoding.
*
- * 2. locale encoding = -1, which means that we couldn't determine
- * the locale's encoding and have to trust the user to get it right.
+ * 2. locale encoding = -1, which means that we couldn't determine the
+ * locale's encoding and have to trust the user to get it right.
*
* 3. selected encoding is UTF8 and platform is win32. This is because
* UTF8 is a pseudo codepage that is supported in all locales since it's
/*
* We deliberately set datacl to default (NULL), rather than copying it
- * from the template database. Copying it would be a bad idea when the
+ * from the template database. Copying it would be a bad idea when the
* owner is not the same as the template's owner.
*/
new_record_nulls[Anum_pg_database_datacl - 1] = true;
heap_close(pgdbrel, NoLock);
/*
- * Force synchronous commit, thus minimizing the window between removal
- * of the database files and commital of the transaction. If we crash
- * before committing, we'll have a DB that's gone on disk but still there
+ * Force synchronous commit, thus minimizing the window between removal of
+ * the database files and commital of the transaction. If we crash before
+ * committing, we'll have a DB that's gone on disk but still there
* according to pg_database, which is not good.
*/
ForceSyncCommit();
void
AlterDatabaseSet(AlterDatabaseSetStmt *stmt)
{
- Oid datid = get_database_oid(stmt->dbname);
+ Oid datid = get_database_oid(stmt->dbname);
if (!OidIsValid(datid))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_DATABASE),
- errmsg("database \"%s\" does not exist", stmt->dbname)));
-
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_DATABASE),
+ errmsg("database \"%s\" does not exist", stmt->dbname)));
+
/*
* Obtain a lock on the database and make sure it didn't go away in the
* meantime.
shdepLockAndCheckObject(DatabaseRelationId, datid);
if (!pg_database_ownercheck(datid, GetUserId()))
- aclcheck_error(ACLCHECK_NOT_OWNER, ACL_KIND_DATABASE,
- stmt->dbname);
+ aclcheck_error(ACLCHECK_NOT_OWNER, ACL_KIND_DATABASE,
+ stmt->dbname);
AlterSetting(datid, InvalidOid, stmt->setstmt);
-
+
UnlockSharedObject(DatabaseRelationId, datid, 0, AccessShareLock);
}
if (InHotStandby)
{
/*
- * Lock database while we resolve conflicts to ensure that InitPostgres()
- * cannot fully re-execute concurrently. This avoids backends re-connecting
- * automatically to same database, which can happen in some cases.
+ * Lock database while we resolve conflicts to ensure that
+ * InitPostgres() cannot fully re-execute concurrently. This
+ * avoids backends re-connecting automatically to same database,
+ * which can happen in some cases.
*/
LockSharedObjectForSession(DatabaseRelationId, xlrec->db_id, 0, AccessExclusiveLock);
ResolveRecoveryConflictWithDatabase(xlrec->db_id);
if (InHotStandby)
{
/*
- * Release locks prior to commit. XXX There is a race condition here that may allow
- * backends to reconnect, but the window for this is small because the gap between
- * here and commit is mostly fairly small and it is unlikely that people will be
- * dropping databases that we are trying to connect to anyway.
+ * Release locks prior to commit. XXX There is a race condition
+ * here that may allow backends to reconnect, but the window for
+ * this is small because the gap between here and commit is mostly
+ * fairly small and it is unlikely that people will be dropping
+ * databases that we are trying to connect to anyway.
*/
UnlockSharedObjectForSession(DatabaseRelationId, xlrec->db_id, 0, AccessExclusiveLock);
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/define.c,v 1.107 2010/01/02 16:57:37 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/define.c,v 1.108 2010/02/26 02:00:38 momjian Exp $
*
* DESCRIPTION
* The "DefineFoo" routines take the parse tree and pick out the
char *sval = defGetString(def);
/*
- * The set of strings accepted here should match up with
- * the grammar's opt_boolean production.
+ * The set of strings accepted here should match up with the
+ * grammar's opt_boolean production.
*/
if (pg_strcasecmp(sval, "true") == 0)
return true;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994-5, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/explain.c,v 1.203 2010/02/16 22:19:59 adunstan Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/explain.c,v 1.204 2010/02/26 02:00:39 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
ExplainState *es);
static double elapsed_time(instr_time *starttime);
static void ExplainNode(Plan *plan, PlanState *planstate,
- Plan *outer_plan,
- const char *relationship, const char *plan_name,
- ExplainState *es);
+ Plan *outer_plan,
+ const char *relationship, const char *plan_name,
+ ExplainState *es);
static void show_plan_tlist(Plan *plan, ExplainState *es);
static void show_qual(List *qual, const char *qlabel, Plan *plan,
Plan *outer_plan, bool useprefix, ExplainState *es);
static void ExplainMemberNodes(List *plans, PlanState **planstate,
Plan *outer_plan, ExplainState *es);
static void ExplainSubPlans(List *plans, const char *relationship,
- ExplainState *es);
+ ExplainState *es);
static void ExplainPropertyList(const char *qlabel, List *data,
- ExplainState *es);
+ ExplainState *es);
static void ExplainProperty(const char *qlabel, const char *value,
- bool numeric, ExplainState *es);
-#define ExplainPropertyText(qlabel, value, es) \
+ bool numeric, ExplainState *es);
+
+#define ExplainPropertyText(qlabel, value, es) \
ExplainProperty(qlabel, value, false, es)
static void ExplainPropertyInteger(const char *qlabel, int value,
- ExplainState *es);
+ ExplainState *es);
static void ExplainPropertyLong(const char *qlabel, long value,
- ExplainState *es);
+ ExplainState *es);
static void ExplainPropertyFloat(const char *qlabel, double value, int ndigits,
- ExplainState *es);
+ ExplainState *es);
static void ExplainOpenGroup(const char *objtype, const char *labelname,
bool labeled, ExplainState *es);
static void ExplainCloseGroup(const char *objtype, const char *labelname,
- bool labeled, ExplainState *es);
+ bool labeled, ExplainState *es);
static void ExplainDummyGroup(const char *objtype, const char *labelname,
- ExplainState *es);
+ ExplainState *es);
static void ExplainXMLTag(const char *tagname, int flags, ExplainState *es);
static void ExplainJSONLineEnding(ExplainState *es);
static void ExplainYAMLLineStarting(ExplainState *es);
/* Parse options list. */
foreach(lc, stmt->options)
{
- DefElem *opt = (DefElem *) lfirst(lc);
+ DefElem *opt = (DefElem *) lfirst(lc);
if (strcmp(opt->defname, "analyze") == 0)
es.analyze = defGetBoolean(opt);
es.buffers = defGetBoolean(opt);
else if (strcmp(opt->defname, "format") == 0)
{
- char *p = defGetString(opt);
+ char *p = defGetString(opt);
if (strcmp(p, "text") == 0)
es.format = EXPLAIN_FORMAT_TEXT;
es.format = EXPLAIN_FORMAT_YAML;
else
ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
- errmsg("unrecognized value for EXPLAIN option \"%s\": \"%s\"",
- opt->defname, p)));
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
+ errmsg("unrecognized value for EXPLAIN option \"%s\": \"%s\"",
+ opt->defname, p)));
}
else
ereport(ERROR,
if (es.buffers && !es.analyze)
ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
- errmsg("EXPLAIN option BUFFERS requires ANALYZE")));
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
+ errmsg("EXPLAIN option BUFFERS requires ANALYZE")));
/*
* Parse analysis was done already, but we still have to run the rule
- * rewriter. We do not do AcquireRewriteLocks: we assume the query
- * either came straight from the parser, or suitable locks were
- * acquired by plancache.c.
+ * rewriter. We do not do AcquireRewriteLocks: we assume the query either
+ * came straight from the parser, or suitable locks were acquired by
+ * plancache.c.
*
* Because the rewriter and planner tend to scribble on the input, we make
* a preliminary copy of the source querytree. This prevents problems in
/* Check for XML format option */
foreach(lc, stmt->options)
{
- DefElem *opt = (DefElem *) lfirst(lc);
+ DefElem *opt = (DefElem *) lfirst(lc);
if (strcmp(opt->defname, "format") == 0)
{
- char *p = defGetString(opt);
+ char *p = defGetString(opt);
xml = (strcmp(p, "xml") == 0);
/* don't "break", as ExplainQuery will use the last value */
{
if (es->format == EXPLAIN_FORMAT_TEXT)
appendStringInfoString(es->str,
- "Utility statements have no plan structure\n");
+ "Utility statements have no plan structure\n");
else
ExplainDummyGroup("Utility Statement", NULL, es);
}
* convert a QueryDesc's plan tree to text and append it to es->str
*
* The caller should have set up the options fields of *es, as well as
- * initializing the output buffer es->str. Other fields in *es are
+ * initializing the output buffer es->str. Other fields in *es are
* initialized here.
*
* NB: will not work on utility statements
/*
* ExplainQueryText -
- * add a "Query Text" node that contains the actual text of the query
- *
+ * add a "Query Text" node that contains the actual text of the query
+ *
* The caller should have set up the options fields of *es, as well as
- * initializing the output buffer es->str.
+ * initializing the output buffer es->str.
*
*/
void
/*
* In text format, we avoid printing both the trigger name and the
- * constraint name unless VERBOSE is specified. In non-text
- * formats we just print everything.
+ * constraint name unless VERBOSE is specified. In non-text formats
+ * we just print everything.
*/
if (es->format == EXPLAIN_FORMAT_TEXT)
{
pname = sname = "Nested Loop";
break;
case T_MergeJoin:
- pname = "Merge"; /* "Join" gets added by jointype switch */
+ pname = "Merge"; /* "Join" gets added by jointype switch */
sname = "Merge Join";
break;
case T_HashJoin:
- pname = "Hash"; /* "Join" gets added by jointype switch */
+ pname = "Hash"; /* "Join" gets added by jointype switch */
sname = "Hash Join";
break;
case T_SeqScan:
{
case T_IndexScan:
{
- IndexScan *indexscan = (IndexScan *) plan;
+ IndexScan *indexscan = (IndexScan *) plan;
const char *indexname =
- explain_get_index_name(indexscan->indexid);
+ explain_get_index_name(indexscan->indexid);
if (es->format == EXPLAIN_FORMAT_TEXT)
{
{
BitmapIndexScan *bitmapindexscan = (BitmapIndexScan *) plan;
const char *indexname =
- explain_get_index_name(bitmapindexscan->indexid);
+ explain_get_index_name(bitmapindexscan->indexid);
if (es->format == EXPLAIN_FORMAT_TEXT)
appendStringInfo(es->str, " on %s", indexname);
if (es->format == EXPLAIN_FORMAT_TEXT)
{
- bool has_shared = (usage->shared_blks_hit > 0 ||
- usage->shared_blks_read > 0 ||
- usage->shared_blks_written);
- bool has_local = (usage->local_blks_hit > 0 ||
- usage->local_blks_read > 0 ||
- usage->local_blks_written);
- bool has_temp = (usage->temp_blks_read > 0 ||
- usage->temp_blks_written);
+ bool has_shared = (usage->shared_blks_hit > 0 ||
+ usage->shared_blks_read > 0 ||
+ usage->shared_blks_written);
+ bool has_local = (usage->local_blks_hit > 0 ||
+ usage->local_blks_read > 0 ||
+ usage->local_blks_written);
+ bool has_temp = (usage->temp_blks_read > 0 ||
+ usage->temp_blks_written);
/* Show only positive counter values. */
if (has_shared || has_local || has_temp)
appendStringInfoString(es->str, " shared");
if (usage->shared_blks_hit > 0)
appendStringInfo(es->str, " hit=%ld",
- usage->shared_blks_hit);
+ usage->shared_blks_hit);
if (usage->shared_blks_read > 0)
appendStringInfo(es->str, " read=%ld",
- usage->shared_blks_read);
+ usage->shared_blks_read);
if (usage->shared_blks_written > 0)
appendStringInfo(es->str, " written=%ld",
- usage->shared_blks_written);
+ usage->shared_blks_written);
if (has_local || has_temp)
appendStringInfoChar(es->str, ',');
}
appendStringInfoString(es->str, " local");
if (usage->local_blks_hit > 0)
appendStringInfo(es->str, " hit=%ld",
- usage->local_blks_hit);
+ usage->local_blks_hit);
if (usage->local_blks_read > 0)
appendStringInfo(es->str, " read=%ld",
- usage->local_blks_read);
+ usage->local_blks_read);
if (usage->local_blks_written > 0)
appendStringInfo(es->str, " written=%ld",
- usage->local_blks_written);
+ usage->local_blks_written);
if (has_temp)
appendStringInfoChar(es->str, ',');
}
appendStringInfoString(es->str, " temp");
if (usage->temp_blks_read > 0)
appendStringInfo(es->str, " read=%ld",
- usage->temp_blks_read);
+ usage->temp_blks_read);
if (usage->temp_blks_written > 0)
appendStringInfo(es->str, " written=%ld",
- usage->temp_blks_written);
+ usage->temp_blks_written);
}
appendStringInfoChar(es->str, '\n');
}
TargetEntry *tle = (TargetEntry *) lfirst(lc);
result = lappend(result,
- deparse_expression((Node *) tle->expr, context,
+ deparse_expression((Node *) tle->expr, context,
useprefix, false));
}
if (es->analyze && sortstate->sort_Done &&
sortstate->tuplesortstate != NULL)
{
- Tuplesortstate *state = (Tuplesortstate *) sortstate->tuplesortstate;
+ Tuplesortstate *state = (Tuplesortstate *) sortstate->tuplesortstate;
const char *sortMethod;
const char *spaceType;
long spaceUsed;
if (hashtable)
{
- long spacePeakKb = (hashtable->spacePeak + 1023) / 1024;
+ long spacePeakKb = (hashtable->spacePeak + 1023) / 1024;
+
if (es->format != EXPLAIN_FORMAT_TEXT)
{
ExplainPropertyLong("Hash Buckets", hashtable->nbuckets, es);
{
appendStringInfoSpaces(es->str, es->indent * 2);
appendStringInfo(es->str,
- "Buckets: %d Batches: %d (originally %d) Memory Usage: %ldkB\n",
+ "Buckets: %d Batches: %d (originally %d) Memory Usage: %ldkB\n",
hashtable->nbuckets, hashtable->nbatch,
hashtable->nbatch_original, spacePeakKb);
}
{
appendStringInfoSpaces(es->str, es->indent * 2);
appendStringInfo(es->str,
- "Buckets: %d Batches: %d Memory Usage: %ldkB\n",
+ "Buckets: %d Batches: %d Memory Usage: %ldkB\n",
hashtable->nbuckets, hashtable->nbatch,
spacePeakKb);
}
*/
static void
ExplainMemberNodes(List *plans, PlanState **planstate, Plan *outer_plan,
- ExplainState *es)
+ ExplainState *es)
{
ListCell *lst;
int j = 0;
ExplainXMLTag(qlabel, X_OPENING, es);
foreach(lc, data)
{
- char *str;
+ char *str;
appendStringInfoSpaces(es->str, es->indent * 2 + 2);
appendStringInfoString(es->str, "<Item>");
case EXPLAIN_FORMAT_XML:
{
- char *str;
+ char *str;
appendStringInfoSpaces(es->str, es->indent * 2);
ExplainXMLTag(qlabel, X_OPENING | X_NOWHITESPACE, es);
static void
ExplainPropertyInteger(const char *qlabel, int value, ExplainState *es)
{
- char buf[32];
+ char buf[32];
snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "%d", value);
ExplainProperty(qlabel, buf, true, es);
static void
ExplainPropertyLong(const char *qlabel, long value, ExplainState *es)
{
- char buf[32];
+ char buf[32];
snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "%ld", value);
ExplainProperty(qlabel, buf, true, es);
ExplainPropertyFloat(const char *qlabel, double value, int ndigits,
ExplainState *es)
{
- char buf[256];
+ char buf[256];
snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "%.*f", ndigits, value);
ExplainProperty(qlabel, buf, true, es);
/*
* In JSON format, the grouping_stack is an integer list. 0 means
* we've emitted nothing at this grouping level, 1 means we've
- * emitted something (and so the next item needs a comma).
- * See ExplainJSONLineEnding().
+ * emitted something (and so the next item needs a comma). See
+ * ExplainJSONLineEnding().
*/
es->grouping_stack = lcons_int(0, es->grouping_stack);
es->indent++;
case EXPLAIN_FORMAT_XML:
appendStringInfoString(es->str,
- "<explain xmlns=\"http://www.postgresql.org/2009/explain\">\n");
+ "<explain xmlns=\"http://www.postgresql.org/2009/explain\">\n");
es->indent++;
break;
/*
* Emit a JSON line ending.
*
- * JSON requires a comma after each property but the last. To facilitate this,
+ * JSON requires a comma after each property but the last. To facilitate this,
* in JSON format, the text emitted for each property begins just prior to the
* preceding line-break (and comma, if applicable).
*/
* YAML lines are ordinarily indented by two spaces per indentation level.
* The text emitted for each property begins just prior to the preceding
* line-break, except for the first property in an unlabelled group, for which
- * it begins immediately after the "- " that introduces the group. The first
+ * it begins immediately after the "- " that introduces the group. The first
* property of the group appears on the same line as the opening "- ".
*/
static void
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c,v 1.117 2010/02/17 04:19:39 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/functioncmds.c,v 1.118 2010/02/26 02:00:39 momjian Exp $
*
* DESCRIPTION
* These routines take the parse tree and pick out the
strcmp(prevfp->name, fp->name) == 0)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_FUNCTION_DEFINITION),
- errmsg("parameter name \"%s\" used more than once",
- fp->name)));
+ errmsg("parameter name \"%s\" used more than once",
+ fp->name)));
}
paramNames[i] = CStringGetTextDatum(fp->name);
if (!OidIsValid(laninline))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED),
- errmsg("language \"%s\" does not support inline code execution",
- NameStr(languageStruct->lanname))));
+ errmsg("language \"%s\" does not support inline code execution",
+ NameStr(languageStruct->lanname))));
ReleaseSysCache(languageTuple);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c,v 1.193 2010/02/14 18:42:14 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c,v 1.194 2010/02/26 02:00:39 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
if (exclusionOpNames != NIL && !OidIsValid(accessMethodForm->amgettuple))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED),
- errmsg("access method \"%s\" does not support exclusion constraints",
- accessMethodName)));
+ errmsg("access method \"%s\" does not support exclusion constraints",
+ accessMethodName)));
amcanorder = accessMethodForm->amcanorder;
amoptions = accessMethodForm->amoptions;
else
{
elog(ERROR, "unknown constraint type");
- constraint_type = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */
+ constraint_type = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */
}
ereport(NOTICE,
heap_close(rel, NoLock);
/*
- * Make the catalog entries for the index, including constraints.
- * Then, if not skip_build || concurrent, actually build the index.
+ * Make the catalog entries for the index, including constraints. Then, if
+ * not skip_build || concurrent, actually build the index.
*/
indexRelationId =
index_create(relationId, indexRelationName, indexRelationId,
/*
* For a concurrent build, it's important to make the catalog entries
- * visible to other transactions before we start to build the index.
- * That will prevent them from making incompatible HOT updates. The new
- * index will be marked not indisready and not indisvalid, so that no one
- * else tries to either insert into it or use it for queries.
+ * visible to other transactions before we start to build the index. That
+ * will prevent them from making incompatible HOT updates. The new index
+ * will be marked not indisready and not indisvalid, so that no one else
+ * tries to either insert into it or use it for queries.
*
* We must commit our current transaction so that the index becomes
* visible; then start another. Note that all the data structures we just
/* Allocate space for exclusion operator info, if needed */
if (exclusionOpNames)
{
- int ncols = list_length(attList);
+ int ncols = list_length(attList);
Assert(list_length(exclusionOpNames) == ncols);
indexInfo->ii_ExclusionOps = (Oid *) palloc(sizeof(Oid) * ncols);
*/
if (nextExclOp)
{
- List *opname = (List *) lfirst(nextExclOp);
- Oid opid;
- Oid opfamily;
- int strat;
+ List *opname = (List *) lfirst(nextExclOp);
+ Oid opid;
+ Oid opfamily;
+ int strat;
/*
* Find the operator --- it must accept the column datatype
strat = get_op_opfamily_strategy(opid, opfamily);
if (strat == 0)
{
- HeapTuple opftuple;
+ HeapTuple opftuple;
Form_pg_opfamily opfform;
/*
const char *name = (const char *) lfirst(lc);
if (buflen > 0)
- buf[buflen++] = '_'; /* insert _ between names */
+ buf[buflen++] = '_'; /* insert _ between names */
/*
* At this point we have buflen <= NAMEDATALEN. name should be less
/*
* Select the actual names to be used for the columns of an index, given the
- * list of IndexElems for the columns. This is mostly about ensuring the
+ * list of IndexElems for the columns. This is mostly about ensuring the
* names are unique so we don't get a conflicting-attribute-names error.
*
* Returns a List of plain strings (char *, not String nodes).
/* Get the preliminary name from the IndexElem */
if (ielem->indexcolname)
- origname = ielem->indexcolname; /* caller-specified name */
+ origname = ielem->indexcolname; /* caller-specified name */
else if (ielem->name)
- origname = ielem->name; /* simple column reference */
+ origname = ielem->name; /* simple column reference */
else
- origname = "expr"; /* default name for expression */
+ origname = "expr"; /* default name for expression */
/* If it conflicts with any previous column, tweak it */
curname = origname;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/lockcmds.c,v 1.28 2010/02/20 21:24:02 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/lockcmds.c,v 1.29 2010/02/26 02:00:39 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
reloid = RangeVarGetRelid(relation, false);
/*
- * During recovery we only accept these variations:
- * LOCK TABLE foo IN ACCESS SHARE MODE
- * LOCK TABLE foo IN ROW SHARE MODE
- * LOCK TABLE foo IN ROW EXCLUSIVE MODE
- * This test must match the restrictions defined in LockAcquire()
+ * During recovery we only accept these variations: LOCK TABLE foo IN
+ * ACCESS SHARE MODE LOCK TABLE foo IN ROW SHARE MODE LOCK TABLE foo
+ * IN ROW EXCLUSIVE MODE This test must match the restrictions defined
+ * in LockAcquire()
*/
if (lockstmt->mode > RowExclusiveLock)
PreventCommandDuringRecovery("LOCK TABLE");
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/proclang.c,v 1.90 2010/02/23 22:51:42 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/proclang.c,v 1.91 2010/02/26 02:00:39 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
}
/*
- * Likewise for the anonymous block handler, if required;
- * but we don't care about its return type.
+ * Likewise for the anonymous block handler, if required; but we don't
+ * care about its return type.
*/
if (pltemplate->tmplinline)
{
{
inlineOid = ProcedureCreate(pltemplate->tmplinline,
PG_CATALOG_NAMESPACE,
- false, /* replace */
- false, /* returnsSet */
+ false, /* replace */
+ false, /* returnsSet */
VOIDOID,
ClanguageId,
F_FMGR_C_VALIDATOR,
pltemplate->tmplinline,
pltemplate->tmpllibrary,
- false, /* isAgg */
- false, /* isWindowFunc */
- false, /* security_definer */
- true, /* isStrict */
+ false, /* isAgg */
+ false, /* isWindowFunc */
+ false, /* security_definer */
+ true, /* isStrict */
PROVOLATILE_VOLATILE,
buildoidvector(funcargtypes, 1),
PointerGetDatum(NULL),
false, /* isAgg */
false, /* isWindowFunc */
false, /* security_definer */
- true, /* isStrict */
+ true, /* isStrict */
PROVOLATILE_VOLATILE,
buildoidvector(funcargtypes, 1),
PointerGetDatum(NULL),
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c,v 1.56 2010/02/14 18:42:14 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/schemacmds.c,v 1.57 2010/02/26 02:00:39 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
*/
if (saved_uid != owner_uid)
SetUserIdAndSecContext(owner_uid,
- save_sec_context | SECURITY_LOCAL_USERID_CHANGE);
+ save_sec_context | SECURITY_LOCAL_USERID_CHANGE);
/* Create the schema's namespace */
namespaceId = NamespaceCreate(schemaName, owner_uid);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c,v 1.326 2010/02/14 18:42:14 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c,v 1.327 2010/02/26 02:00:39 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void ATAddForeignKeyConstraint(AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel,
Constraint *fkconstraint);
static void ATExecDropConstraint(Relation rel, const char *constrName,
- DropBehavior behavior,
- bool recurse, bool recursing,
- bool missing_ok);
+ DropBehavior behavior,
+ bool recurse, bool recursing,
+ bool missing_ok);
static void ATPrepAlterColumnType(List **wqueue,
AlteredTableInfo *tab, Relation rel,
bool recurse, bool recursing,
Relation rel = (Relation) lfirst(cell);
/*
- * Normally, we need a transaction-safe truncation here. However,
- * if the table was either created in the current (sub)transaction
- * or has a new relfilenode in the current (sub)transaction, then
- * we can just truncate it in-place, because a rollback would
- * cause the whole table or the current physical file to be
- * thrown away anyway.
+ * Normally, we need a transaction-safe truncation here. However, if
+ * the table was either created in the current (sub)transaction or has
+ * a new relfilenode in the current (sub)transaction, then we can just
+ * truncate it in-place, because a rollback would cause the whole
+ * table or the current physical file to be thrown away anyway.
*/
if (rel->rd_createSubid == mySubid ||
rel->rd_newRelfilenodeSubid == mySubid)
/*
* storage_name
- * returns the name corresponding to a typstorage/attstorage enum value
+ * returns the name corresponding to a typstorage/attstorage enum value
*/
static const char *
storage_name(char c)
int parentsWithOids = 0;
bool have_bogus_defaults = false;
int child_attno;
- static Node bogus_marker = { 0 }; /* marks conflicting defaults */
+ static Node bogus_marker = {0}; /* marks conflicting defaults */
/*
* Check for and reject tables with too many columns. We perform this
ListCell *prev = entry;
if (coldef->typeName == NULL)
+
/*
- * Typed table column option that does not belong to a
- * column from the type. This works because the columns
- * from the type come first in the list.
+ * Typed table column option that does not belong to a column from
+ * the type. This works because the columns from the type come
+ * first in the list.
*/
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_COLUMN),
while (rest != NULL)
{
ColumnDef *restdef = lfirst(rest);
- ListCell *next = lnext(rest); /* need to save it in case we delete it */
+ ListCell *next = lnext(rest); /* need to save it in case we
+ * delete it */
if (strcmp(coldef->colname, restdef->colname) == 0)
{
if (coldef->is_from_type)
{
- /* merge the column options into the column from
- * the type */
+ /*
+ * merge the column options into the column from the type
+ */
coldef->is_not_null = restdef->is_not_null;
coldef->raw_default = restdef->raw_default;
coldef->cooked_default = restdef->cooked_default;
else if (def->storage != attribute->attstorage)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH),
- errmsg("inherited column \"%s\" has a storage parameter conflict",
- attributeName),
- errdetail("%s versus %s",
- storage_name(def->storage),
- storage_name(attribute->attstorage))));
+ errmsg("inherited column \"%s\" has a storage parameter conflict",
+ attributeName),
+ errdetail("%s versus %s",
+ storage_name(def->storage),
+ storage_name(attribute->attstorage))));
def->inhcount++;
/* Merge of NOT NULL constraints = OR 'em together */
else if (newdef->storage != 0 && def->storage != newdef->storage)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH),
- errmsg("column \"%s\" has a storage parameter conflict",
- attributeName),
- errdetail("%s versus %s",
- storage_name(def->storage),
- storage_name(newdef->storage))));
+ errmsg("column \"%s\" has a storage parameter conflict",
+ attributeName),
+ errdetail("%s versus %s",
+ storage_name(def->storage),
+ storage_name(newdef->storage))));
/* Mark the column as locally defined */
def->is_local = true;
*/
if (recurse)
{
- List *child_oids, *child_numparents;
- ListCell *lo, *li;
+ List *child_oids,
+ *child_numparents;
+ ListCell *lo,
+ *li;
/*
* we need the number of parents for each child so that the recursive
oldattname)));
/*
- * if the attribute is inherited, forbid the renaming. if this is a
+ * if the attribute is inherited, forbid the renaming. if this is a
* top-level call to renameatt(), then expected_parents will be 0, so the
* effect of this code will be to prohibit the renaming if the attribute
* is inherited at all. if this is a recursive call to renameatt(),
* expected_parents will be the number of parents the current relation has
- * within the inheritance hierarchy being processed, so we'll prohibit
- * the renaming only if there are additional parents from elsewhere.
+ * within the inheritance hierarchy being processed, so we'll prohibit the
+ * renaming only if there are additional parents from elsewhere.
*/
if (attform->attinhcount > expected_parents)
ereport(ERROR,
OldHeap = heap_open(tab->relid, NoLock);
/*
- * We don't support rewriting of system catalogs; there are
- * too many corner cases and too little benefit. In particular
- * this is certainly not going to work for mapped catalogs.
+ * We don't support rewriting of system catalogs; there are too
+ * many corner cases and too little benefit. In particular this
+ * is certainly not going to work for mapped catalogs.
*/
if (IsSystemRelation(OldHeap))
ereport(ERROR,
newrel = NULL;
/*
- * Prepare a BulkInsertState and options for heap_insert. Because
- * we're building a new heap, we can skip WAL-logging and fsync it
- * to disk at the end instead (unless WAL-logging is required for
- * archiving or streaming replication). The FSM is empty too,
- * so don't bother using it.
+ * Prepare a BulkInsertState and options for heap_insert. Because we're
+ * building a new heap, we can skip WAL-logging and fsync it to disk at
+ * the end instead (unless WAL-logging is required for archiving or
+ * streaming replication). The FSM is empty too, so don't bother using it.
*/
if (newrel)
{
/* If we skipped writing WAL, then we need to sync the heap. */
if (hi_options & HEAP_INSERT_SKIP_WAL)
{
- char reason[NAMEDATALEN + 30];
+ char reason[NAMEDATALEN + 30];
+
snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason), "table rewrite on \"%s\"",
RelationGetRelationName(newrel));
XLogReportUnloggedStatement(reason);
/* Generate new proposed attoptions (text array) */
Assert(IsA(options, List));
datum = SysCacheGetAttr(ATTNAME, tuple, Anum_pg_attribute_attoptions,
- &isnull);
+ &isnull);
newOptions = transformRelOptions(isnull ? (Datum) 0 : datum,
(List *) options, NULL, NULL, false,
isReset);
* get the number of the attribute
*/
tuple = SearchSysCacheAttName(RelationGetRelid(rel), colName);
- if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tuple)){
- if (!missing_ok){
+ if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tuple))
+ {
+ if (!missing_ok)
+ {
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_COLUMN),
errmsg("column \"%s\" of relation \"%s\" does not exist",
break;
case CONSTR_FOREIGN:
+
/*
- * Note that we currently never recurse for FK constraints, so
- * the "recurse" flag is silently ignored.
+ * Note that we currently never recurse for FK constraints, so the
+ * "recurse" flag is silently ignored.
*
* Assign or validate constraint name
*/
else
newConstraint->conname =
ChooseConstraintName(RelationGetRelationName(rel),
- strVal(linitial(newConstraint->fk_attrs)),
+ strVal(linitial(newConstraint->fk_attrs)),
"fkey",
RelationGetNamespace(rel),
NIL);
if (indexStruct->indisprimary)
{
/*
- * Refuse to use a deferrable primary key. This is per SQL spec,
- * and there would be a lot of interesting semantic problems if
- * we tried to allow it.
+ * Refuse to use a deferrable primary key. This is per SQL spec,
+ * and there would be a lot of interesting semantic problems if we
+ * tried to allow it.
*/
if (!indexStruct->indimmediate)
ereport(ERROR,
}
/*
- * Refuse to use a deferrable unique/primary key. This is per
- * SQL spec, and there would be a lot of interesting semantic
- * problems if we tried to allow it.
+ * Refuse to use a deferrable unique/primary key. This is per SQL
+ * spec, and there would be a lot of interesting semantic problems
+ * if we tried to allow it.
*/
if (found && !indexStruct->indimmediate)
{
/*
- * Remember that we found an otherwise matching index, so
- * that we can generate a more appropriate error message.
+ * Remember that we found an otherwise matching index, so that
+ * we can generate a more appropriate error message.
*/
found_deferrable = true;
found = false;
systable_endscan(scan);
- if (!found){
- if (!missing_ok){
+ if (!found)
+ {
+ if (!missing_ok)
+ {
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
- errmsg("constraint \"%s\" of relation \"%s\" does not exist",
- constrName, RelationGetRelationName(rel))));
+ errmsg("constraint \"%s\" of relation \"%s\" does not exist",
+ constrName, RelationGetRelationName(rel))));
}
else
{
return;
}
}
+
/*
* Propagate to children as appropriate. Unlike most other ALTER
* routines, we have to do this one level of recursion at a time; we can't
heap_close(pg_class, RowExclusiveLock);
/*
- * Write an XLOG UNLOGGED record if WAL-logging was skipped because
- * WAL archiving is not enabled.
+ * Write an XLOG UNLOGGED record if WAL-logging was skipped because WAL
+ * archiving is not enabled.
*/
if (!XLogIsNeeded() && !rel->rd_istemp)
{
- char reason[NAMEDATALEN + 40];
+ char reason[NAMEDATALEN + 40];
+
snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason), "ALTER TABLE SET TABLESPACE on \"%s\"",
RelationGetRelationName(rel));
* enabled AND it's not a temp rel.
*
* Note: If you change the conditions here, update the conditions in
- * ATExecSetTableSpace() for when an XLOG UNLOGGED record is written
- * to match.
+ * ATExecSetTableSpace() for when an XLOG UNLOGGED record is written to
+ * match.
*/
use_wal = XLogIsNeeded() && !istemp;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c,v 1.73 2010/02/17 04:19:39 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c,v 1.74 2010/02/26 02:00:39 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void create_tablespace_directories(const char *location,
- const Oid tablespaceoid);
+ const Oid tablespaceoid);
static bool destroy_tablespace_directories(Oid tablespaceoid, bool redo);
/*
* Parent directories are missing during WAL replay, so
- * continue by creating simple parent directories
- * rather than a symlink.
+ * continue by creating simple parent directories rather
+ * than a symlink.
*/
/* create two parents up if not exist */
/*
* Check that location isn't too long. Remember that we're going to append
- * 'PG_XXX/<dboid>/<relid>.<nnn>'. FYI, we never actually reference the
+ * 'PG_XXX/<dboid>/<relid>.<nnn>'. FYI, we never actually reference the
* whole path, but mkdir() uses the first two parts.
*/
if (strlen(location) + 1 + strlen(TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY) + 1 +
static void
create_tablespace_directories(const char *location, const Oid tablespaceoid)
{
- char *linkloc = palloc(OIDCHARS + OIDCHARS + 1);
- char *location_with_version_dir = palloc(strlen(location) + 1 +
- strlen(TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY) + 1);
+ char *linkloc = palloc(OIDCHARS + OIDCHARS + 1);
+ char *location_with_version_dir = palloc(strlen(location) + 1 +
+ strlen(TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY) + 1);
sprintf(linkloc, "pg_tblspc/%u", tablespaceoid);
sprintf(location_with_version_dir, "%s/%s", location,
- TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY);
+ TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY);
/*
* Attempt to coerce target directory to safe permissions. If this fails,
location)));
else
ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not set permissions on directory \"%s\": %m",
- location)));
+ (errcode_for_file_access(),
+ errmsg("could not set permissions on directory \"%s\": %m",
+ location)));
}
/*
- * The creation of the version directory prevents more than one
- * tablespace in a single location.
+ * The creation of the version directory prevents more than one tablespace
+ * in a single location.
*/
if (mkdir(location_with_version_dir, S_IRWXU) < 0)
{
else
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not create directory \"%s\": %m",
- location_with_version_dir)));
+ errmsg("could not create directory \"%s\": %m",
+ location_with_version_dir)));
}
/*
struct stat st;
linkloc_with_version_dir = palloc(9 + 1 + OIDCHARS + 1 +
- strlen(TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY));
+ strlen(TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY));
sprintf(linkloc_with_version_dir, "pg_tblspc/%u/%s", tablespaceoid,
- TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY);
+ TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY);
/*
* Check if the tablespace still contains any files. We try to rmdir each
(errcode_for_file_access(),
errmsg("could not remove directory \"%s\": %m",
linkloc_with_version_dir)));
-
+
/*
- * Try to remove the symlink. We must however deal with the
- * possibility that it's a directory instead of a symlink --- this could
- * happen during WAL replay (see TablespaceCreateDbspace), and it is also
- * the case on Windows where junction points lstat() as directories.
+ * Try to remove the symlink. We must however deal with the possibility
+ * that it's a directory instead of a symlink --- this could happen during
+ * WAL replay (see TablespaceCreateDbspace), and it is also the case on
+ * Windows where junction points lstat() as directories.
*/
linkloc = pstrdup(linkloc_with_version_dir);
get_parent_directory(linkloc);
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
errmsg("tablespace \"%s\" does not exist",
- stmt->tablespacename)));
+ stmt->tablespacename)));
/* Must be owner of the existing object */
if (!pg_tablespace_ownercheck(HeapTupleGetOid(tup), GetUserId()))
xl_tblspc_drop_rec *xlrec = (xl_tblspc_drop_rec *) XLogRecGetData(record);
/*
- * If we issued a WAL record for a drop tablespace it is
- * because there were no files in it at all. That means that
- * no permanent objects can exist in it at this point.
+ * If we issued a WAL record for a drop tablespace it is because there
+ * were no files in it at all. That means that no permanent objects
+ * can exist in it at this point.
*
- * It is possible for standby users to be using this tablespace
- * as a location for their temporary files, so if we fail to
- * remove all files then do conflict processing and try again,
- * if currently enabled.
+ * It is possible for standby users to be using this tablespace as a
+ * location for their temporary files, so if we fail to remove all
+ * files then do conflict processing and try again, if currently
+ * enabled.
*/
if (!destroy_tablespace_directories(xlrec->ts_id, true))
{
ResolveRecoveryConflictWithTablespace(xlrec->ts_id);
/*
- * If we did recovery processing then hopefully the
- * backends who wrote temp files should have cleaned up and
- * exited by now. So lets recheck before we throw an error.
- * If !process_conflicts then this will just fail again.
+ * If we did recovery processing then hopefully the backends who
+ * wrote temp files should have cleaned up and exited by now. So
+ * lets recheck before we throw an error. If !process_conflicts
+ * then this will just fail again.
*/
if (!destroy_tablespace_directories(xlrec->ts_id, true))
ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE),
- errmsg("tablespace %u is not empty",
- xlrec->ts_id)));
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE),
+ errmsg("tablespace %u is not empty",
+ xlrec->ts_id)));
}
}
else
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/trigger.c,v 1.261 2010/02/14 18:42:14 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/trigger.c,v 1.262 2010/02/26 02:00:39 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
{
int16 tgtype;
int ncolumns;
- int2 *columns;
+ int2 *columns;
int2vector *tgattr;
Node *whenClause;
List *whenRtable;
*/
if (stmt->whenClause)
{
- ParseState *pstate;
+ ParseState *pstate;
RangeTblEntry *rte;
- List *varList;
- ListCell *lc;
+ List *varList;
+ ListCell *lc;
/* Set up a pstate to parse with */
pstate = make_parsestate(NULL);
if (pstate->p_hasSubLinks)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED),
- errmsg("cannot use subquery in trigger WHEN condition")));
+ errmsg("cannot use subquery in trigger WHEN condition")));
if (pstate->p_hasAggs)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_GROUPING_ERROR),
if (pstate->p_hasWindowFuncs)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_WINDOWING_ERROR),
- errmsg("cannot use window function in trigger WHEN condition")));
+ errmsg("cannot use window function in trigger WHEN condition")));
/*
* Check for disallowed references to OLD/NEW.
stmt->deferrable,
stmt->initdeferred,
RelationGetRelid(rel),
- NULL, /* no conkey */
+ NULL, /* no conkey */
0,
- InvalidOid, /* no domain */
- InvalidOid, /* no index */
- InvalidOid, /* no foreign key */
+ InvalidOid, /* no domain */
+ InvalidOid, /* no index */
+ InvalidOid, /* no foreign key */
NULL,
NULL,
NULL,
NULL,
NULL,
true, /* islocal */
- 0); /* inhcount */
+ 0); /* inhcount */
}
/*
trigoid = GetNewOid(tgrel);
/*
- * If trigger is internally generated, modify the provided trigger name
- * to ensure uniqueness by appending the trigger OID. (Callers will
- * usually supply a simple constant trigger name in these cases.)
+ * If trigger is internally generated, modify the provided trigger name to
+ * ensure uniqueness by appending the trigger OID. (Callers will usually
+ * supply a simple constant trigger name in these cases.)
*/
if (isInternal)
{
/*
* Scan pg_trigger for existing triggers on relation. We do this only to
* give a nice error message if there's already a trigger of the same
- * name. (The unique index on tgrelid/tgname would complain anyway.)
- * We can skip this for internally generated triggers, since the name
+ * name. (The unique index on tgrelid/tgname would complain anyway.) We
+ * can skip this for internally generated triggers, since the name
* modification above should be sufficient.
*
* NOTE that this is cool only because we have AccessExclusiveLock on the
if (namestrcmp(&(pg_trigger->tgname), trigname) == 0)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_DUPLICATE_OBJECT),
- errmsg("trigger \"%s\" for relation \"%s\" already exists",
- trigname, stmt->relation->relname)));
+ errmsg("trigger \"%s\" for relation \"%s\" already exists",
+ trigname, stmt->relation->relname)));
}
systable_endscan(tgscan);
}
columns = (int2 *) palloc(ncolumns * sizeof(int2));
foreach(cell, stmt->columns)
{
- char *name = strVal(lfirst(cell));
- int2 attnum;
- int j;
+ char *name = strVal(lfirst(cell));
+ int2 attnum;
+ int j;
- /* Lookup column name. System columns are not allowed */
+ /* Lookup column name. System columns are not allowed */
attnum = attnameAttNum(rel, name, false);
if (attnum == InvalidAttrNumber)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_COLUMN),
- errmsg("column \"%s\" of relation \"%s\" does not exist",
- name, RelationGetRelationName(rel))));
+ errmsg("column \"%s\" of relation \"%s\" does not exist",
+ name, RelationGetRelationName(rel))));
/* Check for duplicates */
for (j = i - 1; j >= 0; j--)
else
{
/*
- * User CREATE TRIGGER, so place dependencies. We make trigger be
+ * User CREATE TRIGGER, so place dependencies. We make trigger be
* auto-dropped if its relation is dropped or if the FK relation is
* dropped. (Auto drop is compatible with our pre-7.3 behavior.)
*/
}
/* Not possible to have an index dependency in this case */
Assert(!OidIsValid(indexOid));
+
/*
* If it's a user-specified constraint trigger, make the constraint
* internally dependent on the trigger instead of vice versa.
/* If column-specific trigger, add normal dependencies on columns */
if (columns != NULL)
{
- int i;
+ int i;
referenced.classId = RelationRelationId;
referenced.objectId = RelationGetRelid(rel);
}
/*
- * If it has a WHEN clause, add dependencies on objects mentioned in
- * the expression (eg, functions, as well as any columns used).
+ * If it has a WHEN clause, add dependencies on objects mentioned in the
+ * expression (eg, functions, as well as any columns used).
*/
if (whenClause != NULL)
recordDependencyOnExpr(&myself, whenClause, whenRtable,
* comparison; so we just compare corresponding slots of the two sets.
*
* Note: comparing the stringToNode forms of the WHEN clauses means that
- * parse column locations will affect the result. This is okay as long
- * as this function is only used for detecting exact equality, as for
- * example in checking for staleness of a cache entry.
+ * parse column locations will affect the result. This is okay as long as
+ * this function is only used for detecting exact equality, as for example
+ * in checking for staleness of a cache entry.
*/
if (trigdesc1 != NULL)
{
if (strcmp(trig1->tgargs[j], trig2->tgargs[j]) != 0)
return false;
if (trig1->tgqual == NULL && trig2->tgqual == NULL)
- /* ok */ ;
+ /* ok */ ;
else if (trig1->tgqual == NULL || trig2->tgqual == NULL)
return false;
else if (strcmp(trig1->tgqual, trig2->tgqual) != 0)
- return false;
+ return false;
}
}
else if (trigdesc2 != NULL)
int *tgindx;
int i;
TriggerData LocTriggerData;
- Bitmapset *modifiedCols;
+ Bitmapset *modifiedCols;
trigdesc = relinfo->ri_TrigDesc;
HeapTuple intuple = newtuple;
TupleTableSlot *newSlot;
int i;
- Bitmapset *modifiedCols;
+ Bitmapset *modifiedCols;
trigtuple = GetTupleForTrigger(estate, epqstate, relinfo, tupleid,
&newSlot);
/*
* EvalPlanQual already locked the tuple, but we
- * re-call heap_lock_tuple anyway as an easy way
- * of re-fetching the correct tuple. Speed is
- * hardly a criterion in this path anyhow.
+ * re-call heap_lock_tuple anyway as an easy way of
+ * re-fetching the correct tuple. Speed is hardly a
+ * criterion in this path anyhow.
*/
goto ltrmark;
}
Assert(estate != NULL);
/*
- * trigger is an element of relinfo->ri_TrigDesc->triggers[];
- * find the matching element of relinfo->ri_TrigWhenExprs[]
+ * trigger is an element of relinfo->ri_TrigDesc->triggers[]; find the
+ * matching element of relinfo->ri_TrigWhenExprs[]
*/
i = trigger - relinfo->ri_TrigDesc->triggers;
predicate = &relinfo->ri_TrigWhenExprs[i];
*/
if (*predicate == NIL)
{
- Node *tgqual;
+ Node *tgqual;
oldContext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(estate->es_query_cxt);
tgqual = stringToNode(trigger->tgqual);
* Handle SET CONSTRAINTS constraint-name [, ...]
*
* First, identify all the named constraints and make a list of their
- * OIDs. Since, unlike the SQL spec, we allow multiple constraints
- * of the same name within a schema, the specifications are not
- * necessarily unique. Our strategy is to target all matching
+ * OIDs. Since, unlike the SQL spec, we allow multiple constraints of
+ * the same name within a schema, the specifications are not
+ * necessarily unique. Our strategy is to target all matching
* constraints within the first search-path schema that has any
* matches, but disregard matches in schemas beyond the first match.
* (This is a bit odd but it's the historical behavior.)
Form_pg_trigger pg_trigger = (Form_pg_trigger) GETSTRUCT(htup);
/*
- * Silently skip triggers that are marked as non-deferrable
- * in pg_trigger. This is not an error condition, since
- * a deferrable RI constraint may have some non-deferrable
+ * Silently skip triggers that are marked as non-deferrable in
+ * pg_trigger. This is not an error condition, since a
+ * deferrable RI constraint may have some non-deferrable
* actions.
*/
if (pg_trigger->tgdeferrable)
* be fired for an event.
*
* NOTE: this is called whenever there are any triggers associated with
- * the event (even if they are disabled). This function decides which
+ * the event (even if they are disabled). This function decides which
* triggers actually need to be queued.
* ----------
*/
int *tgindx;
/*
- * Check state. We use normal tests not Asserts because it is possible
- * to reach here in the wrong state given misconfigured RI triggers,
- * in particular deferring a cascade action trigger.
+ * Check state. We use normal tests not Asserts because it is possible to
+ * reach here in the wrong state given misconfigured RI triggers, in
+ * particular deferring a cascade action trigger.
*/
if (afterTriggers == NULL)
elog(ERROR, "AfterTriggerSaveEvent() called outside of transaction");
}
/*
- * If the trigger is a deferred unique constraint check trigger,
- * only queue it if the unique constraint was potentially violated,
- * which we know from index insertion time.
+ * If the trigger is a deferred unique constraint check trigger, only
+ * queue it if the unique constraint was potentially violated, which
+ * we know from index insertion time.
*/
if (trigger->tgfoid == F_UNIQUE_KEY_RECHECK)
{
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c,v 1.147 2010/02/14 18:42:14 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/typecmds.c,v 1.148 2010/02/26 02:00:40 momjian Exp $
*
* DESCRIPTION
* The "DefineFoo" routines take the parse tree and pick out the
/* atts[] is of allocated length RelationGetNumberOfAttributes(rel) */
} RelToCheck;
-Oid binary_upgrade_next_pg_type_array_oid = InvalidOid;
+Oid binary_upgrade_next_pg_type_array_oid = InvalidOid;
static Oid findTypeInputFunction(List *procname, Oid typeOid);
static Oid findTypeOutputFunction(List *procname, Oid typeOid);
* now have TypeCreate do all the real work.
*/
typoid =
- /*
- * The pg_type.oid is stored in user tables as array elements
- * (base types) in ArrayType and in composite types in
- * DatumTupleFields. This oid must be preserved by binary
- * upgrades.
- */
+
+ /*
+ * The pg_type.oid is stored in user tables as array elements (base types)
+ * in ArrayType and in composite types in DatumTupleFields. This oid must
+ * be preserved by binary upgrades.
+ */
TypeCreate(InvalidOid, /* no predetermined type OID */
typeName, /* type name */
typeNamespace, /* namespace */
case CONSTR_EXCLUSION:
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("exclusion constraints not possible for domains")));
+ errmsg("exclusion constraints not possible for domains")));
break;
case CONSTR_FOREIGN:
Oid
AssignTypeArrayOid(void)
{
- Oid type_array_oid;
+ Oid type_array_oid;
/* Pre-assign the type's array OID for use in pg_type.typarray */
if (OidIsValid(binary_upgrade_next_pg_type_array_oid))
createStmt->tablespacename = NULL;
/*
- * Check for collision with an existing type name. If there is one
- * and it's an autogenerated array, we can rename it out of the
- * way. This check is here mainly to get a better error message
- * about a "type" instead of below about a "relation".
+ * Check for collision with an existing type name. If there is one and
+ * it's an autogenerated array, we can rename it out of the way. This
+ * check is here mainly to get a better error message about a "type"
+ * instead of below about a "relation".
*/
typeNamespace = RangeVarGetCreationNamespace(createStmt->relation);
old_type_oid =
case CONSTR_EXCLUSION:
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("exclusion constraints not possible for domains")));
+ errmsg("exclusion constraints not possible for domains")));
break;
case CONSTR_FOREIGN:
' ',
' ',
' ',
- NULL, /* not an exclusion constraint */
+ NULL, /* not an exclusion constraint */
expr, /* Tree form of check constraint */
ccbin, /* Binary form of check constraint */
ccsrc, /* Source form of check constraint */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/user.c,v 1.192 2010/02/14 18:42:14 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/user.c,v 1.193 2010/02/26 02:00:40 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
if (check_password_hook && password)
(*check_password_hook) (stmt->role,
password,
- isMD5(password) ? PASSWORD_TYPE_MD5 : PASSWORD_TYPE_PLAINTEXT,
+ isMD5(password) ? PASSWORD_TYPE_MD5 : PASSWORD_TYPE_PLAINTEXT,
validUntil_datum,
validUntil_null);
if (check_password_hook && password)
(*check_password_hook) (stmt->role,
password,
- isMD5(password) ? PASSWORD_TYPE_MD5 : PASSWORD_TYPE_PLAINTEXT,
+ isMD5(password) ? PASSWORD_TYPE_MD5 : PASSWORD_TYPE_PLAINTEXT,
validUntil_datum,
validUntil_null);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c,v 1.409 2010/02/15 16:10:34 alvherre Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/vacuum.c,v 1.410 2010/02/26 02:00:40 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* We cannot run VACUUM inside a user transaction block; if we were inside
* a transaction, then our commit- and start-transaction-command calls
- * would not have the intended effect! There are numerous other subtle
+ * would not have the intended effect! There are numerous other subtle
* dependencies on this, too.
*
* ANALYZE (without VACUUM) can run either way.
heap_close(relation, RowExclusiveLock);
/*
- * If we were able to advance datfrozenxid, see if we can truncate pg_clog.
- * Also do it if the shared XID-wrap-limit info is stale, since this
- * action will update that too.
+ * If we were able to advance datfrozenxid, see if we can truncate
+ * pg_clog. Also do it if the shared XID-wrap-limit info is stale, since
+ * this action will update that too.
*/
if (dirty || ForceTransactionIdLimitUpdate())
vac_truncate_clog(newFrozenXid);
/*
* Switch to the table owner's userid, so that any index functions are run
* as that user. Also lock down security-restricted operations and
- * arrange to make GUC variable changes local to this command.
- * (This is unnecessary, but harmless, for lazy VACUUM.)
+ * arrange to make GUC variable changes local to this command. (This is
+ * unnecessary, but harmless, for lazy VACUUM.)
*/
GetUserIdAndSecContext(&save_userid, &save_sec_context);
SetUserIdAndSecContext(onerel->rd_rel->relowner,
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c,v 1.131 2010/02/09 21:43:30 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c,v 1.132 2010/02/26 02:00:40 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
vacuum_log_cleanup_info(Relation rel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats)
{
/*
- * No need to log changes for temp tables, they do not contain
- * data visible on the standby server.
+ * No need to log changes for temp tables, they do not contain data
+ * visible on the standby server.
*/
if (rel->rd_istemp || !XLogIsNeeded())
return;
{
lazy_record_dead_tuple(vacrelstats, &(tuple.t_self));
HeapTupleHeaderAdvanceLatestRemovedXid(tuple.t_data,
- &vacrelstats->latestRemovedXid);
+ &vacrelstats->latestRemovedXid);
tups_vacuumed += 1;
}
else
RelationTruncate(onerel, new_rel_pages);
/*
- * We can release the exclusive lock as soon as we have truncated. Other
+ * We can release the exclusive lock as soon as we have truncated. Other
* backends can't safely access the relation until they have processed the
* smgr invalidation that smgrtruncate sent out ... but that should happen
* as part of standard invalidation processing once they acquire lock on
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execMain.c,v 1.347 2010/02/20 21:24:02 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execMain.c,v 1.348 2010/02/26 02:00:41 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void ExecCheckRTEPerms(RangeTblEntry *rte);
static void ExecCheckXactReadOnly(PlannedStmt *plannedstmt);
static void EvalPlanQualStart(EPQState *epqstate, EState *parentestate,
- Plan *planTree);
+ Plan *planTree);
static void OpenIntoRel(QueryDesc *queryDesc);
static void CloseIntoRel(QueryDesc *queryDesc);
static void intorel_startup(DestReceiver *self, int operation, TupleDesc typeinfo);
/*
* CREATE TABLE AS or SELECT INTO?
*
- * XXX should we allow this if the destination is temp? Considering
- * that it would still require catalog changes, probably not.
+ * XXX should we allow this if the destination is temp? Considering that
+ * it would still require catalog changes, probably not.
*/
if (plannedstmt->intoClause != NULL)
PreventCommandIfReadOnly(CreateCommandTag((Node *) plannedstmt));
/*
* initialize result relation stuff, and open/lock the result rels.
*
- * We must do this before initializing the plan tree, else we might
- * try to do a lock upgrade if a result rel is also a source rel.
+ * We must do this before initializing the plan tree, else we might try to
+ * do a lock upgrade if a result rel is also a source rel.
*/
if (plannedstmt->resultRelations)
{
/*
* Similarly, we have to lock relations selected FOR UPDATE/FOR SHARE
- * before we initialize the plan tree, else we'd be risking lock
- * upgrades. While we are at it, build the ExecRowMark list.
+ * before we initialize the plan tree, else we'd be risking lock upgrades.
+ * While we are at it, build the ExecRowMark list.
*/
estate->es_rowMarks = NIL;
foreach(l, plannedstmt->rowMarks)
tupType = ExecGetResultType(planstate);
/*
- * Initialize the junk filter if needed. SELECT queries need a
- * filter if there are any junk attrs in the top-level tlist.
+ * Initialize the junk filter if needed. SELECT queries need a filter if
+ * there are any junk attrs in the top-level tlist.
*/
if (operation == CMD_SELECT)
{
/*
* destroy the executor's tuple table. Actually we only care about
- * releasing buffer pins and tupdesc refcounts; there's no need to
- * pfree the TupleTableSlots, since the containing memory context
- * is about to go away anyway.
+ * releasing buffer pins and tupdesc refcounts; there's no need to pfree
+ * the TupleTableSlots, since the containing memory context is about to go
+ * away anyway.
*/
ExecResetTupleTable(estate->es_tupleTable, false);
slot = ExecFilterJunk(estate->es_junkFilter, slot);
/*
- * If we are supposed to send the tuple somewhere, do so.
- * (In practice, this is probably always the case at this point.)
+ * If we are supposed to send the tuple somewhere, do so. (In
+ * practice, this is probably always the case at this point.)
*/
if (sendTuples)
(*dest->receiveSlot) (slot, dest);
EvalPlanQualBegin(epqstate, estate);
/*
- * Free old test tuple, if any, and store new tuple where relation's
- * scan node will see it
+ * Free old test tuple, if any, and store new tuple where relation's scan
+ * node will see it
*/
EvalPlanQualSetTuple(epqstate, rti, copyTuple);
slot = EvalPlanQualNext(epqstate);
/*
- * If we got a tuple, force the slot to materialize the tuple so that
- * it is not dependent on any local state in the EPQ query (in particular,
+ * If we got a tuple, force the slot to materialize the tuple so that it
+ * is not dependent on any local state in the EPQ query (in particular,
* it's highly likely that the slot contains references to any pass-by-ref
- * datums that may be present in copyTuple). As with the next step,
- * this is to guard against early re-use of the EPQ query.
+ * datums that may be present in copyTuple). As with the next step, this
+ * is to guard against early re-use of the EPQ query.
*/
if (!TupIsNull(slot))
(void) ExecMaterializeSlot(slot);
/*
- * Clear out the test tuple. This is needed in case the EPQ query
- * is re-used to test a tuple for a different relation. (Not clear
- * that can really happen, but let's be safe.)
+ * Clear out the test tuple. This is needed in case the EPQ query is
+ * re-used to test a tuple for a different relation. (Not clear that can
+ * really happen, but let's be safe.)
*/
EvalPlanQualSetTuple(epqstate, rti, NULL);
Assert(rti > 0);
/*
- * free old test tuple, if any, and store new tuple where relation's
- * scan node will see it
+ * free old test tuple, if any, and store new tuple where relation's scan
+ * node will see it
*/
if (estate->es_epqTuple[rti - 1] != NULL)
heap_freetuple(estate->es_epqTuple[rti - 1]);
/*
* Fetch the current row values for any non-locked relations that need
- * to be scanned by an EvalPlanQual operation. origslot must have been set
+ * to be scanned by an EvalPlanQual operation. origslot must have been set
* to contain the current result row (top-level row) that we need to recheck.
*/
void
/* Recopy current values of parent parameters */
if (parentestate->es_plannedstmt->nParamExec > 0)
{
- int i = parentestate->es_plannedstmt->nParamExec;
+ int i = parentestate->es_plannedstmt->nParamExec;
while (--i >= 0)
{
estate->es_param_list_info = parentestate->es_param_list_info;
if (parentestate->es_plannedstmt->nParamExec > 0)
{
- int i = parentestate->es_plannedstmt->nParamExec;
+ int i = parentestate->es_plannedstmt->nParamExec;
estate->es_param_exec_vals = (ParamExecData *)
palloc0(i * sizeof(ParamExecData));
/*
* Each EState must have its own es_epqScanDone state, but if we have
- * nested EPQ checks they should share es_epqTuple arrays. This allows
+ * nested EPQ checks they should share es_epqTuple arrays. This allows
* sub-rechecks to inherit the values being examined by an outer recheck.
*/
estate->es_epqScanDone = (bool *) palloc0(rtsize * sizeof(bool));
/*
* Initialize private state information for each SubPlan. We must do this
* before running ExecInitNode on the main query tree, since
- * ExecInitSubPlan expects to be able to find these entries.
- * Some of the SubPlans might not be used in the part of the plan tree
- * we intend to run, but since it's not easy to tell which, we just
- * initialize them all.
+ * ExecInitSubPlan expects to be able to find these entries. Some of the
+ * SubPlans might not be used in the part of the plan tree we intend to
+ * run, but since it's not easy to tell which, we just initialize them
+ * all.
*/
Assert(estate->es_subplanstates == NIL);
foreach(l, parentestate->es_plannedstmt->subplans)
}
/*
- * Initialize the private state information for all the nodes in the
- * part of the plan tree we need to run. This opens files, allocates
- * storage and leaves us ready to start processing tuples.
+ * Initialize the private state information for all the nodes in the part
+ * of the plan tree we need to run. This opens files, allocates storage
+ * and leaves us ready to start processing tuples.
*/
epqstate->planstate = ExecInitNode(planTree, estate, 0);
Assert(into);
/*
- * XXX This code needs to be kept in sync with DefineRelation().
- * Maybe we should try to use that function instead.
+ * XXX This code needs to be kept in sync with DefineRelation(). Maybe we
+ * should try to use that function instead.
*/
/*
/* If we skipped using WAL, must heap_sync before commit */
if (myState->hi_options & HEAP_INSERT_SKIP_WAL)
{
- char reason[NAMEDATALEN + 30];
+ char reason[NAMEDATALEN + 30];
+
snprintf(reason, sizeof(reason), "SELECT INTO on \"%s\"",
RelationGetRelationName(myState->rel));
XLogReportUnloggedStatement(reason);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execQual.c,v 1.262 2010/02/18 18:41:47 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execQual.c,v 1.263 2010/02/26 02:00:41 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* We might have a nested-assignment situation, in which the
* refassgnexpr is itself a FieldStore or ArrayRef that needs to
* obtain and modify the previous value of the array element or slice
- * being replaced. If so, we have to extract that value from the
+ * being replaced. If so, we have to extract that value from the
* array and pass it down via the econtext's caseValue. It's safe to
* reuse the CASE mechanism because there cannot be a CASE between
* here and where the value would be needed, and an array assignment
astate->refelemlength,
astate->refelembyval,
astate->refelemalign,
- &econtext->caseValue_isNull);
+ &econtext->caseValue_isNull);
}
else
{
* We really only care about number of attributes and data type.
* Also, we can ignore type mismatch on columns that are dropped
* in the destination type, so long as (1) the physical storage
- * matches or (2) the actual column value is NULL. Case (1) is
+ * matches or (2) the actual column value is NULL. Case (1) is
* helpful in some cases involving out-of-date cached plans, while
* case (2) is expected behavior in situations such as an INSERT
* into a table with dropped columns (the planner typically
* holds, we have to use ExecEvalWholeRowSlow to check (2) for
* each row. Also, we have to allow the case that the slot has
* more columns than the Var's type, because we might be looking
- * at the output of a subplan that includes resjunk columns.
- * (XXX it would be nice to verify that the extra columns are all
+ * at the output of a subplan that includes resjunk columns. (XXX
+ * it would be nice to verify that the extra columns are all
* marked resjunk, but we haven't got access to the subplan
* targetlist here...) Resjunk columns should always be at the end
* of a targetlist, so it's sufficient to ignore them here; but we
slot_tupdesc->natts,
var_tupdesc->natts)));
else if (var_tupdesc->natts < slot_tupdesc->natts)
- needslow = true; /* need to trim trailing atts */
+ needslow = true; /* need to trim trailing atts */
for (i = 0; i < var_tupdesc->natts; i++)
{
if (vattr->attlen != sattr->attlen ||
vattr->attalign != sattr->attalign)
- needslow = true; /* need runtime check for null */
+ needslow = true; /* need runtime check for null */
}
ReleaseTupleDesc(var_tupdesc);
if (!vattr->attisdropped)
continue; /* already checked non-dropped cols */
- if (heap_attisnull(tuple, i+1))
+ if (heap_attisnull(tuple, i + 1))
continue; /* null is always okay */
if (vattr->attlen != sattr->attlen ||
vattr->attalign != sattr->attalign)
/* prepare map from old to new attribute numbers */
cstate->map = convert_tuples_by_name(cstate->indesc,
cstate->outdesc,
- gettext_noop("could not convert row type"));
+ gettext_noop("could not convert row type"));
cstate->initialized = true;
MemoryContextSwitchTo(old_cxt);
&fstate->argdesc, econtext);
/*
- * Find field's attr record. Note we don't support system columns here:
- * a datum tuple doesn't have valid values for most of the interesting
+ * Find field's attr record. Note we don't support system columns here: a
+ * datum tuple doesn't have valid values for most of the interesting
* system columns anyway.
*/
- if (fieldnum <= 0) /* should never happen */
+ if (fieldnum <= 0) /* should never happen */
elog(ERROR, "unsupported reference to system column %d in FieldSelect",
fieldnum);
if (fieldnum > tupDesc->natts) /* should never happen */
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execScan.c,v 1.48 2010/01/02 16:57:41 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execScan.c,v 1.49 2010/02/26 02:00:41 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* ExecScanFetch -- fetch next potential tuple
*
* This routine is concerned with substituting a test tuple if we are
- * inside an EvalPlanQual recheck. If we aren't, just execute
+ * inside an EvalPlanQual recheck. If we aren't, just execute
* the access method's next-tuple routine.
*/
static inline TupleTableSlot *
ResetExprContext(econtext);
/*
- * get a tuple from the access method. Loop until we obtain a tuple that
+ * get a tuple from the access method. Loop until we obtain a tuple that
* passes the qualification.
*/
for (;;)
* Routines dealing with TupleTableSlots. These are used for resource
* management associated with tuples (eg, releasing buffer pins for
* tuples in disk buffers, or freeing the memory occupied by transient
- * tuples). Slots also provide access abstraction that lets us implement
+ * tuples). Slots also provide access abstraction that lets us implement
* "virtual" tuples to reduce data-copying overhead.
*
* Routines dealing with the type information for tuples. Currently,
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execTuples.c,v 1.111 2010/01/02 16:57:41 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execTuples.c,v 1.112 2010/02/26 02:00:41 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
do_text_output_multiline(TupOutputState *tstate, char *text)
{
Datum values[1];
- bool isnull[1] = { false };
+ bool isnull[1] = {false};
while (*text)
{
if (eol)
{
len = eol - text;
+
eol++;
}
else
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c,v 1.170 2010/02/08 04:33:54 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c,v 1.171 2010/02/26 02:00:41 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* any previously computed pass-by-reference expression result will go away!
*
* If isCommit is false, we are being called in error cleanup, and should
- * not call callbacks but only release memory. (It might be better to call
+ * not call callbacks but only release memory. (It might be better to call
* the callbacks and pass the isCommit flag to them, but that would require
* more invasive code changes than currently seems justified.)
*
checkUnique = UNIQUE_CHECK_PARTIAL;
satisfiesConstraint =
- index_insert(indexRelation, /* index relation */
- values, /* array of index Datums */
- isnull, /* null flags */
+ index_insert(indexRelation, /* index relation */
+ values, /* array of index Datums */
+ isnull, /* null flags */
tupleid, /* tid of heap tuple */
heapRelation, /* heap relation */
checkUnique); /* type of uniqueness check to do */
/*
* If the index has an associated exclusion constraint, check that.
* This is simpler than the process for uniqueness checks since we
- * always insert first and then check. If the constraint is deferred,
+ * always insert first and then check. If the constraint is deferred,
* we check now anyway, but don't throw error on violation; instead
* we'll queue a recheck event.
*
*/
if (indexInfo->ii_ExclusionOps != NULL)
{
- bool errorOK = !indexRelation->rd_index->indimmediate;
+ bool errorOK = !indexRelation->rd_index->indimmediate;
satisfiesConstraint =
check_exclusion_constraint(heapRelation,
ItemPointer tupleid, Datum *values, bool *isnull,
EState *estate, bool newIndex, bool errorOK)
{
- Oid *constr_procs = indexInfo->ii_ExclusionProcs;
- uint16 *constr_strats = indexInfo->ii_ExclusionStrats;
- int index_natts = index->rd_index->indnatts;
- IndexScanDesc index_scan;
- HeapTuple tup;
- ScanKeyData scankeys[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
- SnapshotData DirtySnapshot;
- int i;
- bool conflict;
- bool found_self;
- ExprContext *econtext;
+ Oid *constr_procs = indexInfo->ii_ExclusionProcs;
+ uint16 *constr_strats = indexInfo->ii_ExclusionStrats;
+ int index_natts = index->rd_index->indnatts;
+ IndexScanDesc index_scan;
+ HeapTuple tup;
+ ScanKeyData scankeys[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
+ SnapshotData DirtySnapshot;
+ int i;
+ bool conflict;
+ bool found_self;
+ ExprContext *econtext;
TupleTableSlot *existing_slot;
TupleTableSlot *save_scantuple;
/*
- * If any of the input values are NULL, the constraint check is assumed
- * to pass (i.e., we assume the operators are strict).
+ * If any of the input values are NULL, the constraint check is assumed to
+ * pass (i.e., we assume the operators are strict).
*/
for (i = 0; i < index_natts; i++)
{
}
/*
- * Search the tuples that are in the index for any violations,
- * including tuples that aren't visible yet.
+ * Search the tuples that are in the index for any violations, including
+ * tuples that aren't visible yet.
*/
InitDirtySnapshot(DirtySnapshot);
econtext->ecxt_scantuple = existing_slot;
/*
- * May have to restart scan from this point if a potential
- * conflict is found.
+ * May have to restart scan from this point if a potential conflict is
+ * found.
*/
retry:
conflict = false;
while ((tup = index_getnext(index_scan,
ForwardScanDirection)) != NULL)
{
- TransactionId xwait;
+ TransactionId xwait;
Datum existing_values[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
bool existing_isnull[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
- char *error_new;
- char *error_existing;
+ char *error_new;
+ char *error_existing;
/*
* Ignore the entry for the tuple we're trying to check.
* Extract the index column values and isnull flags from the existing
* tuple.
*/
- ExecStoreTuple(tup, existing_slot, InvalidBuffer, false);
+ ExecStoreTuple(tup, existing_slot, InvalidBuffer, false);
FormIndexDatum(indexInfo, existing_slot, estate,
existing_values, existing_isnull);
existing_values,
existing_isnull,
values))
- continue; /* tuple doesn't actually match, so no conflict */
+ continue; /* tuple doesn't actually match, so no
+ * conflict */
}
/*
- * At this point we have either a conflict or a potential conflict.
- * If we're not supposed to raise error, just return the fact of the
+ * At this point we have either a conflict or a potential conflict. If
+ * we're not supposed to raise error, just return the fact of the
* potential conflict without waiting to see if it's real.
*/
if (errorOK)
/*
* If an in-progress transaction is affecting the visibility of this
- * tuple, we need to wait for it to complete and then recheck. For
+ * tuple, we need to wait for it to complete and then recheck. For
* simplicity we do rechecking by just restarting the whole scan ---
* this case probably doesn't happen often enough to be worth trying
* harder, and anyway we don't want to hold any index internal locks
index_endscan(index_scan);
/*
- * We should have found our tuple in the index, unless we exited the
- * loop early because of conflict. Complain if not.
+ * We should have found our tuple in the index, unless we exited the loop
+ * early because of conflict. Complain if not.
*/
if (!found_self && !conflict)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INTERNAL_ERROR),
errmsg("failed to re-find tuple within index \"%s\"",
RelationGetRelationName(index)),
- errhint("This may be because of a non-immutable index expression.")));
+ errhint("This may be because of a non-immutable index expression.")));
econtext->ecxt_scantuple = save_scantuple;
/*
* Check existing tuple's index values to see if it really matches the
- * exclusion condition against the new_values. Returns true if conflict.
+ * exclusion condition against the new_values. Returns true if conflict.
*/
static bool
index_recheck_constraint(Relation index, Oid *constr_procs,
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/functions.c,v 1.141 2010/02/14 18:42:14 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/functions.c,v 1.142 2010/02/26 02:00:41 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* For simplicity, we require callers to support both set eval modes.
* There are cases where we must use one or must use the other, and
- * it's not really worthwhile to postpone the check till we know.
- * But note we do not require caller to provide an expectedDesc.
+ * it's not really worthwhile to postpone the check till we know. But
+ * note we do not require caller to provide an expectedDesc.
*/
if (!rsi || !IsA(rsi, ReturnSetInfo) ||
(rsi->allowedModes & SFRM_ValuePerCall) == 0 ||
AssertArg(!IsPolymorphicType(rettype));
if (modifyTargetList)
- *modifyTargetList = false; /* initialize for no change */
+ *modifyTargetList = false; /* initialize for no change */
if (junkFilter)
*junkFilter = NULL; /* initialize in case of VOID result */
/*
* Verify that the targetlist matches the return tuple type. We scan
* the non-deleted attributes to ensure that they match the datatypes
- * of the non-resjunk columns. For deleted attributes, insert NULL
+ * of the non-resjunk columns. For deleted attributes, insert NULL
* result columns if the caller asked for that.
*/
tupnatts = tupdesc->natts;
attr = tupdesc->attrs[colindex - 1];
if (attr->attisdropped && modifyTargetList)
{
- Expr *null_expr;
+ Expr *null_expr;
/* The type of the null we insert isn't important */
null_expr = (Expr *) makeConst(INT4OID,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_FUNCTION_DEFINITION),
errmsg("return type mismatch in function declared to return %s",
format_type_be(rettype)),
- errdetail("Final statement returns too few columns.")));
+ errdetail("Final statement returns too few columns.")));
if (modifyTargetList)
{
- Expr *null_expr;
+ Expr *null_expr;
/* The type of the null we insert isn't important */
null_expr = (Expr *) makeConst(INT4OID,
-1,
sizeof(int32),
(Datum) 0,
- true, /* isnull */
+ true, /* isnull */
true /* byval */ );
newtlist = lappend(newtlist,
makeTargetEntry(null_expr,
* Copyright (c) 2001-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/instrument.c,v 1.24 2010/01/02 16:57:41 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/instrument.c,v 1.25 2010/02/26 02:00:41 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "executor/instrument.h"
-BufferUsage pgBufferUsage;
+BufferUsage pgBufferUsage;
static void BufferUsageAccumDiff(BufferUsage *dst,
- const BufferUsage *add, const BufferUsage *sub);
+ const BufferUsage *add, const BufferUsage *sub);
/* Allocate new instrumentation structure(s) */
Instrumentation *
instr = palloc0(n * sizeof(Instrumentation));
if (instrument_options & INSTRUMENT_BUFFERS)
{
- int i;
+ int i;
for (i = 0; i < n; i++)
instr[i].needs_bufusage = true;
/* Adds delta of buffer usage to node's count. */
if (instr->needs_bufusage)
BufferUsageAccumDiff(&instr->bufusage,
- &pgBufferUsage, &instr->bufusage_start);
+ &pgBufferUsage, &instr->bufusage_start);
/* Is this the first tuple of this cycle? */
if (!instr->running)
* it is completely forbidden for functions to modify pass-by-ref inputs,
* but in the aggregate case we know the left input is either the initial
* transition value or a previous function result, and in either case its
- * value need not be preserved. See int8inc() for an example. Notice that
+ * value need not be preserved. See int8inc() for an example. Notice that
* advance_transition_function() is coded to avoid a data copy step when
* the previous transition value pointer is returned. Also, some
* transition functions want to store working state in addition to the
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeAgg.c,v 1.174 2010/02/14 18:42:14 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeAgg.c,v 1.175 2010/02/26 02:00:41 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* number of sorting columns to consider in DISTINCT comparisons */
/* (this is either zero or the same as numSortCols) */
- int numDistinctCols;
+ int numDistinctCols;
/* deconstructed sorting information (arrays of length numSortCols) */
AttrNumber *sortColIdx;
- Oid *sortOperators;
- bool *sortNullsFirst;
+ Oid *sortOperators;
+ bool *sortNullsFirst;
/*
* fmgr lookup data for input columns' equality operators --- only
transtypeByVal;
/*
- * Stuff for evaluation of inputs. We used to just use ExecEvalExpr, but
+ * Stuff for evaluation of inputs. We used to just use ExecEvalExpr, but
* with the addition of ORDER BY we now need at least a slot for passing
* data to the sort object, which requires a tupledesc, so we might as
* well go whole hog and use ExecProject too.
*/
- TupleDesc evaldesc; /* descriptor of input tuples */
+ TupleDesc evaldesc; /* descriptor of input tuples */
ProjectionInfo *evalproj; /* projection machinery */
/*
* input tuple group and updated for each input tuple.
*
* For a simple (non DISTINCT/ORDER BY) aggregate, we just feed the input
- * values straight to the transition function. If it's DISTINCT or
+ * values straight to the transition function. If it's DISTINCT or
* requires ORDER BY, we pass the input values into a Tuplesort object;
* then at completion of the input tuple group, we scan the sorted values,
* eliminate duplicates if needed, and run the transition function on the
FunctionCallInfoData *fcinfo);
static void advance_aggregates(AggState *aggstate, AggStatePerGroup pergroup);
static void process_ordered_aggregate_single(AggState *aggstate,
- AggStatePerAgg peraggstate,
- AggStatePerGroup pergroupstate);
+ AggStatePerAgg peraggstate,
+ AggStatePerGroup pergroupstate);
static void process_ordered_aggregate_multi(AggState *aggstate,
- AggStatePerAgg peraggstate,
- AggStatePerGroup pergroupstate);
+ AggStatePerAgg peraggstate,
+ AggStatePerGroup pergroupstate);
static void finalize_aggregate(AggState *aggstate,
AggStatePerAgg peraggstate,
AggStatePerGroup pergroupstate,
tuplesort_end(peraggstate->sortstate);
/*
- * We use a plain Datum sorter when there's a single input
- * column; otherwise sort the full tuple. (See comments for
+ * We use a plain Datum sorter when there's a single input column;
+ * otherwise sort the full tuple. (See comments for
* process_ordered_aggregate_single.)
*/
peraggstate->sortstate =
Assert(slot->tts_nvalid == peraggstate->numInputs);
/*
- * If the transfn is strict, we want to check for nullity
- * before storing the row in the sorter, to save space if
- * there are a lot of nulls. Note that we must only check
- * numArguments columns, not numInputs, since nullity in
- * columns used only for sorting is not relevant here.
+ * If the transfn is strict, we want to check for nullity before
+ * storing the row in the sorter, to save space if there are a lot
+ * of nulls. Note that we must only check numArguments columns,
+ * not numInputs, since nullity in columns used only for sorting
+ * is not relevant here.
*/
if (peraggstate->transfn.fn_strict)
{
/*
* Run the transition function for a DISTINCT or ORDER BY aggregate
* with only one input. This is called after we have completed
- * entering all the input values into the sort object. We complete the
+ * entering all the input values into the sort object. We complete the
* sort, read out the values in sorted order, and run the transition
* function on each value (applying DISTINCT if appropriate).
*
AggStatePerGroup pergroupstate)
{
Datum oldVal = (Datum) 0;
- bool oldIsNull = true;
+ bool oldIsNull = true;
bool haveOldVal = false;
MemoryContext workcontext = aggstate->tmpcontext->ecxt_per_tuple_memory;
MemoryContext oldContext;
- bool isDistinct = (peraggstate->numDistinctCols > 0);
+ bool isDistinct = (peraggstate->numDistinctCols > 0);
Datum *newVal;
bool *isNull;
FunctionCallInfoData fcinfo;
/*
* Run the transition function for a DISTINCT or ORDER BY aggregate
* with more than one input. This is called after we have completed
- * entering all the input values into the sort object. We complete the
+ * entering all the input values into the sort object. We complete the
* sort, read out the values in sorted order, and run the transition
* function on each value (applying DISTINCT if appropriate).
*
FunctionCallInfoData fcinfo;
TupleTableSlot *slot1 = peraggstate->evalslot;
TupleTableSlot *slot2 = peraggstate->uniqslot;
- int numArguments = peraggstate->numArguments;
- int numDistinctCols = peraggstate->numDistinctCols;
- bool haveOldValue = false;
- int i;
+ int numArguments = peraggstate->numArguments;
+ int numDistinctCols = peraggstate->numDistinctCols;
+ bool haveOldValue = false;
+ int i;
tuplesort_performsort(peraggstate->sortstate);
}
/*
- * Exit if nothing left to do. (We must do the ps_TupFromTlist check
- * first, because in some cases agg_done gets set before we emit the
- * final aggregate tuple, and we have to finish running SRFs for it.)
+ * Exit if nothing left to do. (We must do the ps_TupFromTlist check
+ * first, because in some cases agg_done gets set before we emit the final
+ * aggregate tuple, and we have to finish running SRFs for it.)
*/
if (node->agg_done)
return NULL;
/*
* Clear the per-output-tuple context for each group, as well as
- * aggcontext (which contains any pass-by-ref transvalues of the
- * old group). We also clear any child contexts of the aggcontext;
- * some aggregate functions store working state in such contexts.
+ * aggcontext (which contains any pass-by-ref transvalues of the old
+ * group). We also clear any child contexts of the aggcontext; some
+ * aggregate functions store working state in such contexts.
*/
ResetExprContext(econtext);
* structures and transition values. NOTE: the details of what is stored
* in aggcontext and what is stored in the regular per-query memory
* context are driven by a simple decision: we want to reset the
- * aggcontext at group boundaries (if not hashing) and in ExecReScanAgg
- * to recover no-longer-wanted space.
+ * aggcontext at group boundaries (if not hashing) and in ExecReScanAgg to
+ * recover no-longer-wanted space.
*/
aggstate->aggcontext =
AllocSetContextCreate(CurrentMemoryContext,
int numInputs;
int numSortCols;
int numDistinctCols;
- List *sortlist;
+ List *sortlist;
HeapTuple aggTuple;
Form_pg_aggregate aggform;
Oid aggtranstype;
NULL);
/*
- * If we're doing either DISTINCT or ORDER BY, then we have a list
- * of SortGroupClause nodes; fish out the data in them and
- * stick them into arrays.
+ * If we're doing either DISTINCT or ORDER BY, then we have a list of
+ * SortGroupClause nodes; fish out the data in them and stick them
+ * into arrays.
*
* Note that by construction, if there is a DISTINCT clause then the
* ORDER BY clause is a prefix of it (see transformDistinctClause).
*
* The transition and/or final functions of an aggregate may want to verify
* that they are being called as aggregates, rather than as plain SQL
- * functions. They should use this function to do so. The return value
- * is nonzero if being called as an aggregate, or zero if not. (Specific
+ * functions. They should use this function to do so. The return value
+ * is nonzero if being called as an aggregate, or zero if not. (Specific
* nonzero values are AGG_CONTEXT_AGGREGATE or AGG_CONTEXT_WINDOW, but more
* values could conceivably appear in future.)
*
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeHash.c,v 1.128 2010/02/14 18:42:14 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeHash.c,v 1.129 2010/02/26 02:00:42 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* Set nbuckets to achieve an average bucket load of NTUP_PER_BUCKET when
* memory is filled. Set nbatch to the smallest power of 2 that appears
- * sufficient. The Min() steps limit the results so that the pointer
+ * sufficient. The Min() steps limit the results so that the pointer
* arrays we'll try to allocate do not exceed work_mem.
*/
max_pointers = (work_mem * 1024L) / sizeof(void *);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeIndexscan.c,v 1.138 2010/01/02 16:57:42 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeIndexscan.c,v 1.139 2010/02/26 02:00:42 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* necessary.
*
* It's also entirely possible that the result of the eval is a
- * toasted value. In this case we should forcibly detoast it,
- * to avoid repeat detoastings each time the value is examined
- * by an index support function.
+ * toasted value. In this case we should forcibly detoast it, to
+ * avoid repeat detoastings each time the value is examined by an
+ * index support function.
*/
scanvalue = ExecEvalExpr(key_expr,
econtext,
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeLockRows.c,v 1.3 2010/01/02 16:57:42 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeLockRows.c,v 1.4 2010/02/26 02:00:42 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
tuple.t_self = copyTuple->t_self;
/*
- * Need to run a recheck subquery. Initialize EPQ state
- * if we didn't do so already.
+ * Need to run a recheck subquery. Initialize EPQ state if we
+ * didn't do so already.
*/
if (!epq_started)
{
{
/*
* First, fetch a copy of any rows that were successfully locked
- * without any update having occurred. (We do this in a separate
- * pass so as to avoid overhead in the common case where there are
- * no concurrent updates.)
+ * without any update having occurred. (We do this in a separate pass
+ * so as to avoid overhead in the common case where there are no
+ * concurrent updates.)
*/
foreach(lc, node->lr_rowMarks)
{
heap_copytuple(&tuple));
ReleaseBuffer(buffer);
}
+
/*
- * Now fetch any non-locked source rows --- the EPQ logic knows
- * how to do that.
+ * Now fetch any non-locked source rows --- the EPQ logic knows how to
+ * do that.
*/
EvalPlanQualSetSlot(&node->lr_epqstate, slot);
EvalPlanQualFetchRowMarks(&node->lr_epqstate);
+
/*
* And finally we can re-evaluate the tuple.
*/
outerPlanState(lrstate) = ExecInitNode(outerPlan, estate, eflags);
/*
- * LockRows nodes do no projections, so initialize projection info for this
- * node appropriately
+ * LockRows nodes do no projections, so initialize projection info for
+ * this node appropriately
*/
ExecAssignResultTypeFromTL(&lrstate->ps);
lrstate->ps.ps_ProjInfo = NULL;
/*
- * Locate the ExecRowMark(s) that this node is responsible for.
- * (InitPlan should already have built the global list of ExecRowMarks.)
+ * Locate the ExecRowMark(s) that this node is responsible for. (InitPlan
+ * should already have built the global list of ExecRowMarks.)
*/
lrstate->lr_rowMarks = NIL;
foreach(lc, node->rowMarks)
rc->rti);
/*
- * Only locking rowmarks go into our own list. Non-locking marks
- * are passed off to the EvalPlanQual machinery. This is because
- * we don't want to bother fetching non-locked rows unless we
- * actually have to do an EPQ recheck.
+ * Only locking rowmarks go into our own list. Non-locking marks are
+ * passed off to the EvalPlanQual machinery. This is because we don't
+ * want to bother fetching non-locked rows unless we actually have to
+ * do an EPQ recheck.
*/
if (RowMarkRequiresRowShareLock(erm->markType))
lrstate->lr_rowMarks = lappend(lrstate->lr_rowMarks, erm);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c,v 1.100 2010/01/05 23:25:36 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c,v 1.101 2010/02/26 02:00:42 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
foreach(lc, qual)
{
- Const *con = (Const *) lfirst(lc);
+ Const *con = (Const *) lfirst(lc);
if (!con || !IsA(con, Const))
return false;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeModifyTable.c,v 1.6 2010/02/08 04:33:54 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeModifyTable.c,v 1.7 2010/02/26 02:00:42 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* INTERFACE ROUTINES
- * ExecInitModifyTable - initialize the ModifyTable node
+ * ExecInitModifyTable - initialize the ModifyTable node
* ExecModifyTable - retrieve the next tuple from the node
* ExecEndModifyTable - shut down the ModifyTable node
* ExecReScanModifyTable - rescan the ModifyTable node
*
* If the query specifies RETURNING, then the ModifyTable returns a
* RETURNING tuple after completing each row insert, update, or delete.
- * It must be called again to continue the operation. Without RETURNING,
+ * It must be called again to continue the operation. Without RETURNING,
* we just loop within the node until all the work is done, then
* return NULL. This avoids useless call/return overhead.
*/
* slot should not try to clear it.
*/
TupleTableSlot *newslot = estate->es_trig_tuple_slot;
- TupleDesc tupdesc = RelationGetDescr(resultRelationDesc);
+ TupleDesc tupdesc = RelationGetDescr(resultRelationDesc);
if (newslot->tts_tupleDescriptor != tupdesc)
ExecSetSlotDescriptor(newslot, tupdesc);
* slot should not try to clear it.
*/
TupleTableSlot *newslot = estate->es_trig_tuple_slot;
- TupleDesc tupdesc = RelationGetDescr(resultRelationDesc);
+ TupleDesc tupdesc = RelationGetDescr(resultRelationDesc);
if (newslot->tts_tupleDescriptor != tupdesc)
ExecSetSlotDescriptor(newslot, tupdesc);
TupleTableSlot *
ExecModifyTable(ModifyTableState *node)
{
- EState *estate = node->ps.state;
- CmdType operation = node->operation;
- PlanState *subplanstate;
+ EState *estate = node->ps.state;
+ CmdType operation = node->operation;
+ PlanState *subplanstate;
JunkFilter *junkfilter;
TupleTableSlot *slot;
TupleTableSlot *planSlot;
/*
* es_result_relation_info must point to the currently active result
- * relation. (Note we assume that ModifyTable nodes can't be nested.)
- * We want it to be NULL whenever we're not within ModifyTable, though.
+ * relation. (Note we assume that ModifyTable nodes can't be nested.) We
+ * want it to be NULL whenever we're not within ModifyTable, though.
*/
estate->es_result_relation_info =
estate->es_result_relations + node->mt_whichplan;
Assert(!(eflags & (EXEC_FLAG_BACKWARD | EXEC_FLAG_MARK)));
/*
- * This should NOT get called during EvalPlanQual; we should have passed
- * a subplan tree to EvalPlanQual, instead. Use a runtime test not just
+ * This should NOT get called during EvalPlanQual; we should have passed a
+ * subplan tree to EvalPlanQual, instead. Use a runtime test not just
* Assert because this condition is easy to miss in testing ...
*/
if (estate->es_epqTuple != NULL)
ExprContext *econtext;
/*
- * Initialize result tuple slot and assign its rowtype using the
- * first RETURNING list. We assume the rest will look the same.
+ * Initialize result tuple slot and assign its rowtype using the first
+ * RETURNING list. We assume the rest will look the same.
*/
tupDesc = ExecTypeFromTL((List *) linitial(node->returningLists),
false);
else
{
/*
- * We still must construct a dummy result tuple type, because
- * InitPlan expects one (maybe should change that?).
+ * We still must construct a dummy result tuple type, because InitPlan
+ * expects one (maybe should change that?).
*/
tupDesc = ExecTypeFromTL(NIL, false);
ExecInitResultTupleSlot(estate, &mtstate->ps);
}
/*
- * If we have any secondary relations in an UPDATE or DELETE, they need
- * to be treated like non-locked relations in SELECT FOR UPDATE, ie,
- * the EvalPlanQual mechanism needs to be told about them. Locate
- * the relevant ExecRowMarks.
+ * If we have any secondary relations in an UPDATE or DELETE, they need to
+ * be treated like non-locked relations in SELECT FOR UPDATE, ie, the
+ * EvalPlanQual mechanism needs to be told about them. Locate the
+ * relevant ExecRowMarks.
*/
foreach(l, node->rowMarks)
{
/*
* Initialize the junk filter(s) if needed. INSERT queries need a filter
- * if there are any junk attrs in the tlist. UPDATE and DELETE
- * always need a filter, since there's always a junk 'ctid' attribute
- * present --- no need to look first.
+ * if there are any junk attrs in the tlist. UPDATE and DELETE always
+ * need a filter, since there's always a junk 'ctid' attribute present ---
+ * no need to look first.
*
* If there are multiple result relations, each one needs its own junk
- * filter. Note multiple rels are only possible for UPDATE/DELETE, so we
+ * filter. Note multiple rels are only possible for UPDATE/DELETE, so we
* can't be fooled by some needing a filter and some not.
*
* This section of code is also a convenient place to verify that the
}
/*
- * Set up a tuple table slot for use for trigger output tuples.
- * In a plan containing multiple ModifyTable nodes, all can share
- * one such slot, so we keep it in the estate.
+ * Set up a tuple table slot for use for trigger output tuples. In a plan
+ * containing multiple ModifyTable nodes, all can share one such slot, so
+ * we keep it in the estate.
*/
if (estate->es_trig_tuple_slot == NULL)
estate->es_trig_tuple_slot = ExecInitExtraTupleSlot(estate);
void
ExecEndModifyTable(ModifyTableState *node)
{
- int i;
+ int i;
/*
* Free the exprcontext
/*
* shut down subplans
*/
- for (i=0; i<node->mt_nplans; i++)
+ for (i = 0; i < node->mt_nplans; i++)
ExecEndNode(node->mt_plans[i]);
}
ExecReScanModifyTable(ModifyTableState *node, ExprContext *exprCtxt)
{
/*
- * Currently, we don't need to support rescan on ModifyTable nodes.
- * The semantics of that would be a bit debatable anyway.
+ * Currently, we don't need to support rescan on ModifyTable nodes. The
+ * semantics of that would be a bit debatable anyway.
*/
elog(ERROR, "ExecReScanModifyTable is not implemented");
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeSeqscan.c,v 1.69 2010/01/02 16:57:45 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeSeqscan.c,v 1.70 2010/02/26 02:00:42 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
SeqRecheck(SeqScanState *node, TupleTableSlot *slot)
{
/*
- * Note that unlike IndexScan, SeqScan never use keys in
- * heap_beginscan (and this is very bad) - so, here we do not check
- * are keys ok or not.
+ * Note that unlike IndexScan, SeqScan never use keys in heap_beginscan
+ * (and this is very bad) - so, here we do not check are keys ok or not.
*/
return true;
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeSubqueryscan.c,v 1.44 2010/01/02 16:57:45 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeSubqueryscan.c,v 1.45 2010/02/26 02:00:42 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
slot = ExecProcNode(node->subplan);
/*
- * We just return the subplan's result slot, rather than expending
- * extra cycles for ExecCopySlot(). (Our own ScanTupleSlot is used
- * only for EvalPlanQual rechecks.)
+ * We just return the subplan's result slot, rather than expending extra
+ * cycles for ExecCopySlot(). (Our own ScanTupleSlot is used only for
+ * EvalPlanQual rechecks.)
*/
return slot;
}
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeWindowAgg.c,v 1.11 2010/02/14 18:42:14 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeWindowAgg.c,v 1.12 2010/02/26 02:00:42 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* need the current aggregate value. This is considerably more efficient
* than the naive approach of re-running the entire aggregate calculation
* for each current row. It does assume that the final function doesn't
- * damage the running transition value, but we have the same assumption
- * in nodeAgg.c too (when it rescans an existing hash table).
+ * damage the running transition value, but we have the same assumption in
+ * nodeAgg.c too (when it rescans an existing hash table).
*
* For other frame start rules, we discard the aggregate state and re-run
* the aggregates whenever the frame head row moves. We can still
* accumulated into the aggregate transition values. Whenever we start a
* new peer group, we accumulate forward to the end of the peer group.
*
- * TODO: Rerunning aggregates from the frame start can be pretty slow.
- * For some aggregates like SUM and COUNT we could avoid that by
- * implementing a "negative transition function" that would be called for
- * each row as it exits the frame. We'd have to think about avoiding
- * recalculation of volatile arguments of aggregate functions, too.
+ * TODO: Rerunning aggregates from the frame start can be pretty slow. For
+ * some aggregates like SUM and COUNT we could avoid that by implementing
+ * a "negative transition function" that would be called for each row as
+ * it exits the frame. We'd have to think about avoiding recalculation of
+ * volatile arguments of aggregate functions, too.
*/
/*
update_frameheadpos(agg_winobj, winstate->temp_slot_1);
/*
- * Initialize aggregates on first call for partition, or if the frame
- * head position moved since last time.
+ * Initialize aggregates on first call for partition, or if the frame head
+ * position moved since last time.
*/
if (winstate->currentpos == 0 ||
winstate->frameheadpos != winstate->aggregatedbase)
}
/*
- * If we created a mark pointer for aggregates, keep it pushed up
- * to frame head, so that tuplestore can discard unnecessary rows.
+ * If we created a mark pointer for aggregates, keep it pushed up to
+ * frame head, so that tuplestore can discard unnecessary rows.
*/
if (agg_winobj->markptr >= 0)
WinSetMarkPosition(agg_winobj, winstate->frameheadpos);
/*
* In UNBOUNDED_FOLLOWING mode, we don't have to recalculate aggregates
* except when the frame head moves. In END_CURRENT_ROW mode, we only
- * have to recalculate when the frame head moves or currentpos has advanced
- * past the place we'd aggregated up to. Check for these cases and if
- * so, reuse the saved result values.
+ * have to recalculate when the frame head moves or currentpos has
+ * advanced past the place we'd aggregated up to. Check for these cases
+ * and if so, reuse the saved result values.
*/
if ((winstate->frameOptions & (FRAMEOPTION_END_UNBOUNDED_FOLLOWING |
FRAMEOPTION_END_CURRENT_ROW)) &&
* Advance until we reach a row not in frame (or end of partition).
*
* Note the loop invariant: agg_row_slot is either empty or holds the row
- * at position aggregatedupto. We advance aggregatedupto after processing
+ * at position aggregatedupto. We advance aggregatedupto after processing
* a row.
*/
for (;;)
{
if (frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_ROWS)
{
- int64 offset = DatumGetInt64(winstate->startOffsetValue);
+ int64 offset = DatumGetInt64(winstate->startOffsetValue);
/* rows before current row + offset are out of frame */
if (frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_START_VALUE_PRECEDING)
{
if (frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_ROWS)
{
- int64 offset = DatumGetInt64(winstate->endOffsetValue);
+ int64 offset = DatumGetInt64(winstate->endOffsetValue);
/* rows after current row + offset are out of frame */
if (frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_END_VALUE_PRECEDING)
*
* Uses the winobj's read pointer for any required fetches; hence, if the
* frame mode is one that requires row comparisons, the winobj's mark must
- * not be past the currently known frame head. Also uses the specified slot
+ * not be past the currently known frame head. Also uses the specified slot
* for any required fetches.
*/
static void
/*
* In RANGE START_CURRENT mode, frame head is the first row that
* is a peer of current row. We search backwards from current,
- * which could be a bit inefficient if peer sets are large.
- * Might be better to have a separate read pointer that moves
- * forward tracking the frame head.
+ * which could be a bit inefficient if peer sets are large. Might
+ * be better to have a separate read pointer that moves forward
+ * tracking the frame head.
*/
fhprev = winstate->currentpos - 1;
for (;;)
if (fhprev < winstate->frameheadpos)
break;
if (!window_gettupleslot(winobj, fhprev, slot))
- break; /* start of partition */
+ break; /* start of partition */
if (!are_peers(winstate, slot, winstate->ss.ss_ScanTupleSlot))
- break; /* not peer of current row */
+ break; /* not peer of current row */
fhprev--;
}
winstate->frameheadpos = fhprev + 1;
if (frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_ROWS)
{
/* In ROWS mode, bound is physically n before/after current */
- int64 offset = DatumGetInt64(winstate->startOffsetValue);
+ int64 offset = DatumGetInt64(winstate->startOffsetValue);
if (frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_START_VALUE_PRECEDING)
offset = -offset;
*
* Uses the winobj's read pointer for any required fetches; hence, if the
* frame mode is one that requires row comparisons, the winobj's mark must
- * not be past the currently known frame tail. Also uses the specified slot
+ * not be past the currently known frame tail. Also uses the specified slot
* for any required fetches.
*/
static void
for (;;)
{
if (!window_gettupleslot(winobj, ftnext, slot))
- break; /* end of partition */
+ break; /* end of partition */
if (!are_peers(winstate, slot, winstate->ss.ss_ScanTupleSlot))
- break; /* not peer of current row */
+ break; /* not peer of current row */
ftnext++;
}
winstate->frametailpos = ftnext - 1;
if (frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_ROWS)
{
/* In ROWS mode, bound is physically n before/after current */
- int64 offset = DatumGetInt64(winstate->endOffsetValue);
+ int64 offset = DatumGetInt64(winstate->endOffsetValue);
if (frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_END_VALUE_PRECEDING)
offset = -offset;
*/
if (winstate->all_first)
{
- int frameOptions = winstate->frameOptions;
- ExprContext *econtext = winstate->ss.ps.ps_ExprContext;
- Datum value;
- bool isnull;
- int16 len;
- bool byval;
+ int frameOptions = winstate->frameOptions;
+ ExprContext *econtext = winstate->ss.ps.ps_ExprContext;
+ Datum value;
+ bool isnull;
+ int16 len;
+ bool byval;
if (frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_START_VALUE)
{
if (frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_ROWS)
{
/* value is known to be int8 */
- int64 offset = DatumGetInt64(value);
+ int64 offset = DatumGetInt64(value);
if (offset < 0)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
- errmsg("frame starting offset must not be negative")));
+ errmsg("frame starting offset must not be negative")));
}
}
if (frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_END_VALUE)
if (frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_ROWS)
{
/* value is known to be int8 */
- int64 offset = DatumGetInt64(value);
+ int64 offset = DatumGetInt64(value);
if (offset < 0)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
- errmsg("frame ending offset must not be negative")));
+ errmsg("frame ending offset must not be negative")));
}
}
winstate->all_first = false;
*isout = false;
if (set_mark)
{
- int frameOptions = winstate->frameOptions;
- int64 mark_pos = abs_pos;
+ int frameOptions = winstate->frameOptions;
+ int64 mark_pos = abs_pos;
/*
* In RANGE mode with a moving frame head, we must not let the
* fetchable during future update_frameheadpos calls.
*
* XXX it is very ugly to pollute window functions' marks with
- * this consideration; it could for instance mask a logic bug
- * that lets a window function fetch rows before what it had
- * claimed was its mark. Perhaps use a separate mark for
- * frame head probes?
+ * this consideration; it could for instance mask a logic bug that
+ * lets a window function fetch rows before what it had claimed
+ * was its mark. Perhaps use a separate mark for frame head
+ * probes?
*/
if ((frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_RANGE) &&
!(frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_START_UNBOUNDED_PRECEDING))
*isout = false;
if (set_mark)
{
- int frameOptions = winstate->frameOptions;
- int64 mark_pos = abs_pos;
+ int frameOptions = winstate->frameOptions;
+ int64 mark_pos = abs_pos;
/*
* In RANGE mode with a moving frame head, we must not let the
* fetchable during future update_frameheadpos calls.
*
* XXX it is very ugly to pollute window functions' marks with
- * this consideration; it could for instance mask a logic bug
- * that lets a window function fetch rows before what it had
- * claimed was its mark. Perhaps use a separate mark for
- * frame head probes?
+ * this consideration; it could for instance mask a logic bug that
+ * lets a window function fetch rows before what it had claimed
+ * was its mark. Perhaps use a separate mark for frame head
+ * probes?
*/
if ((frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_RANGE) &&
!(frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_START_UNBOUNDED_PRECEDING))
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/spi.c,v 1.214 2010/02/14 18:42:14 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/spi.c,v 1.215 2010/02/26 02:00:42 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
}
/*
- * If the plan has parameters, copy them into the portal. Note that
- * this must be done after revalidating the plan, because in dynamic
- * parameter cases the set of parameters could have changed during
- * re-parsing.
+ * If the plan has parameters, copy them into the portal. Note that this
+ * must be done after revalidating the plan, because in dynamic parameter
+ * cases the set of parameters could have changed during re-parsing.
*/
if (paramLI)
{
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/auth.c,v 1.194 2010/02/02 19:09:36 mha Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/auth.c,v 1.195 2010/02/26 02:00:42 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
errhint("See server log for details.")));
/*
- * Enable immediate response to SIGTERM/SIGINT/timeout interrupts.
- * (We don't want this during hba_getauthmethod() because it might
- * have to do database access, eg for role membership checks.)
+ * Enable immediate response to SIGTERM/SIGINT/timeout interrupts. (We
+ * don't want this during hba_getauthmethod() because it might have to do
+ * database access, eg for role membership checks.)
*/
ImmediateInterruptOK = true;
/* And don't forget to detect one that already arrived */
if (strlen(passwd) == 0)
{
ereport(LOG,
- (errmsg("empty password returned by client")));
+ (errmsg("empty password returned by client")));
goto fail;
}
}
if (port->hba->ldapbasedn)
{
/*
- * First perform an LDAP search to find the DN for the user we are trying to log
- * in as.
+ * First perform an LDAP search to find the DN for the user we are
+ * trying to log in as.
*/
- char *filter;
- LDAPMessage *search_message;
- LDAPMessage *entry;
- char *attributes[2];
- char *dn;
- char *c;
+ char *filter;
+ LDAPMessage *search_message;
+ LDAPMessage *entry;
+ char *attributes[2];
+ char *dn;
+ char *c;
/*
- * Disallow any characters that we would otherwise need to escape, since they
- * aren't really reasonable in a username anyway. Allowing them would make it
- * possible to inject any kind of custom filters in the LDAP filter.
+ * Disallow any characters that we would otherwise need to escape,
+ * since they aren't really reasonable in a username anyway. Allowing
+ * them would make it possible to inject any kind of custom filters in
+ * the LDAP filter.
*/
for (c = port->user_name; *c; c++)
{
}
/*
- * Bind with a pre-defined username/password (if available) for searching. If
- * none is specified, this turns into an anonymous bind.
+ * Bind with a pre-defined username/password (if available) for
+ * searching. If none is specified, this turns into an anonymous bind.
*/
r = ldap_simple_bind_s(ldap,
- port->hba->ldapbinddn ? port->hba->ldapbinddn : "",
- port->hba->ldapbindpasswd ? port->hba->ldapbindpasswd : "");
+ port->hba->ldapbinddn ? port->hba->ldapbinddn : "",
+ port->hba->ldapbindpasswd ? port->hba->ldapbindpasswd : "");
if (r != LDAP_SUCCESS)
{
ereport(LOG,
(errmsg("could not perform initial LDAP bind for ldapbinddn \"%s\" on server \"%s\": error code %d",
- port->hba->ldapbinddn, port->hba->ldapserver, r)));
+ port->hba->ldapbinddn, port->hba->ldapserver, r)));
return STATUS_ERROR;
}
attributes[0] = port->hba->ldapsearchattribute ? port->hba->ldapsearchattribute : "uid";
attributes[1] = NULL;
- filter = palloc(strlen(attributes[0])+strlen(port->user_name)+4);
+ filter = palloc(strlen(attributes[0]) + strlen(port->user_name) + 4);
sprintf(filter, "(%s=%s)",
- attributes[0],
- port->user_name);
+ attributes[0],
+ port->user_name);
r = ldap_search_s(ldap,
port->hba->ldapbasedn,
ereport(LOG,
(errmsg("LDAP search failed for filter \"%s\" on server \"%s\": user is not unique (%ld matches)",
filter, port->hba->ldapserver,
- (long) ldap_count_entries(ldap, search_message))));
+ (long) ldap_count_entries(ldap, search_message))));
pfree(filter);
ldap_msgfree(search_message);
dn = ldap_get_dn(ldap, entry);
if (dn == NULL)
{
- int error;
- (void)ldap_get_option(ldap, LDAP_OPT_ERROR_NUMBER, &error);
+ int error;
+
+ (void) ldap_get_option(ldap, LDAP_OPT_ERROR_NUMBER, &error);
ereport(LOG,
(errmsg("could not get dn for the first entry matching \"%s\" on server \"%s\": %s",
- filter, port->hba->ldapserver, ldap_err2string(error))));
+ filter, port->hba->ldapserver, ldap_err2string(error))));
pfree(filter);
ldap_msgfree(search_message);
return STATUS_ERROR;
r = ldap_unbind_s(ldap);
if (r != LDAP_SUCCESS)
{
- int error;
- (void)ldap_get_option(ldap, LDAP_OPT_ERROR_NUMBER, &error);
+ int error;
+
+ (void) ldap_get_option(ldap, LDAP_OPT_ERROR_NUMBER, &error);
ereport(LOG,
(errmsg("could not unbind after searching for user \"%s\" on server \"%s\": %s",
- fulluser, port->hba->ldapserver, ldap_err2string(error))));
+ fulluser, port->hba->ldapserver, ldap_err2string(error))));
pfree(fulluser);
return STATUS_ERROR;
}
/*
- * Need to re-initialize the LDAP connection, so that we can bind
- * to it with a different username.
+ * Need to re-initialize the LDAP connection, so that we can bind to
+ * it with a different username.
*/
if (InitializeLDAPConnection(port, &ldap) == STATUS_ERROR)
{
{
fulluser = palloc((port->hba->ldapprefix ? strlen(port->hba->ldapprefix) : 0) +
strlen(port->user_name) +
- (port->hba->ldapsuffix ? strlen(port->hba->ldapsuffix) : 0) +
+ (port->hba->ldapsuffix ? strlen(port->hba->ldapsuffix) : 0) +
1);
sprintf(fulluser, "%s%s%s",
- port->hba->ldapprefix ? port->hba->ldapprefix : "",
- port->user_name,
- port->hba->ldapsuffix ? port->hba->ldapsuffix : "");
+ port->hba->ldapprefix ? port->hba->ldapprefix : "",
+ port->user_name,
+ port->hba->ldapsuffix ? port->hba->ldapsuffix : "");
}
r = ldap_simple_bind_s(ldap, fulluser, passwd);
/* Just pass the certificate CN to the usermap check */
return check_usermap(port->hba->usermap, port->user_name, port->peer_cn, false);
}
-
#endif
typedef struct
{
- uint8 attribute;
- uint8 length;
- uint8 data[1];
+ uint8 attribute;
+ uint8 length;
+ uint8 data[1];
} radius_attribute;
typedef struct
{
- uint8 code;
- uint8 id;
- uint16 length;
- uint8 vector[RADIUS_VECTOR_LENGTH];
+ uint8 code;
+ uint8 id;
+ uint16 length;
+ uint8 vector[RADIUS_VECTOR_LENGTH];
} radius_packet;
/* RADIUS packet types */
static void
radius_add_attribute(radius_packet *packet, uint8 type, const unsigned char *data, int len)
{
- radius_attribute *attr;
+ radius_attribute *attr;
if (packet->length + len > RADIUS_BUFFER_SIZE)
{
/*
- * With remotely realistic data, this can never happen. But catch it just to make
- * sure we don't overrun a buffer. We'll just skip adding the broken attribute,
- * which will in the end cause authentication to fail.
+ * With remotely realistic data, this can never happen. But catch it
+ * just to make sure we don't overrun a buffer. We'll just skip adding
+ * the broken attribute, which will in the end cause authentication to
+ * fail.
*/
elog(WARNING,
"Adding attribute code %i with length %i to radius packet would create oversize packet, ignoring",
}
- attr = (radius_attribute *) ((unsigned char *)packet + packet->length);
+ attr = (radius_attribute *) ((unsigned char *) packet + packet->length);
attr->attribute = type;
- attr->length = len + 2; /* total size includes type and length */
+ attr->length = len + 2; /* total size includes type and length */
memcpy(attr->data, data, len);
packet->length += attr->length;
}
static int
CheckRADIUSAuth(Port *port)
{
- char *passwd;
- char *identifier = "postgresql";
- char radius_buffer[RADIUS_BUFFER_SIZE];
- char receive_buffer[RADIUS_BUFFER_SIZE];
- radius_packet *packet = (radius_packet *)radius_buffer;
- radius_packet *receivepacket = (radius_packet *)receive_buffer;
- int32 service = htonl(RADIUS_AUTHENTICATE_ONLY);
- uint8 *cryptvector;
- uint8 encryptedpassword[RADIUS_VECTOR_LENGTH];
- int packetlength;
- pgsocket sock;
+ char *passwd;
+ char *identifier = "postgresql";
+ char radius_buffer[RADIUS_BUFFER_SIZE];
+ char receive_buffer[RADIUS_BUFFER_SIZE];
+ radius_packet *packet = (radius_packet *) radius_buffer;
+ radius_packet *receivepacket = (radius_packet *) receive_buffer;
+ int32 service = htonl(RADIUS_AUTHENTICATE_ONLY);
+ uint8 *cryptvector;
+ uint8 encryptedpassword[RADIUS_VECTOR_LENGTH];
+ int packetlength;
+ pgsocket sock;
+
#ifdef HAVE_IPV6
struct sockaddr_in6 localaddr;
struct sockaddr_in6 remoteaddr;
#else
- struct sockaddr_in localaddr;
- struct sockaddr_in remoteaddr;
+ struct sockaddr_in localaddr;
+ struct sockaddr_in remoteaddr;
#endif
- struct addrinfo hint;
- struct addrinfo *serveraddrs;
- char portstr[128];
- ACCEPT_TYPE_ARG3 addrsize;
- fd_set fdset;
- struct timeval timeout;
- int i,r;
+ struct addrinfo hint;
+ struct addrinfo *serveraddrs;
+ char portstr[128];
+ ACCEPT_TYPE_ARG3 addrsize;
+ fd_set fdset;
+ struct timeval timeout;
+ int i,
+ r;
/* Make sure struct alignment is correct */
Assert(offsetof(radius_packet, vector) == 4);
radius_add_attribute(packet, RADIUS_NAS_IDENTIFIER, (unsigned char *) identifier, strlen(identifier));
/*
- * RADIUS password attributes are calculated as:
- * e[0] = p[0] XOR MD5(secret + vector)
+ * RADIUS password attributes are calculated as: e[0] = p[0] XOR
+ * MD5(secret + vector)
*/
cryptvector = palloc(RADIUS_VECTOR_LENGTH + strlen(port->hba->radiussecret));
memcpy(cryptvector, port->hba->radiussecret, strlen(port->hba->radiussecret));
localaddr.sin_addr.s_addr = INADDR_ANY;
addrsize = sizeof(struct sockaddr_in);
#endif
- if (bind(sock, (struct sockaddr *) &localaddr, addrsize))
+ if (bind(sock, (struct sockaddr *) & localaddr, addrsize))
{
ereport(LOG,
(errmsg("could not bind local RADIUS socket: %m")));
timeout.tv_sec = RADIUS_TIMEOUT;
timeout.tv_usec = 0;
FD_ZERO(&fdset);
- FD_SET(sock, &fdset);
+ FD_SET (sock, &fdset);
+
while (true)
{
r = select(sock + 1, &fdset, NULL, NULL, &timeout);
/* Read the response packet */
addrsize = sizeof(remoteaddr);
packetlength = recvfrom(sock, receive_buffer, RADIUS_BUFFER_SIZE, 0,
- (struct sockaddr *) &remoteaddr, &addrsize);
+ (struct sockaddr *) & remoteaddr, &addrsize);
if (packetlength < 0)
{
ereport(LOG,
if (packetlength != ntohs(receivepacket->length))
{
ereport(LOG,
- (errmsg("RADIUS response has corrupt length: %i (actual length %i)",
- ntohs(receivepacket->length), packetlength)));
+ (errmsg("RADIUS response has corrupt length: %i (actual length %i)",
+ ntohs(receivepacket->length), packetlength)));
return STATUS_ERROR;
}
cryptvector = palloc(packetlength + strlen(port->hba->radiussecret));
memcpy(cryptvector, receivepacket, 4); /* code+id+length */
- memcpy(cryptvector+4, packet->vector, RADIUS_VECTOR_LENGTH); /* request authenticator, from original packet */
- if (packetlength > RADIUS_HEADER_LENGTH) /* there may be no attributes at all */
- memcpy(cryptvector+RADIUS_HEADER_LENGTH, receive_buffer + RADIUS_HEADER_LENGTH, packetlength-RADIUS_HEADER_LENGTH);
- memcpy(cryptvector+packetlength, port->hba->radiussecret, strlen(port->hba->radiussecret));
+ memcpy(cryptvector + 4, packet->vector, RADIUS_VECTOR_LENGTH); /* request
+ * authenticator, from
+ * original packet */
+ if (packetlength > RADIUS_HEADER_LENGTH) /* there may be no attributes
+ * at all */
+ memcpy(cryptvector + RADIUS_HEADER_LENGTH, receive_buffer + RADIUS_HEADER_LENGTH, packetlength - RADIUS_HEADER_LENGTH);
+ memcpy(cryptvector + packetlength, port->hba->radiussecret, strlen(port->hba->radiussecret));
if (!pg_md5_binary(cryptvector,
packetlength + strlen(port->hba->radiussecret),
encryptedpassword))
{
ereport(LOG,
- (errmsg("could not perform md5 encryption of received packet")));
+ (errmsg("could not perform md5 encryption of received packet")));
pfree(cryptvector);
return STATUS_ERROR;
}
pfree(cryptvector);
- if (memcmp(receivepacket->vector, encryptedpassword, RADIUS_VECTOR_LENGTH) != 0)
+ if (memcmp(receivepacket->vector, encryptedpassword, RADIUS_VECTOR_LENGTH) != 0)
{
ereport(LOG,
(errmsg("RADIUS response has incorrect MD5 signature")));
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/be-fsstubs.c,v 1.93 2010/01/02 16:57:45 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/be-fsstubs.c,v 1.94 2010/02/26 02:00:42 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* This should be moved to a more appropriate place. It is here
/*
* compatibility flag for permission checks
*/
-bool lo_compat_privileges;
+bool lo_compat_privileges;
/*#define FSDB 1*/
#define BUFSIZE 8192
pg_largeobject_aclcheck_snapshot(cookies[fd]->id,
GetUserId(),
ACL_SELECT,
- cookies[fd]->snapshot) != ACLCHECK_OK)
+ cookies[fd]->snapshot) != ACLCHECK_OK)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
errmsg("permission denied for large object %u",
pg_largeobject_aclcheck_snapshot(cookies[fd]->id,
GetUserId(),
ACL_UPDATE,
- cookies[fd]->snapshot) != ACLCHECK_OK)
+ cookies[fd]->snapshot) != ACLCHECK_OK)
ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
errmsg("permission denied for large object %u",
cookies[fd]->id)));
pg_largeobject_aclcheck_snapshot(cookies[fd]->id,
GetUserId(),
ACL_UPDATE,
- cookies[fd]->snapshot) != ACLCHECK_OK)
+ cookies[fd]->snapshot) != ACLCHECK_OK)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
errmsg("permission denied for large object %u",
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/be-secure.c,v 1.98 2010/02/25 13:26:15 mha Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/be-secure.c,v 1.99 2010/02/26 02:00:42 momjian Exp $
*
* Since the server static private key ($DataDir/server.key)
* will normally be stored unencrypted so that the database
* (total in both directions) before we require renegotiation.
* Set to 0 to disable renegotiation completely.
*/
-int ssl_renegotiation_limit;
+int ssl_renegotiation_limit;
#ifdef USE_SSL
static SSL_CTX *SSL_context = NULL;
else
{
/*
- * Reject embedded NULLs in certificate common name to prevent attacks like
- * CVE-2009-4034.
+ * Reject embedded NULLs in certificate common name to prevent
+ * attacks like CVE-2009-4034.
*/
if (r != strlen(port->peer_cn))
{
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/crypt.c,v 1.80 2010/02/14 18:42:15 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/crypt.c,v 1.81 2010/02/26 02:00:42 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
bool isnull;
/*
- * Disable immediate interrupts while doing database access. (Note
- * we don't bother to turn this back on if we hit one of the failure
+ * Disable immediate interrupts while doing database access. (Note we
+ * don't bother to turn this back on if we hit one of the failure
* conditions, since we can expect we'll just exit right away anyway.)
*/
ImmediateInterruptOK = false;
/* Get role info from pg_authid */
roleTup = SearchSysCache1(AUTHNAME, PointerGetDatum(role));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(roleTup))
- return STATUS_ERROR; /* no such user */
+ return STATUS_ERROR; /* no such user */
datum = SysCacheGetAttr(AUTHNAME, roleTup,
Anum_pg_authid_rolpassword, &isnull);
if (isnull)
{
ReleaseSysCache(roleTup);
- return STATUS_ERROR; /* user has no password */
+ return STATUS_ERROR; /* user has no password */
}
shadow_pass = TextDatumGetCString(datum);
ReleaseSysCache(roleTup);
if (*shadow_pass == '\0')
- return STATUS_ERROR; /* empty password */
+ return STATUS_ERROR; /* empty password */
/* Re-enable immediate response to SIGTERM/SIGINT/timeout interrupts */
ImmediateInterruptOK = true;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/hba.c,v 1.197 2010/02/02 19:09:37 mha Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/hba.c,v 1.198 2010/02/26 02:00:43 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* These variables hold the pre-parsed contents of the ident usermap
- * configuration file. ident_lines is a list of sublists, one sublist for
- * each (non-empty, non-comment) line of the file. The sublist items are
+ * configuration file. ident_lines is a list of sublists, one sublist for
+ * each (non-empty, non-comment) line of the file. The sublist items are
* palloc'd strings, one string per token on the line. Note there will always
* be at least one token, since blank lines are not entered in the data
* structure. ident_line_nums is an integer list containing the actual line
* Check to see if a connecting IP matches the given address and netmask.
*/
static bool
-check_ip(SockAddr *raddr, struct sockaddr *addr, struct sockaddr *mask)
+check_ip(SockAddr *raddr, struct sockaddr * addr, struct sockaddr * mask)
{
if (raddr->addr.ss_family == addr->sa_family)
{
/* Same address family */
if (!pg_range_sockaddr(&raddr->addr,
- (struct sockaddr_storage*)addr,
- (struct sockaddr_storage*)mask))
+ (struct sockaddr_storage *) addr,
+ (struct sockaddr_storage *) mask))
return false;
}
#ifdef HAVE_IPV6
{
/*
* If we're connected on IPv6 but the file specifies an IPv4 address
- * to match against, promote the latter to an IPv6 address
- * before trying to match the client's address.
+ * to match against, promote the latter to an IPv6 address before
+ * trying to match the client's address.
*/
struct sockaddr_storage addrcopy,
maskcopy;
* pg_foreach_ifaddr callback: does client addr match this machine interface?
*/
static void
-check_network_callback(struct sockaddr *addr, struct sockaddr *netmask,
+check_network_callback(struct sockaddr * addr, struct sockaddr * netmask,
void *cb_data)
{
check_network_data *cn = (check_network_data *) cb_data;
{
/* Make an all-ones netmask of appropriate length for family */
pg_sockaddr_cidr_mask(&mask, NULL, addr->sa_family);
- cn->result = check_ip(cn->raddr, addr, (struct sockaddr*) &mask);
+ cn->result = check_ip(cn->raddr, addr, (struct sockaddr *) & mask);
}
else
{
if (pg_sockaddr_cidr_mask(&parsedline->mask, cidr_slash + 1,
parsedline->addr.ss_family) < 0)
{
- *cidr_slash = '/'; /* restore token for message */
+ *cidr_slash = '/'; /* restore token for message */
ereport(LOG,
(errcode(ERRCODE_CONFIG_FILE_ERROR),
errmsg("invalid CIDR mask in address \"%s\"",
token),
- errcontext("line %d of configuration file \"%s\"",
- line_num, HbaFileName)));
+ errcontext("line %d of configuration file \"%s\"",
+ line_num, HbaFileName)));
pfree(token);
return false;
}
{
ereport(LOG,
(errcode(ERRCODE_CONFIG_FILE_ERROR),
- errmsg("end-of-line before netmask specification"),
- errcontext("line %d of configuration file \"%s\"",
- line_num, HbaFileName)));
+ errmsg("end-of-line before netmask specification"),
+ errcontext("line %d of configuration file \"%s\"",
+ line_num, HbaFileName)));
return false;
}
token = lfirst(line_item);
(errcode(ERRCODE_CONFIG_FILE_ERROR),
errmsg("invalid IP mask \"%s\": %s",
token, gai_strerror(ret)),
- errcontext("line %d of configuration file \"%s\"",
- line_num, HbaFileName)));
+ errcontext("line %d of configuration file \"%s\"",
+ line_num, HbaFileName)));
if (gai_result)
pg_freeaddrinfo_all(hints.ai_family, gai_result);
return false;
#else
unsupauth = "cert";
#endif
- else if (strcmp(token, "radius")== 0)
+ else if (strcmp(token, "radius") == 0)
parsedline->auth_method = uaRADIUS;
else
{
/*
* LDAP can operate in two modes: either with a direct bind, using
- * ldapprefix and ldapsuffix, or using a search+bind,
- * using ldapbasedn, ldapbinddn, ldapbindpasswd and ldapsearchattribute.
+ * ldapprefix and ldapsuffix, or using a search+bind, using
+ * ldapbasedn, ldapbinddn, ldapbindpasswd and ldapsearchattribute.
* Disallow mixing these parameters.
*/
if (parsedline->ldapprefix || parsedline->ldapsuffix)
{
case ipCmpMask:
if (!check_ip(&port->raddr,
- (struct sockaddr *) &hba->addr,
- (struct sockaddr *) &hba->mask))
+ (struct sockaddr *) & hba->addr,
+ (struct sockaddr *) & hba->mask))
continue;
break;
case ipCmpSameHost:
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/ip.c,v 1.50 2010/01/10 14:16:07 mha Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/ip.c,v 1.51 2010/02/26 02:00:43 momjian Exp $
*
* This file and the IPV6 implementation were initially provided by
* Nigel Kukard <nkukard@lbsd.net>, Linux Based Systems Design
memcpy(addr, &addr6, sizeof(addr6));
}
-
#endif /* HAVE_IPV6 */
*/
static void
run_ifaddr_callback(PgIfAddrCallback callback, void *cb_data,
- struct sockaddr *addr, struct sockaddr *mask)
+ struct sockaddr * addr, struct sockaddr * mask)
{
struct sockaddr_storage fullmask;
}
else if (mask->sa_family == AF_INET)
{
- if (((struct sockaddr_in*)mask)->sin_addr.s_addr == INADDR_ANY)
+ if (((struct sockaddr_in *) mask)->sin_addr.s_addr == INADDR_ANY)
mask = NULL;
}
#ifdef HAVE_IPV6
else if (mask->sa_family == AF_INET6)
{
- if (IN6_IS_ADDR_UNSPECIFIED(&((struct sockaddr_in6*)mask)->sin6_addr))
+ if (IN6_IS_ADDR_UNSPECIFIED(&((struct sockaddr_in6 *) mask)->sin6_addr))
mask = NULL;
}
#endif
if (!mask)
{
pg_sockaddr_cidr_mask(&fullmask, NULL, addr->sa_family);
- mask = (struct sockaddr*) &fullmask;
+ mask = (struct sockaddr *) & fullmask;
}
(*callback) (addr, mask, cb_data);
int
pg_foreach_ifaddr(PgIfAddrCallback callback, void *cb_data)
{
- INTERFACE_INFO *ptr, *ii = NULL;
- unsigned long length, i;
+ INTERFACE_INFO *ptr,
+ *ii = NULL;
+ unsigned long length,
+ i;
unsigned long n_ii = 0;
- SOCKET sock;
- int error;
+ SOCKET sock;
+ int error;
sock = WSASocket(AF_INET, SOCK_DGRAM, 0, 0, 0, 0);
if (sock == SOCKET_ERROR)
while (n_ii < 1024)
{
n_ii += 64;
- ptr = realloc(ii, sizeof (INTERFACE_INFO) * n_ii);
+ ptr = realloc(ii, sizeof(INTERFACE_INFO) * n_ii);
if (!ptr)
{
free(ii);
ii = ptr;
if (WSAIoctl(sock, SIO_GET_INTERFACE_LIST, 0, 0,
- ii, n_ii * sizeof (INTERFACE_INFO),
- &length, 0, 0) == SOCKET_ERROR)
+ ii, n_ii * sizeof(INTERFACE_INFO),
+ &length, 0, 0) == SOCKET_ERROR)
{
error = WSAGetLastError();
if (error == WSAEFAULT || error == WSAENOBUFS)
for (i = 0; i < length / sizeof(INTERFACE_INFO); ++i)
run_ifaddr_callback(callback, cb_data,
- (struct sockaddr*)&ii[i].iiAddress,
- (struct sockaddr*)&ii[i].iiNetmask);
+ (struct sockaddr *) & ii[i].iiAddress,
+ (struct sockaddr *) & ii[i].iiNetmask);
closesocket(sock);
free(ii);
return 0;
}
-
-#elif HAVE_GETIFADDRS /* && !WIN32 */
+#elif HAVE_GETIFADDRS /* && !WIN32 */
#ifdef HAVE_IFADDRS_H
#include <ifaddrs.h>
int
pg_foreach_ifaddr(PgIfAddrCallback callback, void *cb_data)
{
- struct ifaddrs *ifa, *l;
+ struct ifaddrs *ifa,
+ *l;
if (getifaddrs(&ifa) < 0)
return -1;
for (l = ifa; l; l = l->ifa_next)
run_ifaddr_callback(callback, cb_data,
- l->ifa_addr, l->ifa_netmask);
+ l->ifa_addr, l->ifa_netmask);
freeifaddrs(ifa);
return 0;
}
-
-#else /* !HAVE_GETIFADDRS && !WIN32 */
+#else /* !HAVE_GETIFADDRS && !WIN32 */
#ifdef HAVE_SYS_IOCTL_H
#include <sys/ioctl.h>
pg_foreach_ifaddr(PgIfAddrCallback callback, void *cb_data)
{
struct lifconf lifc;
- struct lifreq *lifr, lmask;
- struct sockaddr *addr, *mask;
- char *ptr, *buffer = NULL;
- size_t n_buffer = 1024;
- pgsocket sock, fd;
+ struct lifreq *lifr,
+ lmask;
+ struct sockaddr *addr,
+ *mask;
+ char *ptr,
+ *buffer = NULL;
+ size_t n_buffer = 1024;
+ pgsocket sock,
+ fd;
+
#ifdef HAVE_IPV6
- pgsocket sock6;
+ pgsocket sock6;
#endif
- int i, total;
+ int i,
+ total;
sock = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_DGRAM, 0);
if (sock == -1)
return -1;
}
- memset(&lifc, 0, sizeof (lifc));
+ memset(&lifc, 0, sizeof(lifc));
lifc.lifc_family = AF_UNSPEC;
lifc.lifc_buf = buffer = ptr;
lifc.lifc_len = n_buffer;
}
/*
- * Some Unixes try to return as much data as possible,
- * with no indication of whether enough space allocated.
- * Don't believe we have it all unless there's lots of slop.
+ * Some Unixes try to return as much data as possible, with no
+ * indication of whether enough space allocated. Don't believe we have
+ * it all unless there's lots of slop.
*/
if (lifc.lifc_len < n_buffer - 1024)
break;
lifr = lifc.lifc_req;
for (i = 0; i < total; ++i)
{
- addr = (struct sockaddr*)&lifr[i].lifr_addr;
+ addr = (struct sockaddr *) & lifr[i].lifr_addr;
memcpy(&lmask, &lifr[i], sizeof(struct lifreq));
#ifdef HAVE_IPV6
fd = (addr->sa_family == AF_INET6) ? sock6 : sock;
if (ioctl(fd, SIOCGLIFNETMASK, &lmask) < 0)
mask = NULL;
else
- mask = (struct sockaddr*)&lmask.lifr_addr;
+ mask = (struct sockaddr *) & lmask.lifr_addr;
run_ifaddr_callback(callback, cb_data, addr, mask);
}
#endif
return 0;
}
-
#elif defined(SIOCGIFCONF)
/*
/* Calculate based on sockaddr.sa_len */
#ifdef HAVE_STRUCT_SOCKADDR_SA_LEN
#define _SIZEOF_ADDR_IFREQ(ifr) \
- ((ifr).ifr_addr.sa_len > sizeof(struct sockaddr) ? \
- (sizeof(struct ifreq) - sizeof(struct sockaddr) + \
- (ifr).ifr_addr.sa_len) : sizeof(struct ifreq))
+ ((ifr).ifr_addr.sa_len > sizeof(struct sockaddr) ? \
+ (sizeof(struct ifreq) - sizeof(struct sockaddr) + \
+ (ifr).ifr_addr.sa_len) : sizeof(struct ifreq))
/* Padded ifreq structure, simple */
#else
#define _SIZEOF_ADDR_IFREQ(ifr) \
sizeof (struct ifreq)
#endif
-
-#endif /* !_SIZEOF_ADDR_IFREQ */
+#endif /* !_SIZEOF_ADDR_IFREQ */
/*
* Enumerate the system's network interface addresses and call the callback
pg_foreach_ifaddr(PgIfAddrCallback callback, void *cb_data)
{
struct ifconf ifc;
- struct ifreq *ifr, *end, addr, mask;
- char *ptr, *buffer = NULL;
- size_t n_buffer = 1024;
- int sock;
+ struct ifreq *ifr,
+ *end,
+ addr,
+ mask;
+ char *ptr,
+ *buffer = NULL;
+ size_t n_buffer = 1024;
+ int sock;
sock = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_DGRAM, 0);
if (sock == -1)
return -1;
}
- memset(&ifc, 0, sizeof (ifc));
+ memset(&ifc, 0, sizeof(ifc));
ifc.ifc_buf = buffer = ptr;
ifc.ifc_len = n_buffer;
}
/*
- * Some Unixes try to return as much data as possible,
- * with no indication of whether enough space allocated.
- * Don't believe we have it all unless there's lots of slop.
+ * Some Unixes try to return as much data as possible, with no
+ * indication of whether enough space allocated. Don't believe we have
+ * it all unless there's lots of slop.
*/
if (ifc.ifc_len < n_buffer - 1024)
break;
}
- end = (struct ifreq*)(buffer + ifc.ifc_len);
+ end = (struct ifreq *) (buffer + ifc.ifc_len);
for (ifr = ifc.ifc_req; ifr < end;)
{
memcpy(&addr, ifr, sizeof(addr));
memcpy(&mask, ifr, sizeof(mask));
if (ioctl(sock, SIOCGIFADDR, &addr, sizeof(addr)) == 0 &&
- ioctl(sock, SIOCGIFNETMASK, &mask, sizeof(mask)) == 0)
+ ioctl(sock, SIOCGIFNETMASK, &mask, sizeof(mask)) == 0)
run_ifaddr_callback(callback, cb_data,
- &addr.ifr_addr, &mask.ifr_addr);
- ifr = (struct ifreq*)((char*)ifr + _SIZEOF_ADDR_IFREQ(*ifr));
+ &addr.ifr_addr, &mask.ifr_addr);
+ ifr = (struct ifreq *) ((char *) ifr + _SIZEOF_ADDR_IFREQ(*ifr));
}
free(buffer);
close(sock);
return 0;
}
-
-#else /* !defined(SIOCGIFCONF) */
+#else /* !defined(SIOCGIFCONF) */
/*
* Enumerate the system's network interface addresses and call the callback
{
struct sockaddr_in addr;
struct sockaddr_storage mask;
+
#ifdef HAVE_IPV6
struct sockaddr_in6 addr6;
#endif
memset(&mask, 0, sizeof(mask));
pg_sockaddr_cidr_mask(&mask, "8", AF_INET);
run_ifaddr_callback(callback, cb_data,
- (struct sockaddr*)&addr,
- (struct sockaddr*)&mask);
+ (struct sockaddr *) & addr,
+ (struct sockaddr *) & mask);
#ifdef HAVE_IPV6
/* addr ::1/128 */
memset(&mask, 0, sizeof(mask));
pg_sockaddr_cidr_mask(&mask, "128", AF_INET6);
run_ifaddr_callback(callback, cb_data,
- (struct sockaddr*)&addr6,
- (struct sockaddr*)&mask);
+ (struct sockaddr *) & addr6,
+ (struct sockaddr *) & mask);
#endif
return 0;
}
+#endif /* !defined(SIOCGIFCONF) */
-#endif /* !defined(SIOCGIFCONF) */
-
-#endif /* !HAVE_GETIFADDRS */
+#endif /* !HAVE_GETIFADDRS */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/md5.c,v 1.39 2010/01/27 12:11:59 mha Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/md5.c,v 1.40 2010/02/26 02:00:43 momjian Exp $
*/
/* This is intended to be used in both frontend and backend, so use c.h */
return true;
}
-bool pg_md5_binary(const void *buff, size_t len, void *outbuf)
+bool
+pg_md5_binary(const void *buff, size_t len, void *outbuf)
{
if (!calculateDigestFromBuffer((uint8 *) buff, len, outbuf))
return false;
char *buf)
{
size_t passwd_len = strlen(passwd);
+
/* +1 here is just to avoid risk of unportable malloc(0) */
char *crypt_buf = malloc(passwd_len + salt_len + 1);
bool ret;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/pqcomm.c,v 1.204 2010/02/18 11:13:45 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/pqcomm.c,v 1.205 2010/02/26 02:00:43 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* pq_peekbyte - peek at next byte from connection
* pq_putbytes - send bytes to connection (not flushed until pq_flush)
* pq_flush - flush pending output
- * pq_getbyte_if_available - get a byte if available without blocking
+ * pq_getbyte_if_available - get a byte if available without blocking
*
* message-level I/O (and old-style-COPY-OUT cruft):
* pq_putmessage - send a normal message (suppressed in COPY OUT mode)
* transport layer reports connection closure, and you can be sure the
* backend has exited.
*
- * We do set sock to PGINVALID_SOCKET to prevent any further I/O, though.
+ * We do set sock to PGINVALID_SOCKET to prevent any further I/O,
+ * though.
*/
MyProcPort->sock = PGINVALID_SOCKET;
}
/* --------------------------------
- * pq_getbyte_if_available - get a single byte from connection,
+ * pq_getbyte_if_available - get a single byte from connection,
* if available
*
* The received byte is stored in *c. Returns 1 if a byte was read,
int
pq_getbyte_if_available(unsigned char *c)
{
- int r;
+ int r;
if (PqRecvPointer < PqRecvLength)
{
if (r < 0)
{
/*
- * Ok if no data available without blocking or interrupted
- * (though EINTR really shouldn't happen with a non-blocking
- * socket). Report other errors.
+ * Ok if no data available without blocking or interrupted (though
+ * EINTR really shouldn't happen with a non-blocking socket).
+ * Report other errors.
*/
if (errno == EAGAIN || errno == EWOULDBLOCK || errno == EINTR)
r = 0;
else
{
/*
- * Careful: an ereport() that tries to write to the client would
- * cause recursion to here, leading to stack overflow and core
- * dump! This message must go *only* to the postmaster log.
+ * Careful: an ereport() that tries to write to the client
+ * would cause recursion to here, leading to stack overflow
+ * and core dump! This message must go *only* to the
+ * postmaster log.
*/
ereport(COMMERROR,
(errcode_for_socket_access(),
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/copyfuncs.c,v 1.463 2010/02/23 22:51:42 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/copyfuncs.c,v 1.464 2010/02/26 02:00:43 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static ModifyTable *
_copyModifyTable(ModifyTable *from)
{
- ModifyTable *newnode = makeNode(ModifyTable);
+ ModifyTable *newnode = makeNode(ModifyTable);
/*
* copy node superclass fields
static LockRows *
_copyLockRows(LockRows *from)
{
- LockRows *newnode = makeNode(LockRows);
+ LockRows *newnode = makeNode(LockRows);
/*
* copy node superclass fields
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/equalfuncs.c,v 1.384 2010/02/23 22:51:42 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/equalfuncs.c,v 1.385 2010/02/26 02:00:43 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static bool
_equalAlterTableSpaceOptionsStmt(AlterTableSpaceOptionsStmt *a,
- AlterTableSpaceOptionsStmt *b)
+ AlterTableSpaceOptionsStmt *b)
{
COMPARE_STRING_FIELD(tablespacename);
COMPARE_NODE_FIELD(options);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/params.c,v 1.14 2010/01/15 22:36:31 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/nodes/params.c,v 1.15 2010/02/26 02:00:43 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
*
* Note: the intent of this function is to make a static, self-contained
* set of parameter values. If dynamic parameter hooks are present, we
- * intentionally do not copy them into the result. Rather, we forcibly
+ * intentionally do not copy them into the result. Rather, we forcibly
* instantiate all available parameter values and copy the datum values.
*/
ParamListInfo
/* give hook a chance in case parameter is dynamic */
if (!OidIsValid(oprm->ptype) && from->paramFetch != NULL)
- (*from->paramFetch) (from, i+1);
+ (*from->paramFetch) (from, i + 1);
/* flat-copy the parameter info */
*nprm = *oprm;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/geqo/geqo_eval.c,v 1.92 2010/01/02 16:57:46 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/geqo/geqo_eval.c,v 1.93 2010/02/26 02:00:43 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
} Clump;
static List *merge_clump(PlannerInfo *root, List *clumps, Clump *new_clump,
- bool force);
+ bool force);
static bool desirable_join(PlannerInfo *root,
RelOptInfo *outer_rel, RelOptInfo *inner_rel);
/*
* Sometimes, a relation can't yet be joined to others due to heuristics
* or actual semantic restrictions. We maintain a list of "clumps" of
- * successfully joined relations, with larger clumps at the front.
- * Each new relation from the tour is added to the first clump it can
- * be joined to; if there is none then it becomes a new clump of its own.
- * When we enlarge an existing clump we check to see if it can now be
- * merged with any other clumps. After the tour is all scanned, we
- * forget about the heuristics and try to forcibly join any remaining
- * clumps. Some forced joins might still fail due to semantics, but
- * we should always be able to find some join order that works.
+ * successfully joined relations, with larger clumps at the front. Each
+ * new relation from the tour is added to the first clump it can be joined
+ * to; if there is none then it becomes a new clump of its own. When we
+ * enlarge an existing clump we check to see if it can now be merged with
+ * any other clumps. After the tour is all scanned, we forget about the
+ * heuristics and try to forcibly join any remaining clumps. Some forced
+ * joins might still fail due to semantics, but we should always be able
+ * to find some join order that works.
*/
clumps = NIL;
* Merge a "clump" into the list of existing clumps for gimme_tree.
*
* We try to merge the clump into some existing clump, and repeat if
- * successful. When no more merging is possible, insert the clump
+ * successful. When no more merging is possible, insert the clump
* into the list, preserving the list ordering rule (namely, that
* clumps of larger size appear earlier).
*
/*
* Recursively try to merge the enlarged old_clump with
- * others. When no further merge is possible, we'll reinsert
+ * others. When no further merge is possible, we'll reinsert
* it into the list.
*/
return merge_clump(root, clumps, old_clump, force);
/*
* No merging is possible, so add new_clump as an independent clump, in
- * proper order according to size. We can be fast for the common case
+ * proper order according to size. We can be fast for the common case
* where it has size 1 --- it should always go at the end.
*/
if (clumps == NIL || new_clump->size == 1)
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/geqo/geqo_random.c,v 1.2 2010/01/02 16:57:46 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/geqo/geqo_random.c,v 1.3 2010/02/26 02:00:44 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
GeqoPrivateData *private = (GeqoPrivateData *) root->join_search_private;
/*
- * XXX. This seeding algorithm could certainly be improved - but
- * it is not critical to do so.
+ * XXX. This seeding algorithm could certainly be improved - but it is not
+ * critical to do so.
*/
memset(private->random_state, 0, sizeof(private->random_state));
memcpy(private->random_state,
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/allpaths.c,v 1.192 2010/01/02 16:57:46 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/allpaths.c,v 1.193 2010/02/26 02:00:44 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* can disregard this child.
*
* As of 8.4, the child rel's targetlist might contain non-Var
- * expressions, which means that substitution into the quals
- * could produce opportunities for const-simplification, and perhaps
- * even pseudoconstant quals. To deal with this, we strip the
- * RestrictInfo nodes, do the substitution, do const-simplification,
- * and then reconstitute the RestrictInfo layer.
+ * expressions, which means that substitution into the quals could
+ * produce opportunities for const-simplification, and perhaps even
+ * pseudoconstant quals. To deal with this, we strip the RestrictInfo
+ * nodes, do the substitution, do const-simplification, and then
+ * reconstitute the RestrictInfo layer.
*/
childquals = get_all_actual_clauses(rel->baserestrictinfo);
childquals = (List *) adjust_appendrel_attrs((Node *) childquals,
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c,v 1.215 2010/02/19 21:49:10 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c,v 1.216 2010/02/26 02:00:44 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
pages_fetched = ceil(pages_fetched);
/*
- * For small numbers of pages we should charge spc_random_page_cost apiece,
- * while if nearly all the table's pages are being read, it's more
- * appropriate to charge spc_seq_page_cost apiece. The effect is nonlinear,
- * too. For lack of a better idea, interpolate like this to determine the
- * cost per page.
+ * For small numbers of pages we should charge spc_random_page_cost
+ * apiece, while if nearly all the table's pages are being read, it's more
+ * appropriate to charge spc_seq_page_cost apiece. The effect is
+ * nonlinear, too. For lack of a better idea, interpolate like this to
+ * determine the cost per page.
*/
if (pages_fetched >= 2.0)
cost_per_page = spc_random_page_cost -
*
* Currently, nodeFunctionscan.c always executes the function to
* completion before returning any rows, and caches the results in a
- * tuplestore. So the function eval cost is all startup cost, and
- * per-row costs are minimal.
+ * tuplestore. So the function eval cost is all startup cost, and per-row
+ * costs are minimal.
*
* XXX in principle we ought to charge tuplestore spill costs if the
* number of rows is large. However, given how phony our rowcount
- * estimates for functions tend to be, there's not a lot of point
- * in that refinement right now.
+ * estimates for functions tend to be, there's not a lot of point in that
+ * refinement right now.
*/
cost_qual_eval_node(&exprcost, rte->funcexpr, root);
* if it is exactly the same then there will be a cost tie between
* nestloop with A outer, materialized B inner and nestloop with B outer,
* materialized A inner. The extra cost ensures we'll prefer
- * materializing the smaller rel.) Note that this is normally a good deal
+ * materializing the smaller rel.) Note that this is normally a good deal
* less than cpu_tuple_cost; which is OK because a Material plan node
* doesn't do qual-checking or projection, so it's got less overhead than
* most plan nodes.
{
run_cost += (outer_path_rows - outer_matched_rows) *
inner_rescan_run_cost / inner_path_rows;
+
/*
- * We won't be evaluating any quals at all for these rows,
- * so don't add them to ntuples.
+ * We won't be evaluating any quals at all for these rows, so
+ * don't add them to ntuples.
*/
}
else
* Unlike other costsize functions, this routine makes one actual decision:
* whether we should materialize the inner path. We do that either because
* the inner path can't support mark/restore, or because it's cheaper to
- * use an interposed Material node to handle mark/restore. When the decision
+ * use an interposed Material node to handle mark/restore. When the decision
* is cost-based it would be logically cleaner to build and cost two separate
* paths with and without that flag set; but that would require repeating most
- * of the calculations here, which are not all that cheap. Since the choice
+ * of the calculations here, which are not all that cheap. Since the choice
* will not affect output pathkeys or startup cost, only total cost, there is
* no possibility of wanting to keep both paths. So it seems best to make
* the decision here and record it in the path's materialize_inner field.
/*
* Decide whether we want to materialize the inner input to shield it from
- * mark/restore and performing re-fetches. Our cost model for regular
+ * mark/restore and performing re-fetches. Our cost model for regular
* re-fetches is that a re-fetch costs the same as an original fetch,
* which is probably an overestimate; but on the other hand we ignore the
* bookkeeping costs of mark/restore. Not clear if it's worth developing
- * a more refined model. So we just need to inflate the inner run cost
- * by rescanratio.
+ * a more refined model. So we just need to inflate the inner run cost by
+ * rescanratio.
*/
bare_inner_cost = inner_run_cost * rescanratio;
+
/*
* When we interpose a Material node the re-fetch cost is assumed to be
* just cpu_operator_cost per tuple, independently of the underlying
* never spill to disk, since it only has to remember tuples back to the
* last mark. (If there are a huge number of duplicates, our other cost
* factors will make the path so expensive that it probably won't get
- * chosen anyway.) So we don't use cost_rescan here.
+ * chosen anyway.) So we don't use cost_rescan here.
*
* Note: keep this estimate in sync with create_mergejoin_plan's labeling
* of the generated Material node.
/* Prefer materializing if it looks cheaper */
if (mat_inner_cost < bare_inner_cost)
path->materialize_inner = true;
+
/*
* Even if materializing doesn't look cheaper, we *must* do it if the
* inner path is to be used directly (without sorting) and it doesn't
else if (innersortkeys == NIL &&
!ExecSupportsMarkRestore(inner_path->pathtype))
path->materialize_inner = true;
+
/*
* Also, force materializing if the inner path is to be sorted and the
* sort is expected to spill to disk. This is because the final merge
/*
* cost_rescan
* Given a finished Path, estimate the costs of rescanning it after
- * having done so the first time. For some Path types a rescan is
+ * having done so the first time. For some Path types a rescan is
* cheaper than an original scan (if no parameters change), and this
* function embodies knowledge about that. The default is to return
- * the same costs stored in the Path. (Note that the cost estimates
+ * the same costs stored in the Path. (Note that the cost estimates
* actually stored in Paths are always for first scans.)
*
* This function is not currently intended to model effects such as rescans
*/
static void
cost_rescan(PlannerInfo *root, Path *path,
- Cost *rescan_startup_cost, /* output parameters */
+ Cost *rescan_startup_cost, /* output parameters */
Cost *rescan_total_cost)
{
switch (path->pathtype)
{
case T_FunctionScan:
+
/*
- * Currently, nodeFunctionscan.c always executes the function
- * to completion before returning any rows, and caches the
- * results in a tuplestore. So the function eval cost is
- * all startup cost and isn't paid over again on rescans.
- * However, all run costs will be paid over again.
+ * Currently, nodeFunctionscan.c always executes the function to
+ * completion before returning any rows, and caches the results in
+ * a tuplestore. So the function eval cost is all startup cost
+ * and isn't paid over again on rescans. However, all run costs
+ * will be paid over again.
*/
*rescan_startup_cost = 0;
*rescan_total_cost = path->total_cost - path->startup_cost;
break;
case T_HashJoin:
+
/*
* Assume that all of the startup cost represents hash table
* building, which we won't have to do over.
{
/*
* These plan types materialize their final result in a
- * tuplestore or tuplesort object. So the rescan cost is only
+ * tuplestore or tuplesort object. So the rescan cost is only
* cpu_tuple_cost per tuple, unless the result is large enough
* to spill to disk.
*/
- Cost run_cost = cpu_tuple_cost * path->parent->rows;
- double nbytes = relation_byte_size(path->parent->rows,
- path->parent->width);
- long work_mem_bytes = work_mem * 1024L;
+ Cost run_cost = cpu_tuple_cost * path->parent->rows;
+ double nbytes = relation_byte_size(path->parent->rows,
+ path->parent->width);
+ long work_mem_bytes = work_mem * 1024L;
if (nbytes > work_mem_bytes)
{
case T_Sort:
{
/*
- * These plan types not only materialize their results, but
- * do not implement qual filtering or projection. So they
- * are even cheaper to rescan than the ones above. We charge
- * only cpu_operator_cost per tuple. (Note: keep that in
- * sync with the run_cost charge in cost_sort, and also see
- * comments in cost_material before you change it.)
+ * These plan types not only materialize their results, but do
+ * not implement qual filtering or projection. So they are
+ * even cheaper to rescan than the ones above. We charge only
+ * cpu_operator_cost per tuple. (Note: keep that in sync with
+ * the run_cost charge in cost_sort, and also see comments in
+ * cost_material before you change it.)
*/
- Cost run_cost = cpu_operator_cost * path->parent->rows;
- double nbytes = relation_byte_size(path->parent->rows,
- path->parent->width);
- long work_mem_bytes = work_mem * 1024L;
+ Cost run_cost = cpu_operator_cost * path->parent->rows;
+ double nbytes = relation_byte_size(path->parent->rows,
+ path->parent->width);
+ long work_mem_bytes = work_mem * 1024L;
if (nbytes > work_mem_bytes)
{
{
/*
* We could be looking at an expression pulled up from a subquery,
- * or a ROW() representing a whole-row child Var, etc. Do what
- * we can using the expression type information.
+ * or a ROW() representing a whole-row child Var, etc. Do what we
+ * can using the expression type information.
*/
int32 item_width;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/equivclass.c,v 1.22 2010/01/02 16:57:46 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/equivclass.c,v 1.23 2010/02/26 02:00:44 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
item2_relids = restrictinfo->right_relids;
/*
- * Reject clauses of the form X=X. These are not as redundant as they
+ * Reject clauses of the form X=X. These are not as redundant as they
* might seem at first glance: assuming the operator is strict, this is
- * really an expensive way to write X IS NOT NULL. So we must not risk
- * just losing the clause, which would be possible if there is already
- * a single-element EquivalenceClass containing X. The case is not
- * common enough to be worth contorting the EC machinery for, so just
- * reject the clause and let it be processed as a normal restriction
- * clause.
+ * really an expensive way to write X IS NOT NULL. So we must not risk
+ * just losing the clause, which would be possible if there is already a
+ * single-element EquivalenceClass containing X. The case is not common
+ * enough to be worth contorting the EC machinery for, so just reject the
+ * clause and let it be processed as a normal restriction clause.
*/
if (equal(item1, item2))
return false; /* X=X is not a useful equivalence */
* EquivalenceClass for it.
*
* sortref is the SortGroupRef of the originating SortGroupClause, if any,
- * or zero if not. (It should never be zero if the expression is volatile!)
+ * or zero if not. (It should never be zero if the expression is volatile!)
*
* This can be used safely both before and after EquivalenceClass merging;
* since it never causes merging it does not invalidate any existing ECs
newec->ec_sortref = sortref;
newec->ec_merged = NULL;
- if (newec->ec_has_volatile && sortref == 0) /* should not happen */
+ if (newec->ec_has_volatile && sortref == 0) /* should not happen */
elog(ERROR, "volatile EquivalenceClass has no sortref");
newem = add_eq_member(newec, expr, pull_varnos((Node *) expr),
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/indxpath.c,v 1.245 2010/01/02 16:57:46 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/indxpath.c,v 1.246 2010/02/26 02:00:44 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* Examine each index of the relation ... */
foreach(ic, rel->indexlist)
{
- IndexOptInfo *ind = (IndexOptInfo *) lfirst(ic);
- int c;
+ IndexOptInfo *ind = (IndexOptInfo *) lfirst(ic);
+ int c;
/*
* If the index is not unique or if it's a partial index that doesn't
foreach(lc, restrictlist)
{
- RestrictInfo *rinfo = (RestrictInfo *) lfirst(lc);
- Node *rexpr;
+ RestrictInfo *rinfo = (RestrictInfo *) lfirst(lc);
+ Node *rexpr;
/*
* The condition's equality operator must be a member of the
- * index opfamily, else it is not asserting the right kind
- * of equality behavior for this index. We check this first
+ * index opfamily, else it is not asserting the right kind of
+ * equality behavior for this index. We check this first
* since it's probably cheaper than match_index_to_operand().
*/
if (!list_member_oid(rinfo->mergeopfamilies, ind->opfamily[c]))
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinpath.c,v 1.129 2010/01/05 23:25:36 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinpath.c,v 1.130 2010/02/26 02:00:44 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* We already know that the clause is a binary opclause referencing only the
* rels in the current join. The point here is to check whether it has the
* form "outerrel_expr op innerrel_expr" or "innerrel_expr op outerrel_expr",
- * rather than mixing outer and inner vars on either side. If it matches,
+ * rather than mixing outer and inner vars on either side. If it matches,
* we set the transient flag outer_is_left to identify which side is which.
*/
static inline bool
/*
* Currently, we only know how to remove left joins to a baserel with
- * unique indexes. We can check most of these criteria pretty trivially
+ * unique indexes. We can check most of these criteria pretty trivially
* to avoid doing useless extra work. But checking whether any of the
* indexes are unique would require iterating over the indexlist, so for
* now we just make sure there are indexes of some sort or other. If none
return false;
/*
- * We can't remove the join if any inner-rel attributes are used above
- * the join.
+ * We can't remove the join if any inner-rel attributes are used above the
+ * join.
*
- * Note that this test only detects use of inner-rel attributes in
- * higher join conditions and the target list. There might be such
- * attributes in pushed-down conditions at this join, too. We check
- * that case below.
+ * Note that this test only detects use of inner-rel attributes in higher
+ * join conditions and the target list. There might be such attributes in
+ * pushed-down conditions at this join, too. We check that case below.
*
* As a micro-optimization, it seems better to start with max_attr and
* count down rather than starting with min_attr and counting up, on the
/*
* Search for mergejoinable clauses that constrain the inner rel against
* either the outer rel or a pseudoconstant. If an operator is
- * mergejoinable then it behaves like equality for some btree opclass,
- * so it's what we want. The mergejoinability test also eliminates
- * clauses containing volatile functions, which we couldn't depend on.
+ * mergejoinable then it behaves like equality for some btree opclass, so
+ * it's what we want. The mergejoinability test also eliminates clauses
+ * containing volatile functions, which we couldn't depend on.
*/
foreach(l, restrictlist)
{
/*
* If we find a pushed-down clause, it must have come from above the
- * outer join and it must contain references to the inner rel. (If
- * it had only outer-rel variables, it'd have been pushed down into
- * the outer rel.) Therefore, we can conclude that join removal
- * is unsafe without any examination of the clause contents.
+ * outer join and it must contain references to the inner rel. (If it
+ * had only outer-rel variables, it'd have been pushed down into the
+ * outer rel.) Therefore, we can conclude that join removal is unsafe
+ * without any examination of the clause contents.
*/
if (restrictinfo->is_pushed_down)
return false;
/*
* Note: can_join won't be set for a restriction clause, but
- * mergeopfamilies will be if it has a mergejoinable operator
- * and doesn't contain volatile functions.
+ * mergeopfamilies will be if it has a mergejoinable operator and
+ * doesn't contain volatile functions.
*/
if (restrictinfo->mergeopfamilies == NIL)
continue; /* not mergejoinable */
/*
- * The clause certainly doesn't refer to anything but the given
- * rel. If either side is pseudoconstant then we can use it.
+ * The clause certainly doesn't refer to anything but the given rel.
+ * If either side is pseudoconstant then we can use it.
*/
if (bms_is_empty(restrictinfo->left_relids))
{
/*
* For the moment, replicate all of the outerrel's paths as join paths.
* Some of them might not really be interesting above the join, if they
- * have sort orderings that have no real use except to do a mergejoin
- * for the join we've just found we don't need. But distinguishing that
- * case probably isn't worth the extra code it would take.
+ * have sort orderings that have no real use except to do a mergejoin for
+ * the join we've just found we don't need. But distinguishing that case
+ * probably isn't worth the extra code it would take.
*/
foreach(lc, outerrel->pathlist)
{
- Path *outerpath = (Path *) lfirst(lc);
+ Path *outerpath = (Path *) lfirst(lc);
add_path(joinrel, (Path *)
create_noop_path(root, joinrel, outerpath));
restrictinfo->mergeopfamilies == NIL)
{
/*
- * The executor can handle extra joinquals that are constants,
- * but not anything else, when doing right/full merge join. (The
+ * The executor can handle extra joinquals that are constants, but
+ * not anything else, when doing right/full merge join. (The
* reason to support constants is so we can do FULL JOIN ON
* FALSE.)
*/
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinrels.c,v 1.104 2010/01/02 16:57:47 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/joinrels.c,v 1.105 2010/02/26 02:00:45 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
continue;
/*
- * If it's a semijoin and we already joined the RHS to any other
- * rels within either input, then we must have unique-ified the RHS
- * at that point (see below). Therefore the semijoin is no longer
- * relevant in this join path.
+ * If it's a semijoin and we already joined the RHS to any other rels
+ * within either input, then we must have unique-ified the RHS at that
+ * point (see below). Therefore the semijoin is no longer relevant in
+ * this join path.
*/
if (sjinfo->jointype == JOIN_SEMI)
{
}
/*
- * Fail if violated some SJ's RHS and didn't match to another SJ.
- * However, "matching" to a semijoin we are implementing by
- * unique-ification doesn't count (think: it's really an inner join).
+ * Fail if violated some SJ's RHS and didn't match to another SJ. However,
+ * "matching" to a semijoin we are implementing by unique-ification
+ * doesn't count (think: it's really an inner join).
*/
if (!is_valid_inner &&
(match_sjinfo == NULL || unique_ified))
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/pathkeys.c,v 1.100 2010/01/02 16:57:47 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/pathkeys.c,v 1.101 2010/02/26 02:00:45 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
0);
/*
- * Note: it might look funny to be setting sortref = 0 for
- * a reference to a volatile sub_eclass. However, the
- * expression is *not* volatile in the outer query: it's
- * just a Var referencing whatever the subquery emitted.
- * (IOW, the outer query isn't going to re-execute the
- * volatile expression itself.) So this is okay.
+ * Note: it might look funny to be setting sortref = 0 for a
+ * reference to a volatile sub_eclass. However, the
+ * expression is *not* volatile in the outer query: it's just
+ * a Var referencing whatever the subquery emitted. (IOW, the
+ * outer query isn't going to re-execute the volatile
+ * expression itself.) So this is okay.
*/
outer_ec =
get_eclass_for_sort_expr(root,
* It's possible that multiple matching clauses might have different
* ECs on the other side, in which case the order we put them into our
* result makes a difference in the pathkeys required for the other
- * input path. However this routine hasn't got any info about which
+ * input path. However this routine hasn't got any info about which
* order would be best, so we don't worry about that.
*
* It's also possible that the selected mergejoin clauses produce
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/createplan.c,v 1.272 2010/02/19 21:49:10 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/createplan.c,v 1.273 2010/02/26 02:00:45 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
innerpathkeys = best_path->jpath.innerjoinpath->pathkeys;
/*
- * If specified, add a materialize node to shield the inner plan from
- * the need to handle mark/restore.
+ * If specified, add a materialize node to shield the inner plan from the
+ * need to handle mark/restore.
*/
if (best_path->materialize_inner)
{
Assert(ieclass != NULL);
/*
- * For debugging purposes, we check that the eclasses match the
- * paths' pathkeys. In typical cases the merge clauses are one-to-one
- * with the pathkeys, but when dealing with partially redundant query
+ * For debugging purposes, we check that the eclasses match the paths'
+ * pathkeys. In typical cases the merge clauses are one-to-one with
+ * the pathkeys, but when dealing with partially redundant query
* conditions, we might have clauses that re-reference earlier path
* keys. The case that we need to reject is where a pathkey is
* entirely skipped over.
}
/*
- * Note: it is not an error if we have additional pathkey elements
- * (i.e., lop or lip isn't NULL here). The input paths might be
- * better-sorted than we need for the current mergejoin.
+ * Note: it is not an error if we have additional pathkey elements (i.e.,
+ * lop or lip isn't NULL here). The input paths might be better-sorted
+ * than we need for the current mergejoin.
*/
/*
* Build a ModifyTable plan node
*
* Currently, we don't charge anything extra for the actual table modification
- * work, nor for the RETURNING expressions if any. It would only be window
+ * work, nor for the RETURNING expressions if any. It would only be window
* dressing, since these are always top-level nodes and there is no way for
* the costs to change any higher-level planning choices. But we might want
* to make it look better sometime.
{
Plan *subplan = (Plan *) lfirst(subnode);
- if (subnode == list_head(subplans)) /* first node? */
+ if (subnode == list_head(subplans)) /* first node? */
plan->startup_cost = subplan->startup_cost;
plan->total_cost += subplan->total_cost;
plan->plan_rows += subplan->plan_rows;
/*
* Set up the visible plan targetlist as being the same as the first
- * RETURNING list. This is for the use of EXPLAIN; the executor won't
- * pay any attention to the targetlist.
+ * RETURNING list. This is for the use of EXPLAIN; the executor won't pay
+ * any attention to the targetlist.
*/
if (returningLists)
node->plan.targetlist = copyObject(linitial(returningLists));
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/initsplan.c,v 1.157 2010/01/02 16:57:47 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/initsplan.c,v 1.158 2010/02/26 02:00:45 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* FOR UPDATE applied to a view. Only after rewriting and flattening do
* we know whether the view contains an outer join.
*
- * We use the original RowMarkClause list here; the PlanRowMark list
- * would list everything.
+ * We use the original RowMarkClause list here; the PlanRowMark list would
+ * list everything.
*/
foreach(l, root->parse->rowMarks)
{
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planner.c,v 1.265 2010/02/12 17:33:20 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planner.c,v 1.266 2010/02/26 02:00:45 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
}
/*
- * Preprocess RowMark information. We need to do this after subquery
+ * Preprocess RowMark information. We need to do this after subquery
* pullup (so that all non-inherited RTEs are present) and before
* inheritance expansion (so that the info is available for
* expand_inherited_tables to examine and modify).
/* If it's not SELECT, we need a ModifyTable node */
if (parse->commandType != CMD_SELECT)
{
- List *returningLists;
- List *rowMarks;
+ List *returningLists;
+ List *rowMarks;
/*
* Deal with the RETURNING clause if any. It's convenient to pass
rlist = set_returning_clause_references(root->glob,
parse->returningList,
plan,
- parse->resultRelation);
+ parse->resultRelation);
returningLists = list_make1(rlist);
}
else
rowMarks = root->rowMarks;
plan = (Plan *) make_modifytable(parse->commandType,
- copyObject(root->resultRelations),
+ copyObject(root->resultRelations),
list_make1(plan),
returningLists,
rowMarks,
* Simplify constant expressions.
*
* Note: an essential effect of this is to convert named-argument function
- * calls to positional notation and insert the current actual values
- * of any default arguments for functions. To ensure that happens, we
- * *must* process all expressions here. Previous PG versions sometimes
- * skipped const-simplification if it didn't seem worth the trouble, but
- * we can't do that anymore.
+ * calls to positional notation and insert the current actual values of
+ * any default arguments for functions. To ensure that happens, we *must*
+ * process all expressions here. Previous PG versions sometimes skipped
+ * const-simplification if it didn't seem worth the trouble, but we can't
+ * do that anymore.
*
* Note: this also flattens nested AND and OR expressions into N-argument
* form. All processing of a qual expression after this point must be
List *rlist;
rlist = set_returning_clause_references(root->glob,
- subroot.parse->returningList,
+ subroot.parse->returningList,
subplan,
appinfo->child_relid);
returningLists = lappend(returningLists, rlist);
root->query_pathkeys = NIL;
/*
- * If we managed to exclude every child rel, return a dummy plan;
- * it doesn't even need a ModifyTable node.
+ * If we managed to exclude every child rel, return a dummy plan; it
+ * doesn't even need a ModifyTable node.
*/
if (subplans == NIL)
{
parse->rtable = rtable;
/*
- * If there was a FOR UPDATE/SHARE clause, the LockRows node will
- * have dealt with fetching non-locked marked rows, else we need
- * to have ModifyTable do that.
+ * If there was a FOR UPDATE/SHARE clause, the LockRows node will have
+ * dealt with fetching non-locked marked rows, else we need to have
+ * ModifyTable do that.
*/
if (parse->rowMarks)
rowMarks = NIL;
/* And last, tack on a ModifyTable node to do the UPDATE/DELETE work */
return (Plan *) make_modifytable(parse->commandType,
copyObject(root->resultRelations),
- subplans,
+ subplans,
returningLists,
rowMarks,
SS_assign_special_param(root));
}
else
{
- path_rows = 1; /* assume non-set result */
- path_width = 100; /* arbitrary */
+ path_rows = 1; /* assume non-set result */
+ path_width = 100; /* arbitrary */
}
if (parse->groupClause)
* WindowFuncs. It's probably not worth trying to optimize that
* though.) We also need any volatile sort expressions, because
* make_sort_from_pathkeys won't add those on its own, and anyway
- * we want them evaluated only once at the bottom of the stack.
- * As we climb up the stack, we add outputs for the WindowFuncs
+ * we want them evaluated only once at the bottom of the stack. As
+ * we climb up the stack, we add outputs for the WindowFuncs
* computed at each level. Also, each input tlist has to present
* all the columns needed to sort the data for the next WindowAgg
* step. That's handled internally by make_sort_from_pathkeys,
}
/*
- * If there is a FOR UPDATE/SHARE clause, add the LockRows node.
- * (Note: we intentionally test parse->rowMarks not root->rowMarks here.
- * If there are only non-locking rowmarks, they should be handled by
- * the ModifyTable node instead.)
+ * If there is a FOR UPDATE/SHARE clause, add the LockRows node. (Note: we
+ * intentionally test parse->rowMarks not root->rowMarks here. If there
+ * are only non-locking rowmarks, they should be handled by the
+ * ModifyTable node instead.)
*/
if (parse->rowMarks)
{
result_plan = (Plan *) make_lockrows(result_plan,
root->rowMarks,
SS_assign_special_param(root));
+
/*
* The result can no longer be assumed sorted, since locking might
* cause the sort key columns to be replaced with new values.
}
/*
- * We need to have rowmarks for all base relations except the target.
- * We make a bitmapset of all base rels and then remove the items we
- * don't need or have FOR UPDATE/SHARE marks for.
+ * We need to have rowmarks for all base relations except the target. We
+ * make a bitmapset of all base rels and then remove the items we don't
+ * need or have FOR UPDATE/SHARE marks for.
*/
rels = get_base_rel_indexes((Node *) parse->jointree);
if (parse->resultRelation)
/*
* Currently, it is syntactically impossible to have FOR UPDATE
- * applied to an update/delete target rel. If that ever becomes
+ * applied to an update/delete target rel. If that ever becomes
* possible, we should drop the target from the PlanRowMark list.
*/
Assert(rc->rti != parse->resultRelation);
/*
- * Ignore RowMarkClauses for subqueries; they aren't real tables
- * and can't support true locking. Subqueries that got flattened
- * into the main query should be ignored completely. Any that didn't
- * will get ROW_MARK_COPY items in the next loop.
+ * Ignore RowMarkClauses for subqueries; they aren't real tables and
+ * can't support true locking. Subqueries that got flattened into the
+ * main query should be ignored completely. Any that didn't will get
+ * ROW_MARK_COPY items in the next loop.
*/
if (rte->rtekind != RTE_RELATION)
continue;
newrc->markType = ROW_MARK_REFERENCE;
else
newrc->markType = ROW_MARK_COPY;
- newrc->noWait = false; /* doesn't matter */
+ newrc->noWait = false; /* doesn't matter */
newrc->isParent = false;
/* attnos will be assigned in preprocess_targetlist */
newrc->ctidAttNo = InvalidAttrNumber;
/*
* Executor doesn't support hashed aggregation with DISTINCT or ORDER BY
- * aggregates. (Doing so would imply storing *all* the input values in
+ * aggregates. (Doing so would imply storing *all* the input values in
* the hash table, and/or running many sorts in parallel, either of which
* seems like a certain loser.)
*/
Path sorted_p;
/*
- * If we have a sortable DISTINCT ON clause, we always use sorting.
- * This enforces the expected behavior of DISTINCT ON.
+ * If we have a sortable DISTINCT ON clause, we always use sorting. This
+ * enforces the expected behavior of DISTINCT ON.
*/
can_sort = grouping_is_sortable(parse->distinctClause);
if (can_sort && parse->hasDistinctOn)
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/setrefs.c,v 1.159 2010/02/14 18:42:15 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/setrefs.c,v 1.160 2010/02/26 02:00:45 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* Like the plan types above, LockRows doesn't evaluate its
- * tlist or quals. But we have to fix up the RT indexes
- * in its rowmarks.
+ * tlist or quals. But we have to fix up the RT indexes in
+ * its rowmarks.
*/
set_dummy_tlist_references(plan, rtoffset);
Assert(splan->plan.qual == NIL);
break;
case T_WindowAgg:
{
- WindowAgg *wplan = (WindowAgg *) plan;
+ WindowAgg *wplan = (WindowAgg *) plan;
set_upper_references(glob, plan, rtoffset);
exprType((Node *) tle->expr),
exprTypmod((Node *) tle->expr),
0);
- newvar->varnoold = 0; /* wasn't ever a plain Var */
+ newvar->varnoold = 0; /* wasn't ever a plain Var */
newvar->varoattno = 0;
return newvar;
}
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/subselect.c,v 1.160 2010/02/14 18:42:15 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/subselect.c,v 1.161 2010/02/26 02:00:46 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* output parameters of any initPlans. (We do not include output
* parameters of regular subplans. Those should only appear within the
* testexpr of SubPlan nodes, and are taken care of locally within
- * finalize_primnode. Likewise, special parameters that are generated
- * by nodes such as ModifyTable are handled within finalize_plan.)
+ * finalize_primnode. Likewise, special parameters that are generated by
+ * nodes such as ModifyTable are handled within finalize_plan.)
*
* Note: this is a bit overly generous since some parameters of upper
* query levels might belong to query subtrees that don't include this
* You might think we should add the node's cteParam to
* paramids, but we shouldn't because that param is just a
* linkage mechanism for multiple CteScan nodes for the same
- * CTE; it is never used for changed-param signaling. What
- * we have to do instead is to find the referenced CTE plan
- * and incorporate its external paramids, so that the correct
+ * CTE; it is never used for changed-param signaling. What we
+ * have to do instead is to find the referenced CTE plan and
+ * incorporate its external paramids, so that the correct
* things will happen if the CTE references outer-level
* variables. See test cases for bug #4902.
*/
- int plan_id = ((CteScan *) plan)->ctePlanId;
- Plan *cteplan;
+ int plan_id = ((CteScan *) plan)->ctePlanId;
+ Plan *cteplan;
/* so, do this ... */
if (plan_id < 1 || plan_id > list_length(root->glob->subplans))
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepjointree.c,v 1.70 2010/01/02 16:57:47 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepjointree.c,v 1.71 2010/02/26 02:00:46 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
typedef struct pullup_replace_vars_context
{
PlannerInfo *root;
- List *targetlist; /* tlist of subquery being pulled up */
- RangeTblEntry *target_rte; /* RTE of subquery */
- bool *outer_hasSubLinks; /* -> outer query's hasSubLinks */
- int varno; /* varno of subquery */
- bool need_phvs; /* do we need PlaceHolderVars? */
- bool wrap_non_vars; /* do we need 'em on *all* non-Vars? */
- Node **rv_cache; /* cache for results with PHVs */
+ List *targetlist; /* tlist of subquery being pulled up */
+ RangeTblEntry *target_rte; /* RTE of subquery */
+ bool *outer_hasSubLinks; /* -> outer query's hasSubLinks */
+ int varno; /* varno of subquery */
+ bool need_phvs; /* do we need PlaceHolderVars? */
+ bool wrap_non_vars; /* do we need 'em on *all* non-Vars? */
+ Node **rv_cache; /* cache for results with PHVs */
} pullup_replace_vars_context;
typedef struct reduce_outer_joins_state
pullup_replace_vars_context *context,
JoinExpr *lowest_outer_join);
static Node *pullup_replace_vars(Node *expr,
- pullup_replace_vars_context *context);
+ pullup_replace_vars_context *context);
static Node *pullup_replace_vars_callback(Var *var,
replace_rte_variables_context *context);
static reduce_outer_joins_state *reduce_outer_joins_pass1(Node *jtnode);
* insert into the top query, but if we are under an outer join then
* non-nullable items may have to be turned into PlaceHolderVars. If we
* are dealing with an appendrel member then anything that's not a simple
- * Var has to be turned into a PlaceHolderVar. Set up appropriate context
+ * Var has to be turned into a PlaceHolderVar. Set up appropriate context
* data for pullup_replace_vars.
*/
rvcontext.root = root;
* replace any of the jointree structure. (This'd be a lot cleaner if we
* could use query_tree_mutator.) We have to use PHVs in the targetList,
* returningList, and havingQual, since those are certainly above any
- * outer join. replace_vars_in_jointree tracks its location in the
+ * outer join. replace_vars_in_jointree tracks its location in the
* jointree and uses PHVs or not appropriately.
*/
parse->targetList = (List *)
foreach(lc, root->append_rel_list)
{
AppendRelInfo *appinfo = (AppendRelInfo *) lfirst(lc);
- bool save_need_phvs = rvcontext.need_phvs;
+ bool save_need_phvs = rvcontext.need_phvs;
if (appinfo == containing_appendrel)
rvcontext.need_phvs = false;
* We also have to fix the relid sets of any PlaceHolderVar nodes in the
* parent query. (This could perhaps be done by pullup_replace_vars(),
* but it seems cleaner to use two passes.) Note in particular that any
- * PlaceHolderVar nodes just created by pullup_replace_vars()
- * will be adjusted, so having created them with the subquery's varno is
- * correct.
+ * PlaceHolderVar nodes just created by pullup_replace_vars() will be
+ * adjusted, so having created them with the subquery's varno is correct.
*
* Likewise, relids appearing in AppendRelInfo nodes have to be fixed. We
* already checked that this won't require introducing multiple subrelids
*
* We also don't pull up a subquery that has explicit FOR UPDATE/SHARE
* clauses, because pullup would cause the locking to occur semantically
- * higher than it should. Implicit FOR UPDATE/SHARE is okay because
- * in that case the locking was originally declared in the upper query
+ * higher than it should. Implicit FOR UPDATE/SHARE is okay because in
+ * that case the locking was originally declared in the upper query
* anyway.
*/
if (subquery->hasAggs ||
else if (IsA(jtnode, JoinExpr))
{
JoinExpr *j = (JoinExpr *) jtnode;
- bool save_need_phvs = context->need_phvs;
+ bool save_need_phvs = context->need_phvs;
if (j == lowest_outer_join)
{
* expansion with varlevelsup = 0, and then adjust if needed.
*/
expandRTE(rcon->target_rte,
- var->varno, 0 /* not varlevelsup */, var->location,
+ var->varno, 0 /* not varlevelsup */ , var->location,
(var->vartype != RECORDOID),
&colnames, &fields);
/* Adjust the generated per-field Vars, but don't insert PHVs */
newnode = (Node *) rowexpr;
/*
- * Insert PlaceHolderVar if needed. Notice that we are wrapping
- * one PlaceHolderVar around the whole RowExpr, rather than putting
- * one around each element of the row. This is because we need
- * the expression to yield NULL, not ROW(NULL,NULL,...) when it
- * is forced to null by an outer join.
+ * Insert PlaceHolderVar if needed. Notice that we are wrapping one
+ * PlaceHolderVar around the whole RowExpr, rather than putting one
+ * around each element of the row. This is because we need the
+ * expression to yield NULL, not ROW(NULL,NULL,...) when it is forced
+ * to null by an outer join.
*/
if (rcon->need_phvs)
{
/* Insert PlaceHolderVar if needed */
if (rcon->need_phvs)
{
- bool wrap;
+ bool wrap;
if (newnode && IsA(newnode, Var) &&
((Var *) newnode)->varlevelsup == 0)
/*
* Cache it if possible (ie, if the attno is in range, which it
- * probably always should be). We can cache the value even if
- * we decided we didn't need a PHV, since this result will be
+ * probably always should be). We can cache the value even if we
+ * decided we didn't need a PHV, since this result will be
* suitable for any request that has need_phvs.
*/
if (varattno > InvalidAttrNumber &&
* top query could (yet) contain such a reference.
*
* NOTE: although this has the form of a walker, we cheat and modify the
- * nodes in-place. This should be OK since the tree was copied by
+ * nodes in-place. This should be OK since the tree was copied by
* pullup_replace_vars earlier. Avoid scribbling on the original values of
* the bitmapsets, though, because expression_tree_mutator doesn't copy those.
*/
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/prep/preptlist.c,v 1.99 2010/01/02 16:57:47 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/prep/preptlist.c,v 1.100 2010/02/26 02:00:46 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
}
/*
- * Add necessary junk columns for rowmarked rels. These values are
- * needed for locking of rels selected FOR UPDATE/SHARE, and to do
- * EvalPlanQual rechecking. While we are at it, store these junk attnos
- * in the PlanRowMark list so that we don't have to redetermine them
- * at runtime.
+ * Add necessary junk columns for rowmarked rels. These values are needed
+ * for locking of rels selected FOR UPDATE/SHARE, and to do EvalPlanQual
+ * rechecking. While we are at it, store these junk attnos in the
+ * PlanRowMark list so that we don't have to redetermine them at runtime.
*/
foreach(lc, root->rowMarks)
{
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c,v 1.180 2010/02/01 19:28:56 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c,v 1.181 2010/02/26 02:00:46 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* If parent relation is selected FOR UPDATE/SHARE, we need to mark its
- * PlanRowMark as isParent = true, and generate a new PlanRowMark for
- * each child.
+ * PlanRowMark as isParent = true, and generate a new PlanRowMark for each
+ * child.
*/
if (oldrc)
oldrc->isParent = true;
childrte = copyObject(rte);
childrte->relid = childOID;
childrte->inh = false;
- childrte->requiredPerms = 0; /* do not require permissions on child tables */
+ childrte->requiredPerms = 0; /* do not require permissions on child
+ * tables */
parse->rtable = lappend(parse->rtable, childrte);
childRTindex = list_length(parse->rtable);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/clauses.c,v 1.285 2010/02/14 18:42:15 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/clauses.c,v 1.286 2010/02/26 02:00:46 momjian Exp $
*
* HISTORY
* AUTHOR DATE MAJOR EVENT
eval_const_expressions_context *context);
static List *fetch_function_defaults(HeapTuple func_tuple);
static void recheck_cast_function_args(List *args, Oid result_type,
- HeapTuple func_tuple);
+ HeapTuple func_tuple);
static Expr *evaluate_function(Oid funcid,
Oid result_type, int32 result_typmod, List *args,
HeapTuple func_tuple,
ListCell *lc;
/*
- * Reduce constants in the FuncExpr's arguments, and check to see
- * if there are any named args.
+ * Reduce constants in the FuncExpr's arguments, and check to see if
+ * there are any named args.
*/
args = NIL;
has_named_args = false;
foreach(lc, expr->args)
{
- Node *arg = (Node *) lfirst(lc);
+ Node *arg = (Node *) lfirst(lc);
arg = eval_const_expressions_mutator(arg, context);
if (IsA(arg, NamedArgExpr))
/*
* The expression cannot be simplified any further, so build and
* return a replacement FuncExpr node using the possibly-simplified
- * arguments. Note that we have also converted the argument list
- * to positional notation.
+ * arguments. Note that we have also converted the argument list to
+ * positional notation.
*/
newexpr = makeNode(FuncExpr);
newexpr->funcid = expr->funcid;
if (opno == BooleanEqualOperator)
{
if (DatumGetBool(((Const *) leftop)->constvalue))
- return rightop; /* true = foo */
+ return rightop; /* true = foo */
else
- return make_notclause(rightop); /* false = foo */
+ return make_notclause(rightop); /* false = foo */
}
else
{
if (DatumGetBool(((Const *) leftop)->constvalue))
- return make_notclause(rightop); /* true <> foo */
+ return make_notclause(rightop); /* true <> foo */
else
- return rightop; /* false <> foo */
+ return rightop; /* false <> foo */
}
}
if (rightop && IsA(rightop, Const))
if (opno == BooleanEqualOperator)
{
if (DatumGetBool(((Const *) rightop)->constvalue))
- return leftop; /* foo = true */
+ return leftop; /* foo = true */
else
- return make_notclause(leftop); /* foo = false */
+ return make_notclause(leftop); /* foo = false */
}
else
{
if (DatumGetBool(((Const *) rightop)->constvalue))
- return make_notclause(leftop); /* foo <> true */
+ return make_notclause(leftop); /* foo <> true */
else
- return leftop; /* foo <> false */
+ return leftop; /* foo <> false */
}
}
return NULL;
i = 0;
foreach(lc, args)
{
- Node *arg = (Node *) lfirst(lc);
+ Node *arg = (Node *) lfirst(lc);
if (!IsA(arg, NamedArgExpr))
{
}
/*
- * Fetch default expressions, if needed, and insert into array at
- * proper locations (they aren't necessarily consecutive or all used)
+ * Fetch default expressions, if needed, and insert into array at proper
+ * locations (they aren't necessarily consecutive or all used)
*/
defargnumbers = NULL;
if (nargsprovided < pronargs)
{
- List *defaults = fetch_function_defaults(func_tuple);
+ List *defaults = fetch_function_defaults(func_tuple);
i = pronargs - funcform->pronargdefaults;
foreach(lc, defaults)
recheck_cast_function_args(args, result_type, func_tuple);
/*
- * Lastly, we have to recursively simplify the defaults we just added
- * (but don't recurse on the args passed in, as we already did those).
- * This isn't merely an optimization, it's *necessary* since there could
- * be functions with named or defaulted arguments down in there.
+ * Lastly, we have to recursively simplify the defaults we just added (but
+ * don't recurse on the args passed in, as we already did those). This
+ * isn't merely an optimization, it's *necessary* since there could be
+ * functions with named or defaulted arguments down in there.
*
* Note that we do this last in hopes of simplifying any typecasts that
* were added by recheck_cast_function_args --- there shouldn't be any new
recheck_cast_function_args(args, result_type, func_tuple);
/*
- * Lastly, we have to recursively simplify the defaults we just added
- * (but don't recurse on the args passed in, as we already did those).
- * This isn't merely an optimization, it's *necessary* since there could
- * be functions with named or defaulted arguments down in there.
+ * Lastly, we have to recursively simplify the defaults we just added (but
+ * don't recurse on the args passed in, as we already did those). This
+ * isn't merely an optimization, it's *necessary* since there could be
+ * functions with named or defaulted arguments down in there.
*
* Note that we do this last in hopes of simplifying any typecasts that
* were added by recheck_cast_function_args --- there shouldn't be any new
oldcxt = MemoryContextSwitchTo(mycxt);
/*
- * Run eval_const_expressions on the function call. This is necessary
- * to ensure that named-argument notation is converted to positional
- * notation and any default arguments are inserted. It's a bit of
- * overkill for the arguments, since they'll get processed again later,
- * but no harm will be done.
+ * Run eval_const_expressions on the function call. This is necessary to
+ * ensure that named-argument notation is converted to positional notation
+ * and any default arguments are inserted. It's a bit of overkill for the
+ * arguments, since they'll get processed again later, but no harm will be
+ * done.
*/
fexpr = (FuncExpr *) eval_const_expressions(root, (Node *) fexpr);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/pathnode.c,v 1.156 2010/01/02 16:57:48 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/pathnode.c,v 1.157 2010/02/26 02:00:47 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
{
NoOpPath *pathnode = makeNode(NoOpPath);
- pathnode->path.pathtype = T_Join; /* by convention */
+ pathnode->path.pathtype = T_Join; /* by convention */
pathnode->path.parent = rel;
pathnode->path.startup_cost = subpath->startup_cost;
pathnode->path.total_cost = subpath->total_cost;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/predtest.c,v 1.32 2010/02/25 20:59:53 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/predtest.c,v 1.33 2010/02/26 02:00:47 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* If A is a strong NOT-clause, A R=> B if B equals A's arg
*
- * We cannot make the stronger conclusion that B is refuted if
- * B implies A's arg; that would only prove that B is not-TRUE,
- * not that it's not NULL either. Hence use equal() rather than
- * predicate_implied_by_recurse(). We could do the latter if we
+ * We cannot make the stronger conclusion that B is refuted if B
+ * implies A's arg; that would only prove that B is not-TRUE, not
+ * that it's not NULL either. Hence use equal() rather than
+ * predicate_implied_by_recurse(). We could do the latter if we
* ever had a need for the weak form of refutation.
*/
not_arg = extract_strong_not_arg(clause);
else if (OidIsValid(clause_op_negator))
{
clause_tuple = SearchSysCache2(AMOPOPID,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(clause_op_negator),
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(clause_op_negator),
ObjectIdGetDatum(opfamily_id));
if (HeapTupleIsValid(clause_tuple))
{
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/relnode.c,v 1.97 2010/01/02 16:57:48 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/relnode.c,v 1.98 2010/02/26 02:00:47 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* Also, if dynamic-programming join search is active, add the new joinrel
- * to the appropriate sublist. Note: you might think the Assert on
- * number of members should be for equality, but some of the level 1
- * rels might have been joinrels already, so we can only assert <=.
+ * to the appropriate sublist. Note: you might think the Assert on number
+ * of members should be for equality, but some of the level 1 rels might
+ * have been joinrels already, so we can only assert <=.
*/
if (root->join_rel_level)
{
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/restrictinfo.c,v 1.62 2010/01/02 16:57:48 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/restrictinfo.c,v 1.63 2010/02/26 02:00:49 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
foreach(l, clause_list)
{
- Expr *clause = (Expr *) lfirst(l);
- bool pseudoconstant;
+ Expr *clause = (Expr *) lfirst(l);
+ bool pseudoconstant;
RestrictInfo *rinfo;
/*
* It's pseudoconstant if it contains no Vars and no volatile
* functions. We probably can't see any sublinks here, so
- * contain_var_clause() would likely be enough, but for safety
- * use contain_vars_of_level() instead.
+ * contain_var_clause() would likely be enough, but for safety use
+ * contain_vars_of_level() instead.
*/
pseudoconstant =
!contain_vars_of_level((Node *) clause, 0) &&
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/analyze.c,v 1.401 2010/02/12 22:48:56 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/analyze.c,v 1.402 2010/02/26 02:00:49 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static Node *transformSetOperationTree(ParseState *pstate, SelectStmt *stmt,
bool isTopLevel, List **colInfo);
static void determineRecursiveColTypes(ParseState *pstate,
- Node *larg, List *lcolinfo);
+ Node *larg, List *lcolinfo);
static void applyColumnNames(List *dst, List *src);
static Query *transformUpdateStmt(ParseState *pstate, UpdateStmt *stmt);
static List *transformReturningList(ParseState *pstate, List *returningList);
static Query *transformExplainStmt(ParseState *pstate,
ExplainStmt *stmt);
static void transformLockingClause(ParseState *pstate, Query *qry,
- LockingClause *lc, bool pushedDown);
+ LockingClause *lc, bool pushedDown);
/*
qry->sortClause = transformSortClause(pstate,
stmt->sortClause,
&qry->targetList,
- true /* fix unknowns */,
- false /* allow SQL92 rules */);
+ true /* fix unknowns */ ,
+ false /* allow SQL92 rules */ );
qry->groupClause = transformGroupClause(pstate,
stmt->groupClause,
&qry->targetList,
qry->sortClause,
- false /* allow SQL92 rules */);
+ false /* allow SQL92 rules */ );
if (stmt->distinctClause == NIL)
{
qry->sortClause = transformSortClause(pstate,
stmt->sortClause,
&qry->targetList,
- true /* fix unknowns */,
- false /* allow SQL92 rules */);
+ true /* fix unknowns */ ,
+ false /* allow SQL92 rules */ );
qry->limitOffset = transformLimitClause(pstate, stmt->limitOffset,
"OFFSET");
qry->sortClause = transformSortClause(pstate,
sortClause,
&qry->targetList,
- false /* no unknowns expected */,
- false /* allow SQL92 rules */);
+ false /* no unknowns expected */ ,
+ false /* allow SQL92 rules */ );
pstate->p_rtable = list_truncate(pstate->p_rtable, sv_rtable_length);
pstate->p_relnamespace = sv_relnamespace;
&lcolinfo);
/*
- * If we are processing a recursive union query, now is the time
- * to examine the non-recursive term's output columns and mark the
+ * If we are processing a recursive union query, now is the time to
+ * examine the non-recursive term's output columns and mark the
* containing CTE as having those result columns. We should do this
* only at the topmost setop of the CTE, of course.
*/
rescoltypmod = -1;
/*
- * Verify the coercions are actually possible. If not, we'd
- * fail later anyway, but we want to fail now while we have
- * sufficient context to produce an error cursor position.
+ * Verify the coercions are actually possible. If not, we'd fail
+ * later anyway, but we want to fail now while we have sufficient
+ * context to produce an error cursor position.
*
* The if-tests might look wrong, but they are correct: we should
* verify if the input is non-UNKNOWN *or* if it is an UNKNOWN
* Const (to verify the literal is valid for the target data type)
* or Param (to possibly resolve the Param's type). We should do
* nothing if the input is say an UNKNOWN Var, which can happen in
- * some cases. The planner is sometimes able to fold the Var to a
+ * some cases. The planner is sometimes able to fold the Var to a
* constant before it has to coerce the type, so failing now would
* just break cases that might work.
*/
if (lcoltype != UNKNOWNOID ||
- IsA(lcolnode, Const) || IsA(lcolnode, Param))
+ IsA(lcolnode, Const) ||IsA(lcolnode, Param))
(void) coerce_to_common_type(pstate, lcolnode,
rescoltype, context);
if (rcoltype != UNKNOWNOID ||
- IsA(rcolnode, Const) || IsA(rcolnode, Param))
+ IsA(rcolnode, Const) ||IsA(rcolnode, Param))
(void) coerce_to_common_type(pstate, rcolnode,
rescoltype, context);
Assert(leftmostQuery != NULL);
/*
- * Generate dummy targetlist using column names of leftmost select
- * and dummy result expressions of the non-recursive term.
+ * Generate dummy targetlist using column names of leftmost select and
+ * dummy result expressions of the non-recursive term.
*/
targetList = NIL;
left_tlist = list_head(leftmostQuery->targetList);
case RTE_SUBQUERY:
applyLockingClause(qry, i,
lc->forUpdate, lc->noWait, pushedDown);
+
/*
* FOR UPDATE/SHARE of subquery is propagated to all of
- * subquery's rels, too. We could do this later (based
- * on the marking of the subquery RTE) but it is convenient
- * to have local knowledge in each query level about
- * which rels need to be opened with RowShareLock.
+ * subquery's rels, too. We could do this later (based on
+ * the marking of the subquery RTE) but it is convenient
+ * to have local knowledge in each query level about which
+ * rels need to be opened with RowShareLock.
*/
transformLockingClause(pstate, rte->subquery,
allrels, true);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_agg.c,v 1.91 2010/02/12 17:33:20 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_agg.c,v 1.92 2010/02/26 02:00:49 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
*
* Here we convert the args list into a targetlist by inserting TargetEntry
* nodes, and then transform the aggorder and agg_distinct specifications to
- * produce lists of SortGroupClause nodes. (That might also result in adding
+ * produce lists of SortGroupClause nodes. (That might also result in adding
* resjunk expressions to the targetlist.)
*
* We must also determine which query level the aggregate actually belongs to,
void
transformAggregateCall(ParseState *pstate, Aggref *agg, bool agg_distinct)
{
- List *tlist;
- List *torder;
- List *tdistinct = NIL;
- AttrNumber attno;
- int save_next_resno;
+ List *tlist;
+ List *torder;
+ List *tdistinct = NIL;
+ AttrNumber attno;
+ int save_next_resno;
int min_varlevel;
ListCell *lc;
attno = 1;
foreach(lc, agg->args)
{
- Expr *arg = (Expr *) lfirst(lc);
+ Expr *arg = (Expr *) lfirst(lc);
TargetEntry *tle = makeTargetEntry(arg, attno++, NULL, false);
tlist = lappend(tlist, tle);
torder = transformSortClause(pstate,
agg->aggorder,
&tlist,
- true /* fix unknowns */,
- true /* force SQL99 rules */);
+ true /* fix unknowns */ ,
+ true /* force SQL99 rules */ );
/*
* If we have DISTINCT, transform that to produce a distinctList.
if (!OidIsValid(sortcl->sortop))
{
- Node *expr = get_sortgroupclause_expr(sortcl, tlist);
+ Node *expr = get_sortgroupclause_expr(sortcl, tlist);
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_FUNCTION),
- errmsg("could not identify an ordering operator for type %s",
- format_type_be(exprType(expr))),
+ errmsg("could not identify an ordering operator for type %s",
+ format_type_be(exprType(expr))),
errdetail("Aggregates with DISTINCT must be able to sort their inputs."),
parser_errposition(pstate, exprLocation(expr))));
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_clause.c,v 1.197 2010/02/12 17:33:20 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_clause.c,v 1.198 2010/02/26 02:00:50 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static Node *buildMergedJoinVar(ParseState *pstate, JoinType jointype,
Var *l_colvar, Var *r_colvar);
static void checkExprIsVarFree(ParseState *pstate, Node *n,
- const char *constructName);
+ const char *constructName);
static TargetEntry *findTargetlistEntrySQL92(ParseState *pstate, Node *node,
List **tlist, int clause);
static TargetEntry *findTargetlistEntrySQL99(ParseState *pstate, Node *node,
bool resolveUnknown);
static WindowClause *findWindowClause(List *wclist, const char *name);
static Node *transformFrameOffset(ParseState *pstate, int frameOptions,
- Node *clause);
+ Node *clause);
/*
ListCell *lx,
*rx;
- Assert(j->usingClause == NIL); /* shouldn't have USING() too */
+ Assert(j->usingClause == NIL); /* shouldn't have USING() too */
foreach(lx, l_colnames)
{
*
* This function supports the old SQL92 ORDER BY interpretation, where the
* expression is an output column name or number. If we fail to find a
- * match of that sort, we fall through to the SQL99 rules. For historical
+ * match of that sort, we fall through to the SQL99 rules. For historical
* reasons, Postgres also allows this interpretation for GROUP BY, though
- * the standard never did. However, for GROUP BY we prefer a SQL99 match.
+ * the standard never did. However, for GROUP BY we prefer a SQL99 match.
* This function is *not* used for WINDOW definitions.
*
* node the ORDER BY, GROUP BY, or DISTINCT ON expression to be matched
/*
* Convert the untransformed node to a transformed expression, and search
* for a match in the tlist. NOTE: it doesn't really matter whether there
- * is more than one match. Also, we are willing to match an existing
+ * is more than one match. Also, we are willing to match an existing
* resjunk target here, though the SQL92 cases above must ignore resjunk
* targets.
*/
orderClause = transformSortClause(pstate,
windef->orderClause,
targetlist,
- true /* fix unknowns */,
- true /* force SQL99 rules */);
+ true /* fix unknowns */ ,
+ true /* force SQL99 rules */ );
partitionClause = transformGroupClause(pstate,
windef->partitionClause,
targetlist,
orderClause,
- true /* force SQL99 rules */);
+ true /* force SQL99 rules */ );
/*
* And prepare the new WindowClause.
else if (frameOptions & FRAMEOPTION_RANGE)
{
/*
- * this needs a lot of thought to decide how to support in the
- * context of Postgres' extensible datatype framework
+ * this needs a lot of thought to decide how to support in the context
+ * of Postgres' extensible datatype framework
*/
constructName = "RANGE";
/* error was already thrown by gram.y, this is just a backstop */
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_coerce.c,v 2.180 2010/02/14 18:42:15 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_coerce.c,v 2.181 2010/02/26 02:00:52 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
pstate != NULL && pstate->p_coerce_param_hook != NULL)
{
/*
- * Allow the CoerceParamHook to decide what happens. It can return
- * a transformed node (very possibly the same Param node), or return
+ * Allow the CoerceParamHook to decide what happens. It can return a
+ * transformed node (very possibly the same Param node), or return
* NULL to indicate we should proceed with normal coercion.
*/
result = (*pstate->p_coerce_param_hook) (pstate,
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c,v 1.253 2010/01/02 16:57:49 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c,v 1.254 2010/02/26 02:00:52 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static Node *transformCurrentOfExpr(ParseState *pstate, CurrentOfExpr *cexpr);
static Node *transformColumnRef(ParseState *pstate, ColumnRef *cref);
static Node *transformWholeRowRef(ParseState *pstate, RangeTblEntry *rte,
- int location);
+ int location);
static Node *transformIndirection(ParseState *pstate, Node *basenode,
List *indirection);
static Node *transformTypeCast(ParseState *pstate, TypeCast *tc);
* not a domain, transformTypeCast is a no-op.
*/
targetType = getBaseTypeAndTypmod(targetType,
- &targetTypmod);
-
+ &targetTypmod);
+
tc = copyObject(tc);
tc->arg = transformArrayExpr(pstate,
(A_ArrayExpr *) tc->arg,
char *colname = NULL;
RangeTblEntry *rte;
int levels_up;
- enum {
+ enum
+ {
CRERR_NO_COLUMN,
CRERR_NO_RTE,
CRERR_WRONG_DB,
} crerr = CRERR_NO_COLUMN;
/*
- * Give the PreParseColumnRefHook, if any, first shot. If it returns
+ * Give the PreParseColumnRefHook, if any, first shot. If it returns
* non-null then that's all, folks.
*/
if (pstate->p_pre_columnref_hook != NULL)
break;
}
default:
- crerr = CRERR_TOO_MANY; /* too many dotted names */
+ crerr = CRERR_TOO_MANY; /* too many dotted names */
break;
}
/*
* Now give the PostParseColumnRefHook, if any, a chance. We pass the
* translation-so-far so that it can throw an error if it wishes in the
- * case that it has a conflicting interpretation of the ColumnRef.
- * (If it just translates anyway, we'll throw an error, because we can't
- * undo whatever effects the preceding steps may have had on the pstate.)
- * If it returns NULL, use the standard translation, or throw a suitable
- * error if there is none.
+ * case that it has a conflicting interpretation of the ColumnRef. (If it
+ * just translates anyway, we'll throw an error, because we can't undo
+ * whatever effects the preceding steps may have had on the pstate.) If it
+ * returns NULL, use the standard translation, or throw a suitable error
+ * if there is none.
*/
if (pstate->p_post_columnref_hook != NULL)
{
- Node *hookresult;
+ Node *hookresult;
hookresult = (*pstate->p_post_columnref_hook) (pstate, cref, node);
if (node == NULL)
case CRERR_WRONG_DB:
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED),
- errmsg("cross-database references are not implemented: %s",
- NameListToString(cref->fields)),
+ errmsg("cross-database references are not implemented: %s",
+ NameListToString(cref->fields)),
parser_errposition(pstate, cref->location)));
break;
case CRERR_TOO_MANY:
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("improper qualified name (too many dotted names): %s",
- NameListToString(cref->fields)),
+ errmsg("improper qualified name (too many dotted names): %s",
+ NameListToString(cref->fields)),
parser_errposition(pstate, cref->location)));
break;
}
Node *result;
/*
- * The core parser knows nothing about Params. If a hook is supplied,
+ * The core parser knows nothing about Params. If a hook is supplied,
* call it. If not, or if the hook returns NULL, throw a generic error.
*/
if (pstate->p_paramref_hook != NULL)
/*
* Check to see if the cursor name matches a parameter of type REFCURSOR.
- * If so, replace the raw name reference with a parameter reference.
- * (This is a hack for the convenience of plpgsql.)
+ * If so, replace the raw name reference with a parameter reference. (This
+ * is a hack for the convenience of plpgsql.)
*/
- if (cexpr->cursor_name != NULL) /* in case already transformed */
+ if (cexpr->cursor_name != NULL) /* in case already transformed */
{
ColumnRef *cref = makeNode(ColumnRef);
Node *node = NULL;
node = (*pstate->p_post_columnref_hook) (pstate, cref, NULL);
/*
- * XXX Should we throw an error if we get a translation that isn't
- * a refcursor Param? For now it seems best to silently ignore
- * false matches.
+ * XXX Should we throw an error if we get a translation that isn't a
+ * refcursor Param? For now it seems best to silently ignore false
+ * matches.
*/
if (node != NULL && IsA(node, Param))
{
- Param *p = (Param *) node;
+ Param *p = (Param *) node;
if (p->paramkind == PARAM_EXTERN &&
p->paramtype == REFCURSOROID)
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_func.c,v 1.221 2010/02/14 18:42:15 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_func.c,v 1.222 2010/02/26 02:00:52 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
*
* We allow mixed notation (some named and some not), but only with all
* the named parameters after all the unnamed ones. So the name list
- * corresponds to the last N actual parameters and we don't need any
- * extra bookkeeping to match things up.
+ * corresponds to the last N actual parameters and we don't need any extra
+ * bookkeeping to match things up.
*/
argnames = NIL;
foreach(l, fargs)
{
- Node *arg = lfirst(l);
+ Node *arg = lfirst(l);
if (IsA(arg, NamedArgExpr))
{
if (strcmp(na->name, (char *) lfirst(lc)) == 0)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("argument name \"%s\" used more than once",
- na->name),
+ errmsg("argument name \"%s\" used more than once",
+ na->name),
parser_errposition(pstate, na->location)));
}
argnames = lappend(argnames, na->name);
if (argnames != NIL)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("positional argument cannot follow named argument"),
+ errmsg("positional argument cannot follow named argument"),
parser_errposition(pstate, exprLocation(arg))));
}
}
if (agg_order != NIL)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE),
- errmsg("ORDER BY specified, but %s is not an aggregate function",
- NameListToString(funcname)),
+ errmsg("ORDER BY specified, but %s is not an aggregate function",
+ NameListToString(funcname)),
parser_errposition(pstate, location)));
if (over)
ereport(ERROR,
/*
* Oops. Time to die.
*
- * If we are dealing with the attribute notation rel.function,
- * let the caller handle failure.
+ * If we are dealing with the attribute notation rel.function, let the
+ * caller handle failure.
*/
if (is_column)
return NULL;
/*
* Currently it's not possible to define an aggregate with named
- * arguments, so this case should be impossible. Check anyway
- * because the planner and executor wouldn't cope with NamedArgExprs
- * in an Aggref node.
+ * arguments, so this case should be impossible. Check anyway because
+ * the planner and executor wouldn't cope with NamedArgExprs in an
+ * Aggref node.
*/
if (argnames != NIL)
ereport(ERROR,
parser_errposition(pstate, location)));
/*
- * We might want to support this later, but for now reject it
- * because the planner and executor wouldn't cope with NamedArgExprs
- * in a WindowFunc node.
+ * We might want to support this later, but for now reject it because
+ * the planner and executor wouldn't cope with NamedArgExprs in a
+ * WindowFunc node.
*/
if (argnames != NIL)
ereport(ERROR,
return FUNCDETAIL_MULTIPLE;
/*
- * We disallow VARIADIC with named arguments unless the last
- * argument (the one with VARIADIC attached) actually matched the
- * variadic parameter. This is mere pedantry, really, but some
- * folks insisted.
+ * We disallow VARIADIC with named arguments unless the last argument
+ * (the one with VARIADIC attached) actually matched the variadic
+ * parameter. This is mere pedantry, really, but some folks insisted.
*/
if (fargnames != NIL && !expand_variadic && nargs > 0 &&
best_candidate->argnumbers[nargs - 1] != nargs - 1)
{
/*
* This is a bit tricky in named notation, since the supplied
- * arguments could replace any subset of the defaults. We
+ * arguments could replace any subset of the defaults. We
* work by making a bitmapset of the argnumbers of defaulted
* arguments, then scanning the defaults list and selecting
* the needed items. (This assumes that defaulted arguments
* should be supplied in their positional order.)
*/
- Bitmapset *defargnumbers;
- int *firstdefarg;
- List *newdefaults;
- ListCell *lc;
- int i;
+ Bitmapset *defargnumbers;
+ int *firstdefarg;
+ List *newdefaults;
+ ListCell *lc;
+ int i;
defargnumbers = NULL;
firstdefarg = &best_candidate->argnumbers[best_candidate->nargs - best_candidate->ndargs];
else
{
/*
- * Defaults for positional notation are lots easier;
- * just remove any unwanted ones from the front.
+ * Defaults for positional notation are lots easier; just
+ * remove any unwanted ones from the front.
*/
int ndelete;
/* types don't match? then force coercion using a function call... */
if (actual_arg_types[i] != declared_arg_types[i])
{
- Node *node = (Node *) lfirst(current_fargs);
+ Node *node = (Node *) lfirst(current_fargs);
/*
- * If arg is a NamedArgExpr, coerce its input expr instead ---
- * we want the NamedArgExpr to stay at the top level of the list.
+ * If arg is a NamedArgExpr, coerce its input expr instead --- we
+ * want the NamedArgExpr to stay at the top level of the list.
*/
if (IsA(node, NamedArgExpr))
{
* The result is something like "foo(integer)".
*
* If argnames isn't NIL, it is a list of C strings representing the actual
- * arg names for the last N arguments. This must be considered part of the
+ * arg names for the last N arguments. This must be considered part of the
* function signature too, when dealing with named-notation function calls.
*
* This is typically used in the construction of function-not-found error
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_oper.c,v 1.112 2010/02/14 18:42:15 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_oper.c,v 1.113 2010/02/26 02:00:52 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
lt_opr = gt_opr = InvalidOid;
}
#else
+
/*
* ... but for the moment we have to do this. This is because
* anyarray has sorting but not hashing support. So, if the
- * element type is only hashable, there is nothing we can do
- * with the array type.
+ * element type is only hashable, there is nothing we can do with
+ * the array type.
*/
if (!OidIsValid(typentry->lt_opr) ||
!OidIsValid(typentry->eq_opr) ||
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_param.c,v 2.3 2010/01/13 01:17:07 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_param.c,v 2.4 2010/02/26 02:00:52 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static Node *fixed_paramref_hook(ParseState *pstate, ParamRef *pref);
static Node *variable_paramref_hook(ParseState *pstate, ParamRef *pref);
static Node *variable_coerce_param_hook(ParseState *pstate, Param *param,
- Oid targetTypeId, int32 targetTypeMod,
- int location);
+ Oid targetTypeId, int32 targetTypeMod,
+ int location);
static bool check_parameter_resolution_walker(Node *node, ParseState *pstate);
* of parsing with parse_variable_parameters.
*
* Note: this code intentionally does not check that all parameter positions
- * were used, nor that all got non-UNKNOWN types assigned. Caller of parser
+ * were used, nor that all got non-UNKNOWN types assigned. Caller of parser
* should enforce that if it's important.
*/
void
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_relation.c,v 1.149 2010/02/14 18:42:15 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_relation.c,v 1.150 2010/02/26 02:00:52 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* We can use LookupNamespaceNoError() here because we are only
- * interested in finding existing RTEs. Checking USAGE permission
- * on the schema is unnecessary since it would have already been
- * checked when the RTE was made. Furthermore, we want to report
- * "RTE not found", not "no permissions for schema", if the name
- * happens to match a schema name the user hasn't got access to.
+ * interested in finding existing RTEs. Checking USAGE permission on
+ * the schema is unnecessary since it would have already been checked
+ * when the RTE was made. Furthermore, we want to report "RTE not
+ * found", not "no permissions for schema", if the name happens to
+ * match a schema name the user hasn't got access to.
*/
namespaceId = LookupNamespaceNoError(schemaname);
if (!OidIsValid(relId))
/*
* Check to see if there are any potential matches in the query's
- * rangetable. (Note: cases involving a bad schema name in the
- * RangeVar will throw error immediately here. That seems OK.)
+ * rangetable. (Note: cases involving a bad schema name in the RangeVar
+ * will throw error immediately here. That seems OK.)
*/
rte = searchRangeTable(pstate, relation);
if (rte)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_TABLE),
- errmsg("invalid reference to FROM-clause entry for table \"%s\"",
- relation->relname),
+ errmsg("invalid reference to FROM-clause entry for table \"%s\"",
+ relation->relname),
(badAlias ?
- errhint("Perhaps you meant to reference the table alias \"%s\".",
- badAlias) :
+ errhint("Perhaps you meant to reference the table alias \"%s\".",
+ badAlias) :
errhint("There is an entry for table \"%s\", but it cannot be referenced from this part of the query.",
rte->eref->aliasname)),
parser_errposition(pstate, relation->location)));
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_target.c,v 1.176 2010/01/02 16:57:50 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_target.c,v 1.177 2010/02/26 02:00:52 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static List *ExpandIndirectionStar(ParseState *pstate, A_Indirection *ind,
bool targetlist);
static List *ExpandSingleTable(ParseState *pstate, RangeTblEntry *rte,
- int location, bool targetlist);
+ int location, bool targetlist);
static List *ExpandRowReference(ParseState *pstate, Node *expr,
- bool targetlist);
+ bool targetlist);
static int FigureColnameInternal(Node *node, char **name);
*
* (e.g., SELECT emp.*, dname FROM emp, dept)
*
- * Note: this code is a lot like transformColumnRef; it's tempting
- * to call that instead and then replace the resulting whole-row Var
- * with a list of Vars. However, that would leave us with the
- * RTE's selectedCols bitmap showing the whole row as needing
- * select permission, as well as the individual columns. That would
- * be incorrect (since columns added later shouldn't need select
+ * Note: this code is a lot like transformColumnRef; it's tempting to
+ * call that instead and then replace the resulting whole-row Var with
+ * a list of Vars. However, that would leave us with the RTE's
+ * selectedCols bitmap showing the whole row as needing select
+ * permission, as well as the individual columns. That would be
+ * incorrect (since columns added later shouldn't need select
* permissions). We could try to remove the whole-row permission bit
* after the fact, but duplicating code is less messy.
*/
char *relname = NULL;
RangeTblEntry *rte = NULL;
int levels_up;
- enum {
+ enum
+ {
CRSERR_NO_RTE,
CRSERR_WRONG_DB,
CRSERR_TOO_MANY
} crserr = CRSERR_NO_RTE;
/*
- * Give the PreParseColumnRefHook, if any, first shot. If it returns
+ * Give the PreParseColumnRefHook, if any, first shot. If it returns
* non-null then we should use that expression.
*/
if (pstate->p_pre_columnref_hook != NULL)
&levels_up);
break;
case 4:
- {
- char *catname = strVal(linitial(fields));
-
- /*
- * We check the catalog name and then ignore it.
- */
- if (strcmp(catname, get_database_name(MyDatabaseId)) != 0)
{
- crserr = CRSERR_WRONG_DB;
+ char *catname = strVal(linitial(fields));
+
+ /*
+ * We check the catalog name and then ignore it.
+ */
+ if (strcmp(catname, get_database_name(MyDatabaseId)) != 0)
+ {
+ crserr = CRSERR_WRONG_DB;
+ break;
+ }
+ nspname = strVal(lsecond(fields));
+ relname = strVal(lthird(fields));
+ rte = refnameRangeTblEntry(pstate, nspname, relname,
+ cref->location,
+ &levels_up);
break;
}
- nspname = strVal(lsecond(fields));
- relname = strVal(lthird(fields));
- rte = refnameRangeTblEntry(pstate, nspname, relname,
- cref->location,
- &levels_up);
- break;
- }
default:
crserr = CRSERR_TOO_MANY;
break;
}
/*
- * Now give the PostParseColumnRefHook, if any, a chance.
- * We cheat a bit by passing the RangeTblEntry, not a Var,
- * as the planned translation. (A single Var wouldn't be
- * strictly correct anyway. This convention allows hooks
- * that really care to know what is happening.)
+ * Now give the PostParseColumnRefHook, if any, a chance. We cheat a
+ * bit by passing the RangeTblEntry, not a Var, as the planned
+ * translation. (A single Var wouldn't be strictly correct anyway.
+ * This convention allows hooks that really care to know what is
+ * happening.)
*/
if (pstate->p_post_columnref_hook != NULL)
{
NULL, &vars);
/*
- * Require read access to the table. This is normally redundant
- * with the markVarForSelectPriv calls below, but not if the table
- * has zero columns.
+ * Require read access to the table. This is normally redundant with
+ * the markVarForSelectPriv calls below, but not if the table has zero
+ * columns.
*/
rte->requiredPerms |= ACL_SELECT;
/*
* If the rowtype expression is a whole-row Var, we can expand the fields
- * as simple Vars. Note: if the RTE is a relation, this case leaves us
+ * as simple Vars. Note: if the RTE is a relation, this case leaves us
* with the RTE's selectedCols bitmap showing the whole row as needing
* select permission, as well as the individual columns. However, we can
* only get here for weird notations like (table.*).*, so it's not worth
}
/*
- * Otherwise we have to do it the hard way. Our current implementation
- * is to generate multiple copies of the expression and do FieldSelects.
+ * Otherwise we have to do it the hard way. Our current implementation is
+ * to generate multiple copies of the expression and do FieldSelects.
* (This can be pretty inefficient if the expression involves nontrivial
* computation :-(.)
*
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_utilcmd.c,v 2.39 2010/02/14 18:42:15 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_utilcmd.c,v 2.40 2010/02/26 02:00:53 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void transformInhRelation(ParseState *pstate, CreateStmtContext *cxt,
InhRelation *inhrelation);
static void transformOfType(ParseState *pstate, CreateStmtContext *cxt,
- TypeName *ofTypename);
+ TypeName *ofTypename);
static char *chooseIndexName(const RangeVar *relation, IndexStmt *index_stmt);
static IndexStmt *generateClonedIndexStmt(CreateStmtContext *cxt,
Relation parent_index, AttrNumber *attmap);
cxt.pkey = NULL;
cxt.hasoids = interpretOidsOption(stmt->options);
- Assert(!stmt->ofTypename || !stmt->inhRelations); /* grammar enforces */
+ Assert(!stmt->ofTypename || !stmt->inhRelations); /* grammar enforces */
if (stmt->ofTypename)
transformOfType(pstate, &cxt, stmt->ofTypename);
break;
case CONSTR_FOREIGN:
+
/*
* Fill in the current attribute's name and throw it into the
* list of FK constraints to be processed later.
if (comment != NULL)
{
- CommentStmt *stmt;
+ CommentStmt *stmt;
/*
- * We have to assign the index a name now, so that we
- * can reference it in CommentStmt.
+ * We have to assign the index a name now, so that we can
+ * reference it in CommentStmt.
*/
if (index_stmt->idxname == NULL)
index_stmt->idxname = chooseIndexName(cxt->relation,
tuple = typenameType(NULL, ofTypename, NULL);
typ = (Form_pg_type) GETSTRUCT(tuple);
ofTypeId = HeapTupleGetOid(tuple);
- ofTypename->typeOid = ofTypeId; /* cached for later */
+ ofTypename->typeOid = ofTypeId; /* cached for later */
if (typ->typtype != TYPTYPE_COMPOSITE)
ereport(ERROR,
for (i = 0; i < tupdesc->natts; i++)
{
Form_pg_attribute attr = tupdesc->attrs[i];
- ColumnDef *n = makeNode(ColumnDef);
+ ColumnDef *n = makeNode(ColumnDef);
n->colname = pstrdup(NameStr(attr->attname));
n->typeName = makeTypeNameFromOid(attr->atttypid, attr->atttypmod);
*/
if (index->primary || index->unique || idxrelrec->relhasexclusion)
{
- Oid constraintId = get_index_constraint(source_relid);
+ Oid constraintId = get_index_constraint(source_relid);
if (OidIsValid(constraintId))
{
Form_pg_constraint conrec;
ht_constr = SearchSysCache1(CONSTROID,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(constraintId));
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(constraintId));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(ht_constr))
elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for constraint %u",
constraintId);
/* If it's an exclusion constraint, we need the operator names */
if (idxrelrec->relhasexclusion)
{
- Datum *elems;
- int nElems;
- int i;
+ Datum *elems;
+ int nElems;
+ int i;
Assert(conrec->contype == CONSTRAINT_EXCLUSION);
/* Extract operator OIDs from the pg_constraint tuple */
index->concurrent = false;
/*
- * If it's an EXCLUDE constraint, the grammar returns a list of pairs
- * of IndexElems and operator names. We have to break that apart into
+ * If it's an EXCLUDE constraint, the grammar returns a list of pairs of
+ * IndexElems and operator names. We have to break that apart into
* separate lists.
*/
if (constraint->contype == CONSTR_EXCLUSION)
{
foreach(lc, constraint->exclusions)
{
- List *pair = (List *) lfirst(lc);
- IndexElem *elem;
- List *opname;
+ List *pair = (List *) lfirst(lc);
+ IndexElem *elem;
+ List *opname;
Assert(list_length(pair) == 2);
elem = (IndexElem *) linitial(pair);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32/mingwcompat.c,v 1.10 2010/02/09 20:22:20 mha Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32/mingwcompat.c,v 1.11 2010/02/26 02:00:53 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* in any library. It's trivial enough that we can safely define it
* ourselves.
*/
-const struct in6_addr in6addr_any = {{{0,0,0,0, 0,0,0,0, 0,0,0,0, 0,0,0,0}}};
+const struct in6_addr in6addr_any = {{{0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0}}};
/*
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32/signal.c,v 1.24 2010/01/31 17:16:23 mha Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32/signal.c,v 1.25 2010/02/26 02:00:53 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
fConnected = ConnectNamedPipe(pipe, NULL) ? TRUE : (GetLastError() == ERROR_PIPE_CONNECTED);
if (fConnected)
{
- HANDLE newpipe;
+ HANDLE newpipe;
/*
- * We have a connected pipe. Pass this off to a separate thread that will do the actual
- * processing of the pipe.
+ * We have a connected pipe. Pass this off to a separate thread
+ * that will do the actual processing of the pipe.
*
- * We must also create a new instance of the pipe *before* we start running the new
- * thread. If we don't, there is a race condition whereby the dispatch thread might
- * run CloseHandle() before we have created a new instance, thereby causing a small
+ * We must also create a new instance of the pipe *before* we
+ * start running the new thread. If we don't, there is a race
+ * condition whereby the dispatch thread might run CloseHandle()
+ * before we have created a new instance, thereby causing a small
* window of time where we will miss incoming requests.
*/
newpipe = CreateNamedPipe(pipename, PIPE_ACCESS_DUPLEX,
- PIPE_TYPE_MESSAGE | PIPE_READMODE_MESSAGE | PIPE_WAIT,
- PIPE_UNLIMITED_INSTANCES, 16, 16, 1000, NULL);
+ PIPE_TYPE_MESSAGE | PIPE_READMODE_MESSAGE | PIPE_WAIT,
+ PIPE_UNLIMITED_INSTANCES, 16, 16, 1000, NULL);
if (newpipe == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE)
{
/*
- * This really should never fail. Just retry in case it does, even though we have
- * a small race window in that case. There is nothing else we can do other than
- * abort the whole process which will be even worse.
+ * This really should never fail. Just retry in case it does,
+ * even though we have a small race window in that case. There
+ * is nothing else we can do other than abort the whole
+ * process which will be even worse.
*/
write_stderr("could not create signal listener pipe: error code %d; retrying\n", (int) GetLastError());
+
/*
- * Keep going so we at least dispatch this signal. Hopefully, the call will succeed
- * when retried in the loop soon after.
+ * Keep going so we at least dispatch this signal. Hopefully,
+ * the call will succeed when retried in the loop soon after.
*/
}
hThread = CreateThread(NULL, 0,
CloseHandle(hThread);
/*
- * Background thread is running with our instance of the pipe. So replace our reference
- * with the newly created one and loop back up for another run.
+ * Background thread is running with our instance of the pipe. So
+ * replace our reference with the newly created one and loop back
+ * up for another run.
*/
pipe = newpipe;
}
/*
* Connection failed. Cleanup and try again.
*
- * This should never happen. If it does, we have a small race condition until we loop
- * up and re-create the pipe.
+ * This should never happen. If it does, we have a small race
+ * condition until we loop up and re-create the pipe.
*/
CloseHandle(pipe);
pipe = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32/socket.c,v 1.25 2010/02/17 05:51:40 mha Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32/socket.c,v 1.26 2010/02/26 02:00:53 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* This flag changes the behaviour *globally* for all socket operations,
* so it should only be set for very short periods of time.
*/
-int pgwin32_noblock = 0;
+int pgwin32_noblock = 0;
#undef socket
#undef accept
if (pgwin32_noblock)
{
/*
- * No data received, and we are in "emulated non-blocking mode", so return
- * indicating that we'd block if we were to continue.
+ * No data received, and we are in "emulated non-blocking mode", so
+ * return indicating that we'd block if we were to continue.
*/
errno = EWOULDBLOCK;
return -1;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32_shmem.c,v 1.15 2010/01/04 01:06:21 itagaki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32_shmem.c,v 1.16 2010/02/26 02:00:53 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
hmap = CreateFileMapping(INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE, /* Use the pagefile */
NULL, /* Default security attrs */
PAGE_READWRITE, /* Memory is Read/Write */
- size_high, /* Size Upper 32 Bits */
- size_low, /* Size Lower 32 bits */
+ size_high, /* Size Upper 32 Bits */
+ size_low, /* Size Lower 32 bits */
szShareMem);
if (!hmap)
int
pgwin32_ReserveSharedMemoryRegion(HANDLE hChild)
{
- void *address;
+ void *address;
Assert(UsedShmemSegAddr != NULL);
Assert(UsedShmemSegSize != 0);
address = VirtualAllocEx(hChild, UsedShmemSegAddr, UsedShmemSegSize,
- MEM_RESERVE, PAGE_READWRITE);
- if (address == NULL) {
+ MEM_RESERVE, PAGE_READWRITE);
+ if (address == NULL)
+ {
/* Don't use FATAL since we're running in the postmaster */
elog(LOG, "could not reserve shared memory region (addr=%p) for child %p: %lu",
UsedShmemSegAddr, hChild, GetLastError());
if (address != UsedShmemSegAddr)
{
/*
- * Should never happen - in theory if allocation granularity causes strange
- * effects it could, so check just in case.
+ * Should never happen - in theory if allocation granularity causes
+ * strange effects it could, so check just in case.
*
* Don't use FATAL since we're running in the postmaster.
*/
- elog(LOG, "reserved shared memory region got incorrect address %p, expected %p",
+ elog(LOG, "reserved shared memory region got incorrect address %p, expected %p",
address, UsedShmemSegAddr);
VirtualFreeEx(hChild, address, 0, MEM_RELEASE);
return false;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/autovacuum.c,v 1.108 2010/02/14 18:42:15 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/autovacuum.c,v 1.109 2010/02/26 02:00:55 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* of a worker will continue to fail in the same way.
*/
AutoVacuumShmem->av_signal[AutoVacForkFailed] = false;
- pg_usleep(1000000L); /* 1s */
+ pg_usleep(1000000L); /* 1s */
SendPostmasterSignal(PMSIGNAL_START_AUTOVAC_WORKER);
continue;
}
/*
* Start a transaction so we can access pg_database, and get a snapshot.
* We don't have a use for the snapshot itself, but we're interested in
- * the secondary effect that it sets RecentGlobalXmin. (This is critical
+ * the secondary effect that it sets RecentGlobalXmin. (This is critical
* for anything that reads heap pages, because HOT may decide to prune
* them even if the process doesn't attempt to modify any tuples.)
*/
while (HeapTupleIsValid(tup = heap_getnext(scan, ForwardScanDirection)))
{
Form_pg_database pgdatabase = (Form_pg_database) GETSTRUCT(tup);
- avw_dbase *avdb;
+ avw_dbase *avdb;
avdb = (avw_dbase *) palloc(sizeof(avw_dbase));
vac_cost_delay = (avopts && avopts->vacuum_cost_delay >= 0)
? avopts->vacuum_cost_delay
: (autovacuum_vac_cost_delay >= 0)
- ? autovacuum_vac_cost_delay
- : VacuumCostDelay;
+ ? autovacuum_vac_cost_delay
+ : VacuumCostDelay;
/* 0 or -1 in autovac setting means use plain vacuum_cost_limit */
vac_cost_limit = (avopts && avopts->vacuum_cost_limit > 0)
? avopts->vacuum_cost_limit
: (autovacuum_vac_cost_limit > 0)
- ? autovacuum_vac_cost_limit
- : VacuumCostLimit;
+ ? autovacuum_vac_cost_limit
+ : VacuumCostLimit;
/* these do not have autovacuum-specific settings */
freeze_min_age = (avopts && avopts->freeze_min_age >= 0)
* Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/fork_process.c,v 1.11 2010/01/11 18:39:32 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/fork_process.c,v 1.12 2010/02/26 02:00:55 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "postgres.h"
#include "postmaster/fork_process.h"
* stupid, but the kernel hackers seem uninterested in improving it.)
* Therefore it's often a good idea to protect the postmaster by
* setting its oom_adj value negative (which has to be done in a
- * root-owned startup script). If you just do that much, all child
+ * root-owned startup script). If you just do that much, all child
* processes will also be protected against OOM kill, which might not
* be desirable. You can then choose to build with LINUX_OOM_ADJ
- * #defined to 0, or some other value that you want child processes
- * to adopt here.
+ * #defined to 0, or some other value that you want child processes to
+ * adopt here.
*/
#ifdef LINUX_OOM_ADJ
{
/*
- * Use open() not stdio, to ensure we control the open flags.
- * Some Linux security environments reject anything but O_WRONLY.
+ * Use open() not stdio, to ensure we control the open flags. Some
+ * Linux security environments reject anything but O_WRONLY.
*/
- int fd = open("/proc/self/oom_adj", O_WRONLY, 0);
+ int fd = open("/proc/self/oom_adj", O_WRONLY, 0);
/* We ignore all errors */
if (fd >= 0)
{
- char buf[16];
+ char buf[16];
snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf), "%d\n", LINUX_OOM_ADJ);
(void) write(fd, buf, strlen(buf));
close(fd);
}
}
-#endif /* LINUX_OOM_ADJ */
+#endif /* LINUX_OOM_ADJ */
}
return result;
*
* Copyright (c) 2001-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c,v 1.200 2010/01/31 17:39:34 mha Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c,v 1.201 2010/02/26 02:00:55 momjian Exp $
* ----------
*/
#include "postgres.h"
static PgStat_StatDBEntry *pgstat_get_db_entry(Oid databaseid, bool create);
static PgStat_StatTabEntry *pgstat_get_tab_entry(PgStat_StatDBEntry *dbentry,
- Oid tableoid, bool create);
+ Oid tableoid, bool create);
static void pgstat_write_statsfile(bool permanent);
static HTAB *pgstat_read_statsfile(Oid onlydb, bool permanent);
static void backend_read_statsfile(void);
*
* Collect the OIDs of all objects listed in the specified system catalog
* into a temporary hash table. Caller should hash_destroy the result
- * when done with it. (However, we make the table in CurrentMemoryContext
+ * when done with it. (However, we make the table in CurrentMemoryContext
* so that it will be freed properly in event of an error.)
* ----------
*/
* Tell the statistics collector to reset a single counter.
* ----------
*/
-void pgstat_reset_single_counter(Oid objoid, PgStat_Single_Reset_Type type)
+void
+pgstat_reset_single_counter(Oid objoid, PgStat_Single_Reset_Type type)
{
PgStat_MsgResetsinglecounter msg;
else
{
/*
- * On abort, update top-level tabstat counts, then forget
- * the subtransaction
+ * On abort, update top-level tabstat counts, then forget the
+ * subtransaction
*/
/* count attempted actions regardless of commit/abort */
volatile PgBackendStatus *beentry = MyBEEntry;
/*
- * If we got as far as discovering our own database ID, we can report
- * what we did to the collector. Otherwise, we'd be sending an invalid
+ * If we got as far as discovering our own database ID, we can report what
+ * we did to the collector. Otherwise, we'd be sending an invalid
* database ID, so forget it. (This means that accesses to pg_database
* during failed backend starts might never get counted.)
*/
case PGSTAT_MTYPE_RESETSHAREDCOUNTER:
pgstat_recv_resetsharedcounter(
- (PgStat_MsgResetsharedcounter *) &msg,
- len);
+ (PgStat_MsgResetsharedcounter *) &msg,
+ len);
break;
case PGSTAT_MTYPE_RESETSINGLECOUNTER:
pgstat_recv_resetsinglecounter(
- (PgStat_MsgResetsinglecounter *) &msg,
- len);
+ (PgStat_MsgResetsinglecounter *) &msg,
+ len);
break;
case PGSTAT_MTYPE_AUTOVAC_START:
PgStat_TableEntry *tabmsg = &(msg->m_entry[i]);
tabentry = (PgStat_StatTabEntry *) hash_search(dbentry->tables,
- (void *) &(tabmsg->t_id),
+ (void *) &(tabmsg->t_id),
HASH_ENTER, &found);
if (!found)
static void
pgstat_recv_resetsharedcounter(PgStat_MsgResetsharedcounter *msg, int len)
{
- if (msg->m_resettarget==RESET_BGWRITER)
+ if (msg->m_resettarget == RESET_BGWRITER)
{
/* Reset the global background writer statistics for the cluster. */
memset(&globalStats, 0, sizeof(globalStats));
if (msg->m_resettype == RESET_TABLE)
(void) hash_search(dbentry->tables, (void *) &(msg->m_objectid), HASH_REMOVE, NULL);
else if (msg->m_resettype == RESET_FUNCTION)
- (void) hash_search(dbentry->functions, (void *)&(msg->m_objectid), HASH_REMOVE, NULL);
+ (void) hash_search(dbentry->functions, (void *) &(msg->m_objectid), HASH_REMOVE, NULL);
}
/* ----------
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c,v 1.602 2010/01/27 15:27:50 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c,v 1.603 2010/02/26 02:00:56 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
*
* state and the startup process is launched. The startup process begins by
* reading the control file and other preliminary initialization steps.
* In a normal startup, or after crash recovery, the startup process exits
- * with exit code 0 and we switch to PM_RUN state. However, archive recovery
+ * with exit code 0 and we switch to PM_RUN state. However, archive recovery
* is handled specially since it takes much longer and we would like to support
* hot standby during archive recovery.
*
PM_WAIT_BACKUP, /* waiting for online backup mode to end */
PM_WAIT_BACKENDS, /* waiting for live backends to exit */
PM_SHUTDOWN, /* waiting for bgwriter to do shutdown ckpt */
- PM_SHUTDOWN_2, /* waiting for archiver and walsenders to finish */
+ PM_SHUTDOWN_2, /* waiting for archiver and walsenders to
+ * finish */
PM_WAIT_DEAD_END, /* waiting for dead_end children to exit */
PM_NO_CHILDREN /* all important children have exited */
} PMState;
/* received START_AUTOVAC_LAUNCHER signal */
static volatile sig_atomic_t start_autovac_launcher = false;
+
/* the launcher needs to be signalled to communicate some condition */
-static volatile bool avlauncher_needs_signal = false;
+static volatile bool avlauncher_needs_signal = false;
/*
* State for assigning random salts and cancel keys.
static void signal_child(pid_t pid, int signal);
static bool SignalSomeChildren(int signal, int targets);
-#define SignalChildren(sig) SignalSomeChildren(sig, BACKEND_TYPE_ALL)
+#define SignalChildren(sig) SignalSomeChildren(sig, BACKEND_TYPE_ALL)
#define SignalAutovacWorkers(sig) SignalSomeChildren(sig, BACKEND_TYPE_AUTOVAC)
/*
#ifdef WIN32
typedef struct
{
- SOCKET origsocket; /* Original socket value, or PGINVALID_SOCKET if not a
- * socket */
+ SOCKET origsocket; /* Original socket value, or PGINVALID_SOCKET
+ * if not a socket */
WSAPROTOCOL_INFO wsainfo;
} InheritableSocket;
#else
#ifndef WIN32
unsigned long UsedShmemSegID;
#else
- HANDLE UsedShmemSegID;
+ HANDLE UsedShmemSegID;
#endif
void *UsedShmemSegAddr;
slock_t *ShmemLock;
if (err != kDNSServiceErr_NoError)
elog(LOG, "DNSServiceRegister() failed: error code %ld",
(long) err);
+
/*
- * We don't bother to read the mDNS daemon's reply, and we expect
- * that it will automatically terminate our registration when the
- * socket is closed at postmaster termination. So there's nothing
- * more to be done here. However, the bonjour_sdref is kept around
- * so that forked children can close their copies of the socket.
+ * We don't bother to read the mDNS daemon's reply, and we expect that
+ * it will automatically terminate our registration when the socket is
+ * closed at postmaster termination. So there's nothing more to be
+ * done here. However, the bonjour_sdref is kept around so that
+ * forked children can close their copies of the socket.
*/
}
#endif
/*
* Some systems use setsid() to dissociate from the TTY's process group,
- * while on others it depends on stdin/stdout/stderr. Do both if possible.
+ * while on others it depends on stdin/stdout/stderr. Do both if
+ * possible.
*/
#ifdef HAVE_SETSID
if (setsid() < 0)
/*
* Reassociate stdin/stdout/stderr. fork_process() cleared any pending
- * output, so this should be safe. The only plausible error is EINTR,
+ * output, so this should be safe. The only plausible error is EINTR,
* which just means we should retry.
*/
- do {
+ do
+ {
res = dup2(dvnull, 0);
} while (res < 0 && errno == EINTR);
close(dvnull);
- do {
+ do
+ {
res = dup2(pmlog, 1);
} while (res < 0 && errno == EINTR);
- do {
+ do
+ {
res = dup2(pmlog, 2);
} while (res < 0 && errno == EINTR);
close(pmlog);
/*
* Now fetch parameters out of startup packet and save them into the Port
* structure. All data structures attached to the Port struct must be
- * allocated in TopMemoryContext so that they will remain available in
- * a running backend (even after PostmasterContext is destroyed). We need
+ * allocated in TopMemoryContext so that they will remain available in a
+ * running backend (even after PostmasterContext is destroyed). We need
* not worry about leaking this storage on failure, since we aren't in the
* postmaster process anymore.
*/
port->cmdline_options = pstrdup(valptr);
else if (strcmp(nameptr, "replication") == 0)
{
- if(!parse_bool(valptr, &am_walsender))
+ if (!parse_bool(valptr, &am_walsender))
ereport(FATAL,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
errmsg("invalid value for boolean option \"replication\"")));
canAcceptConnections(void)
{
/*
- * Can't start backends when in startup/shutdown/inconsistent recovery state.
+ * Can't start backends when in startup/shutdown/inconsistent recovery
+ * state.
*
* In state PM_WAIT_BACKUP only superusers can connect (this must be
* allowed so that a superuser can end online backup mode); we return
pmState == PM_RECOVERY))
return CAC_STARTUP; /* normal startup */
if (!FatalError &&
- pmState == PM_RECOVERY_CONSISTENT)
- return CAC_OK; /* connection OK during recovery */
+ pmState == PM_RECOVERY_CONSISTENT)
+ return CAC_OK; /* connection OK during recovery */
return CAC_RECOVERY; /* else must be crash recovery */
}
}
/*
- * Now wait for online backup mode to end and backends to exit.
- * If that is already the case, PostmasterStateMachine will take
- * the next step.
+ * Now wait for online backup mode to end and backends to exit. If
+ * that is already the case, PostmasterStateMachine will take the
+ * next step.
*/
PostmasterStateMachine();
break;
(errmsg("aborting any active transactions")));
/* shut down all backends and autovac workers */
SignalSomeChildren(SIGTERM,
- BACKEND_TYPE_NORMAL | BACKEND_TYPE_AUTOVAC);
+ BACKEND_TYPE_NORMAL | BACKEND_TYPE_AUTOVAC);
/* and the autovac launcher too */
if (AutoVacPID != 0)
signal_child(AutoVacPID, SIGTERM);
/*
* Was it the archiver? If so, just try to start a new one; no need
* to force reset of the rest of the system. (If fail, we'll try
- * again in future cycles of the main loop.). Unless we were
- * waiting for it to shut down; don't restart it in that case, and
- * and PostmasterStateMachine() will advance to the next shutdown
- * step.
+ * again in future cycles of the main loop.). Unless we were waiting
+ * for it to shut down; don't restart it in that case, and and
+ * PostmasterStateMachine() will advance to the next shutdown step.
*/
if (pid == PgArchPID)
{
/*
* PM_SHUTDOWN_2 state ends when there's no other children than
* dead_end children left. There shouldn't be any regular backends
- * left by now anyway; what we're really waiting for is walsenders
- * and archiver.
+ * left by now anyway; what we're really waiting for is walsenders and
+ * archiver.
*
* Walreceiver should normally be dead by now, but not when a fast
* shutdown is performed during recovery.
/*
* PreAuthDelay is a debugging aid for investigating problems in the
* authentication cycle: it can be set in postgresql.conf to allow time to
- * attach to the newly-forked backend with a debugger. (See also
- * PostAuthDelay, which we allow clients to pass through PGOPTIONS, but
- * it is not honored until after authentication.)
+ * attach to the newly-forked backend with a debugger. (See also
+ * PostAuthDelay, which we allow clients to pass through PGOPTIONS, but it
+ * is not honored until after authentication.)
*/
if (PreAuthDelay > 0)
pg_usleep(PreAuthDelay * 1000000L);
#endif
/*
- * We arrange for a simple exit(1) if we receive SIGTERM or SIGQUIT
- * or timeout while trying to collect the startup packet. Otherwise the
+ * We arrange for a simple exit(1) if we receive SIGTERM or SIGQUIT or
+ * timeout while trying to collect the startup packet. Otherwise the
* postmaster cannot shutdown the database FAST or IMMED cleanly if a
* buggy client fails to send the packet promptly.
*/
status = ProcessStartupPacket(port, false);
/*
- * Stop here if it was bad or a cancel packet. ProcessStartupPacket
+ * Stop here if it was bad or a cancel packet. ProcessStartupPacket
* already did any appropriate error reporting.
*/
if (status != STATUS_OK)
*
* For a walsender, the ps display is set in the following form:
*
- *
postgres: wal sender process <user> <host> <activity>
+ * postgres: wal sender process <user> <host> <activity>
*
* To achieve that, we pass "wal sender process" as username and username
* as dbname to init_ps_display(). XXX: should add a new variant of
(int) GetLastError());
/*
- * Reserve the memory region used by our main shared memory segment before we
- * resume the child process.
+ * Reserve the memory region used by our main shared memory segment before
+ * we resume the child process.
*/
if (!pgwin32_ReserveSharedMemoryRegion(pi.hProcess))
{
(int) GetLastError())));
CloseHandle(pi.hProcess);
CloseHandle(pi.hThread);
- return -1; /* logging done made by pgwin32_ReserveSharedMemoryRegion() */
+ return -1; /* logging done made by
+ * pgwin32_ReserveSharedMemoryRegion() */
}
/*
PgStatPID = pgstat_start();
ereport(LOG,
- (errmsg("database system is ready to accept read only connections")));
+ (errmsg("database system is ready to accept read only connections")));
pmState = PM_RECOVERY_CONSISTENT;
}
#ifdef WIN32
param->PostmasterHandle = PostmasterHandle;
if (!write_duplicated_handle(¶m->initial_signal_pipe,
- pgwin32_create_signal_listener(childPid),
- childProcess))
+ pgwin32_create_signal_listener(childPid),
+ childProcess))
return false;
#endif
* OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
* ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/regex/regcomp.c,v 1.47 2010/01/30 04:18:00 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/regex/regcomp.c,v 1.48 2010/02/26 02:00:57 momjian Exp $
*
*/
/*----------
* Prepare a general-purpose state skeleton.
*
- * ---> [s] ---prefix---> [begin] ---atom---> [end] ----rest---> [rp]
- * / /
+ * ---> [s] ---prefix---> [begin] ---atom---> [end] ----rest---> [rp]
+ * / /
* [lp] ----> [s2] ----bypass---------------------
*
* where bypass is an empty, and prefix is some repetitions of atom
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/libpqwalreceiver/libpqwalreceiver.c,v 1.4 2010/02/25 07:31:40 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/libpqwalreceiver/libpqwalreceiver.c,v 1.5 2010/02/26 02:00:58 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* Prototypes for interface functions */
static bool libpqrcv_connect(char *conninfo, XLogRecPtr startpoint);
static bool libpqrcv_receive(int timeout, unsigned char *type,
- char **buffer, int *len);
+ char **buffer, int *len);
static void libpqrcv_disconnect(void);
/* Prototypes for private functions */
PQerrorMessage(streamConn))));
/*
- * Get the system identifier and timeline ID as a DataRow message
- * from the primary server.
+ * Get the system identifier and timeline ID as a DataRow message from the
+ * primary server.
*/
res = PQexec(streamConn, "IDENTIFY_SYSTEM");
if (PQresultStatus(res) != PGRES_TUPLES_OK)
- {
+ {
PQclear(res);
ereport(ERROR,
(errmsg("could not receive the SYSID and timeline ID from "
"the primary server: %s",
PQerrorMessage(streamConn))));
- }
+ }
if (PQnfields(res) != 2 || PQntuples(res) != 1)
{
- int ntuples = PQntuples(res);
- int nfields = PQnfields(res);
+ int ntuples = PQntuples(res);
+ int nfields = PQnfields(res);
+
PQclear(res);
ereport(ERROR,
(errmsg("invalid response from primary server"),
primary_tli = pg_atoi(PQgetvalue(res, 0, 1), 4, 0);
/*
- * Confirm that the system identifier of the primary is the same
- * as ours.
+ * Confirm that the system identifier of the primary is the same as ours.
*/
snprintf(standby_sysid, sizeof(standby_sysid), UINT64_FORMAT,
GetSystemIdentifier());
}
/*
- * Confirm that the current timeline of the primary is the same
- * as the recovery target timeline.
+ * Confirm that the current timeline of the primary is the same as the
+ * recovery target timeline.
*/
standby_tli = GetRecoveryTargetTLI();
PQclear(res);
static bool
libpq_select(int timeout_ms)
{
- int ret;
+ int ret;
Assert(streamConn != NULL);
if (PQsocket(streamConn) < 0)
struct timeval *ptr_timeout;
FD_ZERO(&input_mask);
- FD_SET(PQsocket(streamConn), &input_mask);
+ FD_SET (PQsocket(streamConn), &input_mask);
if (timeout_ms < 0)
ptr_timeout = NULL;
else
{
- timeout.tv_sec = timeout_ms / 1000;
- timeout.tv_usec = (timeout_ms % 1000) * 1000;
- ptr_timeout = &timeout;
+ timeout.tv_sec = timeout_ms / 1000;
+ timeout.tv_usec = (timeout_ms % 1000) * 1000;
+ ptr_timeout = &timeout;
}
ret = select(PQsocket(streamConn) + 1, &input_mask,
*
* Returns:
*
- * True if data was received. *type, *buffer and *len are set to
- * the type of the received data, buffer holding it, and length,
- * respectively.
+ * True if data was received. *type, *buffer and *len are set to
+ * the type of the received data, buffer holding it, and length,
+ * respectively.
*
- * False if no data was available within timeout, or wait was interrupted
- * by signal.
+ * False if no data was available within timeout, or wait was interrupted
+ * by signal.
*
* The buffer returned is only valid until the next call of this function or
* libpq_connect/disconnect.
recvBuf = NULL;
/*
- * If the caller requested to block, wait for data to arrive. But if
- * this is the first call after connecting, don't wait, because
- * there might already be some data in libpq buffer that we haven't
- * returned to caller.
+ * If the caller requested to block, wait for data to arrive. But if this
+ * is the first call after connecting, don't wait, because there might
+ * already be some data in libpq buffer that we haven't returned to
+ * caller.
*/
if (timeout > 0 && !justconnected)
{
/* Receive CopyData message */
rawlen = PQgetCopyData(streamConn, &recvBuf, 1);
- if (rawlen == 0) /* no data available yet, then return */
+ if (rawlen == 0) /* no data available yet, then return */
return false;
- if (rawlen == -1) /* end-of-streaming or error */
+ if (rawlen == -1) /* end-of-streaming or error */
{
- PGresult *res;
+ PGresult *res;
res = PQgetResult(streamConn);
if (PQresultStatus(res) == PGRES_COMMAND_OK)
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c,v 1.5 2010/02/19 10:51:04 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c,v 1.6 2010/02/26 02:00:57 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "utils/resowner.h"
/* Global variable to indicate if this process is a walreceiver process */
-bool am_walreceiver;
+bool am_walreceiver;
/* libpqreceiver hooks to these when loaded */
walrcv_connect_type walrcv_connect = NULL;
ProcessWalRcvInterrupts(void)
{
/*
- * Although walreceiver interrupt handling doesn't use the same scheme
- * as regular backends, call CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS() to make sure we
- * receive any incoming signals on Win32.
+ * Although walreceiver interrupt handling doesn't use the same scheme as
+ * regular backends, call CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS() to make sure we receive
+ * any incoming signals on Win32.
*/
CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS();
*/
static struct
{
- XLogRecPtr Write; /* last byte + 1 written out in the standby */
- XLogRecPtr Flush; /* last byte + 1 flushed in the standby */
-} LogstreamResult;
+ XLogRecPtr Write; /* last byte + 1 written out in the standby */
+ XLogRecPtr Flush; /* last byte + 1 flushed in the standby */
+} LogstreamResult;
/* Main entry point for walreceiver process */
void
WalReceiverMain(void)
{
- char conninfo[MAXCONNINFO];
- XLogRecPtr startpoint;
+ char conninfo[MAXCONNINFO];
+ XLogRecPtr startpoint;
+
/* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */
volatile WalRcvData *walrcv = WalRcv;
am_walreceiver = true;
/*
- * WalRcv should be set up already (if we are a backend, we inherit
- * this by fork() or EXEC_BACKEND mechanism from the postmaster).
+ * WalRcv should be set up already (if we are a backend, we inherit this
+ * by fork() or EXEC_BACKEND mechanism from the postmaster).
*/
Assert(walrcv != NULL);
/*
* Mark walreceiver as running in shared memory.
*
- * Do this as early as possible, so that if we fail later on, we'll
- * set state to STOPPED. If we die before this, the startup process
- * will keep waiting for us to start up, until it times out.
+ * Do this as early as possible, so that if we fail later on, we'll set
+ * state to STOPPED. If we die before this, the startup process will keep
+ * waiting for us to start up, until it times out.
*/
SpinLockAcquire(&walrcv->mutex);
Assert(walrcv->pid == 0);
- switch(walrcv->walRcvState)
+ switch (walrcv->walRcvState)
{
case WALRCV_STOPPING:
/* If we've already been requested to stop, don't start up. */
#endif
/* Properly accept or ignore signals the postmaster might send us */
- pqsignal(SIGHUP, WalRcvSigHupHandler); /* set flag to read config file */
+ pqsignal(SIGHUP, WalRcvSigHupHandler); /* set flag to read config
+ * file */
pqsignal(SIGINT, SIG_IGN);
pqsignal(SIGTERM, WalRcvShutdownHandler); /* request shutdown */
pqsignal(SIGQUIT, WalRcvQuickDieHandler); /* hard crash time */
/* Loop until end-of-streaming or error */
for (;;)
{
- unsigned char type;
- char *buf;
- int len;
+ unsigned char type;
+ char *buf;
+ int len;
/*
* Emergency bailout if postmaster has died. This is to avoid the
XLogWalRcvProcessMsg(type, buf, len);
/* Receive any more data we can without sleeping */
- while(walrcv_receive(0, &type, &buf, &len))
+ while (walrcv_receive(0, &type, &buf, &len))
XLogWalRcvProcessMsg(type, buf, len);
/*
- * If we've written some records, flush them to disk and
- * let the startup process know about them.
+ * If we've written some records, flush them to disk and let the
+ * startup process know about them.
*/
XLogWalRcvFlush();
}
* system reset cycle if some idiot DBA sends a manual SIGQUIT to a random
* backend. This is necessary precisely because we don't clean up our
* shared memory state. (The "dead man switch" mechanism in pmsignal.c
- * should ensure the postmaster sees this as a crash, too, but no harm
- * in being doubly sure.)
+ * should ensure the postmaster sees this as a crash, too, but no harm in
+ * being doubly sure.)
*/
exit(2);
}
{
switch (type)
{
- case 'w': /* WAL records */
- {
- XLogRecPtr recptr;
+ case 'w': /* WAL records */
+ {
+ XLogRecPtr recptr;
- if (len < sizeof(XLogRecPtr))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errmsg("invalid WAL message received from primary")));
+ if (len < sizeof(XLogRecPtr))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errmsg("invalid WAL message received from primary")));
- recptr = *((XLogRecPtr *) buf);
- buf += sizeof(XLogRecPtr);
- len -= sizeof(XLogRecPtr);
- XLogWalRcvWrite(buf, len, recptr);
- break;
- }
+ recptr = *((XLogRecPtr *) buf);
+ buf += sizeof(XLogRecPtr);
+ len -= sizeof(XLogRecPtr);
+ XLogWalRcvWrite(buf, len, recptr);
+ break;
+ }
default:
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_PROTOCOL_VIOLATION),
static void
XLogWalRcvWrite(char *buf, Size nbytes, XLogRecPtr recptr)
{
- int startoff;
- int byteswritten;
+ int startoff;
+ int byteswritten;
while (nbytes > 0)
{
- int segbytes;
+ int segbytes;
if (recvFile < 0 || !XLByteInSeg(recptr, recvId, recvSeg))
{
- bool use_existent;
+ bool use_existent;
/*
- * fsync() and close current file before we switch to next one.
- * We would otherwise have to reopen this file to fsync it later
+ * fsync() and close current file before we switch to next one. We
+ * would otherwise have to reopen this file to fsync it later
*/
if (recvFile >= 0)
{
if (close(recvFile) != 0)
ereport(PANIC,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not close log file %u, segment %u: %m",
- recvId, recvSeg)));
+ errmsg("could not close log file %u, segment %u: %m",
+ recvId, recvSeg)));
}
recvFile = -1;
nbytes -= byteswritten;
buf += byteswritten;
- LogstreamResult.Write = recptr;
+ LogstreamResult.Write = recptr;
/*
- * XXX: Should we signal bgwriter to start a restartpoint
- * if we've consumed too much xlog since the last one, like
- * in normal processing? But this is not worth doing unless
- * a restartpoint can be created independently from a
- * checkpoint record.
+ * XXX: Should we signal bgwriter to start a restartpoint if we've
+ * consumed too much xlog since the last one, like in normal
+ * processing? But this is not worth doing unless a restartpoint can
+ * be created independently from a checkpoint record.
*/
}
}
{
/* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */
volatile WalRcvData *walrcv = WalRcv;
- char activitymsg[50];
+ char activitymsg[50];
issue_xlog_fsync(recvFile, recvId, recvSeg);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c,v 1.3 2010/01/27 15:27:51 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c,v 1.4 2010/02/26 02:00:57 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
Size
WalRcvShmemSize(void)
{
- Size size = 0;
+ Size size = 0;
size = add_size(size, sizeof(WalRcvData));
void
WalRcvShmemInit(void)
{
- bool found;
+ bool found;
WalRcv = (WalRcvData *)
ShmemInitStruct("Wal Receiver Ctl", WalRcvShmemSize(), &found);
/* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */
volatile WalRcvData *walrcv = WalRcv;
WalRcvState state;
- pg_time_t startTime;
+ pg_time_t startTime;
SpinLockAcquire(&walrcv->mutex);
SpinLockRelease(&walrcv->mutex);
/*
- * If it has taken too long for walreceiver to start up, give up.
- * Setting the state to STOPPED ensures that if walreceiver later
- * does start up after all, it will see that it's not supposed to be
- * running and die without doing anything.
+ * If it has taken too long for walreceiver to start up, give up. Setting
+ * the state to STOPPED ensures that if walreceiver later does start up
+ * after all, it will see that it's not supposed to be running and die
+ * without doing anything.
*/
if (state == WALRCV_STARTING)
{
- pg_time_t now = (pg_time_t) time(NULL);
+ pg_time_t now = (pg_time_t) time(NULL);
if ((now - startTime) > WALRCV_STARTUP_TIMEOUT)
{
{
/* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */
volatile WalRcvData *walrcv = WalRcv;
- pid_t walrcvpid = 0;
+ pid_t walrcvpid = 0;
/*
* Request walreceiver to stop. Walreceiver will switch to WALRCV_STOPPED
* restart itself.
*/
SpinLockAcquire(&walrcv->mutex);
- switch(walrcv->walRcvState)
+ switch (walrcv->walRcvState)
{
case WALRCV_STOPPED:
break;
{
/* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */
volatile WalRcvData *walrcv = WalRcv;
- pg_time_t now = (pg_time_t) time(NULL);
+ pg_time_t now = (pg_time_t) time(NULL);
/*
- * We always start at the beginning of the segment.
- * That prevents a broken segment (i.e., with no records in the
- * first half of a segment) from being created by XLOG streaming,
- * which might cause trouble later on if the segment is e.g
- * archived.
+ * We always start at the beginning of the segment. That prevents a broken
+ * segment (i.e., with no records in the first half of a segment) from
+ * being created by XLOG streaming, which might cause trouble later on if
+ * the segment is e.g archived.
*/
if (recptr.xrecoff % XLogSegSize != 0)
recptr.xrecoff -= recptr.xrecoff % XLogSegSize;
return recptr;
}
-
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/walsender.c,v 1.8 2010/02/25 07:31:40 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/walsender.c,v 1.9 2010/02/26 02:00:58 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static WalSnd *MyWalSnd = NULL;
/* Global state */
-bool am_walsender = false; /* Am I a walsender process ? */
+bool am_walsender = false; /* Am I a walsender process ? */
/* User-settable parameters for walsender */
-int MaxWalSenders = 0; /* the maximum number of concurrent walsenders */
-int WalSndDelay = 200; /* max sleep time between some actions */
+int MaxWalSenders = 0; /* the maximum number of concurrent walsenders */
+int WalSndDelay = 200; /* max sleep time between some actions */
#define NAPTIME_PER_CYCLE 100 /* max sleep time between cycles (100ms) */
/* Prototypes for private functions */
static int WalSndLoop(void);
-static void InitWalSnd(void);
-static void WalSndHandshake(void);
-static void WalSndKill(int code, Datum arg);
+static void InitWalSnd(void);
+static void WalSndHandshake(void);
+static void WalSndKill(int code, Datum arg);
static void XLogRead(char *buf, XLogRecPtr recptr, Size nbytes);
static bool XLogSend(StringInfo outMsg);
static void CheckClosedConnection(void);
WalSndHandshake(void)
{
StringInfoData input_message;
- bool replication_started = false;
+ bool replication_started = false;
initStringInfo(&input_message);
while (!replication_started)
{
- int firstchar;
+ int firstchar;
/* Wait for a command to arrive */
firstchar = pq_getbyte();
* blocking because we've been able to get message type code.
*/
if (pq_getmessage(&input_message, 0))
- firstchar = EOF; /* suitable message already logged */
+ firstchar = EOF; /* suitable message already logged */
}
/* Handle the very limited subset of commands expected in this phase */
switch (firstchar)
{
- case 'Q': /* Query message */
- {
- const char *query_string;
- XLogRecPtr recptr;
-
- query_string = pq_getmsgstring(&input_message);
- pq_getmsgend(&input_message);
-
- if (strcmp(query_string, "IDENTIFY_SYSTEM") == 0)
- {
- StringInfoData buf;
- char sysid[32];
- char tli[11];
-
- /*
- * Reply with a result set with one row, two columns.
- * First col is system ID, and second if timeline ID
- */
-
- snprintf(sysid, sizeof(sysid), UINT64_FORMAT,
- GetSystemIdentifier());
- snprintf(tli, sizeof(tli), "%u", ThisTimeLineID);
-
- /* Send a RowDescription message */
- pq_beginmessage(&buf, 'T');
- pq_sendint(&buf, 2, 2); /* 2 fields */
-
- /* first field */
- pq_sendstring(&buf, "systemid"); /* col name */
- pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 4); /* table oid */
- pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 2); /* attnum */
- pq_sendint(&buf, TEXTOID, 4); /* type oid */
- pq_sendint(&buf, -1, 2); /* typlen */
- pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 4); /* typmod */
- pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 2); /* format code */
-
- /* second field */
- pq_sendstring(&buf, "timeline"); /* col name */
- pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 4); /* table oid */
- pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 2); /* attnum */
- pq_sendint(&buf, INT4OID, 4); /* type oid */
- pq_sendint(&buf, 4, 2); /* typlen */
- pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 4); /* typmod */
- pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 2); /* format code */
- pq_endmessage(&buf);
-
- /* Send a DataRow message */
- pq_beginmessage(&buf, 'D');
- pq_sendint(&buf, 2, 2); /* # of columns */
- pq_sendint(&buf, strlen(sysid), 4); /* col1 len */
- pq_sendbytes(&buf, (char *) &sysid, strlen(sysid));
- pq_sendint(&buf, strlen(tli), 4); /* col2 len */
- pq_sendbytes(&buf, (char *) tli, strlen(tli));
- pq_endmessage(&buf);
-
- /* Send CommandComplete and ReadyForQuery messages */
- EndCommand("SELECT", DestRemote);
- ReadyForQuery(DestRemote);
- }
- else if (sscanf(query_string, "START_REPLICATION %X/%X",
- &recptr.xlogid, &recptr.xrecoff) == 2)
+ case 'Q': /* Query message */
{
- StringInfoData buf;
-
- /* Send a CopyOutResponse message, and start streaming */
- pq_beginmessage(&buf, 'H');
- pq_sendbyte(&buf, 0);
- pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 2);
- pq_endmessage(&buf);
-
- /*
- * Initialize position to the received one, then
- * the xlog records begin to be shipped from that position
- */
- sentPtr = recptr;
-
- /* break out of the loop */
- replication_started = true;
+ const char *query_string;
+ XLogRecPtr recptr;
+
+ query_string = pq_getmsgstring(&input_message);
+ pq_getmsgend(&input_message);
+
+ if (strcmp(query_string, "IDENTIFY_SYSTEM") == 0)
+ {
+ StringInfoData buf;
+ char sysid[32];
+ char tli[11];
+
+ /*
+ * Reply with a result set with one row, two columns.
+ * First col is system ID, and second if timeline ID
+ */
+
+ snprintf(sysid, sizeof(sysid), UINT64_FORMAT,
+ GetSystemIdentifier());
+ snprintf(tli, sizeof(tli), "%u", ThisTimeLineID);
+
+ /* Send a RowDescription message */
+ pq_beginmessage(&buf, 'T');
+ pq_sendint(&buf, 2, 2); /* 2 fields */
+
+ /* first field */
+ pq_sendstring(&buf, "systemid"); /* col name */
+ pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 4); /* table oid */
+ pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 2); /* attnum */
+ pq_sendint(&buf, TEXTOID, 4); /* type oid */
+ pq_sendint(&buf, -1, 2); /* typlen */
+ pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 4); /* typmod */
+ pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 2); /* format code */
+
+ /* second field */
+ pq_sendstring(&buf, "timeline"); /* col name */
+ pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 4); /* table oid */
+ pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 2); /* attnum */
+ pq_sendint(&buf, INT4OID, 4); /* type oid */
+ pq_sendint(&buf, 4, 2); /* typlen */
+ pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 4); /* typmod */
+ pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 2); /* format code */
+ pq_endmessage(&buf);
+
+ /* Send a DataRow message */
+ pq_beginmessage(&buf, 'D');
+ pq_sendint(&buf, 2, 2); /* # of columns */
+ pq_sendint(&buf, strlen(sysid), 4); /* col1 len */
+ pq_sendbytes(&buf, (char *) &sysid, strlen(sysid));
+ pq_sendint(&buf, strlen(tli), 4); /* col2 len */
+ pq_sendbytes(&buf, (char *) tli, strlen(tli));
+ pq_endmessage(&buf);
+
+ /* Send CommandComplete and ReadyForQuery messages */
+ EndCommand("SELECT", DestRemote);
+ ReadyForQuery(DestRemote);
+ }
+ else if (sscanf(query_string, "START_REPLICATION %X/%X",
+ &recptr.xlogid, &recptr.xrecoff) == 2)
+ {
+ StringInfoData buf;
+
+ /* Send a CopyOutResponse message, and start streaming */
+ pq_beginmessage(&buf, 'H');
+ pq_sendbyte(&buf, 0);
+ pq_sendint(&buf, 0, 2);
+ pq_endmessage(&buf);
+
+ /*
+ * Initialize position to the received one, then the
+ * xlog records begin to be shipped from that position
+ */
+ sentPtr = recptr;
+
+ /* break out of the loop */
+ replication_started = true;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ ereport(FATAL,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_PROTOCOL_VIOLATION),
+ errmsg("invalid standby query string: %s", query_string)));
+ }
+ break;
}
- else
- {
- ereport(FATAL,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_PROTOCOL_VIOLATION),
- errmsg("invalid standby query string: %s", query_string)));
- }
- break;
- }
case 'X':
/* standby is closing the connection */
CheckClosedConnection(void)
{
unsigned char firstchar;
- int r;
+ int r;
r = pq_getbyte_if_available(&firstchar);
if (r < 0)
/* Handle the very limited subset of commands expected in this phase */
switch (firstchar)
{
- /*
- * 'X' means that the standby is closing down the socket.
- */
+ /*
+ * 'X' means that the standby is closing down the socket.
+ */
case 'X':
proc_exit(0);
/* Loop forever */
for (;;)
{
- int remain; /* remaining time (ms) */
+ int remain; /* remaining time (ms) */
/*
* Emergency bailout if postmaster has died. This is to avoid the
return 1;
eof:
+
/*
- * Reset whereToSendOutput to prevent ereport from attempting
- * to send any more messages to the standby.
+ * Reset whereToSendOutput to prevent ereport from attempting to send any
+ * more messages to the standby.
*/
if (whereToSendOutput == DestRemote)
whereToSendOutput = DestNone;
proc_exit(0);
- return 1; /* keep the compiler quiet */
+ return 1; /* keep the compiler quiet */
}
/* Initialize a per-walsender data structure for this walsender process */
InitWalSnd(void)
{
/* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */
- int i;
+ int i;
/*
* WalSndCtl should be set up already (we inherit this by fork() or
void
XLogRead(char *buf, XLogRecPtr recptr, Size nbytes)
{
- char path[MAXPGPATH];
- uint32 startoff;
+ char path[MAXPGPATH];
+ uint32 startoff;
while (nbytes > 0)
{
- int segbytes;
- int readbytes;
+ int segbytes;
+ int readbytes;
startoff = recptr.xrecoff % XLogSegSize;
sendFile = BasicOpenFile(path, O_RDONLY | PG_BINARY, 0);
if (sendFile < 0)
- ereport(FATAL, /* XXX: Why FATAL? */
+ ereport(FATAL, /* XXX: Why FATAL? */
(errcode_for_file_access(),
errmsg("could not open file \"%s\" (log file %u, segment %u): %m",
path, sendId, sendSeg)));
if (readbytes <= 0)
ereport(FATAL,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not read from log file %u, segment %u, offset %u, "
- "length %lu: %m",
- sendId, sendSeg, sendOff, (unsigned long) segbytes)));
+ errmsg("could not read from log file %u, segment %u, offset %u, "
+ "length %lu: %m",
+ sendId, sendSeg, sendOff, (unsigned long) segbytes)));
/* Update state for read */
XLByteAdvance(recptr, readbytes);
XLogSend(StringInfo outMsg)
{
XLogRecPtr SendRqstPtr;
- char activitymsg[50];
+ char activitymsg[50];
+
/* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */
volatile WalSnd *walsnd = MyWalSnd;
return true;
/*
- * We gather multiple records together by issuing just one XLogRead()
- * of a suitable size, and send them as one CopyData message. Repeat
- * until we've sent everything we can.
+ * We gather multiple records together by issuing just one XLogRead() of a
+ * suitable size, and send them as one CopyData message. Repeat until
+ * we've sent everything we can.
*/
while (XLByteLT(sentPtr, SendRqstPtr))
{
- XLogRecPtr startptr;
- XLogRecPtr endptr;
- Size nbytes;
+ XLogRecPtr startptr;
+ XLogRecPtr endptr;
+ Size nbytes;
/*
* Figure out how much to send in one message. If there's less than
* relies on the fact that we never split a WAL record across two
* messages. Since a long WAL record is split at page boundary into
* continuation records, page boundary is always a safe cut-off point.
- * We also assume that SendRqstPtr never points in the middle of a
- * WAL record.
+ * We also assume that SendRqstPtr never points in the middle of a WAL
+ * record.
*/
startptr = sentPtr;
if (startptr.xrecoff >= XLogFileSize)
/*
* OK to read and send the slice.
*
- * We don't need to convert the xlogid/xrecoff from host byte order
- * to network byte order because the both server can be expected to
- * have the same byte order. If they have different byte order, we
- * don't reach here.
+ * We don't need to convert the xlogid/xrecoff from host byte order to
+ * network byte order because the both server can be expected to have
+ * the same byte order. If they have different byte order, we don't
+ * reach here.
*/
pq_sendbyte(outMsg, 'w');
pq_sendbytes(outMsg, (char *) &startptr, sizeof(startptr));
sentPtr = endptr;
/*
- * Read the log directly into the output buffer to prevent
- * extra memcpy calls.
+ * Read the log directly into the output buffer to prevent extra
+ * memcpy calls.
*/
enlargeStringInfo(outMsg, nbytes);
* system reset cycle if some idiot DBA sends a manual SIGQUIT to a random
* backend. This is necessary precisely because we don't clean up our
* shared memory state. (The "dead man switch" mechanism in pmsignal.c
- * should ensure the postmaster sees this as a crash, too, but no harm
- * in being doubly sure.)
+ * should ensure the postmaster sees this as a crash, too, but no harm in
+ * being doubly sure.)
*/
exit(2);
}
WalSndSignals(void)
{
/* Set up signal handlers */
- pqsignal(SIGHUP, WalSndSigHupHandler); /* set flag to read config file */
+ pqsignal(SIGHUP, WalSndSigHupHandler); /* set flag to read config
+ * file */
pqsignal(SIGINT, SIG_IGN); /* not used */
pqsignal(SIGTERM, WalSndShutdownHandler); /* request shutdown */
pqsignal(SIGQUIT, WalSndQuickDieHandler); /* hard crash time */
pqsignal(SIGALRM, SIG_IGN);
pqsignal(SIGPIPE, SIG_IGN);
- pqsignal(SIGUSR1, SIG_IGN); /* not used */
- pqsignal(SIGUSR2, WalSndLastCycleHandler); /* request a last cycle and shutdown */
+ pqsignal(SIGUSR1, SIG_IGN); /* not used */
+ pqsignal(SIGUSR2, WalSndLastCycleHandler); /* request a last cycle and
+ * shutdown */
/* Reset some signals that are accepted by postmaster but not here */
pqsignal(SIGCHLD, SIG_DFL);
Size
WalSndShmemSize(void)
{
- Size size = 0;
+ Size size = 0;
size = offsetof(WalSndCtlData, walsnds);
size = add_size(size, mul_size(MaxWalSenders, sizeof(WalSnd)));
void
WalSndShmemInit(void)
{
- bool found;
- int i;
+ bool found;
+ int i;
WalSndCtl = (WalSndCtlData *)
ShmemInitStruct("Wal Sender Ctl", WalSndShmemSize(), &found);
for (i = 0; i < MaxWalSenders; i++)
{
- WalSnd *walsnd = &WalSndCtl->walsnds[i];
+ WalSnd *walsnd = &WalSndCtl->walsnds[i];
+
SpinLockInit(&walsnd->mutex);
}
}
XLogRecPtr
GetOldestWALSendPointer(void)
{
- XLogRecPtr oldest = {0, 0};
- int i;
- bool found = false;
+ XLogRecPtr oldest = {0, 0};
+ int i;
+ bool found = false;
for (i = 0; i < MaxWalSenders; i++)
{
/* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */
- volatile WalSnd *walsnd = &WalSndCtl->walsnds[i];
- XLogRecPtr recptr;
+ volatile WalSnd *walsnd = &WalSndCtl->walsnds[i];
+ XLogRecPtr recptr;
if (walsnd->pid == 0)
continue;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteHandler.c,v 1.193 2010/01/02 16:57:51 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteHandler.c,v 1.194 2010/02/26 02:00:58 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static List *matchLocks(CmdType event, RuleLock *rulelocks,
int varno, Query *parsetree);
static Query *fireRIRrules(Query *parsetree, List *activeRIRs,
- bool forUpdatePushedDown);
+ bool forUpdatePushedDown);
/*
*/
AcquireRewriteLocks(rte->subquery,
(forUpdatePushedDown ||
- get_parse_rowmark(parsetree, rt_index) != NULL));
+ get_parse_rowmark(parsetree, rt_index) != NULL));
break;
default:
rte->modifiedCols = NULL;
/*
- * If FOR UPDATE/SHARE of view, mark all the contained tables as
- * implicit FOR UPDATE/SHARE, the same as the parser would have done
- * if the view's subquery had been written out explicitly.
+ * If FOR UPDATE/SHARE of view, mark all the contained tables as implicit
+ * FOR UPDATE/SHARE, the same as the parser would have done if the view's
+ * subquery had been written out explicitly.
*
* Note: we don't consider forUpdatePushedDown here; such marks will be
* made by recursing from the upper level in markQueryForLocking.
{
rte->subquery = fireRIRrules(rte->subquery, activeRIRs,
(forUpdatePushedDown ||
- get_parse_rowmark(parsetree, rt_index) != NULL));
+ get_parse_rowmark(parsetree, rt_index) != NULL));
continue;
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteManip.c,v 1.126 2010/01/02 16:57:51 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/rewrite/rewriteManip.c,v 1.127 2010/02/26 02:00:59 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* Currently, this is ONLY applied to rule-action queries, and so we
- * expect to find the OLD and NEW placeholder entries in the given
- * query. If they're not there, it must be an INSERT/SELECT in which
- * they've been pushed down to the SELECT.
+ * expect to find the OLD and NEW placeholder entries in the given query.
+ * If they're not there, it must be an INSERT/SELECT in which they've been
+ * pushed down to the SELECT.
*/
if (list_length(parsetree->rtable) >= 2 &&
strcmp(rt_fetch(PRS2_OLD_VARNO, parsetree->rtable)->eref->aliasname,
List *fields;
/*
- * If generating an expansion for a var of a named rowtype
- * (ie, this is a plain relation RTE), then we must include
- * dummy items for dropped columns. If the var is RECORD (ie,
- * this is a JOIN), then omit dropped columns. Either way,
- * attach column names to the RowExpr for use of ruleutils.c.
+ * If generating an expansion for a var of a named rowtype (ie, this
+ * is a plain relation RTE), then we must include dummy items for
+ * dropped columns. If the var is RECORD (ie, this is a JOIN), then
+ * omit dropped columns. Either way, attach column names to the
+ * RowExpr for use of ruleutils.c.
*/
expandRTE(rcon->target_rte,
var->varno, var->varlevelsup, var->location,
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/buffer/bufmgr.c,v 1.255 2010/01/23 16:37:12 sriggs Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/buffer/bufmgr.c,v 1.256 2010/02/26 02:00:59 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
bool
HoldingBufferPinThatDelaysRecovery(void)
{
- int bufid = GetStartupBufferPinWaitBufId();
+ int bufid = GetStartupBufferPinWaitBufId();
/*
- * If we get woken slowly then it's possible that the Startup process
- * was already woken by other backends before we got here. Also possible
- * that we get here by multiple interrupts or interrupts at inappropriate
+ * If we get woken slowly then it's possible that the Startup process was
+ * already woken by other backends before we got here. Also possible that
+ * we get here by multiple interrupts or interrupts at inappropriate
* times, so make sure we do nothing if the bufid is not set.
*/
if (bufid < 0)
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/file/fd.c,v 1.155 2010/02/22 15:26:14 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/file/fd.c,v 1.156 2010/02/26 02:00:59 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES:
*
#ifdef HAVE_GETRLIMIT
#ifdef RLIMIT_NOFILE /* most platforms use RLIMIT_NOFILE */
getrlimit_status = getrlimit(RLIMIT_NOFILE, &rlim);
-#else /* but BSD doesn't ... */
+#else /* but BSD doesn't ... */
getrlimit_status = getrlimit(RLIMIT_OFILE, &rlim);
#endif /* RLIMIT_NOFILE */
if (getrlimit_status != 0)
/*
* If we're in the process of exiting a backend process, close
* all temporary files. Otherwise, only close temporary files
- * local to the current transaction. They should be closed
- * by the ResourceOwner mechanism already, so this is just
- * a debugging cross-check.
+ * local to the current transaction. They should be closed by
+ * the ResourceOwner mechanism already, so this is just a
+ * debugging cross-check.
*/
if (isProcExit)
FileClose(i);
continue;
snprintf(temp_path, sizeof(temp_path), "pg_tblspc/%s/%s/%s",
- spc_de->d_name, TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY, PG_TEMP_FILES_DIR);
+ spc_de->d_name, TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY, PG_TEMP_FILES_DIR);
RemovePgTempFilesInDir(temp_path);
}
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/freespace/freespace.c,v 1.76 2010/02/09 21:43:30 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/freespace/freespace.c,v 1.77 2010/02/26 02:00:59 momjian Exp $
*
*
* NOTES:
/*
* We might as well update the local smgr_fsm_nblocks setting.
- * smgrtruncate sent an smgr cache inval message, which will cause
- * other backends to invalidate their copy of smgr_fsm_nblocks, and
- * this one too at the next command boundary. But this ensures it
- * isn't outright wrong until then.
+ * smgrtruncate sent an smgr cache inval message, which will cause other
+ * backends to invalidate their copy of smgr_fsm_nblocks, and this one too
+ * at the next command boundary. But this ensures it isn't outright wrong
+ * until then.
*/
if (rel->rd_smgr)
rel->rd_smgr->smgr_fsm_nblocks = new_nfsmblocks;
/*
* If we haven't cached the size of the FSM yet, check it first. Also
- * recheck if the requested block seems to be past end, since our
- * cached value might be stale. (We send smgr inval messages on
- * truncation, but not on extension.)
+ * recheck if the requested block seems to be past end, since our cached
+ * value might be stale. (We send smgr inval messages on truncation, but
+ * not on extension.)
*/
if (rel->rd_smgr->smgr_fsm_nblocks == InvalidBlockNumber ||
blkno >= rel->rd_smgr->smgr_fsm_nblocks)
RelationOpenSmgr(rel);
/*
- * Create the FSM file first if it doesn't exist. If smgr_fsm_nblocks
- * is positive then it must exist, no need for an smgrexists call.
+ * Create the FSM file first if it doesn't exist. If smgr_fsm_nblocks is
+ * positive then it must exist, no need for an smgrexists call.
*/
if ((rel->rd_smgr->smgr_fsm_nblocks == 0 ||
rel->rd_smgr->smgr_fsm_nblocks == InvalidBlockNumber) &&
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/procarray.c,v 1.59 2010/01/23 16:37:12 sriggs Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/procarray.c,v 1.60 2010/02/26 02:01:00 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "utils/builtins.h"
#include "utils/snapmgr.h"
-static RunningTransactionsData CurrentRunningXactsData;
+static RunningTransactionsData CurrentRunningXactsData;
/* Our shared memory area */
typedef struct ProcArrayStruct
int numProcs; /* number of valid procs entries */
int maxProcs; /* allocated size of procs array */
- int numKnownAssignedXids; /* current number of known assigned xids */
- int maxKnownAssignedXids; /* allocated size of known assigned xids */
+ int numKnownAssignedXids; /* current number of known assigned
+ * xids */
+ int maxKnownAssignedXids; /* allocated size of known assigned
+ * xids */
+
/*
* Highest subxid that overflowed KnownAssignedXids array. Similar to
* overflowing cached subxids in PGPROC entries.
*/
- TransactionId lastOverflowedXid;
+ TransactionId lastOverflowedXid;
/*
* We declare procs[] as 1 entry because C wants a fixed-size array, but
* Bookkeeping for tracking emulated transactions in recovery
*/
static HTAB *KnownAssignedXidsHash;
-static TransactionId latestObservedXid = InvalidTransactionId;
+static TransactionId latestObservedXid = InvalidTransactionId;
/*
* If we're in STANDBY_SNAPSHOT_PENDING state, standbySnapshotPendingXmin is
#endif /* XIDCACHE_DEBUG */
/* Primitives for KnownAssignedXids array handling for standby */
-static int KnownAssignedXidsGet(TransactionId *xarray, TransactionId xmax);
-static int KnownAssignedXidsGetAndSetXmin(TransactionId *xarray, TransactionId *xmin,
- TransactionId xmax);
+static int KnownAssignedXidsGet(TransactionId *xarray, TransactionId xmax);
+static int KnownAssignedXidsGetAndSetXmin(TransactionId *xarray, TransactionId *xmin,
+ TransactionId xmax);
static bool KnownAssignedXidsExist(TransactionId xid);
static void KnownAssignedXidsAdd(TransactionId *xids, int nxids);
static void KnownAssignedXidsRemove(TransactionId xid);
void
ProcArrayApplyRecoveryInfo(RunningTransactions running)
{
- int xid_index; /* main loop */
- TransactionId *xids;
- int nxids;
+ int xid_index; /* main loop */
+ TransactionId *xids;
+ int nxids;
Assert(standbyState >= STANDBY_INITIALIZED);
return;
/*
- * If our initial RunningXactData had an overflowed snapshot then we
- * knew we were missing some subxids from our snapshot. We can use
- * this data as an initial snapshot, but we cannot yet mark it valid.
- * We know that the missing subxids are equal to or earlier than
- * nextXid. After we initialise we continue to apply changes during
- * recovery, so once the oldestRunningXid is later than the nextXid
- * from the initial snapshot we know that we no longer have missing
- * information and can mark the snapshot as valid.
+ * If our initial RunningXactData had an overflowed snapshot then we knew
+ * we were missing some subxids from our snapshot. We can use this data as
+ * an initial snapshot, but we cannot yet mark it valid. We know that the
+ * missing subxids are equal to or earlier than nextXid. After we
+ * initialise we continue to apply changes during recovery, so once the
+ * oldestRunningXid is later than the nextXid from the initial snapshot we
+ * know that we no longer have missing information and can mark the
+ * snapshot as valid.
*/
if (standbyState == STANDBY_SNAPSHOT_PENDING)
{
{
standbyState = STANDBY_SNAPSHOT_READY;
elog(trace_recovery(DEBUG2),
- "running xact data now proven complete");
+ "running xact data now proven complete");
elog(trace_recovery(DEBUG2),
- "recovery snapshots are now enabled");
+ "recovery snapshots are now enabled");
}
return;
}
TransactionIdRetreat(latestObservedXid);
/*
- * If the snapshot overflowed, then we still initialise with what we
- * know, but the recovery snapshot isn't fully valid yet because we
- * know there are some subxids missing (ergo we don't know which ones)
+ * If the snapshot overflowed, then we still initialise with what we know,
+ * but the recovery snapshot isn't fully valid yet because we know there
+ * are some subxids missing (ergo we don't know which ones)
*/
if (!running->subxid_overflow)
{
KnownAssignedXidsDisplay(trace_recovery(DEBUG3));
/*
- * Scan through the incoming array of RunningXacts and collect xids.
- * We don't use SubtransSetParent because it doesn't matter yet. If
- * we aren't overflowed then all xids will fit in snapshot and so we
- * don't need subtrans. If we later overflow, an xid assignment record
- * will add xids to subtrans. If RunningXacts is overflowed then we
- * don't have enough information to correctly update subtrans anyway.
+ * Scan through the incoming array of RunningXacts and collect xids. We
+ * don't use SubtransSetParent because it doesn't matter yet. If we aren't
+ * overflowed then all xids will fit in snapshot and so we don't need
+ * subtrans. If we later overflow, an xid assignment record will add xids
+ * to subtrans. If RunningXacts is overflowed then we don't have enough
+ * information to correctly update subtrans anyway.
*/
/*
ShmemVariableCache->nextXid = running->nextXid;
elog(trace_recovery(DEBUG2),
- "running transaction data initialized");
+ "running transaction data initialized");
if (standbyState == STANDBY_SNAPSHOT_READY)
elog(trace_recovery(DEBUG2),
- "recovery snapshots are now enabled");
+ "recovery snapshots are now enabled");
}
void
int nsubxids, TransactionId *subxids)
{
TransactionId max_xid;
- int i;
+ int i;
if (standbyState < STANDBY_SNAPSHOT_PENDING)
return;
RecordKnownAssignedTransactionIds(max_xid);
/*
- * Notice that we update pg_subtrans with the top-level xid, rather
- * than the parent xid. This is a difference between normal
- * processing and recovery, yet is still correct in all cases. The
- * reason is that subtransaction commit is not marked in clog until
- * commit processing, so all aborted subtransactions have already been
- * clearly marked in clog. As a result we are able to refer directly
- * to the top-level transaction's state rather than skipping through
- * all the intermediate states in the subtransaction tree. This
- * should be the first time we have attempted to SubTransSetParent().
+ * Notice that we update pg_subtrans with the top-level xid, rather than
+ * the parent xid. This is a difference between normal processing and
+ * recovery, yet is still correct in all cases. The reason is that
+ * subtransaction commit is not marked in clog until commit processing, so
+ * all aborted subtransactions have already been clearly marked in clog.
+ * As a result we are able to refer directly to the top-level
+ * transaction's state rather than skipping through all the intermediate
+ * states in the subtransaction tree. This should be the first time we
+ * have attempted to SubTransSetParent().
*/
for (i = 0; i < nsubxids; i++)
SubTransSetParent(subxids[i], topxid, false);
if (xids == NULL)
{
/*
- * In hot standby mode, reserve enough space to hold all xids in
- * the known-assigned list. If we later finish recovery, we no longer
- * need the bigger array, but we don't bother to shrink it.
+ * In hot standby mode, reserve enough space to hold all xids in the
+ * known-assigned list. If we later finish recovery, we no longer need
+ * the bigger array, but we don't bother to shrink it.
*/
- int maxxids = RecoveryInProgress() ?
- arrayP->maxProcs : TOTAL_MAX_CACHED_SUBXIDS;
+ int maxxids = RecoveryInProgress() ?
+ arrayP->maxProcs : TOTAL_MAX_CACHED_SUBXIDS;
xids = (TransactionId *) malloc(maxxids * sizeof(TransactionId));
if (xids == NULL)
}
/*
- * If the KnownAssignedXids overflowed, we have to check
- * pg_subtrans too. Copy all xids from KnownAssignedXids that are
- * lower than xid, since if xid is a subtransaction its parent will
- * always have a lower value.
+ * If the KnownAssignedXids overflowed, we have to check pg_subtrans
+ * too. Copy all xids from KnownAssignedXids that are lower than xid,
+ * since if xid is a subtransaction its parent will always have a
+ * lower value.
*/
if (TransactionIdPrecedesOrEquals(xid, procArray->lastOverflowedXid))
nxids = KnownAssignedXidsGet(xids, xid);
if (snapshot->xip == NULL)
{
/*
- * First call for this snapshot. Snapshot is same size whether
- * or not we are in recovery, see later comments.
+ * First call for this snapshot. Snapshot is same size whether or not
+ * we are in recovery, see later comments.
*/
snapshot->xip = (TransactionId *)
malloc(arrayP->maxProcs * sizeof(TransactionId));
* In recovery we don't know which xids are top-level and which are
* subxacts, a design choice that greatly simplifies xid processing.
*
- * It seems like we would want to try to put xids into xip[] only,
- * but that is fairly small. We would either need to make that bigger
- * or to increase the rate at which we WAL-log xid assignment;
- * neither is an appealing choice.
+ * It seems like we would want to try to put xids into xip[] only, but
+ * that is fairly small. We would either need to make that bigger or
+ * to increase the rate at which we WAL-log xid assignment; neither is
+ * an appealing choice.
*
* We could try to store xids into xip[] first and then into subxip[]
* if there are too many xids. That only works if the snapshot doesn't
* overflow because we do not search subxip[] in that case. A simpler
- * way is to just store all xids in the subxact array because this
- * is by far the bigger array. We just leave the xip array empty.
+ * way is to just store all xids in the subxact array because this is
+ * by far the bigger array. We just leave the xip array empty.
*
* Either way we need to change the way XidInMVCCSnapshot() works
* depending upon when the snapshot was taken, or change normal
* the lock, so we can't look at numProcs. Likewise, we allocate much
* more subxip storage than is probably needed.
*
- * Should only be allocated for bgwriter, since only ever executed
- * during checkpoints.
+ * Should only be allocated for bgwriter, since only ever executed during
+ * checkpoints.
*/
if (CurrentRunningXacts->xids == NULL)
{
latestCompletedXid = ShmemVariableCache->latestCompletedXid;
oldestRunningXid = ShmemVariableCache->nextXid;
+
/*
* Spin over procArray collecting all xids and subxids.
*/
oldestRunningXid = xid;
/*
- * Save subtransaction XIDs. Other backends can't add or remove entries
- * while we're holding XidGenLock.
+ * Save subtransaction XIDs. Other backends can't add or remove
+ * entries while we're holding XidGenLock.
*/
nxids = proc->subxids.nxids;
if (nxids > 0)
*
* By using exclusive lock we prevent new snapshots from being taken while
* we work out which snapshots to conflict with. This protects those new
- * snapshots from also being included in our conflict list.
+ * snapshots from also being included in our conflict list.
*
* After the lock is released, we allow snapshots again. It is possible
* that we arrive at a snapshot that is identical to one that we just
* decided we should conflict with. This a case of false positives, not an
* actual problem.
- *
+ *
* There are two cases: (1) if we were correct in using latestCompletedXid
* then that means that all xids in the snapshot lower than that are FATAL
* errors, so not xids that ever commit. We can make no visibility errors
* latestCompletedXid then we conflicted with a snapshot needlessly. Taking
* another identical snapshot is OK, because the earlier conflicted
* snapshot was a false positive.
- *
+ *
* In either case, a snapshot taken after conflict assessment will still be
* valid and non-conflicting even if an identical snapshot that existed
* before conflict assessment was assessed as conflicting.
- *
+ *
* If we allowed concurrent snapshots while we were deciding who to
* conflict with we would need to include all concurrent snapshotters in
* the conflict list as well. We'd have difficulty in working out exactly
* lock. Notice that we only hold that lock for as long as it takes to
* make the conflict list, not for the whole duration of the conflict
* resolution.
- *
+ *
* It also means that users waiting for a snapshot is a good thing, since
* it is more likely that they will live longer after having waited. So it
* is a benefit, not an oversight that we use exclusive lock here.
/*
* If not first time through, get workspace to remember main XIDs in. We
- * malloc it permanently to avoid repeated palloc/pfree overhead.
- * Allow result space, remembering room for a terminator.
+ * malloc it permanently to avoid repeated palloc/pfree overhead. Allow
+ * result space, remembering room for a terminator.
*/
if (vxids == NULL)
{
LWLockAcquire(ProcArrayLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE);
/*
- * If we don't know the TransactionId that created the conflict, set
- * it to latestCompletedXid which is the latest possible value.
+ * If we don't know the TransactionId that created the conflict, set it to
+ * latestCompletedXid which is the latest possible value.
*/
if (!TransactionIdIsValid(limitXmin))
limitXmin = ShmemVariableCache->latestCompletedXid;
TransactionId pxmin = proc->xmin;
/*
- * We ignore an invalid pxmin because this means that backend
- * has no snapshot and cannot get another one while we hold exclusive lock.
+ * We ignore an invalid pxmin because this means that backend has
+ * no snapshot and cannot get another one while we hold exclusive
+ * lock.
*/
if (TransactionIdIsValid(pxmin) && !TransactionIdFollows(pxmin, limitXmin))
{
if (pid != 0)
{
/*
- * Kill the pid if it's still here. If not, that's what we wanted
- * so ignore any errors.
+ * Kill the pid if it's still here. If not, that's what we
+ * wanted so ignore any errors.
*/
(void) SendProcSignal(pid, sigmode, vxid.backendId);
}
if (pid != 0)
{
/*
- * Kill the pid if it's still here. If not, that's what we wanted
- * so ignore any errors.
+ * Kill the pid if it's still here. If not, that's what we
+ * wanted so ignore any errors.
*/
(void) SendProcSignal(pid, sigmode, procvxid.backendId);
}
xc_no_overflow,
xc_slow_answer);
}
-
#endif /* XIDCACHE_DEBUG */
/* ----------------------------------------------
- * KnownAssignedTransactions sub-module
+ * KnownAssignedTransactions sub-module
* ----------------------------------------------
*/
return;
/*
- * We can see WAL records before the running-xacts snapshot that
- * contain XIDs that are not in the running-xacts snapshot, but that we
- * know to have finished before the running-xacts snapshot was taken.
- * Don't waste precious shared memory by keeping them in the hash table.
+ * We can see WAL records before the running-xacts snapshot that contain
+ * XIDs that are not in the running-xacts snapshot, but that we know to
+ * have finished before the running-xacts snapshot was taken. Don't waste
+ * precious shared memory by keeping them in the hash table.
*
* We can also see WAL records before the running-xacts snapshot that
* contain XIDs that are not in the running-xacts snapshot for a different
- * reason: the transaction started *after* the running-xacts snapshot
- * was taken, but before it was written to WAL. We must be careful to
- * not ignore such XIDs. Because such a transaction started after the
- * running-xacts snapshot was taken, it must have an XID larger than
- * the oldest XID according to the running-xacts snapshot.
+ * reason: the transaction started *after* the running-xacts snapshot was
+ * taken, but before it was written to WAL. We must be careful to not
+ * ignore such XIDs. Because such a transaction started after the
+ * running-xacts snapshot was taken, it must have an XID larger than the
+ * oldest XID according to the running-xacts snapshot.
*/
if (TransactionIdPrecedes(xid, snapshotOldestActiveXid))
return;
ereport(trace_recovery(DEBUG4),
- (errmsg("record known xact %u latestObservedXid %u",
- xid, latestObservedXid)));
+ (errmsg("record known xact %u latestObservedXid %u",
+ xid, latestObservedXid)));
/*
- * When a newly observed xid arrives, it is frequently the case
- * that it is *not* the next xid in sequence. When this occurs, we
- * must treat the intervening xids as running also.
+ * When a newly observed xid arrives, it is frequently the case that it is
+ * *not* the next xid in sequence. When this occurs, we must treat the
+ * intervening xids as running also.
*/
if (TransactionIdFollows(xid, latestObservedXid))
{
- TransactionId next_expected_xid = latestObservedXid;
+ TransactionId next_expected_xid = latestObservedXid;
+
TransactionIdAdvance(next_expected_xid);
/*
- * Locking requirement is currently higher than for xid assignment
- * in normal running. However, we only get called here for new
- * high xids - so on a multi-processor where it is common that xids
- * arrive out of order the average number of locks per assignment
- * will actually reduce. So not too worried about this locking.
+ * Locking requirement is currently higher than for xid assignment in
+ * normal running. However, we only get called here for new high xids
+ * - so on a multi-processor where it is common that xids arrive out
+ * of order the average number of locks per assignment will actually
+ * reduce. So not too worried about this locking.
*
- * XXX It does seem possible that we could add a whole range
- * of numbers atomically to KnownAssignedXids, if we use a sorted
- * list for KnownAssignedXids. But that design also increases the
- * length of time we hold lock when we process commits/aborts, so
- * on balance don't worry about this.
+ * XXX It does seem possible that we could add a whole range of
+ * numbers atomically to KnownAssignedXids, if we use a sorted list
+ * for KnownAssignedXids. But that design also increases the length of
+ * time we hold lock when we process commits/aborts, so on balance
+ * don't worry about this.
*/
LWLockAcquire(ProcArrayLock, LW_EXCLUSIVE);
{
if (TransactionIdPrecedes(next_expected_xid, xid))
ereport(trace_recovery(DEBUG4),
- (errmsg("recording unobserved xid %u (latestObservedXid %u)",
- next_expected_xid, latestObservedXid)));
+ (errmsg("recording unobserved xid %u (latestObservedXid %u)",
+ next_expected_xid, latestObservedXid)));
KnownAssignedXidsAdd(&next_expected_xid, 1);
/*
*
* There are 3 main users of the KnownAssignedXids data structure:
*
- * * backends taking snapshots
- * * startup process adding new knownassigned xids
- * * startup process removing xids as transactions end
+ * * backends taking snapshots
+ * * startup process adding new knownassigned xids
+ * * startup process removing xids as transactions end
*
* If we make KnownAssignedXids a simple sorted array then the first two
* operations are fast, but the last one is at least O(N). If we make
KnownAssignedXidsAdd(TransactionId *xids, int nxids)
{
TransactionId *result;
- bool found;
- int i;
+ bool found;
+ int i;
for (i = 0; i < nxids; i++)
{
KnownAssignedXidsDisplay(LOG);
LWLockRelease(ProcArrayLock);
ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_OUT_OF_MEMORY),
- errmsg("too many KnownAssignedXids")));
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_OUT_OF_MEMORY),
+ errmsg("too many KnownAssignedXids")));
}
result = (TransactionId *) hash_search(KnownAssignedXidsHash, &xids[i], HASH_ENTER,
- &found);
+ &found);
if (!result)
{
LWLockRelease(ProcArrayLock);
ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_OUT_OF_MEMORY),
- errmsg("out of shared memory")));
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_OUT_OF_MEMORY),
+ errmsg("out of shared memory")));
}
if (found)
static bool
KnownAssignedXidsExist(TransactionId xid)
{
- bool found;
+ bool found;
+
(void) hash_search(KnownAssignedXidsHash, &xid, HASH_FIND, &found);
return found;
}
static void
KnownAssignedXidsRemove(TransactionId xid)
{
- bool found;
+ bool found;
Assert(TransactionIdIsValid(xid));
Assert(procArray->numKnownAssignedXids >= 0);
/*
- * We can fail to find an xid if the xid came from a subtransaction
- * that aborts, though the xid hadn't yet been reported and no WAL records
- * have been written using the subxid. In that case the abort record will
+ * We can fail to find an xid if the xid came from a subtransaction that
+ * aborts, though the xid hadn't yet been reported and no WAL records have
+ * been written using the subxid. In that case the abort record will
* contain that subxid and we haven't seen it before.
*
- * If we fail to find it for other reasons it might be a problem, but
- * it isn't much use to log that it happened, since we can't divine much
- * from just an isolated xid value.
+ * If we fail to find it for other reasons it might be a problem, but it
+ * isn't much use to log that it happened, since we can't divine much from
+ * just an isolated xid value.
*/
}
*/
static int
KnownAssignedXidsGetAndSetXmin(TransactionId *xarray, TransactionId *xmin,
- TransactionId xmax)
+ TransactionId xmax)
{
HASH_SEQ_STATUS status;
TransactionId *knownXid;
static void
KnownAssignedXidsRemoveMany(TransactionId xid, bool keepPreparedXacts)
{
- TransactionId *knownXid;
+ TransactionId *knownXid;
HASH_SEQ_STATUS status;
if (TransactionIdIsValid(xid))
while ((knownXid = (TransactionId *) hash_seq_search(&status)) != NULL)
{
TransactionId removeXid = *knownXid;
- bool found;
+ bool found;
if (!TransactionIdIsValid(xid) || TransactionIdPrecedes(removeXid, xid))
{
HASH_SEQ_STATUS status;
TransactionId *knownXid;
StringInfoData buf;
- TransactionId *xids;
- int nxids;
- int i;
+ TransactionId *xids;
+ int nxids;
+ int i;
xids = palloc(sizeof(TransactionId) * TOTAL_MAX_CACHED_SUBXIDS);
nxids = 0;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/procsignal.c,v 1.5 2010/02/13 01:32:19 sriggs Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/procsignal.c,v 1.6 2010/02/26 02:01:00 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* reason is signaled more than once nearly simultaneously, the process may
* observe it only once.)
*
- * Each process that wants to receive signals registers its process ID
+ * Each process that wants to receive signals registers its process ID
* in the ProcSignalSlots array. The array is indexed by backend ID to make
* slot allocation simple, and to avoid having to search the array when you
* know the backend ID of the process you're signalling. (We do support
* signalling without backend ID, but it's a bit less efficient.)
- *
+ *
* The flags are actually declared as "volatile sig_atomic_t" for maximum
* portability. This should ensure that loads and stores of the flag
* values are atomic, allowing us to dispense with any explicit locking.
* possible auxiliary process type. (This scheme assumes there is not
* more than one of any auxiliary process type at a time.)
*/
-#define NumProcSignalSlots (MaxBackends + NUM_AUXPROCTYPES)
+#define NumProcSignalSlots (MaxBackends + NUM_AUXPROCTYPES)
static ProcSignalSlot *ProcSignalSlots = NULL;
static volatile ProcSignalSlot *MyProcSignalSlot = NULL;
if (slot->pss_pid != MyProcPid)
{
/*
- * don't ERROR here. We're exiting anyway, and don't want to
- * get into infinite loop trying to exit
+ * don't ERROR here. We're exiting anyway, and don't want to get into
+ * infinite loop trying to exit
*/
elog(LOG, "process %d releasing ProcSignal slot %d, but it contains %d",
MyProcPid, pss_idx, (int) slot->pss_pid);
* InvalidBackendId means that the target is most likely an auxiliary
* process, which will have a slot near the end of the array.
*/
- int i;
+ int i;
for (i = NumProcSignalSlots - 1; i >= 0; i--)
{
void
procsignal_sigusr1_handler(SIGNAL_ARGS)
{
- int save_errno = errno;
+ int save_errno = errno;
if (CheckProcSignal(PROCSIG_CATCHUP_INTERRUPT))
HandleCatchupInterrupt();
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/sinvaladt.c,v 1.81 2010/01/02 16:57:51 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/sinvaladt.c,v 1.82 2010/02/26 02:01:00 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
bool signaled; /* backend has been sent catchup signal */
/*
- * Backend only sends invalidations, never receives them. This only makes sense
- * for Startup process during recovery because it doesn't maintain a relcache,
- * yet it fires inval messages to allow query backends to see schema changes.
+ * Backend only sends invalidations, never receives them. This only makes
+ * sense for Startup process during recovery because it doesn't maintain a
+ * relcache, yet it fires inval messages to allow query backends to see
+ * schema changes.
*/
bool sendOnly; /* backend only sends, never receives */
/*
* Recompute minMsgNum = minimum of all backends' nextMsgNum, identify the
* furthest-back backend that needs signaling (if any), and reset any
- * backends that are too far back. Note that because we ignore sendOnly
+ * backends that are too far back. Note that because we ignore sendOnly
* backends here it is possible for them to keep sending messages without
* a problem even when they are the only active backend.
*/
* standby.c
* Misc functions used in Hot Standby mode.
*
- * All functions for handling RM_STANDBY_ID, which relate to
- * AccessExclusiveLocks and starting snapshots for Hot Standby mode.
- * Plus conflict recovery processing.
+ * All functions for handling RM_STANDBY_ID, which relate to
+ * AccessExclusiveLocks and starting snapshots for Hot Standby mode.
+ * Plus conflict recovery processing.
*
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/standby.c,v 1.13 2010/02/13 16:29:38 sriggs Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/standby.c,v 1.14 2010/02/26 02:01:00 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "storage/standby.h"
#include "utils/ps_status.h"
-int vacuum_defer_cleanup_age;
+int vacuum_defer_cleanup_age;
static List *RecoveryLockList;
VirtualTransactionId vxid;
/*
- * Initialise shared invalidation management for Startup process,
- * being careful to register ourselves as a sendOnly process so
- * we don't need to read messages, nor will we get signalled
- * when the queue starts filling up.
+ * Initialise shared invalidation management for Startup process, being
+ * careful to register ourselves as a sendOnly process so we don't need to
+ * read messages, nor will we get signalled when the queue starts filling
+ * up.
*/
SharedInvalBackendInit(true);
* Lock a virtual transaction id for Startup process.
*
* We need to do GetNextLocalTransactionId() because
- * SharedInvalBackendInit() leaves localTransactionid invalid and
- * the lock manager doesn't like that at all.
+ * SharedInvalBackendInit() leaves localTransactionid invalid and the lock
+ * manager doesn't like that at all.
*
* Note that we don't need to run XactLockTableInsert() because nobody
* needs to wait on xids. That sounds a little strange, but table locks
/*
* -----------------------------------------------------
- * Standby wait timers and backend cancel logic
+ * Standby wait timers and backend cancel logic
* -----------------------------------------------------
*/
#define STANDBY_INITIAL_WAIT_US 1000
-static int standbyWait_us = STANDBY_INITIAL_WAIT_US;
+static int standbyWait_us = STANDBY_INITIAL_WAIT_US;
/*
* Standby wait logic for ResolveRecoveryConflictWithVirtualXIDs.
static bool
WaitExceedsMaxStandbyDelay(void)
{
- long delay_secs;
- int delay_usecs;
+ long delay_secs;
+ int delay_usecs;
if (MaxStandbyDelay == -1)
return false;
while (VirtualTransactionIdIsValid(*waitlist))
{
- long wait_s;
- int wait_us; /* wait in microseconds (us) */
+ long wait_s;
+ int wait_us; /* wait in microseconds (us) */
TimestampTz waitStart;
bool logged;
logged = false;
/* wait until the virtual xid is gone */
- while(!ConditionalVirtualXactLockTableWait(*waitlist))
+ while (!ConditionalVirtualXactLockTableWait(*waitlist))
{
/*
* Report if we have been waiting for a while now...
*/
TimestampTz now = GetCurrentTimestamp();
+
TimestampDifference(waitStart, now, &wait_s, &wait_us);
if (!logged && (wait_s > 0 || wait_us > 500000))
{
/* Is it time to kill it? */
if (WaitExceedsMaxStandbyDelay())
{
- pid_t pid;
+ pid_t pid;
/*
* Now find out who to throw out of the balloon.
/* The virtual transaction is gone now, wait for the next one */
waitlist++;
- }
+ }
}
void
node.dbNode);
ResolveRecoveryConflictWithVirtualXIDs(backends,
- PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_SNAPSHOT);
+ PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_SNAPSHOT);
}
void
VirtualTransactionId *temp_file_users;
/*
- * Standby users may be currently using this tablespace for
- * for their temporary files. We only care about current
- * users because temp_tablespace parameter will just ignore
- * tablespaces that no longer exist.
+ * Standby users may be currently using this tablespace for for their
+ * temporary files. We only care about current users because
+ * temp_tablespace parameter will just ignore tablespaces that no longer
+ * exist.
*
- * Ask everybody to cancel their queries immediately so
- * we can ensure no temp files remain and we can remove the
- * tablespace. Nuke the entire site from orbit, it's the only
- * way to be sure.
+ * Ask everybody to cancel their queries immediately so we can ensure no
+ * temp files remain and we can remove the tablespace. Nuke the entire
+ * site from orbit, it's the only way to be sure.
*
- * XXX: We could work out the pids of active backends
- * using this tablespace by examining the temp filenames in the
- * directory. We would then convert the pids into VirtualXIDs
- * before attempting to cancel them.
+ * XXX: We could work out the pids of active backends using this
+ * tablespace by examining the temp filenames in the directory. We would
+ * then convert the pids into VirtualXIDs before attempting to cancel
+ * them.
*
- * We don't wait for commit because drop tablespace is
- * non-transactional.
+ * We don't wait for commit because drop tablespace is non-transactional.
*/
temp_file_users = GetConflictingVirtualXIDs(InvalidTransactionId,
InvalidOid);
ResolveRecoveryConflictWithVirtualXIDs(temp_file_users,
- PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_TABLESPACE);
+ PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_TABLESPACE);
}
void
ResolveRecoveryConflictWithDatabase(Oid dbid)
{
/*
- * We don't do ResolveRecoveryConflictWithVirutalXIDs() here since
- * that only waits for transactions and completely idle sessions
- * would block us. This is rare enough that we do this as simply
- * as possible: no wait, just force them off immediately.
+ * We don't do ResolveRecoveryConflictWithVirutalXIDs() here since that
+ * only waits for transactions and completely idle sessions would block
+ * us. This is rare enough that we do this as simply as possible: no wait,
+ * just force them off immediately.
*
* No locking is required here because we already acquired
- * AccessExclusiveLock. Anybody trying to connect while we do this
- * will block during InitPostgres() and then disconnect when they
- * see the database has been removed.
+ * AccessExclusiveLock. Anybody trying to connect while we do this will
+ * block during InitPostgres() and then disconnect when they see the
+ * database has been removed.
*/
while (CountDBBackends(dbid) > 0)
{
ResolveRecoveryConflictWithLock(Oid dbOid, Oid relOid)
{
VirtualTransactionId *backends;
- bool report_memory_error = false;
- bool lock_acquired = false;
- int num_attempts = 0;
- LOCKTAG locktag;
+ bool report_memory_error = false;
+ bool lock_acquired = false;
+ int num_attempts = 0;
+ LOCKTAG locktag;
SET_LOCKTAG_RELATION(locktag, dbOid, relOid);
/*
- * If blowing away everybody with conflicting locks doesn't work,
- * after the first two attempts then we just start blowing everybody
- * away until it does work. We do this because its likely that we
- * either have too many locks and we just can't get one at all,
- * or that there are many people crowding for the same table.
- * Recovery must win; the end justifies the means.
+ * If blowing away everybody with conflicting locks doesn't work, after
+ * the first two attempts then we just start blowing everybody away until
+ * it does work. We do this because its likely that we either have too
+ * many locks and we just can't get one at all, or that there are many
+ * people crowding for the same table. Recovery must win; the end
+ * justifies the means.
*/
while (!lock_acquired)
{
}
ResolveRecoveryConflictWithVirtualXIDs(backends,
- PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_LOCK);
+ PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_LOCK);
if (LockAcquireExtended(&locktag, AccessExclusiveLock, true, true, false)
- != LOCKACQUIRE_NOT_AVAIL)
+ != LOCKACQUIRE_NOT_AVAIL)
lock_acquired = true;
}
}
void
ResolveRecoveryConflictWithBufferPin(void)
{
- bool sig_alarm_enabled = false;
+ bool sig_alarm_enabled = false;
Assert(InHotStandby);
if (MaxStandbyDelay == 0)
{
/*
- * We don't want to wait, so just tell everybody holding the pin to
+ * We don't want to wait, so just tell everybody holding the pin to
* get out of town.
*/
SendRecoveryConflictWithBufferPin(PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_BUFFERPIN);
else if (MaxStandbyDelay == -1)
{
/*
- * Send out a request to check for buffer pin deadlocks before we wait.
- * This is fairly cheap, so no need to wait for deadlock timeout before
- * trying to send it out.
+ * Send out a request to check for buffer pin deadlocks before we
+ * wait. This is fairly cheap, so no need to wait for deadlock timeout
+ * before trying to send it out.
*/
SendRecoveryConflictWithBufferPin(PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_STARTUP_DEADLOCK);
}
else
{
TimestampTz now;
- long standby_delay_secs; /* How far Startup process is lagging */
- int standby_delay_usecs;
+ long standby_delay_secs; /* How far Startup process is lagging */
+ int standby_delay_usecs;
now = GetCurrentTimestamp();
}
else
{
- TimestampTz fin_time; /* Expected wake-up time by timer */
- long timer_delay_secs; /* Amount of time we set timer for */
- int timer_delay_usecs = 0;
+ TimestampTz fin_time; /* Expected wake-up time by timer */
+ long timer_delay_secs; /* Amount of time we set timer
+ * for */
+ int timer_delay_usecs = 0;
/*
- * Send out a request to check for buffer pin deadlocks before we wait.
- * This is fairly cheap, so no need to wait for deadlock timeout before
- * trying to send it out.
+ * Send out a request to check for buffer pin deadlocks before we
+ * wait. This is fairly cheap, so no need to wait for deadlock
+ * timeout before trying to send it out.
*/
SendRecoveryConflictWithBufferPin(PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_STARTUP_DEADLOCK);
* When is the finish time? We recheck this if we are woken early.
*/
fin_time = TimestampTzPlusMilliseconds(now,
- (timer_delay_secs * 1000) +
- (timer_delay_usecs / 1000));
+ (timer_delay_secs * 1000) +
+ (timer_delay_usecs / 1000));
if (enable_standby_sig_alarm(timer_delay_secs, timer_delay_usecs, fin_time))
sig_alarm_enabled = true;
reason == PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_STARTUP_DEADLOCK);
/*
- * We send signal to all backends to ask them if they are holding
- * the buffer pin which is delaying the Startup process. We must
- * not set the conflict flag yet, since most backends will be innocent.
- * Let the SIGUSR1 handling in each backend decide their own fate.
+ * We send signal to all backends to ask them if they are holding the
+ * buffer pin which is delaying the Startup process. We must not set the
+ * conflict flag yet, since most backends will be innocent. Let the
+ * SIGUSR1 handling in each backend decide their own fate.
*/
CancelDBBackends(InvalidOid, reason, false);
}
/*
* Error message should match ProcessInterrupts() but we avoid calling
- * that because we aren't handling an interrupt at this point. Note
- * that we only cancel the current transaction here, so if we are in a
+ * that because we aren't handling an interrupt at this point. Note that
+ * we only cancel the current transaction here, so if we are in a
* subtransaction and the pin is held by a parent, then the Startup
* process will continue to wait even though we have avoided deadlock.
*/
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_QUERY_CANCELED),
errmsg("canceling statement due to conflict with recovery"),
- errdetail("User transaction caused buffer deadlock with recovery.")));
+ errdetail("User transaction caused buffer deadlock with recovery.")));
}
/*
void
StandbyAcquireAccessExclusiveLock(TransactionId xid, Oid dbOid, Oid relOid)
{
- xl_standby_lock *newlock;
- LOCKTAG locktag;
+ xl_standby_lock *newlock;
+ LOCKTAG locktag;
/* Already processed? */
if (TransactionIdDidCommit(xid) || TransactionIdDidAbort(xid))
SET_LOCKTAG_RELATION(locktag, newlock->dbOid, newlock->relOid);
if (LockAcquireExtended(&locktag, AccessExclusiveLock, true, true, false)
- == LOCKACQUIRE_NOT_AVAIL)
+ == LOCKACQUIRE_NOT_AVAIL)
ResolveRecoveryConflictWithLock(newlock->dbOid, newlock->relOid);
}
for (cell = list_head(RecoveryLockList); cell; cell = next)
{
xl_standby_lock *lock = (xl_standby_lock *) lfirst(cell);
+
next = lnext(cell);
if (!TransactionIdIsValid(xid) || lock->xid == xid)
void
StandbyReleaseLockTree(TransactionId xid, int nsubxids, TransactionId *subxids)
{
- int i;
+ int i;
StandbyReleaseLocks(xid);
for (cell = list_head(RecoveryLockList); cell; cell = next)
{
xl_standby_lock *lock = (xl_standby_lock *) lfirst(cell);
+
next = lnext(cell);
if (!TransactionIdIsValid(removeXid) || TransactionIdPrecedes(lock->xid, removeXid))
/*
* --------------------------------------------------------------------
- * Recovery handling for Rmgr RM_STANDBY_ID
+ * Recovery handling for Rmgr RM_STANDBY_ID
*
* These record types will only be created if XLogStandbyInfoActive()
* --------------------------------------------------------------------
if (info == XLOG_STANDBY_LOCK)
{
xl_standby_locks *xlrec = (xl_standby_locks *) XLogRecGetData(record);
- int i;
+ int i;
for (i = 0; i < xlrec->nlocks; i++)
StandbyAcquireAccessExclusiveLock(xlrec->locks[i].xid,
if (info == XLOG_STANDBY_LOCK)
{
xl_standby_locks *xlrec = (xl_standby_locks *) rec;
- int i;
+ int i;
appendStringInfo(buf, "AccessExclusive locks:");
{
RunningTransactions running;
xl_standby_lock *locks;
- int nlocks;
+ int nlocks;
Assert(XLogStandbyInfoActive());
static void
LogCurrentRunningXacts(RunningTransactions CurrRunningXacts)
{
- xl_running_xacts xlrec;
- XLogRecData rdata[2];
- int lastrdata = 0;
+ xl_running_xacts xlrec;
+ XLogRecData rdata[2];
+ int lastrdata = 0;
XLogRecPtr recptr;
xlrec.xcnt = CurrRunningXacts->xcnt;
static void
LogAccessExclusiveLocks(int nlocks, xl_standby_lock *locks)
{
- XLogRecData rdata[2];
- xl_standby_locks xlrec;
+ XLogRecData rdata[2];
+ xl_standby_locks xlrec;
xlrec.nlocks = nlocks;
void
LogAccessExclusiveLock(Oid dbOid, Oid relOid)
{
- xl_standby_lock xlrec;
+ xl_standby_lock xlrec;
/*
- * Ensure that a TransactionId has been assigned to this transaction.
- * We don't actually need the xid yet but if we don't do this then
+ * Ensure that a TransactionId has been assigned to this transaction. We
+ * don't actually need the xid yet but if we don't do this then
* RecordTransactionCommit() and RecordTransactionAbort() will optimise
* away the transaction completion record which recovery relies upon to
- * release locks. It's a hack, but for a corner case not worth adding
- * code for into the main commit path.
+ * release locks. It's a hack, but for a corner case not worth adding code
+ * for into the main commit path.
*/
xlrec.xid = GetTopTransactionId();
/*
- * Decode the locktag back to the original values, to avoid
- * sending lots of empty bytes with every message. See
- * lock.h to check how a locktag is defined for LOCKTAG_RELATION
+ * Decode the locktag back to the original values, to avoid sending lots
+ * of empty bytes with every message. See lock.h to check how a locktag
+ * is defined for LOCKTAG_RELATION
*/
xlrec.dbOid = dbOid;
xlrec.relOid = relOid;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/large_object/inv_api.c,v 1.140 2010/01/02 16:57:51 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/large_object/inv_api.c,v 1.141 2010/02/26 02:01:00 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
myLargeObjectExists(Oid loid, Snapshot snapshot)
{
Relation pg_lo_meta;
- ScanKeyData skey[1];
- SysScanDesc sd;
+ ScanKeyData skey[1];
+ SysScanDesc sd;
HeapTuple tuple;
bool retval = false;
* dependency on the owner of largeobject
*
* The reason why we use LargeObjectRelationId instead of
- * LargeObjectMetadataRelationId here is to provide backward
- * compatibility to the applications which utilize a knowledge
- * about internal layout of system catalogs.
- * OID of pg_largeobject_metadata and loid of pg_largeobject
- * are same value, so there are no actual differences here.
+ * LargeObjectMetadataRelationId here is to provide backward compatibility
+ * to the applications which utilize a knowledge about internal layout of
+ * system catalogs. OID of pg_largeobject_metadata and loid of
+ * pg_largeobject are same value, so there are no actual differences here.
*/
recordDependencyOnOwner(LargeObjectRelationId,
lobjId_new, GetUserId());
+
/*
* Advance command counter to make new tuple visible to later operations.
*/
int
inv_drop(Oid lobjId)
{
- ObjectAddress object;
+ ObjectAddress object;
/*
* Delete any comments and dependencies on the large object
if (!LargeObjectExists(obj_desc->id))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
- errmsg("large object %u was already dropped", obj_desc->id)));
+ errmsg("large object %u was already dropped", obj_desc->id)));
if (nbytes <= 0)
return 0;
if (!LargeObjectExists(obj_desc->id))
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT),
- errmsg("large object %u was already dropped", obj_desc->id)));
+ errmsg("large object %u was already dropped", obj_desc->id)));
open_lo_relation();
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/lmgr/lock.c,v 1.194 2010/01/31 19:01:11 sriggs Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/lmgr/lock.c,v 1.195 2010/02/26 02:01:00 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* A lock table is a shared memory hash table. When
*/
LockAcquireResult
LockAcquireExtended(const LOCKTAG *locktag,
- LOCKMODE lockmode,
- bool sessionLock,
- bool dontWait,
- bool reportMemoryError)
+ LOCKMODE lockmode,
+ bool sessionLock,
+ bool dontWait,
+ bool reportMemoryError)
{
LOCKMETHODID lockmethodid = locktag->locktag_lockmethodid;
LockMethod lockMethodTable;
if (RecoveryInProgress() && !InRecovery &&
(locktag->locktag_type == LOCKTAG_OBJECT ||
- locktag->locktag_type == LOCKTAG_RELATION ) &&
+ locktag->locktag_type == LOCKTAG_RELATION) &&
lockmode > RowExclusiveLock)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE),
errmsg("cannot acquire lockmode %s on database objects while recovery is in progress",
- lockMethodTable->lockModeNames[lockmode]),
+ lockMethodTable->lockModeNames[lockmode]),
errhint("Only RowExclusiveLock or less can be acquired on database objects during recovery.")));
#ifdef LOCK_DEBUG
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_OUT_OF_MEMORY),
errmsg("out of shared memory"),
- errhint("You might need to increase max_locks_per_transaction.")));
+ errhint("You might need to increase max_locks_per_transaction.")));
else
return LOCKACQUIRE_NOT_AVAIL;
}
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_OUT_OF_MEMORY),
errmsg("out of shared memory"),
- errhint("You might need to increase max_locks_per_transaction.")));
+ errhint("You might need to increase max_locks_per_transaction.")));
else
return LOCKACQUIRE_NOT_AVAIL;
}
LWLockRelease(partitionLock);
/*
- * Emit a WAL record if acquisition of this lock need to be replayed in
- * a standby server. Only AccessExclusiveLocks can conflict with lock
- * types that read-only transactions can acquire in a standby server.
+ * Emit a WAL record if acquisition of this lock need to be replayed in a
+ * standby server. Only AccessExclusiveLocks can conflict with lock types
+ * that read-only transactions can acquire in a standby server.
*
* Make sure this definition matches the one GetRunningTransactionLocks().
*/
XLogStandbyInfoActive())
{
/*
- * Decode the locktag back to the original values, to avoid
- * sending lots of empty bytes with every message. See
- * lock.h to check how a locktag is defined for LOCKTAG_RELATION
+ * Decode the locktag back to the original values, to avoid sending
+ * lots of empty bytes with every message. See lock.h to check how a
+ * locktag is defined for LOCKTAG_RELATION
*/
LogAccessExclusiveLock(locktag->locktag_field1,
locktag->locktag_field2);
if (vxids == NULL)
vxids = (VirtualTransactionId *)
MemoryContextAlloc(TopMemoryContext,
- sizeof(VirtualTransactionId) * (MaxBackends + 1));
+ sizeof(VirtualTransactionId) * (MaxBackends + 1));
}
else
vxids = (VirtualTransactionId *)
PROCLOCK *proclock;
HASH_SEQ_STATUS seqstat;
int i;
- int index;
+ int index;
int els;
xl_standby_lock *accessExclusiveLocks;
accessExclusiveLocks = palloc(els * sizeof(xl_standby_lock));
/*
- * If lock is a currently granted AccessExclusiveLock then
- * it will have just one proclock holder, so locks are never
- * accessed twice in this particular case. Don't copy this code
- * for use elsewhere because in the general case this will
- * give you duplicate locks when looking at non-exclusive lock types.
+ * If lock is a currently granted AccessExclusiveLock then it will have
+ * just one proclock holder, so locks are never accessed twice in this
+ * particular case. Don't copy this code for use elsewhere because in the
+ * general case this will give you duplicate locks when looking at
+ * non-exclusive lock types.
*/
index = 0;
while ((proclock = (PROCLOCK *) hash_seq_search(&seqstat)))
if ((proclock->holdMask & LOCKBIT_ON(AccessExclusiveLock)) &&
proclock->tag.myLock->tag.locktag_type == LOCKTAG_RELATION)
{
- PGPROC *proc = proclock->tag.myProc;
- LOCK *lock = proclock->tag.myLock;
+ PGPROC *proc = proclock->tag.myProc;
+ LOCK *lock = proclock->tag.myLock;
- accessExclusiveLocks[index].xid = proc->xid;
- accessExclusiveLocks[index].dbOid = lock->tag.locktag_field1;
+ accessExclusiveLocks[index].xid = proc->xid;
+ accessExclusiveLocks[index].dbOid = lock->tag.locktag_field1;
accessExclusiveLocks[index].relOid = lock->tag.locktag_field2;
index++;
lock->tag.locktag_field3);
/*
- * We ignore any possible conflicts and just grant ourselves the lock.
- * Not only because we don't bother, but also to avoid deadlocks when
+ * We ignore any possible conflicts and just grant ourselves the lock. Not
+ * only because we don't bother, but also to avoid deadlocks when
* switching from standby to normal mode. See function comment.
*/
GrantLock(lock, proclock, lockmode);
locktag->locktag_type == LOCKTAG_RELATION)
{
StandbyAcquireAccessExclusiveLock(xid,
- locktag->locktag_field1 /* dboid */,
- locktag->locktag_field2 /* reloid */);
+ locktag->locktag_field1 /* dboid */ ,
+ locktag->locktag_field2 /* reloid */ );
}
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/lmgr/proc.c,v 1.216 2010/02/13 01:32:19 sriggs Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/lmgr/proc.c,v 1.217 2010/02/26 02:01:01 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int
GetStartupBufferPinWaitBufId(void)
{
- int bufid;
+ int bufid;
/* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */
volatile PROC_HDR *procglobal = ProcGlobal;
/*
* This process is no longer present in shared memory in any meaningful
- * way, so tell the postmaster we've cleaned up acceptably well.
- * (XXX autovac launcher should be included here someday)
+ * way, so tell the postmaster we've cleaned up acceptably well. (XXX
+ * autovac launcher should be included here someday)
*/
if (IsUnderPostmaster && !IsAutoVacuumLauncherProcess())
MarkPostmasterChildInactive();
/*
* Check to see whether it is the Startup process we wish to signal.
- * This call is made by the buffer manager when it wishes to wake
- * up a process that has been waiting for a pin in so it can obtain a
+ * This call is made by the buffer manager when it wishes to wake up a
+ * process that has been waiting for a pin in so it can obtain a
* cleanup lock using LockBufferForCleanup(). Startup is not a normal
- * backend, so BackendPidGetProc() will not return any pid at all.
- * So we remember the information for this special case.
+ * backend, so BackendPidGetProc() will not return any pid at all. So
+ * we remember the information for this special case.
*/
if (pid == procglobal->startupProcPid)
proc = procglobal->startupProc;
void
handle_standby_sig_alarm(SIGNAL_ARGS)
{
- int save_errno = errno;
+ int save_errno = errno;
if (standby_timeout_active)
(void) CheckStandbyTimeout();
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/smgr/md.c,v 1.150 2010/01/02 16:57:52 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/smgr/md.c,v 1.151 2010/02/26 02:01:01 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void register_unlink(RelFileNode rnode);
static MdfdVec *_fdvec_alloc(void);
static char *_mdfd_segpath(SMgrRelation reln, ForkNumber forknum,
- BlockNumber segno);
+ BlockNumber segno);
static MdfdVec *_mdfd_openseg(SMgrRelation reln, ForkNumber forkno,
BlockNumber segno, int oflags);
static MdfdVec *_mdfd_getseg(SMgrRelation reln, ForkNumber forkno,
if (errno != ENOENT)
ereport(WARNING,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not remove file \"%s\": %m", segpath)));
+ errmsg("could not remove file \"%s\": %m", segpath)));
break;
}
}
failures > 0)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not fsync file \"%s\": %m", path)));
+ errmsg("could not fsync file \"%s\": %m", path)));
else
ereport(DEBUG1,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not fsync file \"%s\" but retrying: %m",
- path)));
+ errmsg("could not fsync file \"%s\" but retrying: %m",
+ path)));
pfree(path);
/*
static char *
_mdfd_segpath(SMgrRelation reln, ForkNumber forknum, BlockNumber segno)
{
- char *path,
- *fullpath;
+ char *path,
+ *fullpath;
path = relpath(reln->smgr_rnode, forknum);
return NULL;
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode_for_file_access(),
- errmsg("could not open file \"%s\" (target block %u): %m",
- _mdfd_segpath(reln, forknum, nextsegno),
- blkno)));
+ errmsg("could not open file \"%s\" (target block %u): %m",
+ _mdfd_segpath(reln, forknum, nextsegno),
+ blkno)));
}
}
v = v->mdfd_chain;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/smgr/smgr.c,v 1.120 2010/02/09 21:43:30 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/smgr/smgr.c,v 1.121 2010/02/26 02:01:01 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* Send a shared-inval message to force other backends to close any
- * dangling smgr references they may have for this rel. We should do
- * this before starting the actual unlinking, in case we fail partway
- * through that step. Note that the sinval message will eventually come
- * back to this backend, too, and thereby provide a backstop that we
- * closed our own smgr rel.
+ * dangling smgr references they may have for this rel. We should do this
+ * before starting the actual unlinking, in case we fail partway through
+ * that step. Note that the sinval message will eventually come back to
+ * this backend, too, and thereby provide a backstop that we closed our
+ * own smgr rel.
*/
CacheInvalidateSmgr(rnode);
* Send a shared-inval message to force other backends to close any smgr
* references they may have for this rel. This is useful because they
* might have open file pointers to segments that got removed, and/or
- * smgr_targblock variables pointing past the new rel end. (The inval
+ * smgr_targblock variables pointing past the new rel end. (The inval
* message will come back to our backend, too, causing a
* probably-unnecessary local smgr flush. But we don't expect that this
- * is a performance-critical path.) As in the unlink code, we want to
- * be sure the message is sent before we start changing things on-disk.
+ * is a performance-critical path.) As in the unlink code, we want to be
+ * sure the message is sent before we start changing things on-disk.
*/
CacheInvalidateSmgr(reln->smgr_rnode);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tcop/dest.c,v 1.77 2010/01/30 20:09:53 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tcop/dest.c,v 1.78 2010/02/26 02:01:01 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
{
case DestRemote:
case DestRemoteExecute:
+
/*
- * We assume the commandTag is plain ASCII and therefore
- * requires no encoding conversion.
+ * We assume the commandTag is plain ASCII and therefore requires
+ * no encoding conversion.
*/
pq_putmessage('C', commandTag, strlen(commandTag) + 1);
break;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tcop/postgres.c,v 1.590 2010/02/16 22:34:50 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tcop/postgres.c,v 1.591 2010/02/26 02:01:01 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* this is the "main" module of the postgres backend and
/* assorted command-line switches */
-static const char *userDoption = NULL; /* -D switch */
+static const char *userDoption = NULL; /* -D switch */
-static bool EchoQuery = false; /* -E switch */
+static bool EchoQuery = false; /* -E switch */
/*
* people who want to use EOF should #define DONTUSENEWLINE in
/* whether or not, and why, we were cancelled by conflict with recovery */
static bool RecoveryConflictPending = false;
-static ProcSignalReason RecoveryConflictReason;
+static ProcSignalReason RecoveryConflictReason;
/* ----------------------------------------------------------------
* decls for routines only used in this file
static bool check_log_statement(List *stmt_list);
static int errdetail_execute(List *raw_parsetree_list);
static int errdetail_params(ParamListInfo params);
-static int errdetail_abort(void);
-static int errdetail_recovery_conflict(void);
+static int errdetail_abort(void);
+static int errdetail_recovery_conflict(void);
static void start_xact_command(void);
static void finish_xact_command(void);
static bool IsTransactionExitStmt(Node *parsetree);
Query *query;
List *querytree_list;
- Assert(query_string != NULL); /* required as of 8.4 */
+ Assert(query_string != NULL); /* required as of 8.4 */
TRACE_POSTGRESQL_QUERY_REWRITE_START(query_string);
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_IN_FAILED_SQL_TRANSACTION),
errmsg("current transaction is aborted, "
- "commands ignored until end of transaction block"),
+ "commands ignored until end of transaction block"),
errdetail_abort()));
/* Make sure we are in a transaction command */
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_IN_FAILED_SQL_TRANSACTION),
errmsg("current transaction is aborted, "
- "commands ignored until end of transaction block"),
+ "commands ignored until end of transaction block"),
errdetail_abort()));
/*
switch (RecoveryConflictReason)
{
case PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_BUFFERPIN:
- errdetail("User was holding shared buffer pin for too long.");
- break;
+ errdetail("User was holding shared buffer pin for too long.");
+ break;
case PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_LOCK:
- errdetail("User was holding a relation lock for too long.");
- break;
+ errdetail("User was holding a relation lock for too long.");
+ break;
case PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_TABLESPACE:
- errdetail("User was or may have been using tablespace that must be dropped.");
- break;
+ errdetail("User was or may have been using tablespace that must be dropped.");
+ break;
case PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_SNAPSHOT:
- errdetail("User query might have needed to see row versions that must be removed.");
- break;
+ errdetail("User query might have needed to see row versions that must be removed.");
+ break;
case PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_STARTUP_DEADLOCK:
- errdetail("User transaction caused buffer deadlock with recovery.");
- break;
+ errdetail("User transaction caused buffer deadlock with recovery.");
+ break;
case PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_DATABASE:
- errdetail("User was connected to a database that must be dropped.");
- break;
+ errdetail("User was connected to a database that must be dropped.");
+ break;
default:
- break;
- /* no errdetail */
+ break;
+ /* no errdetail */
}
return 0;
void
quickdie(SIGNAL_ARGS)
{
- sigaddset(&BlockSig, SIGQUIT); /* prevent nested calls */
+ sigaddset(&BlockSig, SIGQUIT); /* prevent nested calls */
PG_SETMASK(&BlockSig);
/*
* If we're aborting out of client auth, don't risk trying to send
- * anything to the client; we will likely violate the protocol,
- * not to mention that we may have interrupted the guts of OpenSSL
- * or some authentication library.
+ * anything to the client; we will likely violate the protocol, not to
+ * mention that we may have interrupted the guts of OpenSSL or some
+ * authentication library.
*/
if (ClientAuthInProgress && whereToSendOutput == DestRemote)
whereToSendOutput = DestNone;
void
RecoveryConflictInterrupt(ProcSignalReason reason)
{
- int save_errno = errno;
+ int save_errno = errno;
/*
- * Don't joggle the elbow of proc_exit
- */
+ * Don't joggle the elbow of proc_exit
+ */
if (!proc_exit_inprogress)
{
RecoveryConflictReason = reason;
switch (reason)
{
case PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_STARTUP_DEADLOCK:
- /*
- * If we aren't waiting for a lock we can never deadlock.
- */
- if (!IsWaitingForLock())
- return;
- /* Intentional drop through to check wait for pin */
+ /*
+ * If we aren't waiting for a lock we can never deadlock.
+ */
+ if (!IsWaitingForLock())
+ return;
+
+ /* Intentional drop through to check wait for pin */
case PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_BUFFERPIN:
- /*
- * If we aren't blocking the Startup process there is
- * nothing more to do.
- */
- if (!HoldingBufferPinThatDelaysRecovery())
- return;
- MyProc->recoveryConflictPending = true;
+ /*
+ * If we aren't blocking the Startup process there is nothing
+ * more to do.
+ */
+ if (!HoldingBufferPinThatDelaysRecovery())
+ return;
+
+ MyProc->recoveryConflictPending = true;
- /* Intentional drop through to error handling */
+ /* Intentional drop through to error handling */
case PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_LOCK:
case PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_TABLESPACE:
case PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_SNAPSHOT:
- /*
- * If we aren't in a transaction any longer then ignore.
- */
- if (!IsTransactionOrTransactionBlock())
- return;
+ /*
+ * If we aren't in a transaction any longer then ignore.
+ */
+ if (!IsTransactionOrTransactionBlock())
+ return;
+
+ /*
+ * If we can abort just the current subtransaction then we are
+ * OK to throw an ERROR to resolve the conflict. Otherwise
+ * drop through to the FATAL case.
+ *
+ * XXX other times that we can throw just an ERROR *may* be
+ * PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_LOCK if no locks are held in
+ * parent transactions
+ *
+ * PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_SNAPSHOT if no snapshots are held
+ * by parent transactions and the transaction is not
+ * serializable
+ *
+ * PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_TABLESPACE if no temp files or
+ * cursors open in parent transactions
+ */
+ if (!IsSubTransaction())
+ {
/*
- * If we can abort just the current subtransaction then we
- * are OK to throw an ERROR to resolve the conflict. Otherwise
- * drop through to the FATAL case.
- *
- * XXX other times that we can throw just an ERROR *may* be
- * PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_LOCK
- * if no locks are held in parent transactions
- *
- * PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_SNAPSHOT
- * if no snapshots are held by parent transactions
- * and the transaction is not serializable
- *
- * PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_TABLESPACE
- * if no temp files or cursors open in parent transactions
+ * If we already aborted then we no longer need to cancel.
+ * We do this here since we do not wish to ignore aborted
+ * subtransactions, which must cause FATAL, currently.
*/
- if (!IsSubTransaction())
- {
- /*
- * If we already aborted then we no longer need to cancel.
- * We do this here since we do not wish to ignore aborted
- * subtransactions, which must cause FATAL, currently.
- */
- if (IsAbortedTransactionBlockState())
- return;
-
- RecoveryConflictPending = true;
- QueryCancelPending = true;
- InterruptPending = true;
- break;
- }
-
- /* Intentional drop through to session cancel */
+ if (IsAbortedTransactionBlockState())
+ return;
- case PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_DATABASE:
RecoveryConflictPending = true;
- ProcDiePending = true;
+ QueryCancelPending = true;
InterruptPending = true;
break;
+ }
+
+ /* Intentional drop through to session cancel */
+
+ case PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_DATABASE:
+ RecoveryConflictPending = true;
+ ProcDiePending = true;
+ InterruptPending = true;
+ break;
default:
- elog(FATAL, "Unknown conflict mode");
+ elog(FATAL, "Unknown conflict mode");
}
Assert(RecoveryConflictPending && (QueryCancelPending || ProcDiePending));
else if (RecoveryConflictPending)
ereport(FATAL,
(errcode(ERRCODE_ADMIN_SHUTDOWN),
- errmsg("terminating connection due to conflict with recovery"),
+ errmsg("terminating connection due to conflict with recovery"),
errdetail_recovery_conflict()));
else
ereport(FATAL,
QueryCancelPending = false;
if (ClientAuthInProgress)
{
- ImmediateInterruptOK = false; /* not idle anymore */
+ ImmediateInterruptOK = false; /* not idle anymore */
DisableNotifyInterrupt();
DisableCatchupInterrupt();
/* As in quickdie, don't risk sending to client during auth */
}
if (cancel_from_timeout)
{
- ImmediateInterruptOK = false; /* not idle anymore */
+ ImmediateInterruptOK = false; /* not idle anymore */
DisableNotifyInterrupt();
DisableCatchupInterrupt();
ereport(ERROR,
}
if (IsAutoVacuumWorkerProcess())
{
- ImmediateInterruptOK = false; /* not idle anymore */
+ ImmediateInterruptOK = false; /* not idle anymore */
DisableNotifyInterrupt();
DisableCatchupInterrupt();
ereport(ERROR,
}
if (RecoveryConflictPending)
{
- ImmediateInterruptOK = false; /* not idle anymore */
+ ImmediateInterruptOK = false; /* not idle anymore */
RecoveryConflictPending = false;
DisableNotifyInterrupt();
DisableCatchupInterrupt();
(errcode(ERRCODE_ADMIN_SHUTDOWN),
errmsg("terminating connection due to conflict with recovery"),
errdetail_recovery_conflict(),
- errhint("In a moment you should be able to reconnect to the"
- " database and repeat your command.")));
+ errhint("In a moment you should be able to reconnect to the"
+ " database and repeat your command.")));
else
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_QUERY_CANCELED),
- errmsg("canceling statement due to conflict with recovery"),
+ errmsg("canceling statement due to conflict with recovery"),
errdetail_recovery_conflict()));
}
/*
- * If we are reading a command from the client, just ignore the
- * cancel request --- sending an extra error message won't
- * accomplish anything. Otherwise, go ahead and throw the error.
+ * If we are reading a command from the client, just ignore the cancel
+ * request --- sending an extra error message won't accomplish
+ * anything. Otherwise, go ahead and throw the error.
*/
if (!DoingCommandRead)
{
- ImmediateInterruptOK = false; /* not idle anymore */
+ ImmediateInterruptOK = false; /* not idle anymore */
DisableNotifyInterrupt();
DisableCatchupInterrupt();
ereport(ERROR,
if (secure)
{
- gucsource = PGC_S_ARGV; /* switches came from command line */
+ gucsource = PGC_S_ARGV; /* switches came from command line */
/* Ignore the initial --single argument, if present */
if (argc > 1 && strcmp(argv[1], "--single") == 0)
}
case 'v':
+
/*
* -v is no longer used in normal operation, since
- * FrontendProtocol is already set before we get here.
- * We keep the switch only for possible use in standalone
- * operation, in case we ever support using normal FE/BE
- * protocol with a standalone backend.
+ * FrontendProtocol is already set before we get here. We keep
+ * the switch only for possible use in standalone operation,
+ * in case we ever support using normal FE/BE protocol with a
+ * standalone backend.
*/
if (secure)
FrontendProtocol = (ProtocolVersion) atoi(optarg);
ereport(FATAL,
(errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
errmsg("invalid command-line arguments for server process"),
- errhint("Try \"%s --help\" for more information.", progname)));
+ errhint("Try \"%s --help\" for more information.", progname)));
else
ereport(FATAL,
(errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
errmsg("%s: invalid command-line arguments",
progname),
- errhint("Try \"%s --help\" for more information.", progname)));
+ errhint("Try \"%s --help\" for more information.", progname)));
}
if (argc - optind == 1)
dbname = username;
if (dbname == NULL)
ereport(FATAL,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
- errmsg("%s: no database nor user name specified",
- progname)));
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
+ errmsg("%s: no database nor user name specified",
+ progname)));
}
/* Acquire configuration parameters, unless inherited from postmaster */
WalSndSignals();
else
{
- pqsignal(SIGHUP, SigHupHandler); /* set flag to read config file */
- pqsignal(SIGINT, StatementCancelHandler); /* cancel current query */
- pqsignal(SIGTERM, die); /* cancel current query and exit */
+ pqsignal(SIGHUP, SigHupHandler); /* set flag to read config
+ * file */
+ pqsignal(SIGINT, StatementCancelHandler); /* cancel current query */
+ pqsignal(SIGTERM, die); /* cancel current query and exit */
/*
* In a standalone backend, SIGQUIT can be generated from the keyboard
- * easily, while SIGTERM cannot, so we make both signals do die() rather
- * than quickdie().
+ * easily, while SIGTERM cannot, so we make both signals do die()
+ * rather than quickdie().
*/
if (IsUnderPostmaster)
- pqsignal(SIGQUIT, quickdie); /* hard crash time */
+ pqsignal(SIGQUIT, quickdie); /* hard crash time */
else
- pqsignal(SIGQUIT, die); /* cancel current query and exit */
- pqsignal(SIGALRM, handle_sig_alarm); /* timeout conditions */
+ pqsignal(SIGQUIT, die); /* cancel current query and exit */
+ pqsignal(SIGALRM, handle_sig_alarm); /* timeout conditions */
/*
* Ignore failure to write to frontend. Note: if frontend closes
* connection, we will notice it and exit cleanly when control next
- * returns to outer loop. This seems safer than forcing exit in the midst
- * of output during who-knows-what operation...
+ * returns to outer loop. This seems safer than forcing exit in the
+ * midst of output during who-knows-what operation...
*/
pqsignal(SIGPIPE, SIG_IGN);
pqsignal(SIGUSR1, procsignal_sigusr1_handler);
pqsignal(SIGFPE, FloatExceptionHandler);
/*
- * Reset some signals that are accepted by postmaster but not by backend
+ * Reset some signals that are accepted by postmaster but not by
+ * backend
*/
- pqsignal(SIGCHLD, SIG_DFL); /* system() requires this on some platforms */
+ pqsignal(SIGCHLD, SIG_DFL); /* system() requires this on some
+ * platforms */
}
pqinitmask();
* collector, and to update the PS stats display. We avoid doing
* those every time through the message loop because it'd slow down
* processing of batched messages, and because we don't want to report
- * uncommitted updates (that confuses autovacuum). The notification
+ * uncommitted updates (that confuses autovacuum). The notification
* processor wants a call too, if we are not in a transaction block.
*/
if (send_ready_for_query)
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tcop/pquery.c,v 1.136 2010/02/16 20:58:14 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tcop/pquery.c,v 1.137 2010/02/26 02:01:02 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
qd->crosscheck_snapshot = RegisterSnapshot(crosscheck_snapshot);
qd->dest = dest; /* output dest */
qd->params = params; /* parameter values passed into query */
- qd->instrument_options = instrument_options; /* instrumentation wanted? */
+ qd->instrument_options = instrument_options; /* instrumentation
+ * wanted? */
/* null these fields until set by ExecutorStart */
qd->tupDesc = NULL;
qd->crosscheck_snapshot = InvalidSnapshot; /* RI check snapshot */
qd->dest = dest; /* output dest */
qd->params = params; /* parameter values passed into query */
- qd->instrument_options = false; /* uninteresting for utilities */
+ qd->instrument_options = false; /* uninteresting for utilities */
/* null these fields until set by ExecutorStart */
qd->tupDesc = NULL;
{
if (strcmp(portal->commandTag, "SELECT") == 0)
snprintf(completionTag, COMPLETION_TAG_BUFSIZE,
- "SELECT %u", nprocessed);
+ "SELECT %u", nprocessed);
else
strcpy(completionTag, portal->commandTag);
}
* If a command completion tag was supplied, use it. Otherwise use the
* portal's commandTag as the default completion tag.
*
- * Exception: Clients expect INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE tags to have
- * counts, so fake them with zeros. This can happen with DO INSTEAD
- * rules if there is no replacement query of the same type as the
- * original. We print "0 0" here because technically there is no
- * query of the matching tag type, and printing a non-zero count for
- * a different query type seems wrong, e.g. an INSERT that does
- * an UPDATE instead should not print "0 1" if one row
- * was updated. See QueryRewrite(), step 3, for details.
+ * Exception: Clients expect INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE tags to have counts, so
+ * fake them with zeros. This can happen with DO INSTEAD rules if there
+ * is no replacement query of the same type as the original. We print "0
+ * 0" here because technically there is no query of the matching tag type,
+ * and printing a non-zero count for a different query type seems wrong,
+ * e.g. an INSERT that does an UPDATE instead should not print "0 1" if
+ * one row was updated. See QueryRewrite(), step 3, for details.
*/
if (completionTag && completionTag[0] == '\0')
{
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tcop/utility.c,v 1.334 2010/02/20 21:24:02 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tcop/utility.c,v 1.335 2010/02/26 02:01:04 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
if (XactReadOnly)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_READ_ONLY_SQL_TRANSACTION),
- /* translator: %s is name of a SQL command, eg CREATE */
+ /* translator: %s is name of a SQL command, eg CREATE */
errmsg("cannot execute %s in a read-only transaction",
cmdname)));
}
* PreventCommandDuringRecovery: throw error if RecoveryInProgress
*
* The majority of operations that are unsafe in a Hot Standby slave
- * will be rejected by XactReadOnly tests. However there are a few
+ * will be rejected by XactReadOnly tests. However there are a few
* commands that are allowed in "read-only" xacts but cannot be allowed
* in Hot Standby mode. Those commands should call this function.
*/
if (RecoveryInProgress())
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_READ_ONLY_SQL_TRANSACTION),
- /* translator: %s is name of a SQL command, eg CREATE */
+ /* translator: %s is name of a SQL command, eg CREATE */
errmsg("cannot execute %s during recovery",
cmdname)));
}
if (InSecurityRestrictedOperation())
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
- /* translator: %s is name of a SQL command, eg PREPARE */
- errmsg("cannot execute %s within security-restricted operation",
- cmdname)));
+ /* translator: %s is name of a SQL command, eg PREPARE */
+ errmsg("cannot execute %s within security-restricted operation",
+ cmdname)));
}
Assert(queryString != NULL); /* required as of 8.4 */
/*
- * We provide a function hook variable that lets loadable plugins
- * get control when ProcessUtility is called. Such a plugin would
- * normally call standard_ProcessUtility().
+ * We provide a function hook variable that lets loadable plugins get
+ * control when ProcessUtility is called. Such a plugin would normally
+ * call standard_ProcessUtility().
*/
if (ProcessUtility_hook)
(*ProcessUtility_hook) (parsetree, queryString, params,
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
errmsg("must be superuser to do CHECKPOINT")));
+
/*
* You might think we should have a PreventCommandDuringRecovery()
- * here, but we interpret a CHECKPOINT command during recovery
- * as a request for a restartpoint instead. We allow this since
- * it can be a useful way of reducing switchover time when
- * using various forms of replication.
+ * here, but we interpret a CHECKPOINT command during recovery as
+ * a request for a restartpoint instead. We allow this since it
+ * can be a useful way of reducing switchover time when using
+ * various forms of replication.
*/
RequestCheckpoint(CHECKPOINT_IMMEDIATE | CHECKPOINT_WAIT |
(RecoveryInProgress() ? 0 : CHECKPOINT_FORCE));
case T_ExplainStmt:
{
ExplainStmt *stmt = (ExplainStmt *) parsetree;
- bool analyze = false;
- ListCell *lc;
+ bool analyze = false;
+ ListCell *lc;
/* Look through an EXPLAIN ANALYZE to the contained stmt */
foreach(lc, stmt->options)
{
- DefElem *opt = (DefElem *) lfirst(lc);
+ DefElem *opt = (DefElem *) lfirst(lc);
if (strcmp(opt->defname, "analyze") == 0)
analyze = defGetBoolean(opt);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tsearch/dict_synonym.c,v 1.12 2010/01/02 16:57:53 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tsearch/dict_synonym.c,v 1.13 2010/02/26 02:01:05 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
in += pg_mblen(in);
}
- if ( in - lastchar == 1 && t_iseq(lastchar, '*') && flags )
+ if (in - lastchar == 1 && t_iseq(lastchar, '*') && flags)
{
*flags = TSL_PREFIX;
*end = lastchar;
else
{
if (flags)
- *flags = 0;
+ *flags = 0;
*end = in;
}
}
d->syn[cur].outlen = strlen(starto);
- d->syn[cur].flags = flags;
+ d->syn[cur].flags = flags;
cur++;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tsearch/ts_parse.c,v 1.16 2010/01/02 16:57:53 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tsearch/ts_parse.c,v 1.17 2010/02/26 02:01:05 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
{
ParsedLex *curVal = ld->towork.head;
char *curValLemm = curVal->lemm;
- int curValLenLemm = curVal->lenlemm;
+ int curValLenLemm = curVal->lenlemm;
map = ld->cfg->map + curVal->type;
res = (TSLexeme *) DatumGetPointer(FunctionCall4(
&(dict->lexize),
PointerGetDatum(dict->dictData),
- PointerGetDatum(curValLemm),
- Int32GetDatum(curValLenLemm),
+ PointerGetDatum(curValLemm),
+ Int32GetDatum(curValLenLemm),
PointerGetDatum(&ld->dictState)
));
if (!res) /* dictionary doesn't know this lexeme */
continue;
- if ( res->flags & TSL_FILTER )
+ if (res->flags & TSL_FILTER)
{
curValLemm = res->lexeme;
curValLenLemm = strlen(res->lexeme);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/acl.c,v 1.156 2010/02/14 18:42:16 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/acl.c,v 1.157 2010/02/26 02:01:05 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void check_acl(const Acl *acl);
static const char *aclparse(const char *s, AclItem *aip);
static bool aclitem_match(const AclItem *a1, const AclItem *a2);
-static int aclitemComparator(const void *arg1, const void *arg2);
+static int aclitemComparator(const void *arg1, const void *arg2);
static void check_circularity(const Acl *old_acl, const AclItem *mod_aip,
Oid ownerId);
static Acl *recursive_revoke(Acl *acl, Oid grantee, AclMode revoke_privs,
for (i = 0; i < num; i++, aip++)
{
- Acl *tmp_acl;
+ Acl *tmp_acl;
tmp_acl = aclupdate(result_acl, aip, ACL_MODECHG_ADD,
ownerId, DROP_RESTRICT);
* returns the table
*
* {{ OID(joe), 0::OID, 'SELECT', false },
- * { OID(joe), OID(foo), 'INSERT', true },
- * { OID(joe), OID(foo), 'UPDATE', false }}
+ * { OID(joe), OID(foo), 'INSERT', true },
+ * { OID(joe), OID(foo), 'UPDATE', false }}
*----------
*/
Datum
aclexplode(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
Acl *acl = PG_GETARG_ACL_P(0);
- FuncCallContext *funcctx;
+ FuncCallContext *funcctx;
int *idx;
- AclItem *aidat;
+ AclItem *aidat;
if (SRF_IS_FIRSTCALL())
{
oldcontext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(funcctx->multi_call_memory_ctx);
/*
- * build tupdesc for result tuples (matches out parameters in
- * pg_proc entry)
+ * build tupdesc for result tuples (matches out parameters in pg_proc
+ * entry)
*/
tupdesc = CreateTemplateTupleDesc(4, false);
TupleDescInitEntry(tupdesc, (AttrNumber) 1, "grantor",
{
idx[1] = 0;
idx[0]++;
- if (idx[0] >= ACL_NUM(acl)) /* done */
+ if (idx[0] >= ACL_NUM(acl)) /* done */
break;
}
aidata = &aidat[idx[0]];
if (get_rel_relkind(sequenceoid) != RELKIND_SEQUENCE)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE),
- errmsg("\"%s\" is not a sequence",
- text_to_cstring(sequencename))));
+ errmsg("\"%s\" is not a sequence",
+ text_to_cstring(sequencename))));
aclresult = pg_class_aclcheck(sequenceoid, roleid, mode);
if (get_rel_relkind(sequenceoid) != RELKIND_SEQUENCE)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE),
- errmsg("\"%s\" is not a sequence",
- text_to_cstring(sequencename))));
+ errmsg("\"%s\" is not a sequence",
+ text_to_cstring(sequencename))));
aclresult = pg_class_aclcheck(sequenceoid, roleid, mode);
else if (relkind != RELKIND_SEQUENCE)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE),
- errmsg("\"%s\" is not a sequence",
- get_rel_name(sequenceoid))));
+ errmsg("\"%s\" is not a sequence",
+ get_rel_name(sequenceoid))));
aclresult = pg_class_aclcheck(sequenceoid, roleid, mode);
else if (relkind != RELKIND_SEQUENCE)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE),
- errmsg("\"%s\" is not a sequence",
- get_rel_name(sequenceoid))));
+ errmsg("\"%s\" is not a sequence",
+ get_rel_name(sequenceoid))));
aclresult = pg_class_aclcheck(sequenceoid, roleid, mode);
if (get_rel_relkind(sequenceoid) != RELKIND_SEQUENCE)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE),
- errmsg("\"%s\" is not a sequence",
- text_to_cstring(sequencename))));
+ errmsg("\"%s\" is not a sequence",
+ text_to_cstring(sequencename))));
aclresult = pg_class_aclcheck(sequenceoid, roleid, mode);
else if (relkind != RELKIND_SEQUENCE)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE),
- errmsg("\"%s\" is not a sequence",
- get_rel_name(sequenceoid))));
+ errmsg("\"%s\" is not a sequence",
+ get_rel_name(sequenceoid))));
aclresult = pg_class_aclcheck(sequenceoid, roleid, mode);
convert_sequence_priv_string(text *priv_type_text)
{
static const priv_map sequence_priv_map[] = {
- { "USAGE", ACL_USAGE },
- { "SELECT", ACL_SELECT },
- { "UPDATE", ACL_UPDATE },
- { NULL, 0 }
+ {"USAGE", ACL_USAGE},
+ {"SELECT", ACL_SELECT},
+ {"UPDATE", ACL_UPDATE},
+ {NULL, 0}
};
return convert_any_priv_string(priv_type_text, sequence_priv_map);
* Copyright (c) 2003-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/array_userfuncs.c,v 1.34 2010/02/08 20:39:51 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/array_userfuncs.c,v 1.35 2010/02/26 02:01:06 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* Make the result. We cannot release the ArrayBuildState because
- * sometimes aggregate final functions are re-executed. Rather, it
- * is nodeAgg.c's responsibility to reset the aggcontext when it's
- * safe to do so.
+ * sometimes aggregate final functions are re-executed. Rather, it is
+ * nodeAgg.c's responsibility to reset the aggcontext when it's safe to do
+ * so.
*/
result = makeMdArrayResult(state, 1, dims, lbs,
CurrentMemoryContext,
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/arrayfuncs.c,v 1.163 2010/01/02 16:57:53 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/arrayfuncs.c,v 1.164 2010/02/26 02:01:07 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
SET_VARSIZE(retval, nbytes);
retval->ndim = ndim;
retval->dataoffset = dataoffset;
+
/*
- * This comes from the array's pg_type.typelem (which points to the
- * base data type's pg_type.oid) and stores system oids in user tables.
- * This oid must be preserved by binary upgrades.
+ * This comes from the array's pg_type.typelem (which points to the base
+ * data type's pg_type.oid) and stores system oids in user tables. This
+ * oid must be preserved by binary upgrades.
*/
retval->elemtype = element_type;
memcpy(ARR_DIMS(retval), dim, ndim * sizeof(int));
for (i = 0; i < ndim; i++)
{
- int ub;
+ int ub;
dim[i] = pq_getmsgint(buf, 4);
lBound[i] = pq_getmsgint(buf, 4);
}
/*
- * Ensure pass-by-ref stuff is copied into mcontext; and detoast it too
- * if it's varlena. (You might think that detoasting is not needed here
+ * Ensure pass-by-ref stuff is copied into mcontext; and detoast it too if
+ * it's varlena. (You might think that detoasting is not needed here
* because construct_md_array can detoast the array elements later.
* However, we must not let construct_md_array modify the ArrayBuildState
- * because that would mean array_agg_finalfn damages its input, which
- * is verboten. Also, this way frequently saves one copying step.)
+ * because that would mean array_agg_finalfn damages its input, which is
+ * verboten. Also, this way frequently saves one copying step.)
*/
if (!disnull && !astate->typbyval)
{
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/date.c,v 1.151 2010/02/18 04:31:16 itagaki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/date.c,v 1.152 2010/02/26 02:01:07 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
date_recv(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
StringInfo buf = (StringInfo) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0);
- DateADT result;
+ DateADT result;
result = (DateADT) pq_getmsgint(buf, sizeof(DateADT));
* Copyright (c) 2002-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/dbsize.c,v 1.30 2010/02/14 18:42:16 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/dbsize.c,v 1.31 2010/02/26 02:01:07 momjian Exp $
*
*/
snprintf(tblspcPath, MAXPGPATH, "global");
else
snprintf(tblspcPath, MAXPGPATH, "pg_tblspc/%u/%s", tblspcOid,
- TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY);
+ TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY);
dirdesc = AllocateDir(tblspcPath);
static int64
calculate_toast_table_size(Oid toastrelid)
{
- int64 size = 0;
- Relation toastRel;
- Relation toastIdxRel;
- ForkNumber forkNum;
+ int64 size = 0;
+ Relation toastRel;
+ Relation toastIdxRel;
+ ForkNumber forkNum;
toastRel = relation_open(toastrelid, AccessShareLock);
static int64
calculate_table_size(Oid relOid)
{
- int64 size = 0;
- Relation rel;
- ForkNumber forkNum;
+ int64 size = 0;
+ Relation rel;
+ ForkNumber forkNum;
rel = relation_open(relOid, AccessShareLock);
static int64
calculate_indexes_size(Oid relOid)
{
- int64 size = 0;
- Relation rel;
+ int64 size = 0;
+ Relation rel;
rel = relation_open(relOid, AccessShareLock);
*/
if (rel->rd_rel->relhasindex)
{
- List *index_oids = RelationGetIndexList(rel);
- ListCell *cell;
+ List *index_oids = RelationGetIndexList(rel);
+ ListCell *cell;
foreach(cell, index_oids)
{
Oid idxOid = lfirst_oid(cell);
Relation idxRel;
- ForkNumber forkNum;
+ ForkNumber forkNum;
idxRel = relation_open(idxOid, AccessShareLock);
int64 size;
/*
- * Aggregate the table size, this includes size of
- * the heap, toast and toast index with free space
- * and visibility map
+ * Aggregate the table size, this includes size of the heap, toast and
+ * toast index with free space and visibility map
*/
size = calculate_table_size(Relid);
* This is expected to be used in queries like
* SELECT pg_relation_filenode(oid) FROM pg_class;
* That leads to a couple of choices. We work from the pg_class row alone
- * rather than actually opening each relation, for efficiency. We don't
+ * rather than actually opening each relation, for efficiency. We don't
* fail if we can't find the relation --- some rows might be visible in
* the query's MVCC snapshot but already dead according to SnapshotNow.
* (Note: we could avoid using the catcache, but there's little point
/* okay, these have storage */
if (relform->relfilenode)
result = relform->relfilenode;
- else /* Consult the relation mapper */
+ else /* Consult the relation mapper */
result = RelationMapOidToFilenode(relid,
relform->relisshared);
break;
rnode.dbNode = MyDatabaseId;
if (relform->relfilenode)
rnode.relNode = relform->relfilenode;
- else /* Consult the relation mapper */
+ else /* Consult the relation mapper */
rnode.relNode = RelationMapOidToFilenode(relid,
- relform->relisshared);
+ relform->relisshared);
break;
default:
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/domains.c,v 1.10 2010/01/02 16:57:53 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/domains.c,v 1.11 2010/02/26 02:01:07 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* domain_check - check that a datum satisfies the constraints of a
- * domain. extra and mcxt can be passed if they are available from,
+ * domain. extra and mcxt can be passed if they are available from,
* say, a FmgrInfo structure, or they can be NULL, in which case the
* setup is repeated for each call.
*/
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/enum.c,v 1.10 2010/02/14 18:42:16 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/enum.c,v 1.11 2010/02/26 02:01:08 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
name)));
/*
- * This comes from pg_enum.oid and stores system oids in user tables.
- * This oid must be preserved by binary upgrades.
+ * This comes from pg_enum.oid and stores system oids in user tables. This
+ * oid must be preserved by binary upgrades.
*/
enumoid = HeapTupleGetOid(tup);
/* -----------------------------------------------------------------------
* formatting.c
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/formatting.c,v 1.167 2010/02/25 18:36:14 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/formatting.c,v 1.168 2010/02/26 02:01:08 momjian Exp $
*
*
* Portions Copyright (c) 1999-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*/
PG_TRY();
{
- if (IS_EEEE(num) && n->key->id != NUM_E)
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("\"EEEE\" must be the last pattern used")));
+ if (IS_EEEE(num) && n->key->id != NUM_E)
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
+ errmsg("\"EEEE\" must be the last pattern used")));
- switch (n->key->id)
- {
- case NUM_9:
- if (IS_BRACKET(num))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("\"9\" must be ahead of \"PR\"")));
- if (IS_MULTI(num))
- {
- ++num->multi;
+ switch (n->key->id)
+ {
+ case NUM_9:
+ if (IS_BRACKET(num))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
+ errmsg("\"9\" must be ahead of \"PR\"")));
+ if (IS_MULTI(num))
+ {
+ ++num->multi;
+ break;
+ }
+ if (IS_DECIMAL(num))
+ ++num->post;
+ else
+ ++num->pre;
break;
- }
- if (IS_DECIMAL(num))
- ++num->post;
- else
- ++num->pre;
- break;
- case NUM_0:
- if (IS_BRACKET(num))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("\"0\" must be ahead of \"PR\"")));
- if (!IS_ZERO(num) && !IS_DECIMAL(num))
- {
- num->flag |= NUM_F_ZERO;
- num->zero_start = num->pre + 1;
- }
- if (!IS_DECIMAL(num))
- ++num->pre;
- else
- ++num->post;
+ case NUM_0:
+ if (IS_BRACKET(num))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
+ errmsg("\"0\" must be ahead of \"PR\"")));
+ if (!IS_ZERO(num) && !IS_DECIMAL(num))
+ {
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_ZERO;
+ num->zero_start = num->pre + 1;
+ }
+ if (!IS_DECIMAL(num))
+ ++num->pre;
+ else
+ ++num->post;
- num->zero_end = num->pre + num->post;
- break;
+ num->zero_end = num->pre + num->post;
+ break;
- case NUM_B:
- if (num->pre == 0 && num->post == 0 && (!IS_ZERO(num)))
- num->flag |= NUM_F_BLANK;
- break;
+ case NUM_B:
+ if (num->pre == 0 && num->post == 0 && (!IS_ZERO(num)))
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_BLANK;
+ break;
- case NUM_D:
- num->flag |= NUM_F_LDECIMAL;
- num->need_locale = TRUE;
- case NUM_DEC:
- if (IS_DECIMAL(num))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("multiple decimal points")));
- if (IS_MULTI(num))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
+ case NUM_D:
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_LDECIMAL;
+ num->need_locale = TRUE;
+ case NUM_DEC:
+ if (IS_DECIMAL(num))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
+ errmsg("multiple decimal points")));
+ if (IS_MULTI(num))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
errmsg("cannot use \"V\" and decimal point together")));
- num->flag |= NUM_F_DECIMAL;
- break;
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_DECIMAL;
+ break;
- case NUM_FM:
- num->flag |= NUM_F_FILLMODE;
- break;
+ case NUM_FM:
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_FILLMODE;
+ break;
- case NUM_S:
- if (IS_LSIGN(num))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("cannot use \"S\" twice")));
- if (IS_PLUS(num) || IS_MINUS(num) || IS_BRACKET(num))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("cannot use \"S\" and \"PL\"/\"MI\"/\"SG\"/\"PR\" together")));
- if (!IS_DECIMAL(num))
- {
- num->lsign = NUM_LSIGN_PRE;
- num->pre_lsign_num = num->pre;
- num->need_locale = TRUE;
- num->flag |= NUM_F_LSIGN;
- }
- else if (num->lsign == NUM_LSIGN_NONE)
- {
- num->lsign = NUM_LSIGN_POST;
+ case NUM_S:
+ if (IS_LSIGN(num))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
+ errmsg("cannot use \"S\" twice")));
+ if (IS_PLUS(num) || IS_MINUS(num) || IS_BRACKET(num))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
+ errmsg("cannot use \"S\" and \"PL\"/\"MI\"/\"SG\"/\"PR\" together")));
+ if (!IS_DECIMAL(num))
+ {
+ num->lsign = NUM_LSIGN_PRE;
+ num->pre_lsign_num = num->pre;
+ num->need_locale = TRUE;
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_LSIGN;
+ }
+ else if (num->lsign == NUM_LSIGN_NONE)
+ {
+ num->lsign = NUM_LSIGN_POST;
+ num->need_locale = TRUE;
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_LSIGN;
+ }
+ break;
+
+ case NUM_MI:
+ if (IS_LSIGN(num))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
+ errmsg("cannot use \"S\" and \"MI\" together")));
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_MINUS;
+ if (IS_DECIMAL(num))
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_MINUS_POST;
+ break;
+
+ case NUM_PL:
+ if (IS_LSIGN(num))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
+ errmsg("cannot use \"S\" and \"PL\" together")));
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_PLUS;
+ if (IS_DECIMAL(num))
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_PLUS_POST;
+ break;
+
+ case NUM_SG:
+ if (IS_LSIGN(num))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
+ errmsg("cannot use \"S\" and \"SG\" together")));
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_MINUS;
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_PLUS;
+ break;
+
+ case NUM_PR:
+ if (IS_LSIGN(num) || IS_PLUS(num) || IS_MINUS(num))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
+ errmsg("cannot use \"PR\" and \"S\"/\"PL\"/\"MI\"/\"SG\" together")));
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_BRACKET;
+ break;
+
+ case NUM_rn:
+ case NUM_RN:
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_ROMAN;
+ break;
+
+ case NUM_L:
+ case NUM_G:
num->need_locale = TRUE;
- num->flag |= NUM_F_LSIGN;
- }
- break;
+ break;
- case NUM_MI:
- if (IS_LSIGN(num))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("cannot use \"S\" and \"MI\" together")));
- num->flag |= NUM_F_MINUS;
- if (IS_DECIMAL(num))
- num->flag |= NUM_F_MINUS_POST;
- break;
-
- case NUM_PL:
- if (IS_LSIGN(num))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("cannot use \"S\" and \"PL\" together")));
- num->flag |= NUM_F_PLUS;
- if (IS_DECIMAL(num))
- num->flag |= NUM_F_PLUS_POST;
- break;
-
- case NUM_SG:
- if (IS_LSIGN(num))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("cannot use \"S\" and \"SG\" together")));
- num->flag |= NUM_F_MINUS;
- num->flag |= NUM_F_PLUS;
- break;
-
- case NUM_PR:
- if (IS_LSIGN(num) || IS_PLUS(num) || IS_MINUS(num))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("cannot use \"PR\" and \"S\"/\"PL\"/\"MI\"/\"SG\" together")));
- num->flag |= NUM_F_BRACKET;
- break;
-
- case NUM_rn:
- case NUM_RN:
- num->flag |= NUM_F_ROMAN;
- break;
-
- case NUM_L:
- case NUM_G:
- num->need_locale = TRUE;
- break;
-
- case NUM_V:
- if (IS_DECIMAL(num))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
+ case NUM_V:
+ if (IS_DECIMAL(num))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
errmsg("cannot use \"V\" and decimal point together")));
- num->flag |= NUM_F_MULTI;
- break;
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_MULTI;
+ break;
- case NUM_E:
- if (IS_EEEE(num))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("cannot use \"EEEE\" twice")));
- if (IS_BLANK(num) || IS_FILLMODE(num) || IS_LSIGN(num) ||
- IS_BRACKET(num) || IS_MINUS(num) || IS_PLUS(num) ||
- IS_ROMAN(num) || IS_MULTI(num))
- ereport(ERROR,
- (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- errmsg("\"EEEE\" is incompatible with other formats"),
- errdetail("\"EEEE\" may only be used together with digit and decimal point patterns.")));
- num->flag |= NUM_F_EEEE;
- break;
- }
+ case NUM_E:
+ if (IS_EEEE(num))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
+ errmsg("cannot use \"EEEE\" twice")));
+ if (IS_BLANK(num) || IS_FILLMODE(num) || IS_LSIGN(num) ||
+ IS_BRACKET(num) || IS_MINUS(num) || IS_PLUS(num) ||
+ IS_ROMAN(num) || IS_MULTI(num))
+ ereport(ERROR,
+ (errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
+ errmsg("\"EEEE\" is incompatible with other formats"),
+ errdetail("\"EEEE\" may only be used together with digit and decimal point patterns.")));
+ num->flag |= NUM_F_EEEE;
+ break;
+ }
}
PG_CATCH();
{
break;
case DCH_HH:
case DCH_HH12:
- /* display time as shown on a 12-hour clock, even for intervals */
+
+ /*
+ * display time as shown on a 12-hour clock, even for
+ * intervals
+ */
sprintf(s, "%0*d", S_FM(n->suffix) ? 0 : 2,
tm->tm_hour % (HOURS_PER_DAY / 2) == 0 ? 12 :
tm->tm_hour % (HOURS_PER_DAY / 2));
if (strcmp(orgnum, "NaN") == 0)
{
/*
- * Allow 6 characters for the leading sign, the decimal point, "e",
- * the exponent's sign and two exponent digits.
+ * Allow 6 characters for the leading sign, the decimal point,
+ * "e", the exponent's sign and two exponent digits.
*/
numstr = (char *) palloc(Num.pre + Num.post + 7);
fill_str(numstr, '#', Num.pre + Num.post + 6);
else if (IS_EEEE(&Num))
{
/* we can do it easily because float8 won't lose any precision */
- float8 val = (float8) value;
+ float8 val = (float8) value;
orgnum = (char *) palloc(MAXDOUBLEWIDTH + 1);
snprintf(orgnum, MAXDOUBLEWIDTH + 1, "%+.*e", Num.post, val);
else if (IS_EEEE(&Num))
{
/* to avoid loss of precision, must go via numeric not float8 */
- Numeric val;
+ Numeric val;
val = DatumGetNumeric(DirectFunctionCall1(int8_numeric,
Int64GetDatum(value)));
if (isnan(value) || is_infinite(value))
{
/*
- * Allow 6 characters for the leading sign, the decimal point, "e",
- * the exponent's sign and two exponent digits.
+ * Allow 6 characters for the leading sign, the decimal point,
+ * "e", the exponent's sign and two exponent digits.
*/
numstr = (char *) palloc(Num.pre + Num.post + 7);
fill_str(numstr, '#', Num.pre + Num.post + 6);
if (isnan(value) || is_infinite(value))
{
/*
- * Allow 6 characters for the leading sign, the decimal point, "e",
- * the exponent's sign and two exponent digits.
+ * Allow 6 characters for the leading sign, the decimal point,
+ * "e", the exponent's sign and two exponent digits.
*/
numstr = (char *) palloc(Num.pre + Num.post + 7);
fill_str(numstr, '#', Num.pre + Num.post + 6);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/geo_ops.c,v 1.107 2010/01/14 16:31:09 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/geo_ops.c,v 1.108 2010/02/26 02:01:08 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static double dist_ps_internal(Point *pt, LSEG *lseg);
static Point *line_interpt_internal(LINE *l1, LINE *l2);
static bool lseg_inside_poly(Point *a, Point *b, POLYGON *poly, int start);
-static Point* lseg_interpt_internal(LSEG *l1, LSEG *l2);
+static Point *lseg_interpt_internal(LSEG *l1, LSEG *l2);
/*
PG_RETURN_POINT_P(result);
}
-static Point*
+static Point *
lseg_interpt_internal(LSEG *l1, LSEG *l2)
{
Point *result;
LSEG *l1 = PG_GETARG_LSEG_P(0);
LSEG *l2 = PG_GETARG_LSEG_P(1);
Point *result;
-
+
result = lseg_interpt_internal(l1, l2);
if (!PointerIsValid(result))
PG_RETURN_NULL();
Point *ip;
/*
- * Construct a line perpendicular to the input segment
- * and through the input point
+ * Construct a line perpendicular to the input segment and through the
+ * input point
*/
if (lseg->p[1].x == lseg->p[0].x)
m = 0;
}
Datum
-box_contain_pt(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
+box_contain_pt(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
BOX *box = PG_GETARG_BOX_P(0);
Point *pt = PG_GETARG_POINT_P(1);
}
/*-----------------------------------------------------------------
- * Determine if polygon A overlaps polygon B
+ * Determine if polygon A overlaps polygon B
*-----------------------------------------------------------------*/
Datum
poly_overlap(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
bool result;
/* Quick check by bounding box */
- result = (polya->npts > 0 && polyb->npts > 0 &&
- box_ov(&polya->boundbox, &polyb->boundbox)) ? true : false;
+ result = (polya->npts > 0 && polyb->npts > 0 &&
+ box_ov(&polya->boundbox, &polyb->boundbox)) ? true : false;
/*
- * Brute-force algorithm - try to find intersected edges,
- * if so then polygons are overlapped else check is one
- * polygon inside other or not by testing single point
- * of them.
+ * Brute-force algorithm - try to find intersected edges, if so then
+ * polygons are overlapped else check is one polygon inside other or not
+ * by testing single point of them.
*/
if (result)
{
- int ia, ib;
- LSEG sa, sb;
+ int ia,
+ ib;
+ LSEG sa,
+ sb;
/* Init first of polya's edge with last point */
sa.p[0] = polya->p[polya->npts - 1];
result = false;
- for(ia=0; ia<polya->npts && result == false; ia++)
+ for (ia = 0; ia < polya->npts && result == false; ia++)
{
- /* Second point of polya's edge is a current one */
+ /* Second point of polya's edge is a current one */
sa.p[1] = polya->p[ia];
/* Init first of polyb's edge with last point */
sb.p[0] = polyb->p[polyb->npts - 1];
- for(ib=0; ib<polyb->npts && result == false; ib++)
+ for (ib = 0; ib < polyb->npts && result == false; ib++)
{
sb.p[1] = polyb->p[ib];
result = lseg_intersect_internal(&sa, &sb);
sb.p[0] = sb.p[1];
}
- /*
- * move current endpoint to the first point
- * of next edge
+ /*
+ * move current endpoint to the first point of next edge
*/
sa.p[0] = sa.p[1];
}
- if (result==false)
+ if (result == false)
{
- result = ( point_inside(polya->p, polyb->npts, polyb->p)
- ||
- point_inside(polyb->p, polya->npts, polya->p) );
+ result = (point_inside(polya->p, polyb->npts, polyb->p)
+ ||
+ point_inside(polyb->p, polya->npts, polya->p));
}
}
/*
* Tests special kind of segment for in/out of polygon.
* Special kind means:
- * - point a should be on segment s
- * - segment (a,b) should not be contained by s
+ * - point a should be on segment s
+ * - segment (a,b) should not be contained by s
* Returns true if:
- * - segment (a,b) is collinear to s and (a,b) is in polygon
- * - segment (a,b) s not collinear to s. Note: that doesn't
- * mean that segment is in polygon!
- */
+ * - segment (a,b) is collinear to s and (a,b) is in polygon
+ * - segment (a,b) s not collinear to s. Note: that doesn't
+ * mean that segment is in polygon!
+ */
static bool
touched_lseg_inside_poly(Point *a, Point *b, LSEG *s, POLYGON *poly, int start)
{
/* point a is on s, b is not */
- LSEG t;
+ LSEG t;
t.p[0] = *a;
t.p[1] = *b;
-
-#define POINTEQ(pt1, pt2) (FPeq((pt1)->x, (pt2)->x) && FPeq((pt1)->y, (pt2)->y))
- if ( POINTEQ(a, s->p) )
+
+#define POINTEQ(pt1, pt2) (FPeq((pt1)->x, (pt2)->x) && FPeq((pt1)->y, (pt2)->y))
+ if (POINTEQ(a, s->p))
{
- if ( on_ps_internal(s->p+1, &t) )
- return lseg_inside_poly(b, s->p+1, poly, start);
+ if (on_ps_internal(s->p + 1, &t))
+ return lseg_inside_poly(b, s->p + 1, poly, start);
}
- else if (POINTEQ(a, s->p+1))
+ else if (POINTEQ(a, s->p + 1))
{
- if ( on_ps_internal(s->p, &t) )
+ if (on_ps_internal(s->p, &t))
return lseg_inside_poly(b, s->p, poly, start);
}
- else if ( on_ps_internal(s->p, &t) )
+ else if (on_ps_internal(s->p, &t))
{
return lseg_inside_poly(b, s->p, poly, start);
}
- else if ( on_ps_internal(s->p+1, &t) )
+ else if (on_ps_internal(s->p + 1, &t))
{
- return lseg_inside_poly(b, s->p+1, poly, start);
+ return lseg_inside_poly(b, s->p + 1, poly, start);
}
- return true; /* may be not true, but that will check later */
+ return true; /* may be not true, but that will check later */
}
/*
* Returns true if segment (a,b) is in polygon, option
- * start is used for optimization - function checks
+ * start is used for optimization - function checks
* polygon's edges started from start
*/
static bool
lseg_inside_poly(Point *a, Point *b, POLYGON *poly, int start)
{
- LSEG s,
- t;
- int i;
- bool res = true,
- intersection = false;
+ LSEG s,
+ t;
+ int i;
+ bool res = true,
+ intersection = false;
t.p[0] = *a;
t.p[1] = *b;
- s.p[0] = poly->p[( start == 0) ? (poly->npts - 1) : (start - 1)];
+ s.p[0] = poly->p[(start == 0) ? (poly->npts - 1) : (start - 1)];
- for(i=start; i<poly->npts && res == true; i++)
+ for (i = start; i < poly->npts && res == true; i++)
{
- Point *interpt;
+ Point *interpt;
s.p[1] = poly->p[i];
- if ( on_ps_internal(t.p, &s) )
+ if (on_ps_internal(t.p, &s))
{
- if ( on_ps_internal(t.p+1, &s) )
- return true; /* t is contained by s */
+ if (on_ps_internal(t.p + 1, &s))
+ return true; /* t is contained by s */
/* Y-cross */
- res = touched_lseg_inside_poly(t.p, t.p+1, &s, poly, i+1);
- }
- else if ( on_ps_internal(t.p+1, &s) )
+ res = touched_lseg_inside_poly(t.p, t.p + 1, &s, poly, i + 1);
+ }
+ else if (on_ps_internal(t.p + 1, &s))
{
/* Y-cross */
- res = touched_lseg_inside_poly(t.p+1, t.p, &s, poly, i+1);
+ res = touched_lseg_inside_poly(t.p + 1, t.p, &s, poly, i + 1);
}
- else if ( (interpt = lseg_interpt_internal(&t, &s)) != NULL )
+ else if ((interpt = lseg_interpt_internal(&t, &s)) != NULL)
{
/*
* segments are X-crossing, go to check each subsegment
*/
intersection = true;
- res = lseg_inside_poly(t.p, interpt, poly, i+1);
+ res = lseg_inside_poly(t.p, interpt, poly, i + 1);
if (res)
- res = lseg_inside_poly(t.p+1, interpt, poly, i+1);
+ res = lseg_inside_poly(t.p + 1, interpt, poly, i + 1);
pfree(interpt);
}
if (res && !intersection)
{
- Point p;
+ Point p;
/*
- * if X-intersection wasn't found then check central point
- * of tested segment. In opposite case we already check all
- * subsegments
+ * if X-intersection wasn't found then check central point of tested
+ * segment. In opposite case we already check all subsegments
*/
- p.x = (t.p[0].x + t.p[1].x) / 2.0;
+ p.x = (t.p[0].x + t.p[1].x) / 2.0;
p.y = (t.p[0].y + t.p[1].y) / 2.0;
- res = point_inside(&p, poly->npts, poly->p);
+ res = point_inside(&p, poly->npts, poly->p);
}
return res;
* Quick check to see if bounding box is contained.
*/
if (polya->npts > 0 && polyb->npts > 0 &&
- DatumGetBool(DirectFunctionCall2(box_contain,
- BoxPGetDatum(&polya->boundbox),
- BoxPGetDatum(&polyb->boundbox))))
+ DatumGetBool(DirectFunctionCall2(box_contain,
+ BoxPGetDatum(&polya->boundbox),
+ BoxPGetDatum(&polyb->boundbox))))
{
- int i;
- LSEG s;
+ int i;
+ LSEG s;
s.p[0] = polyb->p[polyb->npts - 1];
result = true;
- for(i=0; i<polyb->npts && result == true; i++)
+ for (i = 0; i < polyb->npts && result == true; i++)
{
s.p[1] = polyb->p[i];
- result = lseg_inside_poly(s.p, s.p+1, polya, 0);
+ result = lseg_inside_poly(s.p, s.p + 1, polya, 0);
s.p[0] = s.p[1];
}
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/int.c,v 1.88 2010/01/02 16:57:54 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/int.c,v 1.89 2010/02/26 02:01:08 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
while (*intString && isspace((unsigned char) *intString))
intString++;
if (*intString == '\0')
- break;
+ break;
result->values[n] = pg_atoi(intString, sizeof(int16), ' ');
while (*intString && !isspace((unsigned char) *intString))
intString++;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/int8.c,v 1.78 2010/02/08 20:39:51 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/int8.c,v 1.79 2010/02/26 02:01:08 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* When int8 is pass-by-reference, we provide this special case to avoid
* palloc overhead for COUNT(): when called as an aggregate, we know that
- * the argument is modifiable local storage, so just update it
- * in-place. (If int8 is pass-by-value, then of course this is useless as
- * well as incorrect, so just ifdef it out.)
+ * the argument is modifiable local storage, so just update it in-place.
+ * (If int8 is pass-by-value, then of course this is useless as well as
+ * incorrect, so just ifdef it out.)
*/
#ifndef USE_FLOAT8_BYVAL /* controls int8 too */
if (AggCheckCallContext(fcinfo, NULL))
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/misc.c,v 1.74 2010/01/12 02:42:52 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/misc.c,v 1.75 2010/02/26 02:01:09 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* size = tablespace dirname length + dir sep char + oid + terminator
*/
fctx->location = (char *) palloc(9 + 1 + OIDCHARS + 1 +
- strlen(TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY) + 1);
+ strlen(TABLESPACE_VERSION_DIRECTORY) + 1);
if (tablespaceOid == GLOBALTABLESPACE_OID)
{
fctx->dirdesc = NULL;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/nabstime.c,v 1.163 2010/01/02 16:57:54 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/nabstime.c,v 1.164 2010/02/26 02:01:09 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
{
StringInfo buf = (StringInfo) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0);
TimeInterval tinterval;
- int32 status;
+ int32 status;
tinterval = (TimeInterval) palloc(sizeof(TimeIntervalData));
if (tinterval->data[0] == INVALID_ABSTIME ||
tinterval->data[1] == INVALID_ABSTIME)
- status = T_INTERVAL_INVAL; /* undefined */
+ status = T_INTERVAL_INVAL; /* undefined */
else
status = T_INTERVAL_VALID;
* Copyright (c) 1998-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/numeric.c,v 1.122 2010/02/08 20:39:51 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/numeric.c,v 1.123 2010/02/26 02:01:09 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
get_str_from_var_sci(NumericVar *var, int rscale)
{
int32 exponent;
- NumericVar denominator;
+ NumericVar denominator;
NumericVar significand;
int denom_scale;
size_t len;
/*
* Allocate space for the result.
*
- * In addition to the significand, we need room for the exponent decoration
- * ("e"), the sign of the exponent, up to 10 digits for the exponent
- * itself, and of course the null terminator.
+ * In addition to the significand, we need room for the exponent
+ * decoration ("e"), the sign of the exponent, up to 10 digits for the
+ * exponent itself, and of course the null terminator.
*/
len = strlen(sig_out) + 13;
str = palloc(len);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/pgstatfuncs.c,v 1.59 2010/01/28 14:25:41 mha Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/pgstatfuncs.c,v 1.60 2010/02/26 02:01:09 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
Datum
pg_stat_reset_shared(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- char *target = text_to_cstring(PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(0));
+ char *target = text_to_cstring(PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(0));
pgstat_reset_shared_counters(target);
Datum
pg_stat_reset_single_table_counters(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- Oid taboid = PG_GETARG_OID(0);
+ Oid taboid = PG_GETARG_OID(0);
pgstat_reset_single_counter(taboid, RESET_TABLE);
Datum
pg_stat_reset_single_function_counters(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- Oid funcoid = PG_GETARG_OID(0);
+ Oid funcoid = PG_GETARG_OID(0);
pgstat_reset_single_counter(funcoid, RESET_FUNCTION);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/rowtypes.c,v 1.27 2010/01/02 16:57:55 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/rowtypes.c,v 1.28 2010/02/26 02:01:09 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
(errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED),
errmsg("input of anonymous composite types is not implemented")));
tupTypmod = -1; /* for all non-anonymous types */
+
/*
- * This comes from the composite type's pg_type.oid and
- * stores system oids in user tables, specifically DatumTupleFields.
- * This oid must be preserved by binary upgrades.
+ * This comes from the composite type's pg_type.oid and stores system oids
+ * in user tables, specifically DatumTupleFields. This oid must be
+ * preserved by binary upgrades.
*/
tupdesc = lookup_rowtype_tupdesc(tupType, tupTypmod);
ncolumns = tupdesc->natts;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/ruleutils.c,v 1.324 2010/02/18 22:43:31 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/ruleutils.c,v 1.325 2010/02/26 02:01:09 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void printSubscripts(ArrayRef *aref, deparse_context *context);
static char *generate_relation_name(Oid relid, List *namespaces);
static char *generate_function_name(Oid funcid, int nargs, List *argnames,
- Oid *argtypes, bool *is_variadic);
+ Oid *argtypes, bool *is_variadic);
static char *generate_operator_name(Oid operid, Oid arg1, Oid arg2);
static text *string_to_text(char *str);
static char *flatten_reloptions(Oid relid);
/* tgattr is first var-width field, so OK to access directly */
if (trigrec->tgattr.dim1 > 0)
{
- int i;
+ int i;
appendStringInfoString(&buf, " OF ");
for (i = 0; i < trigrec->tgattr.dim1; i++)
{
- char *attname;
+ char *attname;
if (i > 0)
appendStringInfoString(&buf, ", ");
{
if (OidIsValid(trigrec->tgconstrrelid))
appendStringInfo(&buf, "FROM %s ",
- generate_relation_name(trigrec->tgconstrrelid, NIL));
+ generate_relation_name(trigrec->tgconstrrelid, NIL));
if (!trigrec->tgdeferrable)
appendStringInfo(&buf, "NOT ");
appendStringInfo(&buf, "DEFERRABLE INITIALLY ");
tgrel->rd_att, &isnull);
if (!isnull)
{
- Node *qual;
- deparse_context context;
- deparse_namespace dpns;
- RangeTblEntry *oldrte;
- RangeTblEntry *newrte;
+ Node *qual;
+ deparse_context context;
+ deparse_namespace dpns;
+ RangeTblEntry *oldrte;
+ RangeTblEntry *newrte;
appendStringInfoString(&buf, "WHEN (");
quote_identifier(NameStr(idxrelrec->relname)),
generate_relation_name(indrelid, NIL),
quote_identifier(NameStr(amrec->amname)));
- else /* currently, must be EXCLUDE constraint */
+ else /* currently, must be EXCLUDE constraint */
appendStringInfo(&buf, "EXCLUDE USING %s (",
quote_identifier(NameStr(amrec->amname)));
}
break;
}
case CONSTRAINT_TRIGGER:
+
/*
* There isn't an ALTER TABLE syntax for creating a user-defined
- * constraint trigger, but it seems better to print something
- * than throw an error; if we throw error then this function
- * couldn't safely be applied to all rows of pg_constraint.
+ * constraint trigger, but it seems better to print something than
+ * throw an error; if we throw error then this function couldn't
+ * safely be applied to all rows of pg_constraint.
*/
appendStringInfo(&buf, "TRIGGER");
break;
case CONSTRAINT_EXCLUSION:
{
- Oid indexOid = conForm->conindid;
- Datum val;
- bool isnull;
- Datum *elems;
- int nElems;
- int i;
- Oid *operators;
+ Oid indexOid = conForm->conindid;
+ Datum val;
+ bool isnull;
+ Datum *elems;
+ int nElems;
+ int i;
+ Oid *operators;
/* Extract operator OIDs from the pg_constraint tuple */
val = SysCacheGetAttr(CONSTROID, tup,
/*
* We special-case Append to pretend that the first child plan is the
* OUTER referent; we have to interpret OUTER Vars in the Append's tlist
- * according to one of the children, and the first one is the most
- * natural choice. Likewise special-case ModifyTable to pretend that the
- * first child plan is the OUTER referent; this is to support RETURNING
- * lists containing references to non-target relations.
+ * according to one of the children, and the first one is the most natural
+ * choice. Likewise special-case ModifyTable to pretend that the first
+ * child plan is the OUTER referent; this is to support RETURNING lists
+ * containing references to non-target relations.
*/
if (IsA(subplan, Append))
dpns->outer_plan = (Plan *) linitial(((Append *) subplan)->appendplans);
/*
* If the argument is a CaseTestExpr, we must be inside a
- * FieldStore, ie, we are assigning to an element of an
- * array within a composite column. Since we already punted
- * on displaying the FieldStore's target information, just
- * punt here too, and display only the assignment source
+ * FieldStore, ie, we are assigning to an element of an array
+ * within a composite column. Since we already punted on
+ * displaying the FieldStore's target information, just punt
+ * here too, and display only the assignment source
* expression.
*/
if (IsA(aref->refexpr, CaseTestExpr))
appendStringInfoChar(buf, ')');
/*
- * If there's a refassgnexpr, we want to print the node in
- * the format "array[subscripts] := refassgnexpr". This is
- * not legal SQL, so decompilation of INSERT or UPDATE
- * statements should always use processIndirection as part
- * of the statement-level syntax. We should only see this
- * when EXPLAIN tries to print the targetlist of a plan
- * resulting from such a statement.
+ * If there's a refassgnexpr, we want to print the node in the
+ * format "array[subscripts] := refassgnexpr". This is not
+ * legal SQL, so decompilation of INSERT or UPDATE statements
+ * should always use processIndirection as part of the
+ * statement-level syntax. We should only see this when
+ * EXPLAIN tries to print the targetlist of a plan resulting
+ * from such a statement.
*/
if (aref->refassgnexpr)
{
- Node *refassgnexpr;
+ Node *refassgnexpr;
/*
- * Use processIndirection to print this node's
- * subscripts as well as any additional field selections
- * or subscripting in immediate descendants. It returns
- * the RHS expr that is actually being "assigned".
+ * Use processIndirection to print this node's subscripts
+ * as well as any additional field selections or
+ * subscripting in immediate descendants. It returns the
+ * RHS expr that is actually being "assigned".
*/
refassgnexpr = processIndirection(node, context, true);
appendStringInfoString(buf, " := ");
* There is no good way to represent a FieldStore as real SQL,
* so decompilation of INSERT or UPDATE statements should
* always use processIndirection as part of the
- * statement-level syntax. We should only get here when
+ * statement-level syntax. We should only get here when
* EXPLAIN tries to print the targetlist of a plan resulting
* from such a statement. The plan case is even harder than
* ordinary rules would be, because the planner tries to
* collapse multiple assignments to the same field or subfield
* into one FieldStore; so we can see a list of target fields
* not just one, and the arguments could be FieldStores
- * themselves. We don't bother to try to print the target
+ * themselves. We don't bother to try to print the target
* field names; we just print the source arguments, with a
* ROW() around them if there's more than one. This isn't
* terribly complete, but it's probably good enough for
argnames = NIL;
foreach(l, expr->args)
{
- Node *arg = (Node *) lfirst(l);
+ Node *arg = (Node *) lfirst(l);
if (IsA(arg, NamedArgExpr))
argnames = lappend(argnames, ((NamedArgExpr *) arg)->name);
{
StringInfo buf = context->buf;
Oid argtypes[FUNC_MAX_ARGS];
- List *arglist;
+ List *arglist;
int nargs;
ListCell *l;
foreach(l, aggref->args)
{
TargetEntry *tle = (TargetEntry *) lfirst(l);
- Node *arg = (Node *) tle->expr;
+ Node *arg = (Node *) tle->expr;
Assert(!IsA(arg, NamedArgExpr));
if (tle->resjunk)
continue;
- if (nargs >= FUNC_MAX_ARGS) /* paranoia */
+ if (nargs >= FUNC_MAX_ARGS) /* paranoia */
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_TOO_MANY_ARGUMENTS),
errmsg("too many arguments")));
nargs = 0;
foreach(l, wfunc->args)
{
- Node *arg = (Node *) lfirst(l);
+ Node *arg = (Node *) lfirst(l);
Assert(!IsA(arg, NamedArgExpr));
argtypes[nargs] = exprType(arg);
format_type_be(fstore->resulttype));
/*
- * Print the field name. There should only be one target field
- * in stored rules. There could be more than that in executable
+ * Print the field name. There should only be one target field in
+ * stored rules. There could be more than that in executable
* target lists, but this function cannot be used for that case.
*/
Assert(list_length(fstore->fieldnums) == 1);
* generate_function_name
* Compute the name to display for a function specified by OID,
* given that it is being called with the specified actual arg names and
- * types. (Those matter because of ambiguous-function resolution rules.)
+ * types. (Those matter because of ambiguous-function resolution rules.)
*
* The result includes all necessary quoting and schema-prefixing. We can
* also pass back an indication of whether the function is variadic.
/*
* The idea here is to schema-qualify only if the parser would fail to
* resolve the correct function given the unqualified func name with the
- * specified argtypes. If the function is variadic, we should presume
+ * specified argtypes. If the function is variadic, we should presume
* that VARIADIC will be included in the call.
*/
p_result = func_get_detail(list_make1(makeString(proname)),
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c,v 1.269 2010/02/14 18:42:16 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/selfuncs.c,v 1.270 2010/02/26 02:01:10 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static bool get_variable_range(PlannerInfo *root, VariableStatData *vardata,
Oid sortop, Datum *min, Datum *max);
static bool get_actual_variable_range(PlannerInfo *root,
- VariableStatData *vardata,
- Oid sortop,
- Datum *min, Datum *max);
+ VariableStatData *vardata,
+ Oid sortop,
+ Datum *min, Datum *max);
static Selectivity prefix_selectivity(PlannerInfo *root,
VariableStatData *vardata,
Oid vartype, Oid opfamily, Const *prefixcon);
* results ... but probably not any more garbage-y than you would
* from the old linear search.)
*
- * If the binary search accesses the first or last histogram entry,
- * we try to replace that endpoint with the true column min or max
- * as found by get_actual_variable_range(). This ameliorates
- * misestimates when the min or max is moving as a result of
- * changes since the last ANALYZE. Note that this could result
- * in effectively including MCVs into the histogram that weren't
- * there before, but we don't try to correct for that.
+ * If the binary search accesses the first or last histogram
+ * entry, we try to replace that endpoint with the true column min
+ * or max as found by get_actual_variable_range(). This
+ * ameliorates misestimates when the min or max is moving as a
+ * result of changes since the last ANALYZE. Note that this could
+ * result in effectively including MCVs into the histogram that
+ * weren't there before, but we don't try to correct for that.
*/
double histfrac;
int lobound = 0; /* first possible slot to search */
/*
*
* http://connect.microsoft.com/VisualStudio/feedback/ViewFeedback.aspx?
- * FeedbackID=99694
- */
+ * FeedbackID=99694 */
{
char x[1];
else if (rte->rtekind == RTE_RELATION)
{
vardata->statsTuple = SearchSysCache3(STATRELATTINH,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(rte->relid),
- Int16GetDatum(var->varattno),
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(rte->relid),
+ Int16GetDatum(var->varattno),
BoolGetDatum(rte->inh));
vardata->freefunc = ReleaseSysCache;
}
vardata->statsTuple =
SearchSysCache3(STATRELATTINH,
ObjectIdGetDatum(index->indexoid),
- Int16GetDatum(pos + 1),
- BoolGetDatum(false));
+ Int16GetDatum(pos + 1),
+ BoolGetDatum(false));
vardata->freefunc = ReleaseSysCache;
}
if (vardata->statsTuple)
int i;
/*
- * XXX It's very tempting to try to use the actual column min and max,
- * if we can get them relatively-cheaply with an index probe. However,
- * since this function is called many times during join planning,
- * that could have unpleasant effects on planning speed. Need more
- * investigation before enabling this.
+ * XXX It's very tempting to try to use the actual column min and max, if
+ * we can get them relatively-cheaply with an index probe. However, since
+ * this function is called many times during join planning, that could
+ * have unpleasant effects on planning speed. Need more investigation
+ * before enabling this.
*/
#ifdef NOT_USED
if (get_actual_variable_range(root, vardata, sortop, min, max))
continue;
/*
- * Ignore partial indexes --- we only want stats that cover the
- * entire relation.
+ * Ignore partial indexes --- we only want stats that cover the entire
+ * relation.
*/
if (index->indpred != NIL)
continue;
continue;
/*
- * Found a suitable index to extract data from. We'll need an
- * EState and a bunch of other infrastructure.
+ * Found a suitable index to extract data from. We'll need an EState
+ * and a bunch of other infrastructure.
*/
{
EState *estate;
/* set up an IS NOT NULL scan key so that we ignore nulls */
ScanKeyEntryInitialize(&scankeys[0],
SK_ISNULL | SK_SEARCHNOTNULL,
- 1, /* index col to scan */
+ 1, /* index col to scan */
InvalidStrategy, /* no strategy */
InvalidOid, /* no strategy subtype */
InvalidOid, /* no reg proc for this */
indexscandir)) != NULL)
{
/* Extract the index column values from the heap tuple */
- ExecStoreTuple(tup, slot, InvalidBuffer, false);
+ ExecStoreTuple(tup, slot, InvalidBuffer, false);
FormIndexDatum(indexInfo, slot, estate,
values, isnull);
-indexscandir)) != NULL)
{
/* Extract the index column values from the heap tuple */
- ExecStoreTuple(tup, slot, InvalidBuffer, false);
+ ExecStoreTuple(tup, slot, InvalidBuffer, false);
FormIndexDatum(indexInfo, slot, estate,
values, isnull);
/*
* Check for ARE director prefix. It's worth our trouble to recognize
- * this because similar_escape() used to use it, and some other code
- * might still use it, to force ARE mode.
+ * this because similar_escape() used to use it, and some other code might
+ * still use it, to force ARE mode.
*/
pos = 0;
if (strncmp(patt, "***:", 4) == 0)
* since that's internal to the indexscan.)
*/
*indexTotalCost = (pages_fetched * spc_random_page_cost)
- / num_outer_scans;
+ / num_outer_scans;
}
else
{
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/timestamp.c,v 1.205 2010/01/02 16:57:55 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/timestamp.c,v 1.206 2010/02/26 02:01:10 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
}
/*
- * There is no interval_abs(): it is unclear what value to return:
- * http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-general/2009-10/msg01031.php
- * http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-general/2009-11/msg00041.php
+ * There is no interval_abs(): it is unclear what value to return:
+ * http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-general/2009-10/msg01031.php
+ * http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-general/2009-11/msg00041.php
*/
-
+
Datum
interval_mul(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
* Author: Jan Wieck, Afilias USA INC.
* 64-bit txids: Marko Kreen, Skype Technologies
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/txid.c,v 1.12 2010/02/20 21:24:02 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/txid.c,v 1.13 2010/02/26 02:01:10 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
TxidEpoch state;
/*
- * Must prevent during recovery because if an xid is
- * not assigned we try to assign one, which would fail.
- * Programs already rely on this function to always
- * return a valid current xid, so we should not change
- * this to return NULL or similar invalid xid.
+ * Must prevent during recovery because if an xid is not assigned we try
+ * to assign one, which would fail. Programs already rely on this function
+ * to always return a valid current xid, so we should not change this to
+ * return NULL or similar invalid xid.
*/
PreventCommandDuringRecovery("txid_current()");
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/varbit.c,v 1.64 2010/01/25 20:55:32 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/varbit.c,v 1.65 2010/02/26 02:01:10 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static VarBit *bit_catenate(VarBit *arg1, VarBit *arg2);
static VarBit *bitsubstring(VarBit *arg, int32 s, int32 l,
- bool length_not_specified);
+ bool length_not_specified);
static VarBit *bit_overlay(VarBit *t1, VarBit *t2, int sp, int sl);
else
{
e = s + l;
+
/*
- * A negative value for L is the only way for the end position
- * to be before the start. SQL99 says to throw an error.
+ * A negative value for L is the only way for the end position to be
+ * before the start. SQL99 says to throw an error.
*/
if (e < s)
ereport(ERROR,
{
VarBit *t1 = PG_GETARG_VARBIT_P(0);
VarBit *t2 = PG_GETARG_VARBIT_P(1);
- int sp = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); /* substring start position */
- int sl = PG_GETARG_INT32(3); /* substring length */
+ int sp = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); /* substring start position */
+ int sl = PG_GETARG_INT32(3); /* substring length */
PG_RETURN_VARBIT_P(bit_overlay(t1, t2, sp, sl));
}
{
VarBit *t1 = PG_GETARG_VARBIT_P(0);
VarBit *t2 = PG_GETARG_VARBIT_P(1);
- int sp = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); /* substring start position */
+ int sp = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); /* substring start position */
int sl;
- sl = VARBITLEN(t2); /* defaults to length(t2) */
+ sl = VARBITLEN(t2); /* defaults to length(t2) */
PG_RETURN_VARBIT_P(bit_overlay(t1, t2, sp, sl));
}
int sp_pl_sl;
/*
- * Check for possible integer-overflow cases. For negative sp,
- * throw a "substring length" error because that's what should be
- * expected according to the spec's definition of OVERLAY().
+ * Check for possible integer-overflow cases. For negative sp, throw a
+ * "substring length" error because that's what should be expected
+ * according to the spec's definition of OVERLAY().
*/
if (sp <= 0)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_NUMERIC_VALUE_OUT_OF_RANGE),
errmsg("integer out of range")));
- s1 = bitsubstring(t1, 1, sp-1, false);
+ s1 = bitsubstring(t1, 1, sp - 1, false);
s2 = bitsubstring(t1, sp_pl_sl, -1, true);
result = bit_catenate(s1, t2);
result = bit_catenate(result, s2);
/* store first fractional byte */
if (destbitsleft > srcbitsleft)
{
- int val = (int) (a >> (destbitsleft - 8));
+ int val = (int) (a >> (destbitsleft - 8));
/* Force sign-fill in case the compiler implements >> as zero-fill */
if (a < 0)
/* store first fractional byte */
if (destbitsleft > srcbitsleft)
{
- int val = (int) (a >> (destbitsleft - 8));
+ int val = (int) (a >> (destbitsleft - 8));
/* Force sign-fill in case the compiler implements >> as zero-fill */
if (a < 0)
(errcode(ERRCODE_ARRAY_SUBSCRIPT_ERROR),
errmsg("bit index %d out of valid range (0..%d)",
n, bitlen - 1)));
+
/*
* sanity check!
*/
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/varlena.c,v 1.176 2010/02/08 20:39:51 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/varlena.c,v 1.177 2010/02/26 02:01:10 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* GUC variable */
-int bytea_output = BYTEA_OUTPUT_HEX;
+int bytea_output = BYTEA_OUTPUT_HEX;
typedef struct varlena unknown;
/* Recognize hex input */
if (inputText[0] == '\\' && inputText[1] == 'x')
{
- size_t len = strlen(inputText);
+ size_t len = strlen(inputText);
- bc = (len - 2)/2 + VARHDRSZ; /* maximum possible length */
+ bc = (len - 2) / 2 + VARHDRSZ; /* maximum possible length */
result = palloc(bc);
bc = hex_decode(inputText + 2, len - 2, VARDATA(result));
- SET_VARSIZE(result, bc + VARHDRSZ); /* actual length */
+ SET_VARSIZE(result, bc + VARHDRSZ); /* actual length */
PG_RETURN_BYTEA_P(result);
}
}
else if (bytea_output == BYTEA_OUTPUT_ESCAPE)
{
- /* Print traditional escaped format */
- char *vp;
- int len;
- int i;
+ /* Print traditional escaped format */
+ char *vp;
+ int len;
+ int i;
- len = 1; /* empty string has 1 char */
- vp = VARDATA_ANY(vlena);
- for (i = VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(vlena); i != 0; i--, vp++)
- {
- if (*vp == '\\')
- len += 2;
- else if ((unsigned char) *vp < 0x20 || (unsigned char) *vp > 0x7e)
- len += 4;
- else
- len++;
- }
- rp = result = (char *) palloc(len);
- vp = VARDATA_ANY(vlena);
- for (i = VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(vlena); i != 0; i--, vp++)
- {
- if (*vp == '\\')
+ len = 1; /* empty string has 1 char */
+ vp = VARDATA_ANY(vlena);
+ for (i = VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(vlena); i != 0; i--, vp++)
{
- *rp++ = '\\';
- *rp++ = '\\';
+ if (*vp == '\\')
+ len += 2;
+ else if ((unsigned char) *vp < 0x20 || (unsigned char) *vp > 0x7e)
+ len += 4;
+ else
+ len++;
}
- else if ((unsigned char) *vp < 0x20 || (unsigned char) *vp > 0x7e)
+ rp = result = (char *) palloc(len);
+ vp = VARDATA_ANY(vlena);
+ for (i = VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(vlena); i != 0; i--, vp++)
{
- int val; /* holds unprintable chars */
-
- val = *vp;
- rp[0] = '\\';
- rp[3] = DIG(val & 07);
- val >>= 3;
- rp[2] = DIG(val & 07);
- val >>= 3;
- rp[1] = DIG(val & 03);
- rp += 4;
+ if (*vp == '\\')
+ {
+ *rp++ = '\\';
+ *rp++ = '\\';
+ }
+ else if ((unsigned char) *vp < 0x20 || (unsigned char) *vp > 0x7e)
+ {
+ int val; /* holds unprintable chars */
+
+ val = *vp;
+ rp[0] = '\\';
+ rp[3] = DIG(val & 07);
+ val >>= 3;
+ rp[2] = DIG(val & 07);
+ val >>= 3;
+ rp[1] = DIG(val & 03);
+ rp += 4;
+ }
+ else
+ *rp++ = *vp;
}
- else
- *rp++ = *vp;
- }
}
else
{
{
text *t1 = PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(0);
text *t2 = PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(1);
- int sp = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); /* substring start position */
- int sl = PG_GETARG_INT32(3); /* substring length */
+ int sp = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); /* substring start position */
+ int sl = PG_GETARG_INT32(3); /* substring length */
PG_RETURN_TEXT_P(text_overlay(t1, t2, sp, sl));
}
{
text *t1 = PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(0);
text *t2 = PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(1);
- int sp = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); /* substring start position */
+ int sp = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); /* substring start position */
int sl;
- sl = text_length(PointerGetDatum(t2)); /* defaults to length(t2) */
+ sl = text_length(PointerGetDatum(t2)); /* defaults to length(t2) */
PG_RETURN_TEXT_P(text_overlay(t1, t2, sp, sl));
}
int sp_pl_sl;
/*
- * Check for possible integer-overflow cases. For negative sp,
- * throw a "substring length" error because that's what should be
- * expected according to the spec's definition of OVERLAY().
+ * Check for possible integer-overflow cases. For negative sp, throw a
+ * "substring length" error because that's what should be expected
+ * according to the spec's definition of OVERLAY().
*/
if (sp <= 0)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_NUMERIC_VALUE_OUT_OF_RANGE),
errmsg("integer out of range")));
- s1 = text_substring(PointerGetDatum(t1), 1, sp-1, false);
+ s1 = text_substring(PointerGetDatum(t1), 1, sp - 1, false);
s2 = text_substring(PointerGetDatum(t1), sp_pl_sl, -1, true);
result = text_catenate(s1, t2);
result = text_catenate(result, s2);
if (length_not_specified)
{
/*
- * Not passed a length - DatumGetByteaPSlice() grabs everything to
- * the end of the string if we pass it a negative value for length.
+ * Not passed a length - DatumGetByteaPSlice() grabs everything to the
+ * end of the string if we pass it a negative value for length.
*/
L1 = -1;
}
/*
* If the start position is past the end of the string, SQL99 says to
- * return a zero-length string -- DatumGetByteaPSlice() will do that
- * for us. Convert to zero-based starting position
+ * return a zero-length string -- DatumGetByteaPSlice() will do that for
+ * us. Convert to zero-based starting position
*/
return DatumGetByteaPSlice(str, S1 - 1, L1);
}
{
bytea *t1 = PG_GETARG_BYTEA_PP(0);
bytea *t2 = PG_GETARG_BYTEA_PP(1);
- int sp = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); /* substring start position */
- int sl = PG_GETARG_INT32(3); /* substring length */
+ int sp = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); /* substring start position */
+ int sl = PG_GETARG_INT32(3); /* substring length */
PG_RETURN_BYTEA_P(bytea_overlay(t1, t2, sp, sl));
}
{
bytea *t1 = PG_GETARG_BYTEA_PP(0);
bytea *t2 = PG_GETARG_BYTEA_PP(1);
- int sp = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); /* substring start position */
+ int sp = PG_GETARG_INT32(2); /* substring start position */
int sl;
- sl = VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(t2); /* defaults to length(t2) */
+ sl = VARSIZE_ANY_EXHDR(t2); /* defaults to length(t2) */
PG_RETURN_BYTEA_P(bytea_overlay(t1, t2, sp, sl));
}
int sp_pl_sl;
/*
- * Check for possible integer-overflow cases. For negative sp,
- * throw a "substring length" error because that's what should be
- * expected according to the spec's definition of OVERLAY().
+ * Check for possible integer-overflow cases. For negative sp, throw a
+ * "substring length" error because that's what should be expected
+ * according to the spec's definition of OVERLAY().
*/
if (sp <= 0)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_NUMERIC_VALUE_OUT_OF_RANGE),
errmsg("integer out of range")));
- s1 = bytea_substring(PointerGetDatum(t1), 1, sp-1, false);
+ s1 = bytea_substring(PointerGetDatum(t1), 1, sp - 1, false);
s2 = bytea_substring(PointerGetDatum(t1), sp_pl_sl, -1, true);
result = bytea_catenate(s1, t2);
result = bytea_catenate(result, s2);
static StringInfo
makeStringAggState(FunctionCallInfo fcinfo)
{
- StringInfo state;
- MemoryContext aggcontext;
- MemoryContext oldcontext;
+ StringInfo state;
+ MemoryContext aggcontext;
+ MemoryContext oldcontext;
if (!AggCheckCallContext(fcinfo, &aggcontext))
{
Datum
string_agg_transfn(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- StringInfo state;
+ StringInfo state;
state = PG_ARGISNULL(0) ? NULL : (StringInfo) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0);
{
if (state == NULL)
state = makeStringAggState(fcinfo);
- appendStringInfoText(state, PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(1)); /* value */
+ appendStringInfoText(state, PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(1)); /* value */
}
/*
- * The transition type for string_agg() is declared to be "internal", which
- * is a pass-by-value type the same size as a pointer.
+ * The transition type for string_agg() is declared to be "internal",
+ * which is a pass-by-value type the same size as a pointer.
*/
PG_RETURN_POINTER(state);
}
-Datum
+Datum
string_agg_delim_transfn(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- StringInfo state;
+ StringInfo state;
state = PG_ARGISNULL(0) ? NULL : (StringInfo) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0);
else if (!PG_ARGISNULL(2))
appendStringInfoText(state, PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(2)); /* delimiter */
- appendStringInfoText(state, PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(1)); /* value */
+ appendStringInfoText(state, PG_GETARG_TEXT_PP(1)); /* value */
}
/*
- * The transition type for string_agg() is declared to be "internal", which
- * is a pass-by-value type the same size as a pointer.
+ * The transition type for string_agg() is declared to be "internal",
+ * which is a pass-by-value type the same size as a pointer.
*/
PG_RETURN_POINTER(state);
}
Datum
string_agg_finalfn(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- StringInfo state;
+ StringInfo state;
/* cannot be called directly because of internal-type argument */
Assert(AggCheckCallContext(fcinfo, NULL));
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/attoptcache.c,v 1.2 2010/02/14 18:42:17 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/attoptcache.c,v 1.3 2010/02/26 02:01:11 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* Flush all cache entries when pg_attribute is updated.
*
* When pg_attribute is updated, we must flush the cache entry at least
- * for that attribute. Currently, we just flush them all. Since attribute
+ * for that attribute. Currently, we just flush them all. Since attribute
* options are not currently used in performance-critical paths (such as
* query execution), this seems OK.
*/
static void
InitializeAttoptCache(void)
{
- HASHCTL ctl;
+ HASHCTL ctl;
/* Initialize the hash table. */
MemSet(&ctl, 0, sizeof(ctl));
ctl.hash = tag_hash;
AttoptCacheHash =
hash_create("Attopt cache", 256, &ctl,
- HASH_ELEM | HASH_FUNCTION);
+ HASH_ELEM | HASH_FUNCTION);
/* Make sure we've initialized CacheMemoryContext. */
if (!CacheMemoryContext)
{
AttoptCacheKey key;
AttoptCacheEntry *attopt;
- AttributeOpts *result;
+ AttributeOpts *result;
HeapTuple tp;
/* Find existing cache entry, if any. */
if (!AttoptCacheHash)
InitializeAttoptCache();
- memset(&key, 0, sizeof(key)); /* make sure any padding bits are unset */
+ memset(&key, 0, sizeof(key)); /* make sure any padding bits are
+ * unset */
key.attrelid = attrelid;
key.attnum = attnum;
attopt =
(AttoptCacheEntry *) hash_search(AttoptCacheHash,
- (void *) &key,
+ (void *) &key,
HASH_FIND,
NULL);
opts = NULL;
else
{
- Datum datum;
- bool isNull;
+ Datum datum;
+ bool isNull;
datum = SysCacheGetAttr(ATTNUM,
tp,
opts = NULL;
else
{
- bytea *bytea_opts = attribute_reloptions(datum, false);
+ bytea *bytea_opts = attribute_reloptions(datum, false);
+
opts = MemoryContextAlloc(CacheMemoryContext,
VARSIZE(bytea_opts));
memcpy(opts, bytea_opts, VARSIZE(bytea_opts));
}
/*
- * It's important to create the actual cache entry only after
- * reading pg_attribute, since the read could cause a cache flush.
+ * It's important to create the actual cache entry only after reading
+ * pg_attribute, since the read could cause a cache flush.
*/
attopt = (AttoptCacheEntry *) hash_search(AttoptCacheHash,
- (void *) &key,
- HASH_ENTER,
- NULL);
+ (void *) &key,
+ HASH_ENTER,
+ NULL);
attopt->opts = opts;
}
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/inval.c,v 1.97 2010/02/14 18:42:17 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/inval.c,v 1.98 2010/02/26 02:01:11 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static TransInvalidationInfo *transInvalInfo = NULL;
static SharedInvalidationMessage *SharedInvalidMessagesArray;
-static int numSharedInvalidMessagesArray;
-static int maxSharedInvalidMessagesArray;
+static int numSharedInvalidMessagesArray;
+static int maxSharedInvalidMessagesArray;
/*
* We're so close to EOXact that we now we're going to lose it anyhow.
*/
SharedInvalidMessagesArray = palloc(maxSharedInvalidMessagesArray
- * sizeof(SharedInvalidationMessage));
+ * sizeof(SharedInvalidationMessage));
}
if ((numSharedInvalidMessagesArray + n) > maxSharedInvalidMessagesArray)
maxSharedInvalidMessagesArray *= 2;
SharedInvalidMessagesArray = repalloc(SharedInvalidMessagesArray,
- maxSharedInvalidMessagesArray
- * sizeof(SharedInvalidationMessage));
+ maxSharedInvalidMessagesArray
+ * sizeof(SharedInvalidationMessage));
}
/*
* Append the next chunk onto the array
*/
memcpy(SharedInvalidMessagesArray + numSharedInvalidMessagesArray,
- msgs, n * sizeof(SharedInvalidationMessage));
+ msgs, n * sizeof(SharedInvalidationMessage));
numSharedInvalidMessagesArray += n;
}
/*
* Relcache init file invalidation requires processing both before and
- * after we send the SI messages. However, we need not do anything
- * unless we committed.
+ * after we send the SI messages. However, we need not do anything unless
+ * we committed.
*/
*RelcacheInitFileInval = transInvalInfo->RelcacheInitFileInval;
/*
- * Walk through TransInvalidationInfo to collect all the messages
- * into a single contiguous array of invalidation messages. It must
- * be contiguous so we can copy directly into WAL message. Maintain the
- * order that they would be processed in by AtEOXact_Inval(), to ensure
- * emulated behaviour in redo is as similar as possible to original.
- * We want the same bugs, if any, not new ones.
+ * Walk through TransInvalidationInfo to collect all the messages into a
+ * single contiguous array of invalidation messages. It must be contiguous
+ * so we can copy directly into WAL message. Maintain the order that they
+ * would be processed in by AtEOXact_Inval(), to ensure emulated behaviour
+ * in redo is as similar as possible to original. We want the same bugs,
+ * if any, not new ones.
*/
oldcontext = MemoryContextSwitchTo(CurTransactionContext);
return;
elog(trace_recovery(DEBUG4), "replaying commit with %d messages%s", nmsgs,
- (RelcacheInitFileInval ? " and relcache file invalidation" : ""));
+ (RelcacheInitFileInval ? " and relcache file invalidation" : ""));
if (RelcacheInitFileInval)
RecoveryRelationCacheInitFileInvalidate(dbid, tsid, true);
*
* Sending this type of invalidation msg forces other backends to close open
* smgr entries for the rel. This should be done to flush dangling open-file
- * references when the physical rel is being dropped or truncated. Because
+ * references when the physical rel is being dropped or truncated. Because
* these are nontransactional (i.e., not-rollback-able) operations, we just
* send the inval message immediately without any queuing.
*
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/lsyscache.c,v 1.167 2010/02/14 18:42:17 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/lsyscache.c,v 1.168 2010/02/26 02:01:11 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* Eventually, the index information should go through here, too.
{
op_negated = true;
ReleaseSysCacheList(catlist);
- catlist = SearchSysCacheList1(AMOPOPID,
+ catlist = SearchSysCacheList1(AMOPOPID,
ObjectIdGetDatum(op_negator));
}
}
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/plancache.c,v 1.34 2010/01/15 22:36:34 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/plancache.c,v 1.35 2010/02/26 02:01:11 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* CachedPlanSetParserHook: set up to use parser callback hooks
*
* Use this when a caller wants to manage parameter information via parser
- * callbacks rather than a fixed parameter-types list. Beware that the
+ * callbacks rather than a fixed parameter-types list. Beware that the
* information pointed to by parserSetupArg must be valid for as long as
* the cached plan might be replanned!
*/
if (plansource->fully_planned)
{
/*
- * Planner already extracted dependencies, we don't have to ...
- * except in the case of EXPLAIN. We assume here that EXPLAIN
- * can't appear in a list with other commands.
+ * Planner already extracted dependencies, we don't have to ... except
+ * in the case of EXPLAIN. We assume here that EXPLAIN can't appear
+ * in a list with other commands.
*/
plan->relationOids = plan->invalItems = NIL;
/*
* Generate plans for queries.
*
- * The planner may try to call SPI-using functions, which causes
- * a problem if we're already inside one. Rather than expect
- * all SPI-using code to do SPI_push whenever a replan could
- * happen, it seems best to take care of the case here.
+ * The planner may try to call SPI-using functions, which causes a
+ * problem if we're already inside one. Rather than expect all
+ * SPI-using code to do SPI_push whenever a replan could happen,
+ * it seems best to take care of the case here.
*/
- bool pushed;
+ bool pushed;
pushed = SPI_push_conditional();
* aborted transactions when we can't revalidate them (cf bug #5269).
* In general there is no point in invalidating utility statements
* since they have no plans anyway. So mark it dead only if it
- * contains at least one non-utility statement. (EXPLAIN counts as
- * a non-utility statement, though, since it contains an analyzed
- * query that might have dependencies.)
+ * contains at least one non-utility statement. (EXPLAIN counts as a
+ * non-utility statement, though, since it contains an analyzed query
+ * that might have dependencies.)
*/
if (plan->fully_planned)
{
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/relcache.c,v 1.307 2010/02/17 04:19:39 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/relcache.c,v 1.308 2010/02/26 02:01:11 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* honestly rather than just treating it as a Form_pg_index struct.
*/
tuple = SearchSysCache1(INDEXRELID,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(RelationGetRelid(relation)));
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(RelationGetRelid(relation)));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tuple))
elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for index %u",
RelationGetRelid(relation));
*
* The data we insert here is pretty incomplete/bogus, but it'll serve to
* get us launched. RelationCacheInitializePhase3() will read the real
- * data from pg_class and replace what we've done here. Note in particular
- * that relowner is left as zero; this cues RelationCacheInitializePhase3
- * that the real data isn't there yet.
+ * data from pg_class and replace what we've done here. Note in
+ * particular that relowner is left as zero; this cues
+ * RelationCacheInitializePhase3 that the real data isn't there yet.
*/
relation->rd_rel = (Form_pg_class) palloc0(CLASS_TUPLE_SIZE);
relation->rd_amcache = NULL;
/*
- * If it's a shared index, we might be called before backend startup
- * has finished selecting a database, in which case we have no way to
- * read pg_class yet. However, a shared index can never have any
- * significant schema updates, so it's okay to ignore the invalidation
- * signal. Just mark it valid and return without doing anything more.
+ * If it's a shared index, we might be called before backend startup has
+ * finished selecting a database, in which case we have no way to read
+ * pg_class yet. However, a shared index can never have any significant
+ * schema updates, so it's okay to ignore the invalidation signal. Just
+ * mark it valid and return without doing anything more.
*/
if (relation->rd_rel->relisshared && !criticalRelcachesBuilt)
{
Form_pg_index index;
tuple = SearchSysCache1(INDEXRELID,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(RelationGetRelid(relation)));
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(RelationGetRelid(relation)));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tuple))
elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for index %u",
RelationGetRelid(relation));
RelationCloseSmgr(relation);
/*
- * Free all the subsidiary data structures of the relcache entry,
- * then the entry itself.
+ * Free all the subsidiary data structures of the relcache entry, then the
+ * entry itself.
*/
if (relation->rd_rel)
pfree(relation->rd_rel);
else
{
/*
- * Our strategy for rebuilding an open relcache entry is to build
- * a new entry from scratch, swap its contents with the old entry,
- * and finally delete the new entry (along with any infrastructure
- * swapped over from the old entry). This is to avoid trouble in case
- * an error causes us to lose control partway through. The old entry
+ * Our strategy for rebuilding an open relcache entry is to build a
+ * new entry from scratch, swap its contents with the old entry, and
+ * finally delete the new entry (along with any infrastructure swapped
+ * over from the old entry). This is to avoid trouble in case an
+ * error causes us to lose control partway through. The old entry
* will still be marked !rd_isvalid, so we'll try to rebuild it again
- * on next access. Meanwhile it's not any less valid than it was
+ * on next access. Meanwhile it's not any less valid than it was
* before, so any code that might expect to continue accessing it
* isn't hurt by the rebuild failure. (Consider for example a
* subtransaction that ALTERs a table and then gets cancelled partway
* through the cache entry rebuild. The outer transaction should
* still see the not-modified cache entry as valid.) The worst
- * consequence of an error is leaking the necessarily-unreferenced
- * new entry, and this shouldn't happen often enough for that to be
- * a big problem.
+ * consequence of an error is leaking the necessarily-unreferenced new
+ * entry, and this shouldn't happen often enough for that to be a big
+ * problem.
*
* When rebuilding an open relcache entry, we must preserve ref count,
* rd_createSubid/rd_newRelfilenodeSubid, and rd_toastoid state. Also
/*
* Perform swapping of the relcache entry contents. Within this
- * process the old entry is momentarily invalid, so there *must*
- * be no possibility of CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS within this sequence.
- * Do it in all-in-line code for safety.
+ * process the old entry is momentarily invalid, so there *must* be no
+ * possibility of CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS within this sequence. Do it in
+ * all-in-line code for safety.
*
- * Since the vast majority of fields should be swapped, our method
- * is to swap the whole structures and then re-swap those few fields
- * we didn't want swapped.
+ * Since the vast majority of fields should be swapped, our method is
+ * to swap the whole structures and then re-swap those few fields we
+ * didn't want swapped.
*/
#define SWAPFIELD(fldtype, fldname) \
do { \
* Insert relation physical and logical identifiers (OIDs) into the right
* places. Note that the physical ID (relfilenode) is initially the same
* as the logical ID (OID); except that for a mapped relation, we set
- * relfilenode to zero and rely on RelationInitPhysicalAddr to consult
- * the map.
+ * relfilenode to zero and rely on RelationInitPhysicalAddr to consult the
+ * map.
*/
rel->rd_rel->relisshared = shared_relation;
rel->rd_rel->relistemp = rel->rd_istemp;
/*
* Now update the pg_class row. However, if we're dealing with a mapped
- * index, pg_class.relfilenode doesn't change; instead we have to send
- * the update to the relation mapper.
+ * index, pg_class.relfilenode doesn't change; instead we have to send the
+ * update to the relation mapper.
*/
if (RelationIsMapped(relation))
RelationMapUpdateMap(RelationGetRelid(relation),
classform->relfilenode = newrelfilenode;
/* These changes are safe even for a mapped relation */
- classform->relpages = 0; /* it's empty until further notice */
+ classform->relpages = 0; /* it's empty until further notice */
classform->reltuples = 0;
classform->relfrozenxid = freezeXid;
/*
* Mark the rel as having been given a new relfilenode in the current
- * (sub) transaction. This is a hint that can be used to optimize
- * later operations on the rel in the same transaction.
+ * (sub) transaction. This is a hint that can be used to optimize later
+ * operations on the rel in the same transaction.
*/
relation->rd_newRelfilenodeSubid = GetCurrentSubTransactionId();
/* ... and now we have eoxact cleanup work to do */
oldcxt = MemoryContextSwitchTo(CacheMemoryContext);
/*
- * Try to load the shared relcache cache file. If unsuccessful,
- * bootstrap the cache with a pre-made descriptor for pg_database.
+ * Try to load the shared relcache cache file. If unsuccessful, bootstrap
+ * the cache with a pre-made descriptor for pg_database.
*/
if (!load_relcache_init_file(true))
{
oldcxt = MemoryContextSwitchTo(CacheMemoryContext);
/*
- * Try to load the local relcache cache file. If unsuccessful,
- * bootstrap the cache with pre-made descriptors for the critical
- * "nailed-in" system catalogs.
+ * Try to load the local relcache cache file. If unsuccessful, bootstrap
+ * the cache with pre-made descriptors for the critical "nailed-in" system
+ * catalogs.
*/
if (IsBootstrapProcessingMode() ||
!load_relcache_init_file(false))
formrdesc("pg_type", TypeRelation_Rowtype_Id, false,
true, Natts_pg_type, Desc_pg_type);
-#define NUM_CRITICAL_LOCAL_RELS 4 /* fix if you change list above */
+#define NUM_CRITICAL_LOCAL_RELS 4 /* fix if you change list above */
}
MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcxt);
load_critical_index(TriggerRelidNameIndexId,
TriggerRelationId);
-#define NUM_CRITICAL_LOCAL_INDEXES 9 /* fix if you change list above */
+#define NUM_CRITICAL_LOCAL_INDEXES 9 /* fix if you change list above */
criticalRelcachesBuilt = true;
}
/*
* Process critical shared indexes too.
*
- * DatabaseNameIndexId isn't critical for relcache loading, but rather
- * for initial lookup of MyDatabaseId, without which we'll never find
- * any non-shared catalogs at all. Autovacuum calls InitPostgres with
- * a database OID, so it instead depends on DatabaseOidIndexId.
+ * DatabaseNameIndexId isn't critical for relcache loading, but rather for
+ * initial lookup of MyDatabaseId, without which we'll never find any
+ * non-shared catalogs at all. Autovacuum calls InitPostgres with a
+ * database OID, so it instead depends on DatabaseOidIndexId.
*/
if (!criticalSharedRelcachesBuilt)
{
load_critical_index(DatabaseOidIndexId,
DatabaseRelationId);
-#define NUM_CRITICAL_SHARED_INDEXES 2 /* fix if you change list above */
+#define NUM_CRITICAL_SHARED_INDEXES 2 /* fix if you change list above */
criticalSharedRelcachesBuilt = true;
}
* relcache entries have rules or triggers, load that info the hard way
* since it isn't recorded in the cache file.
*
- * Whenever we access the catalogs to read data, there is a possibility
- * of a shared-inval cache flush causing relcache entries to be removed.
+ * Whenever we access the catalogs to read data, there is a possibility of
+ * a shared-inval cache flush causing relcache entries to be removed.
* Since hash_seq_search only guarantees to still work after the *current*
* entry is removed, it's unsafe to continue the hashtable scan afterward.
* We handle this by restarting the scan from scratch after each access.
Form_pg_class relp;
htup = SearchSysCache1(RELOID,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(RelationGetRelid(relation)));
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(RelationGetRelid(relation)));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(htup))
elog(FATAL, "cache lookup failed for relation %u",
RelationGetRelid(relation));
/*
* Check the values in rd_att were set up correctly. (We cannot
- * just copy them over now: formrdesc must have set up the
- * rd_att data correctly to start with, because it may already
- * have been copied into one or more catcache entries.)
+ * just copy them over now: formrdesc must have set up the rd_att
+ * data correctly to start with, because it may already have been
+ * copied into one or more catcache entries.)
*/
Assert(relation->rd_att->tdtypeid == relp->reltype);
Assert(relation->rd_att->tdtypmod == -1);
Oid *funcs;
uint16 *strats;
Relation conrel;
- SysScanDesc conscan;
- ScanKeyData skey[1];
+ SysScanDesc conscan;
+ ScanKeyData skey[1];
HeapTuple htup;
bool found;
MemoryContext oldcxt;
}
/*
- * Search pg_constraint for the constraint associated with the index.
- * To make this not too painfully slow, we use the index on conrelid;
- * that will hold the parent relation's OID not the index's own OID.
+ * Search pg_constraint for the constraint associated with the index. To
+ * make this not too painfully slow, we use the index on conrelid; that
+ * will hold the parent relation's OID not the index's own OID.
*/
ScanKeyInit(&skey[0],
Anum_pg_constraint_conrelid,
while (HeapTupleIsValid(htup = systable_getnext(conscan)))
{
- Form_pg_constraint conform = (Form_pg_constraint) GETSTRUCT(htup);
+ Form_pg_constraint conform = (Form_pg_constraint) GETSTRUCT(htup);
Datum val;
bool isnull;
ArrayType *arr;
*
* We used to keep the init files across restarts, but that is unsafe in PITR
* scenarios, and even in simple crash-recovery cases there are windows for
- * the init files to become out-of-sync with the database. So now we just
+ * the init files to become out-of-sync with the database. So now we just
* remove them during startup and expect the first backend launch to rebuild
* them. Of course, this has to happen in each database of the cluster.
*/
* mapped catalogs can only be relocated by operations such as VACUUM FULL
* and CLUSTER, which make no transactionally-significant changes: it must be
* safe for the new file to replace the old, even if the transaction itself
- * aborts. An important factor here is that the indexes and toast table of
+ * aborts. An important factor here is that the indexes and toast table of
* a mapped catalog must also be mapped, so that the rewrites/relocations of
* all these files commit in a single map file update rather than being tied
* to transaction commit.
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/relmapper.c,v 1.2 2010/02/07 22:00:53 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/relmapper.c,v 1.3 2010/02/26 02:01:12 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* The map file is critical data: we have no automatic method for recovering
* from loss or corruption of it. We use a CRC so that we can detect
- * corruption. To minimize the risk of failed updates, the map file should
+ * corruption. To minimize the risk of failed updates, the map file should
* be kept to no more than one standard-size disk sector (ie 512 bytes),
* and we use overwrite-in-place rather than playing renaming games.
* The struct layout below is designed to occupy exactly 512 bytes, which
* might make filesystem updates a bit more efficient.
*
- * Entries in the mappings[] array are in no particular order. We could
+ * Entries in the mappings[] array are in no particular order. We could
* speed searching by insisting on OID order, but it really shouldn't be
* worth the trouble given the intended size of the mapping sets.
*/
#define RELMAPPER_FILENAME "pg_filenode.map"
-#define RELMAPPER_FILEMAGIC 0x592717 /* version ID value */
+#define RELMAPPER_FILEMAGIC 0x592717 /* version ID value */
-#define MAX_MAPPINGS 62 /* 62 * 8 + 16 = 512 */
+#define MAX_MAPPINGS 62 /* 62 * 8 + 16 = 512 */
typedef struct RelMapping
{
/*
* The currently known contents of the shared map file and our database's
- * local map file are stored here. These can be reloaded from disk
+ * local map file are stored here. These can be reloaded from disk
* immediately whenever we receive an update sinval message.
*/
static RelMapFile shared_map;
/* non-export function prototypes */
static void apply_map_update(RelMapFile *map, Oid relationId, Oid fileNode,
- bool add_okay);
+ bool add_okay);
static void merge_map_updates(RelMapFile *map, const RelMapFile *updates,
- bool add_okay);
+ bool add_okay);
static void load_relmap_file(bool shared);
static void write_relmap_file(bool shared, RelMapFile *newmap,
bool write_wal, bool send_sinval, bool preserve_files,
else
{
/*
- * We don't currently support map changes within subtransactions.
- * This could be done with more bookkeeping infrastructure, but it
- * doesn't presently seem worth it.
+ * We don't currently support map changes within subtransactions. This
+ * could be done with more bookkeeping infrastructure, but it doesn't
+ * presently seem worth it.
*/
if (GetCurrentTransactionNestLevel() > 1)
elog(ERROR, "cannot change relation mapping within subtransaction");
* RelationMapRemoveMapping
*
* Remove a relation's entry in the map. This is only allowed for "active"
- * (but not committed) local mappings. We need it so we can back out the
+ * (but not committed) local mappings. We need it so we can back out the
* entry for the transient target file when doing VACUUM FULL/CLUSTER on
* a mapped relation.
*/
* RelationMapInvalidate
*
* This routine is invoked for SI cache flush messages. We must re-read
- * the indicated map file. However, we might receive a SI message in a
+ * the indicated map file. However, we might receive a SI message in a
* process that hasn't yet, and might never, load the mapping files;
* for example the autovacuum launcher, which *must not* try to read
* a local map since it is attached to no particular database.
*
* During commit, this must be called as late as possible before the actual
* transaction commit, so as to minimize the window where the transaction
- * could still roll back after committing map changes. Although nothing
+ * could still roll back after committing map changes. Although nothing
* critically bad happens in such a case, we still would prefer that it
* not happen, since we'd possibly be losing useful updates to the relations'
* pg_class row(s).
/*
* CheckPointRelationMap
*
- * This is called during a checkpoint. It must ensure that any relation map
+ * This is called during a checkpoint. It must ensure that any relation map
* updates that were WAL-logged before the start of the checkpoint are
* securely flushed to disk and will not need to be replayed later. This
* seems unlikely to be a performance-critical issue, so we use a simple
/*
* Note: we could take RelationMappingLock in shared mode here, but it
* seems unnecessary since our read() should be atomic against any
- * concurrent updater's write(). If the file is updated shortly after
- * we look, the sinval signaling mechanism will make us re-read it
- * before we are able to access any relation that's affected by the
- * change.
+ * concurrent updater's write(). If the file is updated shortly after we
+ * look, the sinval signaling mechanism will make us re-read it before we
+ * are able to access any relation that's affected by the change.
*/
if (read(fd, map, sizeof(RelMapFile)) != sizeof(RelMapFile))
ereport(FATAL,
if (!EQ_CRC32(crc, map->crc))
ereport(FATAL,
- (errmsg("relation mapping file \"%s\" contains incorrect checksum",
- mapfilename)));
+ (errmsg("relation mapping file \"%s\" contains incorrect checksum",
+ mapfilename)));
}
/*
*
* Because this may be called during WAL replay when MyDatabaseId,
* DatabasePath, etc aren't valid, we require the caller to pass in suitable
- * values. The caller is also responsible for being sure no concurrent
+ * values. The caller is also responsible for being sure no concurrent
* map update could be happening.
*/
static void
* critical section, so that an open() failure need not force PANIC.
*
* Note: since we use BasicOpenFile, we are nominally responsible for
- * ensuring the fd is closed on error. In practice, this isn't important
- * because either an error happens inside the critical section, or we
- * are in bootstrap or WAL replay; so an error past this point is always
- * fatal anyway.
+ * ensuring the fd is closed on error. In practice, this isn't important
+ * because either an error happens inside the critical section, or we are
+ * in bootstrap or WAL replay; so an error past this point is always fatal
+ * anyway.
*/
if (shared)
{
CacheInvalidateRelmap(dbid);
/*
- * Make sure that the files listed in the map are not deleted if the
- * outer transaction aborts. This had better be within the critical
- * section too: it's not likely to fail, but if it did, we'd arrive
- * at transaction abort with the files still vulnerable. PANICing
- * will leave things in a good state on-disk.
+ * Make sure that the files listed in the map are not deleted if the outer
+ * transaction aborts. This had better be within the critical section
+ * too: it's not likely to fail, but if it did, we'd arrive at transaction
+ * abort with the files still vulnerable. PANICing will leave things in a
+ * good state on-disk.
*
* Note: we're cheating a little bit here by assuming that mapped files
* are either in pg_global or the database's default tablespace.
RelMapFile newmap;
/*
- * Anyone updating a relation's mapping info should take exclusive lock
- * on that rel and hold it until commit. This ensures that there will
- * not be concurrent updates on the same mapping value; but there could
- * easily be concurrent updates on different values in the same file.
- * We cover that by acquiring the RelationMappingLock, re-reading the
- * target file to ensure it's up to date, applying the updates, and
- * writing the data before releasing RelationMappingLock.
+ * Anyone updating a relation's mapping info should take exclusive lock on
+ * that rel and hold it until commit. This ensures that there will not be
+ * concurrent updates on the same mapping value; but there could easily be
+ * concurrent updates on different values in the same file. We cover that
+ * by acquiring the RelationMappingLock, re-reading the target file to
+ * ensure it's up to date, applying the updates, and writing the data
+ * before releasing RelationMappingLock.
*
* There is only one RelationMappingLock. In principle we could try to
* have one per mapping file, but it seems unlikely to be worth the
if (info == XLOG_RELMAP_UPDATE)
{
xl_relmap_update *xlrec = (xl_relmap_update *) XLogRecGetData(record);
- RelMapFile newmap;
- char *dbpath;
+ RelMapFile newmap;
+ char *dbpath;
if (xlrec->nbytes != sizeof(RelMapFile))
elog(PANIC, "relmap_redo: wrong size %u in relmap update record",
dbpath = GetDatabasePath(xlrec->dbid, xlrec->tsid);
/*
- * Write out the new map and send sinval, but of course don't
- * write a new WAL entry. There's no surrounding transaction
- * to tell to preserve files, either.
+ * Write out the new map and send sinval, but of course don't write a
+ * new WAL entry. There's no surrounding transaction to tell to
+ * preserve files, either.
*
* There shouldn't be anyone else updating relmaps during WAL replay,
- * so we don't bother to take the RelationMappingLock. We would
- * need to do so if load_relmap_file needed to interlock against
- * writers.
+ * so we don't bother to take the RelationMappingLock. We would need
+ * to do so if load_relmap_file needed to interlock against writers.
*/
write_relmap_file((xlrec->dbid == InvalidOid), &newmap,
false, true, false,
* Tablespace cache management.
*
* We cache the parsed version of spcoptions for each tablespace to avoid
- * needing to reparse on every lookup. Right now, there doesn't appear to
+ * needing to reparse on every lookup. Right now, there doesn't appear to
* be a measurable performance gain from doing this, but that might change
* in the future as we add more options.
*
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/spccache.c,v 1.5 2010/02/14 18:42:17 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/spccache.c,v 1.6 2010/02/26 02:01:12 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
InitializeTableSpaceCache(void)
{
- HASHCTL ctl;
+ HASHCTL ctl;
/* Initialize the hash table. */
MemSet(&ctl, 0, sizeof(ctl));
ctl.hash = oid_hash;
TableSpaceCacheHash =
hash_create("TableSpace cache", 16, &ctl,
- HASH_ELEM | HASH_FUNCTION);
+ HASH_ELEM | HASH_FUNCTION);
/* Make sure we've initialized CacheMemoryContext. */
if (!CacheMemoryContext)
return spc;
/*
- * Not found in TableSpace cache. Check catcache. If we don't find a
+ * Not found in TableSpace cache. Check catcache. If we don't find a
* valid HeapTuple, it must mean someone has managed to request tablespace
- * details for a non-existent tablespace. We'll just treat that case as if
- * no options were specified.
+ * details for a non-existent tablespace. We'll just treat that case as
+ * if no options were specified.
*/
tp = SearchSysCache1(TABLESPACEOID, ObjectIdGetDatum(spcid));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tp))
opts = NULL;
else
{
- Datum datum;
- bool isNull;
+ Datum datum;
+ bool isNull;
datum = SysCacheGetAttr(TABLESPACEOID,
tp,
opts = NULL;
else
{
- bytea *bytea_opts = tablespace_reloptions(datum, false);
+ bytea *bytea_opts = tablespace_reloptions(datum, false);
+
opts = MemoryContextAlloc(CacheMemoryContext, VARSIZE(bytea_opts));
memcpy(opts, bytea_opts, VARSIZE(bytea_opts));
}
}
/*
- * Now create the cache entry. It's important to do this only after
+ * Now create the cache entry. It's important to do this only after
* reading the pg_tablespace entry, since doing so could cause a cache
* flush.
*/
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/error/elog.c,v 1.222 2010/02/17 04:19:39 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/error/elog.c,v 1.223 2010/02/26 02:01:12 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#undef _
#define _(x) err_gettext(x)
-static const char *err_gettext(const char *str)
+static const char *
+err_gettext(const char *str)
/* This extension allows gcc to check the format string for consistency with
the supplied arguments. */
__attribute__((format_arg(1)));
static void
write_eventlog(int level, const char *line, int len)
{
- WCHAR *utf16;
- int eventlevel = EVENTLOG_ERROR_TYPE;
- static HANDLE evtHandle = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE;
+ WCHAR *utf16;
+ int eventlevel = EVENTLOG_ERROR_TYPE;
+ static HANDLE evtHandle = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE;
if (evtHandle == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE)
{
}
/*
- * Convert message to UTF16 text and write it with ReportEventW,
- * but fall-back into ReportEventA if conversion failed.
+ * Convert message to UTF16 text and write it with ReportEventW, but
+ * fall-back into ReportEventA if conversion failed.
*
- * Also verify that we are not on our way into error recursion trouble
- * due to error messages thrown deep inside pgwin32_toUTF16().
+ * Also verify that we are not on our way into error recursion trouble due
+ * to error messages thrown deep inside pgwin32_toUTF16().
*/
if (GetDatabaseEncoding() != GetPlatformEncoding() &&
!in_error_recursion_trouble())
if (utf16)
{
ReportEventW(evtHandle,
- eventlevel,
- 0,
- 0, /* All events are Id 0 */
- NULL,
- 1,
- 0,
- (LPCWSTR *) &utf16,
- NULL);
+ eventlevel,
+ 0,
+ 0, /* All events are Id 0 */
+ NULL,
+ 1,
+ 0,
+ (LPCWSTR *) &utf16,
+ NULL);
pfree(utf16);
return;
}
}
ReportEventA(evtHandle,
- eventlevel,
- 0,
- 0, /* All events are Id 0 */
- NULL,
- 1,
- 0,
- &line,
- NULL);
+ eventlevel,
+ 0,
+ 0, /* All events are Id 0 */
+ NULL,
+ 1,
+ 0,
+ &line,
+ NULL);
}
#endif /* WIN32 */
write_console(const char *line, int len)
{
#ifdef WIN32
+
/*
* WriteConsoleW() will fail of stdout is redirected, so just fall through
* to writing unconverted to the logfile in this case.
}
/*
- * In case WriteConsoleW() failed, fall back to writing the message
- * unconverted.
+ * In case WriteConsoleW() failed, fall back to writing the
+ * message unconverted.
*/
pfree(utf16);
}
}
#else
+
/*
- * Conversion on non-win32 platform is not implemented yet.
- * It requires non-throw version of pg_do_encoding_conversion(),
- * that converts unconvertable characters to '?' without errors.
+ * Conversion on non-win32 platform is not implemented yet. It requires
+ * non-throw version of pg_do_encoding_conversion(), that converts
+ * unconvertable characters to '?' without errors.
*/
#endif
write_stderr(const char *fmt,...)
{
va_list ap;
+
#ifdef WIN32
- char errbuf[2048]; /* Arbitrary size? */
+ char errbuf[2048]; /* Arbitrary size? */
#endif
fmt = _(fmt);
{
if (trace_level < LOG &&
trace_level >= trace_recovery_messages)
- return LOG;
+ return LOG;
return trace_level;
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/fmgr/dfmgr.c,v 1.101 2010/01/02 16:57:56 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/fmgr/dfmgr.c,v 1.102 2010/02/26 02:01:13 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
else
prv = file_scanner;
}
-#endif /* NOT_USED */
+#endif /* NOT_USED */
}
static bool
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/fmgr/fmgr.c,v 1.130 2010/02/14 18:42:17 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/fmgr/fmgr.c,v 1.131 2010/02/26 02:01:13 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
if (OidIsValid(fcache->userid))
SetUserIdAndSecContext(fcache->userid,
- save_sec_context | SECURITY_LOCAL_USERID_CHANGE);
+ save_sec_context | SECURITY_LOCAL_USERID_CHANGE);
if (fcache->proconfig)
{
* Copyright (c) 2002-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/fmgr/funcapi.c,v 1.48 2010/02/14 18:42:17 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/fmgr/funcapi.c,v 1.49 2010/02/26 02:01:13 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* We expect the arrays to be 1-D arrays of the right types; verify that.
- * For proargmodes, we don't need to use deconstruct_array()
- * since the array data is just going to look like a C array of values.
+ * For proargmodes, we don't need to use deconstruct_array() since the
+ * array data is just going to look like a C array of values.
*/
arr = DatumGetArrayTypeP(proargnames); /* ensure not toasted */
if (ARR_NDIM(arr) != 1 ||
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/hash/pg_crc.c,v 1.23 2010/01/07 04:53:34 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/hash/pg_crc.c,v 1.24 2010/02/26 02:01:13 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* (ECMA-182, available from http://www.ecma.ch/ecma1/STAND/ECMA-182.HTM)
*/
-#if SIZEOF_VOID_P < 8 /* this test must match the one in pg_crc.h */
+#if SIZEOF_VOID_P < 8 /* this test must match the one in pg_crc.h */
const uint32 pg_crc64_table0[256] = {
0x00000000, 0xA9EA3693,
0x5DEDC41A, 0x1F1D25F1,
0xD80C07CD, 0x9AFCE626
};
-
#else /* use int64 implementation */
const uint64 pg_crc64_table[256] = {
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/init/miscinit.c,v 1.182 2010/02/14 18:42:17 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/init/miscinit.c,v 1.183 2010/02/26 02:01:13 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* Currently there are two valid bits in SecurityRestrictionContext:
*
* SECURITY_LOCAL_USERID_CHANGE indicates that we are inside an operation
- * that is temporarily changing CurrentUserId via these functions. This is
+ * that is temporarily changing CurrentUserId via these functions. This is
* needed to indicate that the actual value of CurrentUserId is not in sync
* with guc.c's internal state, so SET ROLE has to be disallowed.
*
/*
* These are obsolete versions of Get/SetUserIdAndSecContext that are
* only provided for bug-compatibility with some rather dubious code in
- * pljava. We allow the userid to be set, but only when not inside a
+ * pljava. We allow the userid to be set, but only when not inside a
* security restriction context.
*/
void
#ifndef WIN32
my_p_pid = getppid();
#else
+
/*
- * Windows hasn't got getppid(), but doesn't need it since it's not
- * using real kill() either...
+ * Windows hasn't got getppid(), but doesn't need it since it's not using
+ * real kill() either...
*/
my_p_pid = 0;
#endif
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/init/postinit.c,v 1.203 2010/02/14 18:42:18 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/init/postinit.c,v 1.204 2010/02/26 02:01:13 momjian Exp $
*
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
* GetDatabaseTuple -- fetch the pg_database row for a database
*
* This is used during backend startup when we don't yet have any access to
- * system catalogs in general. In the worst case, we can seqscan pg_database
+ * system catalogs in general. In the worst case, we can seqscan pg_database
* using nothing but the hard-wired descriptor that relcache.c creates for
* pg_database. In more typical cases, relcache.c was able to load
* descriptors for both pg_database and its indexes from the shared relcache
CStringGetDatum(dbname));
/*
- * Open pg_database and fetch a tuple. Force heap scan if we haven't yet
+ * Open pg_database and fetch a tuple. Force heap scan if we haven't yet
* built the critical shared relcache entries (i.e., we're starting up
* without a shared relcache cache file).
*/
ObjectIdGetDatum(dboid));
/*
- * Open pg_database and fetch a tuple. Force heap scan if we haven't yet
+ * Open pg_database and fetch a tuple. Force heap scan if we haven't yet
* built the critical shared relcache entries (i.e., we're starting up
* without a shared relcache cache file).
*/
/*
* In EXEC_BACKEND case, we didn't inherit the contents of pg_hba.conf
- * etcetera from the postmaster, and have to load them ourselves. Note
- * we are loading them into the startup transaction's memory context,
- * not PostmasterContext, but that shouldn't matter.
+ * etcetera from the postmaster, and have to load them ourselves. Note we
+ * are loading them into the startup transaction's memory context, not
+ * PostmasterContext, but that shouldn't matter.
*
* FIXME: [fork/exec] Ugh. Is there a way around this overhead?
*/
/*
* pg_split_opts -- split a string of options and append it to an argv array
*
- * NB: the input string is destructively modified! Also, caller is responsible
+ * NB: the input string is destructively modified! Also, caller is responsible
* for ensuring the argv array is large enough. The maximum possible number
* of arguments added by this routine is (strlen(optstr) + 1) / 2.
*
InitBufferPoolBackend();
/*
- * Initialize local process's access to XLOG, if appropriate. In bootstrap
- * case we skip this since StartupXLOG() was run instead.
+ * Initialize local process's access to XLOG, if appropriate. In
+ * bootstrap case we skip this since StartupXLOG() was run instead.
*/
if (!bootstrap)
(void) RecoveryInProgress();
pgstat_initialize();
/*
- * Load relcache entries for the shared system catalogs. This must
- * create at least an entry for pg_database.
+ * Load relcache entries for the shared system catalogs. This must create
+ * at least an entry for pg_database.
*/
RelationCacheInitializePhase2();
/*
* Start a new transaction here before first access to db, and get a
* snapshot. We don't have a use for the snapshot itself, but we're
- * interested in the secondary effect that it sets RecentGlobalXmin.
- * (This is critical for anything that reads heap pages, because HOT
- * may decide to prune them even if the process doesn't attempt to
- * modify any tuples.)
+ * interested in the secondary effect that it sets RecentGlobalXmin. (This
+ * is critical for anything that reads heap pages, because HOT may decide
+ * to prune them even if the process doesn't attempt to modify any
+ * tuples.)
*/
if (!bootstrap)
{
}
else if (in_dbname != NULL)
{
- HeapTuple tuple;
+ HeapTuple tuple;
Form_pg_database dbform;
tuple = GetDatabaseTuple(in_dbname);
else
{
/* caller specified database by OID */
- HeapTuple tuple;
+ HeapTuple tuple;
Form_pg_database dbform;
tuple = GetDatabaseTupleByOid(dboid);
/*
* Now, take a writer's lock on the database we are trying to connect to.
- * If there is a concurrently running DROP DATABASE on that database,
- * this will block us until it finishes (and has committed its update of
+ * If there is a concurrently running DROP DATABASE on that database, this
+ * will block us until it finishes (and has committed its update of
* pg_database).
*
* Note that the lock is not held long, only until the end of this startup
*/
if (!bootstrap && !am_walsender)
{
- HeapTuple tuple;
+ HeapTuple tuple;
tuple = GetDatabaseTuple(dbname);
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(tuple) ||
process_settings(MyDatabaseId, GetSessionUserId());
/*
- * Re-read the pg_database row for our database, check permissions and
- * set up database-specific GUC settings. We can't do this until all the
+ * Re-read the pg_database row for our database, check permissions and set
+ * up database-specific GUC settings. We can't do this until all the
* database-access infrastructure is up. (Also, it wants to know if the
* user is a superuser, so the above stuff has to happen first.)
*/
/*
* Now process any command-line switches that were included in the startup
- * packet, if we are in a regular backend. We couldn't do this before
+ * packet, if we are in a regular backend. We couldn't do this before
* because we didn't know if client is a superuser.
*/
gucctx = am_superuser ? PGC_SUSET : PGC_BACKEND;
static void
process_settings(Oid databaseid, Oid roleid)
{
- Relation relsetting;
+ Relation relsetting;
if (!IsUnderPostmaster)
return;
*
* Tatsuo Ishii
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/mb/mbutils.c,v 1.93 2010/02/14 18:42:18 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/mb/mbutils.c,v 1.94 2010/02/26 02:01:14 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "postgres.h"
Datum
pg_encoding_max_length_sql(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS)
{
- int encoding = PG_GETARG_INT32(0);
+ int encoding = PG_GETARG_INT32(0);
if (PG_VALID_ENCODING(encoding))
PG_RETURN_INT32(pg_wchar_table[encoding].maxmblen);
if (PlatformEncoding == NULL)
{
/* try to determine encoding of server's environment locale */
- int encoding = pg_get_encoding_from_locale("");
+ int encoding = pg_get_encoding_from_locale("");
if (encoding < 0)
encoding = PG_SQL_ASCII;
{
utf16 = (WCHAR *) palloc(sizeof(WCHAR) * (len + 1));
dstlen = MultiByteToWideChar(codepage, 0, str, len, utf16, len);
- utf16[dstlen] = L'\0';
+ utf16[dstlen] = L '\0';
}
else
{
utf16 = (WCHAR *) palloc(sizeof(WCHAR) * (len + 1));
dstlen = MultiByteToWideChar(CP_UTF8, 0, utf8, len, utf16, len);
- utf16[dstlen] = L'\0';
+ utf16[dstlen] = L '\0';
if (utf8 != str)
pfree(utf8);
if (dstlen == 0 && len > 0)
{
pfree(utf16);
- return NULL; /* error */
+ return NULL; /* error */
}
if (utf16len)
* Written by Peter Eisentraut <peter_e@gmx.net>.
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c,v 1.542 2010/02/25 13:26:15 mha Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c,v 1.543 2010/02/26 02:01:14 momjian Exp $
*
*--------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern int vacuum_defer_cleanup_age;
extern int ssl_renegotiation_limit;
-int trace_recovery_messages = LOG;
+int trace_recovery_messages = LOG;
#ifdef TRACE_SORT
extern bool trace_sort;
{
{"recovery_connections", PGC_POSTMASTER, WAL_SETTINGS,
gettext_noop("During recovery, allows connections and queries. "
- " During normal running, causes additional info to be written"
- " to WAL to enable hot standby mode on WAL standby nodes."),
+ " During normal running, causes additional info to be written"
+ " to WAL to enable hot standby mode on WAL standby nodes."),
NULL
},
&XLogRequestRecoveryConnections,
{"lo_compat_privileges", PGC_SUSET, COMPAT_OPTIONS_PREVIOUS,
gettext_noop("Enables backward compatibility mode for privilege checks on large objects"),
gettext_noop("Skips privilege checks when reading or modifying large objects, "
- "for compatibility with PostgreSQL releases prior to 9.0.")
+ "for compatibility with PostgreSQL releases prior to 9.0.")
},
&lo_compat_privileges,
false, NULL, NULL
{
{"application_name", PGC_USERSET, LOGGING,
- gettext_noop("Sets the application name to be reported in statistics and logs."),
- NULL,
- GUC_IS_NAME | GUC_REPORT | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
+ gettext_noop("Sets the application name to be reported in statistics and logs."),
+ NULL,
+ GUC_IS_NAME | GUC_REPORT | GUC_NOT_IN_SAMPLE
},
&application_name,
"", assign_application_name, NULL
if (changeVal && !is_newvalue_equal(record, value))
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_CANT_CHANGE_RUNTIME_PARAM),
- errmsg("parameter \"%s\" cannot be changed without restarting the server",
- name)));
+ errmsg("parameter \"%s\" cannot be changed without restarting the server",
+ name)));
return true;
}
if (context != PGC_POSTMASTER)
{
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_CANT_CHANGE_RUNTIME_PARAM),
- errmsg("parameter \"%s\" cannot be changed without restarting the server",
- name)));
+ errmsg("parameter \"%s\" cannot be changed without restarting the server",
+ name)));
return false;
}
break;
/*
* Disallow changing GUC_NOT_WHILE_SEC_REST values if we are inside a
- * security restriction context. We can reject this regardless of
- * the GUC context or source, mainly because sources that it might be
- * reasonable to override for won't be seen while inside a function.
+ * security restriction context. We can reject this regardless of the GUC
+ * context or source, mainly because sources that it might be reasonable
+ * to override for won't be seen while inside a function.
*
* Note: variables marked GUC_NOT_WHILE_SEC_REST should usually be marked
* GUC_NO_RESET_ALL as well, because ResetAllOptions() doesn't check this.
* An exception might be made if the reset value is assumed to be "safe".
*
* Note: this flag is currently used for "session_authorization" and
- * "role". We need to prohibit changing these inside a local userid
+ * "role". We need to prohibit changing these inside a local userid
* context because when we exit it, GUC won't be notified, leaving things
* out of sync. (This could be fixed by forcing a new GUC nesting level,
- * but that would change behavior in possibly-undesirable ways.) Also,
- * we prohibit changing these in a security-restricted operation because
+ * but that would change behavior in possibly-undesirable ways.) Also, we
+ * prohibit changing these in a security-restricted operation because
* otherwise RESET could be used to regain the session user's privileges.
*/
if (record->flags & GUC_NOT_WHILE_SEC_REST)
if (InLocalUserIdChange())
{
/*
- * Phrasing of this error message is historical, but it's the
- * most common case.
+ * Phrasing of this error message is historical, but it's the most
+ * common case.
*/
ereport(elevel,
(errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE),
int i;
TupOutputState *tstate;
TupleDesc tupdesc;
- Datum values[3];
- bool isnull[3] = { false, false, false };
+ Datum values[3];
+ bool isnull[3] = {false, false, false};
/* need a tuple descriptor representing three TEXT columns */
tupdesc = CreateTemplateTupleDesc(3, false);
for (i = 0; i < num_guc_variables; i++)
{
struct config_generic *conf = guc_variables[i];
- char *setting;
+ char *setting;
if ((conf->flags & GUC_NO_SHOW_ALL) ||
((conf->flags & GUC_SUPERUSER_ONLY) && !am_superuser))
{
ereport(GUC_complaint_elevel(source),
(errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_PARAMETER_VALUE),
- errmsg("cannot set transaction read-write mode during recovery")));
+ errmsg("cannot set transaction read-write mode during recovery")));
/* source == PGC_S_OVERRIDE means do it anyway, eg at xact abort */
if (source != PGC_S_OVERRIDE)
return false;
*
* Red-black trees are a type of balanced binary tree wherein (1) any child of
* a red node is always black, and (2) every path from root to leaf traverses
- * an equal number of black nodes. From these properties, it follows that the
+ * an equal number of black nodes. From these properties, it follows that the
* longest path from root to leaf is only about twice as long as the shortest,
* so lookups are guaranteed to run in O(lg n) time.
*
* Copyright (c) 1996-2009, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/misc/rbtree.c,v 1.2 2010/02/11 22:17:27 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/misc/rbtree.c,v 1.3 2010/02/26 02:01:14 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* Values for RBNode->iteratorState
*/
-#define InitialState (0)
+#define InitialState (0)
#define FirstStepDone (1)
#define SecondStepDone (2)
#define ThirdStepDone (3)
typedef struct RBNode
{
uint32 iteratorState:2,
- color: 1 ,
- unused: 29;
+ color: 1,
+ unused:29;
struct RBNode *left;
struct RBNode *right;
struct RBNode *parent;
void *data;
-} RBNode;
+} RBNode;
struct RBTree
{
RBTree *
rb_create(rb_comparator comparator, rb_appendator appendator,
- rb_freefunc freefunc, void *arg)
+ rb_freefunc freefunc, void *arg)
{
RBTree *tree = palloc(sizeof(RBTree));
tree->comparator = comparator;
tree->appendator = appendator;
tree->freefunc = freefunc;
+
tree->arg = arg;
return tree;
/*
* Maintain Red-Black tree balance after inserting node x.
*
- * The newly inserted node is always initially marked red. That may lead to
+ * The newly inserted node is always initially marked red. That may lead to
* a situation where a red node has a red child, which is prohibited. We can
* always fix the problem by a series of color changes and/or "rotations",
- * which move the problem progressively higher up in the tree. If one of the
+ * which move the problem progressively higher up in the tree. If one of the
* two red nodes is the root, we can always fix the problem by changing the
* root from red to black.
*
rb_insert_fixup(RBTree *rb, RBNode *x)
{
/*
- * x is always a red node. Initially, it is the newly inserted node.
- * Each iteration of this loop moves it higher up in the tree.
+ * x is always a red node. Initially, it is the newly inserted node. Each
+ * iteration of this loop moves it higher up in the tree.
*/
while (x != rb->root && x->parent->color == RBRED)
{
* grandparent still has a problem.
*
* If the uncle is black, we will perform one or two "rotations" to
- * balance the tree. Either x or x->parent will take the grandparent's
- * position in the tree and recolored black, and the original
- * grandparent will be recolored red and become a child of that node.
- * This always leaves us with a valid red-black tree, so the loop
- * will terminate.
+ * balance the tree. Either x or x->parent will take the
+ * grandparent's position in the tree and recolored black, and the
+ * original grandparent will be recolored red and become a child of
+ * that node. This always leaves us with a valid red-black tree, so
+ * the loop will terminate.
*/
if (x->parent == x->parent->parent->left)
{
x->parent->color = RBBLACK;
y->color = RBBLACK;
x->parent->parent->color = RBRED;
+
x = x->parent->parent;
}
else
/* recolor and rotate */
x->parent->color = RBBLACK;
x->parent->parent->color = RBRED;
+
rb_rotate_right(rb, x->parent->parent);
}
}
x->parent->color = RBBLACK;
y->color = RBBLACK;
x->parent->parent->color = RBRED;
+
x = x->parent->parent;
}
else
}
x->parent->color = RBBLACK;
x->parent->parent->color = RBRED;
+
rb_rotate_left(rb, x->parent->parent);
}
}
x->left = RBNIL;
x->right = RBNIL;
x->color = RBRED;
+
x->iteratorState = InitialState;
/* insert node in tree */
while (x != rb->root && x->color == RBBLACK)
{
/*
- * Left and right cases are symmetric. Any nodes that are children
- * of x have a black-height one less than the remainder of the nodes
- * in the tree. We rotate and recolor nodes to move the problem up
- * the tree: at some stage we'll either fix the problem, or reach the
- * root (where the black-height is allowed to decrease).
+ * Left and right cases are symmetric. Any nodes that are children of
+ * x have a black-height one less than the remainder of the nodes in
+ * the tree. We rotate and recolor nodes to move the problem up the
+ * tree: at some stage we'll either fix the problem, or reach the root
+ * (where the black-height is allowed to decrease).
*/
if (x == x->parent->left)
{
{
w->color = RBBLACK;
x->parent->color = RBRED;
+
rb_rotate_left(rb, x->parent);
w = x->parent->right;
}
if (w->left->color == RBBLACK && w->right->color == RBBLACK)
{
w->color = RBRED;
+
x = x->parent;
}
else
{
w->left->color = RBBLACK;
w->color = RBRED;
+
rb_rotate_right(rb, w);
w = x->parent->right;
}
w->color = x->parent->color;
x->parent->color = RBBLACK;
w->right->color = RBBLACK;
+
rb_rotate_left(rb, x->parent);
- x = rb->root; /* Arrange for loop to terminate. */
+ x = rb->root; /* Arrange for loop to terminate. */
}
}
else
{
w->color = RBBLACK;
x->parent->color = RBRED;
+
rb_rotate_right(rb, x->parent);
w = x->parent->left;
}
if (w->right->color == RBBLACK && w->left->color == RBBLACK)
{
w->color = RBRED;
+
x = x->parent;
}
else
{
w->right->color = RBBLACK;
w->color = RBRED;
+
rb_rotate_left(rb, w);
w = x->parent->left;
}
w->color = x->parent->color;
x->parent->color = RBBLACK;
w->left->color = RBBLACK;
+
rb_rotate_right(rb, x->parent);
- x = rb->root; /* Arrange for loop to terminate. */
+ x = rb->root; /* Arrange for loop to terminate. */
}
}
}
}
/*
- * If we removed the tree successor of z rather than z itself, then
- * attach the data for the removed node to the one we were supposed to
- * remove.
+ * If we removed the tree successor of z rather than z itself, then attach
+ * the data for the removed node to the one we were supposed to remove.
*/
if (y != z)
z->data = y->data;
{
/* found node to delete */
if (rb->freefunc)
- rb->freefunc(node->data);
+ rb->freefunc (node->data);
+
node->data = NULL;
rb_delete_node(rb, node);
return;
switch (ctrl)
{
- case LeftRightWalk: /* visit left, then self, then right */
+ case LeftRightWalk: /* visit left, then self, then right */
iterator->iterate = rb_left_right_iterator;
break;
- case RightLeftWalk: /* visit right, then self, then left */
+ case RightLeftWalk: /* visit right, then self, then left */
iterator->iterate = rb_right_left_iterator;
break;
- case DirectWalk: /* visit self, then left, then right */
+ case DirectWalk: /* visit self, then left, then right */
iterator->iterate = rb_direct_iterator;
break;
- case InvertedWalk: /* visit left, then right, then self */
+ case InvertedWalk: /* visit left, then right, then self */
iterator->iterate = rb_inverted_iterator;
break;
default:
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/mmgr/aset.c,v 1.82 2010/01/02 16:57:58 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/mmgr/aset.c,v 1.83 2010/02/26 02:01:14 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTE:
* This is a new (Feb. 05, 1999) implementation of the allocation set
tsize = (size - 1) >> ALLOC_MINBITS;
/*
- * At this point we need to obtain log2(tsize)+1, ie, the number
- * of not-all-zero bits at the right. We used to do this with a
- * shift-and-count loop, but this function is enough of a hotspot
- * to justify micro-optimization effort. The best approach seems
- * to be to use a lookup table. Note that this code assumes that
- * ALLOCSET_NUM_FREELISTS <= 17, since we only cope with two bytes
- * of the tsize value.
+ * At this point we need to obtain log2(tsize)+1, ie, the number of
+ * not-all-zero bits at the right. We used to do this with a
+ * shift-and-count loop, but this function is enough of a hotspot to
+ * justify micro-optimization effort. The best approach seems to be
+ * to use a lookup table. Note that this code assumes that
+ * ALLOCSET_NUM_FREELISTS <= 17, since we only cope with two bytes of
+ * the tsize value.
*/
t = tsize >> 8;
idx = t ? LogTable256[t] + 8 : LogTable256[tsize];
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/mmgr/portalmem.c,v 1.117 2010/02/18 03:06:46 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/mmgr/portalmem.c,v 1.118 2010/02/26 02:01:14 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
portal->cplan = NULL;
/*
- * We must also clear portal->stmts which is now a dangling
- * reference to the cached plan's plan list. This protects any
- * code that might try to examine the Portal later.
+ * We must also clear portal->stmts which is now a dangling reference
+ * to the cached plan's plan list. This protects any code that might
+ * try to examine the Portal later.
*/
portal->stmts = NIL;
}
/*
* Any resources belonging to the portal will be released in the
- * upcoming transaction-wide cleanup; they will be gone before we
- * run PortalDrop.
+ * upcoming transaction-wide cleanup; they will be gone before we run
+ * PortalDrop.
*/
portal->resowner = NULL;
/*
- * Although we can't delete the portal data structure proper, we
- * can release any memory in subsidiary contexts, such as executor
- * state. The cleanup hook was the last thing that might have
- * needed data there.
+ * Although we can't delete the portal data structure proper, we can
+ * release any memory in subsidiary contexts, such as executor state.
+ * The cleanup hook was the last thing that might have needed data
+ * there.
*/
MemoryContextDeleteChildren(PortalGetHeapMemory(portal));
}
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/sort/tuplesort.c,v 1.94 2010/01/02 16:57:58 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/sort/tuplesort.c,v 1.95 2010/02/26 02:01:15 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
*/
if (state->enforceUnique && !equal_hasnull && tuple1 != tuple2)
{
- Datum values[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
- bool isnull[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
+ Datum values[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
+ bool isnull[INDEX_MAX_KEYS];
index_deform_tuple(tuple1, tupDes, values, isnull);
ereport(ERROR,
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/sort/tuplestore.c,v 1.50 2010/01/02 16:57:58 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/sort/tuplestore.c,v 1.51 2010/02/26 02:01:15 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
tuplestore_puttuple_common(state, (void *) tuple);
- MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcxt);
+ MemoryContextSwitchTo(oldcxt);
}
static void
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/time/snapmgr.c,v 1.14 2010/01/02 16:57:58 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/time/snapmgr.c,v 1.15 2010/02/26 02:01:15 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* Setup subXID array. Don't bother to copy it if it had overflowed,
- * though, because it's not used anywhere in that case. Except if it's
- * a snapshot taken during recovery; all the top-level XIDs are in subxip
- * as well in that case, so we mustn't lose them.
+ * though, because it's not used anywhere in that case. Except if it's a
+ * snapshot taken during recovery; all the top-level XIDs are in subxip as
+ * well in that case, so we mustn't lose them.
*/
if (snapshot->subxcnt > 0 &&
(!snapshot->suboverflowed || snapshot->takenDuringRecovery))
*
* If the passed snapshot is a statically-allocated one, or it is possibly
* subject to a future command counter update, create a new long-lived copy
- * with active refcount=1. Otherwise, only increment the refcount.
+ * with active refcount=1. Otherwise, only increment the refcount.
*/
void
PushActiveSnapshot(Snapshot snap)
newactive = MemoryContextAlloc(TopTransactionContext, sizeof(ActiveSnapshotElt));
/*
- * Checking SecondarySnapshot is probably useless here, but it seems better
- * to be sure.
+ * Checking SecondarySnapshot is probably useless here, but it seems
+ * better to be sure.
*/
if (snap == CurrentSnapshot || snap == SecondarySnapshot || !snap->copied)
newactive->as_snap = CopySnapshot(snap);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/time/tqual.c,v 1.117 2010/02/08 14:10:21 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/time/tqual.c,v 1.118 2010/02/26 02:01:15 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* Also, if we are cleaning up HEAP_MOVED_IN or HEAP_MOVED_OFF entries, then
* we can always set the hint bits, since pre-9.0 VACUUM FULL always used
* synchronous commits and didn't move tuples that weren't previously
- * hinted. (This is not known by this subroutine, but is applied by its
+ * hinted. (This is not known by this subroutine, but is applied by its
* callers.) Note: old-style VACUUM FULL is gone, but we have to keep this
* module's support for MOVED_OFF/MOVED_IN flag bits for as long as we
* support in-place update from pre-9.0 databases.
return true;
/*
- * Snapshot information is stored slightly differently in snapshots
- * taken during recovery.
+ * Snapshot information is stored slightly differently in snapshots taken
+ * during recovery.
*/
if (!snapshot->takenDuringRecovery)
{
/*
- * If the snapshot contains full subxact data, the fastest way to check
- * things is just to compare the given XID against both subxact XIDs and
- * top-level XIDs. If the snapshot overflowed, we have to use pg_subtrans
- * to convert a subxact XID to its parent XID, but then we need only look
- * at top-level XIDs not subxacts.
+ * If the snapshot contains full subxact data, the fastest way to
+ * check things is just to compare the given XID against both subxact
+ * XIDs and top-level XIDs. If the snapshot overflowed, we have to
+ * use pg_subtrans to convert a subxact XID to its parent XID, but
+ * then we need only look at top-level XIDs not subxacts.
*/
if (!snapshot->suboverflowed)
{
xid = SubTransGetTopmostTransaction(xid);
/*
- * If xid was indeed a subxact, we might now have an xid < xmin, so
- * recheck to avoid an array scan. No point in rechecking xmax.
+ * If xid was indeed a subxact, we might now have an xid < xmin,
+ * so recheck to avoid an array scan. No point in rechecking
+ * xmax.
*/
if (TransactionIdPrecedes(xid, snapshot->xmin))
return false;
int32 j;
/*
- * In recovery we store all xids in the subxact array because it
- * is by far the bigger array, and we mostly don't know which xids
- * are top-level and which are subxacts. The xip array is empty.
+ * In recovery we store all xids in the subxact array because it is by
+ * far the bigger array, and we mostly don't know which xids are
+ * top-level and which are subxacts. The xip array is empty.
*
* We start by searching subtrans, if we overflowed.
*/
xid = SubTransGetTopmostTransaction(xid);
/*
- * If xid was indeed a subxact, we might now have an xid < xmin, so
- * recheck to avoid an array scan. No point in rechecking xmax.
+ * If xid was indeed a subxact, we might now have an xid < xmin,
+ * so recheck to avoid an array scan. No point in rechecking
+ * xmax.
*/
if (TransactionIdPrecedes(xid, snapshot->xmin))
return false;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
* Portions taken from FreeBSD.
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/initdb/initdb.c,v 1.185 2010/02/16 22:34:50 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/initdb/initdb.c,v 1.186 2010/02/26 02:01:15 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
if (err != 0 ||
getaddrinfo("::1", NULL, &hints, &gai_result) != 0)
conflines = replace_token(conflines,
- "host all all ::1",
- "#host all all ::1");
+ "host all all ::1",
+ "#host all all ::1");
}
#else /* !HAVE_IPV6 */
/* If we didn't compile IPV6 support at all, always comment it out */
}
#ifndef __CYGWIN__
- AddUserToTokenDacl(restrictedToken);
+ AddUserToTokenDacl(restrictedToken);
#endif
if (!CreateProcessAsUser(restrictedToken,
*
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c,v 1.119 2010/02/19 14:12:19 petere Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_ctl/pg_ctl.c,v 1.120 2010/02/26 02:01:16 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void
do_init(void)
{
- char cmd[MAXPGPATH];
+ char cmd[MAXPGPATH];
if (exec_path == NULL)
exec_path = find_other_exec_or_die(argv0, "initdb", "initdb (PostgreSQL) " PG_VERSION "\n");
else
snprintf(cmd, MAXPGPATH, SYSTEMQUOTE "\"%s\" %s%s > \"%s\"" SYSTEMQUOTE,
exec_path, pgdata_opt, post_opts, DEVNULL);
-
+
if (system(cmd) != 0)
{
write_stderr(_("%s: database system initialization failed\n"), progname);
#endif
printf(_(" -l, --log FILENAME write (or append) server log to FILENAME\n"));
printf(_(" -o OPTIONS command line options to pass to postgres\n"
- " (PostgreSQL server executable) or initdb\n"));
+ " (PostgreSQL server executable) or initdb\n"));
printf(_(" -p PATH-TO-POSTGRES normally not necessary\n"));
printf(_("\nOptions for stop or restart:\n"));
printf(_(" -m SHUTDOWN-MODE can be \"smart\", \"fast\", or \"immediate\"\n"));
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/dumputils.c,v 1.54 2010/02/18 01:29:10 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/dumputils.c,v 1.55 2010/02/26 02:01:16 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static const char hextbl[] = "0123456789abcdef";
/*
- * This implementation is hard-wired to produce hex-format output.
- * We do not know the server version the output will be loaded into,
- * so making an intelligent format choice is impossible. It might be
- * better to always use the old escaped format.
+ * This implementation is hard-wired to produce hex-format output. We do
+ * not know the server version the output will be loaded into, so making
+ * an intelligent format choice is impossible. It might be better to
+ * always use the old escaped format.
*/
if (!enlargePQExpBuffer(buf, 2 * length + 5))
return;
fmtId(grantee->data));
if (privswgo->len > 0)
appendPQExpBuffer(firstsql,
- "%sGRANT %s ON %s %s TO %s WITH GRANT OPTION;\n",
+ "%sGRANT %s ON %s %s TO %s WITH GRANT OPTION;\n",
prefix, privswgo->data, type, name,
fmtId(grantee->data));
}
/*
* We incorporate the target role directly into the command, rather than
- * playing around with SET ROLE or anything like that. This is so that
- * a permissions error leads to nothing happening, rather than
- * changing default privileges for the wrong user.
+ * playing around with SET ROLE or anything like that. This is so that a
+ * permissions error leads to nothing happening, rather than changing
+ * default privileges for the wrong user.
*/
appendPQExpBuffer(prefix, "ALTER DEFAULT PRIVILEGES FOR ROLE %s ",
fmtId(owner));
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/dumputils.h,v 1.28 2010/01/02 16:57:59 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/dumputils.h,v 1.29 2010/02/26 02:01:16 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern void appendStringLiteralDQ(PQExpBuffer buf, const char *str,
const char *dqprefix);
extern void appendByteaLiteral(PQExpBuffer buf,
- const unsigned char *str, size_t length,
- bool std_strings);
+ const unsigned char *str, size_t length,
+ bool std_strings);
extern int parse_version(const char *versionString);
extern bool parsePGArray(const char *atext, char ***itemarray, int *nitems);
extern bool buildACLCommands(const char *name, const char *subname,
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.c,v 1.181 2010/02/24 02:42:54 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.c,v 1.182 2010/02/26 02:01:16 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
TocEntry **tocsByDumpId,
DumpId maxDumpId);
static void reduce_dependencies(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te,
- TocEntry *ready_list);
+ TocEntry *ready_list);
static void mark_create_done(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te);
static void inhibit_data_for_failed_table(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te);
static ArchiveHandle *CloneArchive(ArchiveHandle *AH);
reqs = _tocEntryRequired(te, ropt, false /* needn't drop ACLs */ );
/* We want anything that's selected and has a dropStmt */
- if (((reqs & (REQ_SCHEMA|REQ_DATA)) != 0) && te->dropStmt)
+ if (((reqs & (REQ_SCHEMA | REQ_DATA)) != 0) && te->dropStmt)
{
ahlog(AH, 1, "dropping %s %s\n", te->desc, te->tag);
/* Select owner and schema as necessary */
reqs = _tocEntryRequired(te, ropt, true);
/* Both schema and data objects might now have ownership/ACLs */
- if ((reqs & (REQ_SCHEMA|REQ_DATA)) != 0)
+ if ((reqs & (REQ_SCHEMA | REQ_DATA)) != 0)
{
ahlog(AH, 1, "setting owner and privileges for %s %s\n",
te->desc, te->tag);
if (!te->hadDumper)
{
/*
- * Special Case: If 'SEQUENCE SET' or anything to do with BLOBs,
- * then it is considered a data entry. We don't need to check for
- * the BLOBS entry or old-style BLOB COMMENTS, because they will
- * have hadDumper = true ... but we do need to check new-style
- * BLOB comments.
+ * Special Case: If 'SEQUENCE SET' or anything to do with BLOBs, then
+ * it is considered a data entry. We don't need to check for the
+ * BLOBS entry or old-style BLOB COMMENTS, because they will have
+ * hadDumper = true ... but we do need to check new-style BLOB
+ * comments.
*/
if (strcmp(te->desc, "SEQUENCE SET") == 0 ||
strcmp(te->desc, "BLOB") == 0 ||
AH->currWithOids = -1;
/*
- * Initialize the lists of pending and ready items. After this setup,
- * the pending list is everything that needs to be done but is blocked
- * by one or more dependencies, while the ready list contains items that
- * have no remaining dependencies. Note: we don't yet filter out entries
- * that aren't going to be restored. They might participate in
- * dependency chains connecting entries that should be restored, so we
- * treat them as live until we actually process them.
+ * Initialize the lists of pending and ready items. After this setup, the
+ * pending list is everything that needs to be done but is blocked by one
+ * or more dependencies, while the ready list contains items that have no
+ * remaining dependencies. Note: we don't yet filter out entries that
+ * aren't going to be restored. They might participate in dependency
+ * chains connecting entries that should be restored, so we treat them as
+ * live until we actually process them.
*/
par_list_header_init(&pending_list);
par_list_header_init(&ready_list);
* repeatedly. Entries for dump IDs not present in the TOC will be NULL.
*
* NOTE: because maxDumpId is just the highest dump ID defined in the
- * archive, there might be dependencies for IDs > maxDumpId. All uses
- * of this array must guard against out-of-range dependency numbers.
+ * archive, there might be dependencies for IDs > maxDumpId. All uses of
+ * this array must guard against out-of-range dependency numbers.
*
* Also, initialize the depCount fields, and make sure all the TOC items
* are marked as not being in any parallel-processing list.
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.h,v 1.84 2010/02/18 01:29:10 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.h,v 1.85 2010/02/26 02:01:16 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
void *formatData; /* TOC Entry data specific to file format */
/* working state (needed only for parallel restore) */
- struct _tocEntry *par_prev; /* list links for pending/ready items; */
- struct _tocEntry *par_next; /* these are NULL if not in either list */
+ struct _tocEntry *par_prev; /* list links for pending/ready items; */
+ struct _tocEntry *par_next; /* these are NULL if not in either list */
bool created; /* set for DATA member if TABLE was created */
int depCount; /* number of dependencies not yet restored */
DumpId *lockDeps; /* dumpIds of objects this one needs lock on */
extern bool isValidTarHeader(char *header);
extern int ReconnectToServer(ArchiveHandle *AH, const char *dbname, const char *newUser);
-extern void DropBlobIfExists(ArchiveHandle *AH, Oid oid);
+extern void DropBlobIfExists(ArchiveHandle *AH, Oid oid);
int ahwrite(const void *ptr, size_t size, size_t nmemb, ArchiveHandle *AH);
int ahprintf(ArchiveHandle *AH, const char *fmt,...) __attribute__((format(printf, 2, 3)));
* Implements the basic DB functions used by the archiver.
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_db.c,v 1.89 2010/02/24 02:42:55 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_db.c,v 1.90 2010/02/26 02:01:16 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
if (!keywords || !values)
die_horribly(AH, modulename, "out of memory\n");
- keywords[0] = "host";
- values[0] = PQhost(AH->connection);
- keywords[1] = "port";
- values[1] = PQport(AH->connection);
- keywords[2] = "user";
- values[2] = newuser;
- keywords[3] = "password";
- values[3] = password;
- keywords[4] = "dbname";
- values[4] = newdb;
- keywords[5] = "fallback_application_name";
- values[5] = progname;
- keywords[6] = NULL;
- values[6] = NULL;
+ keywords[0] = "host";
+ values[0] = PQhost(AH->connection);
+ keywords[1] = "port";
+ values[1] = PQport(AH->connection);
+ keywords[2] = "user";
+ values[2] = newuser;
+ keywords[3] = "password";
+ values[3] = password;
+ keywords[4] = "dbname";
+ values[4] = newdb;
+ keywords[5] = "fallback_application_name";
+ values[5] = progname;
+ keywords[6] = NULL;
+ values[6] = NULL;
new_pass = false;
newConn = PQconnectdbParams(keywords, values, true);
if (!keywords || !values)
die_horribly(AH, modulename, "out of memory\n");
- keywords[0] = "host";
- values[0] = pghost;
- keywords[1] = "port";
- values[1] = pgport;
- keywords[2] = "user";
- values[2] = username;
- keywords[3] = "password";
- values[3] = password;
- keywords[4] = "dbname";
- values[4] = dbname;
- keywords[5] = "fallback_application_name";
- values[5] = progname;
- keywords[6] = NULL;
- values[6] = NULL;
+ keywords[0] = "host";
+ values[0] = pghost;
+ keywords[1] = "port";
+ values[1] = pgport;
+ keywords[2] = "user";
+ values[2] = username;
+ keywords[3] = "password";
+ values[3] = password;
+ keywords[4] = "dbname";
+ values[4] = dbname;
+ keywords[5] = "fallback_application_name";
+ values[5] = progname;
+ keywords[6] = NULL;
+ values[6] = NULL;
new_pass = false;
AH->connection = PQconnectdbParams(keywords, values, true);
else
return false;
}
-
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_tar.c,v 1.68 2010/02/23 16:55:22 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_tar.c,v 1.69 2010/02/26 02:01:16 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
if (filename)
{
/*
- * Couldn't find the requested file. Future:
- * do SEEK(0) and retry.
+ * Couldn't find the requested file. Future: do SEEK(0) and
+ * retry.
*/
die_horribly(AH, modulename, "could not find file \"%s\" in archive\n", filename);
}
id = atoi(th->targetFile);
if ((TocIDRequired(AH, id, AH->ropt) & REQ_DATA) != 0)
die_horribly(AH, modulename, "restoring data out of order is not supported in this archive format: "
- "\"%s\" is required, but comes before \"%s\" in the archive file.\n",
+ "\"%s\" is required, but comes before \"%s\" in the archive file.\n",
th->targetFile, filename);
/* Header doesn't match, so read to next header */
* by PostgreSQL
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.c,v 1.574 2010/02/24 02:15:58 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.c,v 1.575 2010/02/26 02:01:16 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static void dumpEncoding(Archive *AH);
static void dumpStdStrings(Archive *AH);
static void binary_upgrade_set_type_oids_by_type_oid(
- PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer, Oid pg_type_oid);
+ PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer, Oid pg_type_oid);
static bool binary_upgrade_set_type_oids_by_rel_oid(
- PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer, Oid pg_rel_oid);
+ PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer, Oid pg_rel_oid);
static void binary_upgrade_set_relfilenodes(PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer,
- Oid pg_class_oid, bool is_index);
+ Oid pg_class_oid, bool is_index);
static const char *getAttrName(int attrnum, TableInfo *tblInfo);
static const char *fmtCopyColumnList(const TableInfo *ti);
static void do_sql_command(PGconn *conn, const char *query);
NULL); /* Dumper Arg */
/*
- * pg_largeobject comes from the old system intact, so set
- * its relfrozenxid.
+ * pg_largeobject comes from the old system intact, so set its
+ * relfrozenxid.
*/
if (binary_upgrade)
{
int i_relfrozenxid;
appendPQExpBuffer(loFrozenQry, "SELECT relfrozenxid\n"
- "FROM pg_catalog.pg_class\n"
- "WHERE oid = %u;\n",
- LargeObjectRelationId);
+ "FROM pg_catalog.pg_class\n"
+ "WHERE oid = %u;\n",
+ LargeObjectRelationId);
lo_res = PQexec(g_conn, loFrozenQry->data);
check_sql_result(lo_res, g_conn, loFrozenQry->data, PGRES_TUPLES_OK);
static void
getBlobs(Archive *AH)
{
- PQExpBuffer blobQry = createPQExpBuffer();
- BlobInfo *binfo;
+ PQExpBuffer blobQry = createPQExpBuffer();
+ BlobInfo *binfo;
DumpableObject *bdata;
- PGresult *res;
+ PGresult *res;
int ntups;
int i;
static void
dumpBlob(Archive *AH, BlobInfo *binfo)
{
- PQExpBuffer cquery = createPQExpBuffer();
- PQExpBuffer dquery = createPQExpBuffer();
+ PQExpBuffer cquery = createPQExpBuffer();
+ PQExpBuffer dquery = createPQExpBuffer();
appendPQExpBuffer(cquery,
"SELECT pg_catalog.lo_create('%s');\n",
selectSourceSchema("pg_catalog");
/*
- * Currently, we re-fetch all BLOB OIDs using a cursor. Consider
- * scanning the already-in-memory dumpable objects instead...
+ * Currently, we re-fetch all BLOB OIDs using a cursor. Consider scanning
+ * the already-in-memory dumpable objects instead...
*/
if (AH->remoteVersion >= 90000)
blobQry = "DECLARE bloboid CURSOR FOR SELECT oid FROM pg_largeobject_metadata";
static void
binary_upgrade_set_type_oids_by_type_oid(PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer,
- Oid pg_type_oid)
+ Oid pg_type_oid)
{
PQExpBuffer upgrade_query = createPQExpBuffer();
int ntups;
PGresult *upgrade_res;
Oid pg_type_array_oid;
-
+
appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer, "\n-- For binary upgrade, must preserve pg_type oid\n");
appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer,
- "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_pg_type_oid('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n\n",
- pg_type_oid);
+ "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_pg_type_oid('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n\n",
+ pg_type_oid);
/* we only support old >= 8.3 for binary upgrades */
appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_query,
if (OidIsValid(pg_type_array_oid))
{
appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer,
- "\n-- For binary upgrade, must preserve pg_type array oid\n");
+ "\n-- For binary upgrade, must preserve pg_type array oid\n");
appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer,
- "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_pg_type_array_oid('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n\n",
- pg_type_array_oid);
+ "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_pg_type_array_oid('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n\n",
+ pg_type_array_oid);
}
PQclear(upgrade_res);
static bool
binary_upgrade_set_type_oids_by_rel_oid(PQExpBuffer upgrade_buffer,
- Oid pg_rel_oid)
+ Oid pg_rel_oid)
{
PQExpBuffer upgrade_query = createPQExpBuffer();
int ntups;
PGresult *upgrade_res;
Oid pg_type_oid;
bool toast_set = false;
-
+
/* we only support old >= 8.3 for binary upgrades */
appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_query,
"SELECT c.reltype AS crel, t.reltype AS trel "
if (!PQgetisnull(upgrade_res, 0, PQfnumber(upgrade_res, "trel")))
{
/* Toast tables do not have pg_type array rows */
- Oid pg_type_toast_oid = atooid(PQgetvalue(upgrade_res, 0,
- PQfnumber(upgrade_res, "trel")));
+ Oid pg_type_toast_oid = atooid(PQgetvalue(upgrade_res, 0,
+ PQfnumber(upgrade_res, "trel")));
appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer, "\n-- For binary upgrade, must preserve pg_type toast oid\n");
appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer,
- "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_pg_type_toast_oid('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n\n",
- pg_type_toast_oid);
+ "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_pg_type_toast_oid('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n\n",
+ pg_type_toast_oid);
toast_set = true;
}
/*
* Note: we don't need to use pg_relation_filenode() here because this
- * function is not intended to be used against system catalogs.
- * Otherwise we'd have to worry about which versions pg_relation_filenode
- * is available in.
+ * function is not intended to be used against system catalogs. Otherwise
+ * we'd have to worry about which versions pg_relation_filenode is
+ * available in.
*/
appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_query,
- "SELECT c.relfilenode, c.reltoastrelid, t.reltoastidxid "
+ "SELECT c.relfilenode, c.reltoastrelid, t.reltoastidxid "
"FROM pg_catalog.pg_class c LEFT JOIN "
"pg_catalog.pg_class t ON (c.reltoastrelid = t.oid) "
"WHERE c.oid = '%u'::pg_catalog.oid;",
pg_class_reltoastidxid = atooid(PQgetvalue(upgrade_res, 0, PQfnumber(upgrade_res, "reltoastidxid")));
appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer,
- "\n-- For binary upgrade, must preserve relfilenodes\n");
+ "\n-- For binary upgrade, must preserve relfilenodes\n");
if (!is_index)
appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer,
- "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_heap_relfilenode('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n",
- pg_class_relfilenode);
+ "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_heap_relfilenode('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n",
+ pg_class_relfilenode);
else
appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer,
- "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_index_relfilenode('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n",
- pg_class_relfilenode);
-
+ "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_index_relfilenode('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n",
+ pg_class_relfilenode);
+
if (OidIsValid(pg_class_reltoastrelid))
{
/*
- * One complexity is that the table definition might not require
- * the creation of a TOAST table, and the TOAST table might have
- * been created long after table creation, when the table was
- * loaded with wide data. By setting the TOAST relfilenode we
- * force creation of the TOAST heap and TOAST index by the
- * backend so we can cleanly migrate the files during binary
- * migration.
+ * One complexity is that the table definition might not require the
+ * creation of a TOAST table, and the TOAST table might have been
+ * created long after table creation, when the table was loaded with
+ * wide data. By setting the TOAST relfilenode we force creation of
+ * the TOAST heap and TOAST index by the backend so we can cleanly
+ * migrate the files during binary migration.
*/
appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer,
- "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_toast_relfilenode('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n",
- pg_class_reltoastrelid);
+ "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_toast_relfilenode('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n",
+ pg_class_reltoastrelid);
/* every toast table has an index */
appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer,
- "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_index_relfilenode('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n",
- pg_class_reltoastidxid);
+ "SELECT binary_upgrade.set_next_index_relfilenode('%u'::pg_catalog.oid);\n",
+ pg_class_reltoastidxid);
}
appendPQExpBuffer(upgrade_buffer, "\n");
AssignDumpId(&tyinfo[i].dobj);
tyinfo[i].dobj.name = strdup(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_typname));
tyinfo[i].dobj.namespace = findNamespace(atooid(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_typnamespace)),
- tyinfo[i].dobj.catId.oid);
+ tyinfo[i].dobj.catId.oid);
tyinfo[i].rolname = strdup(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_rolname));
tyinfo[i].typelem = atooid(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_typelem));
tyinfo[i].typrelid = atooid(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_typrelid));
"c.condeferrable, c.condeferred, "
"c.tableoid AS contableoid, "
"c.oid AS conoid, "
- "pg_catalog.pg_get_constraintdef(c.oid, false) AS condef, "
+ "pg_catalog.pg_get_constraintdef(c.oid, false) AS condef, "
"(SELECT spcname FROM pg_catalog.pg_tablespace s WHERE s.oid = t.reltablespace) AS tablespace, "
"array_to_string(t.reloptions, ', ') AS options "
"FROM pg_catalog.pg_index i "
appendPQExpBuffer(query,
"SELECT tgname, "
"tgfoid::pg_catalog.regproc AS tgfname, "
- "pg_catalog.pg_get_triggerdef(oid, false) AS tgdef, "
+ "pg_catalog.pg_get_triggerdef(oid, false) AS tgdef, "
"tgenabled, tableoid, oid "
"FROM pg_catalog.pg_trigger t "
"WHERE tgrelid = '%u'::pg_catalog.oid "
"a.attstattarget, a.attstorage, t.typstorage, "
"a.attnotnull, a.atthasdef, a.attisdropped, "
"a.attlen, a.attalign, a.attislocal, "
- "pg_catalog.format_type(t.oid,a.atttypmod) AS atttypname, "
- "array_to_string(attoptions, ', ') AS attoptions "
+ "pg_catalog.format_type(t.oid,a.atttypmod) AS atttypname, "
+ "array_to_string(attoptions, ', ') AS attoptions "
"FROM pg_catalog.pg_attribute a LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_type t "
"ON a.atttypid = t.oid "
"WHERE a.attrelid = '%u'::pg_catalog.oid "
"a.attstattarget, a.attstorage, t.typstorage, "
"a.attnotnull, a.atthasdef, a.attisdropped, "
"a.attlen, a.attalign, a.attislocal, "
- "pg_catalog.format_type(t.oid,a.atttypmod) AS atttypname, "
+ "pg_catalog.format_type(t.oid,a.atttypmod) AS atttypname, "
"'' AS attoptions "
"FROM pg_catalog.pg_attribute a LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_type t "
"ON a.atttypid = t.oid "
for (i = 0; i < ntups; i++)
{
- Oid nspid = atooid(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_defaclnamespace));
+ Oid nspid = atooid(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_defaclnamespace));
daclinfo[i].dobj.objType = DO_DEFAULT_ACL;
daclinfo[i].dobj.catId.tableoid = atooid(PQgetvalue(res, i, i_tableoid));
if (nspid != InvalidOid)
daclinfo[i].dobj.namespace = findNamespace(nspid,
- daclinfo[i].dobj.catId.oid);
+ daclinfo[i].dobj.catId.oid);
else
daclinfo[i].dobj.namespace = NULL;
if (i == 0)
appendPQExpBuffer(q, "\n-- For binary upgrade, must preserve pg_enum oids\n");
appendPQExpBuffer(q,
- "SELECT binary_upgrade.add_pg_enum_label('%u'::pg_catalog.oid, "
- "'%u'::pg_catalog.oid, ",
- enum_oid, tyinfo->dobj.catId.oid);
+ "SELECT binary_upgrade.add_pg_enum_label('%u'::pg_catalog.oid, "
+ "'%u'::pg_catalog.oid, ",
+ enum_oid, tyinfo->dobj.catId.oid);
appendStringLiteralAH(q, label, fout);
appendPQExpBuffer(q, ");\n");
}
/* We assume here that remoteVersion must be at least 70300 */
appendPQExpBuffer(query, "SELECT a.attname, "
- "pg_catalog.format_type(a.atttypid, a.atttypmod) AS atttypdefn, "
- "typrelid "
+ "pg_catalog.format_type(a.atttypid, a.atttypmod) AS atttypdefn, "
+ "typrelid "
"FROM pg_catalog.pg_type t, pg_catalog.pg_attribute a "
"WHERE t.oid = '%u'::pg_catalog.oid "
"AND a.attrelid = t.typrelid "
if (binary_upgrade)
{
- Oid typrelid = atooid(PQgetvalue(res, 0, i_typrelid));
-
+ Oid typrelid = atooid(PQgetvalue(res, 0, i_typrelid));
+
binary_upgrade_set_type_oids_by_type_oid(q, tyinfo->dobj.catId.oid);
binary_upgrade_set_relfilenodes(q, typrelid, false);
}
dumpCompositeTypeColComments(Archive *fout, TypeInfo *tyinfo)
{
CommentItem *comments;
- int ncomments;
- PGresult *res;
+ int ncomments;
+ PGresult *res;
PQExpBuffer query;
PQExpBuffer target;
- Oid pgClassOid;
- int i;
- int ntups;
- int i_attname;
- int i_attnum;
+ Oid pgClassOid;
+ int i;
+ int ntups;
+ int i_attname;
+ int i_attnum;
query = createPQExpBuffer();
if (binary_upgrade)
binary_upgrade_set_type_oids_by_type_oid(q,
- stinfo->baseType->dobj.catId.oid);
+ stinfo->baseType->dobj.catId.oid);
appendPQExpBuffer(q, "CREATE TYPE %s;\n",
fmtId(stinfo->dobj.name));
/* Cope with possibility that inline is in different schema */
if (inlineInfo->dobj.namespace != funcInfo->dobj.namespace)
appendPQExpBuffer(defqry, "%s.",
- fmtId(inlineInfo->dobj.namespace->dobj.name));
+ fmtId(inlineInfo->dobj.namespace->dobj.name));
appendPQExpBuffer(defqry, "%s",
fmtId(inlineInfo->dobj.name));
}
else
{
/*
- * If not dumping parameters, then use CREATE OR REPLACE so that
- * the command will not fail if the language is preinstalled in the
- * target database. We restrict the use of REPLACE to this case so
- * as to eliminate the risk of replacing a language with incompatible
+ * If not dumping parameters, then use CREATE OR REPLACE so that the
+ * command will not fail if the language is preinstalled in the target
+ * database. We restrict the use of REPLACE to this case so as to
+ * eliminate the risk of replacing a language with incompatible
* parameter settings: this command will only succeed at all if there
* is a pg_pltemplate entry, and if there is one, the existing entry
* must match it too.
ArchiveEntry(fout, daclinfo->dobj.catId, daclinfo->dobj.dumpId,
tag->data,
- daclinfo->dobj.namespace ? daclinfo->dobj.namespace->dobj.name : NULL,
+ daclinfo->dobj.namespace ? daclinfo->dobj.namespace->dobj.name : NULL,
NULL,
daclinfo->defaclrole,
false, "DEFAULT ACL", SECTION_NONE,
int j,
k;
bool toast_set = false;
-
+
/* Make sure we are in proper schema */
selectSourceSchema(tbinfo->dobj.namespace->dobj.name);
if (binary_upgrade)
toast_set = binary_upgrade_set_type_oids_by_rel_oid(q,
- tbinfo->dobj.catId.oid);
+ tbinfo->dobj.catId.oid);
/* Is it a table or a view? */
if (tbinfo->relkind == RELKIND_VIEW)
* binary-upgrade case, where we're not doing normal
* inheritance) or if it's to be printed separately.
*/
- bool has_default = (tbinfo->attrdefs[j] != NULL
- && (!tbinfo->inhAttrDef[j] || binary_upgrade)
- && !tbinfo->attrdefs[j]->separate);
+ bool has_default = (tbinfo->attrdefs[j] != NULL
+ && (!tbinfo->inhAttrDef[j] || binary_upgrade)
+ && !tbinfo->attrdefs[j]->separate);
+
/*
- * Not Null constraint --- suppress if inherited, except
- * in binary-upgrade case.
+ * Not Null constraint --- suppress if inherited, except in
+ * binary-upgrade case.
*/
- bool has_notnull = (tbinfo->notnull[j]
- && (!tbinfo->inhNotNull[j] || binary_upgrade));
+ bool has_notnull = (tbinfo->notnull[j]
+ && (!tbinfo->inhNotNull[j] || binary_upgrade));
if (tbinfo->reloftype && !has_default && !has_notnull)
continue;
appendPQExpBuffer(q, ";\n");
/*
- * To create binary-compatible heap files, we have to ensure the
- * same physical column order, including dropped columns, as in the
- * original. Therefore, we create dropped columns above and drop
- * them here, also updating their attlen/attalign values so that
- * the dropped column can be skipped properly. (We do not bother
- * with restoring the original attbyval setting.) Also, inheritance
+ * To create binary-compatible heap files, we have to ensure the same
+ * physical column order, including dropped columns, as in the
+ * original. Therefore, we create dropped columns above and drop them
+ * here, also updating their attlen/attalign values so that the
+ * dropped column can be skipped properly. (We do not bother with
+ * restoring the original attbyval setting.) Also, inheritance
* relationships are set up by doing ALTER INHERIT rather than using
- * an INHERITS clause --- the latter would possibly mess up the
- * column order. That also means we have to take care about setting
+ * an INHERITS clause --- the latter would possibly mess up the column
+ * order. That also means we have to take care about setting
* attislocal correctly, plus fix up any inherited CHECK constraints.
*/
if (binary_upgrade)
fmtId(tbinfo->dobj.name));
if (parentRel->dobj.namespace != tbinfo->dobj.namespace)
appendPQExpBuffer(q, "%s.",
- fmtId(parentRel->dobj.namespace->dobj.name));
+ fmtId(parentRel->dobj.namespace->dobj.name));
appendPQExpBuffer(q, "%s;\n",
fmtId(parentRel->dobj.name));
}
else
{
appendPQExpBuffer(q, "%s (",
- coninfo->contype == 'p' ? "PRIMARY KEY" : "UNIQUE");
+ coninfo->contype == 'p' ? "PRIMARY KEY" : "UNIQUE");
for (k = 0; k < indxinfo->indnkeys; k++)
{
int indkey = (int) indxinfo->indkeys[k];
appendPQExpBuffer(query, ";\n");
- /* binary_upgrade: no need to clear TOAST table oid */
-
+ /* binary_upgrade: no need to clear TOAST table oid */
+
ArchiveEntry(fout, tbinfo->dobj.catId, tbinfo->dobj.dumpId,
tbinfo->dobj.name,
tbinfo->dobj.namespace->dobj.name,
for (findx = 0; findx < tginfo->tgnargs; findx++)
{
/* find the embedded null that terminates this trigger argument */
- size_t tlen = strlen(p);
+ size_t tlen = strlen(p);
if (p + tlen >= tgargs + lentgargs)
{
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.h,v 1.163 2010/02/18 01:29:10 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.h,v 1.164 2010/02/26 02:01:17 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* to sort them the way we want.
*
* Note: condeferrable and condeferred are currently only valid for
- * unique/primary-key constraints. Otherwise that info is in condef.
+ * unique/primary-key constraints. Otherwise that info is in condef.
*/
typedef struct _constraintInfo
{
{
DumpableObject dobj;
char *defaclrole;
- char defaclobjtype;
+ char defaclobjtype;
char *defaclacl;
} DefaultACLInfo;
typedef struct _blobInfo
{
- DumpableObject dobj;
+ DumpableObject dobj;
char *rolname;
char *blobacl;
} BlobInfo;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump_sort.c,v 1.29 2010/02/18 01:29:10 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump_sort.c,v 1.30 2010/02/26 02:01:17 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
return cmpval;
/* To have a stable sort order, break ties for some object types */
- if (obj1->objType == DO_FUNC || obj1->objType == DO_AGG)
+ if (obj1->objType == DO_FUNC || obj1->objType == DO_AGG)
{
- FuncInfo *fobj1 = *(FuncInfo **) p1;
- FuncInfo *fobj2 = *(FuncInfo **) p2;
+ FuncInfo *fobj1 = *(FuncInfo **) p1;
+ FuncInfo *fobj2 = *(FuncInfo **) p2;
cmpval = fobj1->nargs - fobj2->nargs;
if (cmpval != 0)
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dumpall.c,v 1.133 2010/02/17 04:19:40 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dumpall.c,v 1.134 2010/02/26 02:01:17 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
if (server_version >= 90000)
printfPQExpBuffer(buf, "SELECT setconfig[%d] FROM pg_db_role_setting WHERE "
"setdatabase = 0 AND setrole = "
- "(SELECT oid FROM pg_authid WHERE rolname = ", count);
+ "(SELECT oid FROM pg_authid WHERE rolname = ", count);
else if (server_version >= 80100)
printfPQExpBuffer(buf, "SELECT rolconfig[%d] FROM pg_authid WHERE rolname = ", count);
else
static void
dumpDbRoleConfig(PGconn *conn)
{
- PQExpBuffer buf = createPQExpBuffer();
+ PQExpBuffer buf = createPQExpBuffer();
PGresult *res;
int i;
printfPQExpBuffer(buf, "SELECT rolname, datname, unnest(setconfig) "
"FROM pg_db_role_setting, pg_authid, pg_database "
- "WHERE setrole = pg_authid.oid AND setdatabase = pg_database.oid");
+ "WHERE setrole = pg_authid.oid AND setdatabase = pg_database.oid");
res = executeQuery(conn, buf->data);
if (PQntuples(res) > 0)
exit(1);
}
- keywords[0] = "host";
- values[0] = pghost;
- keywords[1] = "port";
- values[1] = pgport;
- keywords[2] = "user";
- values[2] = pguser;
- keywords[3] = "password";
- values[3] = password;
- keywords[4] = "dbname";
- values[4] = dbname;
- keywords[5] = "fallback_application_name";
- values[5] = progname;
- keywords[6] = NULL;
- values[6] = NULL;
+ keywords[0] = "host";
+ values[0] = pghost;
+ keywords[1] = "port";
+ values[1] = pgport;
+ keywords[2] = "user";
+ values[2] = pguser;
+ keywords[3] = "password";
+ values[3] = password;
+ keywords[4] = "dbname";
+ values[4] = dbname;
+ keywords[5] = "fallback_application_name";
+ values[5] = progname;
+ keywords[6] = NULL;
+ values[6] = NULL;
new_pass = false;
conn = PQconnectdbParams(keywords, values, true);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_resetxlog/pg_resetxlog.c,v 1.77 2010/01/04 12:50:49 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_resetxlog/pg_resetxlog.c,v 1.78 2010/02/26 02:01:17 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* For the moment, just set oldestXid to a value that will force
- * immediate autovacuum-for-wraparound. It's not clear whether
- * adding user control of this is useful, so let's just do something
- * that's reasonably safe. The magic constant here corresponds to
- * the maximum allowed value of autovacuum_freeze_max_age.
+ * immediate autovacuum-for-wraparound. It's not clear whether adding
+ * user control of this is useful, so let's just do something that's
+ * reasonably safe. The magic constant here corresponds to the
+ * maximum allowed value of autovacuum_freeze_max_age.
*/
ControlFile.checkPointCopy.oldestXid = set_xid - 2000000000;
if (ControlFile.checkPointCopy.oldestXid < FirstNormalTransactionId)
*
* Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/command.c,v 1.215 2010/02/16 21:07:01 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/command.c,v 1.216 2010/02/26 02:01:17 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "postgres_fe.h"
#include "command.h"
if (pattern)
pattern2 = psql_scan_slash_option(scan_state,
- OT_NORMAL, NULL, true);
+ OT_NORMAL, NULL, true);
success = listDbRoleSettings(pattern, pattern2);
}
else
const char **keywords = pg_malloc(PARAMS_ARRAY_SIZE * sizeof(*keywords));
const char **values = pg_malloc(PARAMS_ARRAY_SIZE * sizeof(*values));
- keywords[0] = "host";
- values[0] = host;
- keywords[1] = "port";
- values[1] = port;
- keywords[2] = "user";
- values[2] = user;
- keywords[3] = "password";
- values[3] = password;
- keywords[4] = "dbname";
- values[4] = dbname;
- keywords[5] = "fallback_application_name";
- values[5] = pset.progname;
- keywords[6] = NULL;
- values[6] = NULL;
+ keywords[0] = "host";
+ values[0] = host;
+ keywords[1] = "port";
+ values[1] = port;
+ keywords[2] = "user";
+ values[2] = user;
+ keywords[3] = "password";
+ values[3] = password;
+ keywords[4] = "dbname";
+ values[4] = dbname;
+ keywords[5] = "fallback_application_name";
+ values[5] = pset.progname;
+ keywords[6] = NULL;
+ values[6] = NULL;
n_conn = PQconnectdbParams(keywords, values, true);
PQsetNoticeProcessor(n_conn, NoticeProcessor, NULL);
pset.db = n_conn;
SyncVariables();
- connection_warnings(false); /* Must be after SyncVariables */
+ connection_warnings(false); /* Must be after SyncVariables */
/* Tell the user about the new connection */
if (!pset.quiet)
*
* Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/describe.c,v 1.237 2010/02/17 04:19:40 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/describe.c,v 1.238 2010/02/26 02:01:18 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "postgres_fe.h"
initPQExpBuffer(&buf);
printfPQExpBuffer(&buf,
- "SELECT pg_catalog.pg_get_userbyid(d.defaclrole) AS \"%s\",\n"
+ "SELECT pg_catalog.pg_get_userbyid(d.defaclrole) AS \"%s\",\n"
" n.nspname AS \"%s\",\n"
" CASE d.defaclobjtype WHEN 'r' THEN '%s' WHEN 'S' THEN '%s' WHEN 'f' THEN '%s' END AS \"%s\",\n"
" ",
printACLColumn(&buf, "d.defaclacl");
appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, "\nFROM pg_catalog.pg_default_acl d\n"
- " LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_namespace n ON n.oid = d.defaclnamespace\n");
+ " LEFT JOIN pg_catalog.pg_namespace n ON n.oid = d.defaclnamespace\n");
processSQLNamePattern(pset.db, &buf, pattern, false, false,
NULL,
if (verbose)
{
int firstvcol = (tableinfo.relkind == 'i' ? 6 : 5);
- char *storage = PQgetvalue(res, i, firstvcol);
+ char *storage = PQgetvalue(res, i, firstvcol);
/* these strings are literal in our syntax, so not translated. */
printTableAddCell(&cont, (storage[0] == 'p' ? "plain" :
" (NOT i.indimmediate) AND "
"EXISTS (SELECT 1 FROM pg_catalog.pg_depend d, "
"pg_catalog.pg_constraint con WHERE "
- "d.classid = 'pg_catalog.pg_class'::pg_catalog.regclass AND "
+ "d.classid = 'pg_catalog.pg_class'::pg_catalog.regclass AND "
"d.objid = i.indexrelid AND "
"d.refclassid = 'pg_catalog.pg_constraint'::pg_catalog.regclass AND "
"d.refobjid = con.oid AND d.deptype = 'i' AND "
" (NOT i.indimmediate) AND "
"EXISTS (SELECT 1 FROM pg_catalog.pg_depend d, "
"pg_catalog.pg_constraint con WHERE "
- "d.classid = 'pg_catalog.pg_class'::pg_catalog.regclass AND "
+ "d.classid = 'pg_catalog.pg_class'::pg_catalog.regclass AND "
"d.objid = i.indexrelid AND "
"d.refclassid = 'pg_catalog.pg_constraint'::pg_catalog.regclass AND "
"d.refobjid = con.oid AND d.deptype = 'i' AND "
appendPQExpBuffer(&buf,
" false AS condeferrable, false AS condeferred,\n");
appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, " a.amname, c2.relname, "
- "pg_catalog.pg_get_expr(i.indpred, i.indrelid, true)\n"
+ "pg_catalog.pg_get_expr(i.indpred, i.indrelid, true)\n"
"FROM pg_catalog.pg_index i, pg_catalog.pg_class c, pg_catalog.pg_class c2, pg_catalog.pg_am a\n"
"WHERE i.indexrelid = c.oid AND c.oid = '%s' AND c.relam = a.oid\n"
"AND i.indrelid = c2.oid",
appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, "pg_catalog.pg_get_indexdef(i.indexrelid, 0, true)");
if (pset.sversion >= 90000)
appendPQExpBuffer(&buf,
- ",\n (NOT i.indimmediate) AND "
- "EXISTS (SELECT 1 FROM pg_catalog.pg_depend d, "
- "pg_catalog.pg_constraint con WHERE "
- "d.classid = 'pg_catalog.pg_class'::pg_catalog.regclass AND "
- "d.objid = i.indexrelid AND "
- "d.refclassid = 'pg_catalog.pg_constraint'::pg_catalog.regclass AND "
+ ",\n (NOT i.indimmediate) AND "
+ "EXISTS (SELECT 1 FROM pg_catalog.pg_depend d, "
+ "pg_catalog.pg_constraint con WHERE "
+ "d.classid = 'pg_catalog.pg_class'::pg_catalog.regclass AND "
+ "d.objid = i.indexrelid AND "
+ "d.refclassid = 'pg_catalog.pg_constraint'::pg_catalog.regclass AND "
"d.refobjid = con.oid AND d.deptype = 'i' AND "
- "con.condeferrable) AS condeferrable"
- ",\n (NOT i.indimmediate) AND "
- "EXISTS (SELECT 1 FROM pg_catalog.pg_depend d, "
- "pg_catalog.pg_constraint con WHERE "
- "d.classid = 'pg_catalog.pg_class'::pg_catalog.regclass AND "
- "d.objid = i.indexrelid AND "
- "d.refclassid = 'pg_catalog.pg_constraint'::pg_catalog.regclass AND "
+ "con.condeferrable) AS condeferrable"
+ ",\n (NOT i.indimmediate) AND "
+ "EXISTS (SELECT 1 FROM pg_catalog.pg_depend d, "
+ "pg_catalog.pg_constraint con WHERE "
+ "d.classid = 'pg_catalog.pg_class'::pg_catalog.regclass AND "
+ "d.objid = i.indexrelid AND "
+ "d.refclassid = 'pg_catalog.pg_constraint'::pg_catalog.regclass AND "
"d.refobjid = con.oid AND d.deptype = 'i' AND "
- "con.condeferred) AS condeferred");
+ "con.condeferred) AS condeferred");
else
appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, ", false AS condeferrable, false AS condeferred");
if (pset.sversion >= 80000)
bool
listDbRoleSettings(const char *pattern, const char *pattern2)
{
- PQExpBufferData buf;
- PGresult *res;
+ PQExpBufferData buf;
+ PGresult *res;
printQueryOpt myopt = pset.popt;
initPQExpBuffer(&buf);
if (pset.sversion >= 90000)
{
- bool havewhere;
+ bool havewhere;
printfPQExpBuffer(&buf, "SELECT rolname AS role, datname AS database,\n"
- "pg_catalog.array_to_string(setconfig, E'\\n') AS settings\n"
+ "pg_catalog.array_to_string(setconfig, E'\\n') AS settings\n"
"FROM pg_db_role_setting AS s\n"
- "LEFT JOIN pg_database ON pg_database.oid = setdatabase\n"
+ "LEFT JOIN pg_database ON pg_database.oid = setdatabase\n"
"LEFT JOIN pg_roles ON pg_roles.oid = setrole\n");
havewhere = processSQLNamePattern(pset.db, &buf, pattern, false, false,
- NULL, "pg_roles.rolname", NULL, NULL);
+ NULL, "pg_roles.rolname", NULL, NULL);
processSQLNamePattern(pset.db, &buf, pattern2, havewhere, false,
NULL, "pg_database.datname", NULL, NULL);
appendPQExpBufferStr(&buf, "ORDER BY role, database");
else
{
fprintf(pset.queryFout,
- _("No per-database role settings support in this server version.\n"));
+ _("No per-database role settings support in this server version.\n"));
return false;
}
*
* Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/input.c,v 1.68 2010/01/02 16:57:59 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/input.c,v 1.69 2010/02/26 02:01:18 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "postgres_fe.h"
* On newer versions of libreadline, truncate the history file as
* needed and then append what we've added. This avoids overwriting
* history from other concurrent sessions (although there are still
- * race conditions when two sessions exit at about the same time).
- * If we don't have those functions, fall back to write_history().
+ * race conditions when two sessions exit at about the same time). If
+ * we don't have those functions, fall back to write_history().
*
* Note: return value of write_history is not standardized across GNU
* readline and libedit. Therefore, check for errno becoming set to
#if defined(HAVE_HISTORY_TRUNCATE_FILE) && defined(HAVE_APPEND_HISTORY)
if (appendFlag)
{
- int nlines;
- int fd;
+ int nlines;
+ int fd;
/* truncate previous entries if needed */
if (max_lines >= 0)
/* truncate what we have ... */
if (max_lines >= 0)
stifle_history(max_lines);
- /* ... and overwrite file. Tough luck for concurrent sessions. */
+ /* ... and overwrite file. Tough luck for concurrent sessions. */
errno = 0;
(void) write_history(fname);
if (errno == 0)
*
* Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/input.h,v 1.34 2010/01/02 16:57:59 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/input.h,v 1.35 2010/02/26 02:01:19 momjian Exp $
*/
#ifndef INPUT_H
#define INPUT_H
#if defined(HAVE_READLINE_HISTORY_H)
#include <readline/history.h>
#endif
-
#elif defined(HAVE_EDITLINE_READLINE_H)
#include <editline/readline.h>
#if defined(HAVE_EDITLINE_HISTORY_H)
#include <editline/history.h>
#endif
-
#elif defined(HAVE_READLINE_H)
#include <readline.h>
#if defined(HAVE_HISTORY_H)
#include <history.h>
#endif
-
-#endif /* HAVE_READLINE_READLINE_H, etc */
-#endif /* HAVE_LIBREADLINE */
+#endif /* HAVE_READLINE_READLINE_H, etc */
+#endif /* HAVE_LIBREADLINE */
#include "pqexpbuffer.h"
*
* Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/large_obj.c,v 1.55 2010/02/17 04:19:40 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/large_obj.c,v 1.56 2010/02/26 02:01:19 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "postgres_fe.h"
#include "large_obj.h"
snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf),
"SELECT oid as \"%s\",\n"
" pg_catalog.pg_get_userbyid(lomowner) as \"%s\",\n"
- " pg_catalog.obj_description(oid, 'pg_largeobject') as \"%s\"\n"
+ " pg_catalog.obj_description(oid, 'pg_largeobject') as \"%s\"\n"
" FROM pg_catalog.pg_largeobject_metadata "
" ORDER BY oid",
gettext_noop("ID"),
{
snprintf(buf, sizeof(buf),
"SELECT loid as \"%s\",\n"
- " pg_catalog.obj_description(loid, 'pg_largeobject') as \"%s\"\n"
- "FROM (SELECT DISTINCT loid FROM pg_catalog.pg_largeobject) x\n"
+ " pg_catalog.obj_description(loid, 'pg_largeobject') as \"%s\"\n"
+ "FROM (SELECT DISTINCT loid FROM pg_catalog.pg_largeobject) x\n"
"ORDER BY 1",
gettext_noop("ID"),
gettext_noop("Description"));
*
* Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/mainloop.c,v 1.98 2010/01/02 16:57:59 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/mainloop.c,v 1.99 2010/02/26 02:01:19 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "postgres_fe.h"
#include "mainloop.h"
* psqlscan.c is #include'd here instead of being compiled on its own.
* This is because we need postgres_fe.h to be read before any system
* include files, else things tend to break on platforms that have
- * multiple infrastructures for stdio.h and so on. flex is absolutely
+ * multiple infrastructures for stdio.h and so on. flex is absolutely
* uncooperative about that, so we can't compile psqlscan.c on its own.
*/
#include "psqlscan.c"
*
* Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/print.c,v 1.121 2010/01/30 18:59:51 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/print.c,v 1.122 2010/02/26 02:01:19 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "postgres_fe.h"
{
"ascii",
{
- { "-", "+", "+", "+" },
- { "-", "+", "+", "+" },
- { "-", "+", "+", "+" },
- { "", "|", "|", "|" }
+ {"-", "+", "+", "+"},
+ {"-", "+", "+", "+"},
+ {"-", "+", "+", "+"},
+ {"", "|", "|", "|"}
},
"|",
"|",
{
"old-ascii",
{
- { "-", "+", "+", "+" },
- { "-", "+", "+", "+" },
- { "-", "+", "+", "+" },
- { "", "|", "|", "|" }
+ {"-", "+", "+", "+"},
+ {"-", "+", "+", "+"},
+ {"-", "+", "+", "+"},
+ {"", "|", "|", "|"}
},
":",
";",
"unicode",
{
/* ─, ┌, ┬, ┐ */
- { "\342\224\200", "\342\224\214", "\342\224\254", "\342\224\220" },
+ {"\342\224\200", "\342\224\214", "\342\224\254", "\342\224\220"},
/* ─, ├, ┼, ┤ */
- { "\342\224\200", "\342\224\234", "\342\224\274", "\342\224\244" },
+ {"\342\224\200", "\342\224\234", "\342\224\274", "\342\224\244"},
/* ─, └, ┴, ┘ */
- { "\342\224\200", "\342\224\224", "\342\224\264", "\342\224\230" },
+ {"\342\224\200", "\342\224\224", "\342\224\264", "\342\224\230"},
/* N/A, │, │, │ */
- { "", "\342\224\202", "\342\224\202", "\342\224\202" }
+ {"", "\342\224\202", "\342\224\202", "\342\224\202"}
},
/* │ */
"\342\224\202",
* If left-aligned, pad out remaining space if needed (not
* last column, and/or wrap marks required).
*/
- if (cont->aligns[j] != 'r') /* Left aligned cell */
+ if (cont->aligns[j] != 'r') /* Left aligned cell */
{
if (finalspaces ||
wrap[j] == PRINT_LINE_WRAP_WRAP ||
- wrap[j] == PRINT_LINE_WRAP_NEWLINE)
+ wrap[j] == PRINT_LINE_WRAP_NEWLINE)
fprintf(fout, "%*s",
width_wrap[j] - chars_to_output, "");
}
/* Print column divider, if not the last column */
if (opt_border != 0 && j < col_count - 1)
{
- if (wrap[j+1] == PRINT_LINE_WRAP_WRAP)
+ if (wrap[j + 1] == PRINT_LINE_WRAP_WRAP)
fputs(format->midvrule_wrap, fout);
- else if (wrap[j+1] == PRINT_LINE_WRAP_NEWLINE)
+ else if (wrap[j + 1] == PRINT_LINE_WRAP_NEWLINE)
fputs(format->midvrule_nl, fout);
else if (col_lineptrs[j + 1][curr_nl_line[j + 1]].ptr == NULL)
fputs(format->midvrule_blank, fout);
{
const printTextFormat *format = get_line_style(cont->opt);
const printTextLineFormat *lformat = &format->lrule[pos];
- unsigned short opt_border = cont->opt->border;
- unsigned int i;
- int reclen = 0;
+ unsigned short opt_border = cont->opt->border;
+ unsigned int i;
+ int reclen = 0;
if (opt_border == 2)
fprintf(fout, "%s%s", lformat->leftvrule, lformat->hrule);
break;
if (i == 0)
- pos = PRINT_RULE_TOP;
- else if (!(*(ptr+1)))
+ pos = PRINT_RULE_TOP;
+ else if (!(*(ptr + 1)))
pos = PRINT_RULE_BOTTOM;
else
pos = PRINT_RULE_MIDDLE;
get_line_style(const printTableOpt *opt)
{
/*
- * Note: this function mainly exists to preserve the convention that
- * a printTableOpt struct can be initialized to zeroes to get default
+ * Note: this function mainly exists to preserve the convention that a
+ * printTableOpt struct can be initialized to zeroes to get default
* behavior.
*/
if (opt->line_style != NULL)
*
* Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/print.h,v 1.43 2010/01/02 16:57:59 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/print.h,v 1.44 2010/02/26 02:01:19 momjian Exp $
*/
#ifndef PRINT_H
#define PRINT_H
typedef struct printTextFormat
{
/* A complete line style */
- const char *name; /* for display purposes */
- printTextLineFormat lrule[4]; /* indexed by enum printTextRule */
+ const char *name; /* for display purposes */
+ printTextLineFormat lrule[4]; /* indexed by enum printTextRule */
const char *midvrule_nl; /* vertical line for continue after newline */
const char *midvrule_wrap; /* vertical line for wrapped data */
- const char *midvrule_blank; /* vertical line for blank data */
- const char *header_nl_left; /* left mark after newline */
- const char *header_nl_right; /* right mark for newline */
+ const char *midvrule_blank; /* vertical line for blank data */
+ const char *header_nl_left; /* left mark after newline */
+ const char *header_nl_right; /* right mark for newline */
const char *nl_left; /* left mark after newline */
const char *nl_right; /* right mark for newline */
const char *wrap_left; /* left mark after wrapped data */
const char *wrap_right; /* right mark for wrapped data */
- bool wrap_right_border; /* use right-hand border for wrap marks
- * when border=0? */
+ bool wrap_right_border; /* use right-hand border for wrap
+ * marks when border=0? */
} printTextFormat;
typedef struct printTableOpt
*
* Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/startup.c,v 1.161 2010/02/16 21:07:01 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/startup.c,v 1.162 2010/02/26 02:01:19 momjian Exp $
*/
#include "postgres_fe.h"
const char **keywords = pg_malloc(PARAMS_ARRAY_SIZE * sizeof(*keywords));
const char **values = pg_malloc(PARAMS_ARRAY_SIZE * sizeof(*values));
- keywords[0] = "host";
- values[0] = options.host;
- keywords[1] = "port";
- values[1] = options.port;
- keywords[2] = "user";
- values[2] = options.username;
- keywords[3] = "password";
- values[3] = password;
- keywords[4] = "dbname";
- values[4] = (options.action == ACT_LIST_DB &&
- options.dbname == NULL) ?
- "postgres" : options.dbname;
- keywords[5] = "fallback_application_name";
- values[5] = pset.progname;
- keywords[6] = NULL;
- values[6] = NULL;
+ keywords[0] = "host";
+ values[0] = options.host;
+ keywords[1] = "port";
+ values[1] = options.port;
+ keywords[2] = "user";
+ values[2] = options.username;
+ keywords[3] = "password";
+ values[3] = password;
+ keywords[4] = "dbname";
+ values[4] = (options.action == ACT_LIST_DB &&
+ options.dbname == NULL) ?
+ "postgres" : options.dbname;
+ keywords[5] = "fallback_application_name";
+ values[5] = pset.progname;
+ keywords[6] = NULL;
+ values[6] = NULL;
new_pass = false;
pset.db = PQconnectdbParams(keywords, values, true);
*
* Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/tab-complete.c,v 1.195 2010/02/17 04:09:40 itagaki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/tab-complete.c,v 1.196 2010/02/26 02:01:20 momjian Exp $
*/
/*----------------------------------------------------------------------
pg_strcasecmp(prev2_wd, "ON") == 0)
{
static const char *const list_CREATE_INDEX2[] =
- {"(", "USING", NULL};
+ {"(", "USING", NULL};
COMPLETE_WITH_LIST(list_CREATE_INDEX2);
}
COMPLETE_WITH_LIST(list_CREATETRIGGER2);
}
- /* complete CREATE TRIGGER <name> BEFORE,AFTER event ON with a list of tables */
+
+ /*
+ * complete CREATE TRIGGER <name> BEFORE,AFTER event ON with a list of
+ * tables
+ */
else if (pg_strcasecmp(prev5_wd, "TRIGGER") == 0 &&
(pg_strcasecmp(prev3_wd, "BEFORE") == 0 ||
pg_strcasecmp(prev3_wd, "AFTER") == 0) &&
}
/* DO */
+
/*
* Complete DO with LANGUAGE.
*/
COMPLETE_WITH_ATTR(prev2_wd, "");
/*
- * Complete INSERT INTO <table> with "(" or "VALUES" or "SELECT" or "TABLE"
- * or "DEFAULT VALUES"
+ * Complete INSERT INTO <table> with "(" or "VALUES" or "SELECT" or
+ * "TABLE" or "DEFAULT VALUES"
*/
else if (pg_strcasecmp(prev3_wd, "INSERT") == 0 &&
pg_strcasecmp(prev2_wd, "INTO") == 0)
{
static const char *const my_list[] =
{"format", "border", "expanded",
- "null", "fieldsep", "tuples_only", "title", "tableattr",
- "linestyle", "pager", "recordsep", NULL};
+ "null", "fieldsep", "tuples_only", "title", "tableattr",
+ "linestyle", "pager", "recordsep", NULL};
COMPLETE_WITH_LIST(my_list);
}
while (skip-- >= 0)
{
- int parentheses = 0;
+ int parentheses = 0;
/* now find the first non-space which then constitutes the end */
for (i = point; i >= 0; i--)
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/scripts/common.c,v 1.39 2010/02/05 03:09:05 joe Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/scripts/common.c,v 1.40 2010/02/26 02:01:20 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
exit(1);
}
- keywords[0] = "host";
- values[0] = pghost;
- keywords[1] = "port";
- values[1] = pgport;
- keywords[2] = "user";
- values[2] = pguser;
- keywords[3] = "password";
- values[3] = password;
- keywords[4] = "dbname";
- values[4] = dbname;
- keywords[5] = "fallback_application_name";
- values[5] = progname;
- keywords[6] = NULL;
- values[6] = NULL;
+ keywords[0] = "host";
+ values[0] = pghost;
+ keywords[1] = "port";
+ values[1] = pgport;
+ keywords[2] = "user";
+ values[2] = pguser;
+ keywords[3] = "password";
+ values[3] = password;
+ keywords[4] = "dbname";
+ values[4] = dbname;
+ keywords[5] = "fallback_application_name";
+ values[5] = progname;
+ keywords[6] = NULL;
+ values[6] = NULL;
new_pass = false;
conn = PQconnectdbParams(keywords, values, true);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/scripts/droplang.c,v 1.33 2010/01/02 16:58:00 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/scripts/droplang.c,v 1.34 2010/02/26 02:01:20 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
executeCommand(conn, "SET search_path = pg_catalog;", progname, echo);
/*
- * Make sure the language is installed and find the OIDs of the
- * language support functions
+ * Make sure the language is installed and find the OIDs of the language
+ * support functions
*/
printfPQExpBuffer(&sql, "SELECT lanplcallfoid, laninline, lanvalidator "
"FROM pg_language WHERE lanname = '%s' AND lanispl;",
PQclear(result);
}
else
- keepinline = true; /* don't try to delete it */
+ keepinline = true; /* don't try to delete it */
/*
* Find the inline handler name
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/scripts/vacuumdb.c,v 1.35 2010/02/17 04:19:40 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/scripts/vacuumdb.c,v 1.36 2010/02/26 02:01:20 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
}
vacuum_one_database(dbname, full, verbose, and_analyze, analyze_only,
- freeze, NULL, host, port, username, prompt_password,
+ freeze, NULL, host, port, username, prompt_password,
progname, echo);
}
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/genam.h,v 1.83 2010/02/08 04:33:54 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/genam.h,v 1.84 2010/02/26 02:01:20 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* blocking to see if a conflicting transaction commits.
*
* For deferrable unique constraints, UNIQUE_CHECK_PARTIAL is specified at
- * insertion time. The index AM should test if the tuple is unique, but
+ * insertion time. The index AM should test if the tuple is unique, but
* should not throw error, block, or prevent the insertion if the tuple
* appears not to be unique. We'll recheck later when it is time for the
* constraint to be enforced. The AM must return true if the tuple is
*
* When it is time to recheck the deferred constraint, a pseudo-insertion
* call is made with UNIQUE_CHECK_EXISTING. The tuple is already in the
- * index in this case, so it should not be inserted again. Rather, just
+ * index in this case, so it should not be inserted again. Rather, just
* check for conflicting live tuples (possibly blocking).
*/
typedef enum IndexUniqueCheck
*
* Copyright (c) 2006-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/gin.h,v 1.37 2010/02/11 14:29:50 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/gin.h,v 1.38 2010/02/26 02:01:20 momjian Exp $
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#ifndef GIN_H
GinState *ginstate;
long allocatedMemory;
uint32 length;
- EntryAccumulator *entryallocator;
- ItemPointerData *tmpList;
+ EntryAccumulator *entryallocator;
+ ItemPointerData *tmpList;
RBTree *tree;
RBTreeIterator *iterator;
} BuildAccumulator;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/heapam.h,v 1.147 2010/02/08 04:33:54 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/heapam.h,v 1.148 2010/02/26 02:01:20 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern void heap2_desc(StringInfo buf, uint8 xl_info, char *rec);
extern XLogRecPtr log_heap_cleanup_info(RelFileNode rnode,
- TransactionId latestRemovedXid);
+ TransactionId latestRemovedXid);
extern XLogRecPtr log_heap_clean(Relation reln, Buffer buffer,
OffsetNumber *redirected, int nredirected,
OffsetNumber *nowdead, int ndead,
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/htup.h,v 1.112 2010/02/08 14:10:21 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/htup.h,v 1.113 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#define HEAP_XMAX_INVALID 0x0800 /* t_xmax invalid/aborted */
#define HEAP_XMAX_IS_MULTI 0x1000 /* t_xmax is a MultiXactId */
#define HEAP_UPDATED 0x2000 /* this is UPDATEd version of row */
-#define HEAP_MOVED_OFF 0x4000 /* moved to another place by
- * pre-9.0 VACUUM FULL; kept
- * for binary upgrade support */
-#define HEAP_MOVED_IN 0x8000 /* moved from another place by
- * pre-9.0 VACUUM FULL; kept
- * for binary upgrade support */
+#define HEAP_MOVED_OFF 0x4000 /* moved to another place by pre-9.0
+ * VACUUM FULL; kept for binary
+ * upgrade support */
+#define HEAP_MOVED_IN 0x8000 /* moved from another place by pre-9.0
+ * VACUUM FULL; kept for binary
+ * upgrade support */
#define HEAP_MOVED (HEAP_MOVED_OFF | HEAP_MOVED_IN)
#define HEAP_XACT_MASK 0xFFE0 /* visibility-related bits */
xl_heaptid target; /* deleted tuple id */
ItemPointerData newtid; /* new inserted tuple id */
bool all_visible_cleared; /* PD_ALL_VISIBLE was cleared */
- bool new_all_visible_cleared; /* same for the page of newtid */
+ bool new_all_visible_cleared; /* same for the page of newtid */
/* NEW TUPLE xl_heap_header AND TUPLE DATA FOLLOWS AT END OF STRUCT */
} xl_heap_update;
{
RelFileNode node;
BlockNumber block;
- TransactionId latestRemovedXid;
+ TransactionId latestRemovedXid;
uint16 nredirected;
uint16 ndead;
/* OFFSET NUMBERS FOLLOW */
*/
typedef struct xl_heap_cleanup_info
{
- RelFileNode node;
- TransactionId latestRemovedXid;
+ RelFileNode node;
+ TransactionId latestRemovedXid;
} xl_heap_cleanup_info;
#define SizeOfHeapCleanupInfo (sizeof(xl_heap_cleanup_info))
#define SizeOfHeapFreeze (offsetof(xl_heap_freeze, cutoff_xid) + sizeof(TransactionId))
extern void HeapTupleHeaderAdvanceLatestRemovedXid(HeapTupleHeader tuple,
- TransactionId *latestRemovedXid);
+ TransactionId *latestRemovedXid);
/* HeapTupleHeader functions implemented in utils/time/combocid.c */
extern CommandId HeapTupleHeaderGetCmin(HeapTupleHeader tup);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/itup.h,v 1.54 2010/01/10 04:26:36 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/itup.h,v 1.55 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern Datum nocache_index_getattr(IndexTuple tup, int attnum,
TupleDesc tupleDesc);
extern void index_deform_tuple(IndexTuple tup, TupleDesc tupleDescriptor,
- Datum *values, bool *isnull);
+ Datum *values, bool *isnull);
extern IndexTuple CopyIndexTuple(IndexTuple source);
#endif /* ITUP_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/nbtree.h,v 1.129 2010/02/13 00:59:58 sriggs Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/nbtree.h,v 1.130 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#define XLOG_BTREE_NEWROOT 0xA0 /* new root page */
#define XLOG_BTREE_DELETE_PAGE_HALF 0xB0 /* page deletion that makes
* parent half-dead */
-#define XLOG_BTREE_VACUUM 0xC0 /* delete entries on a page during vacuum */
-#define XLOG_BTREE_REUSE_PAGE 0xD0 /* old page is about to be reused from FSM */
+#define XLOG_BTREE_VACUUM 0xC0 /* delete entries on a page during
+ * vacuum */
+#define XLOG_BTREE_REUSE_PAGE 0xD0 /* old page is about to be reused from
+ * FSM */
/*
* All that we need to find changed index tuple
{
RelFileNode node;
BlockNumber block;
- TransactionId latestRemovedXid;
- int numItems; /* number of items in the offset array */
+ TransactionId latestRemovedXid;
+ int numItems; /* number of items in the offset array */
/* TARGET OFFSET NUMBERS FOLLOW AT THE END */
} xl_btree_delete;
{
RelFileNode node;
BlockNumber block;
- TransactionId latestRemovedXid;
+ TransactionId latestRemovedXid;
} xl_btree_reuse_page;
#define SizeOfBtreeReusePage (sizeof(xl_btree_reuse_page))
*
* The correctness requirement for applying these changes during recovery is
* that we must do one of these two things for every block in the index:
- * * lock the block for cleanup and apply any required changes
+ * * lock the block for cleanup and apply any required changes
* * EnsureBlockUnpinned()
* The purpose of this is to ensure that no index scans started before we
* finish scanning the index are still running by the time we begin to remove
RelFileNode node;
BlockNumber block;
BlockNumber lastBlockVacuumed;
- int numItems; /* number of items in the offset array */
+ int numItems; /* number of items in the offset array */
/* TARGET OFFSET NUMBERS FOLLOW */
} xl_btree_vacuum;
extern void _bt_delitems(Relation rel, Buffer buf,
OffsetNumber *itemnos, int nitems, bool isVacuum,
BlockNumber lastBlockVacuumed);
-extern int _bt_pagedel(Relation rel, Buffer buf, BTStack stack);
+extern int _bt_pagedel(Relation rel, Buffer buf, BTStack stack);
/*
* prototypes for functions in nbtsearch.c
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/relscan.h,v 1.69 2010/01/02 16:58:00 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/relscan.h,v 1.70 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* signaling to index AM about killing index tuples */
bool kill_prior_tuple; /* last-returned tuple is dead */
bool ignore_killed_tuples; /* do not return killed entries */
- bool xactStartedInRecovery; /* prevents killing/seeing killed tuples */
+ bool xactStartedInRecovery; /* prevents killing/seeing killed
+ * tuples */
/* index access method's private state */
void *opaque; /* access-method-specific info */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/skey.h,v 1.39 2010/01/02 16:58:00 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/skey.h,v 1.40 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* bits should be defined here). Bits 16-31 are reserved for use within
* individual index access methods.
*/
-#define SK_ISNULL 0x0001 /* sk_argument is NULL */
-#define SK_UNARY 0x0002 /* unary operator (not supported!) */
-#define SK_ROW_HEADER 0x0004 /* row comparison header (see above) */
-#define SK_ROW_MEMBER 0x0008 /* row comparison member (see above) */
-#define SK_ROW_END 0x0010 /* last row comparison member */
-#define SK_SEARCHNULL 0x0020 /* scankey represents "col IS NULL" */
-#define SK_SEARCHNOTNULL 0x0040 /* scankey represents "col IS NOT NULL" */
+#define SK_ISNULL 0x0001 /* sk_argument is NULL */
+#define SK_UNARY 0x0002 /* unary operator (not supported!) */
+#define SK_ROW_HEADER 0x0004 /* row comparison header (see above) */
+#define SK_ROW_MEMBER 0x0008 /* row comparison member (see above) */
+#define SK_ROW_END 0x0010 /* last row comparison member */
+#define SK_SEARCHNULL 0x0020 /* scankey represents "col IS NULL" */
+#define SK_SEARCHNOTNULL 0x0040 /* scankey represents "col IS NOT
+ * NULL" */
/*
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/slru.h,v 1.26 2010/02/16 22:34:50 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/slru.h,v 1.27 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* segment and page numbers in SimpleLruTruncate (see PagePrecedes()).
*
* Note: slru.c currently assumes that segment file names will be four hex
- * digits. This sets a lower bound on the segment size (64K transactions
+ * digits. This sets a lower bound on the segment size (64K transactions
* for 32-bit TransactionIds).
*/
#define SLRU_PAGES_PER_SEGMENT 32
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/tupconvert.h,v 1.2 2010/01/02 16:58:00 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/tupconvert.h,v 1.3 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern TupleConversionMap *convert_tuples_by_position(TupleDesc indesc,
- TupleDesc outdesc,
- const char *msg);
+ TupleDesc outdesc,
+ const char *msg);
extern TupleConversionMap *convert_tuples_by_name(TupleDesc indesc,
- TupleDesc outdesc,
- const char *msg);
+ TupleDesc outdesc,
+ const char *msg);
extern HeapTuple do_convert_tuple(HeapTuple tuple, TupleConversionMap *map);
*
* Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/tuptoaster.h,v 1.45 2010/01/02 16:58:00 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/tuptoaster.h,v 1.46 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* Find the maximum size of a tuple if there are to be N tuples per page.
*/
-#define MaximumBytesPerTuple(tuplesPerPage) \
+#define MaximumBytesPerTuple(tuplesPerPage) \
MAXALIGN_DOWN((BLCKSZ - \
MAXALIGN(SizeOfPageHeaderData + (tuplesPerPage) * sizeof(ItemIdData))) \
/ (tuplesPerPage))
* The code will also consider moving MAIN data out-of-line, but only as a
* last resort if the previous steps haven't reached the target tuple size.
* In this phase we use a different target size, currently equal to the
- * largest tuple that will fit on a heap page. This is reasonable since
+ * largest tuple that will fit on a heap page. This is reasonable since
* the user has told us to keep the data in-line if at all possible.
*/
#define TOAST_TUPLES_PER_PAGE_MAIN 1
-#define TOAST_TUPLE_TARGET_MAIN MaximumBytesPerTuple(TOAST_TUPLES_PER_PAGE_MAIN)
+#define TOAST_TUPLE_TARGET_MAIN MaximumBytesPerTuple(TOAST_TUPLES_PER_PAGE_MAIN)
/*
* If an index value is larger than TOAST_INDEX_TARGET, we will try to
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/xact.h,v 1.102 2010/02/13 16:15:47 sriggs Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/xact.h,v 1.103 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
typedef struct xl_xact_assignment
{
- TransactionId xtop; /* assigned XID's top-level XID */
- int nsubxacts; /* number of subtransaction XIDs */
- TransactionId xsub[1]; /* assigned subxids */
+ TransactionId xtop; /* assigned XID's top-level XID */
+ int nsubxacts; /* number of subtransaction XIDs */
+ TransactionId xsub[1]; /* assigned subxids */
} xl_xact_assignment;
#define MinSizeOfXactAssignment offsetof(xl_xact_assignment, xsub)
RelFileNode xnodes[1]; /* VARIABLE LENGTH ARRAY */
/* ARRAY OF ABORTED SUBTRANSACTION XIDs FOLLOWS */
} xl_xact_abort;
+
/* Note the intentional lack of an invalidation message array c.f. commit */
#define MinSizeOfXactAbort offsetof(xl_xact_abort, xnodes)
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/xlog.h,v 1.102 2010/02/08 04:33:54 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/xlog.h,v 1.103 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*/
#ifndef XLOG_H
#define XLOG_H
struct XLogRecData *next; /* next struct in chain, or NULL */
} XLogRecData;
-extern PGDLLIMPORT TimeLineID ThisTimeLineID; /* current TLI */
+extern PGDLLIMPORT TimeLineID ThisTimeLineID; /* current TLI */
/*
* Prior to 8.4, all activity during recovery was carried out by Startup
extern int XLogArchiveTimeout;
extern bool log_checkpoints;
extern bool XLogRequestRecoveryConnections;
-extern int MaxStandbyDelay;
+extern int MaxStandbyDelay;
#define XLogArchivingActive() (XLogArchiveMode)
#define XLogArchiveCommandSet() (XLogArchiveCommand[0] != '\0')
#define XLogIsNeeded() (XLogArchivingActive() || (MaxWalSenders > 0))
/* Do we need to WAL-log information required only for Hot Standby? */
-#define XLogStandbyInfoActive() (XLogRequestRecoveryConnections && XLogIsNeeded())
+#define XLogStandbyInfoActive() (XLogRequestRecoveryConnections && XLogIsNeeded())
#ifdef WAL_DEBUG
extern bool XLOG_DEBUG;
/* These directly affect the behavior of CreateCheckPoint and subsidiaries */
#define CHECKPOINT_IS_SHUTDOWN 0x0001 /* Checkpoint is for shutdown */
-#define CHECKPOINT_END_OF_RECOVERY 0x0002 /* Like shutdown checkpoint, but
- * issued at end of WAL recovery */
+#define CHECKPOINT_END_OF_RECOVERY 0x0002 /* Like shutdown checkpoint,
+ * but issued at end of WAL
+ * recovery */
#define CHECKPOINT_IMMEDIATE 0x0004 /* Do it without delays */
#define CHECKPOINT_FORCE 0x0008 /* Force even if no activity */
/* These are important to RequestCheckpoint */
extern void XLogFlush(XLogRecPtr RecPtr);
extern void XLogBackgroundFlush(void);
extern bool XLogNeedsFlush(XLogRecPtr RecPtr);
-extern int XLogFileInit(uint32 log, uint32 seg,
- bool *use_existent, bool use_lock);
+extern int XLogFileInit(uint32 log, uint32 seg,
+ bool *use_existent, bool use_lock);
extern int XLogFileOpen(uint32 log, uint32 seg);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/xlog_internal.h,v 1.28 2010/01/15 09:19:06 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/xlog_internal.h,v 1.29 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*/
#ifndef XLOG_INTERNAL_H
#define XLOG_INTERNAL_H
} while (0)
/* Align a record pointer to next page */
-#define NextLogPage(recptr) \
+#define NextLogPage(recptr) \
do { \
if (recptr.xrecoff % XLOG_BLCKSZ != 0) \
recptr.xrecoff += \
(XLOG_BLCKSZ - recptr.xrecoff % XLOG_BLCKSZ); \
- if (recptr.xrecoff >= XLogFileSize) \
+ if (recptr.xrecoff >= XLogFileSize) \
{ \
(recptr.xlogid)++; \
- recptr.xrecoff = 0; \
+ recptr.xrecoff = 0; \
} \
} while (0)
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/c.h,v 1.239 2010/01/07 04:53:35 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/c.h,v 1.240 2010/02/26 02:01:20 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#ifndef HAVE_UINT64
typedef unsigned long int uint64;
#endif
-
#elif defined(HAVE_LONG_LONG_INT_64)
/* We have working support for "long long int", use that */
#ifndef HAVE_UINT64
typedef unsigned long long int uint64;
#endif
-
#else
/* neither HAVE_LONG_INT_64 nor HAVE_LONG_LONG_INT_64 */
#error must have a working 64-bit integer datatype
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/catalog.h,v 1.48 2010/02/07 20:48:11 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/catalog.h,v 1.49 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern Oid GetNewOid(Relation relation);
extern Oid GetNewOidWithIndex(Relation relation, Oid indexId,
AttrNumber oidcolumn);
-extern Oid GetNewRelFileNode(Oid reltablespace, Relation pg_class);
+extern Oid GetNewRelFileNode(Oid reltablespace, Relation pg_class);
#endif /* CATALOG_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/heap.h,v 1.97 2010/02/07 20:48:11 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/heap.h,v 1.98 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
bool relhasoids);
extern void CheckAttributeNamesTypes(TupleDesc tupdesc, char relkind,
- bool allow_system_table_mods);
+ bool allow_system_table_mods);
extern void CheckAttributeType(const char *attname, Oid atttypid,
- bool allow_system_table_mods);
+ bool allow_system_table_mods);
#endif /* HEAP_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/indexing.h,v 1.116 2010/01/17 22:56:23 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/indexing.h,v 1.117 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#define SharedDependReferenceIndexId 1233
DECLARE_UNIQUE_INDEX(pg_statistic_relid_att_inh_index, 2696, on pg_statistic using btree(starelid oid_ops, staattnum int2_ops, stainherit bool_ops));
-#define StatisticRelidAttnumInhIndexId 2696
+#define StatisticRelidAttnumInhIndexId 2696
DECLARE_UNIQUE_INDEX(pg_tablespace_oid_index, 2697, on pg_tablespace using btree(oid oid_ops));
#define TablespaceOidIndexId 2697
#define UserMappingUserServerIndexId 175
DECLARE_UNIQUE_INDEX(pg_default_acl_role_nsp_obj_index, 827, on pg_default_acl using btree(defaclrole oid_ops, defaclnamespace oid_ops, defaclobjtype char_ops));
-#define DefaultAclRoleNspObjIndexId 827
+#define DefaultAclRoleNspObjIndexId 827
DECLARE_UNIQUE_INDEX(pg_default_acl_oid_index, 828, on pg_default_acl using btree(oid oid_ops));
#define DefaultAclOidIndexId 828
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_class.h,v 1.121 2010/02/07 20:48:11 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_class.h,v 1.122 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* the genbki.pl script reads this file and generates .bki
{
NameData relname; /* class name */
Oid relnamespace; /* OID of namespace containing this class */
- Oid reltype; /* OID of entry in pg_type for table's implicit row type */
- Oid reloftype; /* OID of entry in pg_type for underlying composite type */
+ Oid reltype; /* OID of entry in pg_type for table's
+ * implicit row type */
+ Oid reloftype; /* OID of entry in pg_type for underlying
+ * composite type */
Oid relowner; /* class owner */
Oid relam; /* index access method; 0 if not an index */
Oid relfilenode; /* identifier of physical storage file */
+
/* relfilenode == 0 means it is a "mapped" relation, see relmapper.c */
Oid reltablespace; /* identifier of table space for relation */
int4 relpages; /* # of blocks (not always up-to-date) */
int2 relchecks; /* # of CHECK constraints for class */
bool relhasoids; /* T if we generate OIDs for rows of rel */
bool relhaspkey; /* has (or has had) PRIMARY KEY index */
- bool relhasexclusion; /* has (or has had) exclusion constraint */
+ bool relhasexclusion; /* has (or has had) exclusion constraint */
bool relhasrules; /* has (or has had) any rules */
bool relhastriggers; /* has (or has had) any TRIGGERs */
bool relhassubclass; /* has (or has had) derived classes */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_constraint.h,v 1.37 2010/01/17 22:56:23 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_constraint.h,v 1.38 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* the genbki.pl script reads this file and generates .bki
/*
* conindid links to the index supporting the constraint, if any;
* otherwise it's 0. This is used for unique and primary-key constraints,
- * and less obviously for foreign-key constraints (where the index is
- * a unique index on the referenced relation's referenced columns).
- * Notice that the index is on conrelid in the first case but confrelid
- * in the second.
+ * and less obviously for foreign-key constraints (where the index is a
+ * unique index on the referenced relation's referenced columns). Notice
+ * that the index is on conrelid in the first case but confrelid in the
+ * second.
*/
Oid conindid; /* index supporting this constraint */
*/
/*
- * Columns of conrelid that the constraint applies to, if known
- * (this is NULL for trigger constraints)
+ * Columns of conrelid that the constraint applies to, if known (this is
+ * NULL for trigger constraints)
*/
int2 conkey[1];
extern void AlterConstraintNamespaces(Oid ownerId, Oid oldNspId,
Oid newNspId, bool isType);
-extern Oid GetConstraintByName(Oid relid, const char *conname);
+extern Oid GetConstraintByName(Oid relid, const char *conname);
#endif /* PG_CONSTRAINT_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_control.h,v 1.50 2010/02/17 04:19:40 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_control.h,v 1.51 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
pg_time_t time; /* time stamp of checkpoint */
/* Important parameter settings at time of shutdown checkpoints */
- int MaxConnections;
- int max_prepared_xacts;
- int max_locks_per_xact;
- bool XLogStandbyInfoMode;
+ int MaxConnections;
+ int max_prepared_xacts;
+ int max_locks_per_xact;
+ bool XLogStandbyInfoMode;
/*
* Oldest XID still running. This is only needed to initialize hot standby
* online checkpoints and only when archiving is enabled. Otherwise it's
* set to InvalidTransactionId.
*/
- TransactionId oldestActiveXid;
+ TransactionId oldestActiveXid;
} CheckPoint;
/* XLOG info values for XLOG rmgr */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_db_role_setting.h,v 1.3 2010/01/05 01:06:56 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_db_role_setting.h,v 1.4 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* the genbki.pl script reads this file and generates .bki
#include "utils/relcache.h"
/* ----------------
- * pg_db_role_setting definition. cpp turns this into
+ * pg_db_role_setting definition. cpp turns this into
* typedef struct FormData_pg_db_role_setting
* ----------------
*/
-#define DbRoleSettingRelationId 2964
+#define DbRoleSettingRelationId 2964
CATALOG(pg_db_role_setting,2964) BKI_SHARED_RELATION BKI_WITHOUT_OIDS
{
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_default_acl.h,v 1.3 2010/01/05 01:06:56 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_default_acl.h,v 1.4 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* the genbki.pl script reads this file and generates .bki
#include "catalog/genbki.h"
/* ----------------
- * pg_default_acl definition. cpp turns this into
+ * pg_default_acl definition. cpp turns this into
* typedef struct FormData_pg_default_acl
* ----------------
*/
CATALOG(pg_default_acl,826)
{
- Oid defaclrole; /* OID of role owning this ACL */
+ Oid defaclrole; /* OID of role owning this ACL */
Oid defaclnamespace; /* OID of namespace, or 0 for all */
- char defaclobjtype; /* see DEFACLOBJ_xxx constants below */
+ char defaclobjtype; /* see DEFACLOBJ_xxx constants below */
/*
* VARIABLE LENGTH FIELDS start here.
*/
- aclitem defaclacl[1]; /* permissions to add at CREATE time */
+ aclitem defaclacl[1]; /* permissions to add at CREATE time */
} FormData_pg_default_acl;
/* ----------------
/*
* Types of objects for which the user is allowed to specify default
- * permissions through pg_default_acl. These codes are used in the
+ * permissions through pg_default_acl. These codes are used in the
* defaclobjtype column.
*/
#define DEFACLOBJ_RELATION 'r' /* table, view */
#define DEFACLOBJ_SEQUENCE 'S' /* sequence */
#define DEFACLOBJ_FUNCTION 'f' /* function */
-#endif /* PG_DEFAULT_ACL_H */
+#endif /* PG_DEFAULT_ACL_H */
*
* Copyright (c) 2006-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_enum.h,v 1.8 2010/01/05 01:06:56 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_enum.h,v 1.9 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* the genbki.pl script reads this file and generates .bki
* prototypes for functions in pg_enum.c
*/
extern void EnumValuesCreate(Oid enumTypeOid, List *vals,
- Oid binary_upgrade_next_pg_enum_oid);
+ Oid binary_upgrade_next_pg_enum_oid);
extern void EnumValuesDelete(Oid enumTypeOid);
#endif /* PG_ENUM_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_largeobject.h,v 1.27 2010/01/05 01:06:56 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_largeobject.h,v 1.28 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* the genbki.pl script reads this file and generates .bki
#define Anum_pg_largeobject_pageno 2
#define Anum_pg_largeobject_data 3
-extern Oid LargeObjectCreate(Oid loid);
+extern Oid LargeObjectCreate(Oid loid);
extern void LargeObjectDrop(Oid loid);
extern void LargeObjectAlterOwner(Oid loid, Oid newOwnerId);
extern bool LargeObjectExists(Oid loid);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_largeobject_metadata.h,v 1.3 2010/01/05 01:06:56 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_largeobject_metadata.h,v 1.4 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* the genbki.pl script reads this file and generates .bki
#include "catalog/genbki.h"
/* ----------------
- * pg_largeobject_metadata definition. cpp turns this into
+ * pg_largeobject_metadata definition. cpp turns this into
* typedef struct FormData_pg_largeobject_metadata
* ----------------
*/
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_proc.h,v 1.569 2010/02/16 22:34:56 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/catalog/pg_proc.h,v 1.570 2010/02/26 02:01:21 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* The script catalog/genbki.pl reads this file and generates .bki
DESCR("is right of");
DATA(insert OID = 192 ( box_contained PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 2 0 16 "603 603" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ box_contained _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("is contained by?");
-DATA(insert OID = 193 ( box_contain_pt PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 2 0 16 "603 600" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ box_contain_pt _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 193 ( box_contain_pt PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 2 0 16 "603 600" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ box_contain_pt _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("contains?");
/* OIDS 200 - 299 */
DATA(insert OID = 3030 ( overlay PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 4 0 1560 "1560 1560 23 23" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ bitoverlay _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("substitute portion of bitstring");
-DATA(insert OID = 3031 ( overlay PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 3 0 1560 "1560 1560 23" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ bitoverlay_no_len _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 3031 ( overlay PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 3 0 1560 "1560 1560 23" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ bitoverlay_no_len _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("substitute portion of bitstring");
DATA(insert OID = 3032 ( get_bit PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 2 0 23 "1560 23" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ bitgetbit _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("get bit");
DESCR("statistics: reset collected statistics for current database");
DATA(insert OID = 3775 ( pg_stat_reset_shared PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f f f v 1 0 2278 "25" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_stat_reset_shared _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("statistics: reset collected statistics shared across the cluster");
-DATA(insert OID = 3776 ( pg_stat_reset_single_table_counters PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f f f v 1 0 2278 "26" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_stat_reset_single_table_counters _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 3776 ( pg_stat_reset_single_table_counters PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f f f v 1 0 2278 "26" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_stat_reset_single_table_counters _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("statistics: reset collected statistics for a single table or index in the current database");
-DATA(insert OID = 3777 ( pg_stat_reset_single_function_counters PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f f f v 1 0 2278 "26" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_stat_reset_single_function_counters _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 3777 ( pg_stat_reset_single_function_counters PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f f f v 1 0 2278 "26" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_stat_reset_single_function_counters _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("statistics: reset collected statistics for a single function in the current database");
DATA(insert OID = 1946 ( encode PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 2 0 25 "17 25" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ binary_encode _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DATA(insert OID = 2851 ( pg_xlogfile_name PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 1 0 25 "25" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_xlogfile_name _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("xlog filename, given an xlog location");
-DATA(insert OID = 3810 ( pg_is_in_recovery PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 0 0 16 "" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_is_in_recovery _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 3810 ( pg_is_in_recovery PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 0 0 16 "" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_is_in_recovery _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("true if server is in recovery");
DATA(insert OID = 3820 ( pg_last_xlog_receive_location PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 0 0 25 "" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_last_xlog_receive_location _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("disk space usage for the main fork of the specified table or index");
DATA(insert OID = 2332 ( pg_relation_size PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 2 0 20 "2205 25" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_relation_size _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("disk space usage for the specified fork of a table or index");
-DATA(insert OID = 2286 ( pg_total_relation_size PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 1 0 20 "2205" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_total_relation_size _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 2286 ( pg_total_relation_size PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 1 0 20 "2205" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_total_relation_size _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("total disk space usage for the specified table and associated indexes");
DATA(insert OID = 2288 ( pg_size_pretty PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f v 1 0 25 "20" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_size_pretty _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("convert a long int to a human readable text using size units");
DESCR("get the available time zone names");
DATA(insert OID = 2730 ( pg_get_triggerdef PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f s 2 0 25 "26 16" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_get_triggerdef_ext _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("trigger description with pretty-print option");
-DATA(insert OID = 3035 ( pg_listening_channels PGNSP PGUID 12 1 10 0 f f f t t s 0 0 25 "" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_listening_channels _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 3035 ( pg_listening_channels PGNSP PGUID 12 1 10 0 f f f t t s 0 0 25 "" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_listening_channels _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("get the channels that the current backend listens to");
DATA(insert OID = 3036 ( pg_notify PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f f f v 2 0 2278 "25 25" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ pg_notify _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("send a notification event");
DESCR("GiST support");
DATA(insert OID = 1030 ( gist_point_compress PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 1 0 2281 "2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ gist_point_compress _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("GiST support");
-DATA(insert OID = 2179 ( gist_point_consistent PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 5 0 16 "2281 603 23 26 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ gist_point_consistent _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
+DATA(insert OID = 2179 ( gist_point_consistent PGNSP PGUID 12 1 0 0 f f f t f i 5 0 16 "2281 603 23 26 2281" _null_ _null_ _null_ _null_ gist_point_consistent _null_ _null_ _null_ ));
DESCR("GiST support");
/* GIN */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994-5, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/commands/cluster.h,v 1.40 2010/02/07 20:48:13 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/commands/cluster.h,v 1.41 2010/02/26 02:01:24 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern void cluster(ClusterStmt *stmt, bool isTopLevel);
extern void cluster_rel(Oid tableOid, Oid indexOid, bool recheck,
- bool verbose, int freeze_min_age, int freeze_table_age);
+ bool verbose, int freeze_min_age, int freeze_table_age);
extern void check_index_is_clusterable(Relation OldHeap, Oid indexOid,
bool recheck);
extern void mark_index_clustered(Relation rel, Oid indexOid);
extern Oid make_new_heap(Oid OIDOldHeap, Oid NewTableSpace);
extern void finish_heap_swap(Oid OIDOldHeap, Oid OIDNewHeap,
- bool is_system_catalog,
- bool swap_toast_by_content,
- TransactionId frozenXid);
+ bool is_system_catalog,
+ bool swap_toast_by_content,
+ TransactionId frozenXid);
#endif /* CLUSTER_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/commands/defrem.h,v 1.100 2010/01/02 16:58:03 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/commands/defrem.h,v 1.101 2010/02/26 02:01:24 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern char *ChooseRelationName(const char *name1, const char *name2,
const char *label, Oid namespaceid);
extern char *ChooseIndexName(const char *tabname, Oid namespaceId,
- List *colnames, List *exclusionOpNames,
- bool primary, bool isconstraint);
+ List *colnames, List *exclusionOpNames,
+ bool primary, bool isconstraint);
extern List *ChooseIndexColumnNames(List *indexElems);
extern Oid GetDefaultOpClass(Oid type_id, Oid am_id);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994-5, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/commands/explain.h,v 1.46 2010/02/16 22:19:59 adunstan Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/commands/explain.h,v 1.47 2010/02/26 02:01:24 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
PlannedStmt *pstmt; /* top of plan */
List *rtable; /* range table */
int indent; /* current indentation level */
- List *grouping_stack; /* format-specific grouping state */
+ List *grouping_stack; /* format-specific grouping state */
} ExplainState;
/* Hook for plugins to get control in ExplainOneQuery() */
typedef void (*ExplainOneQuery_hook_type) (Query *query,
- ExplainState *es,
- const char *queryString,
- ParamListInfo params);
+ ExplainState *es,
+ const char *queryString,
+ ParamListInfo params);
extern PGDLLIMPORT ExplainOneQuery_hook_type ExplainOneQuery_hook;
/* Hook for plugins to get control in explain_get_index_name() */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/executor/executor.h,v 1.167 2010/02/08 04:33:54 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/executor/executor.h,v 1.168 2010/02/26 02:01:24 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern HeapTuple EvalPlanQualFetch(EState *estate, Relation relation,
int lockmode, ItemPointer tid, TransactionId priorXmax);
extern void EvalPlanQualInit(EPQState *epqstate, EState *estate,
- Plan *subplan, int epqParam);
+ Plan *subplan, int epqParam);
extern void EvalPlanQualSetPlan(EPQState *epqstate, Plan *subplan);
extern void EvalPlanQualAddRowMark(EPQState *epqstate, ExecRowMark *erm);
extern void EvalPlanQualSetTuple(EPQState *epqstate, Index rti,
- HeapTuple tuple);
+ HeapTuple tuple);
extern HeapTuple EvalPlanQualGetTuple(EPQState *epqstate, Index rti);
+
#define EvalPlanQualSetSlot(epqstate, slot) ((epqstate)->origslot = (slot))
extern void EvalPlanQualFetchRowMarks(EPQState *epqstate);
extern TupleTableSlot *EvalPlanQualNext(EPQState *epqstate);
typedef bool (*ExecScanRecheckMtd) (ScanState *node, TupleTableSlot *slot);
extern TupleTableSlot *ExecScan(ScanState *node, ExecScanAccessMtd accessMtd,
- ExecScanRecheckMtd recheckMtd);
+ ExecScanRecheckMtd recheckMtd);
extern void ExecAssignScanProjectionInfo(ScanState *node);
extern void ExecScanReScan(ScanState *node);
extern List *ExecInsertIndexTuples(TupleTableSlot *slot, ItemPointer tupleid,
EState *estate);
extern bool check_exclusion_constraint(Relation heap, Relation index,
- IndexInfo *indexInfo,
- ItemPointer tupleid,
- Datum *values, bool *isnull,
- EState *estate,
- bool newIndex, bool errorOK);
+ IndexInfo *indexInfo,
+ ItemPointer tupleid,
+ Datum *values, bool *isnull,
+ EState *estate,
+ bool newIndex, bool errorOK);
extern void RegisterExprContextCallback(ExprContext *econtext,
ExprContextCallbackFunction function,
*
* Copyright (c) 2001-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/executor/instrument.h,v 1.23 2010/01/08 00:48:56 itagaki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/executor/instrument.h,v 1.24 2010/02/26 02:01:24 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
typedef struct BufferUsage
{
- long shared_blks_hit; /* # of shared buffer hits */
- long shared_blks_read; /* # of shared disk blocks read */
- long shared_blks_written; /* # of shared disk blocks written */
- long local_blks_hit; /* # of local buffer hits */
- long local_blks_read; /* # of local disk blocks read */
- long local_blks_written; /* # of local disk blocks written */
- long temp_blks_read; /* # of temp blocks read */
- long temp_blks_written; /* # of temp blocks written */
+ long shared_blks_hit; /* # of shared buffer hits */
+ long shared_blks_read; /* # of shared disk blocks read */
+ long shared_blks_written; /* # of shared disk blocks written */
+ long local_blks_hit; /* # of local buffer hits */
+ long local_blks_read; /* # of local disk blocks read */
+ long local_blks_written; /* # of local disk blocks written */
+ long temp_blks_read; /* # of temp blocks read */
+ long temp_blks_written; /* # of temp blocks written */
} BufferUsage;
typedef enum InstrumentOption
{
- INSTRUMENT_TIMER = 1 << 0, /* needs timer */
- INSTRUMENT_BUFFERS = 1 << 1, /* needs buffer usage */
- INSTRUMENT_ALL = 0x7FFFFFFF
+ INSTRUMENT_TIMER = 1 << 0, /* needs timer */
+ INSTRUMENT_BUFFERS = 1 << 1, /* needs buffer usage */
+ INSTRUMENT_ALL = 0x7FFFFFFF
} InstrumentOption;
typedef struct Instrumentation
{
/* Info about current plan cycle: */
bool running; /* TRUE if we've completed first tuple */
- bool needs_bufusage; /* TRUE if we need buffer usage */
+ bool needs_bufusage; /* TRUE if we need buffer usage */
instr_time starttime; /* Start time of current iteration of node */
instr_time counter; /* Accumulated runtime for this node */
double firsttuple; /* Time for first tuple of this cycle */
double tuplecount; /* Tuples emitted so far this cycle */
- BufferUsage bufusage_start; /* Buffer usage at start */
+ BufferUsage bufusage_start; /* Buffer usage at start */
/* Accumulated statistics across all completed cycles: */
double startup; /* Total startup time (in seconds) */
double total; /* Total total time (in seconds) */
double ntuples; /* Total tuples produced */
double nloops; /* # of run cycles for this node */
- BufferUsage bufusage; /* Total buffer usage */
+ BufferUsage bufusage; /* Total buffer usage */
} Instrumentation;
-extern PGDLLIMPORT BufferUsage pgBufferUsage;
+extern PGDLLIMPORT BufferUsage pgBufferUsage;
extern Instrumentation *InstrAlloc(int n, int instrument_options);
extern void InstrStartNode(Instrumentation *instr);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/executor/spi.h,v 1.74 2010/01/02 16:58:03 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/executor/spi.h,v 1.75 2010/02/26 02:01:24 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern int SPI_execute_plan(SPIPlanPtr plan, Datum *Values, const char *Nulls,
bool read_only, long tcount);
extern int SPI_execute_plan_with_paramlist(SPIPlanPtr plan,
- ParamListInfo params,
- bool read_only, long tcount);
+ ParamListInfo params,
+ bool read_only, long tcount);
extern int SPI_exec(const char *src, long tcount);
extern int SPI_execp(SPIPlanPtr plan, Datum *Values, const char *Nulls,
long tcount);
extern SPIPlanPtr SPI_prepare_cursor(const char *src, int nargs, Oid *argtypes,
int cursorOptions);
extern SPIPlanPtr SPI_prepare_params(const char *src,
- ParserSetupHook parserSetup,
- void *parserSetupArg,
- int cursorOptions);
+ ParserSetupHook parserSetup,
+ void *parserSetupArg,
+ int cursorOptions);
extern SPIPlanPtr SPI_saveplan(SPIPlanPtr plan);
extern int SPI_freeplan(SPIPlanPtr plan);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/executor/spi_priv.h,v 1.34 2010/01/02 16:58:03 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/executor/spi_priv.h,v 1.35 2010/02/26 02:01:24 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int nargs; /* number of plan arguments */
Oid *argtypes; /* Argument types (NULL if nargs is 0) */
ParserSetupHook parserSetup; /* alternative parameter spec method */
- void *parserSetupArg;
+ void *parserSetupArg;
} _SPI_plan;
#endif /* SPI_PRIV_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/fmgr.h,v 1.64 2010/02/08 20:39:52 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/fmgr.h,v 1.65 2010/02/26 02:01:20 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
*/
/* AggCheckCallContext can return one of the following codes, or 0: */
-#define AGG_CONTEXT_AGGREGATE 1 /* regular aggregate */
-#define AGG_CONTEXT_WINDOW 2 /* window function */
+#define AGG_CONTEXT_AGGREGATE 1 /* regular aggregate */
+#define AGG_CONTEXT_WINDOW 2 /* window function */
-extern int AggCheckCallContext(FunctionCallInfo fcinfo,
- MemoryContext *aggcontext);
+extern int AggCheckCallContext(FunctionCallInfo fcinfo,
+ MemoryContext *aggcontext);
/*
*
* Copyright (c) 2002-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/funcapi.h,v 1.31 2010/01/02 16:58:00 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/funcapi.h,v 1.32 2010/02/26 02:01:20 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
char **p_argmodes);
extern int get_func_input_arg_names(Datum proargnames, Datum proargmodes,
- char ***arg_names);
+ char ***arg_names);
extern char *get_func_result_name(Oid functionId);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/libpq/be-fsstubs.h,v 1.34 2010/01/02 16:58:04 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/libpq/be-fsstubs.h,v 1.35 2010/02/26 02:01:24 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* compatibility option for access control
*/
-extern bool lo_compat_privileges;
+extern bool lo_compat_privileges;
/*
* These are not fmgr-callable, but are available to C code.
*
* Copyright (c) 2003-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/libpq/ip.h,v 1.23 2010/01/02 16:58:04 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/libpq/ip.h,v 1.24 2010/02/26 02:01:24 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#define IS_AF_UNIX(fam) (0)
#endif
-typedef void (*PgIfAddrCallback) (struct sockaddr *addr,
- struct sockaddr *netmask,
- void *cb_data);
+typedef void (*PgIfAddrCallback) (struct sockaddr * addr,
+ struct sockaddr * netmask,
+ void *cb_data);
extern int pg_getaddrinfo_all(const char *hostname, const char *servname,
const struct addrinfo * hintp,
extern void pg_promote_v4_to_v6_mask(struct sockaddr_storage * addr);
#endif
-extern int pg_foreach_ifaddr(PgIfAddrCallback callback, void *cb_data);
+extern int pg_foreach_ifaddr(PgIfAddrCallback callback, void *cb_data);
#endif /* IP_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/libpq/libpq.h,v 1.74 2010/01/15 09:19:08 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/libpq/libpq.h,v 1.75 2010/02/26 02:01:24 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* prototypes for functions in pqcomm.c
*/
extern int StreamServerPort(int family, char *hostName,
- unsigned short portNumber, char *unixSocketName, pgsocket ListenSocket[],
+ unsigned short portNumber, char *unixSocketName, pgsocket ListenSocket[],
int MaxListen);
extern int StreamConnection(pgsocket server_fd, Port *port);
extern void StreamClose(pgsocket sock);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/libpq/pqsignal.h,v 1.40 2010/01/20 18:54:27 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/libpq/pqsignal.h,v 1.41 2010/02/26 02:01:24 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* This shouldn't be in libpq, but the monitor and some other
StartupBlockSig;
#define PG_SETMASK(mask) sigprocmask(SIG_SETMASK, mask, NULL)
-#else /* not HAVE_SIGPROCMASK */
+#else /* not HAVE_SIGPROCMASK */
extern int UnBlockSig,
BlockSig,
StartupBlockSig;
#define sigaddset(set, signum) (*(set) |= (sigmask(signum)))
#define sigdelset(set, signum) (*(set) &= ~(sigmask(signum)))
-#endif /* not HAVE_SIGPROCMASK */
+#endif /* not HAVE_SIGPROCMASK */
typedef void (*pqsigfunc) (int);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/mb/pg_wchar.h,v 1.93 2010/01/02 16:58:04 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/mb/pg_wchar.h,v 1.94 2010/02/26 02:01:25 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* This is used both by the backend and by libpq, but should not be
char *name;
pg_enc encoding;
#ifdef WIN32
- unsigned codepage; /* codepage for WIN32 */
+ unsigned codepage; /* codepage for WIN32 */
#endif
} pg_enc2name;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/miscadmin.h,v 1.219 2010/02/20 21:24:02 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/miscadmin.h,v 1.220 2010/02/26 02:01:20 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* some of the information in this file should be moved to other files.
extern void PreventCommandDuringRecovery(const char *cmdname);
/* in utils/misc/guc.c */
-extern int trace_recovery_messages;
-int trace_recovery(int trace_level);
+extern int trace_recovery_messages;
+int trace_recovery(int trace_level);
/*****************************************************************************
* pdir.h -- *
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/execnodes.h,v 1.218 2010/02/12 17:33:20 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/execnodes.h,v 1.219 2010/02/26 02:01:25 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
List *ii_ExpressionsState; /* list of ExprState */
List *ii_Predicate; /* list of Expr */
List *ii_PredicateState; /* list of ExprState */
- Oid *ii_ExclusionOps; /* array with one entry per column */
+ Oid *ii_ExclusionOps; /* array with one entry per column */
Oid *ii_ExclusionProcs; /* array with one entry per column */
uint16 *ii_ExclusionStrats; /* array with one entry per column */
bool ii_Unique;
/* Stuff used for firing triggers: */
List *es_trig_target_relations; /* trigger-only ResultRelInfos */
- TupleTableSlot *es_trig_tuple_slot; /* for trigger output tuples */
- TupleTableSlot *es_trig_oldtup_slot; /* for trigger old tuples */
+ TupleTableSlot *es_trig_tuple_slot; /* for trigger output tuples */
+ TupleTableSlot *es_trig_oldtup_slot; /* for trigger old tuples */
/* Parameter info: */
ParamListInfo es_param_list_info; /* values of external params */
/*
* These fields are for re-evaluating plan quals when an updated tuple is
- * substituted in READ COMMITTED mode. es_epqTuple[] contains tuples
- * that scan plan nodes should return instead of whatever they'd normally
+ * substituted in READ COMMITTED mode. es_epqTuple[] contains tuples that
+ * scan plan nodes should return instead of whatever they'd normally
* return, or NULL if nothing to return; es_epqTupleSet[] is true if a
* particular array entry is valid; and es_epqScanDone[] is state to
* remember if the tuple has been returned already. Arrays are of size
* list_length(es_range_table) and are indexed by scan node scanrelid - 1.
*/
- HeapTuple *es_epqTuple; /* array of EPQ substitute tuples */
- bool *es_epqTupleSet; /* true if EPQ tuple is provided */
- bool *es_epqScanDone; /* true if EPQ tuple has been fetched */
+ HeapTuple *es_epqTuple; /* array of EPQ substitute tuples */
+ bool *es_epqTupleSet; /* true if EPQ tuple is provided */
+ bool *es_epqScanDone; /* true if EPQ tuple has been fetched */
} EState;
* parent RTEs, which can be ignored at runtime). See PlanRowMark for details
* about most of the fields.
*
- * es_rowMarks is a list of these structs. Each LockRows node has its own
+ * es_rowMarks is a list of these structs. Each LockRows node has its own
* list, which is the subset of locks that it is supposed to enforce; note
* that the per-node lists point to the same structs that are in the global
* list.
Relation relation; /* opened and suitably locked relation */
Index rti; /* its range table index */
Index prti; /* parent range table index, if child */
- RowMarkType markType; /* see enum in nodes/plannodes.h */
+ RowMarkType markType; /* see enum in nodes/plannodes.h */
bool noWait; /* NOWAIT option */
AttrNumber ctidAttNo; /* resno of ctid junk attribute, if any */
AttrNumber toidAttNo; /* resno of tableoid junk attribute, if any */
*/
typedef struct ModifyTableState
{
- PlanState ps; /* its first field is NodeTag */
- CmdType operation;
- PlanState **mt_plans; /* subplans (one per target rel) */
- int mt_nplans; /* number of plans in the array */
- int mt_whichplan; /* which one is being executed (0..n-1) */
- EPQState mt_epqstate; /* for evaluating EvalPlanQual rechecks */
- bool fireBSTriggers; /* do we need to fire stmt triggers? */
+ PlanState ps; /* its first field is NodeTag */
+ CmdType operation;
+ PlanState **mt_plans; /* subplans (one per target rel) */
+ int mt_nplans; /* number of plans in the array */
+ int mt_whichplan; /* which one is being executed (0..n-1) */
+ EPQState mt_epqstate; /* for evaluating EvalPlanQual rechecks */
+ bool fireBSTriggers; /* do we need to fire stmt triggers? */
} ModifyTableState;
/* ----------------
int64 frameheadpos; /* current frame head position */
int64 frametailpos; /* current frame tail position */
/* use struct pointer to avoid including windowapi.h here */
- struct WindowObjectData *agg_winobj; /* winobj for aggregate fetches */
+ struct WindowObjectData *agg_winobj; /* winobj for aggregate
+ * fetches */
int64 aggregatedbase; /* start row for current aggregates */
int64 aggregatedupto; /* rows before this one are aggregated */
int frameOptions; /* frame_clause options, see WindowDef */
ExprState *startOffset; /* expression for starting bound offset */
ExprState *endOffset; /* expression for ending bound offset */
- Datum startOffsetValue; /* result of startOffset evaluation */
- Datum endOffsetValue; /* result of endOffset evaluation */
+ Datum startOffsetValue; /* result of startOffset evaluation */
+ Datum endOffsetValue; /* result of endOffset evaluation */
MemoryContext partcontext; /* context for partition-lifespan data */
MemoryContext aggcontext; /* context for each aggregate data */
bool partition_spooled; /* true if all tuples in current
* partition have been spooled into
* tuplestore */
- bool more_partitions; /* true if there's more partitions after
- * this one */
- bool framehead_valid; /* true if frameheadpos is known up to date
- * for current row */
- bool frametail_valid; /* true if frametailpos is known up to date
- * for current row */
+ bool more_partitions;/* true if there's more partitions after this
+ * one */
+ bool framehead_valid;/* true if frameheadpos is known up to date
+ * for current row */
+ bool frametail_valid;/* true if frametailpos is known up to date
+ * for current row */
TupleTableSlot *first_part_slot; /* first tuple of current or next
* partition */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/params.h,v 1.41 2010/01/15 22:36:35 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/params.h,v 1.42 2010/02/26 02:01:25 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* Although parameter numbers are normally consecutive, we allow
* ptype == InvalidOid to signal an unused array entry.
*
- * pflags is a flags field. Currently the only used bit is:
+ * pflags is a flags field. Currently the only used bit is:
* PARAM_FLAG_CONST signals the planner that it may treat this parameter
* as a constant (i.e., generate a plan that works only for this value
* of the parameter).
*
* There are two hook functions that can be associated with a ParamListInfo
- * array to support dynamic parameter handling. First, if paramFetch
+ * array to support dynamic parameter handling. First, if paramFetch
* isn't null and the executor requires a value for an invalid parameter
* (one with ptype == InvalidOid), the paramFetch hook is called to give
* it a chance to fill in the parameter value. Second, a parserSetup
{
ParamFetchHook paramFetch; /* parameter fetch hook */
void *paramFetchArg;
- ParserSetupHook parserSetup; /* parser setup hook */
+ ParserSetupHook parserSetup; /* parser setup hook */
void *parserSetupArg;
int numParams; /* number of ParamExternDatas following */
ParamExternData params[1]; /* VARIABLE LENGTH ARRAY */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/parsenodes.h,v 1.431 2010/02/23 22:51:43 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/parsenodes.h,v 1.432 2010/02/26 02:01:25 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
NodeTag type;
List *funcname; /* qualified name of function */
List *args; /* the arguments (list of exprs) */
- List *agg_order; /* ORDER BY (list of SortBy) */
+ List *agg_order; /* ORDER BY (list of SortBy) */
bool agg_star; /* argument was really '*' */
bool agg_distinct; /* arguments were labeled DISTINCT */
bool func_variadic; /* last argument was labeled VARIADIC */
* in either "raw" form (an untransformed parse tree) or "cooked" form
* (a post-parse-analysis, executable expression tree), depending on
* how this ColumnDef node was created (by parsing, or by inheritance
- * from an existing relation). We should never have both in the same node!
+ * from an existing relation). We should never have both in the same node!
*
* The constraints list may contain a CONSTR_DEFAULT item in a raw
* parsetree produced by gram.y, but transformCreateStmt will remove
typedef enum CreateStmtLikeOption
{
- CREATE_TABLE_LIKE_DEFAULTS = 1 << 0,
- CREATE_TABLE_LIKE_CONSTRAINTS = 1 << 1,
- CREATE_TABLE_LIKE_INDEXES = 1 << 2,
- CREATE_TABLE_LIKE_STORAGE = 1 << 3,
- CREATE_TABLE_LIKE_COMMENTS = 1 << 4,
- CREATE_TABLE_LIKE_ALL = 0x7FFFFFFF
+ CREATE_TABLE_LIKE_DEFAULTS = 1 << 0,
+ CREATE_TABLE_LIKE_CONSTRAINTS = 1 << 1,
+ CREATE_TABLE_LIKE_INDEXES = 1 << 2,
+ CREATE_TABLE_LIKE_STORAGE = 1 << 3,
+ CREATE_TABLE_LIKE_COMMENTS = 1 << 4,
+ CREATE_TABLE_LIKE_ALL = 0x7FFFFFFF
} CreateStmtLikeOption;
/*
List *indexParams; /* a list of IndexElem */
List *options; /* options from WITH clause */
Node *whereClause; /* qualification (partial-index predicate) */
- List *excludeOpNames; /* exclusion operator names, or NIL if none */
+ List *excludeOpNames; /* exclusion operator names, or NIL if none */
bool unique; /* is index unique? */
bool primary; /* is index on primary key? */
bool isconstraint; /* is it from a CONSTRAINT clause? */
NodeTag type;
char *source_text; /* source text of anonymous code block */
Oid langOid; /* OID of selected language */
- bool langIsTrusted; /* trusted property of the language */
+ bool langIsTrusted; /* trusted property of the language */
} InlineCodeBlock;
/* ----------------------
*/
typedef enum VacuumOption
{
- VACOPT_VACUUM = 1 << 0, /* do VACUUM */
- VACOPT_ANALYZE = 1 << 1, /* do ANALYZE */
- VACOPT_VERBOSE = 1 << 2, /* print progress info */
- VACOPT_FREEZE = 1 << 3, /* FREEZE option */
- VACOPT_FULL = 1 << 4 /* FULL (non-concurrent) vacuum */
+ VACOPT_VACUUM = 1 << 0, /* do VACUUM */
+ VACOPT_ANALYZE = 1 << 1, /* do ANALYZE */
+ VACOPT_VERBOSE = 1 << 2, /* print progress info */
+ VACOPT_FREEZE = 1 << 3, /* FREEZE option */
+ VACOPT_FULL = 1 << 4 /* FULL (non-concurrent) vacuum */
} VacuumOption;
typedef struct VacuumStmt
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/plannodes.h,v 1.116 2010/02/12 17:33:21 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/plannodes.h,v 1.117 2010/02/26 02:01:25 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
typedef struct ModifyTable
{
Plan plan;
- CmdType operation; /* INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE */
+ CmdType operation; /* INSERT, UPDATE, or DELETE */
List *resultRelations; /* integer list of RT indexes */
- List *plans; /* plan(s) producing source data */
- List *returningLists; /* per-target-table RETURNING tlists */
- List *rowMarks; /* PlanRowMarks (non-locking only) */
- int epqParam; /* ID of Param for EvalPlanQual re-eval */
+ List *plans; /* plan(s) producing source data */
+ List *returningLists; /* per-target-table RETURNING tlists */
+ List *rowMarks; /* PlanRowMarks (non-locking only) */
+ int epqParam; /* ID of Param for EvalPlanQual re-eval */
} ModifyTable;
/* ----------------
*
* Note: subrtable is used just to carry the subquery rangetable from
* createplan.c to setrefs.c; it should always be NIL by the time the
- * executor sees the plan. Similarly for subrowmark.
+ * executor sees the plan. Similarly for subrowmark.
* ----------------
*/
typedef struct SubqueryScan
* plan-time representation of FOR UPDATE/SHARE clauses
*
* When doing UPDATE, DELETE, or SELECT FOR UPDATE/SHARE, we create a separate
- * PlanRowMark node for each non-target relation in the query. Relations that
+ * PlanRowMark node for each non-target relation in the query. Relations that
* are not specified as FOR UPDATE/SHARE are marked ROW_MARK_REFERENCE (if
* real tables) or ROW_MARK_COPY (if not).
*
* prti == parent's RT index, and can therefore be recognized as children by
* the fact that prti != rti.
*
- * The AttrNumbers are filled in during preprocess_targetlist. We use
+ * The AttrNumbers are filled in during preprocess_targetlist. We use
* different subsets of them for plain relations, inheritance children,
* and non-table relations.
*/
NodeTag type;
Index rti; /* range table index of markable relation */
Index prti; /* range table index of parent relation */
- RowMarkType markType; /* see enum above */
+ RowMarkType markType; /* see enum above */
bool noWait; /* NOWAIT option */
bool isParent; /* true if this is a "dummy" parent entry */
AttrNumber ctidAttNo; /* resno of ctid junk attribute, if any */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/primnodes.h,v 1.155 2010/02/17 04:19:40 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/primnodes.h,v 1.156 2010/02/26 02:01:25 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* Aggref
*
* The aggregate's args list is a targetlist, ie, a list of TargetEntry nodes
- * (before Postgres 9.0 it was just bare expressions). The non-resjunk TLEs
+ * (before Postgres 9.0 it was just bare expressions). The non-resjunk TLEs
* represent the aggregate's regular arguments (if any) and resjunk TLEs can
* be added at the end to represent ORDER BY expressions that are not also
* arguments. As in a top-level Query, the TLEs can be marked with
* ressortgroupref indexes to let them be referenced by SortGroupClause
* entries in the aggorder and/or aggdistinct lists. This represents ORDER BY
* and DISTINCT operations to be applied to the aggregate input rows before
- * they are passed to the transition function. The grammar only allows a
+ * they are passed to the transition function. The grammar only allows a
* simple "DISTINCT" specifier for the arguments, but we use the full
* query-level representation to allow more code sharing.
*/
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/relation.h,v 1.183 2010/01/05 21:54:00 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/relation.h,v 1.184 2010/02/26 02:01:25 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* When doing a dynamic-programming-style join search, join_rel_level[k]
* is a list of all join-relation RelOptInfos of level k, and
- * join_cur_level is the current level. New join-relation RelOptInfos
- * are automatically added to the join_rel_level[join_cur_level] list.
+ * join_cur_level is the current level. New join-relation RelOptInfos are
+ * automatically added to the join_rel_level[join_cur_level] list.
* join_rel_level is NULL if not in use.
*/
- List **join_rel_level; /* lists of join-relation RelOptInfos */
- int join_cur_level; /* index of list being extended */
+ List **join_rel_level; /* lists of join-relation RelOptInfos */
+ int join_cur_level; /* index of list being extended */
List *resultRelations; /* integer list of RT indexes, or NIL */
{
JoinPath jpath;
List *path_mergeclauses; /* join clauses to be used for merge */
- List *outersortkeys; /* keys for explicit sort, if any */
- List *innersortkeys; /* keys for explicit sort, if any */
+ List *outersortkeys; /* keys for explicit sort, if any */
+ List *innersortkeys; /* keys for explicit sort, if any */
bool materialize_inner; /* add Materialize to inner? */
} MergePath;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/optimizer/clauses.h,v 1.100 2010/01/02 16:58:07 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/optimizer/clauses.h,v 1.101 2010/02/26 02:01:26 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
typedef struct
{
int numAggs; /* total number of aggregate calls */
- int numOrderedAggs; /* number that use DISTINCT or ORDER BY */
+ int numOrderedAggs; /* number that use DISTINCT or ORDER BY */
Size transitionSpace; /* for pass-by-ref transition data */
} AggClauseCounts;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/optimizer/geqo.h,v 1.46 2010/01/02 16:58:07 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/optimizer/geqo.h,v 1.47 2010/02/26 02:01:26 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
*/
typedef struct
{
- List *initial_rels; /* the base relations we are joining */
+ List *initial_rels; /* the base relations we are joining */
unsigned short random_state[3]; /* state for erand48() */
} GeqoPrivateData;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/optimizer/geqo_recombination.h,v 1.22 2010/01/02 16:58:07 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/optimizer/geqo_recombination.h,v 1.23 2010/02/26 02:01:26 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern void free_edge_table(PlannerInfo *root, Edge *edge_table);
extern float gimme_edge_table(PlannerInfo *root, Gene *tour1, Gene *tour2,
- int num_gene, Edge *edge_table);
+ int num_gene, Edge *edge_table);
-extern int gimme_tour(PlannerInfo *root, Edge *edge_table, Gene *new_gene,
- int num_gene);
+extern int gimme_tour(PlannerInfo *root, Edge *edge_table, Gene *new_gene,
+ int num_gene);
/* partially matched crossover [PMX] */
#define MOM 0 /* indicator for gene from mom */
extern void pmx(PlannerInfo *root,
- Gene *tour1, Gene *tour2,
- Gene *offspring, int num_gene);
+ Gene *tour1, Gene *tour2,
+ Gene *offspring, int num_gene);
typedef struct City
extern void free_city_table(PlannerInfo *root, City *city_table);
/* cycle crossover [CX] */
-extern int cx(PlannerInfo *root, Gene *tour1, Gene *tour2,
- Gene *offspring, int num_gene, City *city_table);
+extern int cx(PlannerInfo *root, Gene *tour1, Gene *tour2,
+ Gene *offspring, int num_gene, City *city_table);
/* position crossover [PX] */
extern void px(PlannerInfo *root, Gene *tour1, Gene *tour2, Gene *offspring,
- int num_gene, City *city_table);
+ int num_gene, City *city_table);
/* order crossover [OX1] according to Davis */
extern void ox1(PlannerInfo *root, Gene *mom, Gene *dad, Gene *offspring,
- int num_gene, City *city_table);
+ int num_gene, City *city_table);
/* order crossover [OX2] according to Syswerda */
extern void ox2(PlannerInfo *root, Gene *mom, Gene *dad, Gene *offspring,
- int num_gene, City *city_table);
+ int num_gene, City *city_table);
#endif /* GEQO_RECOMBINATION_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/optimizer/geqo_selection.h,v 1.23 2010/01/02 16:58:07 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/optimizer/geqo_selection.h,v 1.24 2010/02/26 02:01:26 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern void geqo_selection(PlannerInfo *root,
- Chromosome *momma, Chromosome *daddy,
- Pool *pool, double bias);
+ Chromosome *momma, Chromosome *daddy,
+ Pool *pool, double bias);
#endif /* GEQO_SELECTION_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/optimizer/pathnode.h,v 1.82 2010/01/02 16:58:07 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/optimizer/pathnode.h,v 1.83 2010/02/26 02:01:26 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern UniquePath *create_unique_path(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel,
Path *subpath, SpecialJoinInfo *sjinfo);
extern NoOpPath *create_noop_path(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel,
- Path *subpath);
+ Path *subpath);
extern Path *create_subqueryscan_path(RelOptInfo *rel, List *pathkeys);
extern Path *create_functionscan_path(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel);
extern Path *create_valuesscan_path(PlannerInfo *root, RelOptInfo *rel);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/optimizer/planmain.h,v 1.125 2010/02/12 17:33:21 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/optimizer/planmain.h,v 1.126 2010/02/26 02:01:26 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern Result *make_result(PlannerInfo *root, List *tlist,
Node *resconstantqual, Plan *subplan);
extern ModifyTable *make_modifytable(CmdType operation, List *resultRelations,
- List *subplans, List *returningLists,
- List *rowMarks, int epqParam);
+ List *subplans, List *returningLists,
+ List *rowMarks, int epqParam);
extern bool is_projection_capable_plan(Plan *plan);
/*
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/analyze.h,v 1.44 2010/01/02 16:58:07 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/analyze.h,v 1.45 2010/02/26 02:01:26 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
Oid **paramTypes, int *numParams);
extern Query *parse_sub_analyze(Node *parseTree, ParseState *parentParseState,
- CommonTableExpr *parentCTE,
- bool locked_from_parent);
+ CommonTableExpr *parentCTE,
+ bool locked_from_parent);
extern Query *transformStmt(ParseState *pstate, Node *parseTree);
extern bool analyze_requires_snapshot(Node *parseTree);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/gramparse.h,v 1.51 2010/01/02 16:58:07 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/gramparse.h,v 1.52 2010/02/26 02:01:26 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "parser/gram.h"
/*
- * The YY_EXTRA data that a flex scanner allows us to pass around. Private
+ * The YY_EXTRA data that a flex scanner allows us to pass around. Private
* state needed for raw parsing/lexing goes here.
*/
typedef struct base_yy_extra_type
/*
* State variables for base_yylex().
*/
- bool have_lookahead; /* is lookahead info valid? */
+ bool have_lookahead; /* is lookahead info valid? */
int lookahead_token; /* one-token lookahead */
- core_YYSTYPE lookahead_yylval; /* yylval for lookahead token */
- YYLTYPE lookahead_yylloc; /* yylloc for lookahead token */
+ core_YYSTYPE lookahead_yylval; /* yylval for lookahead token */
+ YYLTYPE lookahead_yylloc; /* yylloc for lookahead token */
/*
* State variables that belong to the grammar.
/* from parser.c */
-extern int base_yylex(YYSTYPE *lvalp, YYLTYPE *llocp,
- core_yyscan_t yyscanner);
+extern int base_yylex(YYSTYPE *lvalp, YYLTYPE *llocp,
+ core_yyscan_t yyscanner);
/* from gram.y */
extern void parser_init(base_yy_extra_type *yyext);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/keywords.h,v 1.28 2010/01/02 16:58:07 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/keywords.h,v 1.29 2010/02/26 02:01:26 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
} ScanKeyword;
extern const ScanKeyword ScanKeywords[];
-extern const int NumScanKeywords;
+extern const int NumScanKeywords;
extern const ScanKeyword *ScanKeywordLookup(const char *text,
- const ScanKeyword *keywords,
- int num_keywords);
+ const ScanKeyword *keywords,
+ int num_keywords);
#endif /* KEYWORDS_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/parse_agg.h,v 1.41 2010/01/02 16:58:07 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/parse_agg.h,v 1.42 2010/02/26 02:01:26 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "parser/parse_node.h"
extern void transformAggregateCall(ParseState *pstate, Aggref *agg,
- bool agg_distinct);
+ bool agg_distinct);
extern void transformWindowFuncCall(ParseState *pstate, WindowFunc *wfunc,
WindowDef *windef);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/parse_cte.h,v 1.4 2010/01/02 16:58:07 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/parse_cte.h,v 1.5 2010/02/26 02:01:26 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern List *transformWithClause(ParseState *pstate, WithClause *withClause);
extern void analyzeCTETargetList(ParseState *pstate, CommonTableExpr *cte,
- List *tlist);
+ List *tlist);
#endif /* PARSE_CTE_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/parse_node.h,v 1.67 2010/01/02 16:58:07 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/parse_node.h,v 1.68 2010/02/26 02:01:26 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
*/
typedef struct ParseState ParseState;
-typedef Node * (*PreParseColumnRefHook) (ParseState *pstate, ColumnRef *cref);
-typedef Node * (*PostParseColumnRefHook) (ParseState *pstate, ColumnRef *cref, Node *var);
-typedef Node * (*ParseParamRefHook) (ParseState *pstate, ParamRef *pref);
-typedef Node * (*CoerceParamHook) (ParseState *pstate, Param *param,
- Oid targetTypeId, int32 targetTypeMod,
- int location);
+typedef Node *(*PreParseColumnRefHook) (ParseState *pstate, ColumnRef *cref);
+typedef Node *(*PostParseColumnRefHook) (ParseState *pstate, ColumnRef *cref, Node *var);
+typedef Node *(*ParseParamRefHook) (ParseState *pstate, ParamRef *pref);
+typedef Node *(*CoerceParamHook) (ParseState *pstate, Param *param,
+ Oid targetTypeId, int32 targetTypeMod,
+ int location);
/*
PostParseColumnRefHook p_post_columnref_hook;
ParseParamRefHook p_paramref_hook;
CoerceParamHook p_coerce_param_hook;
- void *p_ref_hook_state; /* common passthrough link for above */
+ void *p_ref_hook_state; /* common passthrough link for above */
};
/* Support for parser_errposition_callback function */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/parse_param.h,v 1.2 2010/01/02 16:58:07 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/parse_param.h,v 1.3 2010/02/26 02:01:27 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#include "parser/parse_node.h"
extern void parse_fixed_parameters(ParseState *pstate,
- Oid *paramTypes, int numParams);
+ Oid *paramTypes, int numParams);
extern void parse_variable_parameters(ParseState *pstate,
- Oid **paramTypes, int *numParams);
+ Oid **paramTypes, int *numParams);
extern void check_variable_parameters(ParseState *pstate, Query *query);
#endif /* PARSE_PARAM_H */
* API for the core scanner (flex machine)
*
* The core scanner is also used by PL/pgsql, so we provide a public API
- * for it. However, the rest of the backend is only expected to use the
+ * for it. However, the rest of the backend is only expected to use the
* higher-level API provided by parser.h.
*
*
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/scanner.h,v 1.2 2010/01/02 16:58:08 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/parser/scanner.h,v 1.3 2010/02/26 02:01:27 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* The YY_EXTRA data that a flex scanner allows us to pass around.
- * Private state needed by the core scanner goes here. Note that the actual
+ * Private state needed by the core scanner goes here. Note that the actual
* yy_extra struct may be larger and have this as its first component, thus
* allowing the calling parser to keep some fields of its own in YY_EXTRA.
*/
int num_keywords;
/*
- * literalbuf is used to accumulate literal values when multiple rules
- * are needed to parse a single literal. Call startlit() to reset buffer
- * to empty, addlit() to add text. NOTE: the string in literalbuf is
- * NOT necessarily null-terminated, but there always IS room to add a
- * trailing null at offset literallen. We store a null only when we
- * need it.
+ * literalbuf is used to accumulate literal values when multiple rules are
+ * needed to parse a single literal. Call startlit() to reset buffer to
+ * empty, addlit() to add text. NOTE: the string in literalbuf is NOT
+ * necessarily null-terminated, but there always IS room to add a trailing
+ * null at offset literallen. We store a null only when we need it.
*/
char *literalbuf; /* palloc'd expandable buffer */
int literallen; /* actual current string length */
/* Entry points in parser/scan.l */
extern core_yyscan_t scanner_init(const char *str,
- core_yy_extra_type *yyext,
- const ScanKeyword *keywords,
- int num_keywords);
+ core_yy_extra_type *yyext,
+ const ScanKeyword *keywords,
+ int num_keywords);
extern void scanner_finish(core_yyscan_t yyscanner);
-extern int core_yylex(core_YYSTYPE *lvalp, YYLTYPE *llocp,
- core_yyscan_t yyscanner);
+extern int core_yylex(core_YYSTYPE *lvalp, YYLTYPE *llocp,
+ core_yyscan_t yyscanner);
extern int scanner_errposition(int location, core_yyscan_t yyscanner);
extern void scanner_yyerror(const char *message, core_yyscan_t yyscanner);
*
* Copyright (c) 2001-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/pgstat.h,v 1.88 2010/01/28 14:25:41 mha Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/pgstat.h,v 1.89 2010/02/26 02:01:20 momjian Exp $
* ----------
*/
#ifndef PGSTAT_H
/* Possible targets for resetting cluster-wide shared values */
typedef enum PgStat_Shared_Reset_Target
{
- RESET_BGWRITER
+ RESET_BGWRITER
} PgStat_Shared_Reset_Target;
/* Possible object types for resetting single counters */
} PgStat_MsgResetcounter;
/* ----------
- * PgStat_MsgResetsharedcounter Sent by the backend to tell the collector
+ * PgStat_MsgResetsharedcounter Sent by the backend to tell the collector
* to reset a shared counter
* ----------
*/
} PgStat_MsgResetsharedcounter;
/* ----------
- * PgStat_MsgResetsinglecounter Sent by the backend to tell the collector
+ * PgStat_MsgResetsinglecounter Sent by the backend to tell the collector
* to reset a single counter
* ----------
*/
bool st_waiting;
/* application name; MUST be null-terminated */
- char *st_appname;
+ char *st_appname;
/* current command string; MUST be null-terminated */
char *st_activity;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/port.h,v 1.130 2010/01/31 17:35:46 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/port.h,v 1.131 2010/02/26 02:01:20 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* socket has a different definition on WIN32 */
#ifndef WIN32
typedef int pgsocket;
+
#define PGINVALID_SOCKET (-1)
#else
typedef SOCKET pgsocket;
+
#define PGINVALID_SOCKET INVALID_SOCKET
#endif
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/postmaster/autovacuum.h,v 1.17 2010/01/02 16:58:08 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/postmaster/autovacuum.h,v 1.18 2010/02/26 02:01:27 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern bool AutoVacuumingActive(void);
extern bool IsAutoVacuumLauncherProcess(void);
extern bool IsAutoVacuumWorkerProcess(void);
+
#define IsAnyAutoVacuumProcess() \
(IsAutoVacuumLauncherProcess() || IsAutoVacuumWorkerProcess())
*
* Portions Copyright (c) 2010-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h,v 1.7 2010/02/19 10:51:04 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h,v 1.8 2010/02/26 02:01:27 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
*/
typedef enum
{
- WALRCV_STOPPED, /* stopped and mustn't start up again */
- WALRCV_STARTING, /* launched, but the process hasn't initialized yet */
- WALRCV_RUNNING, /* walreceiver is running */
- WALRCV_STOPPING /* requested to stop, but still running */
+ WALRCV_STOPPED, /* stopped and mustn't start up again */
+ WALRCV_STARTING, /* launched, but the process hasn't
+ * initialized yet */
+ WALRCV_RUNNING, /* walreceiver is running */
+ WALRCV_STOPPING /* requested to stop, but still running */
} WalRcvState;
/* Shared memory area for management of walreceiver process */
typedef struct
{
/*
- * connection string; is used for walreceiver to connect with
- * the primary.
+ * connection string; is used for walreceiver to connect with the primary.
*/
- char conninfo[MAXCONNINFO];
+ char conninfo[MAXCONNINFO];
/*
* PID of currently active walreceiver process, and the current state.
*/
- pid_t pid;
+ pid_t pid;
WalRcvState walRcvState;
- pg_time_t startTime;
+ pg_time_t startTime;
/*
* receivedUpto-1 is the last byte position that has been already
- * received. When startup process starts the walreceiver, it sets this
- * to the point where it wants the streaming to begin. After that,
+ * received. When startup process starts the walreceiver, it sets this to
+ * the point where it wants the streaming to begin. After that,
* walreceiver updates this whenever it flushes the received WAL.
*/
XLogRecPtr receivedUpto;
- slock_t mutex; /* locks shared variables shown above */
+ slock_t mutex; /* locks shared variables shown above */
} WalRcvData;
extern WalRcvData *WalRcv;
extern PGDLLIMPORT walrcv_connect_type walrcv_connect;
typedef bool (*walrcv_receive_type) (int timeout, unsigned char *type,
- char **buffer, int *len);
+ char **buffer, int *len);
extern PGDLLIMPORT walrcv_receive_type walrcv_receive;
typedef void (*walrcv_disconnect_type) (void);
*
* Portions Copyright (c) 2010-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/replication/walsender.h,v 1.1 2010/01/15 09:19:09 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/replication/walsender.h,v 1.2 2010/02/26 02:01:27 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
*/
typedef struct WalSnd
{
- pid_t pid; /* this walsender's process id, or 0 */
- XLogRecPtr sentPtr; /* WAL has been sent up to this point */
+ pid_t pid; /* this walsender's process id, or 0 */
+ XLogRecPtr sentPtr; /* WAL has been sent up to this point */
- slock_t mutex; /* locks shared variables shown above */
+ slock_t mutex; /* locks shared variables shown above */
} WalSnd;
/* There is one WalSndCtl struct for the whole database cluster */
typedef struct
{
- WalSnd walsnds[1]; /* VARIABLE LENGTH ARRAY */
+ WalSnd walsnds[1]; /* VARIABLE LENGTH ARRAY */
} WalSndCtlData;
extern WalSndCtlData *WalSndCtl;
/* global state */
-extern bool am_walsender;
+extern bool am_walsender;
/* user-settable parameters */
extern int WalSndDelay;
-extern int WalSenderMain(void);
+extern int WalSenderMain(void);
extern void WalSndSignals(void);
extern Size WalSndShmemSize(void);
extern void WalSndShmemInit(void);
extern XLogRecPtr GetOldestWALSendPointer(void);
-#endif /* _WALSENDER_H */
+#endif /* _WALSENDER_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/rewrite/rewriteManip.h,v 1.52 2010/01/02 16:58:08 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/rewrite/rewriteManip.h,v 1.53 2010/02/26 02:01:27 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
typedef struct replace_rte_variables_context replace_rte_variables_context;
-typedef Node * (*replace_rte_variables_callback) (Var *var,
- replace_rte_variables_context *context);
+typedef Node *(*replace_rte_variables_callback) (Var *var,
+ replace_rte_variables_context *context);
struct replace_rte_variables_context
{
replace_rte_variables_callback callback; /* callback function */
- void *callback_arg; /* context data for callback function */
- int target_varno; /* RTE index to search for */
- int sublevels_up; /* (current) nesting depth */
- bool inserted_sublink; /* have we inserted a SubLink? */
+ void *callback_arg; /* context data for callback function */
+ int target_varno; /* RTE index to search for */
+ int sublevels_up; /* (current) nesting depth */
+ bool inserted_sublink; /* have we inserted a SubLink? */
};
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/fd.h,v 1.67 2010/02/15 00:50:57 stark Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/fd.h,v 1.68 2010/02/26 02:01:27 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern int pg_fsync_no_writethrough(int fd);
extern int pg_fsync_writethrough(int fd);
extern int pg_fdatasync(int fd);
-extern int pg_flush_data(int fd, off_t offset, off_t amount);
+extern int pg_flush_data(int fd, off_t offset, off_t amount);
/* Filename components for OpenTemporaryFile */
#define PG_TEMP_FILES_DIR "pgsql_tmp"
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/lock.h,v 1.118 2010/01/02 16:58:08 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/lock.h,v 1.119 2010/02/26 02:01:27 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
bool sessionLock,
bool dontWait);
extern LockAcquireResult LockAcquireExtended(const LOCKTAG *locktag,
- LOCKMODE lockmode,
- bool sessionLock,
- bool dontWait,
- bool report_memory_error);
+ LOCKMODE lockmode,
+ bool sessionLock,
+ bool dontWait,
+ bool report_memory_error);
extern bool LockRelease(const LOCKTAG *locktag,
LOCKMODE lockmode, bool sessionLock);
extern void LockReleaseAll(LOCKMETHODID lockmethodid, bool allLocks);
typedef struct xl_standby_lock
{
- TransactionId xid; /* xid of holder of AccessExclusiveLock */
- Oid dbOid;
- Oid relOid;
+ TransactionId xid; /* xid of holder of AccessExclusiveLock */
+ Oid dbOid;
+ Oid relOid;
} xl_standby_lock;
extern xl_standby_lock *GetRunningTransactionLocks(int *nlocks);
extern void lock_twophase_postabort(TransactionId xid, uint16 info,
void *recdata, uint32 len);
extern void lock_twophase_standby_recover(TransactionId xid, uint16 info,
- void *recdata, uint32 len);
+ void *recdata, uint32 len);
extern DeadLockState DeadLockCheck(PGPROC *proc);
extern PGPROC *GetBlockingAutoVacuumPgproc(void);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/lwlock.h,v 1.45 2010/02/16 22:34:57 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/lwlock.h,v 1.46 2010/02/26 02:01:27 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
AutovacuumScheduleLock,
SyncScanLock,
RelationMappingLock,
- AsyncCtlLock,
- AsyncQueueLock,
+ AsyncCtlLock,
+ AsyncQueueLock,
/* Individual lock IDs end here */
FirstBufMappingLock,
FirstLockMgrLock = FirstBufMappingLock + NUM_BUFFER_PARTITIONS,
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/pmsignal.h,v 1.29 2010/01/27 15:27:51 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/pmsignal.h,v 1.30 2010/02/26 02:01:27 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
PMSIGNAL_ROTATE_LOGFILE, /* send SIGUSR1 to syslogger to rotate logfile */
PMSIGNAL_START_AUTOVAC_LAUNCHER, /* start an autovacuum launcher */
PMSIGNAL_START_AUTOVAC_WORKER, /* start an autovacuum worker */
- PMSIGNAL_START_WALRECEIVER, /* start a walreceiver */
+ PMSIGNAL_START_WALRECEIVER, /* start a walreceiver */
NUM_PMSIGNALS /* Must be last value of enum! */
} PMSignalReason;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/proc.h,v 1.120 2010/02/13 01:32:20 sriggs Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/proc.h,v 1.121 2010/02/26 02:01:27 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern void PublishStartupProcessInformation(void);
extern void SetStartupBufferPinWaitBufId(int bufid);
-extern int GetStartupBufferPinWaitBufId(void);
+extern int GetStartupBufferPinWaitBufId(void);
extern bool HaveNFreeProcs(int n);
extern void ProcReleaseLocks(bool isCommit);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/procsignal.h,v 1.5 2010/02/13 01:32:20 sriggs Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/procsignal.h,v 1.6 2010/02/26 02:01:28 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern void ProcSignalShmemInit(void);
extern void ProcSignalInit(int pss_idx);
-extern int SendProcSignal(pid_t pid, ProcSignalReason reason,
- BackendId backendId);
+extern int SendProcSignal(pid_t pid, ProcSignalReason reason,
+ BackendId backendId);
extern void procsignal_sigusr1_handler(SIGNAL_ARGS);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/sinval.h,v 1.58 2010/02/13 16:15:48 sriggs Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/sinval.h,v 1.59 2010/02/26 02:01:28 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern bool DisableCatchupInterrupt(void);
extern int xactGetCommittedInvalidationMessages(SharedInvalidationMessage **msgs,
- bool *RelcacheInitFileInval);
+ bool *RelcacheInitFileInval);
extern void ProcessCommittedInvalidationMessages(SharedInvalidationMessage *msgs,
- int nmsgs, bool RelcacheInitFileInval,
- Oid dbid, Oid tsid);
+ int nmsgs, bool RelcacheInitFileInval,
+ Oid dbid, Oid tsid);
#endif /* SINVAL_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/smgr.h,v 1.70 2010/02/09 21:43:30 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/smgr.h,v 1.71 2010/02/26 02:01:28 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* These next three fields are not actually used or manipulated by smgr,
* except that they are reset to InvalidBlockNumber upon a cache flush
- * event (in particular, upon truncation of the relation). Higher levels
+ * event (in particular, upon truncation of the relation). Higher levels
* store cached state here so that it will be reset when truncation
* happens. In all three cases, InvalidBlockNumber means "unknown".
*/
- BlockNumber smgr_targblock; /* current insertion target block */
- BlockNumber smgr_fsm_nblocks; /* last known size of fsm fork */
+ BlockNumber smgr_targblock; /* current insertion target block */
+ BlockNumber smgr_fsm_nblocks; /* last known size of fsm fork */
BlockNumber smgr_vm_nblocks; /* last known size of vm fork */
/* additional public fields may someday exist here */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/standby.h,v 1.8 2010/02/13 01:32:20 sriggs Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/standby.h,v 1.9 2010/02/26 02:01:28 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern void ShutdownRecoveryTransactionEnvironment(void);
extern void ResolveRecoveryConflictWithSnapshot(TransactionId latestRemovedXid,
- RelFileNode node);
+ RelFileNode node);
extern void ResolveRecoveryConflictWithRemovedTransactionId(void);
extern void ResolveRecoveryConflictWithTablespace(Oid tsid);
extern void ResolveRecoveryConflictWithDatabase(Oid dbid);
*/
extern void StandbyAcquireAccessExclusiveLock(TransactionId xid, Oid dbOid, Oid relOid);
extern void StandbyReleaseLockTree(TransactionId xid,
- int nsubxids, TransactionId *subxids);
+ int nsubxids, TransactionId *subxids);
extern void StandbyReleaseAllLocks(void);
extern void StandbyReleaseOldLocks(TransactionId removeXid);
typedef struct xl_standby_locks
{
- int nlocks; /* number of entries in locks array */
- xl_standby_lock locks[1]; /* VARIABLE LENGTH ARRAY */
+ int nlocks; /* number of entries in locks array */
+ xl_standby_lock locks[1]; /* VARIABLE LENGTH ARRAY */
} xl_standby_locks;
/*
*/
typedef struct xl_running_xacts
{
- int xcnt; /* # of xact ids in xids[] */
- bool subxid_overflow; /* snapshot overflowed, subxids missing */
- TransactionId nextXid; /* copy of ShmemVariableCache->nextXid */
- TransactionId oldestRunningXid; /* *not* oldestXmin */
+ int xcnt; /* # of xact ids in xids[] */
+ bool subxid_overflow; /* snapshot overflowed, subxids missing */
+ TransactionId nextXid; /* copy of ShmemVariableCache->nextXid */
+ TransactionId oldestRunningXid; /* *not* oldestXmin */
- TransactionId xids[1]; /* VARIABLE LENGTH ARRAY */
+ TransactionId xids[1]; /* VARIABLE LENGTH ARRAY */
} xl_running_xacts;
#define MinSizeOfXactRunningXacts offsetof(xl_running_xacts, xids)
typedef struct RunningTransactionsData
{
- int xcnt; /* # of xact ids in xids[] */
- bool subxid_overflow; /* snapshot overflowed, subxids missing */
- TransactionId nextXid; /* copy of ShmemVariableCache->nextXid */
- TransactionId oldestRunningXid; /* *not* oldestXmin */
+ int xcnt; /* # of xact ids in xids[] */
+ bool subxid_overflow; /* snapshot overflowed, subxids missing */
+ TransactionId nextXid; /* copy of ShmemVariableCache->nextXid */
+ TransactionId oldestRunningXid; /* *not* oldestXmin */
- TransactionId *xids; /* array of (sub)xids still running */
+ TransactionId *xids; /* array of (sub)xids still running */
} RunningTransactionsData;
typedef RunningTransactionsData *RunningTransactions;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/tcop/tcopprot.h,v 1.103 2010/01/16 10:05:59 sriggs Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/tcop/tcopprot.h,v 1.104 2010/02/26 02:01:28 momjian Exp $
*
* OLD COMMENTS
* This file was created so that other c files could get the two
extern List *pg_analyze_and_rewrite(Node *parsetree, const char *query_string,
Oid *paramTypes, int numParams);
extern List *pg_analyze_and_rewrite_params(Node *parsetree,
- const char *query_string,
- ParserSetupHook parserSetup,
- void *parserSetupArg);
+ const char *query_string,
+ ParserSetupHook parserSetup,
+ void *parserSetupArg);
extern PlannedStmt *pg_plan_query(Query *querytree, int cursorOptions,
ParamListInfo boundParams);
extern List *pg_plan_queries(List *querytrees, int cursorOptions,
extern void quickdie(SIGNAL_ARGS);
extern void StatementCancelHandler(SIGNAL_ARGS);
extern void FloatExceptionHandler(SIGNAL_ARGS);
-extern void RecoveryConflictInterrupt(ProcSignalReason reason); /* called from SIGUSR1 handler */
+extern void RecoveryConflictInterrupt(ProcSignalReason reason); /* called from SIGUSR1
+ * handler */
extern void prepare_for_client_read(void);
extern void client_read_ended(void);
extern const char *process_postgres_switches(int argc, char *argv[],
- GucContext ctx);
+ GucContext ctx);
extern int PostgresMain(int argc, char *argv[], const char *username);
extern long get_stack_depth_rlimit(void);
extern void ResetUsage(void);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/tcop/utility.h,v 1.39 2010/01/02 16:58:09 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/tcop/utility.h,v 1.40 2010/02/26 02:01:28 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* Hook for plugins to get control in ProcessUtility() */
typedef void (*ProcessUtility_hook_type) (Node *parsetree,
- const char *queryString, ParamListInfo params, bool isTopLevel,
- DestReceiver *dest, char *completionTag);
+ const char *queryString, ParamListInfo params, bool isTopLevel,
+ DestReceiver *dest, char *completionTag);
extern PGDLLIMPORT ProcessUtility_hook_type ProcessUtility_hook;
extern void ProcessUtility(Node *parsetree, const char *queryString,
ParamListInfo params, bool isTopLevel,
DestReceiver *dest, char *completionTag);
extern void standard_ProcessUtility(Node *parsetree, const char *queryString,
- ParamListInfo params, bool isTopLevel,
- DestReceiver *dest, char *completionTag);
+ ParamListInfo params, bool isTopLevel,
+ DestReceiver *dest, char *completionTag);
extern bool UtilityReturnsTuples(Node *parsetree);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/acl.h,v 1.112 2010/01/02 16:58:09 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/acl.h,v 1.113 2010/02/26 02:01:28 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
* An ACL array is simply an array of AclItems, representing the union
*/
extern Acl *acldefault(GrantObjectType objtype, Oid ownerId);
extern Acl *get_user_default_acl(GrantObjectType objtype, Oid ownerId,
- Oid nsp_oid);
+ Oid nsp_oid);
extern Acl *aclupdate(const Acl *old_acl, const AclItem *mod_aip,
int modechg, Oid ownerId, DropBehavior behavior);
extern AclMode pg_language_aclmask(Oid lang_oid, Oid roleid,
AclMode mask, AclMaskHow how);
extern AclMode pg_largeobject_aclmask_snapshot(Oid lobj_oid, Oid roleid,
- AclMode mask, AclMaskHow how, Snapshot snapshot);
+ AclMode mask, AclMaskHow how, Snapshot snapshot);
extern AclMode pg_namespace_aclmask(Oid nsp_oid, Oid roleid,
AclMode mask, AclMaskHow how);
extern AclMode pg_tablespace_aclmask(Oid spc_oid, Oid roleid,
extern AclResult pg_proc_aclcheck(Oid proc_oid, Oid roleid, AclMode mode);
extern AclResult pg_language_aclcheck(Oid lang_oid, Oid roleid, AclMode mode);
extern AclResult pg_largeobject_aclcheck_snapshot(Oid lang_oid, Oid roleid,
- AclMode mode, Snapshot snapshot);
+ AclMode mode, Snapshot snapshot);
extern AclResult pg_namespace_aclcheck(Oid nsp_oid, Oid roleid, AclMode mode);
extern AclResult pg_tablespace_aclcheck(Oid spc_oid, Oid roleid, AclMode mode);
extern AclResult pg_foreign_data_wrapper_aclcheck(Oid fdw_oid, Oid roleid, AclMode mode);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/builtins.h,v 1.347 2010/02/07 20:48:13 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/builtins.h,v 1.348 2010/02/26 02:01:28 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern Datum xidsend(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS);
extern Datum xideq(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS);
extern Datum xid_age(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS);
-extern int xidComparator(const void *arg1, const void *arg2);
+extern int xidComparator(const void *arg1, const void *arg2);
extern Datum cidin(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS);
extern Datum cidout(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS);
extern Datum cidrecv(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/catcache.h,v 1.72 2010/02/14 18:42:18 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/catcache.h,v 1.73 2010/02/26 02:01:29 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
int cc_nbuckets; /* # of hash buckets in this cache */
int cc_nkeys; /* # of keys (1..CATCACHE_MAXKEYS) */
int cc_key[CATCACHE_MAXKEYS]; /* AttrNumber of each key */
- PGFunction cc_hashfunc[CATCACHE_MAXKEYS]; /* hash function for each key */
- ScanKeyData cc_skey[CATCACHE_MAXKEYS]; /* precomputed key info for heap scans */
+ PGFunction cc_hashfunc[CATCACHE_MAXKEYS]; /* hash function for each key */
+ ScanKeyData cc_skey[CATCACHE_MAXKEYS]; /* precomputed key info for
+ * heap scans */
bool cc_isname[CATCACHE_MAXKEYS]; /* flag "name" key columns */
Dllist cc_lists; /* list of CatCList structs */
#ifdef CATCACHE_STATS
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/datetime.h,v 1.78 2010/01/02 16:58:10 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/datetime.h,v 1.79 2010/02/26 02:01:29 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
|| (((m) == JULIAN_MINMONTH) && ((d) >= JULIAN_MINDAY))))) \
&& ((y) < JULIAN_MAXYEAR))
-#define JULIAN_MAX (2147483494) /* == date2j(JULIAN_MAXYEAR, 1 ,1) */
+#define JULIAN_MAX (2147483494) /* == date2j(JULIAN_MAXYEAR, 1 ,1) */
/* Julian-date equivalents of Day 0 in Unix and Postgres reckoning */
#define UNIX_EPOCH_JDATE 2440588 /* == date2j(1970, 1, 1) */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/pg_crc.h,v 1.23 2010/01/07 04:53:35 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/pg_crc.h,v 1.24 2010/02/26 02:01:29 momjian Exp $
*/
#ifndef PG_CRC_H
#define PG_CRC_H
/* Constant table for CRC calculation */
extern CRCDLLIMPORT const uint32 pg_crc64_table0[];
extern CRCDLLIMPORT const uint32 pg_crc64_table1[];
-
#else /* use int64 implementation */
typedef struct pg_crc64
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/plancache.h,v 1.17 2010/01/02 16:58:10 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/plancache.h,v 1.18 2010/02/26 02:01:29 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
Oid *param_types; /* array of parameter type OIDs, or NULL */
int num_params; /* length of param_types array */
ParserSetupHook parserSetup; /* alternative parameter spec method */
- void *parserSetupArg;
+ void *parserSetupArg;
int cursor_options; /* cursor options used for planning */
bool fully_planned; /* do we cache planner or rewriter output? */
bool fixed_result; /* disallow change in result tupdesc? */
bool fixed_result,
MemoryContext context);
extern void CachedPlanSetParserHook(CachedPlanSource *plansource,
- ParserSetupHook parserSetup,
- void *parserSetupArg);
+ ParserSetupHook parserSetup,
+ void *parserSetupArg);
extern void DropCachedPlan(CachedPlanSource *plansource);
extern CachedPlan *RevalidateCachedPlan(CachedPlanSource *plansource,
bool useResOwner);
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*
* rbtree.h
- * interface for PostgreSQL generic Red-Black binary tree package
+ * interface for PostgreSQL generic Red-Black binary tree package
*
* Copyright (c) 1996-2009, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/rbtree.h,v 1.1 2010/02/11 14:29:50 teodor Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/rbtree.h,v 1.2 2010/02/26 02:01:29 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
typedef struct RBTreeIterator RBTreeIterator;
typedef int (*rb_comparator) (const void *a, const void *b, void *arg);
-typedef void* (*rb_appendator) (void *current, void *new, void *arg);
+typedef void *(*rb_appendator) (void *current, void *new, void *arg);
typedef void (*rb_freefunc) (void *a);
extern RBTree *rb_create(rb_comparator comparator,
- rb_appendator appendator,
- rb_freefunc freefunc,
- void *arg);
+ rb_appendator appendator,
+ rb_freefunc freefunc,
+ void *arg);
extern void *rb_find(RBTree *rb, void *data);
extern void *rb_insert(RBTree *rb, void *data);
InvertedWalk
} RBOrderControl;
-extern RBTreeIterator* rb_begin_iterate(RBTree *rb, RBOrderControl ctrl);
+extern RBTreeIterator *rb_begin_iterate(RBTree *rb, RBOrderControl ctrl);
extern void *rb_iterate(RBTreeIterator *iterator);
extern void rb_free_iterator(RBTreeIterator *iterator);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/rel.h,v 1.123 2010/02/09 21:43:30 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/rel.h,v 1.124 2010/02/26 02:01:29 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* RelationGetTargetBlock
* Fetch relation's current insertion target block.
*
- * Returns InvalidBlockNumber if there is no current target block. Note
+ * Returns InvalidBlockNumber if there is no current target block. Note
* that the target block status is discarded on any smgr-level invalidation.
*/
#define RelationGetTargetBlock(relation) \
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/relcache.h,v 1.68 2010/02/07 20:48:13 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/relcache.h,v 1.69 2010/02/26 02:01:29 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern List *RelationGetIndexPredicate(Relation relation);
extern Bitmapset *RelationGetIndexAttrBitmap(Relation relation);
extern void RelationGetExclusionInfo(Relation indexRelation,
- Oid **operators,
- Oid **procs,
- uint16 **strategies);
+ Oid **operators,
+ Oid **procs,
+ uint16 **strategies);
extern void RelationSetIndexList(Relation relation,
List *indexIds, Oid oidIndex);
* Routine to manage assignment of new relfilenode to a relation
*/
extern void RelationSetNewRelfilenode(Relation relation,
- TransactionId freezeXid);
+ TransactionId freezeXid);
/*
* Routines for flushing/rebuilding relcache entries in various scenarios
/* should be used only by relcache.c and catcache.c */
extern bool criticalRelcachesBuilt;
+
/* should be used only by relcache.c and postinit.c */
extern bool criticalSharedRelcachesBuilt;
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/relmapper.h,v 1.1 2010/02/07 20:48:13 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/relmapper.h,v 1.2 2010/02/26 02:01:29 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern Oid RelationMapOidToFilenode(Oid relationId, bool shared);
extern void RelationMapUpdateMap(Oid relationId, Oid fileNode, bool shared,
- bool immediate);
+ bool immediate);
extern void RelationMapRemoveMapping(Oid relationId);
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/spccache.h,v 1.1 2010/01/05 21:54:00 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/spccache.h,v 1.2 2010/02/26 02:01:29 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#define SPCCACHE_H
void get_tablespace_page_costs(Oid spcid, float8 *spc_random_page_cost,
- float8 *spc_seq_page_cost);
+ float8 *spc_seq_page_cost);
#endif /* SPCCACHE_H */
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/tuplesort.h,v 1.35 2010/01/02 16:58:10 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/tuplesort.h,v 1.36 2010/02/26 02:01:29 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
extern void tuplesort_end(Tuplesortstate *state);
extern void tuplesort_get_stats(Tuplesortstate *state,
- const char **sortMethod,
- const char **spaceType,
- long *spaceUsed);
+ const char **sortMethod,
+ const char **spaceType,
+ long *spaceUsed);
extern int tuplesort_merge_order(long allowedMem);
-/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/compatlib/informix.c,v 1.63 2010/01/26 09:07:31 meskes Exp $ */
+/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/compatlib/informix.c,v 1.64 2010/02/26 02:01:29 momjian Exp $ */
#define POSTGRES_ECPG_INTERNAL
#include "postgres_fe.h"
size_t fmt_len = strlen(fmt);
size_t temp_len;
int i,
- j, /* position in temp */
+ j, /* position in temp */
k,
dotpos;
int leftalign = 0,
-/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/data.c,v 1.49 2010/02/04 09:41:34 meskes Exp $ */
+/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/data.c,v 1.50 2010/02/26 02:01:29 momjian Exp $ */
#define POSTGRES_ECPG_INTERNAL
#include "postgres_fe.h"
if (isarray == ECPG_ARRAY_VECTOR && c == ' ')
return true;
-
+
return false;
}
if (isarray == ECPG_ARRAY_VECTOR && c == '\0')
return true;
-
+
return false;
}
get_float8_nan(void)
{
#ifdef NAN
- return (double) NAN;
+ return (double) NAN;
#else
return (double) (0.0 / 0.0);
#endif
ecpg_log("ecpg_get_data on line %d: RESULT: %s offset: %ld; array: %s\n", lineno, pval ? (binary ? "BINARY" : pval) : "EMPTY", log_offset, ECPG_IS_ARRAY(isarray) ? "yes" : "no");
/* pval is a pointer to the value */
- if (!pval)
+ if (!pval)
{
/*
- * This should never happen because we already checked that we
- * found at least one tuple, but let's play it safe.
+ * This should never happen because we already checked that we found
+ * at least one tuple, but let's play it safe.
*/
ecpg_raise(lineno, ECPG_NOT_FOUND, ECPG_SQLSTATE_NO_DATA, NULL);
return (false);
case ECPGt_unsigned_long_long:
*((unsigned long long int *) (var + offset * act_tuple)) = strtoull(pval, &scan_length, 10);
if ((isarray && *scan_length != ',' && *scan_length != '}')
- || (!isarray && !(INFORMIX_MODE(compat) && *scan_length == '.') && *scan_length != '\0' && *scan_length != ' ')) /* Garbage left */
+ || (!isarray && !(INFORMIX_MODE(compat) && *scan_length == '.') && *scan_length != '\0' && *scan_length != ' ')) /* Garbage left */
{
ecpg_raise(lineno, ECPG_UINT_FORMAT, ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
return (false);
case ECPGt_unsigned_char:
case ECPGt_string:
{
- char *str = (char *) (var + offset * act_tuple);
+ char *str = (char *) (var + offset * act_tuple);
+
if (varcharsize == 0 || varcharsize > size)
{
strncpy(str, pval, size + 1);
/* do the rtrim() */
if (type == ECPGt_string)
{
- char *last = str + size;
+ char *last = str + size;
+
while (last > str && (*last == ' ' || *last == '\0'))
{
*last = '\0';
if (INFORMIX_MODE(compat))
{
/*
- * Informix wants its own NULL value here
- * instead of an error
+ * Informix wants its own NULL value here instead
+ * of an error
*/
nres = PGTYPESnumeric_new();
if (nres)
else
{
ecpg_raise(lineno, ECPG_OUT_OF_MEMORY,
- ECPG_SQLSTATE_ECPG_OUT_OF_MEMORY, NULL);
+ ECPG_SQLSTATE_ECPG_OUT_OF_MEMORY, NULL);
return (false);
}
}
else
{
ecpg_raise(lineno, ECPG_NUMERIC_FORMAT,
- ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
+ ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
return (false);
}
}
{
free(nres);
ecpg_raise(lineno, ECPG_NUMERIC_FORMAT,
- ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
+ ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
return (false);
}
}
if (INFORMIX_MODE(compat))
{
/*
- * Informix wants its own NULL value here
- * instead of an error
+ * Informix wants its own NULL value here instead
+ * of an error
*/
ires = (interval *) ecpg_alloc(sizeof(interval), lineno);
if (!ires)
else
{
ecpg_raise(lineno, ECPG_INTERVAL_FORMAT,
- ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
+ ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
return (false);
}
}
{
free(ires);
ecpg_raise(lineno, ECPG_INTERVAL_FORMAT,
- ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
+ ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
return (false);
}
}
if (INFORMIX_MODE(compat))
{
/*
- * Informix wants its own NULL value here
- * instead of an error
+ * Informix wants its own NULL value here instead
+ * of an error
*/
ECPGset_noind_null(ECPGt_date, &ddres);
}
else
{
ecpg_raise(lineno, ECPG_DATE_FORMAT,
- ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
+ ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
return (false);
}
}
if (garbage_left(isarray, scan_length, compat))
{
ecpg_raise(lineno, ECPG_DATE_FORMAT,
- ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
+ ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
return (false);
}
}
if (INFORMIX_MODE(compat))
{
/*
- * Informix wants its own NULL value here
- * instead of an error
+ * Informix wants its own NULL value here instead
+ * of an error
*/
ECPGset_noind_null(ECPGt_timestamp, &tres);
}
else
{
ecpg_raise(lineno, ECPG_TIMESTAMP_FORMAT,
- ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
+ ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
return (false);
}
}
if (garbage_left(isarray, scan_length, compat))
{
ecpg_raise(lineno, ECPG_TIMESTAMP_FORMAT,
- ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
+ ECPG_SQLSTATE_DATATYPE_MISMATCH, pval);
return (false);
}
}
++act_tuple;
/* set pval to the next entry */
- /* *pval != '\0' should not be needed, but is used as a safety guard */
+
+ /*
+ * *pval != '\0' should not be needed, but is used as a safety
+ * guard
+ */
for (; *pval != '\0' && (string || (!array_delimiter(isarray, *pval) && !array_boundary(isarray, *pval))); ++pval)
if (*pval == '"')
string = string ? false : true;
/* dynamic SQL support routines
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/descriptor.c,v 1.35 2010/01/15 13:19:12 meskes Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/descriptor.c,v 1.36 2010/02/26 02:01:30 momjian Exp $
*/
#define POSTGRES_ECPG_INTERNAL
case ECPGd_ret_octet:
RETURN_IF_NO_DATA;
+
/*
* this is like ECPGstore_result
*/
sqlca->sqlerrd[2] = ntuples;
return (true);
}
+
#undef RETURN_IF_NO_DATA
bool
}
bool
-ECPGdescribe(int line, int compat, bool input, const char *connection_name, const char *stmt_name, ...)
+ECPGdescribe(int line, int compat, bool input, const char *connection_name, const char *stmt_name,...)
{
bool ret = false;
struct connection *con;
if (!con)
{
ecpg_raise(line, ECPG_NO_CONN, ECPG_SQLSTATE_CONNECTION_DOES_NOT_EXIST,
- connection_name ? connection_name : ecpg_gettext("NULL"));
+ connection_name ? connection_name : ecpg_gettext("NULL"));
return ret;
}
prep = ecpg_find_prepared_statement(stmt_name, con, NULL);
for (;;)
{
- enum ECPGttype type, dummy_type;
- void *ptr, *dummy_ptr;
+ enum ECPGttype type,
+ dummy_type;
+ void *ptr,
+ *dummy_ptr;
long dummy;
/* variable type */
if (type == ECPGt_EORT)
break;
- /* rest of variable parameters*/
+ /* rest of variable parameters */
ptr = va_arg(args, void *);
dummy = va_arg(args, long);
dummy = va_arg(args, long);
switch (type)
{
case ECPGt_descriptor:
- {
- char *name = ptr;
- struct descriptor *desc = ecpg_find_desc(line, name);
-
- if (desc == NULL)
- break;
-
- res = PQdescribePrepared(con->connection, stmt_name);
- if (!ecpg_check_PQresult(res, line, con->connection, compat))
- break;
-
- if (desc->result != NULL)
- PQclear(desc->result);
-
- desc->result = res;
- ret = true;
- break;
- }
- case ECPGt_sqlda:
- {
- if (INFORMIX_MODE(compat))
{
- struct sqlda_compat **_sqlda = ptr;
- struct sqlda_compat *sqlda;
+ char *name = ptr;
+ struct descriptor *desc = ecpg_find_desc(line, name);
+
+ if (desc == NULL)
+ break;
res = PQdescribePrepared(con->connection, stmt_name);
if (!ecpg_check_PQresult(res, line, con->connection, compat))
break;
- sqlda = ecpg_build_compat_sqlda(line, res, -1, compat);
- if (sqlda)
+ if (desc->result != NULL)
+ PQclear(desc->result);
+
+ desc->result = res;
+ ret = true;
+ break;
+ }
+ case ECPGt_sqlda:
+ {
+ if (INFORMIX_MODE(compat))
{
- struct sqlda_compat *sqlda_old = *_sqlda;
- struct sqlda_compat *sqlda_old1;
+ struct sqlda_compat **_sqlda = ptr;
+ struct sqlda_compat *sqlda;
+
+ res = PQdescribePrepared(con->connection, stmt_name);
+ if (!ecpg_check_PQresult(res, line, con->connection, compat))
+ break;
- while (sqlda_old)
+ sqlda = ecpg_build_compat_sqlda(line, res, -1, compat);
+ if (sqlda)
{
- sqlda_old1 = sqlda_old->desc_next;
- free(sqlda_old);
- sqlda_old = sqlda_old1;
+ struct sqlda_compat *sqlda_old = *_sqlda;
+ struct sqlda_compat *sqlda_old1;
+
+ while (sqlda_old)
+ {
+ sqlda_old1 = sqlda_old->desc_next;
+ free(sqlda_old);
+ sqlda_old = sqlda_old1;
+ }
+
+ *_sqlda = sqlda;
+ ret = true;
}
- *_sqlda = sqlda;
- ret = true;
+ PQclear(res);
}
-
- PQclear(res);
- }
- else
- {
- struct sqlda_struct **_sqlda = ptr;
- struct sqlda_struct *sqlda;
-
- res = PQdescribePrepared(con->connection, stmt_name);
- if (!ecpg_check_PQresult(res, line, con->connection, compat))
- break;
-
- sqlda = ecpg_build_native_sqlda(line, res, -1, compat);
- if (sqlda)
+ else
{
- struct sqlda_struct *sqlda_old = *_sqlda;
- struct sqlda_struct *sqlda_old1;
+ struct sqlda_struct **_sqlda = ptr;
+ struct sqlda_struct *sqlda;
+
+ res = PQdescribePrepared(con->connection, stmt_name);
+ if (!ecpg_check_PQresult(res, line, con->connection, compat))
+ break;
- while (sqlda_old)
+ sqlda = ecpg_build_native_sqlda(line, res, -1, compat);
+ if (sqlda)
{
- sqlda_old1 = sqlda_old->desc_next;
- free(sqlda_old);
- sqlda_old = sqlda_old1;
+ struct sqlda_struct *sqlda_old = *_sqlda;
+ struct sqlda_struct *sqlda_old1;
+
+ while (sqlda_old)
+ {
+ sqlda_old1 = sqlda_old->desc_next;
+ free(sqlda_old);
+ sqlda_old = sqlda_old1;
+ }
+
+ *_sqlda = sqlda;
+ ret = true;
}
- *_sqlda = sqlda;
- ret = true;
+ PQclear(res);
}
-
- PQclear(res);
+ break;
}
- break;
- }
default:
/* nothing else may come */
;
-/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/execute.c,v 1.94 2010/02/16 18:41:23 meskes Exp $ */
+/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/execute.c,v 1.95 2010/02/26 02:01:30 momjian Exp $ */
/*
* The aim is to get a simpler inteface to the database routines.
char *newcopy = NULL;
/*
- * arrays are not possible unless the attribute is an array too
- * FIXME: we do not know if the attribute is an array here
+ * arrays are not possible unless the attribute is an array too FIXME: we
+ * do not know if the attribute is an array here
*/
#if 0
if (var->arrsize > 1 &&...)
{
if (INFORMIX_MODE(stmt->compat))
{
- struct sqlda_compat *sqlda = *(struct sqlda_compat **)var->pointer;
- struct variable desc_inlist;
- int i;
+ struct sqlda_compat *sqlda = *(struct sqlda_compat **) var->pointer;
+ struct variable desc_inlist;
+ int i;
if (sqlda == NULL)
return false;
}
else
{
- struct sqlda_struct *sqlda = *(struct sqlda_struct **)var->pointer;
- struct variable desc_inlist;
- int i;
+ struct sqlda_struct *sqlda = *(struct sqlda_struct **) var->pointer;
+ struct variable desc_inlist;
+ int i;
if (sqlda == NULL)
return false;
{
if (INFORMIX_MODE(stmt->compat))
{
- struct sqlda_compat **_sqlda = (struct sqlda_compat **)var->pointer;
- struct sqlda_compat *sqlda = *_sqlda;
- struct sqlda_compat *sqlda_new;
- int i;
+ struct sqlda_compat **_sqlda = (struct sqlda_compat **) var->pointer;
+ struct sqlda_compat *sqlda = *_sqlda;
+ struct sqlda_compat *sqlda_new;
+ int i;
- /* If we are passed in a previously existing sqlda (chain) then free it. */
+ /*
+ * If we are passed in a previously existing sqlda (chain)
+ * then free it.
+ */
while (sqlda)
{
sqlda_new = sqlda->desc_next;
*_sqlda = sqlda = sqlda_new = NULL;
for (i = ntuples - 1; i >= 0; i--)
{
- /* Build a new sqlda structure. Note that only fetching 1 record is supported */
+ /*
+ * Build a new sqlda structure. Note that only
+ * fetching 1 record is supported
+ */
sqlda_new = ecpg_build_compat_sqlda(stmt->lineno, results, i, stmt->compat);
if (!sqlda_new)
ecpg_set_compat_sqlda(stmt->lineno, _sqlda, results, i, stmt->compat);
ecpg_log("ecpg_execute on line %d: putting result (1 tuple %d fields) into sqlda descriptor\n",
- stmt->lineno, PQnfields(results));
+ stmt->lineno, PQnfields(results));
sqlda_new->desc_next = sqlda;
sqlda = sqlda_new;
}
else
{
- struct sqlda_struct **_sqlda = (struct sqlda_struct **)var->pointer;
- struct sqlda_struct *sqlda = *_sqlda;
- struct sqlda_struct *sqlda_new;
- int i;
+ struct sqlda_struct **_sqlda = (struct sqlda_struct **) var->pointer;
+ struct sqlda_struct *sqlda = *_sqlda;
+ struct sqlda_struct *sqlda_new;
+ int i;
- /* If we are passed in a previously existing sqlda (chain) then free it. */
+ /*
+ * If we are passed in a previously existing sqlda (chain)
+ * then free it.
+ */
while (sqlda)
{
sqlda_new = sqlda->desc_next;
*_sqlda = sqlda = sqlda_new = NULL;
for (i = ntuples - 1; i >= 0; i--)
{
- /* Build a new sqlda structure. Note that only fetching 1 record is supported */
+ /*
+ * Build a new sqlda structure. Note that only
+ * fetching 1 record is supported
+ */
sqlda_new = ecpg_build_native_sqlda(stmt->lineno, results, i, stmt->compat);
if (!sqlda_new)
ecpg_set_native_sqlda(stmt->lineno, _sqlda, results, i, stmt->compat);
ecpg_log("ecpg_execute on line %d: putting result (1 tuple %d fields) into sqlda descriptor\n",
- stmt->lineno, PQnfields(results));
+ stmt->lineno, PQnfields(results));
sqlda_new->desc_next = sqlda;
sqlda = sqlda_new;
-/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/extern.h,v 1.38 2010/02/04 09:41:34 meskes Exp $ */
+/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/extern.h,v 1.39 2010/02/26 02:01:30 momjian Exp $ */
#ifndef _ECPG_LIB_EXTERN_H
#define _ECPG_LIB_EXTERN_H
struct descriptor *ecpg_find_desc(int line, const char *name);
struct prepared_statement *ecpg_find_prepared_statement(const char *,
- struct connection *, struct prepared_statement **);
+ struct connection *, struct prepared_statement **);
bool ecpg_store_result(const PGresult *results, int act_field,
const struct statement * stmt, struct variable * var);
-/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/misc.c,v 1.55 2010/02/02 16:09:11 meskes Exp $ */
+/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/misc.c,v 1.56 2010/02/26 02:01:30 momjian Exp $ */
#define POSTGRES_ECPG_INTERNAL
#include "postgres_fe.h"
const struct connection *con;
con = ecpg_get_connection(connection_name);
- if (con == NULL) {
+ if (con == NULL)
+ {
/* transaction status is unknown */
return PQTRANS_UNKNOWN;
}
return dgettext(PG_TEXTDOMAIN("ecpg"), msgid);
}
-
#endif /* ENABLE_NLS */
static struct var_list
{
- int number;
+ int number;
void *pointer;
struct var_list *next;
-} *ivlist = NULL;
+} *ivlist = NULL;
void
ECPGset_var(int number, void *pointer, int lineno)
if (!ptr)
{
struct sqlca_t *sqlca = ECPGget_sqlca();
+
sqlca->sqlcode = ECPG_OUT_OF_MEMORY;
strncpy(sqlca->sqlstate, "YE001", sizeof("YE001"));
snprintf(sqlca->sqlerrm.sqlerrmc, sizeof(sqlca->sqlerrm.sqlerrmc), "out of memory on line %d", lineno);
struct var_list *ptr;
for (ptr = ivlist; ptr != NULL && ptr->number != number; ptr = ptr->next);
- return (ptr) ? ptr->pointer : NULL;
+ return (ptr) ? ptr->pointer : NULL;
}
-/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/prepare.c,v 1.36 2010/01/22 14:19:27 meskes Exp $ */
+/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/prepare.c,v 1.37 2010/02/26 02:01:30 momjian Exp $ */
#define POSTGRES_ECPG_INTERNAL
#include "postgres_fe.h"
}
static bool
-prepare_common(int lineno, struct connection *con, const bool questionmarks, const char *name, const char *variable)
+prepare_common(int lineno, struct connection * con, const bool questionmarks, const char *name, const char *variable)
{
struct statement *stmt;
struct prepared_statement *this;
*/
static int
AddStmtToCache(int lineno, /* line # of statement */
- const char *stmtID, /* statement ID */
+ const char *stmtID, /* statement ID */
const char *connection, /* connection */
int compat, /* compatibility level */
const char *ecpgQuery) /* query */
}
else
{
- char stmtID[STMTID_SIZE];
+ char stmtID[STMTID_SIZE];
ecpg_log("ecpg_auto_prepare on line %d: statement not in cache; inserting\n", lineno);
/*
* Compute the next variable's offset with
* the current variable's size and alignment.
- *
+ *
*
* Returns:
* - the current variable's offset in *current
static long
sqlda_compat_empty_size(const PGresult *res)
{
- long offset;
- int i;
- int sqld = PQnfields(res);
+ long offset;
+ int i;
+ int sqld = PQnfields(res);
/* Initial size to store main structure and field structures */
offset = sizeof(struct sqlda_compat) + sqld * sizeof(struct sqlvar_compat);
static long
sqlda_common_total_size(const PGresult *res, int row, enum COMPAT_MODE compat, long offset)
{
- int sqld = PQnfields(res);
- int i;
- long next_offset;
+ int sqld = PQnfields(res);
+ int i;
+ long next_offset;
/* Add space for the field values */
for (i = 0; i < sqld; i++)
{
enum ECPGttype type = sqlda_dynamic_type(PQftype(res, i), compat);
+
switch (type)
{
case ECPGt_short:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int), sizeof(decimal), &offset, &next_offset);
break;
case ECPGt_numeric:
+
/*
- * Let's align both the numeric struct and the digits array to int
- * Unfortunately we need to do double work here to compute the size
- * of the space needed for the numeric structure.
+ * Let's align both the numeric struct and the digits array to
+ * int Unfortunately we need to do double work here to compute
+ * the size of the space needed for the numeric structure.
*/
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int), sizeof(numeric), &offset, &next_offset);
if (!PQgetisnull(res, row, i))
{
char *val = PQgetvalue(res, row, i);
- numeric *num;
+ numeric *num;
num = PGTYPESnumeric_from_asc(val, NULL);
if (!num)
case ECPGt_unsigned_char:
case ECPGt_string:
default:
- {
- long datalen = strlen(PQgetvalue(res, row, i)) + 1;
- ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int), datalen, &offset, &next_offset);
- break;
- }
+ {
+ long datalen = strlen(PQgetvalue(res, row, i)) + 1;
+
+ ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int), datalen, &offset, &next_offset);
+ break;
+ }
}
offset = next_offset;
}
static long
sqlda_compat_total_size(const PGresult *res, int row, enum COMPAT_MODE compat)
{
- long offset;
+ long offset;
offset = sqlda_compat_empty_size(res);
static long
sqlda_native_empty_size(const PGresult *res)
{
- long offset;
- int sqld = PQnfields(res);
+ long offset;
+ int sqld = PQnfields(res);
/* Initial size to store main structure and field structures */
offset = sizeof(struct sqlda_struct) + (sqld - 1) * sizeof(struct sqlvar_struct);
static long
sqlda_native_total_size(const PGresult *res, int row, enum COMPAT_MODE compat)
{
- long offset;
+ long offset;
offset = sqlda_native_empty_size(res);
struct sqlvar_compat *sqlvar;
char *fname;
long size;
- int sqld;
- int i;
+ int sqld;
+ int i;
size = sqlda_compat_total_size(res, row, compat);
- sqlda = (struct sqlda_compat *)ecpg_alloc(size, line);
+ sqlda = (struct sqlda_compat *) ecpg_alloc(size, line);
if (!sqlda)
return NULL;
memset(sqlda, 0, size);
- sqlvar = (struct sqlvar_compat *)(sqlda + 1);
+ sqlvar = (struct sqlvar_compat *) (sqlda + 1);
sqld = PQnfields(res);
- fname = (char *)(sqlvar + sqld);
+ fname = (char *) (sqlvar + sqld);
sqlda->sqld = sqld;
ecpg_log("ecpg_build_compat_sqlda on line %d sqld = %d\n", line, sqld);
- sqlda->desc_occ = size; /* cheat here, keep the full allocated size */
+ sqlda->desc_occ = size; /* cheat here, keep the full allocated size */
sqlda->sqlvar = sqlvar;
for (i = 0; i < sqlda->sqld; i++)
strcpy(fname, PQfname(res, i));
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqlname = fname;
fname += strlen(sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqlname) + 1;
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqlformat = (char *)(long)PQfformat(res, i);
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqlformat = (char *) (long) PQfformat(res, i);
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqlxid = PQftype(res, i);
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqltypelen = PQfsize(res, i);
}
/*
* Sets values from PGresult.
*/
-static int2 value_is_null = -1;
-static int2 value_is_not_null = 0;
+static int2 value_is_null = -1;
+static int2 value_is_not_null = 0;
void
-ecpg_set_compat_sqlda(int lineno, struct sqlda_compat **_sqlda, const PGresult *res, int row, enum COMPAT_MODE compat)
+ecpg_set_compat_sqlda(int lineno, struct sqlda_compat ** _sqlda, const PGresult *res, int row, enum COMPAT_MODE compat)
{
struct sqlda_compat *sqlda = (*_sqlda);
- int i;
- long offset, next_offset;
+ int i;
+ long offset,
+ next_offset;
if (row < 0)
return;
*/
for (i = 0; i < sqlda->sqld; i++)
{
- int isnull;
- int datalen;
- bool set_data = true;
+ int isnull;
+ int datalen;
+ bool set_data = true;
switch (sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqltype)
{
case ECPGt_short:
case ECPGt_unsigned_short:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(short), sizeof(short), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(short);
break;
case ECPGt_int:
case ECPGt_unsigned_int:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int), sizeof(int), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(int);
break;
case ECPGt_long:
case ECPGt_unsigned_long:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(long), sizeof(long), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(long);
break;
case ECPGt_long_long:
case ECPGt_unsigned_long_long:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(long long), sizeof(long long), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(long long);
break;
case ECPGt_bool:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(bool), sizeof(bool), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(bool);
break;
case ECPGt_float:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(float), sizeof(float), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(float);
break;
case ECPGt_double:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(double), sizeof(double), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(double);
break;
case ECPGt_decimal:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int), sizeof(decimal), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(decimal);
break;
case ECPGt_numeric:
- {
- numeric *num;
- char *val;
+ {
+ numeric *num;
+ char *val;
- set_data = false;
+ set_data = false;
- ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int), sizeof(numeric), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(numeric);
+ ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int), sizeof(numeric), &offset, &next_offset);
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(numeric);
- if (PQgetisnull(res, row, i))
- {
- ECPGset_noind_null(ECPGt_numeric, sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata);
- break;
- }
+ if (PQgetisnull(res, row, i))
+ {
+ ECPGset_noind_null(ECPGt_numeric, sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata);
+ break;
+ }
- val = PQgetvalue(res, row, i);
- num = PGTYPESnumeric_from_asc(val, NULL);
- if (!num)
- {
- ECPGset_noind_null(ECPGt_numeric, sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata);
- break;
- }
+ val = PQgetvalue(res, row, i);
+ num = PGTYPESnumeric_from_asc(val, NULL);
+ if (!num)
+ {
+ ECPGset_noind_null(ECPGt_numeric, sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata);
+ break;
+ }
- memcpy(sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata, num, sizeof(numeric));
+ memcpy(sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata, num, sizeof(numeric));
- ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(next_offset, sizeof(int), num->ndigits + 1, &offset, &next_offset);
- memcpy((char *)sqlda + offset, num->buf, num->ndigits + 1);
+ ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(next_offset, sizeof(int), num->ndigits + 1, &offset, &next_offset);
+ memcpy((char *) sqlda + offset, num->buf, num->ndigits + 1);
- ((numeric *)sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata)->buf = (NumericDigit *)sqlda + offset;
- ((numeric *)sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata)->digits = (NumericDigit *)sqlda + offset + (num->digits - num->buf);
+ ((numeric *) sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata)->buf = (NumericDigit *) sqlda + offset;
+ ((numeric *) sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata)->digits = (NumericDigit *) sqlda + offset + (num->digits - num->buf);
- PGTYPESnumeric_free(num);
+ PGTYPESnumeric_free(num);
- break;
- }
+ break;
+ }
case ECPGt_date:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(date), sizeof(date), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(date);
break;
case ECPGt_timestamp:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(timestamp), sizeof(timestamp), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(timestamp);
break;
case ECPGt_interval:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int64), sizeof(interval), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(interval);
break;
case ECPGt_char:
default:
datalen = strlen(PQgetvalue(res, row, i)) + 1;
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int), datalen, &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = datalen;
if (datalen > 32768)
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqlilongdata = sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata;
{
if (set_data)
ecpg_get_data(res, row, i, lineno,
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqltype, ECPGt_NO_INDICATOR,
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata, NULL, 0, 0, 0,
- ECPG_ARRAY_NONE, compat, false);
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqltype, ECPGt_NO_INDICATOR,
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata, NULL, 0, 0, 0,
+ ECPG_ARRAY_NONE, compat, false);
}
else
ECPGset_noind_null(sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqltype, sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata);
{
struct sqlda_struct *sqlda;
long size;
- int i;
+ int i;
size = sqlda_native_total_size(res, row, compat);
- sqlda = (struct sqlda_struct *)ecpg_alloc(size, line);
+ sqlda = (struct sqlda_struct *) ecpg_alloc(size, line);
if (!sqlda)
return NULL;
}
void
-ecpg_set_native_sqlda(int lineno, struct sqlda_struct **_sqlda, const PGresult *res, int row, enum COMPAT_MODE compat)
+ecpg_set_native_sqlda(int lineno, struct sqlda_struct ** _sqlda, const PGresult *res, int row, enum COMPAT_MODE compat)
{
struct sqlda_struct *sqlda = (*_sqlda);
- int i;
- long offset, next_offset;
+ int i;
+ long offset,
+ next_offset;
if (row < 0)
return;
*/
for (i = 0; i < sqlda->sqld; i++)
{
- int isnull;
- int datalen;
- bool set_data = true;
+ int isnull;
+ int datalen;
+ bool set_data = true;
switch (sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqltype)
{
case ECPGt_short:
case ECPGt_unsigned_short:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(short), sizeof(short), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(short);
break;
case ECPGt_int:
case ECPGt_unsigned_int:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int), sizeof(int), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(int);
break;
case ECPGt_long:
case ECPGt_unsigned_long:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(long), sizeof(long), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(long);
break;
case ECPGt_long_long:
case ECPGt_unsigned_long_long:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(long long), sizeof(long long), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(long long);
break;
case ECPGt_bool:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(bool), sizeof(bool), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(bool);
break;
case ECPGt_float:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(float), sizeof(float), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(float);
break;
case ECPGt_double:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(double), sizeof(double), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(double);
break;
case ECPGt_decimal:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int), sizeof(decimal), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(decimal);
break;
case ECPGt_numeric:
- {
- numeric *num;
- char *val;
+ {
+ numeric *num;
+ char *val;
- set_data = false;
+ set_data = false;
- ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int), sizeof(numeric), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(numeric);
+ ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int), sizeof(numeric), &offset, &next_offset);
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(numeric);
- if (PQgetisnull(res, row, i))
- {
- ECPGset_noind_null(ECPGt_numeric, sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata);
- break;
- }
+ if (PQgetisnull(res, row, i))
+ {
+ ECPGset_noind_null(ECPGt_numeric, sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata);
+ break;
+ }
- val = PQgetvalue(res, row, i);
- num = PGTYPESnumeric_from_asc(val, NULL);
- if (!num)
- {
- ECPGset_noind_null(ECPGt_numeric, sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata);
- break;
- }
+ val = PQgetvalue(res, row, i);
+ num = PGTYPESnumeric_from_asc(val, NULL);
+ if (!num)
+ {
+ ECPGset_noind_null(ECPGt_numeric, sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata);
+ break;
+ }
- memcpy(sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata, num, sizeof(numeric));
+ memcpy(sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata, num, sizeof(numeric));
- ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(next_offset, sizeof(int), num->ndigits + 1, &offset, &next_offset);
- memcpy((char *)sqlda + offset, num->buf, num->ndigits + 1);
+ ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(next_offset, sizeof(int), num->ndigits + 1, &offset, &next_offset);
+ memcpy((char *) sqlda + offset, num->buf, num->ndigits + 1);
- ((numeric *)sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata)->buf = (NumericDigit *)sqlda + offset;
- ((numeric *)sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata)->digits = (NumericDigit *)sqlda + offset + (num->digits - num->buf);
+ ((numeric *) sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata)->buf = (NumericDigit *) sqlda + offset;
+ ((numeric *) sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata)->digits = (NumericDigit *) sqlda + offset + (num->digits - num->buf);
- PGTYPESnumeric_free(num);
+ PGTYPESnumeric_free(num);
- break;
- }
+ break;
+ }
case ECPGt_date:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(date), sizeof(date), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(date);
break;
case ECPGt_timestamp:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(timestamp), sizeof(timestamp), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(timestamp);
break;
case ECPGt_interval:
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int64), sizeof(interval), &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = sizeof(interval);
break;
case ECPGt_char:
default:
datalen = strlen(PQgetvalue(res, row, i)) + 1;
ecpg_sqlda_align_add_size(offset, sizeof(int), datalen, &offset, &next_offset);
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *)sqlda + offset;
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata = (char *) sqlda + offset;
sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqllen = datalen;
break;
}
{
if (set_data)
ecpg_get_data(res, row, i, lineno,
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqltype, ECPGt_NO_INDICATOR,
- sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata, NULL, 0, 0, 0,
- ECPG_ARRAY_NONE, compat, false);
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqltype, ECPGt_NO_INDICATOR,
+ sqlda->sqlvar[i].sqldata, NULL, 0, 0, 0,
+ ECPG_ARRAY_NONE, compat, false);
}
offset = next_offset;
-/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/typename.c,v 1.18 2010/01/13 09:06:51 meskes Exp $ */
+/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/typename.c,v 1.19 2010/02/26 02:01:30 momjian Exp $ */
#define POSTGRES_ECPG_INTERNAL
#include "postgres_fe.h"
#ifdef HAVE_LONG_INT_64
return ECPGt_long;
#endif
- /* Unhandled types always return a string */
+ /* Unhandled types always return a string */
default:
return ECPGt_char;
}
/*
* This file contains stuff needed to be as compatible to Informix as possible.
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/ecpg_informix.h,v 1.23 2009/08/14 13:28:22 meskes Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/ecpg_informix.h,v 1.24 2010/02/26 02:01:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#ifndef _ECPG_INFORMIX_H
#define _ECPG_INFORMIX_H
#endif
extern int rdatestr(date, char *);
-extern void rtoday(date *);
+extern void rtoday(date *);
extern int rjulmdy(date, short *);
extern int rdefmtdate(date *, char *, char *);
extern int rfmtdate(date, char *, char *);
extern int rtypalign(int, int);
extern int rtypmsize(int, int);
extern int rtypwidth(int, int);
-extern void rupshift(char *);
+extern void rupshift(char *);
extern int byleng(char *, int);
extern void ldchar(char *, int, char *);
/*
* this is a small part of c.h since we don't want to leak all postgres
* definitions into ecpg programs
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/ecpglib.h,v 1.82 2010/01/26 09:07:31 meskes Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/ecpglib.h,v 1.83 2010/02/26 02:01:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#ifndef _ECPGLIB_H
void ECPGset_noind_null(enum ECPGttype, void *);
bool ECPGis_noind_null(enum ECPGttype, void *);
-bool ECPGdescribe(int, int, bool, const char *, const char *, ...);
+bool ECPGdescribe(int, int, bool, const char *, const char *,...);
void ECPGset_var(int, void *, int);
void *ECPGget_var(int number);
* All types that can be handled for host variable declarations has to
* be handled eventually.
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/ecpgtype.h,v 1.39 2010/01/05 16:38:23 meskes Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/ecpgtype.h,v 1.40 2010/02/26 02:01:31 momjian Exp $
*/
/*
ECPGt_EORT, /* End of result types. */
ECPGt_NO_INDICATOR, /* no indicator */
ECPGt_string, /* trimmed (char *) type */
- ECPGt_sqlda /* C struct descriptor */
+ ECPGt_sqlda /* C struct descriptor */
};
/* descriptor items */
-/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/pgtypes_interval.h,v 1.15 2010/01/07 04:53:35 tgl Exp $ */
+/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/pgtypes_interval.h,v 1.16 2010/02/26 02:01:31 momjian Exp $ */
#ifndef PGTYPES_INTERVAL
#define PGTYPES_INTERVAL
#ifdef USE_INTEGER_DATETIMES
#define HAVE_INT64_TIMESTAMP
#endif
-
#endif /* C_H */
typedef struct
struct sqlvar_compat
{
- short sqltype; /* variable type */
- int sqllen; /* length in bytes */
- char *sqldata; /* pointer to data */
- short *sqlind; /* pointer to indicator */
- char *sqlname; /* variable name */
- char *sqlformat; /* reserved for future use */
- short sqlitype; /* ind variable type */
- short sqlilen; /* ind length in bytes */
- char *sqlidata; /* ind data pointer */
- int sqlxid; /* extended id type */
- char *sqltypename; /* extended type name */
- short sqltypelen; /* length of extended type name */
- short sqlownerlen; /* length of owner name */
- short sqlsourcetype; /* source type for distinct of built-ins */
- char *sqlownername; /* owner name */
- int sqlsourceid; /* extended id of source type */
+ short sqltype; /* variable type */
+ int sqllen; /* length in bytes */
+ char *sqldata; /* pointer to data */
+ short *sqlind; /* pointer to indicator */
+ char *sqlname; /* variable name */
+ char *sqlformat; /* reserved for future use */
+ short sqlitype; /* ind variable type */
+ short sqlilen; /* ind length in bytes */
+ char *sqlidata; /* ind data pointer */
+ int sqlxid; /* extended id type */
+ char *sqltypename; /* extended type name */
+ short sqltypelen; /* length of extended type name */
+ short sqlownerlen; /* length of owner name */
+ short sqlsourcetype; /* source type for distinct of built-ins */
+ char *sqlownername; /* owner name */
+ int sqlsourceid; /* extended id of source type */
/*
- * sqlilongdata is new. It supports data that exceeds the 32k
- * limit. sqlilen and sqlidata are for backward compatibility
- * and they have maximum value of <32K.
+ * sqlilongdata is new. It supports data that exceeds the 32k limit.
+ * sqlilen and sqlidata are for backward compatibility and they have
+ * maximum value of <32K.
*/
- char *sqlilongdata; /* for data field beyond 32K */
- int sqlflags; /* for internal use only */
- void *sqlreserved; /* reserved for future use */
+ char *sqlilongdata; /* for data field beyond 32K */
+ int sqlflags; /* for internal use only */
+ void *sqlreserved; /* reserved for future use */
};
struct sqlda_compat
{
short sqld;
struct sqlvar_compat *sqlvar;
- char desc_name[19]; /* descriptor name */
- short desc_occ; /* size of sqlda structure */
- struct sqlda_compat *desc_next; /* pointer to next sqlda struct */
- void *reserved; /* reserved for future use */
+ char desc_name[19]; /* descriptor name */
+ short desc_occ; /* size of sqlda structure */
+ struct sqlda_compat *desc_next; /* pointer to next sqlda struct */
+ void *reserved; /* reserved for future use */
};
-#endif /* ECPG_SQLDA_COMPAT_H */
+#endif /* ECPG_SQLDA_COMPAT_H */
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h,v 1.2 2010/01/06 15:10:21 meskes Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/include/sqlda-native.h,v 1.3 2010/02/26 02:01:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#ifndef ECPG_SQLDA_NATIVE_H
* because the length must include a trailing zero byte.
*
* This should be at least as much as NAMEDATALEN of the database the
- * applications run against.
+ * applications run against.
*/
#define NAMEDATALEN 64
short sqln;
short sqld;
struct sqlda_struct *desc_next;
- struct sqlvar_struct sqlvar[1];
+ struct sqlvar_struct sqlvar[1];
};
-#endif /* ECPG_SQLDA_NATIVE_H */
+#endif /* ECPG_SQLDA_NATIVE_H */
#ifdef _ECPG_INFORMIX_H
#include "sqlda-compat.h"
-typedef struct sqlvar_compat sqlvar_t;
-typedef struct sqlda_compat sqlda_t;
-
+typedef struct sqlvar_compat sqlvar_t;
+typedef struct sqlda_compat sqlda_t;
#else
#include "sqlda-native.h"
-typedef struct sqlvar_struct sqlvar_t;
-typedef struct sqlda_struct sqlda_t;
-
+typedef struct sqlvar_struct sqlvar_t;
+typedef struct sqlda_struct sqlda_t;
#endif
-#endif /* ECPG_SQLDA_H */
+#endif /* ECPG_SQLDA_H */
/*
* Values used in sqlda->sqlvar[i]->sqltype
*/
-#define SQLCHAR ECPGt_char
-#define SQLSMINT ECPGt_short
-#define SQLINT ECPGt_int
-#define SQLFLOAT ECPGt_double
-#define SQLSMFLOAT ECPGt_float
-#define SQLDECIMAL ECPGt_decimal
-#define SQLSERIAL ECPGt_int
-#define SQLDATE ECPGt_date
-#define SQLDTIME ECPGt_timestamp
-#define SQLTEXT ECPGt_char
-#define SQLVCHAR ECPGt_char
-#define SQLINTERVAL ECPGt_interval
-#define SQLNCHAR ECPGt_char
-#define SQLNVCHAR ECPGt_char
+#define SQLCHAR ECPGt_char
+#define SQLSMINT ECPGt_short
+#define SQLINT ECPGt_int
+#define SQLFLOAT ECPGt_double
+#define SQLSMFLOAT ECPGt_float
+#define SQLDECIMAL ECPGt_decimal
+#define SQLSERIAL ECPGt_int
+#define SQLDATE ECPGt_date
+#define SQLDTIME ECPGt_timestamp
+#define SQLTEXT ECPGt_char
+#define SQLVCHAR ECPGt_char
+#define SQLINTERVAL ECPGt_interval
+#define SQLNCHAR ECPGt_char
+#define SQLNVCHAR ECPGt_char
#ifdef HAVE_LONG_LONG_INT_64
-#define SQLINT8 ECPGt_long_long
-#define SQLSERIAL8 ECPGt_long_long
+#define SQLINT8 ECPGt_long_long
+#define SQLSERIAL8 ECPGt_long_long
#else
-#define SQLINT8 ECPGt_long
-#define SQLSERIAL8 ECPGt_long
+#define SQLINT8 ECPGt_long
+#define SQLSERIAL8 ECPGt_long
#endif
#endif /* ndef ECPG_SQLTYPES_H */
* c_keywords.c
* lexical token lookup for reserved words in postgres embedded SQL
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/c_keywords.c,v 1.24 2009/07/14 20:24:10 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/c_keywords.c,v 1.25 2010/02/26 02:01:31 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
- * Do a binary search using plain strcmp() comparison. This is much like
+ * Do a binary search using plain strcmp() comparison. This is much like
* ScanKeywordLookup(), except we want case-sensitive matching.
*/
const ScanKeyword *
/*
* functions needed for descriptor handling
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/descriptor.c,v 1.30 2010/01/26 09:07:31 meskes Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/descriptor.c,v 1.31 2010/02/26 02:01:31 momjian Exp $
*
* since descriptor might be either a string constant or a string var
* we need to check for a constant if we expect a constant
return p;
}
-
-/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/ecpg.c,v 1.113 2010/01/26 09:07:31 meskes Exp $ */
+/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/ecpg.c,v 1.114 2010/02/26 02:01:31 momjian Exp $ */
/* Main for ecpg, the PostgreSQL embedded SQL precompiler. */
/* Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group */
/* and structure member lists */
memset(struct_member_list, 0, sizeof(struct_member_list));
- /* and our variable counter for out of scope cursors' variables */
+ /*
+ * and our variable counter for out of scope cursors'
+ * variables
+ */
ecpg_internal_var = 0;
/* finally the actual connection */
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/type.h,v 1.52 2010/01/26 09:07:31 meskes Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/type.h,v 1.53 2010/02/26 02:01:31 momjian Exp $
*/
#ifndef _ECPG_PREPROC_TYPE_H
#define _ECPG_PREPROC_TYPE_H
struct ECPGtype
{
enum ECPGttype type;
- char *type_name; /* For struct and union types it is the struct name */
+ char *type_name; /* For struct and union types it is the struct
+ * name */
char *size; /* For array it is the number of elements. For
* varchar it is the maxsize of the area. */
char *struct_sizeof; /* For a struct this is the sizeof() type as
-/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/variable.c,v 1.52 2010/01/26 09:07:31 meskes Exp $ */
+/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/variable.c,v 1.53 2010/02/26 02:01:31 momjian Exp $ */
#include "postgres_fe.h"
void
remove_variable_from_list(struct arguments ** list, struct variable * var)
{
- struct arguments *p, *prev = NULL;
- bool found = false;
+ struct arguments *p,
+ *prev = NULL;
+ bool found = false;
for (p = *list; p; p = p->next)
{
-struct mytype {
- int id;
- char t[64];
- double d1; /* dec_t */
- double d2;
- char c[30];
+struct mytype
+{
+ int id;
+ char t[64];
+ double d1; /* dec_t */
+ double d2;
+ char c[30];
};
typedef struct mytype MYTYPE;
-struct mynulltype {
- int id;
- int t;
- int d1;
- int d2;
- int c;
+struct mynulltype
+{
+ int id;
+ int t;
+ int d1;
+ int d2;
+ int c;
};
typedef struct mynulltype MYNULLTYPE;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-connect.c,v 1.387 2010/02/17 04:19:41 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-connect.c,v 1.388 2010/02/26 02:01:32 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#endif
{"replication", NULL, NULL, NULL,
- "Replication", "D", 5},
+ "Replication", "D", 5},
/* Terminating entry --- MUST BE LAST */
{NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL,
static PQconninfoOption *conninfo_parse(const char *conninfo,
PQExpBuffer errorMessage, bool use_defaults);
static PQconninfoOption *conninfo_array_parse(const char **keywords,
- const char **values, PQExpBuffer errorMessage,
- bool use_defaults, int expand_dbname);
+ const char **values, PQExpBuffer errorMessage,
+ bool use_defaults, int expand_dbname);
static char *conninfo_getval(PQconninfoOption *connOptions,
const char *keyword);
static void defaultNoticeReceiver(void *arg, const PGresult *res);
static int parseServiceInfo(PQconninfoOption *options,
PQExpBuffer errorMessage);
static int parseServiceFile(const char *serviceFile,
- const char *service,
- PQconninfoOption *options,
- PQExpBuffer errorMessage,
- bool *group_found);
+ const char *service,
+ PQconninfoOption *options,
+ PQExpBuffer errorMessage,
+ bool *group_found);
static char *pwdfMatchesString(char *buf, char *token);
static char *PasswordFromFile(char *hostname, char *port, char *dbname,
char *username);
* terminated arrays instead.
*
* To connect in an asynchronous (non-blocking) manner, use the functions
- * PQconnectStart or PQconnectStartParams (which differ in the same way as
+ * PQconnectStart or PQconnectStartParams (which differ in the same way as
* PQconnectdb and PQconnectdbParams) and PQconnectPoll.
*
* Internally, the static functions connectDBStart, connectDBComplete
const char **values,
int expand_dbname)
{
- PGconn *conn;
- PQconninfoOption *connOptions;
+ PGconn *conn;
+ PQconninfoOption *connOptions;
/*
* Allocate memory for the conn structure
/*
* Move option values into conn structure
*/
- fillPGconn(conn, connOptions);
+ fillPGconn(conn, connOptions);
/*
* Free the option info - all is in conn now
/*
* Move option values into conn structure
*/
- fillPGconn(conn, connOptions);
+ fillPGconn(conn, connOptions);
/*
* Free the option info - all is in conn now
* We have three methods of blocking SIGPIPE during
* send() calls to this socket:
*
- * - setsockopt(sock, SO_NOSIGPIPE)
- * - send(sock, ..., MSG_NOSIGNAL)
- * - setting the signal mask to SIG_IGN during send()
+ * - setsockopt(sock, SO_NOSIGPIPE)
+ * - send(sock, ..., MSG_NOSIGNAL)
+ * - setting the signal mask to SIG_IGN during send()
*
* The third method requires three syscalls per send,
* so we prefer either of the first two, but they are
conn->sigpipe_flag = true;
#else
conn->sigpipe_flag = false;
-#endif /* MSG_NOSIGNAL */
+#endif /* MSG_NOSIGNAL */
#ifdef SO_NOSIGPIPE
optval = 1;
conn->sigpipe_so = true;
conn->sigpipe_flag = false;
}
-#endif /* SO_NOSIGPIPE */
+#endif /* SO_NOSIGPIPE */
/*
* Start/make connection. This should not block, since we
/*
* If we tried to send application_name, check to see
* if the error is about that --- pre-9.0 servers will
- * reject it at this stage of the process. If so,
+ * reject it at this stage of the process. If so,
* close the connection and retry without sending
* application_name. We could possibly get a false
* SQLSTATE match here and retry uselessly, but there
default:
appendPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage,
libpq_gettext("invalid connection state %d, "
- "probably indicative of memory corruption\n"),
+ "probably indicative of memory corruption\n"),
conn->status);
goto error_return;
}
return status;
next_file:
+
/*
* This could be used by any application so we can't use the binary
* location to find our config files.
if (!group_found)
{
printfPQExpBuffer(errorMessage,
- libpq_gettext("definition of service \"%s\" not found\n"), service);
+ libpq_gettext("definition of service \"%s\" not found\n"), service);
return 3;
}
PQconninfoOption *options,
PQExpBuffer errorMessage,
bool *group_found)
-{
+{
int linenr = 0,
i;
FILE *f;
{
fclose(f);
printfPQExpBuffer(errorMessage,
- libpq_gettext("line %d too long in service file \"%s\"\n"),
+ libpq_gettext("line %d too long in service file \"%s\"\n"),
linenr,
serviceFile);
return 2;
if (*group_found)
{
/*
- * Finally, we are in the right group and can parse
- * the line
+ * Finally, we are in the right group and can parse the line
*/
char *key,
*val;
PQExpBuffer errorMessage, bool use_defaults,
int expand_dbname)
{
- char *tmp;
- PQconninfoOption *options;
- PQconninfoOption *str_options = NULL;
- PQconninfoOption *option;
- int i = 0;
+ char *tmp;
+ PQconninfoOption *options;
+ PQconninfoOption *str_options = NULL;
+ PQconninfoOption *option;
+ int i = 0;
/*
- * If expand_dbname is non-zero, check keyword "dbname"
- * to see if val is actually a conninfo string
+ * If expand_dbname is non-zero, check keyword "dbname" to see if val is
+ * actually a conninfo string
*/
- while(expand_dbname && keywords[i])
+ while (expand_dbname && keywords[i])
{
const char *pname = keywords[i];
- const char *pvalue = values[i];
+ const char *pvalue = values[i];
/* first find "dbname" if any */
if (strcmp(pname, "dbname") == 0)
if (pvalue && strchr(pvalue, '='))
{
/*
- * Must be a conninfo string, so parse it, but do not
- * use defaults here -- those get picked up later.
- * We only want to override for those parameters actually
- * passed.
+ * Must be a conninfo string, so parse it, but do not use
+ * defaults here -- those get picked up later. We only want to
+ * override for those parameters actually passed.
*/
str_options = conninfo_parse(pvalue, errorMessage, false);
if (str_options == NULL)
i = 0;
/* Parse the keywords/values arrays */
- while(keywords[i])
+ while (keywords[i])
{
const char *pname = keywords[i];
- const char *pvalue = values[i];
+ const char *pvalue = values[i];
if (pvalue != NULL)
{
if (option->keyword == NULL)
{
printfPQExpBuffer(errorMessage,
- libpq_gettext("invalid connection option \"%s\"\n"),
+ libpq_gettext("invalid connection option \"%s\"\n"),
pname);
PQconninfoFree(options);
return NULL;
/*
* If we are on the dbname parameter, and we have a parsed
- * conninfo string, copy those parameters across, overriding
- * any existing previous settings
+ * conninfo string, copy those parameters across, overriding any
+ * existing previous settings
*/
if (strcmp(pname, "dbname") == 0 && str_options)
{
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-exec.c,v 1.210 2010/02/17 04:19:41 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-exec.c,v 1.211 2010/02/26 02:01:32 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
PQescapeInternal(PGconn *conn, const char *str, size_t len, bool as_ident)
{
const char *s;
- char *result;
- char *rp;
- int num_quotes = 0; /* single or double, depending on as_ident */
- int num_backslashes = 0;
- int input_len;
- int result_size;
- char quote_char = as_ident ? '"' : '\'';
+ char *result;
+ char *rp;
+ int num_quotes = 0; /* single or double, depending on as_ident */
+ int num_backslashes = 0;
+ int input_len;
+ int result_size;
+ char quote_char = as_ident ? '"' : '\'';
/* We must have a connection, else fail immediately. */
if (!conn)
++num_backslashes;
else if (IS_HIGHBIT_SET(*s))
{
- int charlen;
+ int charlen;
/* Slow path for possible multibyte characters */
charlen = pg_encoding_mblen(conn->client_encoding, s);
/* Allocate output buffer. */
input_len = s - str;
- result_size = input_len + num_quotes + 3; /* two quotes, plus a NUL */
+ result_size = input_len + num_quotes + 3; /* two quotes, plus a NUL */
if (!as_ident && num_backslashes > 0)
result_size += num_backslashes + 2;
result = rp = (char *) malloc(result_size);
/*
* If we are escaping a literal that contains backslashes, we use the
* escape string syntax so that the result is correct under either value
- * of standard_conforming_strings. We also emit a leading space in this
+ * of standard_conforming_strings. We also emit a leading space in this
* case, to guard against the possibility that the result might be
* interpolated immediately following an identifier.
*/
*
* We've already verified that the input string is well-formed in the
* current encoding. If it contains no quotes and, in the case of
- * literal-escaping, no backslashes, then we can just copy it directly
- * to the output buffer, adding the necessary quotes.
+ * literal-escaping, no backslashes, then we can just copy it directly to
+ * the output buffer, adding the necessary quotes.
*
* If not, we must rescan the input and process each character
* individually.
*rp++ = *s;
else
{
- int i = pg_encoding_mblen(conn->client_encoding, s);
+ int i = pg_encoding_mblen(conn->client_encoding, s);
+
while (1)
{
*rp++ = *s;
if (--i == 0)
break;
- ++s; /* for loop will provide the final increment */
+ ++s; /* for loop will provide the final increment */
}
}
}
if (strtext[0] == '\\' && strtext[1] == 'x')
{
const unsigned char *s;
- unsigned char *p;
+ unsigned char *p;
- buflen = (strtextlen - 2)/2;
+ buflen = (strtextlen - 2) / 2;
/* Avoid unportable malloc(0) */
buffer = (unsigned char *) malloc(buflen > 0 ? buflen : 1);
if (buffer == NULL)
p = buffer;
while (*s)
{
- char v1,
- v2;
+ char v1,
+ v2;
/*
* Bad input is silently ignored. Note that this includes
}
else
{
- /*
- * Length of input is max length of output, but add one to avoid
- * unportable malloc(0) if input is zero-length.
- */
- buffer = (unsigned char *) malloc(strtextlen + 1);
- if (buffer == NULL)
- return NULL;
+ /*
+ * Length of input is max length of output, but add one to avoid
+ * unportable malloc(0) if input is zero-length.
+ */
+ buffer = (unsigned char *) malloc(strtextlen + 1);
+ if (buffer == NULL)
+ return NULL;
- for (i = j = 0; i < strtextlen;)
- {
- switch (strtext[i])
+ for (i = j = 0; i < strtextlen;)
{
- case '\\':
- i++;
- if (strtext[i] == '\\')
- buffer[j++] = strtext[i++];
- else
- {
- if ((ISFIRSTOCTDIGIT(strtext[i])) &&
- (ISOCTDIGIT(strtext[i + 1])) &&
- (ISOCTDIGIT(strtext[i + 2])))
+ switch (strtext[i])
+ {
+ case '\\':
+ i++;
+ if (strtext[i] == '\\')
+ buffer[j++] = strtext[i++];
+ else
{
- int byte;
-
- byte = OCTVAL(strtext[i++]);
- byte = (byte <<3) +OCTVAL(strtext[i++]);
- byte = (byte <<3) +OCTVAL(strtext[i++]);
- buffer[j++] = byte;
+ if ((ISFIRSTOCTDIGIT(strtext[i])) &&
+ (ISOCTDIGIT(strtext[i + 1])) &&
+ (ISOCTDIGIT(strtext[i + 2])))
+ {
+ int byte;
+
+ byte = OCTVAL(strtext[i++]);
+ byte = (byte <<3) +OCTVAL(strtext[i++]);
+ byte = (byte <<3) +OCTVAL(strtext[i++]);
+ buffer[j++] = byte;
+ }
}
- }
- /*
- * Note: if we see '\' followed by something that isn't a
- * recognized escape sequence, we loop around having done
- * nothing except advance i. Therefore the something will be
- * emitted as ordinary data on the next cycle. Corner case:
- * '\' at end of string will just be discarded.
- */
- break;
+ /*
+ * Note: if we see '\' followed by something that isn't a
+ * recognized escape sequence, we loop around having done
+ * nothing except advance i. Therefore the something will
+ * be emitted as ordinary data on the next cycle. Corner
+ * case: '\' at end of string will just be discarded.
+ */
+ break;
- default:
- buffer[j++] = strtext[i++];
- break;
+ default:
+ buffer[j++] = strtext[i++];
+ break;
+ }
}
- }
- buflen = j; /* buflen is the length of the dequoted data */
+ buflen = j; /* buflen is the length of the dequoted data */
}
/* Shrink the buffer to be no larger than necessary */
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-secure.c,v 1.131 2010/01/02 16:58:12 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-secure.c,v 1.132 2010/02/26 02:01:33 momjian Exp $
*
* NOTES
*
pq_reset_sigpipe(&(spinfo).oldsigmask, (spinfo).sigpipe_pending, \
(spinfo).got_epipe); \
} while (0)
-
-#else /* !ENABLE_THREAD_SAFETY */
+#else /* !ENABLE_THREAD_SAFETY */
#define DECLARE_SIGPIPE_INFO(spinfo) pqsigfunc spinfo = NULL
if (!SIGPIPE_MASKED(conn)) \
pqsignal(SIGPIPE, spinfo); \
} while (0)
-
-#endif /* ENABLE_THREAD_SAFETY */
-
-#else /* WIN32 */
+#endif /* ENABLE_THREAD_SAFETY */
+#else /* WIN32 */
#define DECLARE_SIGPIPE_INFO(spinfo)
#define DISABLE_SIGPIPE(conn, spinfo, failaction)
#define REMEMBER_EPIPE(spinfo, cond)
#define RESTORE_SIGPIPE(conn, spinfo)
-
-#endif /* WIN32 */
+#endif /* WIN32 */
/* ------------------------------------------------------------ */
/* Procedures common to all secure sessions */
if (conn->ssl)
{
int err;
+
DECLARE_SIGPIPE_INFO(spinfo);
/* SSL_read can write to the socket, so we need to disable SIGPIPE */
pqsecure_write(PGconn *conn, const void *ptr, size_t len)
{
ssize_t n;
+
DECLARE_SIGPIPE_INFO(spinfo);
#ifdef USE_SSL
else
#endif
{
- int flags = 0;
+ int flags = 0;
#ifdef MSG_NOSIGNAL
if (conn->sigpipe_flag)
flags |= MSG_NOSIGNAL;
retry_masked:
-
-#endif /* MSG_NOSIGNAL */
+#endif /* MSG_NOSIGNAL */
DISABLE_SIGPIPE(conn, spinfo, return -1);
flags = 0;
goto retry_masked;
}
-#endif /* MSG_NOSIGNAL */
+#endif /* MSG_NOSIGNAL */
REMEMBER_EPIPE(spinfo, SOCK_ERRNO == EPIPE);
}
char *err = SSLerrmessage();
printfPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage,
- libpq_gettext("could not initialize SSL engine \"%s\": %s\n"),
+ libpq_gettext("could not initialize SSL engine \"%s\": %s\n"),
engine_str, err);
SSLerrfree(err);
ENGINE_free(conn->engine);
conn->peer_dn[sizeof(conn->peer_dn) - 1] = '\0';
r = X509_NAME_get_text_by_NID(X509_get_subject_name(conn->peer),
- NID_commonName, conn->peer_cn, SM_USER);
- conn->peer_cn[SM_USER] = '\0'; /* buffer is SM_USER+1 chars! */
+ NID_commonName, conn->peer_cn, SM_USER);
+ conn->peer_cn[SM_USER] = '\0'; /* buffer is SM_USER+1 chars! */
if (r == -1)
{
/* Unable to get the CN, set it to blank so it can't be used */
else
{
/*
- * Reject embedded NULLs in certificate common name to prevent attacks like
- * CVE-2009-4034.
+ * Reject embedded NULLs in certificate common name to prevent attacks
+ * like CVE-2009-4034.
*/
if (r != strlen(conn->peer_cn))
{
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-fe.h,v 1.151 2010/02/05 03:09:05 joe Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-fe.h,v 1.152 2010/02/26 02:01:33 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* Asynchronous (non-blocking) */
extern PGconn *PQconnectStart(const char *conninfo);
extern PGconn *PQconnectStartParams(const char **keywords,
- const char **values, int expand_dbname);
+ const char **values, int expand_dbname);
extern PostgresPollingStatusType PQconnectPoll(PGconn *conn);
/* Synchronous (blocking) */
extern PGconn *PQconnectdb(const char *conninfo);
extern PGconn *PQconnectdbParams(const char **keywords,
- const char **values, int expand_dbname);
+ const char **values, int expand_dbname);
extern PGconn *PQsetdbLogin(const char *pghost, const char *pgport,
const char *pgoptions, const char *pgtty,
const char *dbName,
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-int.h,v 1.148 2010/01/15 09:19:10 heikki Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-int.h,v 1.149 2010/02/26 02:01:33 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
#if (SSLEAY_VERSION_NUMBER >= 0x00907000L) && !defined(OPENSSL_NO_ENGINE)
#define USE_SSL_ENGINE
#endif
-
-#endif /* USE_SSL */
+#endif /* USE_SSL */
/*
* POSTGRES backend dependent Constants.
#ifdef USE_SSL_ENGINE
ENGINE *engine; /* SSL engine, if any */
#else
- void *engine; /* dummy field to keep struct the same
- if OpenSSL version changes */
+ void *engine; /* dummy field to keep struct the same if
+ * OpenSSL version changes */
#endif
-#endif /* USE_SSL */
+#endif /* USE_SSL */
#ifdef ENABLE_GSS
gss_ctx_id_t gctx; /* GSS context */
/**********************************************************************
* plperl.c - perl as a procedural language for PostgreSQL
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plperl/plperl.c,v 1.168 2010/02/16 21:39:52 adunstan Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plperl/plperl.c,v 1.169 2010/02/26 02:01:33 momjian Exp $
*
**********************************************************************/
static PerlInterpreter *plperl_trusted_interp = NULL;
static PerlInterpreter *plperl_untrusted_interp = NULL;
static PerlInterpreter *plperl_held_interp = NULL;
-static OP *(*pp_require_orig)(pTHX) = NULL;
+static OP *(*pp_require_orig) (pTHX) = NULL;
static bool trusted_context;
static HTAB *plperl_proc_hash = NULL;
static HTAB *plperl_query_hash = NULL;
static void plperl_exec_callback(void *arg);
static void plperl_inline_callback(void *arg);
static char *strip_trailing_ws(const char *msg);
-static OP * pp_require_safe(pTHX);
-static int restore_context(bool);
+static OP *pp_require_safe(pTHX);
+static int restore_context(bool);
/*
* Convert an SV to char * and verify the encoding via pg_verifymbstr()
static inline char *
sv2text_mbverified(SV *sv)
{
- char * val;
- STRLEN len;
-
- /* The value returned here might include an
- * embedded nul byte, because perl allows such things.
- * That's OK, because pg_verifymbstr will choke on it, If
- * we just used strlen() instead of getting perl's idea of
- * the length, whatever uses the "verified" value might
- * get something quite weird.
+ char *val;
+ STRLEN len;
+
+ /*
+ * The value returned here might include an embedded nul byte, because
+ * perl allows such things. That's OK, because pg_verifymbstr will choke
+ * on it, If we just used strlen() instead of getting perl's idea of the
+ * length, whatever uses the "verified" value might get something quite
+ * weird.
*/
val = SvPV(sv, len);
pg_verifymbstr(val, len, false);
NULL, NULL);
DefineCustomStringVariable("plperl.on_init",
- gettext_noop("Perl initialization code to execute when a perl interpreter is initialized."),
- NULL,
- &plperl_on_init,
- NULL,
- PGC_SIGHUP, 0,
- NULL, NULL);
+ gettext_noop("Perl initialization code to execute when a perl interpreter is initialized."),
+ NULL,
+ &plperl_on_init,
+ NULL,
+ PGC_SIGHUP, 0,
+ NULL, NULL);
/*
- * plperl.on_plperl_init is currently PGC_SUSET to avoid issues whereby a user
- * who doesn't have USAGE privileges on the plperl language could possibly use
- * SET plperl.on_plperl_init='...' to influence the behaviour of any existing
- * plperl function that they can EXECUTE (which may be security definer).
- * Set http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2010-02/msg00281.php
- * and the overall thread.
+ * plperl.on_plperl_init is currently PGC_SUSET to avoid issues whereby a
+ * user who doesn't have USAGE privileges on the plperl language could
+ * possibly use SET plperl.on_plperl_init='...' to influence the behaviour
+ * of any existing plperl function that they can EXECUTE (which may be
+ * security definer). Set
+ * http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2010-02/msg00281.php and
+ * the overall thread.
*/
DefineCustomStringVariable("plperl.on_plperl_init",
- gettext_noop("Perl initialization code to execute once when plperl is first used."),
- NULL,
- &plperl_on_plperl_init,
- NULL,
- PGC_SUSET, 0,
- NULL, NULL);
+ gettext_noop("Perl initialization code to execute once when plperl is first used."),
+ NULL,
+ &plperl_on_plperl_init,
+ NULL,
+ PGC_SUSET, 0,
+ NULL, NULL);
DefineCustomStringVariable("plperl.on_plperlu_init",
- gettext_noop("Perl initialization code to execute once when plperlu is first used."),
- NULL,
- &plperl_on_plperlu_init,
- NULL,
- PGC_SUSET, 0,
- NULL, NULL);
+ gettext_noop("Perl initialization code to execute once when plperlu is first used."),
+ NULL,
+ &plperl_on_plperlu_init,
+ NULL,
+ PGC_SUSET, 0,
+ NULL, NULL);
EmitWarningsOnPlaceholders("plperl");
elog(DEBUG3, "plperl_fini");
/*
- * Indicate that perl is terminating.
- * Disables use of spi_* functions when running END/DESTROY code.
- * See check_spi_usage_allowed().
- * Could be enabled in future, with care, using a transaction
+ * Indicate that perl is terminating. Disables use of spi_* functions when
+ * running END/DESTROY code. See check_spi_usage_allowed(). Could be
+ * enabled in future, with care, using a transaction
* http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-hackers/2010-01/msg02743.php
*/
plperl_ending = true;
/* Only perform perl cleanup if we're exiting cleanly */
- if (code) {
+ if (code)
+ {
elog(DEBUG3, "plperl_fini: skipped");
return;
}
{
#ifdef MULTIPLICITY
PerlInterpreter *plperl = plperl_init_interp();
- if (trusted) {
+
+ if (trusted)
+ {
plperl_trusted_init();
plperl_trusted_interp = plperl;
}
- else {
+ else
+ {
plperl_untrusted_init();
plperl_untrusted_interp = plperl;
}
trusted_context = trusted;
/*
- * Since the timing of first use of PL/Perl can't be predicted,
- * any database interaction during initialization is problematic.
- * Including, but not limited to, security definer issues.
- * So we only enable access to the database AFTER on_*_init code has run.
- * See http://archives.postgresql.org/message-id/20100127143318.GE713@timac.local
+ * Since the timing of first use of PL/Perl can't be predicted, any
+ * database interaction during initialization is problematic. Including,
+ * but not limited to, security definer issues. So we only enable access
+ * to the database AFTER on_*_init code has run. See
+ * http://archives.postgresql.org/message-id/20100127143318.GE713@timac.loc
+ * al
*/
newXS("PostgreSQL::InServer::SPI::bootstrap",
- boot_PostgreSQL__InServer__SPI, __FILE__);
+ boot_PostgreSQL__InServer__SPI, __FILE__);
eval_pv("PostgreSQL::InServer::SPI::bootstrap()", FALSE);
if (SvTRUE(ERRSV))
ereport(ERROR,
(errmsg("%s", strip_trailing_ws(SvPV_nolen(ERRSV))),
- errdetail("While executing PostgreSQL::InServer::SPI::bootstrap.")));
+ errdetail("While executing PostgreSQL::InServer::SPI::bootstrap.")));
}
/*
restore_context(bool trusted)
{
if (interp_state == INTERP_BOTH ||
- ( trusted && interp_state == INTERP_TRUSTED) ||
+ (trusted && interp_state == INTERP_TRUSTED) ||
(!trusted && interp_state == INTERP_UNTRUSTED))
{
if (trusted_context != trusted)
{
- if (trusted) {
+ if (trusted)
+ {
PERL_SET_CONTEXT(plperl_trusted_interp);
PL_ppaddr[OP_REQUIRE] = pp_require_safe;
}
- else {
+ else
+ {
PERL_SET_CONTEXT(plperl_untrusted_interp);
PL_ppaddr[OP_REQUIRE] = pp_require_orig;
}
trusted_context = trusted;
}
- return 1; /* context restored */
+ return 1; /* context restored */
}
- return 0; /* unable - appropriate interpreter not available */
+ return 0; /* unable - appropriate interpreter not
+ * available */
}
static PerlInterpreter *
plperl_init_interp(void)
{
PerlInterpreter *plperl;
- static int perl_sys_init_done;
+ static int perl_sys_init_done;
- static char *embedding[3+2] = {
+ static char *embedding[3 + 2] = {
"", "-e", PLC_PERLBOOT
};
int nargs = 3;
PERL_SYS_INIT3(&nargs, (char ***) &embedding, (char ***) &dummy_env);
perl_sys_init_done = 1;
/* quiet warning if PERL_SYS_INIT3 doesn't use the third argument */
- dummy_env[0] = NULL;
+ dummy_env[0] = NULL;
}
#endif
PL_exit_flags |= PERL_EXIT_DESTRUCT_END;
/*
- * Record the original function for the 'require' opcode.
- * Ensure it's used for new interpreters.
+ * Record the original function for the 'require' opcode. Ensure it's used
+ * for new interpreters.
*/
if (!pp_require_orig)
pp_require_orig = PL_ppaddr[OP_REQUIRE];
PL_ppaddr[OP_REQUIRE] = pp_require_orig;
if (perl_parse(plperl, plperl_init_shared_libs,
- nargs, embedding, NULL) != 0)
+ nargs, embedding, NULL) != 0)
ereport(ERROR,
(errmsg("%s", strip_trailing_ws(SvPV_nolen(ERRSV))),
errcontext("While parsing perl initialization.")));
* If not, it'll die.
* So now "use Foo;" will work iff Foo has already been loaded.
*/
-static OP *
+static OP *
pp_require_safe(pTHX)
{
- dVAR; dSP;
- SV *sv, **svp;
- char *name;
- STRLEN len;
+ dVAR;
+ dSP;
+ SV *sv,
+ **svp;
+ char *name;
+ STRLEN len;
- sv = POPs;
- name = SvPV(sv, len);
- if (!(name && len > 0 && *name))
- RETPUSHNO;
+ sv = POPs;
+ name = SvPV(sv, len);
+ if (!(name && len > 0 && *name))
+ RETPUSHNO;
svp = hv_fetch(GvHVn(PL_incgv), name, len, 0);
if (svp && *svp != &PL_sv_undef)
if (interp && *interp)
{
/*
- * Only a very minimal destruction is performed:
- * - just call END blocks.
+ * Only a very minimal destruction is performed: - just call END
+ * blocks.
*
- * We could call perl_destruct() but we'd need to audit its
- * actions very carefully and work-around any that impact us.
- * (Calling sv_clean_objs() isn't an option because it's not
- * part of perl's public API so isn't portably available.)
- * Meanwhile END blocks can be used to perform manual cleanup.
+ * We could call perl_destruct() but we'd need to audit its actions
+ * very carefully and work-around any that impact us. (Calling
+ * sv_clean_objs() isn't an option because it's not part of perl's
+ * public API so isn't portably available.) Meanwhile END blocks can
+ * be used to perform manual cleanup.
*/
PERL_SET_CONTEXT(*interp);
/* Run END blocks - based on perl's perl_destruct() */
- if (PL_exit_flags & PERL_EXIT_DESTRUCT_END) {
+ if (PL_exit_flags & PERL_EXIT_DESTRUCT_END)
+ {
dJMPENV;
- int x = 0;
+ int x = 0;
JMPENV_PUSH(x);
PERL_UNUSED_VAR(x);
SV *safe_version_sv;
IV safe_version_x100;
- safe_version_sv = eval_pv(SAFE_MODULE, FALSE);/* TRUE = croak if failure */
- safe_version_x100 = (int)(SvNV(safe_version_sv) * 100);
+ safe_version_sv = eval_pv(SAFE_MODULE, FALSE); /* TRUE = croak if
+ * failure */
+ safe_version_x100 = (int) (SvNV(safe_version_sv) * 100);
/*
- * Reject too-old versions of Safe and some others:
- * 2.20: http://rt.perl.org/rt3/Ticket/Display.html?id=72068
- * 2.21: http://rt.perl.org/rt3/Ticket/Display.html?id=72700
+ * Reject too-old versions of Safe and some others: 2.20:
+ * http://rt.perl.org/rt3/Ticket/Display.html?id=72068 2.21:
+ * http://rt.perl.org/rt3/Ticket/Display.html?id=72700
*/
- if (safe_version_x100 < 209 || safe_version_x100 == 220 ||
+ if (safe_version_x100 < 209 || safe_version_x100 == 220 ||
safe_version_x100 == 221)
{
/* not safe, so disallow all trusted funcs */
if (SvTRUE(ERRSV))
ereport(ERROR,
(errmsg("%s", strip_trailing_ws(SvPV_nolen(ERRSV))),
- errcontext("While executing plperl.on_plperl_init.")));
+ errcontext("While executing plperl.on_plperl_init.")));
}
}
{
SV *rv;
int count;
+
dSP;
PUSHMARK(SP);
HV *hv;
hv = newHV();
- hv_ksplit(hv, 12); /* pre-grow the hash */
+ hv_ksplit(hv, 12); /* pre-grow the hash */
tdata = (TriggerData *) fcinfo->context;
tupdesc = tdata->tg_relation->rd_att;
{
InlineCodeBlock *codeblock = (InlineCodeBlock *) PG_GETARG_POINTER(0);
FunctionCallInfoData fake_fcinfo;
- FmgrInfo flinfo;
+ FmgrInfo flinfo;
plperl_proc_desc desc;
plperl_call_data *save_call_data = current_call_data;
bool oldcontext = trusted_context;
plperl_create_sub(plperl_proc_desc *prodesc, char *s, Oid fn_oid)
{
dSP;
- bool trusted = prodesc->lanpltrusted;
- char subname[NAMEDATALEN+40];
- HV *pragma_hv = newHV();
- SV *subref = NULL;
- int count;
- char *compile_sub;
+ bool trusted = prodesc->lanpltrusted;
+ char subname[NAMEDATALEN + 40];
+ HV *pragma_hv = newHV();
+ SV *subref = NULL;
+ int count;
+ char *compile_sub;
sprintf(subname, "%s__%u", prodesc->proname, fn_oid);
if (plperl_use_strict)
- hv_store_string(pragma_hv, "strict", (SV*)newAV());
+ hv_store_string(pragma_hv, "strict", (SV *) newAV());
ENTER;
SAVETMPS;
PUSHMARK(SP);
- EXTEND(SP,4);
+ EXTEND(SP, 4);
PUSHs(sv_2mortal(newSVstring(subname)));
- PUSHs(sv_2mortal(newRV_noinc((SV*)pragma_hv)));
+ PUSHs(sv_2mortal(newRV_noinc((SV *) pragma_hv)));
PUSHs(sv_2mortal(newSVstring("our $_TD; local $_TD=shift;")));
PUSHs(sv_2mortal(newSVstring(s)));
PUTBACK;
count = perl_call_pv(compile_sub, G_SCALAR | G_EVAL | G_KEEPERR);
SPAGAIN;
- if (count == 1) {
- GV *sub_glob = (GV*)POPs;
- if (sub_glob && SvTYPE(sub_glob) == SVt_PVGV) {
- SV *sv = (SV*)GvCVu((GV*)sub_glob);
+ if (count == 1)
+ {
+ GV *sub_glob = (GV *) POPs;
+
+ if (sub_glob && SvTYPE(sub_glob) == SVt_PVGV)
+ {
+ SV *sv = (SV *) GvCVu((GV *) sub_glob);
+
if (sv)
subref = newRV_inc(sv);
}
newXS("DynaLoader::boot_DynaLoader", boot_DynaLoader, file);
newXS("PostgreSQL::InServer::Util::bootstrap",
- boot_PostgreSQL__InServer__Util, file);
+ boot_PostgreSQL__InServer__Util, file);
/* newXS for...::SPI::bootstrap is in select_perl_context() */
}
{
hash_search(plperl_proc_hash, internal_proname,
HASH_REMOVE, NULL);
- if (prodesc->reference) {
+ if (prodesc->reference)
+ {
select_perl_context(prodesc->lanpltrusted);
SvREFCNT_dec(prodesc->reference);
restore_context(oldcontext);
{
typeTup =
SearchSysCache1(TYPEOID,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(procStruct->prorettype));
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(procStruct->prorettype));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(typeTup))
{
free(prodesc->proname);
for (i = 0; i < prodesc->nargs; i++)
{
typeTup = SearchSysCache1(TYPEOID,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(procStruct->proargtypes.values[i]));
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(procStruct->proargtypes.values[i]));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(typeTup))
{
free(prodesc->proname);
int i;
hv = newHV();
- hv_ksplit(hv, tupdesc->natts); /* pre-grow the hash */
+ hv_ksplit(hv, tupdesc->natts); /* pre-grow the hash */
for (i = 0; i < tupdesc->natts; i++)
{
check_spi_usage_allowed()
{
/* see comment in plperl_fini() */
- if (plperl_ending) {
+ if (plperl_ending)
+ {
/* simple croak as we don't want to involve PostgreSQL code */
croak("SPI functions can not be used in END blocks");
}
static void
plperl_exec_callback(void *arg)
{
- char *procname = (char *) arg;
+ char *procname = (char *) arg;
+
if (procname)
errcontext("PL/Perl function \"%s\"", procname);
}
static void
plperl_compile_callback(void *arg)
{
- char *procname = (char *) arg;
+ char *procname = (char *) arg;
+
if (procname)
errcontext("compilation of PL/Perl function \"%s\"", procname);
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_comp.c,v 1.149 2010/02/14 18:42:18 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_comp.c,v 1.150 2010/02/26 02:01:34 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
plpgsql_curr_compile = function;
/*
- * All the permanent output of compilation (e.g. parse tree) is kept in
- * a per-function memory context, so it can be reclaimed easily.
+ * All the permanent output of compilation (e.g. parse tree) is kept in a
+ * per-function memory context, so it can be reclaimed easily.
*/
func_cxt = AllocSetContextCreate(TopMemoryContext,
"PL/PgSQL function context",
plpgsql_nDatums = 0;
/* This is short-lived, so needn't allocate in function's cxt */
plpgsql_Datums = MemoryContextAlloc(compile_tmp_cxt,
- sizeof(PLpgSQL_datum *) * datums_alloc);
+ sizeof(PLpgSQL_datum *) * datums_alloc);
datums_last = 0;
switch (is_trigger)
/* Add the variable tg_argv */
var = plpgsql_build_variable("tg_argv", 0,
- plpgsql_build_datatype(TEXTARRAYOID, -1),
+ plpgsql_build_datatype(TEXTARRAYOID, -1),
true);
function->tg_argv_varno = var->dno;
fmgr_info(typinput, &(function->fn_retinput));
/*
- * Remember if function is STABLE/IMMUTABLE. XXX would it be better
- * to set this TRUE inside a read-only transaction? Not clear.
+ * Remember if function is STABLE/IMMUTABLE. XXX would it be better to
+ * set this TRUE inside a read-only transaction? Not clear.
*/
function->fn_readonly = false;
if (myvar != NULL && var != NULL)
{
/*
- * We could leave it to the core parser to throw this error, but
- * we can add a more useful detail message than the core could.
+ * We could leave it to the core parser to throw this error, but we
+ * can add a more useful detail message than the core could.
*/
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_AMBIGUOUS_COLUMN),
/*
* We should not get here, because a RECFIELD datum should
* have been built at parse time for every possible qualified
- * reference to fields of this record. But if we do, fall
- * out and return NULL.
+ * reference to fields of this record. But if we do, fall out
+ * and return NULL.
*/
}
break;
/*
* We should do nothing in DECLARE sections. In SQL expressions, there's
- * no need to do anything either --- lookup will happen when the expression
- * is compiled.
+ * no need to do anything either --- lookup will happen when the
+ * expression is compiled.
*/
if (plpgsql_IdentifierLookup == IDENTIFIER_LOOKUP_NORMAL)
{
makeString(word2));
/*
- * We should do nothing in DECLARE sections. In SQL expressions,
- * we really only need to make sure that RECFIELD datums are created
- * when needed.
+ * We should do nothing in DECLARE sections. In SQL expressions, we
+ * really only need to make sure that RECFIELD datums are created when
+ * needed.
*/
if (plpgsql_IdentifierLookup != IDENTIFIER_LOOKUP_DECLARE)
{
/* Block-qualified reference to scalar variable. */
wdatum->datum = plpgsql_Datums[ns->itemno];
wdatum->ident = NULL;
- wdatum->quoted = false; /* not used */
+ wdatum->quoted = false; /* not used */
wdatum->idents = idents;
return true;
wdatum->datum = plpgsql_Datums[ns->itemno];
}
wdatum->ident = NULL;
- wdatum->quoted = false; /* not used */
+ wdatum->quoted = false; /* not used */
wdatum->idents = idents;
return true;
if (nnames == 1)
{
/*
- * First word is a row name, so second word could be
- * a field in this row. Again, no error now if it
+ * First word is a row name, so second word could be a
+ * field in this row. Again, no error now if it
* isn't.
*/
PLpgSQL_row *row;
makeString(word3));
/*
- * We should do nothing in DECLARE sections. In SQL expressions,
- * we really only need to make sure that RECFIELD datums are created
- * when needed.
+ * We should do nothing in DECLARE sections. In SQL expressions, we
+ * really only need to make sure that RECFIELD datums are created when
+ * needed.
*/
if (plpgsql_IdentifierLookup != IDENTIFIER_LOOKUP_DECLARE)
{
switch (ns->itemtype)
{
case PLPGSQL_NSTYPE_REC:
- {
- /*
- * words 1/2 are a record name, so third word could be a
- * field in this record.
- */
- PLpgSQL_recfield *new;
+ {
+ /*
+ * words 1/2 are a record name, so third word could be
+ * a field in this record.
+ */
+ PLpgSQL_recfield *new;
- new = palloc(sizeof(PLpgSQL_recfield));
- new->dtype = PLPGSQL_DTYPE_RECFIELD;
- new->fieldname = pstrdup(word3);
- new->recparentno = ns->itemno;
+ new = palloc(sizeof(PLpgSQL_recfield));
+ new->dtype = PLPGSQL_DTYPE_RECFIELD;
+ new->fieldname = pstrdup(word3);
+ new->recparentno = ns->itemno;
- plpgsql_adddatum((PLpgSQL_datum *) new);
+ plpgsql_adddatum((PLpgSQL_datum *) new);
- wdatum->datum = (PLpgSQL_datum *) new;
- wdatum->ident = NULL;
- wdatum->quoted = false; /* not used */
- wdatum->idents = idents;
- return true;
- }
+ wdatum->datum = (PLpgSQL_datum *) new;
+ wdatum->ident = NULL;
+ wdatum->quoted = false; /* not used */
+ wdatum->idents = idents;
+ return true;
+ }
case PLPGSQL_NSTYPE_ROW:
- {
- /*
- * words 1/2 are a row name, so third word could be a
- * field in this row.
- */
- PLpgSQL_row *row;
- int i;
-
- row = (PLpgSQL_row *) (plpgsql_Datums[ns->itemno]);
- for (i = 0; i < row->nfields; i++)
{
- if (row->fieldnames[i] &&
- strcmp(row->fieldnames[i], word3) == 0)
+ /*
+ * words 1/2 are a row name, so third word could be a
+ * field in this row.
+ */
+ PLpgSQL_row *row;
+ int i;
+
+ row = (PLpgSQL_row *) (plpgsql_Datums[ns->itemno]);
+ for (i = 0; i < row->nfields; i++)
{
- wdatum->datum = plpgsql_Datums[row->varnos[i]];
- wdatum->ident = NULL;
- wdatum->quoted = false; /* not used */
- wdatum->idents = idents;
- return true;
+ if (row->fieldnames[i] &&
+ strcmp(row->fieldnames[i], word3) == 0)
+ {
+ wdatum->datum = plpgsql_Datums[row->varnos[i]];
+ wdatum->ident = NULL;
+ wdatum->quoted = false; /* not used */
+ wdatum->idents = idents;
+ return true;
+ }
}
+ /* fall through to return CWORD */
+ break;
}
- /* fall through to return CWORD */
- break;
- }
default:
break;
}
/*
- * Word wasn't found in the namespace stack. Try to find a data type
- * with that name, but ignore shell types and complex types.
+ * Word wasn't found in the namespace stack. Try to find a data type with
+ * that name, but ignore shell types and complex types.
*/
typeTup = LookupTypeName(NULL, makeTypeName(ident), NULL);
if (typeTup)
if (list_length(idents) == 2)
{
/*
- * Do a lookup in the current namespace stack.
- * We don't need to check number of names matched, because we will
- * only consider scalar variables.
+ * Do a lookup in the current namespace stack. We don't need to check
+ * number of names matched, because we will only consider scalar
+ * variables.
*/
nse = plpgsql_ns_lookup(plpgsql_ns_top(), false,
strVal(linitial(idents)),
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_exec.c,v 1.255 2010/02/12 19:37:36 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_exec.c,v 1.256 2010/02/26 02:01:34 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
static int exec_for_query(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, PLpgSQL_stmt_forq *stmt,
Portal portal, bool prefetch_ok);
static ParamListInfo setup_param_list(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate,
- PLpgSQL_expr *expr);
+ PLpgSQL_expr *expr);
static void plpgsql_param_fetch(ParamListInfo params, int paramid);
static void exec_move_row(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate,
PLpgSQL_rec *rec,
/*
* Put the OLD and NEW tuples into record variables
*
- * We make the tupdescs available in both records even though only one
- * may have a value. This allows parsing of record references to succeed
- * in functions that are used for multiple trigger types. For example,
- * we might have a test like "if (TG_OP = 'INSERT' and NEW.foo = 'xyz')",
+ * We make the tupdescs available in both records even though only one may
+ * have a value. This allows parsing of record references to succeed in
+ * functions that are used for multiple trigger types. For example, we
+ * might have a test like "if (TG_OP = 'INSERT' and NEW.foo = 'xyz')",
* which should parse regardless of the current trigger type.
*/
rec_new = (PLpgSQL_rec *) (estate.datums[func->new_varno]);
exec_prepare_plan(estate, query, curvar->cursor_options);
/*
- * Set up ParamListInfo (note this is only carrying a hook function,
- * not any actual data values, at this point)
+ * Set up ParamListInfo (note this is only carrying a hook function, not
+ * any actual data values, at this point)
*/
paramLI = setup_param_list(estate, query);
tupmap = convert_tuples_by_position(portal->tupDesc,
estate->rettupdesc,
- gettext_noop("structure of query does not match function result type"));
+ gettext_noop("structure of query does not match function result type"));
while (true)
{
errmsg("set-valued function called in context that cannot accept a set")));
/*
- * Switch to the right memory context and resource owner for storing
- * the tuplestore for return set. If we're within a subtransaction opened
- * for an exception-block, for example, we must still create the
- * tuplestore in the resource owner that was active when this function was
- * entered, and not in the subtransaction resource owner.
+ * Switch to the right memory context and resource owner for storing the
+ * tuplestore for return set. If we're within a subtransaction opened for
+ * an exception-block, for example, we must still create the tuplestore in
+ * the resource owner that was active when this function was entered, and
+ * not in the subtransaction resource owner.
*/
oldcxt = MemoryContextSwitchTo(estate->tuple_store_cxt);
oldowner = CurrentResourceOwner;
if (stmt->message)
{
- StringInfoData ds;
+ StringInfoData ds;
ListCell *current_param;
char *cp;
SPIPlanPtr plan;
/*
- * The grammar can't conveniently set expr->func while building the
- * parse tree, so make sure it's set before parser hooks need it.
+ * The grammar can't conveniently set expr->func while building the parse
+ * tree, so make sure it's set before parser hooks need it.
*/
expr->func = estate->func;
}
/*
- * Set up ParamListInfo (note this is only carrying a hook function,
- * not any actual data values, at this point)
+ * Set up ParamListInfo (note this is only carrying a hook function, not
+ * any actual data values, at this point)
*/
paramLI = setup_param_list(estate, expr);
}
/*
- * Set up ParamListInfo (note this is only carrying a hook function,
- * not any actual data values, at this point)
+ * Set up ParamListInfo (note this is only carrying a hook function, not
+ * any actual data values, at this point)
*/
paramLI = setup_param_list(estate, query);
default:
elog(ERROR, "unrecognized dtype: %d", datum->dtype);
- typeid = InvalidOid; /* keep compiler quiet */
+ typeid = InvalidOid; /* keep compiler quiet */
break;
}
exec_prepare_plan(estate, expr, 0);
/*
- * Set up ParamListInfo (note this is only carrying a hook function,
- * not any actual data values, at this point)
+ * Set up ParamListInfo (note this is only carrying a hook function, not
+ * any actual data values, at this point)
*/
paramLI = setup_param_list(estate, expr);
}
/*
- * Create the param list in econtext's temporary memory context.
- * We won't need to free it explicitly, since it will go away at the
- * next reset of that context.
+ * Create the param list in econtext's temporary memory context. We won't
+ * need to free it explicitly, since it will go away at the next reset of
+ * that context.
*
* XXX think about avoiding repeated palloc's for param lists? It should
* be possible --- this routine isn't re-entrant anymore.
*
* The ParamListInfo array is initially all zeroes, in particular the
* ptype values are all InvalidOid. This causes the executor to call the
- * paramFetch hook each time it wants a value. We thus evaluate only the
+ * paramFetch hook each time it wants a value. We thus evaluate only the
* parameters actually demanded.
*
* The result is a locally palloc'd array that should be pfree'd after use;
ParamListInfo paramLI;
/*
- * Could we re-use these arrays instead of palloc'ing a new one each
- * time? However, we'd have to zero the array each time anyway,
- * since new values might have been assigned to the variables.
+ * Could we re-use these arrays instead of palloc'ing a new one each time?
+ * However, we'd have to zero the array each time anyway, since new values
+ * might have been assigned to the variables.
*/
if (estate->ndatums > 0)
{
/* sizeof(ParamListInfoData) includes the first array element */
paramLI = (ParamListInfo)
palloc0(sizeof(ParamListInfoData) +
- (estate->ndatums - 1) * sizeof(ParamExternData));
+ (estate->ndatums - 1) *sizeof(ParamExternData));
paramLI->paramFetch = plpgsql_param_fetch;
paramLI->paramFetchArg = (void *) estate;
paramLI->parserSetup = (ParserSetupHook) plpgsql_parser_setup;
/*
* Set up link to active expr where the hook functions can find it.
- * Callers must save and restore cur_expr if there is any chance
- * that they are interrupting an active use of parameters.
+ * Callers must save and restore cur_expr if there is any chance that
+ * they are interrupting an active use of parameters.
*/
estate->cur_expr = expr;
/*
- * Also make sure this is set before parser hooks need it. There
- * is no need to save and restore, since the value is always correct
- * once set.
+ * Also make sure this is set before parser hooks need it. There is
+ * no need to save and restore, since the value is always correct once
+ * set.
*/
expr->func = estate->func;
}
Assert(params->numParams == estate->ndatums);
/*
- * Do nothing if asked for a value that's not supposed to be used by
- * this SQL expression. This avoids unwanted evaluations when functions
- * such as copyParamList try to materialize all the values.
+ * Do nothing if asked for a value that's not supposed to be used by this
+ * SQL expression. This avoids unwanted evaluations when functions such
+ * as copyParamList try to materialize all the values.
*/
if (!bms_is_member(dno, expr->paramnos))
return;
{
value = (Datum) 0;
isnull = true;
+
/*
* InvalidOid is OK because exec_assign_value doesn't care
* about the type of a source NULL
querystr,
ppd->nargs, ppd->types,
ppd->values, ppd->nulls,
- estate->readonly_func,
+ estate->readonly_func,
cursorOptions);
free_params_data(ppd);
}
querystr,
0, NULL,
NULL, NULL,
- estate->readonly_func,
+ estate->readonly_func,
cursorOptions);
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_funcs.c,v 1.89 2010/02/17 01:48:45 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_funcs.c,v 1.90 2010/02/26 02:01:35 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* list or "chain" (from the youngest item to the root) is accessible from
* any one plpgsql statement. During initial parsing of a function, ns_top
* points to the youngest item accessible from the block currently being
- * parsed. We store the entire tree, however, since at runtime we will need
+ * parsed. We store the entire tree, however, since at runtime we will need
* to access the chain that's relevant to any one statement.
*
* Block boundaries in the namespace chain are marked by PLPGSQL_NSTYPE_LABEL
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_handler.c,v 1.50 2010/02/14 18:42:18 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_handler.c,v 1.51 2010/02/26 02:01:35 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
{NULL, 0, false}
};
-int plpgsql_variable_conflict = PLPGSQL_RESOLVE_ERROR;
+int plpgsql_variable_conflict = PLPGSQL_RESOLVE_ERROR;
/* Hook for plugins */
PLpgSQL_plugin **plugin_ptr = NULL;
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_scanner.c,v 1.4 2010/01/10 17:15:18 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_scanner.c,v 1.5 2010/02/26 02:01:35 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/* Klugy flag to tell scanner how to look up identifiers */
-IdentifierLookup plpgsql_IdentifierLookup = IDENTIFIER_LOOKUP_NORMAL;
+IdentifierLookup plpgsql_IdentifierLookup = IDENTIFIER_LOOKUP_NORMAL;
/*
* A word about keywords:
*
* For the most part, the reserved keywords are those that start a PL/pgSQL
* statement (and so would conflict with an assignment to a variable of the
- * same name). We also don't sweat it much about reserving keywords that
+ * same name). We also don't sweat it much about reserving keywords that
* are reserved in the core grammar. Try to avoid reserving other words.
*/
/*
* Scanner working state. At some point we might wish to fold all this
- * into a YY_EXTRA struct. For the moment, there is no need for plpgsql's
+ * into a YY_EXTRA struct. For the moment, there is no need for plpgsql's
* lexer to be re-entrant, and the notational burden of passing a yyscanner
* pointer around is great enough to not want to do it without need.
*/
static const char *scanorig;
/* Current token's length (corresponds to plpgsql_yylval and plpgsql_yylloc) */
-static int plpgsql_yyleng;
+static int plpgsql_yyleng;
/* Token pushback stack */
#define MAX_PUSHBACKS 4
-static int num_pushbacks;
-static int pushback_token[MAX_PUSHBACKS];
-static TokenAuxData pushback_auxdata[MAX_PUSHBACKS];
+static int num_pushbacks;
+static int pushback_token[MAX_PUSHBACKS];
+static TokenAuxData pushback_auxdata[MAX_PUSHBACKS];
/* State for plpgsql_location_to_lineno() */
static const char *cur_line_start;
/*
* Internal yylex function. This wraps the core lexer and adds one feature:
- * a token pushback stack. We also make a couple of trivial single-token
+ * a token pushback stack. We also make a couple of trivial single-token
* translations from what the core lexer does to what we want, in particular
* interfacing from the core_YYSTYPE to YYSTYPE union.
*/
void
plpgsql_push_back_token(int token)
{
- TokenAuxData auxdata;
+ TokenAuxData auxdata;
auxdata.lval = plpgsql_yylval;
auxdata.lloc = plpgsql_yylloc;
int
plpgsql_scanner_errposition(int location)
{
- int pos;
+ int pos;
if (location < 0 || scanorig == NULL)
return 0; /* no-op if location is unknown */
{
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- /* translator: %s is typically the translation of "syntax error" */
+ /* translator: %s is typically the translation of "syntax error" */
errmsg("%s at end of input", _(message)),
plpgsql_scanner_errposition(plpgsql_yylloc)));
}
{
/*
* If we have done any lookahead then flex will have restored the
- * character after the end-of-token. Zap it again so that we
- * report only the single token here. This modifies scanbuf but
- * we no longer care about that.
+ * character after the end-of-token. Zap it again so that we report
+ * only the single token here. This modifies scanbuf but we no longer
+ * care about that.
*/
yytext[plpgsql_yyleng] = '\0';
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_SYNTAX_ERROR),
- /* translator: first %s is typically the translation of "syntax error" */
+ /* translator: first %s is typically the translation of "syntax error" */
errmsg("%s at or near \"%s\"", _(message), yytext),
plpgsql_scanner_errposition(plpgsql_yylloc)));
}
* we will think "line 1" is what the programmer thinks of as line 1.
*----------
*/
- if (*cur_line_start == '\r')
- cur_line_start++;
- if (*cur_line_start == '\n')
- cur_line_start++;
+ if (*cur_line_start == '\r')
+ cur_line_start++;
+ if (*cur_line_start == '\n')
+ cur_line_start++;
cur_line_end = strchr(cur_line_start, '\n');
}
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpgsql/src/plpgsql.h,v 1.129 2010/01/19 01:35:31 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpgsql/src/plpgsql.h,v 1.130 2010/02/26 02:01:35 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
typedef enum
{
- IDENTIFIER_LOOKUP_NORMAL, /* normal processing of var names */
- IDENTIFIER_LOOKUP_DECLARE, /* In DECLARE --- don't look up names */
- IDENTIFIER_LOOKUP_EXPR /* In SQL expression --- special case */
+ IDENTIFIER_LOOKUP_NORMAL, /* normal processing of var names */
+ IDENTIFIER_LOOKUP_DECLARE, /* In DECLARE --- don't look up names */
+ IDENTIFIER_LOOKUP_EXPR /* In SQL expression --- special case */
} IdentifierLookup;
extern IdentifierLookup plpgsql_IdentifierLookup;
bool forValidator);
extern PLpgSQL_function *plpgsql_compile_inline(char *proc_source);
extern void plpgsql_parser_setup(struct ParseState *pstate,
- PLpgSQL_expr *expr);
+ PLpgSQL_expr *expr);
extern bool plpgsql_parse_word(char *word1, const char *yytxt,
- PLwdatum *wdatum, PLword *word);
+ PLwdatum *wdatum, PLword *word);
extern bool plpgsql_parse_dblword(char *word1, char *word2,
- PLwdatum *wdatum, PLcword *cword);
+ PLwdatum *wdatum, PLcword *cword);
extern bool plpgsql_parse_tripword(char *word1, char *word2, char *word3,
- PLwdatum *wdatum, PLcword *cword);
+ PLwdatum *wdatum, PLcword *cword);
extern PLpgSQL_type *plpgsql_parse_wordtype(char *ident);
extern PLpgSQL_type *plpgsql_parse_cwordtype(List *idents);
extern PLpgSQL_type *plpgsql_parse_wordrowtype(char *ident);
extern void plpgsql_subxact_cb(SubXactEvent event, SubTransactionId mySubid,
SubTransactionId parentSubid, void *arg);
extern Oid exec_get_datum_type(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate,
- PLpgSQL_datum *datum);
+ PLpgSQL_datum *datum);
extern Oid exec_get_rec_fieldtype(PLpgSQL_rec *rec, const char *fieldname,
int *fieldno);
extern PLpgSQL_nsitem *plpgsql_ns_top(void);
extern void plpgsql_ns_additem(int itemtype, int itemno, const char *name);
extern PLpgSQL_nsitem *plpgsql_ns_lookup(PLpgSQL_nsitem *ns_cur, bool localmode,
- const char *name1, const char *name2,
- const char *name3, int *names_used);
+ const char *name1, const char *name2,
+ const char *name3, int *names_used);
extern PLpgSQL_nsitem *plpgsql_ns_lookup_label(PLpgSQL_nsitem *ns_cur,
- const char *name);
+ const char *name);
/* ----------
* Other functions in pl_funcs.c
extern int plpgsql_yylex(void);
extern void plpgsql_push_back_token(int token);
extern void plpgsql_append_source_text(StringInfo buf,
- int startlocation, int endlocation);
+ int startlocation, int endlocation);
extern int plpgsql_scanner_errposition(int location);
extern void plpgsql_yyerror(const char *message);
extern int plpgsql_location_to_lineno(int location);
/**********************************************************************
* plpython.c - python as a procedural language for PostgreSQL
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpython/plpython.c,v 1.138 2010/02/18 23:50:06 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpython/plpython.c,v 1.139 2010/02/26 02:01:36 momjian Exp $
*
*********************************************************************
*/
* definition is for Python <=2.5
*/
#ifndef PyVarObject_HEAD_INIT
-#define PyVarObject_HEAD_INIT(type, size) \
+#define PyVarObject_HEAD_INIT(type, size) \
PyObject_HEAD_INIT(type) size,
#endif
*/
struct PLyDatumToOb;
-typedef PyObject *(*PLyDatumToObFunc) (struct PLyDatumToOb*, Datum);
+typedef PyObject *(*PLyDatumToObFunc) (struct PLyDatumToOb *, Datum);
typedef struct PLyDatumToOb
{
struct PLyObToDatum;
struct PLyTypeInfo;
-typedef Datum (*PLyObToDatumFunc) (struct PLyTypeInfo*,
- struct PLyObToDatum*,
- PyObject *);
+typedef Datum (*PLyObToDatumFunc) (struct PLyTypeInfo *,
+ struct PLyObToDatum *,
+ PyObject *);
typedef struct PLyObToDatum
{
{
PLyTypeInput in;
PLyTypeOutput out;
+
/*
- * is_rowtype can be: -1 = not known yet (initial state); 0 = scalar datatype;
- * 1 = rowtype; 2 = rowtype, but I/O functions not set up yet
+ * is_rowtype can be: -1 = not known yet (initial state); 0 = scalar
+ * datatype; 1 = rowtype; 2 = rowtype, but I/O functions not set up yet
*/
int is_rowtype;
} PLyTypeInfo;
static char *PLy_strdup(const char *);
static void PLy_free(void *);
-static PyObject*PLyUnicode_Str(PyObject *unicode);
-static PyObject*PLyUnicode_Bytes(PyObject *unicode);
+static PyObject *PLyUnicode_Str(PyObject *unicode);
+static PyObject *PLyUnicode_Bytes(PyObject *unicode);
static char *PLyUnicode_AsString(PyObject *unicode);
+
#if PY_MAJOR_VERSION >= 3
static PyObject *PLyUnicode_FromString(const char *s);
#endif
static PyObject *PLyDict_FromTuple(PLyTypeInfo *, HeapTuple, TupleDesc);
static Datum PLyObject_ToBool(PLyTypeInfo *, PLyObToDatum *,
- PyObject *);
+ PyObject *);
static Datum PLyObject_ToBytea(PLyTypeInfo *, PLyObToDatum *,
- PyObject *);
+ PyObject *);
static Datum PLyObject_ToDatum(PLyTypeInfo *, PLyObToDatum *,
- PyObject *);
+ PyObject *);
static Datum PLySequence_ToArray(PLyTypeInfo *, PLyObToDatum *,
- PyObject *);
+ PyObject *);
static HeapTuple PLyMapping_ToTuple(PLyTypeInfo *, PyObject *);
static HeapTuple PLySequence_ToTuple(PLyTypeInfo *, PyObject *);
save_curr_proc = PLy_curr_procedure;
/*
- * Setup error traceback support for ereport()
- */
- plerrcontext.callback = plpython_error_callback;
- plerrcontext.previous = error_context_stack;
- error_context_stack = &plerrcontext;
+ * Setup error traceback support for ereport()
+ */
+ plerrcontext.callback = plpython_error_callback;
+ plerrcontext.previous = error_context_stack;
+ error_context_stack = &plerrcontext;
PG_TRY();
{
PG_END_TRY();
/* Pop the error context stack */
- error_context_stack = plerrcontext.previous;
+ error_context_stack = plerrcontext.previous;
PLy_curr_procedure = save_curr_proc;
{
ereport(ERROR,
(errmsg("TD[\"new\"] dictionary key at ordinal position %d is not a string", i)));
- plattstr = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */
+ plattstr = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */
}
attn = SPI_fnumber(tupdesc, plattstr);
if (attn == SPI_ERROR_NOATTRIBUTE)
else if (plval != Py_None)
{
PLyObToDatum *att = &proc->result.out.r.atts[atti];
+
modvalues[i] = (att->func) (&proc->result, att, plval);
modnulls[i] = ' ';
}
Form_pg_type rvTypeStruct;
rvTypeTup = SearchSysCache1(TYPEOID,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(procStruct->prorettype));
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(procStruct->prorettype));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(rvTypeTup))
elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for type %u",
procStruct->prorettype);
PLy_output_datum_func2(PLyObToDatum *arg, HeapTuple typeTup)
{
Form_pg_type typeStruct = (Form_pg_type) GETSTRUCT(typeTup);
- Oid element_type;
+ Oid element_type;
perm_fmgr_info(typeStruct->typinput, &arg->typfunc);
arg->typoid = HeapTupleGetOid(typeTup);
element_type = get_element_type(arg->typoid);
/*
- * Select a conversion function to convert Python objects to
- * PostgreSQL datums. Most data types can go through the generic
- * function.
+ * Select a conversion function to convert Python objects to PostgreSQL
+ * datums. Most data types can go through the generic function.
*/
switch (getBaseType(element_type ? element_type : arg->typoid))
{
if (element_type)
{
- char dummy_delim;
- Oid funcid;
+ char dummy_delim;
+ Oid funcid;
if (type_is_rowtype(element_type))
ereport(ERROR,
PLy_input_datum_func2(PLyDatumToOb *arg, Oid typeOid, HeapTuple typeTup)
{
Form_pg_type typeStruct = (Form_pg_type) GETSTRUCT(typeTup);
- Oid element_type = get_element_type(typeOid);
+ Oid element_type = get_element_type(typeOid);
/* Get the type's conversion information */
perm_fmgr_info(typeStruct->typoutput, &arg->typfunc);
PLyFloat_FromNumeric(PLyDatumToOb *arg, Datum d)
{
/*
- * Numeric is cast to a PyFloat:
- * This results in a loss of precision
- * Would it be better to cast to PyString?
+ * Numeric is cast to a PyFloat: This results in a loss of precision Would
+ * it be better to cast to PyString?
*/
- Datum f = DirectFunctionCall1(numeric_float8, d);
- double x = DatumGetFloat8(f);
+ Datum f = DirectFunctionCall1(numeric_float8, d);
+ double x = DatumGetFloat8(f);
+
return PyFloat_FromDouble(x);
}
static PyObject *
PLyBytes_FromBytea(PLyDatumToOb *arg, Datum d)
{
- text *txt = DatumGetByteaP(d);
- char *str = VARDATA(txt);
- size_t size = VARSIZE(txt) - VARHDRSZ;
+ text *txt = DatumGetByteaP(d);
+ char *str = VARDATA(txt);
+ size_t size = VARSIZE(txt) - VARHDRSZ;
return PyBytes_FromStringAndSize(str, size);
}
static PyObject *
PLyString_FromDatum(PLyDatumToOb *arg, Datum d)
{
- char *x = OutputFunctionCall(&arg->typfunc, d);
- PyObject *r = PyString_FromString(x);
+ char *x = OutputFunctionCall(&arg->typfunc, d);
+ PyObject *r = PyString_FromString(x);
+
pfree(x);
return r;
}
if (ARR_NDIM(array) != 1)
ereport(ERROR,
(errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED),
- errmsg("cannot convert multidimensional array to Python list"),
- errdetail("PL/Python only supports one-dimensional arrays.")));
+ errmsg("cannot convert multidimensional array to Python list"),
+ errdetail("PL/Python only supports one-dimensional arrays.")));
length = ARR_DIMS(array)[0];
lbound = ARR_LBOUND(array)[0];
for (i = 0; i < length; i++)
{
- Datum elem;
- bool isnull;
- int offset;
+ Datum elem;
+ bool isnull;
+ int offset;
offset = lbound + i;
elem = array_ref(array, 1, &offset, arg->typlen, arg->elm->typlen, arg->elm->typbyval, arg->elm->typalign, &isnull);
}
/*
- * Convert a Python object to a PostgreSQL bool datum. This can't go
+ * Convert a Python object to a PostgreSQL bool datum. This can't go
* through the generic conversion function, because Python attaches a
* Boolean value to everything, more things than the PostgreSQL bool
* type can parse.
PyObject *plrv)
{
PyObject *volatile plrv_so = NULL;
- Datum rv;
+ Datum rv;
Assert(plrv != Py_None);
PG_TRY();
{
- char *plrv_sc = PyBytes_AsString(plrv_so);
- size_t len = PyBytes_Size(plrv_so);
- size_t size = len + VARHDRSZ;
- bytea *result = palloc(size);
+ char *plrv_sc = PyBytes_AsString(plrv_so);
+ size_t len = PyBytes_Size(plrv_so);
+ size_t size = len + VARHDRSZ;
+ bytea *result = palloc(size);
SET_VARSIZE(result, size);
memcpy(VARDATA(result), plrv_sc, len);
PLyObToDatum *arg,
PyObject *plrv)
{
- PyObject *volatile plrv_bo = NULL;
- Datum rv;
+ PyObject *volatile plrv_bo = NULL;
+ Datum rv;
Assert(plrv != Py_None);
else
{
#if PY_MAJOR_VERSION >= 3
- PyObject *s = PyObject_Str(plrv);
+ PyObject *s = PyObject_Str(plrv);
+
plrv_bo = PLyUnicode_Bytes(s);
Py_XDECREF(s);
#else
PG_TRY();
{
- char *plrv_sc = PyBytes_AsString(plrv_bo);
- size_t plen = PyBytes_Size(plrv_bo);
- size_t slen = strlen(plrv_sc);
+ char *plrv_sc = PyBytes_AsString(plrv_bo);
+ size_t plen = PyBytes_Size(plrv_bo);
+ size_t slen = strlen(plrv_sc);
if (slen < plen)
ereport(ERROR,
PLyObToDatum *arg,
PyObject *plrv)
{
- ArrayType *array;
+ ArrayType *array;
int i;
- Datum *elems;
- bool *nulls;
+ Datum *elems;
+ bool *nulls;
int len;
int lbs;
for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
{
- PyObject *obj = PySequence_GetItem(plrv, i);
+ PyObject *obj = PySequence_GetItem(plrv, i);
if (obj == Py_None)
nulls[i] = true;
else
{
nulls[i] = false;
- /* We don't support arrays of row types yet, so the first
- * argument can be NULL. */
+
+ /*
+ * We don't support arrays of row types yet, so the first argument
+ * can be NULL.
+ */
elems[i] = arg->elm->func(NULL, arg->elm, obj);
}
Py_XDECREF(obj);
{
ereport(ERROR,
(errmsg("plpy.prepare: type name at ordinal position %d is not a string", i)));
- sptr = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */
+ sptr = NULL; /* keep compiler quiet */
}
/********************************************************
if (PyTuple_Size(args) == 1)
{
- /* Treat single argument specially to avoid undesirable
- * ('tuple',) decoration. */
- PyObject *o;
+ /*
+ * Treat single argument specially to avoid undesirable ('tuple',)
+ * decoration.
+ */
+ PyObject *o;
+
PyArg_UnpackTuple(args, "plpy.elog", 1, 1, &o);
so = PyObject_Str(o);
}
FlushErrorState();
PyErr_SetString(PLy_exc_error, sv);
- /* Note: If sv came from PyString_AsString(), it points into
- * storage owned by so. So free so after using sv. */
+
+ /*
+ * Note: If sv came from PyString_AsString(), it points into storage
+ * owned by so. So free so after using sv.
+ */
Py_XDECREF(so);
/*
/* Emit a PG error or notice, together with any available info about
* the current Python error, previously set by PLy_exception_set().
- * This should be used to propagate Python errors into PG. If fmt is
+ * This should be used to propagate Python errors into PG. If fmt is
* NULL, the Python error becomes the primary error message, otherwise
* it becomes the detail.
*/
if (fmt)
{
initStringInfo(&emsg);
- for(;;)
+ for (;;)
{
va_list ap;
bool success;
/*
* Convert a Unicode object to a Python string.
*/
-static PyObject*
+static PyObject *
PLyUnicode_Str(PyObject *unicode)
{
#if PY_MAJOR_VERSION >= 3
Py_INCREF(unicode);
return unicode;
#else
- /* In Python 2, this means converting the Unicode to bytes in the
- * server encoding. */
+
+ /*
+ * In Python 2, this means converting the Unicode to bytes in the server
+ * encoding.
+ */
return PLyUnicode_Bytes(unicode);
#endif
}
/*
* Convert a Python unicode object to a Python string/bytes object in
- * PostgreSQL server encoding. Reference ownership is passed to the
+ * PostgreSQL server encoding. Reference ownership is passed to the
* caller.
*/
-static PyObject*
+static PyObject *
PLyUnicode_Bytes(PyObject *unicode)
{
- PyObject *rv;
+ PyObject *rv;
const char *serverenc;
/*
- * Python understands almost all PostgreSQL encoding names, but it
- * doesn't know SQL_ASCII.
+ * Python understands almost all PostgreSQL encoding names, but it doesn't
+ * know SQL_ASCII.
*/
if (GetDatabaseEncoding() == PG_SQL_ASCII)
serverenc = "ascii";
* function. The result is palloc'ed.
*
* Note that this function is disguised as PyString_AsString() when
- * using Python 3. That function retuns a pointer into the internal
+ * using Python 3. That function retuns a pointer into the internal
* memory of the argument, which isn't exactly the interface of this
* function. But in either case you get a rather short-lived
* reference that you ought to better leave alone.
static char *
PLyUnicode_AsString(PyObject *unicode)
{
- PyObject *o = PLyUnicode_Bytes(unicode);
- char *rv = pstrdup(PyBytes_AsString(o));
+ PyObject *o = PLyUnicode_Bytes(unicode);
+ char *rv = pstrdup(PyBytes_AsString(o));
+
Py_XDECREF(o);
return rv;
}
#if PY_MAJOR_VERSION >= 3
/*
* Convert a C string in the PostgreSQL server encoding to a Python
- * unicode object. Reference ownership is passed to the caller.
+ * unicode object. Reference ownership is passed to the caller.
*/
static PyObject *
PLyUnicode_FromString(const char *s)
{
- char *utf8string;
+ char *utf8string;
PyObject *o;
- utf8string = (char *) pg_do_encoding_conversion((unsigned char *) s,
+ utf8string = (char *) pg_do_encoding_conversion((unsigned char *) s,
strlen(s),
GetDatabaseEncoding(),
PG_UTF8);
o = PyUnicode_FromString(utf8string);
- if (utf8string != s)
- pfree(utf8string);
+ if (utf8string != s)
+ pfree(utf8string);
return o;
}
-#endif /* PY_MAJOR_VERSION >= 3 */
+
+#endif /* PY_MAJOR_VERSION >= 3 */
* pltcl.c - PostgreSQL support for Tcl as
* procedural language (PL)
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/tcl/pltcl.c,v 1.131 2010/02/14 18:42:19 rhaas Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/tcl/pltcl.c,v 1.132 2010/02/26 02:01:37 momjian Exp $
*
**********************************************************************/
* for the input function
************************************************************/
typeTup = SearchSysCache1(TYPEOID,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(tupdesc->attrs[attnum - 1]->atttypid));
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(tupdesc->attrs[attnum - 1]->atttypid));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(typeTup))
elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for type %u",
tupdesc->attrs[attnum - 1]->atttypid);
{
typeTup =
SearchSysCache1(TYPEOID,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(procStruct->prorettype));
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(procStruct->prorettype));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(typeTup))
{
free(prodesc->user_proname);
for (i = 0; i < prodesc->nargs; i++)
{
typeTup = SearchSysCache1(TYPEOID,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(procStruct->proargtypes.values[i]));
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(procStruct->proargtypes.values[i]));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(typeTup))
{
free(prodesc->user_proname);
* for the output function
************************************************************/
typeTup = SearchSysCache1(TYPEOID,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(tupdesc->attrs[i]->atttypid));
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(tupdesc->attrs[i]->atttypid));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(typeTup))
elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for type %u",
tupdesc->attrs[i]->atttypid);
* for the output function
************************************************************/
typeTup = SearchSysCache1(TYPEOID,
- ObjectIdGetDatum(tupdesc->attrs[i]->atttypid));
+ ObjectIdGetDatum(tupdesc->attrs[i]->atttypid));
if (!HeapTupleIsValid(typeTup))
elog(ERROR, "cache lookup failed for type %u",
tupdesc->attrs[i]->atttypid);
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/chklocale.c,v 1.14 2010/01/02 16:58:13 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/chklocale.c,v 1.15 2010/02/26 02:01:38 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
save = setlocale(LC_CTYPE, NULL);
if (!save)
- return -1; /* setlocale() broken? */
+ return -1; /* setlocale() broken? */
/* must copy result, or it might change after setlocale */
save = strdup(save);
if (!save)
- return -1; /* out of memory; unlikely */
+ return -1; /* out of memory; unlikely */
name = setlocale(LC_CTYPE, ctype);
if (!name)
{
free(save);
- return -1; /* bogus ctype passed in? */
+ return -1; /* bogus ctype passed in? */
}
#ifndef WIN32
/* much easier... */
ctype = setlocale(LC_CTYPE, NULL);
if (!ctype)
- return -1; /* setlocale() broken? */
+ return -1; /* setlocale() broken? */
/* If locale is C or POSIX, we can allow all encodings */
if (pg_strcasecmp(ctype, "C") == 0 ||
}
if (!sys)
- return -1; /* out of memory; unlikely */
+ return -1; /* out of memory; unlikely */
/* Check the table */
for (i = 0; encoding_match_list[i].system_enc_name; i++)
* as a service.
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/copydir.c,v 1.32 2010/02/23 05:44:55 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/copydir.c,v 1.33 2010/02/26 02:01:38 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
FreeDir(xldir);
#ifdef NOTYET
+
/*
- * It's important to fsync the destination directory itself as
- * individual file fsyncs don't guarantee that the directory entry
- * for the file is synced. Recent versions of ext4 have made the
- * window much wider but it's been true for ext3 and other
- * filesystems in the past.
+ * It's important to fsync the destination directory itself as individual
+ * file fsyncs don't guarantee that the directory entry for the file is
+ * synced. Recent versions of ext4 have made the window much wider but
+ * it's been true for ext3 and other filesystems in the past.
*
* However we can't do this just yet, it has portability issues.
*/
/*
* Do the data copying.
*/
- for (offset=0; ; offset+=nbytes)
+ for (offset = 0;; offset += nbytes)
{
nbytes = read(srcfd, buffer, COPY_BUF_SIZE);
if (nbytes < 0)
}
/*
- * We fsync the files later but first flush them to avoid spamming
- * the cache and hopefully get the kernel to start writing them
- * out before the fsync comes.
+ * We fsync the files later but first flush them to avoid spamming the
+ * cache and hopefully get the kernel to start writing them out before
+ * the fsync comes.
*/
pg_flush_data(dstfd, offset, nbytes);
}
static void
fsync_fname(char *fname)
{
- int fd = BasicOpenFile(fname,
- O_RDWR | PG_BINARY,
- S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR);
+ int fd = BasicOpenFile(fname,
+ O_RDWR | PG_BINARY,
+ S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR);
if (fd < 0)
ereport(ERROR,
* Win32 (NT4 and newer).
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/dirmod.c,v 1.60 2010/01/02 16:58:13 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/dirmod.c,v 1.61 2010/02/26 02:01:38 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
_dosmaperr(err);
/*
- * Modern NT-based Windows versions return ERROR_SHARING_VIOLATION
- * if another process has the file open without FILE_SHARE_DELETE.
+ * Modern NT-based Windows versions return ERROR_SHARING_VIOLATION if
+ * another process has the file open without FILE_SHARE_DELETE.
* ERROR_LOCK_VIOLATION has also been seen with some anti-virus
* software. This used to check for just ERROR_ACCESS_DENIED, so
* presumably you can get that too with some OS versions. We don't
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/exec.c,v 1.67 2010/01/14 00:14:06 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/exec.c,v 1.68 2010/02/26 02:01:38 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
DWORD dwSize = 0;
DWORD dwTokenInfoLength = 0;
PACL pacl = NULL;
- PTOKEN_USER pTokenUser = NULL;
+ PTOKEN_USER pTokenUser = NULL;
TOKEN_DEFAULT_DACL tddNew;
TOKEN_DEFAULT_DACL *ptdd = NULL;
TOKEN_INFORMATION_CLASS tic = TokenDefaultDacl;
}
/*
- * Get the user token for the current user, which provides us with the
- * SID that is needed for creating the ACL.
+ * Get the user token for the current user, which provides us with the SID
+ * that is needed for creating the ACL.
*/
if (!GetTokenUser(hToken, &pTokenUser))
{
*
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/win32env.c,v 1.7 2010/01/02 16:58:13 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/win32env.c,v 1.8 2010/02/26 02:01:38 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
* Each version of MSVCRT has its own _putenv() call in the runtime
* library.
*
- * mingw always uses MSVCRT.DLL, but if we are in a Visual C++ environment,
- * attempt to update the environment in all MSVCRT modules that are
- * currently loaded, to work properly with any third party libraries
- * linked against a different MSVCRT but still relying on environment
- * variables.
+ * mingw always uses MSVCRT.DLL, but if we are in a Visual C++
+ * environment, attempt to update the environment in all MSVCRT modules
+ * that are currently loaded, to work properly with any third party
+ * libraries linked against a different MSVCRT but still relying on
+ * environment variables.
*
* Also separately update the system environment that gets inherited by
* subprocesses.
*/
#ifdef _MSC_VER
typedef int (_cdecl * PUTENVPROC) (const char *);
- static struct {
+ static struct
+ {
char *modulename;
HMODULE hmodule;
- PUTENVPROC putenvFunc;
- } rtmodules[] = {
- { "msvcrt", 0, NULL}, /* Visual Studio 6.0 / mingw */
- { "msvcr70", 0, NULL}, /* Visual Studio 2002 */
- { "msvcr71", 0, NULL}, /* Visual Studio 2003 */
- { "msvcr80", 0, NULL}, /* Visual Studio 2005 */
- { "msvcr90", 0, NULL}, /* Visual Studio 2008 */
- { NULL, 0, NULL}
+ PUTENVPROC putenvFunc;
+ } rtmodules[] =
+ {
+ {
+ "msvcrt", 0, NULL
+ }, /* Visual Studio 6.0 / mingw */
+ {
+ "msvcr70", 0, NULL
+ }, /* Visual Studio 2002 */
+ {
+ "msvcr71", 0, NULL
+ }, /* Visual Studio 2003 */
+ {
+ "msvcr80", 0, NULL
+ }, /* Visual Studio 2005 */
+ {
+ "msvcr90", 0, NULL
+ }, /* Visual Studio 2008 */
+ {
+ NULL, 0, NULL
+ }
};
- int i;
+ int i;
for (i = 0; rtmodules[i].modulename; i++)
{
if (rtmodules[i].hmodule == NULL)
{
/*
- * Set to INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE so we know we have tried this one
- * before, and won't try again.
+ * Set to INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE so we know we have tried
+ * this one before, and won't try again.
*/
rtmodules[i].hmodule = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE;
continue;
else
{
/*
- * Module loaded, but we did not find the function last time. We're
- * not going to find it this time either...
+ * Module loaded, but we did not find the function last time.
+ * We're not going to find it this time either...
*/
continue;
}
/* At this point, putenvFunc is set or we have exited the loop */
rtmodules[i].putenvFunc(envval);
}
-#endif /* _MSC_VER */
+#endif /* _MSC_VER */
/*
* Update the process environment - to make modifications visible to child
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
* Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California
*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/test/regress/pg_regress.c,v 1.70 2010/02/24 01:35:14 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/test/regress/pg_regress.c,v 1.71 2010/02/26 02:01:39 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
/*
* On Windows we use -w in diff switches to avoid problems with inconsistent
- * newline representation. The actual result files will generally have
+ * newline representation. The actual result files will generally have
* Windows-style newlines, but the comparison files might or might not.
*/
#ifndef WIN32
dbname, dbname, dbname, dbname, dbname);
/*
- * Install any requested procedural languages. We use CREATE OR REPLACE
+ * Install any requested procedural languages. We use CREATE OR REPLACE
* so that this will work whether or not the language is preinstalled.
*/
for (sl = loadlanguage; sl != NULL; sl = sl->next)
* Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group
*
* IDENTIFICATION
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/timezone/pgtz.c,v 1.65 2010/01/02 16:58:16 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/timezone/pgtz.c,v 1.66 2010/02/26 02:01:39 momjian Exp $
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------
*/
"Australia/Perth"
}, /* (GMT+08:00) Perth */
/* {"W. Central Africa Standard Time", "W. Central Africa Daylight Time",
- * * * * * * * * ""}, Could not find a match for this one. Excluded for now. *//* (
+ * * * * * * * * * ""}, Could not find a match for this one. Excluded for now. *//* (
* G MT+01:00) West Central Africa */
{
"W. Europe Standard Time", "W. Europe Daylight Time",
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/tools/fsync/test_fsync.c,v 1.26 2009/11/28 15:04:54 momjian Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/tools/fsync/test_fsync.c,v 1.27 2010/02/26 02:01:39 momjian Exp $
*
*
* test_fsync.c
#define FSYNC_FILENAME "/var/tmp/test_fsync.out"
#endif
-#define WRITE_SIZE (8 * 1024) /* 8k */
+#define WRITE_SIZE (8 * 1024) /* 8k */
#define LABEL_FORMAT "\t%-30s"
buf = (char *) TYPEALIGN(ALIGNOF_XLOG_BUFFER, full_buf);
/*
- * Simple write
+ * Simple write
*/
printf("Simple 8k write timing:\n");
/* write only */
print_elapse(start_t, stop_t);
/*
- * Compare file sync methods with one 8k write
+ * Compare file sync methods with one 8k write
*/
printf("\nCompare file sync methods using one 8k write:\n");
print_elapse(start_t, stop_t);
/*
- * Compare file sync methods with two 8k write
+ * Compare file sync methods with two 8k write
*/
printf("\nCompare file sync methods using two 8k writes:\n");
print_elapse(start_t, stop_t);
/*
- * Compare 1 to 2 writes
+ * Compare 1 to 2 writes
*/
printf("\nCompare open_sync sizes:\n");
#endif
/*
- * Fsync another file descriptor?
+ * Fsync another file descriptor?
*/
printf("\nCompare fsync times on write() and new file descriptors (if the times\n");
printf("are similar, fsync() can sync data written on a different descriptor):\n");
/*
- * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/tools/ifaddrs/test_ifaddrs.c,v 1.1 2009/10/01 01:58:58 tgl Exp $
+ * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/tools/ifaddrs/test_ifaddrs.c,v 1.2 2010/02/26 02:01:40 momjian Exp $
*
*
* test_ifaddrs.c
static void
-print_addr(struct sockaddr *addr)
+print_addr(struct sockaddr * addr)
{
- char buffer[256];
- int ret, len;
+ char buffer[256];
+ int ret,
+ len;
switch (addr->sa_family)
{
}
static void
-callback(struct sockaddr *addr, struct sockaddr *mask, void *unused)
+callback(struct sockaddr * addr, struct sockaddr * mask, void *unused)
{
printf("addr: ");
print_addr(addr);
main(int argc, char *argv[])
{
#ifdef WIN32
- WSADATA wsaData;
+ WSADATA wsaData;
if (WSAStartup(MAKEWORD(2, 2), &wsaData) != 0)
{
projects / postgresql.git / commitdiff